LAND AND HOUSING CORPORATION

Reference Specifications for Housing

Construction v2.1

29 November 2021

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | dpie.nsw.gov.au

Published by NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment

dpie.nsw.gov.au

Title: Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

Subtitle:

First published: 26 May 2021

ISBN/ISSN:

Department reference number: RefSpec_01

More information

The administrator of this document is QMS Projects team. For any enquiries, please contact
[email protected].

© State of New South Wales through Department of Planning, Industry and Environment 2021. You may copy, distribute, display,
download and otherwise freely deal with this publication for any purpose, provided that you attribute the Department of Planning,
Industry and Environment as the owner. However, you must obtain permission if you wish to charge others for access to the publication
(other than at cost); include the publication in advertising or a product for sale; modify the publication; or republish the publication on a
website. You may freely link to the publication on a departmental website.

Disclaimer: The information contained in this publication is based on knowledge and understanding at the time of writing (May 2021)
and may not be accurate, current or complete. The State of New South Wales (including the NSW Department of Planning, Industry and
Environment), the author and the publisher take no responsibility, and will accept no liability, for the accuracy, currency, reliability or
correctness of any information included in the document (including material provided by third parties). Readers should make their own
inquiries and rely on their own advice when making decisions related to material contained in this publication.
 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

Preface
This reference specification is a standard specification to be used for all residential building
works except low-rise residential building works. It is used together with drawings, General
Conditions of Contract and other documents forming part of this contract.

The reference specification has been designed with a structure and format consisting of:

1. Preliminaries
2. Specification text, sections 1 to 20 incorporating:
• the main text requirements to the right of the page
• a left side column identifying additional compliance requirements
3. Schedules

Items referenced in the left sided column include:

• Australian Standards and other Codes

• All required Principal’s Authorised Person approvals and inspections
• All required certificates, warranties and guarantees

Basically the reference specification provides a simple, concise, plain English, flexible, part-
performance and part-prescriptive document designed to meet the needs and capabilities of
the NSW housing industry.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 1

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

Table of Contents
Preliminaries ................................................................................................................................. 7
P1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 7
P2 Documentation ................................................................................................................................ 8
P3 Contracting ...................................................................................................................................... 9
P4 Administration ................................................................................................................................ 10
P5 Site ................................................................................................................................................. 10
P6 Environmental Protection .............................................................................................................. 13
P7 Plant ............................................................................................................................................... 14
P8 Materials & Workmanship .............................................................................................................. 15
P9 Completion..................................................................................................................................... 17
P10 Project Handover ........................................................................................................................... 18
P11 Defects Liability Period (DLP)........................................................................................................ 18
01: Demolition ............................................................................................................................. 19
1.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................... 19
1.3 Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 19
1.4 Materials and Components ............................................................................................................ 19
1.5 Demolition ...................................................................................................................................... 20
02: Groundworks ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 22
2.2 Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3 Protection of Existing Trees ........................................................................................................... 22
2.4 Contaminants or Hazardous Materials .......................................................................................... 23
2.5 Sewer/Stormwater ......................................................................................................................... 23
2.6 Site Clearing .................................................................................................................................. 24
2.7 Site Excavations ............................................................................................................................ 24
2.8 Filling Materials .............................................................................................................................. 25
2.9 Site Preparation And Bulk Filling ................................................................................................... 26
2.10 Compaction.................................................................................................................................... 26
2.11 Restoration of Road Openings ...................................................................................................... 27
2.12 Bituminous Pavings ...................................................................................................................... 27
2.13 Retaining Walls .............................................................................................................................. 27
2.14 Completion..................................................................................................................................... 27
03: Concrete Works .................................................................................................................... 28
3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 28
3.2 Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 28
3.3 Quality and Work Practices ........................................................................................................... 28
3.4 Formwork ....................................................................................................................................... 29
3.5 Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................... 29
3.6 Concrete ........................................................................................................................................ 30
3.7 Embedments, Cores and Fixings .................................................................................................. 31
3.8 Termite Barriers ............................................................................................................................. 32
3.9 Joints ............................................................................................................................................. 32
3.10 Concrete Elements ........................................................................................................................ 33

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 2

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

3.11 Sub Base ....................................................................................................................................... 33

3.12 Underlay and Membranes ............................................................................................................. 34
3.13 Concrete Paths, Pavings, Steps and Miscellaneous Items ........................................................... 34
3.14 Parking Area and Driveway ........................................................................................................... 35
3.15 Vehicular Footpath Crossing ......................................................................................................... 35
3.16 Waterproofing System ................................................................................................................... 36
3.17 Finishes ......................................................................................................................................... 37
04: Masonry ................................................................................................................................. 42
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 42
4.2 Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 42
4.3 Quality and Work Practices ........................................................................................................... 42
4.4 Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 43
4.5 Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 44
4.6 Masonry Elements ......................................................................................................................... 46
4.7 Ventilation and Openings .............................................................................................................. 47
4.8 Damp-Proof Course ....................................................................................................................... 48
4.9 Flashings ....................................................................................................................................... 48
4.10 Termite Control and Vermin Proofing ............................................................................................ 49
4.11 Trim and Fixtures ........................................................................................................................... 49
4.12 Control Joints ................................................................................................................................. 49
4.13 Completion..................................................................................................................................... 50
05: Metalwork .............................................................................................................................. 52
5.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 52
5.2 Quality and Work Practices ........................................................................................................... 52
5.3 Structural Members ....................................................................................................................... 53
5.4 Balustrades and Handrails ............................................................................................................ 54
5.5 Sunhoods, Awnings & Privacy Screens ........................................................................................ 54
5.6 Finishes ......................................................................................................................................... 54
5.7 Fixtures and Fittings ...................................................................................................................... 55
5.8 Signage.......................................................................................................................................... 58
5.9 Workmanship and Execution ......................................................................................................... 62
06: Carpentry and Joinery .......................................................................................................... 63
6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 63
6.2 Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 63
6.3 Quality and Work Practices ........................................................................................................... 63
6.4 Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 65
6.5 Structural Elements ....................................................................................................................... 66
6.6 Flooring .......................................................................................................................................... 67
6.7 Trims .............................................................................................................................................. 68
6.8 Cupboards ..................................................................................................................................... 70
6.9 Timber Stairs ................................................................................................................................. 73
6.10 Insulation ....................................................................................................................................... 73
6.11 Finishes ......................................................................................................................................... 73
7: Doors, Windows and Hardware ............................................................................................. 76
7.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 76
7.2 Door Frames .................................................................................................................................. 76

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 3

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

7.3 Doors ............................................................................................................................................. 78

7.4 Aluminium Doorsets ...................................................................................................................... 80
7.5 Windows ........................................................................................................................................ 81
7.6 Fixtures and Fittings ...................................................................................................................... 82
7.7 Window Coverings ........................................................................................................................ 90
08: Roofing and Roof Plumbing ................................................................................................. 91
8.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 91
8.2 Quality and Work Practices ........................................................................................................... 91
8.3 Sarking, Insulation and Vapour Barrier ......................................................................................... 93
8.4 Tile Roofing.................................................................................................................................... 94
8.5 Sheet Roofing ................................................................................................................................ 94
8.6 Roof Lights / Skylights ................................................................................................................... 95
8.7 Roof Plumbing ............................................................................................................................... 96
8.8 Ventilation of Roof Space .............................................................................................................. 97
8.9 Safety Anchors/Brackets ............................................................................................................... 98
8.10 Roof Finishes Schedule ................................................................................................................. 98
09: Internal Linings ................................................................................................................... 100
9.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 100
9.2 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 100
9.3 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 101
9.4 Wall/Ceiling Trim ......................................................................................................................... 102
9.5 Sound Rated Walls/Ceilings ........................................................................................................ 103
9.6 Fire Rated Ceilings/Walls ............................................................................................................ 103
9.7 Insulation ..................................................................................................................................... 103
10: Plumbing and Sanitary Plumbing ...................................................................................... 106
10.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 106
10.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 106
10.3 Quality and work practices .......................................................................................................... 107
10.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 108
10.5 Fixtures and Fittings .................................................................................................................... 109
10.6 Accessories – Water Service....................................................................................................... 114
10.7 Heating Systems ......................................................................................................................... 118
10.8 Soil and Waste System ............................................................................................................... 121
10.9 Finishes ....................................................................................................................................... 122
10.10 Fire Prevention .............................................................................................................................. 122
10.11 Rainwater Tanks .......................................................................................................................... 125
11: Drainage .............................................................................................................................. 128
11.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 128
11.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 128
11.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 128
11.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 129
11.5 Sumps, Pits.................................................................................................................................. 129
12: Electrical Works .................................................................................................................. 131
12.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 131
12.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 131
12.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 131

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 4

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

12.4 Underground Services ................................................................................................................. 132

12.5 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 132
12.6 Electrical Distribution ................................................................................................................... 132
12.7 Wiring Installation ........................................................................................................................ 133
12.8 Accessories ................................................................................................................................. 134
12.9 Light Fittings ................................................................................................................................ 137
12.10 Master Antenna Television System, Data Cabling and Telephony ............................................ 144
12.11 Smoke Alarms ............................................................................................................................. 146
12.12 Appliances and Other Installations ............................................................................................. 148
12.13 Television System ...................................................................................................................... 152
12.14 Mechanical Ventilation ................................................................................................................ 155
12.15 Solar Photovoltaic Grid System .................................................................................................. 156
12.16 Lift ............................................................................................................................................... 156
13: Gas Service ......................................................................................................................... 158
13.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 158
13.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 158
13.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 158
13.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 159
13.5 Gas Supply .................................................................................................................................. 159
13.6 Finishes ....................................................................................................................................... 160
13.7 Fixtures and Fittings .................................................................................................................... 160
14: Plastering ............................................................................................................................ 162
14.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 162
14.2 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 162
14.3 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 165
14.4 Junctions and Trims .................................................................................................................... 166
14.5 Schedule of Plaster/Render Finishes ............................................................................................ 167
15: Tiling & Wet Area Waterproofing ....................................................................................... 168
15.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 168
15.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 168
15.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 168
15.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 170
15.5 Waterproofing Wet Areas ............................................................................................................ 170
15.6 Tiles ............................................................................................................................................. 171
15.7 Junctions ...................................................................................................................................... 172
15.8 Fixtures and Fittings .................................................................................................................... 173
15.9 Schedule of Internal Tiling Finishes ............................................................................................ 174
16: Resilient Finishes and Carpets .......................................................................................... 176
16.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 176
16.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 176
16.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 176
16.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 179
17: Glazing................................................................................................................................. 183
17.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 183
17.2 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 183
17.3 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 183

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 5

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

17.4 Glass Types Location .................................................................................................................. 185

17.5 Fixtures and Fittings .................................................................................................................... 185
18: Painting ............................................................................................................................... 186
18.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 186
18.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 186
18.3 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 186
18.4 Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 188
18.5 Surface Preparation Types .......................................................................................................... 190
18.6 Schedule of Painting .................................................................................................................... 191
19: Fencing ................................................................................................................................ 192
19.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 192
19.2 Quality and Work Practices ......................................................................................................... 192
19.3 Materials (Timber Fencing) .......................................................................................................... 192
19.4 Fence Types ................................................................................................................................ 193
19.5 Gates ........................................................................................................................................... 195
19.6 Schedule of Timber Species & Durability Ratings ......................................................................... 195
19.7 Schedule of Fences ..................................................................................................................... 195
20: Landscape Works ............................................................................................................... 197
20.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 197
20.2 Inspections................................................................................................................................... 198
20.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 198
20.4 Preparation .................................................................................................................................. 199
20.5 Planting of Trees, Shrubs, Groundcovers & Turf ........................................................................ 201
20.6 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................ 202
20.7 Edging and Walling ...................................................................................................................... 203
20.8 Paving .......................................................................................................................................... 204
20.9 Equipment, Fixtures and Furniture .............................................................................................. 206
21: Schedules............................................................................................................................ 208

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 6

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

Preliminaries
P1 General
Intention
These Preliminaries are intended to be used in conjunction with ***GC21 Conditions
of Contract and Preliminaries*** incorporating any amendments and Annexure
changes.
The Designer and Contractor’s works must comply with current standards, NCC and
legislation.
Any ambiguity, discrepancy or inconsistency found in the documents must be notified
to the Principal’s Authorised Person. Where the discrepancy/ conflict affects the
execution of the Work, request clarification before proceeding with the Work.
DEMOLITION LICENSING
Contractors are required to be properly licensed to carry out demolition work in
accordance with the Work Health and Safety Regulation 2017. Generally, the
Regulation applies to demolition work done to a building, structure or installation that
is 4 metres or more in height, being work involving mechanical felling.
1.1 INTERPRETATIONS
The following words and expressions have the meanings assigned to them except
where the context otherwise requires:
- “Approval” means approval by Principal’s Authorised Person
- “Building” means any roofed structure enclosing space and recognised as
complete and distinct entity.
- “Block” means a partially separated, recognisable entity within a structure
(building) containing one or more dwelling units.
- “Unit” means a self-contained dwelling within a multi-storey building, one above
the other. Usually, units share a common entrance and stairway (or lift), and
common open space.
- “provide” means supply and fix or supply and install as applicable.
- “Liveable Housing” (previously known as Universal) is the design of housing and
environments to be useable by all people, to the greatest extent possible, without
the need for expensive modifications or specialised design.
- “General Housing” means Housing supply not targeted to special needs tenants.
- “Easy Access” means barrier free excess to space and outdoor areas.
- “SEPP HSPD – Housing for Seniors and People with a Disability” means Housing
which meets the needs of seniors or people with disabilities
- “Principal’s Authorised Person” means Contract Administrator appointed by the
Principal as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract.
- “selection” means details of product, fixture or fitting including manufacturer, model
number, type, material, finish, colour, etc
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
ACA Australian Communications kV kilovolt
Authority

AG Australian gas codes kW kilowatt

AGA Australian gas association LPG liquefied petroleum gas

ALPG Australian liquefied petroleum gas m metre

association

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 7

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

amp ampere m² square metres

APAS Australian Paint Approval Scheme mm millimetres

AS Australian standards MPa megapascal

BCA Building Code of Australia MR moisture resistant

BASIX NSW Building Sustainability Index MS mild steel

°C degrees celsius NASH National Association of Steel Framed

Housing Inc.

CP chrome plated NATA National Association of Testing

Authorities

cts centres WHS Work Health and Safety

cu m cubic metres OIR Office of Industrial Relations

DAR dressed all round OT Occupational Therapist

DEEWR Department of Education, PVA polyvinyl acetate

Employment and Workplace
Relations

DPC damp proof coursing PVC polyvinyl chloride

RC reinforced concrete

FC fibre cement RHS rectangular hollow section

g/m² grams per square metre UPVC unplasticised polyvinyl chloride

GPO general purpose outlet/ socket W watt

outlet

HMR high moisture resistant WC water closet

kg kilogram WERS Window Energy Rating Scheme

kPa kilopascal

P2 Documentation
2.1 SITE INFORMATION
The Principal accepts no responsibility for the accuracy or comprehensiveness of
information supplied by it in respect of existing site conditions. The Principal must not
be held responsible for any interpretation or deduction made or conclusion drawn by
the Contractor from that information and the Contractor must be fully responsible for
any such interpretation, deduction or conclusion. All costs resulting from
interpretations, deductions and conclusions by the Contractor from the information
supplied by the Principal must be borne by the Contractor.
2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
Shop drawings are to fully explain the object and matter being considered for
approval. Supply in sufficient time for examination, and revision, if necessary, before
the documents are required for use. Manufacture is not to start until receipt of signed
approval of the drawings:
Approval  submit copies in triplicate to the Principal’s Authorised Person for examination.
Where necessary include additional copies for consultants.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 8

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

 examination and endorsement of shop drawings by the Principal’s Authorised

Person does not diminish the Contractor’s responsibility for preparing and
coordinating shop drawings and for ensuring that they are in agreement with the
contract documents and correct as to all relevant information
 the Principal’s Authorised Person may endorse shop drawings to indicate general or
design approval, amendments, correction, and the like, but no such endorsement
constitutes a Principal’s Authorised Person’s instruction under the contract, unless
expressly stated to the contrary
 shop drawings which are unsatisfactory are to be corrected and resubmitted by the
Contractor without variation to the contract
 the Contractor is to issue one copy of the original shop drawings and of any
amendments to all interested parties, including the Principal’s Authorised Person,
with a notification drawing attention to the amendments. Current copies are to be
kept in a binder on the site and superseded copies destroyed
 submission of ‘mark-ups’ and ‘cover notes’ on construction drawings will not be
accepted as shop drawings
 components must be noted, application to building noted with key diagrams as
applicable. Technical explanations must be appended as necessary. Drawings
must carry sufficient dimensions for manufacture and application to the building
2.3 WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
By Completion/ Practical Completion, provide work-as-executed drawings in .dwg or
.rvt format for documentation and respective BIM file for future references, and PDF
files to the same scales as the contract drawings to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
Refer to the trade sections for any additional specific requirements.

P3 Contracting
3.1 STANDARDS AND CODES
The Contractor must comply with all statutory requirements as amended.
The contract requires compliance with all relevant standards, codes including the
Building Code of Australia (and NSW variations), Australian Standards as specified
and the Land and Housing Corporation’s Component Requirements and Deemed to
Comply Product Register. The editions current as at three months before the date of
the contract.
3.2 APPROVALS AND FEES
The Contractor must obtain from public or other authorities all approvals and permits,
arrange all inspections, give all notices necessary and pay all fees and charges in
connection with the work under the Contract.
Supply Authorities: Allow for connecting all services. Refer to Trade Sections for
further requirements.
3.3 ROAD OPENINGS
Approval No road openings for services are to be made unless permission is first obtained
either from the relevant local or state Authority having jurisdiction, or, in the case of
undedicated roads, from the Principal’s Authorised Person.
Refer to GROUNDWORKS: Restoration of Road Openings.
WHS Regulation 3.4 NOTICE OF INTENTION TO COMMENCE
2011 The Contractor must issue “NOTICE OF INTENTION TO COMMENCE CON-
STRUCTION WORK”, to the SafeWork NSW as per the WHS Regulation before
starting Building Work.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 9

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

P4 Administration
4.1 SITE MEETINGS
Throughout the duration of the contract the Contractor must arrange and provide
facilities for site meetings to be attended by him, appropriate sub-contractors and by
the Principal’s Authorised Person at a frequency determined by the Principal’s
Authorised Person. The Principal’s Authorised Person will issue a record of the
meeting to the Contractor.

P5 Site
Inspection 5.1 ADJOINING PROPERTIES
Required
Joint inspection: The Contractor must arrange with the Principal’s Authorised Person
a joint inspection of any properties affected by the Building Work prior to the
commencement of the Building Work:
- prepare two (2) identical reports recording the conditions existing within the
adjoining properties including site structures, surfaces, existing fittings and
equipment, and especially structural defects and other damage or defacement.
- the reports must include drawings, written descriptions and photographs.
- Obtain written agreement of the contents of the report from affected adjoining
owners of property prior to commencement of any excavation or demolition work
- within 28 days of the inspection provide one report to the Principal’s Authorised
Person and keep the other report on site.
5.2 CONSULTATION WITH NEIGHBOURS
The Contractor shall allow in their tender price for consultation with the adjoining
owners and residents. This consultation shall include but shall not be limited to the
following:
- At least one week prior to commencement of any work on site inform the adjoining
owners and residents of the proposed work commencement, including hours of
work.
- Prior to commencement of any work that will affect adjoining owners, such as
fences, easements, sewer and drainage connections etc, give at least one week
notice to the adjoining owner/s.
- All work that affects the adjoining owners, including making good items, shall be to
the satisfaction of the adjoining owner/s and the Principal’s Authorised Person.
- Refer any disputes with the adjoining owners or residents to the Principal’s
Authorised Person.
5.3 CONTRACTOR’S SITE AREAS
The Contractor’s access onto and around the site, and use of the site for temporary
works and constructional plant, including working and storage areas, location of
offices, workshops, sheds, roads, parking, and the like, must be restricted to those
areas shown on the drawings as being the project site.
5.4 SITE SECURITY
Provide security as required to prevent unauthorised entry. The Contractor is
responsible for security of the Works and must comply with all relevant legislation.
5.5 TEMPORARY SECURITY FENCE
Provide a temporary security fence with adequate gates as follows:
height: 1800mm
type: chain wire

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 10

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

support cable 12 gauge top, central and bottom wire

backstays: to corner posts and gate
protective coating: galvanised

Remove on completion and make good.

5.6 COUNCIL PROPERTY
Inspection: Arrange for an inspection by a Council Officer before beginning any
activity on the site, to record the condition of street footpaths, kerb and gutter and
road surface.
Certificate Clearance certificate: On completion obtain a written clearance certificate from the
Required Council indicating it has no claims against the Contractor or the Principal for damage
to the street footpath, kerb and gutter or road surface. Final payment on the project
will not be made until the certificate is submitted to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
5.7 OCCUPIED PREMISES
The Principal or persons authorised by the Principal must continue in possession and
occupancy of the parts of the site and/or existing buildings as shown on the drawings,
and/or specified, or both. Comply with the following:
Notice of commencement of work: The Contractor on commencement of work will give
the Principal’s Authorised Person a minimum of 1 week’s written notice to inform affected
tenants.
Tenant amenity: Tenant amenity will not be downgraded unless agreement is reached
between the Occupants and the prior to removal of any amenity or service.
Access: secure and maintain safe access by approved means to occupied premises
for the Principal and such authorised persons as are notified to the Contractor by the
Principal’s Authorised Person, and prevent unauthorised access.
Tenant’s rights: The tenant’s rights and feelings will be respected by all tradespersons
entering the site and at no time will any involvement other than building works be
tolerated. All tradespersons and employees will carry personal identification at all times.
Security: The Contractor must maintain the existing security that is present in each unit
during work.
Comfort and safety: Arrange work in occupied or partially occupied premises to
minimise nuisance to the occupants and ensure their safety.
Protection: protect the occupants against weather, dust, dirt, water or other
nuisance by means of temporary screens or the like.
Site Cleaning: Work areas must be left clean, tidy and safe at the end of each workday.
Pedestrian hazards shall be removed from accessible areas at the end of each workday.
Common areas are to be cleaned at the end of each day.
5.8 EXISTING SERVICES
Generally: Work on existing services (such as sewer, stormwater, gas, electricity)
must be carried out to the satisfaction of the relevant Authority.
The Contractor must take all reasonable precautions to determine the location of and
protect existing services before commencing the Building Work.
If a service is required to be discontinued in order to accommodate the Building Work,
the Contractor must, at his cost, disconnect the service and render it safe to the
satisfaction of the relevant Supply Authority. If a service is required to be relocated in
order to accommodate the Building Work, the Contractor must, unless the obstruction
constitutes a latent condition, bear all costs relating to the relocation of the service
and must not be entitled to make a claim upon the Principal for delay costs arising out
of such relocation.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 11

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

Contact authorities: Where existing sewer mains and other services cross the site,
contact the relevant Supply Authority before starting any Building Work and arrange
for centre-line pegging of the sewer mains and other services. Pay all fees and
charges associated with this work. Carry out the work without interruption of services
to adjacent properties.
Damage: Where an existing service is damaged by the Contractor for any reason
whatsoever the Contractor must bear all costs for repairing the service.
Notification: Notify the Principal’s Authorised Person immediately upon the
discovery of services or obstructions not shown in the Contract Documents.
Disconnected meters: Return to the appropriate Supply Authority
5.9 NEW SERVICES
Connection of Services and Metering
Where permitted by local authority, provide separate connection of services to each
dwelling including water, gas, electricity, sewer and stormwater.
Where permitted by local authority, provide separate metering to each dwelling for
water, gas, electricity and NBN.
- Electrical plans must note the required NBN work. Contractor to complete the
design prior to construction and obtain required approvals. All installation and
connection costs are to be borne by the Contractor.
Where separate meters are not permitted for water supply, make plumbing provisions
for future metering.
5.10 APPROVALS AND FEES
Unless otherwise set out in the contract:
 A Construction Certificate is not required by the Crown.
 Do not pay Development Application fees.
 Pay all other application fees associated with construction works.
 For Water, Sewer, Electricity, Stormwater Drainage and Gas Services: Pay all
charges related to extension, modification, diversion, amplification, augmentation
of authority’s service mains required for the satisfactory completion of the project.

 Pay any contributions required under Section 94 of the EPA Act.

 For Contributions under Section 73 of Sydney Water Act 1994 No 88 (formerly
Water Board (Corporatisation) Act 1994). Do not allow for in Tender. The
contractor is to pay all fees, development charges, stamp duty, administration,
security etc as appropriate and these will be reimbursed by the Principal.
5.11 BASIX REQUIREMENTS
Meet all requirements identified in the project BASIX report for the project. The building
construction shall meet the BASIX requirements and achieve minimum 6 stars under
NatHERS/Accurate requirements.
All new dwellings must target a minimum 6 star NatHERS rating. Higher NatHERS
ratings are encouraged where cost effective. Continue to apply BASIX and best practice
Apartment Design Guide (ADG) daylighting.
AS 1170.2 5.12 TERRAIN CATEGORY
AS 4055 Structure to be designed in accordance with the terrain category of the project
location as set out in AS 4055.
5.13 SETTING OUT
Refer to General Conditions of Contract.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 12

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

Approval Setting out the Building Work: Setting out must be certified by a registered
Surveyor prior to the commencement of the Building Work. The certificate must be
submitted to the Principal’s Authorised Person prior to the commencement of the
Building Work.
Certificates Check of setout: As each building is constructed to ground floor height, obtain a
Required certificate from a registered Surveyor indicating setout and ground floor levels.
Fees: All fees payable to the registered Surveyor are to be met by the Contractor.
5.14 STORAGE ON-SITE
Store materials and equipment so as not to impede the provision of services and work
by others.
Do not use for storage or otherwise obstruct roadways including kerbs and gutters,
driveways or paths during the progress of the Works.
5.15 GUTTERS, LAYBACKS AND FOOTPATH CROSSINGS
Arrange with the local Authority and pay all fees and costs for the provision and/or
removal of gutters, laybacks and footpath crossings.
5.16 TEMPORARY FOOTPATH CLOSURE
Where necessary, seek approval of the appropriate authorities for the temporary,
partial or total closing of footpaths.
Code of Practice 5.17 POISONS AND OTHER HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
for Control of Poisons and hazardous substances are to be stored, handled and managed to meet
Workplace the requirements of SafeWork NSW. (This includes provision of Safety Data Sheets
Hazardous for hazardous substances on-site).
Substances
5.18 PROJECT SIGNAGE
Refer to project drawings. Provide and install where indicated on drawings or by
Principal’s Authorised Person

P6 Environmental Protection
DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINANTS AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The management and disposal of contaminants and hazardous materials, including
asbestos, chemicals, oils, shall be in accordance with the current relevant legislation
including:
SafeWork NSW
Work Health and Safety Act 2011
Work Health and Safety Regulation 2011 and 2017 Protection of Environment
Operations Act 1997
Protection of Environment Operations (Waste) Regulation 1997
Environmentally Hazardous Chemicals Act 1985
To AS 4361.2 LEAD BASED PAINT MANAGEMENT
The contractor shall assume, until confirmed otherwise, that all properties constructed
prior to 1970 are potentially affected by lead paint contamination.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 13

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

Lead paint assessment, preparation of surfaces, paint removal or repainting, clean up

and clearance testing upon completion of work will be undertaken using lead safe
practices in accordance with Australian Standard AS 4361.2 Guide to Lead Paint
Management; Part 2: Residential and Commercial Buildings.
Painting contractors who undertake work where there is potential lead paint hazards
shall be appropriately trained in accordance with lead safe practices.
The Contractor shall have in place Site Specific Safety Management Plan that
includes Safe Work Method Statements for lead paint management, including
disposal of all waste products. Disposal of lead paint waste shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Federal, State and local regulatory authorities including Work
Health & Safety Act 2011, Work Health and Safety Regulation 2011 and 2017, and
The Protection of the Environmental Operations Act 1997, as amended.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the preparation and implementation of
the Environmental Management Plan, if required under the Contract that shall include
appropriate handling, storage, transport and disposal of the lead waste generated.
SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL
Carry out work indicated on the drawings to avoid erosion, contamination and
sedimentation of the site, surrounding areas, and drainage systems.
DEWATERING
Keep groundworks free of water. Prevent water flow over freshly laid work.
FIRE RESTRICTIONS
Lighting of fires is prohibited unless permission has first been obtained from the
Principal’s Authorised Person.

P7 Plant
7.1 TEMPORARY SERVICES
Generally: Provide and maintain temporary services necessary for the execution of
the Works under the contract. Install such services in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant Authorities. Pay charges in connection with the
installation and use of such services.
Give two days’ notice to the regulatory Authority for inspections before connecting into
Authorities water and sewer mains. On completion, disconnect temporary services
and make good.
Code of Practice for Temporary electrical power: Temporary electrical power service must meet the
Electrical Practices SafeWork NSW requirements for power and lighting.
for Construction
Work Temporary water supply: Provide temporary water supply with not less than one
25mm outlet for water.
Temporary sewer: Provide temporary sewer connection to the sewer main where
available.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 14

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

7.2 SITE OFFICE – PRINCIPAL’S AUTHORISED PERSON

For major projects (where contract value exceeds $20m), provide an office and toilet
before any major site operations are started for use by the Principal’s Authorised
Person:
- provide a minimum office floor area of 10m²
- provide adequate air-conditioning and lighting
- service and maintain the office in good order and keep clean for the duration of the
Works
- re-locate during the Works if necessary with minimum inconvenience
- provide a table (900mm x 1200mm minimum) and four (4) chairs

P8 Materials & Workmanship

Site copies: Refer to SCHEDULES FOR STANDARDS AND CODES that are
required to be kept on site.
8.1 SAMPLES
Approval Provide samples where specified to the Principal’s Authorised Person for approval.
Refer to the specific requirements in each trade section. Items supplied must be in
accordance with the approved samples, or within a range defined by approved
samples, as determined by the Principal’s Authorised Person. Keep approved
samples in good condition on the site until Completion/ Practical Completion.
Unless specified otherwise, the minimum sizes of samples must be:
- 300mm x 300mm.
- 1 tile.
- 300mm long.
8.2 TESTING
Unless otherwise specified, any testing required by the Contract must be by an
independent Authority and approved member of the National Association of Testing
Authorities Australia (NATA).
The full cost of testing to be met by the Contractor.
8.3 CERTIFICATES, GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
Generally: Unless otherwise specified or agreed, warranties or guarantees specified
in the contract must name the Principal as warrantee and are to be obtained by the
Contractor from the warrantor and submitted to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
By Completion/ Practical Completion, supply the documentation listed in SCHEDULE
S2 (Schedule of Certificates, Guarantees and Warranties) to the Principal’s
Authorised Person.
Refer to the trade sections of the specification for requirements.
Submit two (2) sets of the documentation (original and copy) in labelled A4 size
binders suitable for filing and an electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
8.4 PROPRIETARY ITEMS
A proprietary item must be any item identified by graphic representation on the
Drawings or by naming one or more of the following: manufacturer, supplier, installer,
trade-name, brand-name, catalogue or reference number and the like.
8.5 SEALED CONTAINERS
Materials and products supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or
packages are to be brought to the site for use in the Works in the original unbroken
container or package. Broken containers & packages may be rejected.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 15

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

8.6 JOINING UP
Approval Carry out the joining of new work to existing work and any consequent cutting away,
in a manner approved by the Principal’s Authorised Person, and make good to match
existing adjacent work in all respects.
8.7 MAKING GOOD
Make good where items are removed, or affected by removals, demolition, and the
like.
8.8 SALVAGED ITEMS
Subject to the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract, materials, plant,
equipment or other things salvaged from the Works becomes the property of the
Contractor and are to be removed from the site.
8.9 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
The following materials must be prohibited from use:
- Products containing urea-formaldehyde
- Loose mineral wool insulation
- Products containing asbestos.
8.10 TIMBER INSPECTION CERTIFICATION
Certificate Upon installation of the timber materials and components, the Contractor shall provide
Required Quality Assurance Timber Certification stating that:
 All structural timbers meet the required durability classifications specified in the
Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings.
 All joinery timbers, floorboards, weatherboard linings and fencing meet the required
standards of durability, quality and finish specified in the Schedule of Timber
Species and Durability Ratings.
 All engineered timbers and components, including roof trusses have been certified
by suitably qualified structural engineers.
8.11 ALTERNATIVE METHODS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Where the contract documents include more than one method, material or brand of
equipment for a particular item, the Contractor may choose any alternative of those
specified. Substitutions must be authorised by the Principal’s Authorised Person. The
contract will not be varied for the actual method, material or brand of equipment
chosen from those specified.
8.12 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS OR MATERIALS
The Contractor may recommend alternate products or materials to those specified in
the contract documents, provided the product/ material proposed meets the same
performance criteria, colour and quality specified. The Contractor must obtain written
approval from the Principal’s Authorised Person for the proposed substitution. The
contract will not be varied as a result of the substitution.
8.13 PRE-ORDER OF MATERIALS
At the commencement of the contract the Contractor is to check and confirm
availability of specified materials and finishes.
If the specified materials and finishes or acceptable alternatives are not available, the
Contractor must advise the Principal’s Authorised Person accordingly.
The Contractor must place orders for materials and finishes at reasonable time (that
will normally be sufficient time for supplier to meet the order) prior to fixing and retain
records of placing these orders.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 16

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

8.14 MATERIALS
All materials and products for use in this contract must be new and of first quality.
Recycled materials may be used if they meet their performance and finishes
requirements and Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval is obtained in writing.
8.15 ALTERNATIVE BUILDING SYSTEMS
Alternative building systems may be used subject to Principal’s written agreement
prior to contract signing and as a consequence the building system saves expenditure
which otherwise would have occurred.
Each submission to the Principal’s Authorised Person for approval of an alternative
building system is to include:
- fully detailed structural design by the manufacturer to be certified by a practising
qualified structural engineer
- two (2) sets of manufacturer’s instructions to the Principal’s Authorised Person
including warranty
- installation to manufacturer’s instructions and certified by a practising qualified
structural engineer.
8.16 DEEMED TO COMPLY PRODUCT REGISTER
The Deemed to Comply Product Register, referred to in this specification, is available
from the following link:
https://www.facs.nsw.gov.au/download?file=330225

P9 Completion
The Contractor shall, prior to the work reaching a state of Completion/ Practical
Completion:
1. Clean all floors, windows, gutters, external areas, paved areas and thoroughfares.
2. Ease and lubricate locks and similar working parts.
3. Remove all stains and droppings of paint and mortar.
4. Label and hand over the keys.
5. Clear sewer and stormwater lines and pits.
6. Test all services, fixtures and equipment in the presence of the Principal’s
Authorised Person.
7. Remove and dispose of debris, spoil and surplus building materials from the site.
8. Leave the works clean, tidy and fit for use or occupancy by the Principal.
9. Provide all instructions for maintenance and services. (Instruction books to be left
in kitchen cupboard).
10. Provide all warranty details, certificates and work-as-executed/ as-built drawings.
Electronic version of as-built drawings is to be provided in USB in the most recent
version of AutoCAD, Revit or other program as instructed by the Principal’s
Authorised Person.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 17

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PRELIMINARIES

P10 Project Handover

Unless otherwise agreed with the Principal’s Authorised Person, handover of this
project will only be accepted on Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday of any week
(excluding public holiday).

Handover of any project will not be accepted the week before Christmas/New Year
period and handovers will recommence the second week of January.
The construction program has to consider these requirements accordingly.

P11 Defects Liability Period (DLP)

The Contractor shall be responsible for all the operational maintenance for the entire
projects’ DLP (52 weeks).
Anything that requires regular maintenance must be tested, checked and maintained
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
All the operational maintenance is to be re-certified before finalisation of the contract
and subsequent bank guarantee release. All re-certification documentation is to be
submitted at the end of DLP.
- Every operational service that was provided with certification for the issue of BCA
occupation certificate must be re-certified.
- All certification that was required to achieve BCA compliance must be re-certified
to ensure that Assets can engage with a suitable maintenance contractor with all
operational systems property maintained and in suitable state to continue this
process for Assets and/ or CHP.
Provide a comprehensive maintenance schedule for the duration of DLP including all
items specific to the project, for Principal/ Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 18

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DEMOLITION

01: Demolition
To AS 2601 1.1 General
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Contracting – Notice of intention to commence
- Demolition Licensing
EXPLOSIVES
Do not use explosives.

1.2 Submittals
Approvals
Prior to commencement of works, submit the following:
- All necessary permits, licenses, approvals and authority requirements.
- Evidence showing measures to protect individuals and property approved by
the relevant authority.
- Payment receipt/s for all required fees.
Hazardous Materials Management Plan/ Hazardous Materials Report
Prepare plan/ report in accordance with the Work Health and Safety Regulations.
Management, removal and control of asbestos and materials containing asbestos
must be in accordance with the Code of Practice published by Safe Work
Australia.
Dilapidation Report
Prior to commencement of works, prepare a Dilapidation Report which records the
To AS 2601 nature and condition of any areas or any built works adjacent to or within the area
of the works that may be affected by the demolition works.
Submit to the Principal’s Authorised Person and to each owner of each adjacent
property a copy of the part of the report/ record relating to that property and obtain
their written agreement to the contents.
The Dilapidation Report to comprise both written and photographic records.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from the demolition
works which cannot be proven to be pre-existing.
Test Reports/ Data
Existing services to be re-used must be tested for compliance with current
Australian Standards prior to returning to service. Provide test reports/ data to
verify compliance.

1.3 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice before starting demolition.

1.4 Materials and Components

Hazardous Materials or Wastes:
Hazardous materials or wastes include those defined by the NSW Office of
Environment & Heritage:
- notify the Principal’s Authorised Person immediately if any hazardous materials
Approval
or wastes are found
- dispose of hazardous materials or wastes as specified in PRELIMINARIES:
Environmental Protection – Disposal of contaminants and refuse

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 19

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DEMOLITION

ASBESTOS MATERIALS
Any dwelling constructed before 1984 may have some form of asbestos present,
e.g. wall and/or roof cladding, eaves sheeting, vinyl tiles, vermiculite surfaces and
in concrete floor slabs as formwork to sides and underside of slabs.
Where the age of the dwelling falls into this category the contractor shall assume
that the dwelling may have asbestos content and, where the presence of asbestos
is encountered, it must be treated with the following requirements:
Roofing and cladding materials must be checked for the presence of asbestos
before any such material is disturbed or replaced. All work which involves the
removal of products containing asbestos or brings persons into contact with
asbestos, must be in accordance with SafeWork NSW. A copy of licence of
persons performing the work must be submitted to the Principal’s Authorised
Person prior to commencement of this work.
If asbestos materials are encountered (i.e. in the ground) during construction
works, the Contractor must cease works to the area, isolate the area with safety
fence, and immediately notify the Principal’s Authorised Person and seek further
directions. The Principal’s Authorised Person may engage hygienist, or request the
Contractor to engage their own, to inspect, sample, test and provide safe
methodology of hazardous materials found for its safe removal.

Demolished Materials: Except for materials to be salvaged or re-used,

demolished materials are the property of the contractor and must be removed from
the site. Do not burn or bury demolished materials on the site.

To AS 2601 1.5 Demolition

Support: Provide temporary support for sections of existing building to be
retained where affected by demolition.
Protection:
Provide temporary covers as required to prevent water penetrations into building.
Protect salvaged materials from damage during work.
Protect retained work, including services/ utilities above or below ground
throughout the duration of the works.
Minimise spread of dust and airborne particles during demolition work.
Protection to be kept in place until suitable stages of the main works are
completed and damage is less likely to occur. Do not allow demolished materials
to be placed onto adjacent properties and any public place.
Security: Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Site – Site Security.
Existing services: Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Site – Existing services.
Existing trees: Refer to GROUNDWORKS: Protection of Existing Trees.
Existing footings, paving, and underground structures: Refer to GROUND-
WORKS: Site clearing.
Demolition schedule:
Refer to Drawings.
Completion:
Provide minimum of five (5) working days’ notice of completion of demolition
works. Inspect adjacent structures for any damages caused by the works.
Any damage discovered must be rectified and written acceptance must be
obtained from the owner of the damaged property. Use the Dilapidation Report to
assess the damage/s observed.
Remove temporary supports at completion of the demolition works unless required
to remain for the main works to continue.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 20

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DEMOLITION

Remove temporary supports at completion of the demolition works unless required

to remain for the main works to continue.
At completion of the works, dispose all demolished materials legally. Provide
receipt/s or necessary documentation to the Principal’s Authorised Person if
requested.
Leave the site in a clean condition on completion.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 21

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

02: Groundworks
2.1 General
BENCHMARK
Relate all levels to the survey benchmark.
FOUNDATION TEST PITS/BORE LOGS
Where foundation test pits/bore logs have been carried out:
- re-excavate pits found under footings, slabs or pavements or within the “zone of
influence”
- angle of zone of influence below horizontal:
300 for sand foundation material
450 for clay foundation material
- replace the backfill material in compacted layers. See COMPACTION.

2.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
- excavated material for use as site filling
- all finished excavations

2.3 Protection of Existing Trees

GENERAL
Protect all trees identified to be retained before starting on-site work or moving
equipment or materials on to the site. Remove the protective barriers only after
completing all the work.
Tree identification: Mark the trees to be retained using suitable means without
damage and remove on completion.
ENGAGEMENT OF ARBORIST
Engage the nominated arborist (or arborist who has prepared the original arborist’s
report for the project) to inspect and provide a written assessment on the
compliance with the recommendations contained in the arborists report.
Engage the nominated arborist at the following stages:
- prior demolition check on armouring and protection barrier
- When harmful activities undertaken such as deep excavation is undertaken
beneath dripline and/or as to that recommended by Arborist Report.
ARMOURING AND/OR FENCING
Provide to detail or if not shown:
Armouring: Wrap individual trees with hessian, wire 100 x 50 x 1500mm long
planks vertically around their trunks at maximum 50mm spacing between planks,
and wire to hold them in place.
Fencing: Protect groups of trees with a 1200mm high welded mesh fence.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 22

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

WORK UNDER TREES

To AS 4970 Preserve root systems from damage by manual methods.
Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible.
Approval Cutting roots: Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50mm diameter without the
Principal’s Authorised Person’s authority:
- use a chain saw or similar
- apply an approved bituminous fungicidal sealant to the cut surface immediately
to prevent rot or disease.
Backfilling: Backfill to excavations around tree roots in layers:
- 300mm maximum depth, compacted to a dry density similar to that of the
original or surrounding soil
- Backfill final 300mm with soil mix. Refer to LANDSCAPE WORKS: Materials.
- do not backfill around tree trunks more than 100mm above the original ground
surface
- immediately after backfilling, thoroughly water the root zone surrounding the
tree.
LOPPING
Approval Do not remove, lop or prune any branches from trees:
- engage a qualified arborist (tree surgeon) at no variation to the contract.
- ask for a list of approved arborists from the Principal’s Authorised Person.
DAMAGE
Repair any damage to tree crowns or root systems immediately:
- all work by a qualified arborist at no contract variation
- remove damaged trees as directed and replace these with mature specimens
of an approved species at no contract variation.
HARMFUL ACTIVITIES
Approval Do not carry out the following activities within 3 metres of trees without Principal’s
Authorised Person’s approval beforehand:
- mixing of concrete, parking of trucks and other vehicles
- lighting fires, storage of materials, location of offices and sheds
- prevent wind-blown materials coating trees and plants (eg, cement).

2.4 Contaminants or Hazardous Materials

If contaminants or hazardous material are found on site, the Contractor must
immediately notify the Principal’s Authorised person and seek further instructions.

2.5 Sewer/Stormwater
Provide a diversion strategy for sewer/stormwater.
As part of the diversion works, prepare a temporary solution to discharge sewage
to the sewerage treatment plant while any existing sewer line is brought offline.
Provide, maintain and operate an accepted system for surface water drainage and
sewage disposal, and for clearing away, deodorising and sterilising the same as
necessary upon completion, to the satisfaction of the Principal’s Authorised
Representative.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 23

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

2.6 Site Clearing

GENERAL
Clear and remove all stumps and other impediments, and retain good ground
cover where possible.
Remove old pavings, footings, rubbish and debris from the whole of the site.
Invasive plants: Eradicate from whole of the site blackberries, onion and oxalis
weeds, nut grass and manage any other plant declared invasive by the Biosecurity
Act 2015 No. 24. Contact local council for advice on invasive weeds and their
management". Remove by grubbing out roots and/or by poison spray if such
treatment is approved as effective.
Removal of trees and stumps: Remove trees only as noted on drawings, and
grub all stumps, including those of trees previously removed.
TOPSOIL, STORAGE AND REMOVAL
To AS 3798 Remove topsoil from those areas of the site to be built upon and/or excavated
including buildings, carparks, driveways, drying areas, paving and stockpile on the
site ready for re-spreading. Protect stockpile from contamination.
Remove 100mm minimum depth of the surface layer of the natural ground
Remove from site and replace any contaminated, hazardous topsoil. Refer to
PRELIMINARIES: Environmental Protection – Disposal of Contaminants and
Hazardous Materials.

2.7 Site Excavations

GENERAL
Excavate in material “as found”.
- backfill excavations taken below contract depth with concrete of equivalent
strength to work immediately above at no variation to the contract
- remove surplus excavated material from site
- provide a minimum clearance of 400mm to underside timber/steel floor
structures.
- remove from site any contaminated, hazardous material. Refer to PRELIM-
INARIES: Environmental Protection – Disposal of Contaminants and
Hazardous Materials.
Rock excavation:
Where rock or shale is encountered scabble surface to level and solid bearing.
Remove loose boulders and treat holes as above in backfilling.
Do not use explosives to excavate rocks.
Existing Services:
Be responsible for correctly identifying the locations of all existing services within
the site. Do not damage existing services.
Contact ‘DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG’ (free service from anywhere in Australia) to
identify location/s of underground utility services, pipes and cables.
Trenches:
Provide and maintain all necessary planking and strutting to excavations in sand or
any other loose formation:
- where the bearing capacity is affected by the removal of tree stumps, fence
posts, rock floaters, etc., excavate to solid bearing and backfill with concrete.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 24

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

To AS 2870 and AS FOOTING SYSTEMS

2159
Inspection Required Excavate as required for footings in accordance with structural engineering
drawings and to solid and level bearing.
All footings to be founded on uniform material with minimum bearing capacity as
specified in Structural Engineer’s drawings.
Piering:
Bored piers:
Provide bored piers to footing system where detailed on the drawings. All pier
holes to be dewatered, loose material removed and pier liners installed if required
prior to concreting. Contractor to keep log of all piers and verify bearing capacity
and depth.
SERVICE TRENCHES
Excavate trenches to required depths to allow regulation cover over service lines:
- maintain sides of excavations vertical
- generally maintain straight runs between access manholes, inspection points,
and the like
- grade bottoms of trenches to provide uniform bearing. Dig bell holes after
grading the trench bottom
- Keep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the laying and bedding of
the relevant service and construction of manholes and pits.
- keep trench base free of objects greater than 75mm
- keep main runs 600mm minimum clear of footings and concrete paths.
Sewer and stormwater drainage: Refer to PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMB-
ING and DRAINAGE.
Underground electrical mains: Refer to ELECTRICAL WORKS.
Underground water mains and gas lines: Refer to DRAINAGE and GAS
SERVICE.
EXCAVATIONS FOR EXTERNAL CONSTRUCTIONS
- excavate and/or fill as required for external area slabs and footings
- consolidate ground under all paths, pads or paved areas.
EXISTING FOOTINGS
Maintain support to existing footings as required to ensure integrity of existing
buildings.
CERTIFICATE
Certificate Required Provide a practising structural Engineer’s Certificate for bearing pressure of
foundation material.
To AS 3798
2.8 Filling Materials
GENERAL
Approval Provide filling free from organic matter, from soil recovered from the site
excavations or imported onto the site from an approved source.
Filling must be in accordance with Engineer’s documentation.
Do not use hazardous, aggressive or unstable fill materials.
To AS 3798

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 25

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

FILLING TYPES
Hardcore fill:
Fill with hardcore, made up of broken brick or stone, not larger than 75mm gauge.
Crushed rock fill:
Fill with crushed igneous rock, not larger than 40mm gauge with minimum clay
content.
Granular fill:
Fill with loose granular fill with minimum clay content.

2.9 Site Preparation And Bulk Filling

AREAS UNDER CONSTRUCTION WORKS
Where cut and fill is required under the building areas, carparks, driveways and
pavings:
- carry out filling to comply with Engineer’s drawings and Local Council
requirements
- grade area to solid and undisturbed bearing before filling
Fill in layers not exceeding 200mm loose thickness and each layer compacted.
AREAS OTHER THAN THOSE UNDER CONSTRUCTION WORKS
Filling is to be clean sand/loam fill taken from site excavations, and clean imported
To AS 3798 fill.
Imported fill:
- is to be a friable, sandy loam
- comprise not less than 65% sand and not more than 15% silt and clay
- to have a pH between 5.5 to 6.5.
GRADES AND FALLS
Carry out grading and filling of site to finished levels on drawings:
- grade site to fall from buildings and paths, having a fall of 1:100 out at least one
metre from the building
- maximum slope for grassed areas is 1:4 (25%) and mowable.
Backfilling: Backfill as required and consolidate to level of surrounding area.
Batters: Cut and fill as required to banks and retaining walls to form batter.
FINISHED TOPSOIL AREAS
Fill in with approved topsoil. Refer to LANDSCAPE WORKS – Materials.
FINISH LEVELS
Grade site so that grassed and planting areas finish flush with paths and paving, or
as detailed.

2.10 Compaction
To AS 1289, AS GENERAL
2870 * provide compaction to filled areas in accordance with Engineer’s drawings
* under buildings, carparks, driveways and paving and within zone of influence
of footings (except for loose granular filling used as formwork) to 98% minimum
dry density ratio
* over other areas including loose granular filling used as formwork to 85%
minimum dry density ratio.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 26

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GROUNDWORKS

SUPERVISION AND TESTING

Arrange and pay all costs for the site filling and compacting to be supervised by a
qualified geotechnical engineer:
- tests to be undertaken by a NATA registered laboratory
- provide 2 copies of test results to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
Rejection:
if compacting is not up to the standard specified:
* carry out further compacting uniformly over the whole area until the specified
standard is achieved
* provide a further series of tests at the Contractor’s expense.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Provide certificate from practising structural engineer for compaction of fill.

2.11 Restoration of Road Openings

DEDICATED ROADS
No road pavement, shoulder or footpath must be opened until the written
permission of the relevant local or state Authority controlling the road has been
obtained:
* comply with the requirements of the Authority in all respects
* pay all fees and charges made by and due to the Authority.
Approval PRIVATE ROADS
No road openings are to be made without written approval.

To AS 3727 2.12 Bituminous Pavings

AS 2150 Where bituminous pavings are required, all work must be carried out in
accordance with AS 3727.

2.13 Retaining Walls

Certificate Required All retaining walls over 600mm high must be designed by a practicing structural
engineer and certified as structurally adequate on completion by that engineer.

2.14 Completion
When building works and landscaping are completed:
* remove all building debris, excess fill and other waste matter
* clean underfloor areas
* clean street frontage paths
* clean nature strips and kerb.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 27

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

03: Concrete Works

\

3.1 General
3.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice for the Sydney Metropolitan Area and 96 hours for jobs
elsewhere so that inspection can be made of the following:
* film underlay or membrane installed on base
* completed formwork
* reinforcement fixed in place. For reinforcement inspection all embedded items,
cores, etc., must be in place
* placing of concrete
* stripping of formwork.

3.3 Quality and Work Practices

To AS 3600 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Certificate Required For all structural concrete, carry out assessment by sampling, slump and
compression tests. The full cost of testing to be met by Contractor:
* prepare specimens using standard cylinders
* arrange testing by an NATA registered laboratory.
For architectural quality concrete finishes, provide the following samples for
acceptance by the Principal’s Authorised Person:
* Minimum six (6) sample discs showing the range of concrete mixes/ colours
available for use on the project.
* Nominal 500mm x 500mm sample of each type of architectural quality off-form
and worked concrete finish using the proposed formwork, concrete mix and
surface treatments.
Slip Resistance Testing:
To AS/NZS 4586 * Pedestrian surfaces must be tested and classified for slip resistance in
accordance with statutory requirements and building code.
* Provide slip resistance test certificates to confirm compliance with slip
resistance requirements.
* Testing to be undertaken by a registered testing laboratory.
Marking:
* date and mark each sample and keep a record of the location and slump test
results
* cure samples and then forward to an approved testing laboratory with
instructions to crush test at 28 days.
To AS 3600 Rejection of concrete:
* remove rejected concrete from the site
* rejection costs must be at the Contractor’s expense.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Provide a practicing Structural Engineer’s certificate to the Principal’s Authorised
Person for reinforcement of all structural elements.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 28

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

3.4 Formwork
To AS 3610, GENERAL
AS 3610.1 * all formwork is to be approved and approval does not relieve the Contractor for
AS 2327.1 its sufficiency
Approval * design and construct formwork so that concrete when cast in the forms, has the
dimensions, shape, location and surface finish required by the specification
* provide temporary openings at the base of column and wall forms to make
cleaning and inspection before placing the concrete.
To AS 3610, DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
AS 3610.1 Table Formed surfaces
3.3.2 Strength
To AS 3600
To AS 3610, FORMED SURFACE FINISH
AS 3610.1 * Class 2 for all external and internal off-form concrete
* Class 4 for surfaces to have thick applied finishes after preparation
* Class 5 for totally concealed areas (eg. Footings)
To AS 3610 * evaluation and/or repair.
DISPLACEMENT BEFORE STRIPPING
If formwork is displaced during concreting or within the period specified for the
retention of formwork:
* remove concrete between such limits as directed
* form construction joints and reconstruct the section of work after the formwork
has been strengthened and adjusted.
To AS 3600, AS STRIPPING OF FORMWORK
3610, AS 3610.1 Remove all timber formwork.
Vertical forms:
- Remove formwork that does not support the weight of concrete from faces of
beams, walls and columns not less than accumulative 24 hours after placing
concrete.
PREMATURE LOADING
Do not erect any permanent building component or applied load while the structure
is supported by formwork.
Do not erect masonry walls or other brittle elements on beams and slabs while
they are still supported on formwork.
Certificate Required
3.5 Reinforcement
To AS/NZS 4671 GENERAL
Provide Mill Certificates.
To be certified by Australian Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steel (ACRS)
Ductility grade: Refer to Structural Engineer’s drawings
Surface condition: Free of loose mill scale, rust, oil, grease, mud or other materials
which would reduce the bond between reinforcement and concrete.
REJECTION
Reinforcements not readily identifiable as to grade and location will be rejected
and removed immediately from the site.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 29

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

POSITIONS AND FIXING

Accurately position and secure reinforcement against displacement:
* supported at correct height on approved steel chairs
* provide metal or plastic plates under each support to prevent damage to water-
proofing membranes, vapour barrier, etc.
To AS 3600, REINFORCEMENT COVER
AS 2870 Maintain clear concrete cover.
WELDING
If welding of reinforcement is proposed, provide details to Structural Engineer for
approval.

3.6 Concrete
GENERAL
To AS 3600 Provide concrete with the properties specified and/or indicated on structural
engineering drawings:
To AS 1379 * order concrete
Approval * obtain approval of ready-mixed concrete source
* completely discharge, place and compact ready-mixed concrete in its final
position in the forms within 90 minutes of the introduction of the cement to either
the water, the aggregate, or the mixer
* do not drop concrete from a height of more than 1200mm, or throw into position
* a copy of all dockets for concrete must be marked with compressive strength
and slump and given to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
Characteristic strength of concrete:
Refer to structural engineering drawings.
TEMPERATURE OF MIX
The temperature of concrete on delivery is to be between the following limits:
Outdoor shade temperature Concrete temperature
less than 5o 18oC – 32oC
5oC – 32oC 10oC – 32oC
32oC – 38oC maximum 35oC
over 38oC concrete not to be poured
* do not use calcium chloride, salts, chemicals, or other materials to lower the
freezing point of concrete
* do not allow frozen materials or ice to enter the mix.
To AS 3600 PLACING OF CONCRETE
Do not place concrete until all reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes anchors,
hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely and properly
fastened in their proper place and positions.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 30

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

Clean formwork:
before placing concrete:
* remove all debris, dust, stains and the like from the forms and
* the forms are to be thoroughly wetted, oiled or treated with a suitable form-
releasing agent.
Continuity of supply: in no circumstances is partly hardened concrete to be
placed in the work.
Continuity of placement: place concrete continuously so that each layer is
blended into the proceeding one by the compaction process.
Compaction: compact all concrete with mechanical vibrators of the immersion
type:
* avoid over-vibration which can cause segregation
* do not rest active vibrator against reinforcement or formwork.
Times of laying: place all concrete during daylight and the work is not to be
started unless it can be completed in daylight.
Approval PUMPING OF CONCRETE
Pumping equipment is to be approved.
Slump: pumped concrete is to be 75mm slump at the nozzle.
CURING
To AS 3600 Keep the concrete in a damp condition, at a reasonably constant temperature for
AS 3799 at least the first seven (7) days by:
* covering with an impermeable membrane held down with sand kept thoroughly
wet
* ponding or continuous sprinkling with water (moist-curing)
Approval
* use of curing compound is to be approved.
WET AREA FLOORS
Unless otherwise detailed, set down the concrete slab to all bathroom/laundry/WC
areas. Evenly grade the surfaces of these areas to achieve maximum 50mm set
down below the general concrete floor slab level at the perimeter and provide a
minimum fall 1:80 from the set down perimeter to the main shower floor waste
outlet. Prepare surface to a trowelled finish as required for waterproofing system.
Refer to TILING AND WET AREA WATERPROOFING – Waterproofing wet areas.

3.7 Embedments, Cores and Fixings

GENERAL
To AS 3600 Installation of pipes, conduits, fittings, core holes, and the like:
* provide cases or sleeves as required for various trades
* leave holes or pockets for pipe balustrading and other fixtures
* other embedments including anchor bolts, fixings and the like.
STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
Do not cut or displace reinforcement or cut hardened concrete to permit the
installation of embedded items.
PROTECTION OF FIXINGS
All fixings for embedment or insertion into concrete:
* are to be galvanised
* grease threads for protection during concreting.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 31

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

3.8 Termite Barriers

GENERAL
Provide termite barriers to:
* perimeters of concrete slabs on ground or suspended concrete floors in
proximity to ground
* all penetrations through slabs and to all concrete joints in slab
Use termite shielding (ant capping) for all accessible suspended floors. Refer to
MASONRY: Termite control and vermin proofing for termite shielding.
Allow set down for visual inspection.
Termite protection systems must take into consideration requirements for
accessibility.
Installation:
* installation to details and manufacturer’s further recommendations
* installed by accredited NSW installers
Warranty Required * provide system and product warranty.

Termite Barriers
The following systems are approved for use:
Stainless Steel Mesh Barrier - Termi-Mesh Aust P/L
Graded Stone Barrier - Granitgard P/L
ARMOUR-THOR Aluminium - Ensystex Australasia P/L

Combined physical barrier with - Kordon Termite Barrier (Bayer -

chemically treated internal core CropScience Pty Ltd)
- The White Ant Company
- FMC Australasia P/L

Termite Barrier Notice

To AS 3660.1 Provide a durable notice, permanently fixed in a prominent location to BCA
Volume 1 Part B1.4(i)(ii) and AS 3660.1 Appendix A.

3.9 Joints
To AS 3600 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
* construction joints not indicated on drawings must not be made
* joints in columns are to be made at the underside of the floor
* joints in slabs are to be made in areas of minimum stress, which is at a distance
of one-quarter to one-third of span
* all construction joints must be truly horizontal or vertical.
* Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints
Joint preparation:
* roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface
* remove loose of soft material, free water, foreign matter
* dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete and coat with a
bonding agent.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 32

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

CONTROL JOINTS
Form control joints in slabs where shown on drawings:
CONTACT JOINTS
Provide contact joints in positions shown on drawings and where slabs abut
masonry.
SLIP JOINTS
Provide slip joints between concrete slabs and load bearing masonry using
separation strip as specified in Structural Engineer’s drawing.

3.10 Concrete Elements

GENERAL
To AS 2870 For concrete elements not detailed.
FOOTINGS FOR AREA LIGHTS
Provide for type of light as scheduled.
* allow for conduit within concrete.
CONCRETE BASES
Bitumen coat base of any metal support post. Set each post in concrete 125mm
minimum thick all-round pipe pedestal, full depth and extending 100mm above
ground and neatly splayed off.

 Water heater: Flush with adjoining ground level

 Stand pipes: Finish flush with adjoining ground level

3.11 Sub Base

RAFT SLABS
(Slabs with haunched perimeter beams and internal ribs as footings). Fill to 50mm
minimum thickness with compacted crushed rock fill. Blind over with 50mm
thickness of sand.
- Wet sand before laying underlay/membrane.
SLABS
(Slabs supported by brick perimeter and intermediate walls). Fill with loose
granular fill and blind over with 50mm sand where height of slab soffit above
prepared site level does not exceed 600mm.
SLAB INSULATION
Provide where shown on the drawings and noted in Section J/ Basix. Comply with
NCC and the relevant standards.
CARPARKS AND DRIVEWAYS
Provide 50mm minimum thickness of compacted crushed rock fill immediately
under concrete carpark and driveway slabs.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 33

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

3.12 Underlay and Membranes

To AS 2870 GENERAL
* lap joints 200mm and seal with pressure sensitive tape
* minimum thickness of 0.2mm
* extend underlay under internal beams, channel drains, etc.
* lap over damp-proof course of internal walls, and carry up face of slab edges
* turn up around columns, pedestals, pipes, and the like
* provide under control joints an additional layer of underlay extending 300mm
beyond control joint on each side.

3.13 Concrete Paths, Pavings, Steps and

Miscellaneous Items
GENERAL
Conform with street alignment and levels of Council footpaths as determined by
Approval Local Council:
Paving grades: maximum gradient for paths 1:20 and 1:14 for ramps.
To AS1428.1 Paths:
AS 3727 * paths to be minimum 75mm thickness (where ground is classified as reactive –
highly reactive provide 100mm thickness).
* lay in sections 900mm long and provide control joints between sections
* run clean tooled joint at all junctions and round off all outer free edges
* If width between boundary and dwelling is less than 1500mm provide full width
paving.
* Where new paths are joining existing or new paths, driveways etc. – provide a
dowelled reinforcement joint to reduce differential settlement.
Steps:
* treads pitched forward at 1% to drain surface water
* provide vertically splayed risers with non-projecting bevelled nosings
* provide 25mm rounding to nosings of all treads
* provide two (2) 25mm wide carborundum strips to all steps in common areas.
Provide strips for the full length of treads cast in-situ and fixed to manufactures
instructions.
Tactile Surface Indicators:
Where indicated on the drawings and as mentioned in Access Consultant’s report,
provide tactile surface indicators to comply with BCA (volume 1) D3.8 and AS
1428.1. Preference is for these indicators to be purpose made precast concrete or
tile set flush in the pathway.
CONCRETE PAVERS, EDGING AND THE LIKE
Refer to LANDSCAPE WORKS.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 34

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

3.14 Parking Area and Driveway

GENERAL
Construct parking areas and driveways to the extent indicated on drawings:
* design for vehicles up to 3 tonne gross or as shown on Structural Engineer’s
Drawings.
* finish joints and edges as for paths
* all vehicular pavement to be concrete kerbed unless otherwise indicated
* open carparking spaces to be line marked, identified and numbered
* provide minimum 1:100 fall away from building to drainage outlets with no
ponding.
* provide wheel stop to each car space and bollard to the adjacent access area
of any accessible parking space.

3.15 Vehicular Footpath Crossing

DEDICATED ROADS
Arrange with local Council to construct, or allow to construct to Council
requirements, the whole of vehicular footpath crossings (including layback gutter
crossing where same is required) and making good of adjoining work disturbed by
laying of crossing.
Local Council to construct: where the Contractor arranges with local Council to
construct, the Contractor is responsible for:
* ascertaining the price levied by the relevant Council to carry out and to complete
the whole of this work, and to include that cost together with required on-cost,
profit margin and all fees and charges required by Council
* paying all costs for the above work and, upon completion
* submitting evidence to the Principal’s Authorised Person that these works have
been paid for in full
* irrespective of the work being carried out by Council, the Contractor is
nevertheless responsible for the safekeeping and maintenance in a damage-
free condition of such crossing until Completion/ Practical Completion.
Contractor to construct to Council’s requirements: the Contractor is
responsible for:
* paying all necessary costs and fees, and obtaining all necessary Council
requirements. No variation cost will be allowed
* submitting evidence to the Principal’s Authorised Person on completion that the
works have been completed to the satisfaction of the Council.
PRIVATE ROADS
Construct concrete vehicular crossing including layback gutter crossing where
required, across full width of footpath of same thickness as carpark.
Finish: finish to a non-slip floated finish and tool edges as specified for paths.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 35

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

Approval
3.16 Waterproofing System
GENERAL
Refer to drawings.
Provide a proprietary waterproofing system to below ground areas:
To AS 3500.3.1
* retaining walls, and basement parking areas of a type to suit the situation
* dryness test to substrate
* prepare wall surface by removing projections and loose material, fill
gaps/cracks and void areas with a compatible filler or concrete mix, clean
surface free of dust and contaminants
* protect the membrane after installation with a laminated/extruded polystyrene
foam protection board with shiplapped edges adhered to the membrane
* provide 30mm thick drainage cell panels wrapped in geo-fabric to whole of wall
surface finishing 75mm below finished ground level.
* provide subsoil drainage to collect ground water seepage and prevent water
build up behind walls and under floor connected to the stormwater drainage
system
* backfill with 20mm normal size screen washings to the underside of the bases
of slabs and pavements or to within 75mm of the finished surface of unpaved
areas.
Provide a proprietary waterproof system to above ground external areas:
To AS 4654.1,
* planters, decks, balconies, external opening doors, roofs and parapets
AS 4654.2
* provide membrane upturns at external areas (e.g. balconies, decks, roofs, etc.)
above the anticipated maximum water level resulting from the exposure to
rainfall and wind in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard. Confirm
the suitable height with a qualified Hydraulic Engineer.
To AS 4654.1-2012 Waterproofing membranes for external above-ground use - Materials.
To AS 4654.2-2012 Waterproofing membranes for external above-ground use - Design and
installation.
Installation:
Guarantee Required * Applicator and Contractor are to comply with building inspections, warranties
and certification.
* Installation of waterproofing to be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations
* Waterproofing is to be installed by applicators accredited by manufacturer
* provide a 20 year guarantee for materials and quality of workmanship.
Testing:
To ASTM D5957 Flood test areas after waterproofing is completed.
Perform regular visual inspection of adjacent surfaces, and the underside of the slab
where applicable, for moisture and leaks and record results for each area. There
shall be no evidence of water/leaks from the visual test.
Where leaks have occurred, propose remedial measures and obtain acceptance
from the Principal’s Authorised Person.
Rectify the defective area using the method accepted by the Principal’s Authorised
Person and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Repeat the test until the rectified area has shown no leakage for a period of seven
days. Do not allow further works/activities on the areas being tested during this
period.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 36

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

Certification:
Provide certificate to the Principal’s Authorised Person for the completed
waterproofing, for each membrane type and area, stating that the works have been
carried out and tested in accordance with the requirements of the Specification and
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Certificates are to be signed by the applicator/installer and Contractor.

3.17 Finishes
TOLERANCES
Tolerance classes
Determine tolerance classes using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface
in any direction.
Tolerances class table
Class Measurement Maximum deviation (mm)
A 3 m straight edge 3
B 3m straight edge 6
C 600mm straight edge 6
Screeding
Finish slab surfaces by approved means to finished levels, to tolerance Class B.
FINISHING METHODS
Non-slip floated finish
After screeding and as soon as the surface water has disappeared, consolidate
and float with a wood or cork faced float to a uniform, smooth granular texture free
of high or low spots, and to even falls indicated or directed.
Machine-floated finish
Finish the screeded surface with approved power-driven equipment to a uniform
smooth texture. Hand-float in locations inaccessible to the machine-float.
Trowelled finish
Prepare surface as for “Non-slip floated finish”:
* after floating, trowel to a smooth surface free of trowel marks. When surface
has hardened sufficiently carry out final trowelling
* the finished surface is to be free of any trowel marks, and is to be uniform in
texture and appearance
* on surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient
magnitude to show through floor coverings are to be removed by grinding.
Non-slip trowelled finish
Prepare as for “Trowelled finish”:
as surface “goes-off”, sprinkle on Grade 60 carborundum grains at the rate of 1kg
per square metre evenly distributed over all surfaces
lightly trowel carborundum into topping
at completion all non-slip surfaces must have an even visual finish with
carborundum being evident.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 37

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

Steel trowel finish

After machine-floated finish when surface has hardened sufficiently produce the
final consolidated finish free of trowel marks and uniform texture and appearance
using steel hand trowels.
Wood float finish
Produce the final finish using a wood float.
Broom finish
As per trowelled finish. Use boom finish in lieu of final trowelling.
Sponge finish
After machine floating, obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface
using a damp sponge
Exposed aggregate finish
Remove the vertical face forms while the concrete is green. Wet the
surface and scrub using stiff fibre or wire brushes, using clean water freely, until
the surface film of mortar is mechanically removed, and the aggregate uniformly
exposed. Do not use acid etching. Rinse
Polished finish
After trowel finish, grind the cured surface of the concrete to expose course
aggregate.
COLOURED CONCRETE
* colour to be added to concrete for the full thickness of the slab
* material is to be an approved synthetic inorganic oxide, mixed in the proportion
of 2kg of oxide to each 43kg of cement
* finished colour is to be uniform for all sections of the work.
STENCIL PATTERNED CONCRETE
Proprietary treatment providing integral coloured and stencil patterned surface to
in situ paving and ground slabs where shown on the drawings or scheduled.
Stencil: Apply proprietary stencil design to the concrete surface and align all
areas of the pattern correctly.
Colour and Pattern:
Colour hardener: to be added to the surface of the concrete
* Application Rate - 3.0kg/m2
* Compressive Strength - 80 Mpa to top coat
Completion: Remove the stencil so as not to damage the surface and remove left
over debris with a mechanical blower
TOPPINGS
- clean substrate, remove projections, fill voids, roughen hardened concrete by
scabbling to expose aggregate.
- wash area, keep wet for 2 hours prior to laying topping
- place topping on wet slurry
- lay topping mix in 2 equal layers if over 50mm thick
- prevent uneven drying out and protect from sun and wind
- keep topping moist by covering with polythene film for minimum of 7 days

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 38

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

JOINTS
- Provide movement joints over joints in structure, at junctions between substrates,
to divide large areas and at perimeter of the floor
- Joints to be right through topping to substrate
- Seal joint to a depth of 6mm

SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES

The following shall apply unless otherwise shown on drawings

ITEMS MATERIAL/FINISH/ SELECTION/TYPE

REQUIREMENT

Vehicle Crossing To Local Authority Concrete

Requirements

Kerb & Gutter To Local Authority Concrete

Requirements

Public Footpath To Local Authority Concrete

Requirements

Road Shoulder To Local Authority If required – refer to drawings

Requirements

½ Width Road To Local Authority If required – refer to drawings

Requirements

Road Reconstruction To Local Authority If required – refer to drawings

Requirements

Driveway Reinforced concrete Darker coloured concrete

(broom finish)

Parking Areas Reinforced concrete Darker coloured concrete

(broom finish) (alternate colour to driveway)

Paths Reinforced concrete (broom Light coloured concrete

finish)
If width between boundary
and dwelling is less than
1500mm provide full width
paving.

Drying Areas Reinforced concrete Coloured concrete

(broom finish)

Letterboxes Reinforced concrete Coloured concrete

(broom finish)

Recycle Areas Reinforced concrete (steel Coloured concrete

trowel finish)

External stairs Reinforced concrete Coloured concrete

(broom finish)
Provide carborundum
strips to stair treads

Basement floor Reinforced concrete Natural

(machine -floated finish)

Ground floor Reinforced concrete Natural

(trowelled finish)

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 39

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CONCRETE

Upper level floors Reinforced concrete Natural

(trowelled finish)

Verandah and ground Reinforced concrete Natural

level covered walkways (trowelled finish)

Ground level uncovered Reinforced concrete (non- Natural

paved areas slip trowelled finish)

Upper level balconies Reinforced concrete (non- Natural

and walkways slip trowelled finish)

Stairs Reinforced concrete (steel Natural

trowel finish)
Provide carborundum
strips to stair treads

Store Rooms Reinforced concrete (non- Natural

slip trowelled finish)

Garages Reinforced concrete (steel Natural

trowelled finish)

TACTILE GROUND SURFACE INDICATORS

Provide tactile ground surface indicators to common areas where shown on the
drawings.

CONCRETE FLOOR TREATMENT REQUIREMENT

* Concrete paths, driveways, parking areas, stairs, floors, porches, verandahs
etc. to have a slip resistance to current Australian Standards
* Slip rating of R11 or P4 and pendulum test score of W for Wet areas and
external areas
* Slip rating of R10 or P3 for all other areas
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 5 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 40

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

04: Masonry
To AS 3700/ AS
4773.1 and AS
4.1 General
4773.2
MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP

Inspection Required 4.2 Inspections

Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:
- damp-proof courses
- bottoms of cavities after cleaning out
- bottoms of core holes before grouting
- control joints ready for insertion of joint filler

4.3 Quality and Work Practices

To AS 4773.1
GENERAL
AS4773.2
- do not mix or change masonry type laid up from course to course
AS/NZS 4455.1,
AS/NZS 4455.2, - lay bricks on a full bed of mortar and ensure joints are completely full
AS/NZS 4455.3 - joints must be 8mm minimum to 10mm maximum thick
- for brickwork 230mm thick and over, grout each course
Aging of Bricks and Concrete:
- Minimum age of clay bricks: 42 days
- Minimum age of concrete supports: 28 days
Wetting:
Clay bricks - wet well before laying. Soak well in dry and arid regions before
laying.
Calcium silicate, and concrete bricks and blocks - keep dry before laying.
Brick Rod:
76mm high units 7 courses to 600mm
90mm high units 6 courses to 600mm
190mm high units 3 courses to 600mm

Bond Pattern:
Single leaf walls - build in stretcher bond.
Retaining walls - build in “English” bond or as detailed.
Setout
Cutting and set-out: Set out masonry with joints of uniform width and the minimum
cutting of masonry units.
Perpends
General: Keep perpends in alternate courses vertically aligned and fill them
completely with mortar.
Wall chasing
Make holes and chases required in masonry walls so that the structural integrity of
the wall is maintained. Do not chase walls nominated as fire rated or acoustic.
To AS 3700/ AS Parallel chases or recesses on opposite faces of a wall: Not be closer than
4773.1 and AS 600 mm to each other.
4773.2

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 42

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

FACE WORK
- distribute the colour range of bricks evenly to prevent colour concentrations
- keep perpends in alternate courses vertically aligned
- provide face work one full course below finished ground level
CLEANING
Cleaning of masonry shall be carried out prior to installation of roof cladding,
fascias and guttering.
Clean facework strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, as
suitable for the brick type.
Clean masonry progressively to prevent damage as the work proceeds. Clean
facework to remove mortar smears, stains, discolouration, and the like.
* do not use excessive water pressure that will damage joint finish or brickwork.
SAMPLE PANEL
Approval Construct a sample panel 1200 x 600mm of each type of facework. An approved
panel can be incorporated into the works if suitably located. Otherwise remove
before completion of the works.
FINISHING JOINTS
Joints
Externally: Tool to give a dense water-shedding finish.
Internally: If wall is to be plastered, do not rake more than 10 mm to give a key.

Ironed Joints: Use a 15mm jointer to iron joints 5mm maximum deep.
* where exposure class bricks are nominated use only ironed joints.
Raked Joints: Rake joints 5mm deep and iron smooth. Use a wheel type, rolling,
raking tool. Re-pack joint where required.
Flush Joints: Cut mortar to finish flush with face of masonry and compact surface
where exposed externally.
Cut and Struck Joints: Cut joints flush to the bottom of the joint and 2mm behind
the face at the top of the joint.
Concealed Work: As for flush joints.
BAGGING
Cut joints flush and apply mortar to the facework with a hessian bag or similar. Fill
irregularities but leave the minimum possible amount of mortar on the masonry
face.

4.4 Materials
MASONRY UNITS
Clay Bricks: Hard, sound, well burnt, standard bricks of even size and shape with
To AS/NZS 4455.1 true arrises.
AS/NZS 4455.3 Calcium Silicate Bricks: “Special Face” grade for facework and “Render Grade”
for non-face work.
Concrete Masonry Bricks:
Concrete Masonry Blocks: Grade 123.
Alternative Systems: Submit design by a practising Structural Engineer for
approval.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 43

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

To AS/NZS 4455.1 Exposure class bricks: use exposure class bricks in areas subject to salt
Approval exposure and below damp course level.
Obtain Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval for type of brick.
MORTAR MATERIALS
To AS 3700 Sect. 2/ Grey Cement: Type GP, general purpose Portland cement.
AS 4773.2/ AS 3972 White Cement: Type GP, with iron salt content not exceeding 1%.
Sand: Fine aggregate with low clay content and free from efflorescing salts.
Approval Additives: Do not use additives unless approved. Use strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
To AS 3700/ AS MORTAR MIXES
4773.1 and AS
4773.2
Class Application Cement:Lime:Sand mix

M1 internal protected walls, mortar in fireplaces 0:1:3 (lime mortar)

M2 general purpose work above damp proof 1:2:9 or 1:3:12

course

M3 footings and masonry below damp-proof 1:1:6 or 1:0:5 plus water

courses; dwarf and fender walls; sills; piers: thickener (methyl cellulose)
steps; calcium-lime and concrete masonry
units; reinforced masonry; general purpose
work in or near coastal areas

M4 retaining walls; 75mm masonry; all masonry from 1:0:3 to 1:0.25:3 or

fences on boundary alignments 1:0.5:4.5 or 1:0:4 plus water
thickener (methyl cellulose)

Mixing: Machine-mix mortar and use immediately. Do not re-temper mortar.

Approval Coloured Mortar: Colour mortar by adding approved oxide to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
To AS 3700/ AS
4773.1 and AS
4.5 Accessories
4773.2 WALL TIES
AS 2699.1
Wall ties are to be spaced at 600mm centres (max.) both vertically and horizontally
in wall panels without openings.
Around openings in the wall space ties at an average of 300mm centres (max.)
and at 300mm centres between brickwork and bearers or floor joists running
parallel to the brick veneer wall ( to resist wind uplifting of framing).
Set ties to slope downwards towards the external leaf and embedded a minimum
of 50mm into the mortar joint, with the other end secured to the frame.
To AS 2699.1 Wall Tie Category:
* Use medium duty galvanised steel with R2 corrosion resistance rating for E2
exposure
* Use medium duty 316 stainless steel with R3 corrosion resistance rating for E3
exposure
* Note: Light duty wall ties are not permitted
FLEXIBLE TIES
Ties or anchors required to extend across control joints shall transfer the forces
necessary to maintain the stability of the masonry without impairing the
effectiveness of the joint.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 44

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

To AS 1684 PLATE FIXING

Fix timber wall plates to masonry by either straps or bolts.
BED JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Provide galvanised woven wire mesh or welded wire:
- reinforcement width equal to wall leaf, except less 15mm cover from external
exposed surface of mortar joints
- lap 450mm at splices, fold and bend at corners (so that the longitudinal wires are
continuous), and stop 200mm short of control joints.
Placement:
- in the third bed joint above floor level
- at vertical spacings not exceeding 500mm
- in the second bed joint from the top of the wall
- in the first two bed joints above and below openings, or above and below head
and sill flashings to openings.
To AS 3700 Sect. 6/ REINFORCED MASONRY
AS 4773.1 and AS Designation: Masonry required to be strengthened with embedded steel
4773.2 reinforcement (other than bed joint reinforcement) is designated reinforced
masonry.
Cleaning Core Holes: In blockwork use purpose-made cleanout blocks or
machine cut a cleaning hole at the base of each reinforced core, located on the
side of the wall which is to be rendered or otherwise concealed. After cleaning out
has been inspected and approved, cover the hole with formwork and grout the
core.
Bond Beams: Use bond beams made from purpose-made hollow concrete blocks
with reinforcement grouted in place.
LINTELS
Galvanized Mild Steel Lintels: Provide Galvanized MS flat bar and angle lintels
To AS/NZS 2699.3 over openings:
- to be hot-dip galvanised to class Z600 after fabrication
- maintain 6mm clearance from heads and frames
- maximum 20mm allowable opening tolerance
- prop lintels at mid-span for openings 1800mm wide and over until mortar sets
- pack mortar between the angle upstand and supported masonry units
- where span of opening exceeds 3000mm provide lintel to engineer’s certification.
To AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed lintels: Proprietary cold-formed flat-based type designed to
AS/NZS 4600.
Steel flats and angles: Sizes to BCA Figure 3.3.3.5. and Structural Engineer’s
Certificate Required Drawings
Certificate Required Precast, Fire rated Lintels: Where required provide precast fire rated lintels,
sizes and installation to manufacturer’s recommendations. Where span of opening
exceeds limitation of precast lintel system provide in situ concrete lintel to
engineer’s certification.
Prestressed Brick Lintels: Must be branded with the manufacturer’s name and
installed to manufacturer’s instructions.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 45

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

4.6 Masonry Elements

GENERAL
Build-up walls as shown on drawings. Carry up plumb and level in even courses.
Bonding at Intersections:
To AS 3700/ AS Masonry bonding - Provide by means of header units.
4773.1 and AS Tie bonding - Provide where header are not permitted in facework.
4773.2
Clearance for Timber Frame Shrinkage:
For seasoned timber, provide clearance to the window frames and brick sill and
between roof frames and the brick veneer.
- Single storey and ground floor windows - 10mm
- Two storey frames and upper floor windows - 20mm
For unseasoned timber, additional clearance is to be provided to accommodate
the additional shrinkage.
FOUNDATION WALLS
Brickwork: Refer to Engineer’s Drawings
- up to 1500mm high: 110mm thick with engaged piers
- 1500 to 2700 high: 230mm thick.
BEARER PIERS TABLE
Provide engaged or free standing unreinforced masonry piers as follows to support
bearers at 1800mm maximum centres:

Type Minimum Size (mm)

Brickwork Blockwork

Engaged - bonded to walls 350 x 110 390 x 90

Freestanding up to 1500mm high 230 x 230 390 x 190
Freestanding 1501mm to 2700mm high 350 x 350 390 x 390

CAVITY WALLS
To AS 3700 Masonry Wall Cavities: 50mm minimum.
Clauses 3.2.2 and
Masonry Veneer Wall Cavities: 40mm minimum (between the masonry leaf and
8.10/ AS 4773.1 and
AS 4773.2 the load-bearing frame).
Refer to details in
ASDC.
Cavities:
- fill cavities with mortar up to 1 course above external ground level with fall to
outer leaf
- do not close cavities at the joints of external openings, except where detailed
- leave loose bricks at 1800mm centres for cleaning-out purposes
- wash out cavities daily.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 46

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

Certificate Required Insulation in Wall Cavities

where shown on the drawings provide:
- Suitable non-combustible cavity wall insulation to meet the performance
requirements, including the Deemed to Satisfy provisions of the NCC.
- Apply to inner brick skin or brick veneer framing.
- Fix with Proprietary plastic clips on pre-installed wall ties.
- Install horizontally with the tongue to the top edge and firmly against the inner
masonry skin or wall framing. Keep sheets clean and dry and free from mortar
and grout. Do not bridge the cavity.
- Install flashings prior to installing insulation sheets. Prevent entry of water behind
the insulation.
- Fixing with No. 12-14 x 45 mm hi teks screws.
- Installation to manufacturer’s recommendations and details
COMMON WALLS BETWEEN UNITS
Build-up common walls between units and between common areas and units to
the required fire rating and sound requirements extended to the underside of roof
material including boxed-in eaves to fully compartmentalise roof space.
Certificate Required - provide certificate of compliance for fire-rated and sound-rated common wall.

FOR TIMBER FRAMED COMMON WALLS refer to CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

- Insulation, for fire-resistant compressible mineral wool seal.

4.7 Ventilation and Openings

To AS 3660.1 AIR VENTS
Provide air vents around the building perimeter to the space under all suspended
ground floors, having a minimum unobstructed opening area of 8400mm2 per
metre run of external wall. In cavity walls provide ventilation through both masonry
leaves.
VENT TYPES
* Terracotta: Perforated, 230 x 160mm
* Cut brick: Two cut bricks laid vertically and evenly spread in a 230mm wide x 2
course high opening, backed with bronze wire mesh built in.
SLAB-ON-GROUND CONSTRUCTION
Provide adequate cavity ventilation at damp-course level, so that all ventilation
holes and open perpend joints are a minimum or 150mm above finished adjacent
ground level, and between 600mm to 1000mm centres horizontally.
To AS 3700 WEEPHOLES
Clause 4.7.2/ AS Space at 1200mm maximum centres generally, in the form of open perpends to
4773.1 and AS external leaves of cavity walls:
4773.2 - provide in the course above damp-proof courses or cavity mortar, and at the
bottom of unfilled cavities
- to flashings at 460mm max. centres
- to each horizontal section of stepped flashing
- weephole inserts to be non-combustible material
ACCESS OPENINGS
Leave foundation access openings of door-width and full height in external and
internal walls below suspended ground floors.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 47

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

To 3700/ AS 4773.1
and AS 4773.2
4.8 Damp-Proof Course
Provide as a continuous membrane for the full length of walls. Lap full width of
angles and intersections and 150mm at joints with maximum 2 vertical courses per
step in the following locations:
Walls Adjoining Infill Floor Slabs on Membranes: In the course above the
underside of the slab in internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls. Project
40mm and dress down over the slab membrane turned up against the wall.
Cavity Walls Built off Slabs on Ground: In the bottom course of the outer leaf,
continuous across the cavity and up the inner face, turned 30mm into the first
course of the inner leaf above the slab; or, in masonry veneer construction,
fastened to the inner frame above floor level. Project 10mm beyond the external
slab edge and dress down.
Masonry veneer construction: In the bottom course of the outer leaf continuous
horizontally across the cavity. Fastened to the inner frame 75 mm above floor
level.
Internal Walls Built off Slabs on Ground: In the first course above floor level.
At Timber Floors: In the first course below the level of the underside of ground
floor timbers in internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls.
To AS 3700/ AS
4773.1 and 4773.2
4.9 Flashings
To AS/NZS 2904 Provide flashings into the following locations where applicable.
Certificate Required Under Sills: 30mm into the first joint below the sill, extending up across the cavity
and under the sill in the inner leaf or the frame. Extend at least 150mm beyond the
reveals on each side of the opening.
Over Lintels to Openings: Full width of outer leaf immediately above the lintel,
continuous across cavity, 50mm into the inner leaf two courses above; or, in
masonry veneer construction, turned up against the inner frame and fastened to it.
Extend at least 150mm beyond the ends of the lintels.
At Window and Door Jambs: To full height of jamb, continuous extending into
cavity min 150mm; or, in masonry veneer construction, turned back against the
inner frame and fastened to it.
Over Roofs: Full width of external masonry, stepped to roof slope. Turn down not
less than 75mm over base flashing. Turn up within cavity, sloping inward across
the cavity and fixed to or built in to the inner leaf at least 75mm above.
At Abutments with Structural Frames or Supports: Vertical flashing in the
cavity from 150mm wide material, wedged and grouted into a groove in the frame
opposite the cavity.
At Stiles Where Cavities Are Closed: Full height flashing extending 75mm
beyond the closure into the cavity, interleaved with the sill and head flashing at
each end. Fix to frame stiles.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 48

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

4.10 Termite Control and Vermin Proofing

To AS 3660.1 Termite Control:
Suspended floors - Provide cap and strip shields:
* provide continuously over full length of all perimeter, curtain and support walls,
openings, engaged and free-standing piers
* project 40mm and turndown at 45 degrees with joints and corners
* lapped 12mm and soldered or folded and welted
* damp-proof course material is to be laid under ant capping to prevent corrosion
of metal.
* Galvanised steel, min 0.5mm thick, coating class Z275 to AS1650
To AS3660.1 and
AS/NZS 2904 * Stainless steel mesh max aperture 0.66mm x 0.45mm, diameter of wire
0.18mm min grade 304 or 316
Combined termite shielding and DPC
- Bitumen coated aluminium minimum 0.5mm core base thickness
Concrete slabs - Refer to CONCRETE WORKS: Termite Barriers.
Vermin-proofing: Provide continuous 12mm aperture galvanised mesh to brick
veneer walls across space between brickwork and timber framing level with top of
ground floor joists:
* secure to sides of wall plates and extend across cavity to the first available bed
joint below wall plate
* lap minimum 25mm into brickwork
* lap and lace longitudinal joints together.

4.11 Trim and Fixtures

Sills and Thresholds: Solidly bed masonry sills and threshold and lay them so
that the top surfaces drain away from the building.
Meter box: Build meter box into brickwork as work proceeds.
Subfloor Access Door: Build into brickwork as work proceeds where applicable.

4.12 Control Joints

To AS 3700 EXPANSION JOINTS
Clause 3.5/ AS
4773.1 and 4773.2
Approval Form from footing level to top of wall and infill with a strip of an approved
compressible material the full depth of the joint.
Location for Clay Brickwork:
- Maximum length of continuous wall - 10m*
- Maximum distance from corner - 5m*
- Minimum width of joint - 15mm
*or as specified by Structural Engineer

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 49

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

Location For Concrete Masonry:

- Maximum length of continuous wall - 8m*
- Maximum distance from corner - 4m*
- Minimum width of joint - 10mm
*or as specified by Structural Engineer
ARTICULATION JOINTS
Where detailed form from footing level to top of wall:
- provide sliding joint wall ties that prevent lateral movement but allow wall to move
along the centre line of the ties
- provide compressible filler strip and finish with sealant bead to match mortar
colour.

4.13 Completion
Replace defective masonry units. Point up faulty joints, holes and chasings. Point
up all storm moulds of frames to render waterproof.

SCHEDULE OF MASONRY ELEMENTS & FINISHES

The following shall apply unless otherwise shown on drawings

ITEMS MATERIAL/FINISH/ SELECTION/TYPE

REQUIREMENT

Masonry – face brick Refer to drawings

Masonry – face block Refer to drawings

Masonry – commons

Joint Type Ironed

Mortar colour Off-White

Masonry vents Cut brick to AS 3600

Wall separating sole- Cavity masonry Acceptable Solutions

occupancy units in Class 1 construction with sound 1
& 2 buildings insulation rating to BCA
requirements 2 x 110mm cavity clay brick
masonry with 50mm glass wool
or polyester insulation to
required density;
2
2 x 110mm cavity clay brick
masonry with 13mm cement
render to both sides

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 50

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

MASONRY

Wall separating sole- Masonry construction with Acceptable Solutions

occupancy units from sound insulation rating to 1
common areas such as BCA requirements
public lobby, public corridor, Single leaf of 230mm brick
stairway, lift shaft, plant masonry with 13mm cement
room or the like. render on each face.
2
150mm thick plain off form
concrete.
3
200mm thick concrete panel
with one layer of 13mm
plasterboard or 13mm cement
render on each face.

Wall separating sole- Masonry construction with Acceptable Solutions

occupancy units in Class 1b sound insulation rating to 1
& Class 3 buildings BCA requirements
(example Group Home) Single leaf of 230mm brick
masonry with 13mm cement
render on each face.
2
150mm thick plain off form
concrete.
200mm thick concrete panel
with one layer of 13mm
plasterboard or 13mm cement
render on each face.

Basement Masonry construction Acceptable Solution

ironed to BCA requirements 1
200mm Dincel, reinforced, core
filled and waterproofed
Subject to engineering design
and then also or other
equivalent system

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 51

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

05: Metalwork
To AS 4100,
5.1 General
AS/NZS 4600,
AS/NZS 5131:2016 MATERIALS
All ferrous and non-ferrous metal and the like are to be first quality Australian-
made metals. Use metals suited to their required function, finish and method of
fabrication and in sections of suitable strength and stiffness for their purpose.
Provide mill certificates for all structural hot rolled sections, hollow tube sections
and cold formed sections.
To AS 3623 METAL FRAMING
NASH.1 Metal floor, wall, ceiling and roof framing systems can be used for single-storey
Approval buildings with written approval:
* provide a set of manufacturer’s printed instructions to the Principal’s Authorised
Warranty Required Person including warranty, and carry out all work strictly in accordance with
such instructions.
Residential and low-rise steel framing: To NASH.1.
Metal separation
General: Install lagging to separate non-ferrous service pipes and accessories
from the metal framing.
Protection
General: Damaged metal coatings are not to be restored on site. (No on site
welding allowed). Thoroughly clean affected areas to base metal and coat with
zinc rich organic primer.
Grommets: Provide grommets to isolate piping and wiring from cold-formed steel
framing.
Swarf: Remove swarf and other debris from cold-formed steel framing
immediately.
Earthing
Permanent earthing: Required.
Temporary earthing: Provide temporary earthing during erection until the
permanent earthing is installed.
To AS/NZS 4680 HOT DIP GALVANISING
AS 1397 Unless shown otherwise on structural engineer’s drawings - all steelwork items
AS 1214 exposed externally to be hot dip galvanized, e.g. steel stanchions, post shoes,
arch bars, angles, balustrades, gates and all other fabricated steelwork.

5.2 Quality and Work Practices

GENERAL
* keep all members true, free from twist and other distortion
* all holes are to be drilled
* cut all edges. Do not shear or plane edges. Remove all burrs and ragged
edges
* form bends in tubes without deforming the true cross-section
* fabricate and assemble all metalwork in the workshop wherever practicable. Fit
all mitred joints accurately to a fine hairline. Evenly match all butt edges and
face welds.
* the treatment coating to steelwork shall avoid surface corrosion and shall
provide protection to structural elements during construction.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 52

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

Approval SAMPLES
- provide nominal 1000mm length of each type of balustrade and handrail in
nominated finish and showing proposed fixings and quality of welds as
applicable.
- provide one sample of each fixture and fitting specified.
- provide sample of each type of furniture in specified finish and colour.
- suitable sized sample of each type of signage specified showing the proposed
graphics/ image, lettering/ numbering, fonts and sizes including background
materials.
- provide samples of the coated finished materials
- samples are to be representative of the materials to be delivered to site.

5.3 Structural Members

GENERAL
To AS 4100 Provide all structural steel to detail and extent indicated, complete with bearing
plates, flanges, bolts, nuts, washers and other accessories required to complete
the work.
Fastenings:
Use fastenings of a type appropriate to the work, capable of transmitting the loads
and stresses imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly.
Masonry attachments:
Use proprietary types comprising corrosive resistant screws or bolts in self-
expanding sockets.
WELDING
To AS 1554.1 All structural welding to Structural Engineer’s details:
* the deposited metal thickness on fillet welds on non-structural members are to
not be less than 70% of the thickness of the material welded
* on completion thoroughly grind-off, and smooth all welds
* remove slag from welds.
To AS 1665 Aluminium welding: Buff finish all aluminium face welds.
SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings:
Submit 3 hard copies and 1 pdf electronic copy of Shop drawings showing:
* Identification
* Steel type and grade
* Dimensions of items
* Required camber, where applicable
* Connection details
* Orientation of members
* Location of and parameter for site welds
Do not commence fabrication until reviewed by Principal’s Authorised Person.
Allow 10 working days for review of shop drawings.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 53

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

5.4 Balustrades and Handrails

To AS/NZS 1170.1 GENERAL
Provide balustrades and handrails where shown and detailed on drawings
otherwise where the distance from any formed surface above the finished ground
level exceeds 600mm (e.g. porches, steps, elevated paving):
* install balustrades at 600mm and above the finished floor level
* install handrails at 865mm minimum above the nosing of stair treads
* do all necessary drilling and fabrication for fixing methods detailed
* pre-assemble and fit as many components as possible before delivery to the
site
* where metal sections are to be site-joined, pre-drill and pre-tap holes in
readiness for threaded connections.
* balustrades to comply with BCA Vol 2 Part 3.9.2
To AS 1428.1 * Where shown on the drawings for stairs and provide handrails and tactile
surface indicators.

5.5 Sunhoods, Awnings & Privacy Screens

GENERAL
* Provide mild steel frame for sunhoods/ awnings screens and privacy screens -
powdercoat finish
* Refer to detail drawings

5.6 Finishes
METALWORK FINISHES
Comply with AS 4312 for the atmospheric corrosion category of the local
environment. The coating thickness of the metalwork finishes must be appropriate
for the environmental conditions per AS 4312.
To AS/NZS 4680 GALVANISING
* work showing faulty galvanising is to be rejected
* no drilling, tapping, cutting or welding will be permitted after galvanising.
Coating requirements: Provide an unbroken covering of zinc, uniform in
appearance and in thickness at the rate of:
* steel thickness 5mm and greater - 600 g/m2
* steel thickness 2mm to less than 5mm - 450 g/m2
* steel thickness less than 2mm - 350 g/m2
PAINTING
All metalwork must be primed before delivery to the works. Prepare and finish
surfaces for painting. Refer to PAINTING.
To AS 1231 ANODISING
Anodised coatings to aluminium to have an Anodic film thickness of 20 microns.
Protective coating:
Provide a temporary protective coating to the anodised surfaces. The protective
coating is to be removed at the completion of the works.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 54

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

To AS 3715 POWDER COATING

Prepare surfaces as follows:
To AS 1627.4 Unprotected steel:
remove rust by abrasive blast cleaning to AS 1627.4 Class 3, clean by immersing
in trichlorethylene or an alkaline solution, and apply a coat of iron phosphate.
To AS/NZS 4506 Galvanised steel:
clean by immersing in a suitable alkaline or acid solution, apply a chromate or zinc
phosphate chemical conversion coating, rinse and de-grease.
Aluminium:
To AS/NZS 3715
* clean by immersing in a suitable alkaline solution, caustic etch and apply a
chromate conversion coating
* after application, bake the film in an oven accurately controlled to the
temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer.

5.7 Fixtures and Fittings

GENERAL
* Provide fixtures and fittings. Refer to drawings and schedules for item, number,
selection and location of fixtures and fittings.
* If selection of fixture/s or fitting/s is included in the Contract but location is not
shown on drawings refer to Principal’s Authorised Person for approval.
* In the event that fixture or fitting selection is not included in the Contract select
fixture/s and fitting/s to meet the specification and Land and Housing
Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register.
* In the event that fixture or fitting selection is not included in the Contract and
there is no specification for the fixture or fitting or the fixture or fitting is not
included in the Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product
Register recommend selection meeting relevant standards and obtain
Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval.
* Install to manufacturer’s instructions.

ITEMS REQUIREMENT
Shower Curtain Rail Provide to each:
* Shower recess
* Combined shower and bath
Provide to each accessible shower recess / SEPP HPSD
ground floor units. Curtain rail to be fitted with hospital
grade curtain with weighed hem
Locate where shown on drawings

Shower Screen Provide to non-accessible bathrooms

Shower Seat Locate where shown on drawings

Toilet Paper Holder Provide 1 per toilet

Locate adjacent to toilet pan

Bath Towel Rail Provide 1 per bathroom. Locate where shown on

drawings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 55

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

Soap Holder Provide (ceramic preferred if recessed):

1 per shower
1 per bath
Locate where shown on drawings

Robe Hook Provide:

* 1 per each bathroom for 0-1 bedroom dwellings.
* 2 per bathroom for all other dwellings
Locate where shown on drawings

Grab Rails Provide in SEPP HSPD units.

1 per shower recess
1 per WC
Locate where shown on drawings

Tea Towel Rail Provide 1 x 3 arm fixed to inside of kitchen cupboard

door.

BATHROOM FITTINGS REQUIREMENT

Toilet Paper Holder
* Chrome plated brass/polished stainless steel frame, min. 150mm x 150mm with
aluminium roller
Bath Towel Rail
* 760mm overall length x 16mm-diameter chrome plated brass or stainless steel
tube with stainless steel end brackets, for wall screw fixing
Robe Hooks
* 52mm x 53mm chrome plated brass
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year written warranty
GRAB RAILS REQUIREMENT
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS AND ACCESSIBLE HOUSING
* Only where scoped or directed
* To current Australian Standard
* 32mm diameter x 1.2mm thick 304 Stainless Steel or powder coated aluminium
x 450mm min. overall length, secured to wall with round head C.P. brass or
stainless steel screws, minimum 50mm long
* Hygienic seal Flange Covers
* Fixings of Grab rail to support appropriate static load
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 56

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

CLOTHES LINE REQUIREMENT

Provide clothes line where shown on drawings:
Provide test report certifying hoist can withstand a load of 150 kg (min. 2kg point
loads evenly distributed per all lines/ at max. 300mm centre spacings) without
deformation or damage, issued by a registered Testing Laboratory based on
current Australian Standards
- Anodised aluminium or min. 1.0mm thick. galvanised steel framing to current
Australian Standards
- Min. 20 micron anodised or 50 micron polyester powder coat finish to current
Australian Standards
- Min. 4 mm dia. galvanised wire or UV stabilised plastic sheathed cord or wire
lines
- All bolts & fittings zinc plated
- Locking mechanism on frame
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
Retractable
- Min. 4 line (2 BR or less) Max line extension 6m
Min 5 line Max extension 6m
Awning
- Min. 14 m line (for 1 BR or less)
- Min. 20 m line (for 2/3 BR dwellings)
- Min. 35m line (for 4/5 BR dwellings)
- Ground or wall mounted
- With tensioning mechanism
Fixed Rotary Type Adjustable (wind-up fixed head hoists)
- Min. 39m line/4m dia. (for 2/3 BR dwelling)
- Min. 48m line /5m dia. (for 4/5 BR dwelling)
WARRANTY: Provide min. 10 year frame warranty & 1 year line & components

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 57

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

LETTERBOX REQUIREMENT
Provide letterboxes where shown on drawings:
General (all models)
To AS/NZS 4253 - Painted zinc/aluminium alloy coated steel OR G2 zinc coated steel (Z450) with
min. 50 micron polyester powder coat finish
- Aluminium (min. 20 micron anodised or 50 micron powder coat)
- Weatherhood (for weather exposed areas)
Freestanding
- A4 envelope size Min 230mm x 330mm and min, 160mm high
- Min. 25mm high letterbox slot
- Elevated between 900mm to 1200mm above ground on a coated steel post
- Padlock or key operated camlock
Built-in (brickwork or Aluminium Letter box Banks)
- Materials as per “General “
- Aluminium/G2 zinc coated steel/zinc-aluminium coated steel sleeve.
- Min. A4 envelope size, Min 230mm x 330mm and Min 160mm high
- Min. 25mm high letterbox slot
- Elevated between 500mm to 1500mm above ground
- Access door pivot hinged on min. 5mm dia. galvanised steel/SS rod
- Key operated camlock/padlock style lock
- Max. letterbox bank of 75 boxes (15 wide x 5 high)
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year warranty.

5.8 Signage
SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS
ACCESSIBLE SIGNAGE
Where required by BCA (volume 1) provide signage to comply with parts D3.6 and
Specification D3.6 (Braille and Tactile Ground Indicators)
PARKING SIGNAGE
Provide signage for visitor and accessible parking to comply with local authority
requirements.
STREET / UNIT NUMBERING
Provide street/unit numbering:
- External street numerals and building block numerals to be 150mm minimum high
1.6mm thick plain brass (secured with brass screws) or polished cast aluminium
(secured with stainless steel screws) fixed to building/structure.
- Unit numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick plain brass or polished
cast aluminium or moulded plastic, screw fixed to door.
- Letterbox numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick
brass/aluminium/plastic, screw fixed to front of letterbox.
- Community room WC doors as for unit numerals
- Project name and numerals (if required) as for external street numerals
WARRANTY
Provide minimum 1 year warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 58

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

PROHIBITION SIGNAGE OR ADVISORY / INFORMATION

Provide as shown on drawings:
- Prohibition signs (No Smoking, Electrical hazard etc.) to comply with AS1319
- Either 225x300 mm (approx. A4) or 300x450 mm (approx. A3) – where viewing is
required at a distance of greater than 10m away
- Signs and numbers to be non-reflective
- Low Density Polyethylene and/or Polypropylene and/or co-mingled
plastic/wood (Recycled product)
- UV stabilised – to reduce surface whitening;
- fading and crack resistant for indoor and outdoor use;
- Min 90% recycled product
- Non-toxic hazard;
- Minimum thickness 1.5 mm.
- life expectancy 5-8 years;
- Rounded corners with four corner mounting holes (screw or adhesive fixed).
- Colorbond steel (metal)
- Suitable for outdoor use;
- Life expectancy 5-8 years;
- Min BMT 0.5 mm thick;
- Rounded corners with four corner mounting holes (screw or adhesive fixed)
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year warranty
NON-SMOKING SIGNS IN COMMON AREAS
Non-Smoking Areas
Non-smoking areas in Principal’s properties include internal common areas such as
common rooms, shared laundries, stairwells, hallways, entranceways, lift areas and
other enclosed common areas.
Location: The minimum number of signs installed per building by a Contractor is
two. The first sign ‘design option 2’ is to be installed at the entrance of a building.
The second sign ‘design option 1’ is to be installed in the buildings enclosed
common area (for example foyer). Additional signage can be scoped depending on
building layout and whether more than one ingress or egress exists. The number of
signs shall be such that at least one sign is visible from any position within the area
where smoking is prohibited. Contractors are required to scope a building,
determine the number of signs to be installed in accordance with the Specification.
Contractors shall install the signs as scoped and as approved by the Principal’s
Authorised Person.
General requirements:
- The signs used to identify non-smoking areas in Principal’s properties should
comply with AS 1319-1994: Safety Signs for Occupational Environment.
- The symbolic shapes, colour and enclosure coding shall be as shown in Table 2.1
and the symbolic sign shall be sign No.401 in Table B1 in AS 1319.
- The signs used shall be word/symbol combinations.
WARRANTY: Minimum 5 years warranty.
Signage design options:
Below are the Principal’s preferred designs, size and material.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 59

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

1. 2.
Sign size: Signs shown above can be in two sizes, 225x300 mm (approximately A4)
and 300x450 mm (approximately A3). These sizes cater for a viewing distance of
about 10 m.
Minimum letter size: for uppercase 50 mm, for lowercase 40 mm.
Sign material: Acceptable materials are as follows:
- Polypropylene – For Indoor use, UV stabilised; fading and crack resistant for
outdoor use; non-toxic; minimum thickness 1.2 mm, rounded corners with four
corner mounting holes, life expectancy 5-8 years, 100% recyclable.
- Metal – For Outdoor use, Colorbond steel; minimum thickness 0.6 mm, rounded
corners with four corner mounting holes, life expectancy 5-8 years.
- Sign face material shall be non-retro-reflective (diffuse) and conform to colours
specified in Table 3.2 AS 1319. Signs must be coated with a “Non Sacrificial”
anti-graffiti coating.
Siting and installation:
- Signs should be located where the message is legible, clearly visible and attracts
attention. Natural and artificial light conditions should be considered when locating
signage.
- Signs should not be mounted at locations where stacked material, open doors or
other obstructions will obscure signs.
- Signs shall be mounted at eye level. The preferred fixing height of sign (bottom
edge) shall be 1.5 m above floor level.
- Signs shall be mounted using four screws (indoor and outdoor) or heavy duty
adhesive (indoor only).

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 60

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

EVACUATION SIGNAGE
Provide:
- Low Density Polyethylene and/or Polypropylene and/or co-mingled plastic/wood
(Recycled product) or other durable recycled plastic sheet.
- Printed in Colour on A4
- UV stabilised – to reduce surface whitening;
- fading and crack resistant for indoor and outdoor use;
- Min 90% recycled product
- Non-toxic hazard;
- Fixed to back of door behind clear recyclable polycarbonate or other impact and
scratch resistant plastic using anti-tamper, vandal resistant fixings

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 61

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

METALWORK

5.9 Workmanship and Execution

PREPARATION
Examine areas to receive work for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and
planarity of surfaces that would affect the installation of the works.
Notify the Principal’s Authorised Person of unsatisfactory conditions.
Proceed with the installation only after the unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
Install the works in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Install the works level, plumb, true, and securely fixed and positioned at the
location(s) shown on the Design Drawings.
Install the works in the correct position, within the required tolerances, and in the
correct relationship to the building structure.
Assemble and install fixtures and fittings so that surfaces designed with falls drain
as intended.
Provide reinforcing as required to ensure rigid and secure assembly. Joints, corners
and mitres to be accurately fitted.
Noggings, bearings, etc., required to support the works must be accurately
positioned and fixed securely.
Drill, countersink and tap components as necessary to receive threaded fasteners.
Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Set out exposed fasteners where
permitted in an even manner.
COMPLETION
Upon completion, remove waste, debris and any unused materials from the site and
dispose of safely and legally.
Clean the work of dirt and excess materials. Use cleaning materials and methods
recommended by the manufacturer.
Make good fastening holes and surfaces damaged by the execution of the work, to
the acceptance of the Principal’s Authorised Person. Replace items that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired on site.
Keep completed works clean and dry, and protect from physical damage until
Practical Completion.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 62

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

06: Carpentry and Joinery

6.1 General

Only AS 1684 TIMBER FRAMING

AS 1684.1 Residential timber framed construction: To AS 1684.2, AS 1684.3 or AS 1684.4 as
AS 1684.2 appropriate.
AS 1684.3 Design: To AS 1720.1.
AS 1684.4
AS 1720.1
To AS 1720.1 HIGH WIND AREAS
AS/NZS 1170.2

6.2 Inspections
NOTICE
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:
- completion of framing
- before fixing internal linings
QUALITY ASSURANCE TIMBER CERTIFICATION: Refer to PRELIMINARIES:
Materials and Workmanship. Certificate required.

6.3 Quality and Work Practices

GENERAL
Perform the operations and provide the accessories necessary for the completion
of woodwork items. Ease and adjust moving parts, lubricate hardware, and leave
the completed work in a sound, clean, working condition.
SAMPLES
- For visible timber framing, provide nominal 500mm length sample of each timber
type.
- For timber flooring, provide nominal 500mm x 500mm sample of each type of
timber flooring specified showing the quality of finish, range of colour and
variation, applied sealer, joint treatment, and fixings.
- Provide nominal 300mm length sample of specified skirting, architraves and any
other trims and sundry items specified showing the quality of finish and range
of colour variation.
- For cupboards, cabinets, vanity units, kitchen units and other similar joinery
assemblies, provide the following samples:
 Nominal 500mm length of benchtop showing edge profile.
 Door front.
 Drawer front.
 Nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of each substrate, surface and finish.
 One sample of each type of hardware.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 63

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

JOINERY
* mortice and tenon joints in doors, frames, sashes and other parts
* mitre joints in mouldings, skirting, etc., but scribe internal angles
* dress joinery stock and mouldings, hand finish exposed surfaces and remove
arrises to provide smooth surface for painting
* all moulding runs of up to 800mm must be in single lengths.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATES
Provide certificates from the suppliers showing that the timber used complies with
the specification requirements.
Forest Certification
Timber used on the project must be from a certified source. Timber must be Forest
certified to either:
- AS 4708 offered by the Australian Forest Certification Scheme; or
- The Forest Stewardship Council Scheme.
Provide timber labelled with either of the following:
- AFS/ PEFC (Australian Forestry Standard/ Program for the Endorsement of
Forest Certification Schemes); or
- Woodmark and SmartWood as accredited by the Forest Stewardship Council.
Chain of custody; select from either:
- AFS certification: To AS 4707.
- FSC certification: To FSC requirements.
Formaldehyde Emission Level
Plywood: E0 certified formaldehyde emission level in accordance with AS/NZS
2270 and AS/NZS 2271.
Reconstituted wood-based panel: E0 certified formaldehyde emission level in
accordance with AS/NZS 1859 series.
SEASONED TIMBER
For dressed products including mouldings, flooring and weatherboards:
- milled timber to be conditioned to within 3% of the equilibrium moisture content
(emc) appropriate to the timber and its intended conditions of use
- seasoned to an even moisture content between 10% and 15% with no more
than 3% difference between any two pieces in any one group
- seasoned timbers must not be less than the stated sizes.
UNSEASONED TIMBER
Where unseasoned timber is used, make allowance for shrinkage, swelling and
differential movement.
TOLERANCES
Maximum permissible tolerance for dressing to be 3mm per face and for:
To AS 1684 framing timbers:
“gauged” hardwood: tolerance +2mm - 0.
“planer gauged” radiata pine: +3mm - 0.
VISIBLE WORK
All visible faces, edges and corners must be clean and free of visible blemishes
(e.g. marks caused by branding, crayon, machinery, etc.).

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 64

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

SURFACE FINISH
To AS 2796.1 Table B1 Hardwood:

To AS 4785.1 Table B1 Softwood:

PAINTING
Refer to PAINTING.
Prime paint and/or stain all faces of joinery and mouldings (including joints)
specified to be painted before delivery to the works:
- unsatisfactory priming will be rejected by Principal’s Authorised Person.
To AS 1604.1 WATER-REPELLENT TREATMENT
Apply protection before delivery to the site.

6.4 Materials
GENERAL
All timbers must comply with the NSW Timber Marketing Regulation 2010.
TIMBER SPECIES
Do not use imported tropical rainforest timber. Refer to SCHEDULES - “Schedule
of Timber Species and Durability Ratings” for species of timber to be used in
specific applications.
To AS/NZS 1748 timber stress grades:
To AS/NZS 1148 TIMBER TERMINOLOGY
AS/NZS 4491 individual timbers: ‘Standard trade common names’
groups of timbers: terms employed for that purpose in relevant Australian
standards.
Plywood:
To AS 1604 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Approval - all Lyctus susceptible sapwood in local rainforest timbers
- all Lyctus susceptible sapwood in hardwoods other than milled products,
exceeding 20% of the perimeter of the piece
- all Lyctus susceptible sapwood in milled hardwood products
- radiata pine exposed to weather for bearers and joists
- provide timber treatment details to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
PANEL AND SHEET PRODUCTS
Plywood and blockboard:
AS/NZS 2270 Interior use
AS/NZS 2271 Exterior use
Particle board:
To AS/NZS 1859.1 Interior type: interior use in dry locations only.
High moisture resistant (HMR): for other uses except flooring.
Flooring grade: for flooring generally.
Wet area flooring grade: for flooring above damp subfloors.
Melamine surfaced particleboard: particleboard finished with melamine, surface-
bonded to all faces.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 65

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

To AS/NZS 1859.2 Fibre building boards:

To AS/NZS 1859.4 Hardboard.
Interior use generally: standard hardboard Type GP.
Exterior cladding: exterior hardboard.
Hardboard planks:
To AS/NZS 2908.2 Fibre cement products:
Flat Sheets and Planks.
Compressed sheets: for flooring
Laminated plastic sheet: General-purpose or post-forming as applicable:
To AS/NZS 2924.1 Thickness:
- for horizontal surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 1.2mm
- for vertical surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 0.8mm
- for vertical surfaces fixed intermittently (e.g., to studs): 3.0mm.
Fixing: fix to backgrounds with contact adhesive cement containing a heat
resistant additive in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Metal Cladding:
Preformed sheet and purpose-made accessories forming part of an approved
proprietary metal wall cladding system.
Corrosion protection: To BCA Table 3.5.1.1.a.
- Zincalume - min. AZ150 coating or COLORBOND coated steel - min. base
thickness 0.48mm (for standard conditions and straight roof lines)
Battens: If required 75 x 38mm hardwood at centres as recommended by the
sheeting manufacturer.
Installation: to the manufacturer’s printed instructions
- fixing should cater for extreme weather conditions
- troughs of corrugations or ribbed profiles must not be pierced or drilled for fixing
- where factory-prefinished colour coating is specified exposed fixings are to be
of matching colour

6.5 Structural Elements

GENERAL
Provide additional timber members as required to support lining, cladding,
hardware, fixtures and fittings.
To AS 1684.2 TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING
If floor framing is for ground floor construction, ensure that it is protected from
moisture with DPC strip between timber and support or as shown on drawings.
If construction loading exceeds design loading, provide additional support so as to
avoid overstressing of members.
To AS 1684.2 TIMBER WALL FRAMING
Top wall plates: To be 75mm thick minimum.
Bottom wall plates: Provide separation strips between bottom wall plates and
concrete floors of DPC material.
Studs: Provide studs (450mm centres maximum)
To AS 4299 Reinforcement: Provide min 12mm thick plywood panels in locations as shown on
drawings to bathroom areas for future grab rail support. Plywood to be recessed
flush with wall frame.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 66

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

To AS 1684.2 ROOF AND CEILING FRAMING

Refer to drawings.
To AS 1684.2 FIXINGS
Provide fastenings of types appropriate to their purposes, sufficient to transmit the
loads and stresses imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly, and install
them without splitting or otherwise damaging the timber.
ROOF TRUSSES
To AS 1720.1 Provide prefabricated roof trusses of accredited manufacture, made in controlled
AS 4440 factory conditions and clearly branded with the following information:
- name of manufacturer
- pitch of roof
- span of truss
- timber species and grade
Clearance for internal walls: Over internal walls provide not less than 10mm
vertical clearance and use bracing methods that allow for vertical movements.
Approval Approval: Written approval required before manufacture of trusses.

Certificate Required Shop drawings: provide 2 sets of shop drawings certified by a qualified Structural
Engineer for each truss type to be used in each building to show the following
information:
- outline of each truss type showing size and stress grade of each member
- number of each truss type required
- fixing requirements
- permanent bracing.
Strengthening:
Camber: Construct trusses with 12mm upward camber in bottom chords.
Loading: Do all trimmings for ancillary ceiling works after the roof has been
loaded with tiles.
Additional support
Design structure and trusses to provide additional support to structural engineer’s
detail for:
 Solar hot water heaters and panels
 Solar voltaic cell panels
 Roof access walkway to AS 1657
 ceiling hoists
 services or equipment located in roof space

6.6 Flooring
GENERAL
Refer to SCHEDULES: Schedule of Timber Species and durability ratings for
material specification:
- do not fix internal hardwood flooring until the building is completely weather-
proofed (i.e. completed roofing and external wall sheeting)
- for other flooring, fix completed roofing within 2 weeks of starting

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 67

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

CLASSIFICATION OF FLOORING
Fitted: applies to flooring laid and cut to fit between the wall plates of each room
after external walls and roof have been covered and made weatherproof. “Fitted”
flooring may be either sheet or strip
Platform: applies to flooring laid continuously over whole of floor area of each
storey of the dwelling and extending to finish flush with the external edge of
perimeter wall plates. Wall framing must rest upon platform
Wet area: applies to flooring in utility rooms where flooding and the expectation of
dampness is a major consideration. The term will apply to bathrooms, laundries,
water closets and the like.
To AS 1684 FITTED FLOORING
Drill nail holes at ends of boards to avoid splitting
Tongue and Groove Board
To AS 2796 Hardwood
To AS 1810 Seasoned Cyprus Pine
To AS 4785 Softwood
PLATFORM (SHEET) FLOORING
To AS 2269, AS 1684 Structural plywood:
To AS 1860.1, Particleboard: Use moisture resistant (MR) particleboard
To AS 1860.2

SANDING
Sand strip and sheet flooring as follows:
Strip flooring: Use with an approved power machine
Sheet flooring: Lightly sand joints in flush
WET AREA PLATFORM (SHEET) FLOORING
Compressed fibre cement sheeting:
a minimum thickness of 15mm for 450mm joist spacing, or 18mm thickness for
600mm joist spacing:
- fix sheets to floor joists with countersunk screws in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions
- seal all joints and screw heads with an epoxy resin adhesive
- flash at wall and floor junctions and seal floor surface as specified under TILING
AND WET AREA WATERPROOFING: Waterproofing Wet Areas.

6.7 Trims
GENERAL
Do not use Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) for skirtings, window and door
architraves for wet area applications (i.e. bathrooms, laundries, kitchens and
separate toilets).
ROOF TRIMS
Fascia, barge and eaves boards
AS 2796.1 Seasoned hardwood
AS 1810 Cypress pine
Australian grown conifers, other than radiata pine and cypress pine

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 68

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

Metal fascias/Barges: proprietary metal roofing accessories

SOFFIT LINING
Eaves:
- 4.5mm fibre-cement sheeting for 450mm centres support spacings
- 6.0mm fibre-cement sheeting for 600mm centres support spacings
- set 10mm into groove of fascia
- cover sheet junctions with aluminium or plastic ‘H’ type mouldings.
Fascias and barge boards: as for eaves.
Anti ponding boards:
6mm FC or hardboard under sarking from lowest roofing batten to the top of the
fascia.
WINDOW LININGS
Provide nom. 25mm minimum linings to reveals of aluminium windows in framed
walls, to finish flush with finished wall surface.
- Pre-primed
SKIRTINGS
Provide 92 x 18mm minimum skirting with pencil round edge to all rooms except
where tiled floor is provided. Accurately mitre corners.
- Pre-primed
ARCHITRAVES
Except where detailed otherwise on the drawings - Provide 40 x 20mm minimum
architraves with pencil round edges to all door frames and all windows except
where reveals are rendered. Accurately mitre corners.
- Pre-primed
CURTAIN BOARDS
Where no architraves are provided in rendered walls provide a continuous 70 x 20
mm minimum DAR curtain board above head to each window and sliding door
extending 150mm beyond the opening at each side.
- Pre-primed
FRAMING TO FALSE CEILINGS AND BULKHEADS
Provide nom. 75 x 50mm timber framing at 400mm centres. Secure to brickwork
or concrete, where occurring, with 10mm diameter zinc plated anchor bolts at
900mm centres.
To AS/NZS 2785 Alternatively, provide a proprietary cold-formed zinc coated steel suspended
ceiling system.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 69

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

6.8 Cupboards
To AS/NZS 4386.1, KITCHEN UNITS/CUPBOARDS
To AS/NZS 4386.2 Refer to drawings otherwise the following requirements shall apply:
Installation:
- floor cupboards and benches to be constructed at 900mm high for general
housing units and 850mm high for SEPP HSPD housing units.
- provide bulkheads above kitchen wall units where ceiling is below 2400mm high.
- one wall cupboard unit (medicine cabinet) must have a childproof door catch
- benchtop to be a full-size unit, formed in a single unjointed lengths wherever
possible. Where joint is unavoidable such as those in corner areas, they shall
be minimal and to the acceptance of the Principal’s Authorised Person.
- round off/chamfer exposed right angle benches
Benchtops and servery tops:
- min 32mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard laminated with high
pressure decorative laminate
- laminate shall have high resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching
- provide cut-outs for sink
Doors, drawer fronts, open shelves, open panels:
- min 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard or high moisture
resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF) laminated with high pressure
decorative laminate having medium resistance to surface wear, impact and
scratching
- all doors and drawers shall have 2 mm Bio-plastic equal to PBS (Poly butylene
succinate) edge strip
Drawers:
- sides – 13mm
- bottom – 16mm
- thick HMR particleboard or HMR MDF, white melamine finish
- Integrated drawer slide system comprising a high quality epoxy coated white
steel self-closing feature runner, 30kg load capacity
- provide 1 cutlery tray in drawer unit
Carcass:
- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard,
- white melamine finish to all internal surfaces including edge of frame, carcass and
shelves
Kickboard:
- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard,
- 2mm vinyl or high pressure and high resistance laminate finish, including any
edges. Colour to be coordinated with kitchen by Principal’s authorised Person.
- Use concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170o swing
- Use piano hinges for split of bi-fold door on corner units
- Install to manufacturers written specification
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 5 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 70

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

BATHROOM VANITY
Carcass:
- Min 750w x 450d on nominal 150h tubular legs
- Min 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) MDF/particleboard with white
melamine finish to all internal surfaces, including edge of frame, carcass and
shelves
- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard, melamine finish to all internal surfaces
including edge of frame, carcass and shelves.
Benchtop:
- min 32mm thick HMR particleboard laminated with high pressure decorative
laminate
- laminate shall have high resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching, or
natural stone, engineered stone
Doors, drawer fronts, external panels:
- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard or HMR MDF
- laminated with high pressure decorative laminate having medium resistance to
surface wear, impact and scratching
- all doors and drawers shall have 2mm PVC plastic edge strip min 16mm thick HMR
MDF polyurethane paint finish
Bowl or bowl and benchtop:
- vitreous china
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 5 years written warranty
BATHROOM CABINETS REQUIREMENT
General and Liveable Housing
- To current Australian Standards
- Cabinet fabricated in 1 mm zinc coated steel (white Acrylic baked Solvent-borne
finish) OR 16 mm HMR high pressure decorative laminated board OR heavy
duty plastic (Plastic cabinet body minimal thickness of 5mm)
- Adjustable shelving
- Silver float mirror glass to current Australian Standards
- Inside of cabinet (or door) to be branded with manufacturers name
Single Door Cabinet
- Min. 375 mm high x 405 mm wide x 115 mm deep
- 3 mm mirror fixed to self-closing hinged door or sliding door
- Min. 1 shelf
Double Door Cabinet
- Min. 415 mm high x 700 mm wide x 130 mm deep
- 2 x 4 mm sliding mirror doors with finger slots set in recessed safety tracks
(extruded PVC or aluminium tracks fitted to HMR laminated board) OR 2 x 3
mm mirrors fixed to self-closing hinged doors
- Min. 2 shelves
For People with Disability
- Single door cabinet and mirror (fixed to wall)
- Cabinet 975mm high x 300 mm wide x 200 mm deep, with min. 3 shelves
(beside mirror)
- Mirror 975 mm high x 500 mm wide (above basin)
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 5 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 71

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

MIRRORED CABINET
- 1 per bathroom above vanity, with minimum width equivalent to the width of
vanity.
- Refer to GLAZING
LAUNDRY BENCH
- min 32mm thick HMR particleboard laminated with high pressure decorative
laminate
- bench with tub set flush shall be min 1400mm long and 700mm deep
- bench min 800mm long x 600mm deep (where tub is separate)
- laminate shall have high resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching
LAUNDRY OPEN SHELVES ABOVE TUB
For SEPP HSPD dwellings:
- nom 450mm wide x 250 deep
- min 18mm thick HMR particleboard laminated with high pressure decorative
laminate having medium resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching
BUILT-IN LINEN AND/OR BROOM CUPBOARDS
Not built in between walls
- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard or HMR MDF laminated both sides with high
pressure decorative laminate having medium resistance to surface wear, impact
and scratching
- all doors shall have 2 mm PVC plastic edge strip//
- 35mm flush hollow or cell cored/painted
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish
- Sliding doors only for SEPP HSPD
- Carcass- min 16mm thick HMR particleboard
- melamine finish to all internal surfaces including edge of frame, carcass and
shelves.
Built in between walls
Unless otherwise shown on drawings:
- line ceiling and wall with 4.8mm standard hardboard or 10mm plasterboard
- shelves and partitions to be 16mm thick laminated particle board or medium
density fibreboard with white melamine finish
- construct 50 x 25mm vertical ladder supports for shelving plug fixed to brick
walls and screw fixed to partition wall
- five (5) shelves to linen cupboard and one (1) shelf to broom cupboard
Doors and hardware: Refer to DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE:
- linen cupboard doors to be flush as specified for internal doors to suit frames
- provide door frames to match other internal door frames
- provide ‘D’ handles and roller catches

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 72

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

BUILT IN WARDROBES REQUIREMENT

To current Australian Standards for HMR, MDF, Laminate, Melamine and
Fibreglass finishes
Doors
- min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard or moisture
resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF), laminated (both sides) with high
pressure decorative laminate having medium resistance to surface wear, impact
and scratching or with vinyl film applied, or painted 35mm flush, hollow or cell
cored door
- 2 mm PVC plastic edge strip to doors
Carcass
- min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard with white
melamine finish to all internal surfaces, including edge of frame, carcass and
shelves
- Concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170o swing or sliding doors
- Hanging/shelf unit to be removable/height adjustable.
- Install to manufacturers written specification
- All assemblies to carry a compliance label to current Australian Standards
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 5 year written warranty

6.9 Timber Stairs

Where shown on drawings, provide closed flight timber stairs, newels, & handrails.
Refer to SCHEDULES: Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings for
applicable timbers:
- set out stair rod to give uniform treads and risers in each flight
- all work must be smooth, fine sanded, slightly arised and prepared for finish as
scheduled
- provide beads and mouldings as necessary
- exposed fittings are to be brass unless otherwise detailed.
- Stair design to comply with BCA requirements (see BCA vol 2 part 3.9.1 and
BCA vol 1 part D2).

6.10 Insulation
Refer to INTERNAL LININGS for wall, ceiling, and floor insulation. See drawings
for insulation ratings.
COMMON WALLS BETWEEN UNITS
Finish the area between the top of the wall and roof cladding with fire-resistant
compressible mineral wool seal.

6.11 Finishes

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 73

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

6.12 Schedule of Timber Species & Durability Ratings

Application Timber species Timber finish Australian Preservative
or minimum Standard treatment rating
durability class (AS) for softwood

Structural Class 1 or 2 Sawn 1684.2 H3

timbers (NB Where
exposed to softwoods
weather meet durability
class 1 or 2
preservative
treatment is not
required)

Sub-floor Class 3 or Sawn 1684.2 H3

framing better
exposed
to ground

Structural Class 4 or Sawn 1720.1 H2

timbers not better
exposed to
weather

Fascias, Oregon Select dressing 4785.1 N/A

barges Ash type Select 2796.1
eucalypts
(immunised
and
reconditioned)

Weatherboards Radiata Pine Select 4785.1 H3

Cypress Pine “ 1810
Western Red “ -
Cedar “ 2796.1
Hardwood “ “
Brush Box
Mouldings Sitka Spruce Select dressing 4785.1
(softwood) “ 4785.1
Oregon Select -
Western Red “ 4785.1 H1 (int) H3 (ext)
Cedar
Radiata Pine
Hoop Pine
Slash Pine
Sills Tallowwood Select 2796.1 N/A
Blackbutt “ “
Red Mahogany “ “
Crows Ash “ “
Western Red “
Cedar
Window and Western Red Select - N/A
door Cedar Select dressing 2047
frames Oregon Select 2796.1
Ash type
eucalypts
(immunised
and
reconditioned)

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 74

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

Application Timber species Timber finish Australian Preservative

or minimum Standard treatment rating
durability class (AS) for softwood
Strip flooring Radiata Pine Standard 4785.1 H3
Mixed “ 2796.1
Hardwood “ 1810
Cypress Pine “ 2796.1
Murray Red
Gum
Internal joinery, Oregon Select dressing 4785.1 N/A
cupboard Ash type Select 2796.1
framing eucalypts
(immunised
and Select dressing 2796.1
reconditioned) Select 4785.1
Sitka spruce
Radiata pine

MR
Particleboard
MR Medium
density
fibreboard
Paling fence Class 2 or Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or 5 ) See
posts better Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or 5 ) Note
Other fence Class 1 Struct. Grade 3 2082
posts Eastern
Fence rails and Australian H3
palings hardwoods
Radiata pine
(treated)
Cypress pine
NOTE: Where H4 or H5 is specified as an alternative, the required hazard rating
will depend on specific site conditions that exist.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 75

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

7: Doors, Windows and Hardware

7.1 General
Refer to METALWORK and CARPENTRY AND JOINERY for general information
regarding metalwork and woodwork items including quality and work practices,
materials etc.
To AS 1905.1 FIRE RATED DOORSETS
GUARANTEES
Guarantee Required
All doors must be branded by stamping or burning external exposed edges of top
and bottom rails with an indented stamp, bearing name of manufacturer and a
guarantee of manufacturer that door is in accordance to specification and is
guaranteed against warp.

Approval SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer to PRELIMINARIES.

Provide for aluminium framed windows and doors.
HIGH WIND AREAS
Windows and doors to be of design suitable for particular site conditions and
designated wind terrain category.
SAMPLES
- Provide nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of door specified
showing seals, edge strips and door protection as applicable.
- Provide nominal 300mm length of each type of framing and sill members in the
nominated material and finish.
- Sample of glazing materials.
- Sample of visual indicators.
- Provide nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of overhead door.
- Provide nominal 300mm length sample of each type of overhead door track/
guide.
- Provide one sample of each door and window hardware type in the nominated
material and finish.
SCHEDULES
- Provide Door/ Window Schedule specifying compliance with the required
thermal performance per Basix/ Section J.
- Provide Door and Window Hardware Schedule.

7.2 Door Frames

GENERAL
All door frames to have a 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 76

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

STEEL DOOR FRAMES (NEW CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE)

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings provide steel door frames.
- Continuously welded, min 18 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel with internal
architrave and 3 hinges finished flushed with internal wall
- grind the welds smooth, cold galvanize the welded joints and shop prime the
whole before delivery
- build frames as work proceeds and secure in opening with minimum 5 frame
ties per jamb
- pack hollow jambs and head with cement mortar
- use galvanised rod ties for building into masonry
- use galvanised brackets clipped to frame stiles for fixing to stud frame
Non- fire-rated door frames:
- provide rebated jambs and head
- in stud walls profile frame to incorporate integral architraves on both sides of
wall.
Fire-rated doorsets:
Certificate Required
- supply and install approved fire-rated doorset assembly doors and frames to
comply with BCA requirements
- provide double rebated stiles and head of dimensions to suit fire doors.

To AS 2796.1 TIMBER DOOR FRAMES (MAINTENANCE ONLY)

AS 4785.1 Hardwood: Select Grade.
Softwood: Select Grade
Bare faced tenons on jambs. Full let-in jambs
General: Do not use Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) for door jambs
External door openings: out of 50mm thick solid rebated stock
Internal door opening: out of 38mm thick with planted stop (hinged doors)
generally and out of 38mm thick solid rebated stock for wet areas such as
bathrooms, shower rooms, WC, laundry and kitchen
Installation:
Trim: provide timber architraves internally to match frames and jamb linings and
other trim moulds as shown
Opening linings: Where opening has no door, finish reveals with linings out of
25mm timber, and back mould
Internal sliding door frames: Unless detailed otherwise:
- provide frame out of 32mm thick, one side with architraves and the other with
wide lining and back mould
- provide pelmet to conceal sliding track and carriages
Accessories
Face mounted: Provide overhead track supports and head and jamb linings
appropriate to the arrangement of the door, and removable pelmets at the head to
allow access to the wheel carriages for adjustment
Wheel carriages: Fully adjustable precision ball race type providing smooth, quiet
operation

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 77

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

7.3 Doors
GENERAL
- To current Australian Standards
- Do not use imported rainforest timber veneers
- Warranty: Minimum 5 years written warranty
EXTERNAL DOORS

Glazed Entry Common Lobbies:

Aluminium framed, commercial grade glazed door sets and frame.
Glazed Entry Common Lobbies (SEPP HSPD and Blocks of units):
Aluminium framed, commercial grade glazed door sets and frame.
Aluminium framed, commercial grade, side lights (if applicable). Finish
Powdercoated Aluminium (see METALWORK: Finishes)
Standard Front Entry Door
- Standard 920mm leaf for min 850mm clearance, 40mm thick flush type solid
core particleboard or blockboard cored (Type B bonded plywood/ hardwood
face).
- Door closer where nominated
- Fire rated security viewer to all front entry doors
- 1 doorstop fixed to door/wall or floor
- Smoke seal where required
- 100% acrylic paint, semi-gloss finish
Fire rated front door:
- 45mm thick -/60/30 FRL rated flush type, (Type D bonded plywood/ hardwood
face). Fire rated doors to comply with BCA requirements.
- Door closer with appropriate FRL
- 100% acrylic paint, semi-gloss finish
- 1 doorstop fixed to door/wall or floor
Rear entry, external laundry and/ or WC door:
- min 920mm leaf, 40mm solid core faced with waterproof hardboard
- Stormproof door seal
- Stormproof door seal
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish
- lever handle and door stop
Under Floor Access Door
- min 600mm leaf, galvanised steel, door and frame paint finish
INTERNAL DOORS

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 78

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

Internal Door Generally:

- min 920mm door leaf, semi solid core for min 850mm clearance/ painted
- 35mm thick flush lightweight solid block-board pine core door, solid
particleboard, MDF core to current Australian Standards
- type B bonded plywood/hardboard face
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish.
- lever handle and door stop
Common Room Internal Doors:
- min 920mm door leaf, semi solid core for min 850mm clearance/ painted
- 40mm lightweight solid core pine door with plywood face
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish.
- lever handle and door stop
Wet areas Internal Door:
- min 920mm door leaf, 40mm lightweight solid core faced with waterproof
hardboard
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish
- lever handle and door stop
Linen Cupboard Door (Built-in):
- semi solid core to suit width of cupboard
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish
- ‘D’ handle
Broom Cupboard Door (Built-in):
- semi solid core to suit width of cupboard
- 100% acrylic paint, full gloss finish
- ‘D’ handle
Tolerance:
Doors to comply with the following:
- Squareness: The difference between the lengths of diagonals of a door: ≤ 3 mm.
- Twist: The difference between perpendicular measurements taken from
diagonal corners: ≤ 3 mm.
- Nominal size (mm):
To AS 3959 * Height: +0, -2.
* Width: +0, -2.
Bushfire screens and seals
Protection: Protect glazed windows and doors from the ingress of embers.
Installation:
- provide 3mm maximum clearance between door leaf and frame
- hang doors with loose pin electro galvanised steel but hinges:
* three (3) 100 x 75mm x 2.5mm thick for external doors
* three (3) 85 x 60mm x 2.5mm for internal doors.
FACING
Doors are to be faced with pre-primed hardboard or type B bonded plywood and
facing is to be the same on both sides of the door.
Do not use imported rainforest timber veneers

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 79

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

FRAMED DOORS
Construct framed doors as shown on drawings if required
WEATHER MOULD
Provide to all external inward opening doors. Make joint between door and mould
with non-hardening waterproof putty, and fix in position with four 45 x 3mm
minimum diameter countersunk head screws. Where doors are hung over
concrete floors adjust height of mould to provide maximum 5mm clearance from
floor
SLIDING DOOR UNITS
Where shown on drawings provide sliding door units to detail and install to
manufactures instructions
To AS 1905.1 FIRE RATED DOORS
Internal materials: Inert mineral materials containing no asbestos products.
Framing: Increase the width of door leaf members or provide additional members
to accommodate hardware and grooves so that items of furniture are contained
within framing members and do not encroach on the core materials
Frames: Steel
Timber facings: Timber face veneers and edge strips
Metal facings: Flush faces and edges pressed from metal sheet, welded at joints
Identification: Doors and door frames must be identified and tagged. Fire
doorsets must be fitted with identification plates in accordance with AS 1905.1
verifying compliance of manufacture and stating fire-resistance rating.
Identification plates must be installed and positioned such that they are concealed
when the door is close and clearly visible when the door is open
Installation: Standard
SEALING
Seal top and bottom of doors after fitting and before hanging with:
- two (2) coats of paint
- keep all traces of such sealing off faces of doors

7.4 Aluminium Doorsets

GENERAL
Proprietary doorset system comprising of a commercial grade aluminium framed
glazed door or doors, hung to or otherwise supported by a fixed aluminium
doorframe, inclusive of the necessary hardware and accessories
To AS 2047 INSTALLATION
In accordance with the system fabrication details issued by the system
manufacturer
DOORS
Where required to be sliding, install on a recessed floor track system, flush with
internal floor finish together with guides, heavy-duty rollers, seals and brush
sweeps
Thresholds:
Where tiled threshold is not detailed or specified, provide aluminium door threshold

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 80

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

7.5 Windows
To AS 1288 GENERAL
AS 2047 Glass
AS 4055 Selection and installation: To AS 1288.
Windows including louvres
Selection and installation: To AS 2047
Provide proprietary window and sliding door sets inclusive of the necessary
hardware and accessories
Certificate Required External glazing systems
Energy ratings:
Refer to drawings for required energy ratings for window performance. Provide
certificate from window manufacturer showing compliance with required ratings
Weatherproofing
Flashings and weatherings: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds,
caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building
between frames and the building structure under prevailing service conditions,
including normal structural movement of the building
Fixing
Packing: Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing.
Prepared masonry openings: If fixing of timber windows to prepared anchorages is
by fastening from the frame face, conceal the fasteners by sinking the heads
below the surface and filling the sinking flush with a material compatible with the
surface finish
Trim
General: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim
using materials and finishes matching the window frames. Install to make neat and
clean junctions between frames and the adjoining building surfaces
WINDOW REQUIREMENT
- Window and Door Locks: Refer to Locks and Latches
- Window & door assemblies manufactured to comply with current Australian
Standards and to carry testing authorities endorsement mark.
- All window types & sliding doors tested to AS 2047 for deflection
(positive/negative), air infiltration, water penetration, operating force and proof
tests by NATA approved laboratory
- Window tests to qualify min. 700 Pa
- Each window/door branded in an upper channel/stile with a permanent label
indicating NATA Testing Certification, structural and water performance, and
manufacturers name e.g. AWA labelling scheme
- Installed to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers written
specification
- Doors toughened/laminated glass to current Australian Standards.
- Glass type and thickness to current Australian Standards except lower edge of
all glass in windows within 500mm from floor to be only ‘A’ safety grade
laminated or toughened glass in accordance with current Australian Standards.
- Issue window shop drawings with NATA testing authorities endorsement mark
to the Principal’s Authorised Person if manufacturers do not qualify for AWA
labelling scheme.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 81

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

Powdercoated finish: Refer to METALWORK - Metalwork Finishes. Frame to suit

required glazing built-up, minimum width of 70mm
- Achieve required WERS star rating for aggregate solar heat gain for building
type and climate
Flyscreen mesh:
- All flyscreen mesh to include AWA safety warning message stating that the
“Screen will not stop children falling out of windows.”
- Powder coated aluminium woven mesh (standard areas - wire diameter min
0.23mm woven aluminium)
- Powdercoated stainless steel (316 marine grade woven mesh for coastal and
bushfire areas min wire diameter 0.18mm woven stainless steel)
- Mosquito proof with average aperture of 1.5mm x 1.5mm
- Wire diameter min 0.23mm woven aluminium or min 0.18mm woven stainless
steel
- Ground Floor to include aluminium heavy duty grille (min 7.0mm sectional
thickness) pop riveted into screen frame
- Ground Floor hinged fixed with quick release lock for escape
- Flyscreen with aluminium grille (only when directed)
- As per Flyscreen Mesh Above
- Ground Floor and all accessible windows to include Aluminium Heavy Duty grille
(Min 7.0mm sectional thickness) pop riveted into screen frame with quick
release (install only as directed to AS5039)
- Complies AS5039 for Class 1 Type B Screens
- First floor and above secured to prevent unintentional openings
WARRANTY: Minimum 7 year written warranty to cover all materials, structural
integrity and defects subject to installation to manufacturers written specification
and regular maintenance program to relevant current Australian Standards
To AS 2047 WINDOW INSTALLATION
In accordance with the system fabrication details issued by the system
manufacturer.
Refer to architectural drawings for specific requirements.

7.6 Fixtures and Fittings

GENERAL
- Number and location as shown on drawings and/or scheduled
- install to manufacturer’s instructions
- spindle height for locks and latches to be 1000mm above floor, unless otherwise
identified
- Door and window hardware must be installed at the correct height in accordance
with AS 1428.1
To AS 4145.2 DOOR LOCKS & LATCHES

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 82

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

LOCKS & LATCHES SCHEDULE

- Provide locks and latches. Refer to drawings and schedules for item, number,
selection and location of locks and latches.
- If selection of lock or latch is included in the Contract but location is not shown
on drawings refer to Principal’s Authorised Person for approval.
- In the event that lock or latch selection is not included in the Contract select
lock/s or latch/es to meet the specification and Land and Housing Corporation
Deemed to Comply Product Register.
- In the event that lock or latch selection is not included in the Contract and there
is no specification for the lock or latch or the lock or latch is not included in the
Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register
recommend selection meeting relevant standards and obtain Principal’s
Authorised Person’s approval.
- Install to manufacturer’s requirements.

ITEM REQUIREMENT
Front and rear entry doors 1 deadlock & entrance lever set
Front entry doors to Door closer for fire rated doors
buildings

Internal Doors 1 Lever passage latchset.

Privacy locksets to bathroom/WC

Aluminium sliding Deadlock

Porch/Balcony doors

Common area entrance Deadlatch

doors Door closer

Common room doors Deadlatch

Door closer

Heavy duty screen doors Deadlock and lever

Electric meter cabinet Nightlatch and lever to authority requirements

Electric meter cupboard Nightlatch and “D” handle

Store room and toilets Nightlatch and lever

Stormproof door seals To each external hinged door

Door stops For each hinged door

Security viewer 1 on front entry door

Keyed window locks (key 1 per openable window factory fitted at the bottom of
alike for each dwelling) windows to allow window to be locked in fully closed position.

DOOR LOCKS & LATCHES REQUIREMENT

General
- To current Australian Standards
- Quality management to current Australian Standards
- For fire resistant door sets doors, lock sets must form part of an approved tested
doorset assembly

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 83

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

- Door locks to be a minimum 5 pin cylinder

- Door lock finish: satin chrome / chrome plated/stainless steel
- Keyed alike
- To all aluminium sliding doors supply and insert aluminium blocks into the upper
track of door in closed position leaving clearance for door to slide
Front and rear entry doors
cottages, villas & townhouses:
- double cylinder automatic lever handle dead-latch, and a lever latch set
- Coloured lock alert function on deadlatch
- Keyless opening from inside unless intentionally dead locked
- Automatic release of dead latch when opened with a key from outside
apartments 2 storeys and over (additional):
- must form part of an approved -/60/30 fire resistant doorset assembly
- double cylinder automatic lever handle dead-latch and a lever latch set
- Coloured lock alert function on deadlatch
- door closer (rack and pinion type)
Common area entrance doors
general & SEPP HSPD housing & community rooms:
- exterior escape dead latch (keyed lever latch from outside with quick release
from the inside)
- Coloured lock alert function on deadlatch
- door closer (cam operated)
Balcony/porch doors
aluminium sliding – general and SEPP HSPD housing:
- keyed double deadlocks
Internal doors
- Lever passage latchset. Privacy locksets to bathroom/WC
Heavy duty screen doors
- short backset mortice deadlock and lever
Storeroom & toilets
- nightlatch and ‘D’ handle (EA Master key system)
Electric meter cupboard
- nightlatch (fire rated) and ‘D’ handle (EA Master key system)
- Electric meter cabinet
WARRANTY:
Provide minimum 5 year warranty paint and tarnish, 10 year mechanical
To AS 4145.3 WINDOW LOCKSETS

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 84

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

WINDOW LOCKS REQUIREMENT

All OPENABLE WINDOWS MUST BE CAPABLE OF BEING LOCKED IN A
PARTIAL OPEN (safe ventilation) AND CLOSED POSITION
General and Liveable Housing
- Fit keyed window locks to all openable windows
- All windows must be capable of being locked in a closed position, and provide
safe ventilating locking points at 50mm and 100mm from closed position.
- For awning windows opening shall be restricted to 100mm.
- Do NOT install window locks to be installed on a consecutive code number basis
but for security purposes are to be installed on a random basis, with minimum
allowance for repetition of codings 1 per 100 dwellings
- Locks to be minimum 4 disc cylinder type keyed alike to 5 pin front door key.
- Fixings appropriate to window and door frame
- Independently tested for load bearing capacity to be able to hold window leaf or
sash in a closed and restricted position for 60 sec when a min of 350N applied
in the most unfavourable direction to the sash/leaf (test similar to EN14351-1
Windows and Doors - test for load bearing capacity of safety devices).
Window and Door Restrictors
- Window and door opening restrictor (capable of connection to all opening types)
opening at 100mm and also completely opened when restrictor is released
- Fixings appropriate to window and door frame
- If restrictor involves steel rope or steel chain must have a minimum breaking
strength of 3 KN
- Approved Child proof locking device or 4 disc cylinder key lockable restrictor—
keyed alike to 5 pin front door key
- Independently tested for load bearing capacity to be able to hold window leaf or
sash in a closed and restricted position for 60 sec when a min of 350N applied
in the most unfavourable direction to the sash/leaf (test similar to EN14351-1
Windows and Doors - test for load bearing capacity of safety devices)
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 year written warranty
Approval KEYED ALIKE LOCKS:
Provide a separate keyed alike system for:
- all external dwelling/unit entry doors
- windows, sliding doors, flyscreen doors and letterbox doors
- each unit is to be keyed differently to all other units on the site
- confirm requirements with the Principal’s Authorised Person before placing
orders
INTERCOM & ACCESS CONTROL
Where shown on drawings, provide:
- Vandal resistant intercoms, except for Senior and General Housing
- Min 2mm stainless steel front with toughened min 4mm polycarbonate surround
- Impact resistant and fixed with anti-vandal fixings
- Front plate to allow a min of six buttons with audio, modular set up to allow more
front plates to suit building configuration

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 85

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

- Space for shatterproof camera shielded by min 4mm clear polycarbonate

- Stainless steel buttons, tamperproof and shaped to prevent foreign bodies being
inserted underneath
- Linked to door release switch in units and internal intercom door release system.
- Steel reinforced recessed entry panel with buttons flush to outer surface and
anti-removal device. Must operate independently and not be reliant on other
communication devices
For Senior Housing:
- Door to stairway lobbies must not be lockable
- Each individual door must have door alarm bell
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 1 year written warranty
To AS 5039 HEAVY DUTY SCREEN DOORS AND WINDOW GRILLES
To AS 5040 Where indicated on the drawings provide:
Heavy duty screen doors:
Heavy duty screen door grilles installation:
To all ground, first and second floor of all external hinged and sliding doors including
dwelling/unit entries where permitted by building regulations (in lieu of insect screen
doors).
- Powdercoated aluminium frame - refer to METALWORK - Metalwork Finishes.
Colour to match windows.
- Provide door closers to all hinged screen doors.

FINISHES SCHEDULE
The following shall apply unless otherwise shown on the drawings:
Refer to drawings and schedules for selection and finishes.
Refer to METALWORK - Metalwork Finishes.

ITEM FINISH
Windows and sliding doors Aluminium - Powdercoat finish

Heavy duty screen doors Aluminium - Powder coat finish to match windows

Flyscreens Aluminium - Powder coat finish to match windows

Garage Doors Galvanised steel – colorbond

Window Awnings Galvanised steel – powder coat

Attenuating Screens Stainless steel mesh

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 86

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

HEAVY DUTY SCREEN DOORS REQUIREMENT

Provide Heavy Duty Screen Doors to front and rear entry doors to dwellings and
units:
Aluminium Door Framing
- Installation to current Australian Standards
- Min 69mm x 18mm x 1.2mm wall thickness extruded aluminium frame with
10mm wide x 13.5mm deep insert frame for grille
- Extruded PVC insert to bed heavy duty grille
- Joints to be mitred, staked and riveted
- Reinforcing corner stakes fixed to frames with SS 4mm diameter x 9.5mm rivets
(min 4 per corner)
- Door to be permanently branded on top rail with name of manufacturer
Tested to AS5039 for Dynamic impact, Jemmy, Pull, Probe and Shear
Aluminium Heavy duty Grille
- To current Australian Standards for Type 1 doors
- Min 7.0mm sectional thickness
- Grill secured to door by pop rivets (adequate pop rivets to satisfy AS 5039 tests)
Where indicated on drawings provide:
Aluminium Door Framing & Heavy duty Grille Finish
Standard Exposure Conditions
- Clear anodised to current Australian Standards (20 microns thick for all regions)
OR
- Thermoset powder coatings to current Australian Standards (50 microns thick)
Severe Coastal or Industrial Exposure Conditions
- Thermoset powder coatings to current Australian Standards (80 microns thick)
Screen Mesh
- Powder coated aluminium woven mesh (standard conditions)
- Powder coated stainless steel (316 marine grade) woven mesh for coastal and
bushfire areas.
- Mosquito proof mesh— with average aperture 1.5mm x 1.5mm
- Wire diameter—min 0.23 woven aluminium and min 0.18mm woven stainless
steel
- Secured to door to prevent easy removal
Hardware
- Three 75 x 30 mm hinges to current Australian Standards fixed with pop rivets
- Locks, refer DOORWAYS “locks & latches” (non fire-rated heavy duty screen
door)
- Fully adjustable dampened type door closer
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 87

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

FLYSCREEN
To all windows and doors not fitted with security screens or heavy duty flyscreens.
0.25mm yarn thickness and max 1.2mm aperture mesh size.
Screens
Aluminium framed flyscreens: Provide aluminium extruded or folded box frame
sections with mesh fixing channel, mitred, staked and screwed at corners. Provide
an extended frame section where necessary to adapt to window opening gear.
Mesh: Bead the mesh into the frame channel with a continuous resilient gasket, so
that the mesh is taut and without distortion.
Fixed screens: Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device
which permits removal for cleaning.
Hinged screens: Hinge at the top to give access to opening sash.
Sliding screens: Provide a matching aluminium head guide, sill runner, and frame
stile sections for screens not part of the window frame.
Hardware: Nylon slide runners and finger pull handle. Provide pile strip closers
against sash where necessary to close gaps.
* Anodised aluminium frame colour to match windows
SECURITY VIEWER
- Fire rated one way inside angle optical lens viewing greater than 1600 housed
in a CP on brass adjustable body to suit door thickness
- mount on centre line of door 1440mm high from floor.

DOOR CLOSERS
Provide:
- to Fire Resistant door sets a closer with appropriate FRL
- to entry doors
AS1530.7 STORMPROOF DOOR SEAL or SMOKE SEAL
Provide to entry doors:
- Storm seal fixed to base of door leaf
- Smoke seals fixed to door frame or base of door leaf as appropriate
- Seals to be independently tested with proprietary fire doors and solid core doors
- Tested in accordance with AS 1530.7 and capable of limiting smoke to 200ºC
for 30 minutes
- Independently tested to demonstrate that the product does not suffer from
significant wear and tear for up to and exceeding 10,000 open and close cycles
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 year warranty
DOOR STOPS
Provide wall mounted door stops for each hinged door comprising:
- a screw fixed based plate of nylon, cast brass or diecast material and a close
wound spiral wire with plastic tip
- total length approximately 75mm
- screw fix to wall 30mm from floor

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 88

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

To AS/NZS 4505 GARAGE DOORS

Provide where shown on the drawings garage doors:
Roller Doors (Domestic) Single and double doors
- Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading
- Tested to qualify to min. 1500 cycles of operation per year (where one cycle =
closed to open to closed position)
- Withstand min. dynamic pressure of 550N/m 2 applied externally/internally
normal to door
- Rolled-T / box section / single or double angled bottom rail, steel or aluminium
channel guides, interlocking slatted curtain
- Counterbalance roller deflection not to exceed 0.3% of span
- Galvanised/prime painted/polyurethane/colorbond finish to all metal
components
- Branded with manufacturers name
Panel Lift Door (Domestic) Single doors only up to 2400mm wide
- Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading
- Tested to qualify to min. 1500 cycles of operation per year (where one cycle =
closed to open to closed position)
- Withstand min. dynamic pressure of 550N/m 2 applied externally/internally
normal to door
- Galvanised/prime painted/polyurethane/colorbond finish to all metal
components
- Branded with manufacturers name.
Provide Remote Control Operation for Garage Doors for SEPP HSPD projects,
liveable housing units and housing for the accessible units.
Garage door clear opening height to comply with AS 1428.1
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 7 year written warranty
WINDOW AWNINGS REQUIREMENT
Provide where shown on drawings to protect windows and door openings from sun
and rain:
- Able to be fixed securely to wall
- Provides effective shading
- Sheds water away from window/door
- Made of non-combustible material
- Achieves and certified to AS1350.4 Fire Attenuation Test
- Achieve required window star rating for aggregate solar heat gain
Provide where shown on drawings to protect windows from radiant heat:
Radiant Heat Attenuating Screens
- Manufactured from stainless steel mesh
- Wire diameter for screen not less than 0.8mm
- Weave characteristic
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 5 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 89

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DOORS, WINDOWS AND HARDWARE

7.7 Window Coverings

GENERAL
Provide window coverings to external windows or internal glazed screens where
shown on the Design Drawings or as scheduled
Fabrics used for window coverings to comply with the following standards:
- Uncoated woven and knitted fabrics: AS 2663.1
- Coated woven and knitted fabrics: AS 2663.2
Performance classification of fabrics to be minimum Class 2
Do not use window covering materials that when subject to fire conditions, will emit
excessive smoke or toxic fumes.
Samples
- Provide sample of blind material
- Provide nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of fabric.
- Provide nominal 300mm length sample of track mechanism/ support rods.
- One of each type of visible fixing and accessory
Fabric roller blinds
- Roller blind fabric to be anti-static, 100% natural, PVC free and formaldehyde
free, no halogens and non-oil based
- Fixing brackets to be heavy duty aluminium in powdercoat finish unless
nominated otherwise in the drawings/ schedule.
- Edges of fabric blinds to have minimal gap as possible to eliminate light passing
in between
- Operation:
* Manual chain operation
* If motorised, system to have manual override in case of power failure
Installation
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
- Install tracks using manufacturer’s standard mounting brackets, clips, track
splicing and other necessary hardware
- Install window coverings to hang level, plumb, and true to line
- Fixings to be concealed and suitable for mounting tracks to the substrate
- Make necessary adjustments to ensure smooth operation free from binding, and
to provide an even, accurate alignment of the window covering in both open and
closed positions
- Control cords and chains must be installed to comply with the ACCC
Competition and Consumer (Corded Internal Window Coverings) Safety
Standard
- Provide child safety devices on all control cords and chains

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 90

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

08: Roofing and Roof Plumbing

8.1 General
ROOF CLADDING

To AS/NZS 1170.2 TERRAIN CATEGORY

In designated cyclonic areas carry out roof fixing in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions for cyclonic conditions

8.2 Quality and Work Practices

SAMPLES
- Provide 3 roof tile samples in specified material and colour.
- Provide nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of sheet roofing in
nominated material, finish and colour.
- Provide nominal 300mm x 300mm sample of all glass types.
- Provide nominal 300mm length sample of flashings and capping.
- Provide sample of each type of trim and accessory in specified colour.
- Provide nominal 300mm length sample of each type of gutter, gutter guard, and
downpipe in nominated material, finish and colour.
- Provide sample of guttering and downpipe junction (i.e. sumps, rainwater
heads, and overflows as applicable).
- Provide sample of gutter and downpipe support systems and fixings.
TESTING
Arrange for testing by an accredited testing agency or provide certification to verify
compliance with the requirements of the specification.
Testing to include:
- Movement testing.
- Load testing.
- Deflection testing.
- Wind loads.
- Thermal movement.
- Moisture movement.
- Thermal performance.
- Solar performance.
- Air permeability.
- Condensation.
- Capillarity.
- Weather and water resistance.
- Acoustic.
- Fire.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 91

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

To AS 1562.1 Roofing Material Testing

To AS 1562.3 - Metal roof sheeting tests.
To AS 4046 - Plastic roof sheeting tests.
- Roof tile tests.
To AS/NZS 3500.3 Roof Plumbing Testing
To AS/NZS 2179.1 - Roof drainage tests.
To AS/NZS 3500.3 - Metal rainwater goods tests.
To AS/NZS 4347 - PVC-U rainwater goods and accessories tests.
Series - Flashings and cappings tests.
GUARANTEES
Refer to PRELIMINARIES - Materials and Workmanship.
CUT TILES
Adjust to allow for full tiles between gutter and main or longest ridge. Cut tiles will
not be accepted.
COMMON WALLS BETWEEN UNITS
Finish tile battens 38mm clear of masonry common wall where extended to
underside of roofing and provide 25 x 1.2mm thick galvanised hoop strap lapping
120mm on each side of battens.
VERMIN-SEALING AND BIRD-PROOFING
All roofs and eaves are to be made secure against the entry of birds and vermin.
To AS 1562.1 METAL SEPARATION
Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals. The following Systems are
compatible and will prevent galvanic corrosion (do not mix the Systems):

System 1: System 2:

Drainage flow from higher to a Drainage flow from higher to a lower

lower surface: surface:

Flashing Flashing
Colorbond/Zincalume, Zinc, Alum, *Lead, Galvanised steel
Alcor, Galvanised Steel

Roofing Roofing
Colorbond/Zincalume, Tiles, Glass Galvanised steel, Unglazed tiles

Guttering and downpipes Guttering and downpipes

Colorbond/Zincalume Galvanised steel

* Whist drainage between lead and galvanised steel is acceptable, direct

material contact should be avoided.
CLEANING OFF
Completely remove exuded sealant from face of surfaces to be painted by neatly
cutting off at joints. Do not wipe or smear sealant over any surfaces required to be
painted.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 92

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

8.3 Sarking, Insulation and Vapour Barrier

GENERAL
Ceiling Insulation – Refer to Internal Linings
To AS/NZS 4200.1 SARKING
To AS/NZS 4200.2 Manufactured in accordance with AS 4200.1 and installed to AS4200.2
AS/NZS 4859.1 Provides required Thermal Performance in accordance with AS4859 and ICANZ
Vapour Barrier—rated Medium to High (<2 ng/Ns)
To AS/NZS 4200 Water Barrier—rated high AS4200 or better than 0.5 MNs/g
To AS/NZS 4040.4 Fall Arrest to meet AS4040.4
High tear resistance (Machine direction and Lateral direction greater than 850N
WARRANTY: Minimum 7 year written warranty
To AS 1530.2 Tiled roofs:
To AS/NZS 4200.2 - Low flammability and Heat Factor of 5 or less AS 1530.2
- High Tensile Strength greater than 18 kN/M in both directions
- UL2218-1998 (impact resistance)pass
- Provide sarking to the whole roof
- Lay at 90o to run of rafters with 150mm side lap, turn down 40mm into gutter
and secure to rafters with roof battens
- Keep sarking 38mm clear of ridges to permit ventilation
Anti-ponding boards: Refer to CARPENTRY AND JOINERY: Trims.
Metal Decked Roofs:
To AS/NZS1530.3 When bulk insulation is laminated directly to sarking membrane the composite
product must achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of
- Ignitability Index 0
- Spread of Flame 0
- Heat Evolved 0
- Smoke Developed 0-1
- Tensile Strength > 12kN/M in both directions
NOTE
Foil Laminates and Bubble Foil cannot be laid on top of the ceiling to cover joists,
rafters and any services. Can only be installed as sarking on top of the roof
trusses underneath the roofing
Sarking is installed in the roof with roofing wire underneath to ensure that sarking
remains in place
Check appropriate separation is maintained between electrical services and
installed Foil Laminates and Bubble Foil Sarking in roofs and external walls
To AS 2423 SOUND INSULATION AND VAPOUR BARRIER
Sheet roofing: cover whole of roof with 45 x 1mm galvanised wire netting,
stretched taut and stapled to top face of battens. Lay over netting 50mm thick
mineral wool insulation in long lengths from rolls with fire-retardant reflective foil
adhered to lower face. Close butt all joints. Seal laps and penetrations to form a
continuous air tight seal and seal to the walls

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 93

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

8.4 Tile Roofing

To AS 2049 GENERAL
CONCRETE TILES
Interlocking concrete roofing tiles with single or double underchecks.
TERRACOTTA TILES
All tiles must bear the impressed name or registered trade- mark of the
manufacturer.
To AS 1684 TILE BATTENS
SIZES
Rafters up to 600mm centres

Depth Width
softwood F4 min. 38mm 38mm
hardwood F8 min. 25mm 38mm

To AS 2050 TILE FIXING

Install roof tiles to manufacturer’s written recommendation for the particular
situation:
- lay tiles in straight horizontal rows having side joints staggered with adjoining
rows
- provide 75mm minimum end laps to single and double checked tiles
Bedding and pointing: bed and point accessories in coloured mortar to match the
accessories
Pointed verge: bed and point over proprietary zincalume flashing and fibre
cement bedding strip
Dry verge: lay tiles into preformed proprietary colorbond flashing strip to tile
manufacturer’s details
ADDITIONAL TILES
Provide tiles for future breakages on the basis of 1 tile per 10m2 of roofing and
store where directed by Principal’s Authorised Person.
WARRANTY FOR ROOF TILES
Provide minimum 25year written warranty for roof tiles.

8.5 Sheet Roofing

GENERAL
Design and installation to current Australian Standards and manufacturer’s written
Specification.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 94

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

To AS 1562.1 METAL ROOFING

Preformed sheet and purpose-made accessories (including fascias, ridge and
barge cappings) forming part of an approved proprietary metal roofing system.
Corrosion protection: To BCA Table 3.5.1.1.a. (Volume 2)
- Zincalume ® - min. AZ150 coating or Colorbond ® steel roofing - min. base
thickness 0.48mm (for standard conditions and straight roof lines)
Battens:
- Steel battens. Compatible with approved proprietary metal roofing system. Size
and spacing as per manufacturer’s specifications.
- 75 x 38mm hardwood at centres as recommended by the roof sheeting
manufacturer.
To AS 1562.1 Installation: to the manufacturer’s printed instructions
- fixing should cater for extreme weather conditions
- troughs of corrugations or ribbed profiles must not be pierced or drilled for fixing
- where factory-prefinished colour coating is specified exposed fixings are to be
of matching colour
- roof sheets to project 50mm into gutter.
- Profile rib closers at end and top of roof sheeting, and turn up pans.
WARRANTY FOR METAL ROOFING
Provide minimum 15year written warranty for metal roofing.
GLAZED ROOFING
To AS 1288. Glass selection and installation
Certification: Required.
PLASTIC SHEET ROOFING
To AS 4256.2. Un-plasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) sheet
AS 4256.3. Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP) sheet
AS 4256.5.
Polycarbonate
WARRANTY FOR PLASTIC SHEET ROOFING
Provide minimum 5year written warranty.

8.6 Roof Lights / Skylights

To AS 4285 GENERAL
Provide roof lights / skylights where shown on drawings:
- provide a proprietary roof lighting system including framing, fixing, trim
accessories and flashings
- fix in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
- Colour to match roof colour
To AS 3959 In bushfire prone areas provide roof lights / skylights to comply with AS 3959

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 95

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

SKYLIGHTS TUBULAR REQUIREMENT

To AS 4285 - As AS 4285 and achieve a test report certifying assembly can withstand wind
forces to AS 4055 and resist impact to AS 4256
- Roof Flashings an integral part of skylight to AS 2904
- Certification of greater than 95% specular reflectance from shaft
- Min. 250mm internal diameter
- Achieve a WERS rating better than 5 star for heat and cooling transfer
- Diffuser to reduce glare and to throw light over a broad area
- Internal fire damper with FRL60/60/60 when directed for buildings in Bushfire
areas or where required to achieve a 60 min fire rating
- Complete with necessary framing, fixing, brackets, trims, flashings & ceiling
diffusers
- Indelible marking with manufacturer’s name/ trademark
WARRANTY: Minimum 7 year written warranty.

8.7 Roof Plumbing

GENERAL
To AS/NZS 2179.1, Designed to meet the Plumbing Code
AS/NZS 3500.3. Installation to current Australian Standards, Plumbing Code and manufacturer’s
specification.
Ensure that cleaning of masonry has been carried out prior to installation of roof
cladding, fascias and guttering.
Provide gutters, capping, outlets, downpipes, flashings and other accessories
necessary to complete the roofing system and:
- provide continuous length guttering where possible
- do not join gutters less than 3m in length along the same wall
- gutters to have a minimum fall of 1:200 to outlets
- design gutters to allow for overflow
- provide gutter brackets at 1200mm maximum spacing
- valleys to be 450mm minimum wide
- downpipes to be a minimum 100mm x 50mm or 75mm round Downpipes
0.5mm BMT (G300) or 0.42 BMT (G550) gauge Zincalume factory pre-painted
in Colorbond colours. Prefabricate downpipes to the required section and shape
where possible. Connect heads to gutter outlets
- and, if applicable, connect feet to rainwater drains. Provide a removable
watertight access cover at the foot of each downpipe stack. Provide supports
and fixings for downpipes. Mitre at bend near gutter and have straight vertical
connection to ground.
- 115mm Zincalume Quad gutter or half round gutter 0.5mm BMT (G300) or
0.42mm BMT (G550) gauge factory pre-painted in Colorbond colours
- Fascia system 185 mm compatible with 115 Quad or half round gutters 0.5 mm
BMT (G300) or 0.42 BMT (G550) Zincalume factory pre-painted in Colorbond
colours
WARRANTY FOR GUTTERS DOWNPIPES AND FASCIAS
Provide minimum 20 year written warranty.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 96

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

OVERSTRAPS
Overstrap all gutters with 25 x 1.6mm thick metal overstrap compatible with the
guttering, bolt fix to each alternate gutter bracket, extend under roof covering and
fix to rafter with galvanised nails.
CHARGED DOWNPIPES
Provide PVC pipes and fittings where required for charged downpipes. Paint finish.
FLASHINGS
To AS/NZS 2904 Refer to 8.2 METAL SEPERATION table
Tiled roofs: Soft Zinc flashings - System 1
20 kg/m2 lead flashings - System 2

To AS 4200.2 8.8 Ventilation of Roof Space

Provide adequate means of cross-ventilation, irrespective of the type of roof
construction or the type of covering used.
For low-pitched and flat roof construction, provide additional eaves ventilation to
create a free air-flow through the roof cavity. Timber blocking of rafters or purlins
should allow free air-flow through roof cavity
For hotter climates, use additional gable or roof vents to reduce heat and humidity
build-up in the roof space
For climates with cold winters, provide adjustable ventilators to reduce air-flow in
winter and therefore heat loss
Under Eave Vents
- White high tensile plastic
- Curved air inlet holes to restrict insect entry
- Polypropylene or equivalent durable plastic
- Minimum size 400 x 200 mm
WARRANTY: Minimum 1 year warranty
Slotted Eaves Lining
- 100mm x 10mm slots at 50mm spacing with stainless steel insect mesh lining
to internal face.
Ridge Line Roof Ventilators
Roof mounted heat exhaust vents
Proprietary roof mounted ventilators or smoke/heat ventilating systems
Finish: Match adjacent roofing
- Made from aluminium or heavy duty high strength polymer
- Lubricated steel bearings
- Reinforced hail resistant dome
- Withstand wind velocities in excess of 200 km/hr
- Withstand rain penetration
- Painted or manufactured in Colorbond colour to match roof colour, or clear
plastic dome
To AS 2427 - Fixed using corrosion resistant self-drilling screws or fasteners (appropriate to
AS 2665. environment) and finished to match roofing materials
- Flashed and fitted correctly above and through the roof with two part flashings
WARRANTY: Minimum 15 year warranty including bearings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 97

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

8.9 Safety Anchors/Brackets

To AS/NZS 5532 For buildings of Class 2 under BCA, make structural provision for future installation
of safety anchors/brackets to meet SafeWork NSW requirements and Work Health
and Safety (WHS) Regulation 2011 including “Code of Practice, Safe Work on
Roofs - Part 2 - Residential" issued by NSW WorkCover.
Install to manufacturer's recommendations.
To AS 1657
Roof access walkways, catchers, platforms, ladders and guardrails
Provide compliant walkways and access to roof mounted services to AS 1657

8.10 Roof Finishes Schedule

The following shall apply unless otherwise shown on the drawings:
- Refer to drawings and schedules for selection and finish of roof element (item).
- In the event that roof element and/or finish selection is not included in the
Contract select roof element to meet the specification and Land and Housing
Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register and obtain Principal’s
Authorised Person’s approval for the recommended finish.
- In the event that roof element and/or finish selection is not included in the
Contract and there is no specification for the roof element or the roof element is
not included in the Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product
Register recommend selection and obtain Principal’s Authorised Person’s
approval, including approval of the finish.
- Install to manufacturer’s requirements.

ITEMS MATERIAL / REQUIREMENT

Roof cladding Refer to drawings

Roof valleys To match roof (where metal roofing is selected)

Roof flashing Colorbond for metal roofs. To match roof colour

Anti-ponding boards Fibre cement sheet

Fascias Metal - Colorbond

Refer to drawings

Barges Metal - Colorbond

Refer to drawings

Eaves/ soffits Fibre cement sheet/painted

Gutters Metal - Colorbond

Downpipes Metal - Colorbond

Charged downpipes PVC – Painted

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 98

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ROOFING

Leaf guards - Fitted to all gutters and valleys within 10m from tree canopies
above the gutter level.
(confirm with client)
Select to meet the following criteria:
- Provide where there are trees near the building and the tree
canopy is within 5m the edge of roof gutter
- For “Ogee” profile gutters fit perforated metal (zincalume or
aluminium) leaf guards.
- For all other gutter profiles fit metal (stainless steel or
aluminium) mesh leaf screens. The mesh shall be fastened to
front lip of the gutter and secured to the roof (for tiled roof under
second row of tiles and for metal roof held down with clips to the
roof end).

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 99

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

09: Internal Linings

9.1 General
EXTENT
Plasterboard linings: All framed ceilings, walls and direct adhesive fixing to
masonry walls except where otherwise specified and/or shown on drawings.
Fibre cement sheet linings: Wall linings in bathrooms, shower rooms, WCs,
laundries and other “wet areas” and ceiling linings in bathrooms and separate
laundries.
Wood based sheet/ board linings: Wall linings on suitable support framing to
masonry walls unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

9.2 Quality and Work Practices

To AS/NZS 2589 GENERAL
To manufacturer’s recommendations.
STABILISING OF FRAMING
Wait for a period of 14 days after roof covering has been fixed before fixing internal
linings.
PREPARATION
Check and fix all noggings, furring, trimmings; straighten and pack studs, joists.
JOINTS
Flush joints: Provide recessed edge and setting compound and finish flush with
perforated reinforcing tape
External corner joints: Make joints over zinc-coated steel corner beads.
Control joints: Install purpose-made zinc-coated control joint beads at not more
than 12 m centres and to coincide with structural movement joints.
Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.
Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper
tape in bedding compound.
Butt Joints
Use maximum length sheets to minimise butt joints. Butt joints are permitted in
ceiling sheets only where sheet length exceeds 4800mm.
FLASHINGS
Ensure that all wet area flashings are installed before fixing wall linings.
SEALS
Form watertight seal between wall sheeting and bath/shower base flange with a
continuous bead of approved non-hardening silicon sealant.
MOVEMENT JOINTS
As recommended by manufacturer.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 100

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

TOLERANCES
The installation must accommodate the required tolerances including differences
between actual site dimensions and dimensions shown on the Design Drawings.
Permitted deviations
Bearing surface of finished framing:
- Gypsum lining: To AS/NZS 2589.
To AS/NZS 2589 - Other linings: Nominal 4mm measured from a 1800mm length straightedge.

9.3 Materials
GENERAL
To AS 2588, 2589 Gypsum plasterboard:
Approval To approved manufacture branded, with recessed edges:
- Install to manufacturers specification and AS 2589
To AS/NZS 2908.2
- Min 13mm thick sheeting for walls
- Paper weight ≥220 gsm
- Density ≥1000kg/m³
- Tested to BCA requirements ‘Specification C1.8 Structural Tests for Lightweight
Construction’ and to achieve the following results:
* resistance to impact BCA test method 5(c) of ≤150mm
* resistance to indentation BCA test method 5(d) of ≤ 4.8mm
* Achieve fire rating
100% recyclable
Warranty: Minimum 10 year written warranty.
Masonry walls:
Glue fixed to masonry. 100% acrylic paint, semi- gloss finish. Kitchen to have anti
mould agent.
Stud framed walls:
Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels,
if direct fixing of the sheeting is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment
of the framing or substrate.
Ceilings:
- Minimum 10mm thick for ceiling joists at 450 c/s and 13mm for 600c/s.
Fibre cement sheet:
Wet area lining:
- To approved manufacture branded. minimum 6mm thick with recessed edges
Do not use adhesive fixing alone
- fibre cement lining glue fixed to masonry
- fibre cement lining fixed to close spaced stud walls
Plywood sheet:
WBP grade plywood to comply with the following:
To AS/NZS 2270 - Interior use generally: To AS/NZS 2270
To AS/NZS 2271 - Interior use, exposed to moisture: To AS/NZS 2271

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 101

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

Hardwood timber sheet:

To AS 2796.2 Select grade hardwood timber sheet.
Timber veneers:
To AS/NZS 2097 Decorative timber veneers with matching solid edge strips.
Crown cut and book matched, unless nominated otherwise.
Accessories:
Provide and install to manufacturer’s instructions the following:
- adhesives
- nail and clouts
- perforated angles
- jointing tape
- jointing cement
Edge Trim: Provide purpose made zinc coated steel corner beads, casing beads,
stop beads and the like.

9.4 Wall/Ceiling Trim

VENTS
Provide minimum of two (2) wall vents to wet areas (e.g. bathroom/ laundry) in
location show on drawings or as directed by Principal’s Authorised Person.
CEILING ACCESS HOLE (NON FIRE RATED)
Provision:
Trim for access hole 550 x 600mm minimum and fit with a framed cover sheet with
same material as ceiling. Opening must comply with requirements of any authority
having jurisdiction. Finish around opening with 50 x 20mm batten to support
access hole cover, so that cover is flush with ceiling.
Location:
Ceiling access panels are to be located as follows:
- Access from each individual unit to the roof space over
- To each First Floor and single storey unit located in the hall and stair halls as
required to gain access to the roof space
- Access to the sub floor plumbing in 2 storey dwellings from the lower floor
tenancy
- To each First Floor and single storey unit located in the hall and stair halls as
required to gain access to the roof space
CORNICES
- Shadow set edge or recessed edge plasterboard cornice or fibrous plaster, to all
lined ceilings
WALL/DOOR & WINDOW FRAME
- Finish plasterboard flush with window or door frame using purpose made metal
stopping angle to edge of plasterboard, fixed in accordance with manufacturers
details
- Where detailed on drawings, provide recessed stopping angle

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 102

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

9.5 Sound Rated Walls/Ceilings

GENERAL
Construct sound rated ceilings, bulkheads and/or walls with sound insulation rating
to BCA requirements. Include in the Architectural Documentation the required
acoustic rating
Certificate Required CERTIFICATION
On completion of sound-rated ceilings and/or walls the Contractor is to certify that
materials and installation comply with tested systems that meet code requirements
for sound-rated systems

9.6 Fire Rated Ceilings/Walls

GENERAL
To AS 1530.4 Construct fire rated ceilings, bulkheads and/or walls to the required fire rating
requirements
- Where required by BCA, ceiling to have resistance to incipient spread of fire for
a minimum FRL of 60min and enable the ceiling system to achieve an FRL of
60/60/60
- Tested to AS 1530.4 WET AREA LINING
- Fibre cement sheeting - Type B Category 2 to AS 2908.2
To AS 2908.2 - Min 6mm thick
Warranty: Minimum 10 year written warranty
Certificate Required CERTIFICATION
On completion of fire-rated ceilings and/or walls the Contractor is to certify that
materials and installation comply with tested systems that meet code requirements
for fire-rated systems.
Provide manufacturer’s published and certified data to demonstrate fire
performance as follows:
To AS 5637.1 - Fire hazard properties: To BCA Spec C1.10 and AS 5637.1.
To AS 1530 - Fire resistance level: To AS 1530.

FIRE-RATED ACCESS HOLES

Minimum 450 x 600mm with recessed cover in accordance with the manufacturer’s
details for the approved system.
WIRING PENETRATIONS
As required by ceiling system.

9.7 Insulation
GENERAL
Provide wall and ceiling insulation as shown on the drawings
Architectural Documentation to indicate insulation requirements and NCC
compliance

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 103

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

WALL INSULATION
Perforated foil:
- provide to all external brick veneer walls
- provide to all cavity faces of brick veneer studs
- provide to all external timber framed walls
- fix to manufacturer’s instructions
To AS 3999 Bulk insulation:
- provide to all external brick veneer walls
- provide to all external timber framed walls
- fix to manufacturer’s instructions
Cavity brick wall insulation
Refer to MASONRY ELEMENTS Insulation in wall cavities
Non-combustible cavity wall insulation
- Provide to external walls where shown on drawings
To AS/NZS 4859.1 CEILING INSULATION
AS 1530.1 - insulate all ceilings with bulk thermal insulation
- extend over plates and prevent spilling into cavities by use of edge boards. Trim
around ceiling vents, exhaust fans etc.
- fixing to manufacturer’s instructions
Acceptable insulation:
Glass fibre (batts)
Warranty Required Made of melted glass spun onto a mat of fine fibres
- Pre-cut to width of ceiling rafters
- Sound absorption properties – achieve Noise reduction co-efficient of 0.8 or
better
- Product to contain at least 70% recycled content (glass)
- To achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of
Ignitability Index 0
Spread of Flame 0
Heat Evolved 0
Smoke Developed 0–1
- Rated non-combustible on AS1530.1
- Indoor air quality - formaldehyde release less than 0.01 mg/m²/24 hours.
- Fibreglass batts thermal insulation shall comply with the Building Regulations
and relevant Standard (AS/NZs 4859.1), and shall consist of not less than 95%
the weight glass wool (inorganic oxides or minerals rock slag or glass) and
binders
Glass Fibre (Blankets)
Properties same as for Glass fibre batts above
Warranty Required - Blanket insulation with Sarking only to be installed with metal roofing and
installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specification (installed
between top of the trusses and metal roofing or between raked cathedral ceiling
and roofing
- Glass fibre blankets shall not be installed on top of the flat ceiling to cover
rafters, joists or services

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 104

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

INTERNAL LININGS

Rockwool (Batts)
Made from melted volcanic rock and recycled mineral slag spun into a mat of fine
fibres
To AS/NZS 4859.1 - Pre-cut to width of ceiling rafters
- To AS/NZS 4859.1: Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings
- Sound absorption properties – achieve a Noise reduction co-efficient of 0.8 or
better
- Product to contain at least 20% recycled content (mineral slag)
- To achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of
Ignitability Index 0
Spread of Flame 0
Heat Evolved 0
Smoke Developed 0–1
To AS 1530.1
- Rated non-combustible on AS 1530.1
- Low VOC emissions less than 0.01mg/m²/24 hours
- Rockwool batts thermal insulation shall comply with the Building Regulations
and relevant Standards (AS/NZS 4859.1), and shall consist of not less than 95%
the weight mineral wool (inorganic oxides or minerals, rock slag or glass) and
binders
Glass fibre, rockwool (blankets). Blankets shall be installed between the top of the
trusses and metal roofing only or between raked cathedral ceiling and roofing.
Note that cellulose fibre, polyester and wool batts are not approved for use.
Rockwool (Blankets)
Properties same at for Rockwool Batts above
Rockwool blankets cannot be installed on top of the flat ceiling to cover rafters,
joists or services
NOTES
Insulation shall be installed appropriately to avoid interference with electrical and
other services and appliance and do not compromise safety
Install Fire rated covers inside ceiling as required or ensure appropriate separation
Bulk insulation that does not achieve a Non Combustible rating as per AS 1530.1
To AS 1530.1 is not approved.
WARRANTY CEILING INSULATION: FOR THE LIFE OF THE DWELLING
ROOF INSULATION
Refer to ROOFING AND ROOF PLUMBING: Insulation, sarking and vapour
barrier.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 105

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

10: Plumbing and Sanitary Plumbing

Plumbing & Drainage
Code of Practice (NSW) 10.1 General
AS 3500.1, AS 3500 1.1
AS 3500.2, AS 3500.2.1
AS 3500.3, AS 3500.3.1
AS 3500.4, AS 3500.4.1
AS 3500.5
MP 52 , MP 78
Plumbing Code of
Australia (PCA)

AUTHORITIES AND APPROVALS

Submit documents and obtain all regulatory Authority approvals in connection with
the work and:
* pay all fees and charges for work carried out and materials supplied by the
regulatory Authority
* submit evidence of regulatory Authority approval to the Principal’s Authorised
Person before Completion/ Practical Completion.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Materials and Workmanship.
At the completion of the works, the contractor is to certify that the materials and
installation comply with the code requirements.
WORK OUTSIDE SITE
Make necessary arrangements with adjoining property-owners and the relevant
Authorities, for all work beyond the site boundaries.
EXISTING SERVICES
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Site.
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Provide at Completion/ Practical Completion work-as-executed drawings to the
same scales as the contract drawings, showing the locations and depths of all
pipes and fittings.

10.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice to the Principal’s Authorised Person and the regulatory
Authority so that inspections can be made of the following:
- service trenches
- works ready for tapping and/or cutting into regulatory Authorities water, sewer
or drainage mains
- works ready for testing
- work prior to covering
- completed work
- any other inspections required by the regulatory Authority

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 106

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

10.3 Quality and work practices

GENERAL
Water service:
To AS 3500.1 Water service pipes shall not be embedded or cast into concrete structures
To AS.35001.1 If the pipes have to be embedded or cast into concrete structures then they shall
To AS 3500.4 be within conduits or sleaves
To AS 3500.4.1

To AS 3500.2 Sanitary plumbing: To AS

To AS 3500.2.1
To AS 2032

Dissimilar metals:
Do not install copper in contact with steel, zinc, or other materials likely to generate
electrolytic or galvanic corrosive action. Make junctions with fittings manufactured
in suitable compatible material
Expansion and contraction:
install the pipework with sufficient bends, expansion loops or expansion devices to
absorb its own expansion and contraction without developing excessive stresses
in the pipework connected equipment, or the supporting structure.
Fixing to masonry:
use galvanised steel or non-ferrous metal bolts or screws into expanding metal
masonry anchors
SAMPLES
- Provide one sample of each sanitary appliance, fixture, fittings, accessories, and
any exposed plumbing in nominated material, finish and colour
TESTING
Test installation as required by regulatory Authority:
- leave work exposed until inspected and tested
Rejection: pipework will be rejected if the water loss exceeds the limit permitted
by the relevant test and must be immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the
relevant Authority
CLEANING
Provide temporary covers to openings and keep the system free of debris during
construction
COMMISSIONING
After satisfactory completion, turn on control and isolating valves and leave the
service in full operational condition
To AS 3500.1.1 FLUSHING OUT OF LINES
To AS/NZS 3500.5

ACCESSIBILITY
Install pipework so that it is accessible within ducts or non-habitable enclosed
Approval spaces such as roof spaces, subfloor spaces:
- obtain approval for the location of any exposed pipework
- do not run pipework in cavities
- obtain approval for the location of inaccessible pipe runs and fittings, and record
on work-as-executed drawings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 107

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

BUILDING PENETRATIONS
sleeves: provide purpose-made metal or plastic sleeves (in fire-rated elements,
metal sleeves only) formed from pipe sections:
- prime paint ferrous surfaces
- maintain fire and acoustic ratings
chases:
- cut with a power saw
Approval - do not chase reinforced concrete without approval
- do not chase pipework into masonry or concrete across any movement joint
- insulate or cover chased-in pipework with a suitable flexible material to allow for
expansion and contraction without damage to the pipework or surrounding
element and surface finish
To AS 3500.1.1 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS
AS/NZS3500.5 minimum cover over pipe:
pipework under slabs: protect copper pipework laid in the ground beneath a
concrete floor slab by:
- encasing in continuous UPVC pipework sleeves
- encasing in PVC-coated tube sealed to prevent ingress of moisture
PIPEWORK SUPPORTS
Provide supports including hangars, saddles, bolted clips, and the like, suitable to
secure above ground pipework to adjacent surfaces and to support it at joints, at
changes of direction, and at intervals necessary to prevent sagging of the
pipework
Pipe support materials to be the same as the piping, or galvanized or non-ferrous
metals, with bonded PVC-U or glass fibre woven tape sleeves where needed to
separate dissimilar metalsMake provision for adjustment of gradient as required
and for thermal movements in the pipeline
PROTECTION
Protect all pipework where exposed to vehicular impact
WET AREA WATERPROOFING
Refer to TILING AND WET AREA WATERPROOFING

10.4 Materials
WATER SERVICES
Copper is required and must be allowed for in the Tender.
Contractors may use alternative piping system (PE-X pipes) on a project only with
written approval from the Principal’s Authorised Person/ Principal’s Representative.
Approval must be in place prior to commencement of construction.
Copper tubes: Type B
To AS 1432
Identification: Install the tube so that the marking is visible for inspection.
To AS/NZS 2492 PE-X pipes – Only systems approved by LAHC (Deemed to Comply Products
Register)
Fittings: dezincification-resistant
Capillary fittings: Use with silver brazed joints. Do not use soft solder or solder
insert capillary fittings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 108

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

To AS 3688 compression fittings:

To AS 3688 screwed fittings:
To AS 3688 flanges:
SANITARY PLUMBING
To AS/NZS 1260 UPVC pipes and fittings:
Class SWV
To AS/NZS 2032 installation:
To AS/NZS 3879 solvent cement:
To AS 2887 waste traps:
To AS 3500.4.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
Insulate all hot water pipework.
STORMWATER
Refer to Roofing and roof plumbing.
Rainwater tank:
Location of pump controls: for communal tanks within a common open space in a
vandal proof enclosure.
Detention tank:
Underground tank:
During construction, use temporary covers to openings and keep the system free
of debris. On completion, flush the system using water and leave it clean.

10.5 Fixtures and Fittings

GENERAL
- Provide fixtures and fittings. Refer to drawings and schedules for item, number,
selection and location of fixtures and fittings.
- If selection of fixture/s or fitting/s is included in the Contract but location is not
shown on drawings refer to Principal’s Authorised Person for approval.
- In the event that a fixture or fitting selection is not included in the Contract select
fixture/s and fitting/s to meet the specification and Land and Housing
Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register.
- In the event that a fixture or fitting selection is not included in the Contract and
there is no specification for the fixture or fitting or the fixture or fitting is not
included in the Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product
Register recommend selection meeting relevant standards and obtain
Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval
- Install to manufacturer’s requirements
- Provide proprietary bench fixing and water sealing accessories
- Chromium plated brass or stainless steel fixings where visible
- Hot dip galvanised steel fixings where not visible

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 109

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

PLUMBING FIXTURES & FITTINGS SCHEDULE

ITEM REQUIREMENT
Garden Taps (standpipes) Copper Alloy
1 each to front and rear of each dwelling/unit

Garden Taps In multi-unit developments. Located in common areas

Water heater (gas, electric) 1 per dwelling

Tempering valves All dwellings other than designated as accessible

To comply with National Plumbing Code
To achieve 50 o C outlet temperature

Tempering valves and For all dwellings designated as “not liveable” and SEPP
plumbing breaching piece, HSPD provide plumbing breaching piece in accessible box for
for future fitting of TMVs, if future thermostatic mixing valve (TMV)
required

Rainwater tanks As required. Connect with fittings and fixtures as required by

BASIX

Sink 1 per kitchen

Taps and spout (sink) 1 per kitchen sink

Toilet pan, seats and cover 1 per bathroom

For all SEPP HSPD provide higher toilet seat to AS 1428.1
and lever type flushing controls preferred.

Basin - for SEPP HSPD

- 1 per bathroom
- wall mounted on manufacturer’s brackets

Vanity 1 per bathroom

Bowl or Bowl and benchtop

Bath 1 per bathroom

- in 3, 4, 5, & 6 bedroom dwellings
-in 2 bedroom General Housing dwellings only

Shower rose 1 per shower area

Taps (basin, bath, shower) - 1 set and spout per vanity unit or basin
- 1 set per shower recess
-1 set per bath
- capstan or quarter turn lever handles with ceramic disc or
“Aqualoc” washers

Laundry Tub - 1 per dwelling

- 45 litres for 0 to 2 bedroom
- 68 litres for 3 to 6 bedroom
- for separate laundry tub set flush into a bench is preferred

Taps and spout (Laundry) - 1 set per tub hot and cold water with laundry spout
- 1 set, quarter turn, for washing machine connection of hot
and cold water

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 110

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

SEPARATE TOILET

Toilet pan, seats and cover 1 per separate toilet

If required – accessible toilet pan for: SEPP HSPD,
accessible housing
1 per bathroom /separate toilet
Vitreous China pan with S-trap
Equal to Caroma Care Pan – Trident Accessible Pan”
Basin - 1 per bathroom
- vitreous china 400mm x 400mm min
- wall mounted on manufacturer’s brackets

Taps and spout - 1 set and single spout per basin

Capstan or quarter turn lever handles with ceramic disc or
“Aqualoc” washers

COMMON ROOM
KITCHEN/ KITCHENETTE

Sink 1 per bench-top

Taps and spout 1 set per sink

TOILET

Toilet pan, seats and cover 1 per separate toilet

If required – accessible toilet pan for: SEPP HSPD,
accessible housing
1 per bathroom /separate toilet
Vitreous China pan with S-trap
Equal to Caroma Care Pan – Trident Accessible Pan”

Urinal (If required for male only bathroom)

Basin - 1 per bathroom

- vitreous china 400mm x 400mm min
- wall mounted on manufacturer’s brackets

Taps and spout - 1 set and single spout per basin

Capstan or quarter turn lever handles with ceramic disc or
“Aqualoc” washers

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 111

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

KITCHEN SINK REQUIREMENT

To AS/NZS 1730 - Number and location as shown on drawings and/or scheduled.
- To current Australian Standards
- Standards Mark/Water Mark/certificate of approval
- All kitchen sinks to be supplied with plug and waste
- Min. 302 polish finished stainless steel only
- Indelibly marked with manufacturers trademark
- Sinks to suit 3 tap set configurations (lever handle hot tap, level handle cold tap
and spout)
Bed-sitters/studio
- Single Bowl sink. Sink and single bowl drainer to suit min 930mm long and min
13.5L sink
- Sink to suit narrow 450mm bench tops
1 to 2 bedroom dwellings
- One and a half bowl sink. Sink to be minimum of 1200mm long, width to suit
narrow 450mm or 600mm bench tops
- Main sink to be min 20L

3 or more bedroom dwellings

- Double One and a half (1 ½ ) bowl sink with double drainers. Sink to be min
1400mm long x 450mm wide.
- Both sink bowls to be min 20L
Accessible modifications/fit-out
- For accessible modifications/fit-out maximum bowl depth 155mm
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 25 year written warranty
BASIN REQUIREMENT
To AS/NZS 1730 - To current Australian Standards
- Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
- White (min. bowl size 500x400mm) vitreous china 2/3 hole version
- Wall mounted on manufacturers metal brackets with ring connector to waste
outlet
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- All Basins to be supplied with plug and waste
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 2 year written warranty
TOILET REQUIREMENT
General and Liveable Housing
To AS 1172.1 - To current Australian Standards
- Standard Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval
- Pedestal pan to be white vitreous china
- Cisterns to be vitreous china or heavy duty grade PVC with internal overflow
- 4.5/3L dual flush toilet suites (min 4 Star WELS rating)
- Toilet and Cisterns to be vandal resistant or fitted with a ‘Vandal Resistant
Conversion kit’
- Installed to manufacturers written specification

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 112

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

Provide accessible toilet pan for:

- Accessible dwelling
1 per bathroom/separate toilet
To AS 1428.1 Vitreous China pan with S-trap
Equal to Caroma: Care Pan – Trident Accessible Pan
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 1 year written warranty
TOILET SEAT AND COVERS REQUIREMENT
- To current Australian Standards.
- Constructed of solid plastic – Vandal Resistant with vandal resistant fittings
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 1 year written warranty
BATH REQUIREMENT
All Housing Types
- To current Australian Standards
To AS 1172.5 - Standard Mark (optional) /WaterMark/ Water Authority certificate of approval.
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/Trademark (visible in the installed
position)
- Rectangular – Min. 1500x750mm wide x 380mm deep
- Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from min. 3.5mm thick sheet,
glass reinforced with 10mm dia. Steel rod rim reinforcement
- Pressed metal manufactured from min. 1.6mm thick steel drawn seamless from
one sheet of metal, grip coated all over and finished internally with white vitreous
Solvent-bourne (non-skid base)
- Min. 10mm high tiling bead to all baths built into adjacent walls
- Fitted with plug & waste
Retrofit Acrylic (Waterbourne) Bath Linings to Existing Bath
(For upgrading works only where specified on drawings)
- Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from min. 3.5mm thick sheet
reinforced with a fibreglass backing
- Dimensions to fit over existing bath size
- Grate and adaptor to suit existing waste drain
- Fitted with plug and waste
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 10 years written warranty for Acrylic
(Waterborne) baths and 30 years written warranty for pressed metal baths

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 113

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

LAUNDRY TUB REQUIREMENT

- To current Australian Standards.
- Standards Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval
- Detachable PVC or polyolefin bypass connected at top to current Australian
Standard
Tub
- Min. 30 litre capacity (bed sit)
- Min. 45 litre capacity (1 to 2 bedroom)
- Min. 68 litre capacity (3 to 6 bedroom)
- Min. 302 stainless steel
- Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/trademark
- Fitted with plug and waste
Cabinet
- White enamel/Colorbond finish to steel
WARRANTY: Provide 25 years warranty for stainless steel & 10 years warranty for
the cabinet

10.6 Accessories – Water Service

GENERAL
Provide each fixture with accessories, such as taps, valves and outlets as required
to complete the works
POTABLE WATER REQUIREMENT
Copper is required and must be allowed for in the Tender.
Contractors may use alternative piping system (PE-X pipes) on a project only with
written approval from the Principal’s Authorised Person/ Principal’s Representative.
Approval must be in place prior to commencement of construction.
Alternate piping shall meet the following requirements.
- To current Australian Standards
- Water Mark certificate of approval
- Recyclable at end of life
- Satisfies tests for contaminants to comply with AS 4020 including:
- VOC’s (Volatile Organic Compounds).
- Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds
- Regulated heavy metals (cadmium, lead, arsenic, barium, beryllium, Chromium,
mercury, selenium, thallium etc.
- Any other contaminant lifecycle tests
- Able to be joined using standard (non-exclusive) connectors which can
withstand required pressure levels
- Heat resistance able to withstand temperatures up to 85 degree Celsius without
failure
- Potable water delivered through the system contains no tainting affecting taste
or odour after accelerated tests representing 20 years use – complying to
AS/NZS 4020and AS 2492
WARRANTY: Provide 25 years warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 114

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

MAIN CONNECTION
Connect to the supply authority’s main through a stop valve to the building and
provide a meter to each dwelling unit, in accordance with the Supply Authority’s
requirements and using components supplied or approved by the Authority.
TAPS
Copper alloy taps: dezincification-resistant.
Quarter turn lever handles with ceramic disc or “Aqualoc” washers
Locate hot tap to the left of, or above, the cold water tap
TAPS REQUIREMENT
Bib tap/Pillar tap/ Hob mounted sink set/Wall sink set – General
- Materials, dimensions, finishes and performance tests to current Australian
Standards
- Water supply metal bodied taps to current Australian Standards
- Standard Mark/. Water Mark/ Certificate of Approval
- Hot and cold water taps to be vandal resistant
- Basin and kitchen sink taps – 4 star WELS rating
- Other than basin or kitchen sink taps- 3 star WELS rating
- Taps incorporating an in tap flow regulator valve equivalent to “Aqualoc” or
pressure compensating flow control
- Vandal proof aerator
- Set complete with outlet, shower rose, spout or arm, and handles. Handles to
meet adaptable requirements and be easily changed from minimum 65mm lever
for separate hot and cold taps to longer levers

- All components made of brass base material, chrome plated or satin chrome or
powder coated finishes,
- Dezincification resistant
Liveable Housing
- Lever handles lever length 65mm to 80mm handles
- Quarter turn taps with ceramic discs or “Aqualoc” fitted to taps for kitchen sink,
bath, shower and basin. Laundry tub spout fitted with “Aqaualoc”
Accessible Housing
- Long lever tap handles lever length 90mm to 150 mm (surgeon type) subject to
approval or OT’s recommendation
- Quarter turn taps with ceramic discs or “Aqualoc” fitted to bath, shower and
basin taps. Laundry tub taps fitted with “Aqualoc”
- NO Capstan handle taps or Flick Mixer Taps without approval from the
Principal’s Authorised Person
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 3 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 115

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

SHOWER ROSES REQUIREMENT

General and Liveable Housing
- Water saving ‘3 STAR WELS’ rated not more than 9L/min.
- Brass base arm and shower rose, with brass ball joint. Chrome plated or satin
chrome or powdercoated finish
- Tamper proof shower head
Seniors or Accessible Housing
- Handheld shower rose mounted on vertical grab rail
- Min 600mm - 32mm stainless steel grade 304 grab rail
- Adjustable handheld shower rose cradle
- Hygienic seal flange covers
- Fixings of grab rail to support appropriate static load
- Brass wall flange with dual check non return valve
- Shower hose - elastic inner, supported by polyester cords and nylon wrapped in
a chrome metallic spiral band
- Achieve a 3 star WELS rating
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 5 year written warranty
VALVES
Valve spindles: non-rising type. Install valves with spindles in a vertical position
where practicable.
Isolating valves: provide to each block of units and each individual unit to isolate
all connected equipment, including hot water heaters, tanks, and cisterns, and
To AS 1357.2 elsewhere as shown on the drawings.
AS 4032.2 Tempering valves:
- to all dwellings
AS4032.1 - to achieve 50° C outlet temperature
Pressure control valves: Pressure-reducing, pressure limiting, and pressure-ratio
valves
Finish valves to match connected piping
To comply with NSW Code of Practice – Plumbing and Drainage
Strainers: low resistance, Y-form, bronze body brass screen-type. Screen
perforations 0.8mm
Material: The same material as the pipe, or galvanised or non-ferrous metals,
with bonded PVC, nylon, or fibreglass woven tape sleeves to separate dissimilar
metals. Provide fixings of suitable compatible material

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 116

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

TEMPERING AND THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE REQUIREMENT

- Tempering valves set to Plumbing Code standards to all BCA Class 1, 2 and 3
buildings
- Thermostatic mixing valve
 only for nominated dwellings for accessible
To AS 1357.1  to achieve 43.5 o C outlet temperature
- All dwellings designated as “Liveable” and SEPP HSPD provide plumbing
breaching piece in accessible box for future thermostatic mixing valve (TMV)
to all hot water outlets
- To current Australian Standard
- Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 5 year written warranty
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED TEMPERING AND THERMOSTATIC MIXING
VALVES (updated August 2014)
MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER PRODUCT/MODEL

All Valves Industries Pty Ltd CALEFFI Tempering Valves 5213 and 2522
Series only

Austworld Commodities P/L TV15 Tempering Valve

TV15/20 HP (High Performance) Tempering
Valve

AVG Australian Valve Group P/L AVG Tempering Valves and AVG thermostatic
Mixing Valves

Enware Australia Pty Ltd Aqua Blend

Methven Australia P/L NEFA Tempering Valves

TTV15C
TTV15CHP
TTV20C
TTV20CHP

Reliance World Wide RMC Heat Guard Ultra – Tempering Valve

Saveur Pacific Reflex Tempering Valves

RMTV15
RMTV15S
RTV15
RTV15S
RTV20RTV20S

ThornwaiteTechnologies Pty Ltd Rada Model No 215, 320, 32 rmx

COVER PLATES
Provide where pipework emerges from finished surfaces.
Type: ornamental non-ferrous metal or stainless steel, finished to match the
piping, nominal diameter 50mm greater than the diameter of the pipe inclusive of
insulation
STANDPIPE POSTS
Where standpipes are located without support, provide 100mm x 50mm 1000mm
high creosote treated hardwood post set 500mm into ground

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 117

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

10.7 Heating Systems

WATER HEATERS
Generally: provide a water heater or water heating system complete with all
necessary valves, thermostats, cut-outs and the like in location shown on drawings
and/or scheduled.
WATER HEATER SCHEDULE

ITEM REQUIREMENT
Solar (gas Boosted) 1 per dwelling
1 per Common Room
Provide a proprietary automatic water heater comprising solar
collector/s and storage container including connections,
controls and necessary fittings for all.

Electric Heat Pump 1 per dwelling

1 per Common Room

Instantaneous Gas 1 per dwelling

1 per Common Room

Solar (electric) Boosted 1 per dwelling

1 per Common Room

- connect water heaters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

- where installed internally (in bathroom or laundry) to be placed on a 100mm high
tiled concrete plinth and drained to outlet
To AS 3500.4.1 - Where installed internally (e.g. in cupboard) to be placed on copper safe tray
and drained to an outlet
- where installed externally to be placed on a 100mm thick concrete base.
- reticulation: supply hot water piping to connect heater to the supply and to the
draw off points and fixtures shown on drawings and/or scheduled
- delivered hot water outlet temperature:
Pressure control valve: Provide a pressure control valve as required by the
manufacturer
To AS 3500.4.1 Relief line/waste pipe:
Tariff: Confirm the installation qualifies for the tariff concession or subsidy offered
by the Supply Authority

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 118

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

SOLAR WATER HEATERS REQUIREMENT

General and Liveable Housing
To AS/NZS 2712 - To current Australian Standards
- Water Mark / Authority Certificate of Approval including all valves
- Installation to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers written
specification
- High energy efficiency – generate more than 25 renewable energy credits
- Suitable for all NSW climate zones, except alpine.
- All solar hot water units , Valves and Piping to be frost protected to minus 10
- Natural gas or electricity boosted
- Solar Panels (hail resistant) appropriate to zone area and size of tank
- Solar Panels to be aligned between north east to north west
- Tank on ground preferred, unless ground space is limited then close coupled
thermo siphon systems are allowed
Gas Boost
- Min. 170L with 5 star Gas Boost (all bedroom categories)
Electric Boost
- Min 160L for (1 Bed) – close coupled for new construction
- Min 250L for (2 Bed)
- Min 300L for (3 to 4 or more Bed)
- Min 400L with 3 panels for households with 5 or more residents
- Electric Boost solar only from off peak electricity supply operation
- Capable of recovery of more than 50% of the tank capacity through boost
WARRANTY: Provide 10 years written warranty on Cylinder, Panels and Heat
Exchanger
HEAT PUMP HEATERS REQUIREMENT
To be used only with written approval of the Principal
General and Liveable Housing
To AS/NZS 2712 - To current Australian Standards
- Water Mark/ Authority Certification of approval including all valves
- Installation to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers written
specification
- High energy efficiency - generate more than 25 REC
- Suitable for all NSW climate zones, except Alpine
- All units, valves and piping to be frost protected to minus 10 degrees
- Capable of operation on off-peak electric boost,
- Capable of recover of more than 60% of the tank capacity
- Low noise levels (less than 45 dba)
- Capacity
Min 250 L (2 bed)
Min 300L (3 bed or more)
WARRANTY: Provide 10 years written warranty on Cylinder

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 119

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

GAS WATER HEATERS REQUIREMENT

General and Liveable Housing
To AS/NZS 5263.1.2 - To current Australian Standards
- Standards Mark/WaterMark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
- AGA approval
To AS/NZS 4552.2 - Minimum 5 star energy rating
- All units, valves and piping to be frost protected
Storage
- Mains pressure: Floor Model (outdoor only)
- (1 bedroom min 90L)
- (2 bedroom min 110L)
- (3 bedroom and over min 135L
Instantaneous (External Gas Instantaneous only)
- Factory pre-set not to exceed 50ºC in accordance with AS 3489. No further
mechanical tempering device required
- Electronic ignition
- Frost protected
- All gas continuous flow water heaters shall be recessed into the brickwork either
on the balcony or on the ground floor.
- All gas continuous flow water heaters shall be fitted with security “cage”
enclosure fixed into the external wall with concealed fixing and supplied with a
padlock and keys.
The enclosure shall:
- have dimensions of 120 ackles 500mm wide x 700mm high and depth to suit
heater and heater location (heater recessed into external
brickwork)
- be constructed out of 20mm OD 3mm thick hollow mild steel tubes at
maximum 150mm grid spacing
- have a pivot hinge on LHS or RHS, fitted top and bottom through a U shaped
8mm thick plate and the “cage” shall be fixed to the wall through that plate
through 4 x pre-drilled holes.
- include on the opposite side to the hinge 8mm thick plate (with a hole in it) to
close over L-shaped padlock plate (that includes a hole for the padlock) to be
fixed to the wall
- include “cage” component fabricated as one unit and L-shaped padlock fixing
plate, all with pre-drilled holes for fixing to the wall; all hot dipped galvanised,
- Submit shop drawings prior to fabrication.
- The builder to supply and install gas authorities padlock with three keys and a
key box onsite inside one of the garages.
1 bathroom dwellings:
BCA Climate zone 6 to 8 – 16L to 26L
BCA Climate zone 2 to 5 – 16L to 20L
2 bathroom dwellings:
BCA Climate zone 6 to 8 – 26L to 32L
BCA Climate zone 2 to 5 – 20L to 26L

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 120

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

WARRANTY:
Storage
1 year warranty (parts/labour) 10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous
3 years parts and labour warranty, 10 year warranty on heat exchanger
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS REQUIREMENT
General and Liveable Housing
To AS/NZS 4692.1 - To current Australian Standards
and AS/NZS 4692.2 - Standards Mark/WaterMark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
- Off-peak mains pressure storage:
- All water heater units, valves and piping must be frost protected
Storage
- Mains Pressure: Floor Model (indoor/outdoor)
- (1 bedroom/ SEPP HSPD – 125L)
- (2 bedrooms – 250L)
- (3 bedrooms and over – 315L
Roof Model
- (2 bedrooms – 250L)
- (3 bedrooms and over – 315L)
Instantaneous
- 3 phase electric
- Electrical cut-off
- Manufactured with inbuilt pressure/temperature relief valve
- Min. 4.5 L// min
WARRANTY:
Storage- 1 year warranty (parts/labour) 10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous- 3 years parts and labour

10.8 Soil and Waste System

To AS 3500.2.1 GENERAL
DRAINAGE Refer to Drainage
FLOOR WASTES
Provide floor waste outlets to all bathrooms, separate WCs and separate
laundries:
- floor wastes in bathrooms shall be near the shower and away from bathroom
doors.
- finish to be chrome plate brass.
SHOWER PERIMETER GRATE AND DRAIN
Provide shower perimeter grate and drain
Install to manufacturer’s recommendations - Stainless Steel.
- When cutting grate to required size, cut by hand using 32 teeth per inch
hacksaw. Ensure the cut is square. File back rough edges for safety.
- Equal to “Stormtech” 65DG
- Ensure no sharp edges are visible.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 121

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

To AS/NZS 1546.1 SEPTIC TANK

Provide septic tanks designed to meet Local Council’s requirements.

10.9 Finishes
PIPEWORK FINISHES
To AS 1192 Exposed internally:
Chrome plate all copper and brass pipework including fittings, traps, supports and
the like. Paint as specified in PAINTING, all internal exposed UPVC and cast iron
pipes including fittings, traps, supports and the like
In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable
enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for required
identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings
Exposed externally:
Paint as specified in PAINTING, all external exposed pipes including fittings, traps,
supports, and the like

10.10 Fire Prevention

Certificate Required GENERAL
To AS 2118.1 Provide for the following where required:
To AS/NZS 1221 sprinkler service:
AS 2441 hose reels:

To AS 2444 fire extinguishers:

To AS 1530.4 fire collars:
To AS 2419.1 fire hydrants:

FIRE BLANKET REQUIREMENT

- To provide fire blanket to common area rooms to contain the fire in a vessel
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS 3504
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA.
- Size to be 1.2mx1.2m for class F fires
- Fixed permanently into the common area room kitchen wall only
WARRANTY: Provide 5 year written warranty
FIRE COLLAR REQUIREMENT
- Independently tested in accordance with AS1530.4 or BS476 part 20 to seal
both PVC, PP, Poly-butylenes, PE-X all sizes up to 200mm in penetrations
through fire rates floor and wall components up to 90 minutes
- Product to be tested as a retrofit and new install fire stop collar
- Maximum temperature resistance (fire stop collar shall begin to activate) shall
not exceed 120º C
- Installation to manufacturer’s specification
WARRANTY: Provide 2 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 122

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

FIRE DAMPERS REQUIREMENT

- To current relevant Australian Standards AS/NZS
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA.
- Installed to manufacturers written specification manual
- Dampers materials including, flanges, casing, blades, springs and linkages shall
be stainless steel or equivalent materials
- Fire resistant level to comply with the Standards
- Sizes shapes as required.
- Dampers product to be tested and certified by CSIRO or NATA registered
equivalent
- Dampers to be treated with an intumescent coating and achieve required FRL
of a minimum 60/60/60 when tested in accordance with AS 1530.4
- Meet the requirements for air leakage test specified in Clause 5.3 of AS 1682.1
- If activated by a thermally released link, it shall be tested to comply with AS
1890.
WARRANTY: Provide 2 years written warranty
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS REQUIREMENT
Portable fire extinguisher with rechargeable cylinder all types
- To provide portable fire extinguishers for type A fires to control small fires within
residential complexes
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS 1841
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- The actual cylinder to be made of a corrosion resistant metal type component,
quick pin release, pressure gauge and heavy duty metal brackets
- The portable fire extinguishers shall be fitted with anti-discharge device
Capacity:
- Water Type – 9 litres
- Wet Chemical – 2 litres and 3.5 litres
- Carbon Dioxide CO2 – 2litres and 3.5 litres
WARRANTY: Provide 10 years written warranty on the cylinder and 1 year written
warranty on the pressure holdings
FIRE HOSE REEL REQUIREMENT
- To provide Fire Hose Reel and Fire Hose to common areas to control any fire
within residential complexes
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS 1221 and 2792
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA.
- Fire Hose Reel (FHR) type should be fixed permanently to a structure (with or
without cabinet)
- FHR made off corrosion resistant material and vandal resistant fixings.
- Centre Drum spindle shall not exceed 360mm from the mounting surface
- Hose Reel
- Hose material should be non-percolating hose class H (high)
- Hose reel to be 19mm in diameter and 36m long
- All fittings to be brass and to comply with the standards and water marked.
WARRANTY: Provide 5 year written warranty on all materials and 1 year on all
valves

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 123

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM REQUIREMENT

- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS2419 and all other associated
standards
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA.
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Vandal proof
- Location signposted for emergency services
WARRANTY: Provide 5 year written warranty on hydrant and 1 year written
warranty on all valves and pumps
FIRE PANEL REQUIREMENT
Fire Control and Indicating Equipment
- Provide early warning control system to common area residential units
- To current Australian Standards AS7240 & AS4428
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- All installation to comply with the manufacturer’s installation manual and
specification details
- To control minimum limit to 18 alarms and heat detectors per zone
- PC software to create, edit, download, upload and back up. Uses advanced
algorithms to reduce nuisance alarms and detect smouldering fires
- Capable of connecting to addressable smoke and heat detectors, call points,
short circuit isolators, sirens, sounders, I/O units with monitored voltage outputs,
power supplies and conventional detectors
- Capable of linking with fire door closing system
- Lockable door to fire panel
- Vandal resistant.
- Independent zone operation system. Contractor to arrange connection of FIP
panel to brigade in consultation with end user.
WARRANTY: Provide 5 year written warranty
FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL (SEALANTS AND MASTIC) REQUIREMENT
- All material must comply with the nominated properties or replicate a system
tested in accordance with AS 4072.1 and AS 1530.1
- Achieve an FRL of not less than that specified in the FRMPIM for the penetrated
floor/wall or ceiling assembly
- Penetrations protected by a system tested in accordance with AS 4072.1 and
AS 1530.1
- Independent test certificates to be provided
WARRANTY: Provide 2 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 124

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM REQUIREMENT

- To provide an important level of fire protection to the residential unit occupants
and to the building structure
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS 2118.1 and all associated standards.
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA.
- All installation to comply with the manufacturer’s installation manual and
specification details.
- Fire sprinkler system material and equipment to meet appropriate standards.
- Pipe sizes shall be determined by full hydraulic calculation methods.
- Hydraulic /wet system
- Fast and quick response system
- High velocity sprayers
- Fault monitoring system
- Corrosion resistant system
WARRANTY: Provide 10 year written warranty
To AS/NZS 2179.1, 10.11 Rainwater Tanks
SA HB 230, AS/NZS
4766, AS 2070 Supply and Install above and or below ground rainwater tanks as indicated on
drawings and in accordance with the Rainwater Tank Design and Installation
Handbook.
Provide accessories needed to complete the installation and constructed from
corrosion resistant material compatible with the tank material. Include the
following:
- Inlet and outlet connections.
- Floating outlet to draw water from the upper part of the tank.
- Tight fitting lids or insect proof screens at all openings.
- Flap valves at every opening to the tank.
- Calmed inlet to the tank to prevent stirring sediment.
- Flywire screened overflow siphon to skim surface contaminants.
- Vermin proof, child proof access hole.
- Easily cleanable filter prior to the entry to the tank. Mesh size 1 mm.
Provide a lockable control box, containing the mains diversion device, which is
mounted to an existing structure such as a wall. The control box shall be
separated from the tank, located away from vehicle access, allow for required
clearances to fences and be located in public access areas to facilitate access for
maintenance.
All rainwater inflows shall be pre-treated to remove leaf litter, debris and sediment
prior to entering the tank.

Underground tanks:
Access and/ or inspection caps, first flush devices and filter pits for underground
tanks shall be installed flush to the ground. Install submersible pump in
underground tanks to minimise potential noise and amenity issues.

Coated steel tanks: Metallic-coated steel with polymer film to AS 2070 on the
inside and prepainted on the outside.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 125

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

First flush diverter

General: Provide first flush diverters arranged to drain completely and selected for
 20L/100 m2 rainwater catchment area. Construct from corrosion resistant and
compatible with the rainwater plumbing and tank. Discharge waste water from the
first flush diverter either: (if permitted by the local authority) onto grassed areas
away from tank and building footings, away from private open space or vehicles ; if
possible to the stormwater installation.
Installation
Provide structural support to withstand the mass of the tank when full without
deformation or excessive settling. Support connecting piping independently of the
tank. Provide a 300 mm long section of reinforced flexible hose to prevent piping
exerting a load on the tank. Pipe overflow to discharge away from the tank.
Prevent the entry of sunlight to the interior of the tank.
Above ground tanks: Restrain the tank to prevent movement, when empty,
caused by wind and other loads. Provide a level base with gaps not exceeding
10 mm, free of sharp projections and projecting beyond the edge of the tank at all
points.

Coated steel tanks: Fully support the tank on a self-draining concrete base.
Prevent contact with dissimilar metals. Arrange so that no part of the tank is below
ground level and so that adjacent ground surfaces fall away from the tank. Do not
use sharp objects inside the tank. Remove swarf with a magnet if drilling or cutting.
Cleaning: Flush the rainwater system. Wash and flush tanks to remove
manufacturing and other contaminants.

Mains Water:
- Provide in accessible location for reading separate mains potable water meters
to each dwelling.
- In addition to non-potable rainwater, supply tap for the washing machine for
each dwelling. Provide next to this tap a capped/(i.e. no tap) single mains
potable (colds) water outlet. This outlet is for future use in the event that non-
potable water quality is deemed to be inadequate (i.e. discoloured) for its
intended use (clothes washing).
RAIN WATER TANK REQUIREMENT
All Rainwater Tanks Above and below Ground
- All downpipes connected to the rainwater tank must have a screened downpipe
rainhead
- First flush devices installed to suit system (above or below ground)
- Vermin and insect screens provided on all inlets and outlets. Aluminium mesh
mosquito screen
- All rainwater and stormwater pipes installed to eliminate ponding and stagnation
of water
- All pumps, electrical, and plumbing must be located either adjacent to a building
or not to cause trip hazards. Located in a vandal resistant enclosure.
- In accordance with the Rainwater Tank Design and Installation Handbook
available at:
https://www.saiglobal.com/

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 126

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING

Above Ground Rainwater tanks

- Slimline rain water tanks
- Steel factory pre-painted with a food grade approved polymer
- Walls single sided AQUAPLATE Steel 0.6mm, external walls galvanised or
Colorbond pre-painted steel
- Base double sided Aquaplate steel 0.6mm with 200um polymer film
- Installed with first flush device, strainer, overflow and hose tap
Tank stand or concrete base certified by structural engineer as able to support the
water filled tank at full capacity
Below Ground Rainwater tanks
- All below ground tanks installation must have engineering certification for design
loadings and hydro-static lift
- Below ground tanks cannot be installed underneath or as part of a dwellings
foundations. Preferred location underneath driveway or lawn.
- Manufactured using food grade polymers, and independently certified not to
leach chemicals into the water
- Single seam free tanks with no joins of leakage points, self-supporting
- Inlet covers/lids to eliminate sunlight/algae/mosquitos and marked Rainwater
WARRANTY: Provide 20 year warranty Above Ground, 15 year warranty Below
Ground

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 127

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DRAINAGE

11: Drainage
Plumbing & Drainage
Code of Practice
11.1 General
(NSW)
To AS 3500.2.1
To AS 3500.3.1
MP 52, MP 78
Plumbing Code of
Australia (PCA)

AUTHORITIES AND APPROVALS

Submit documents and obtain all regulatory Authority approvals in connection with
the work and:
- pay all fees and charges for work carried out and materials supplied by the
regulatory Authority
- submit evidence of all regulatory Authority approvals to the Principal’s
Authorised Person before Completion/ Practical Completion.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Materials and Workmanship.
On completion the Contractor is to certify that the materials and installation comply
with the code requirements.
WORK OUTSIDE SITE
Make necessary arrangements with adjoining property-owners and the relevant
Authorities, for all work beyond the site boundaries.
EXISTING SERVICES
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Site.
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Provide at Completion/ Practical Completion, work as executed drawings to the
same scales as the contract drawings, showing the dimensioned locations and
depths of all pipes and fittings.

11.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspections can be made of the following:
- trenches excavated and ready for pipe laying
- works ready for tapping and/or cutting into regulatory Authorities water, sewer
or drainage mains
- work ready for testing
- enclosed work ready to be covered or concealed
- completed work
- any other inspections required by the regulatory Authority.

11.3 Quality and Work Practices

GENERAL
Do not locate grates, pits and other drainage structures across walkways.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 128

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DRAINAGE

TESTING
Test installation as required by the regulatory Authority:
- leave work exposed until inspected and tested
- check pipe joints, valve seats, tap washers, strainers, and the like. Replace if
damaged, and retest.
Rejection: Pipework which fails a test, or which airlocks, vibrates or is noisy
because of insufficient support or loose fixings, will be rejected and must be
immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the relevant Authority.
CLEANING
Provide temporary covers to openings and keep the system free of debris during
construction.
To AS 3500.2.1 EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILLING

To AS 3500.3.1} sanitary drains:

To AS 3500.3.1} stormwater drains:
To AS/NZS 3725 subsoil drains:
To AS/NZS 4058 RCP pipes (pipes 300mm dia. And above)
PIPE LAYING
To AS 3500.2.1 sanitary drains:
To AS 3500.3.1 stormwater drains:

11.4 Materials
To AS 3500.2.1 SANITARY DRAINS
STORMWATER DRAINS
To AS 3500.3.1 In all cases, including under carparks, driveways or across footpaths, pipes shall
be of minimum 100mm sewer grade UPVC.

To AS 3500.3.1 SUBSOIL DRAINS

11.5 Sumps, Pits

GENERAL
Construct pits, sumps, access holes, tanks, wells, and the like where shown on the
drawings to the levels indicated:
- use minimum 225mm diameter size stormwater lines from stormwater sumps
unless otherwise shown on drawings.
- use precast concrete or in-situ concrete pits in driveways, pathways,
landscaped and turfed areas.
Approval - installation requires approval.
In-situ concrete pits:
- to be 150mm thick x 20 Mpa at 28 days concrete base and walls with one layer
F72 mesh over entire area.
- all concrete to be mechanically vibrated and a maximum aggregate size of
20mm.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 129

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

DRAINAGE

To AS 3600 Precast concrete pits:

Approval - use proprietary precast concrete pits
- to be 75mm thick x 20 MPa at 28 days
- provide core holes as required.
To AS 3996 Covers and grates:
- secure all covers and grates to pits to prevent easy access
- use class ‘C’ covers and grates in driveways
- use class ‘B’ covers and grates in pathways
- use class ‘A’ covers and grates in landscaped or turfed areas.
- Drain covers and grates in trafficable areas to be heel proof with a maximum
opening width of 6mm.
- Surface of drain covers and grates in trafficable areas to be slip resistant and
must achieve a minimum slip resistance rating of P4/ R11 to comply with the
requirements of the NCC.
Locate the top of covers or gratings, including frames as follows:
- In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface.
- In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface.
Gratings taking surface water runoff: Set to receive the runoff without ponding.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 130

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

12: Electrical Works

12.1 General
To AS/NZS 3000 STANDARD
AS 3006 To the requirements of Supply and regulatory Authorities.
To SA HB 301 - Electrical installations.
AS/CA S008, - Telecommunications cabling and labelling.
AS/NZS 11801.1
and SA/SNZ HB
252
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Materials and Workmanship.
On completion, the Contractor is to certify that the materials and installation comply
with the code requirements.
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Provide at Completion/ Practical Completion work-as-executed drawings showing:
- location and depth of underground wiring and cable pits, if any
- switchboard schematic showing layout of equipment, busbars and connections,
type and rating of equipment
- telecom Block Cabling Installation
- Master Antenna Television System.

12.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice for inspections at the following stages:
- trench excavation before installing cables
- underground and concealed conduits before concealment
- testing of Master Antenna Television System.

12.3 Quality and Work Practices

TESTING
Test installation, including Television and Telecom services before starting the
Defects Liability Period.
COMMISSIONING
On finishing clean faceplates, luminaries reflectors and diffusers, and the like,
replace faulty lamps, reinstate ground surfaces and finishes disturbed by trenching,
and hand over the completed installation in working order.
MAXIMUM DEMAND AND SPARE CAPACITY
To AS/NZS 3000 Calculate the maximum demand of the installation and provide a copy of the
calculations.
Spare spaces: Provide switchboards with ≥ 25% spare positions for future single
phase circuit breakers.
Provide the following spare capacity:
- > 10% spare capacity in mains and submains.
- > 25% space capacity in final sub-circuits.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 131

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

BALANCING OF LOAD
Balance the load as evenly as possible over all phases to prevent overloading and
inadvertent circuit breaker operation at Completion/ Practical Completion, and
again at the end of the Defects Liability Period.
To AS/NZS 3000 12.4 Underground Services
GENERAL
- provide PVC marker tape over all lengths of underground conduit
- provide 600mm minimum cover for connecting wiring (in conduit) between
buildings.
- Exact routes of all underground cables and conduit to be coordinated on site with
other services.

12.5 Materials
To AS/NZS 5000.1 TPI AND TPS CABLES
AS/NZS 3008.1.1 Provide 0.6/1 kV range, 75oC temperature-rated cable delivered to site in the
original packages and obtained from one manufacturer whenever possible.
Conductors: provide stranded copper conductors throughout a minimum 1.5
sq.mm for lighting, 2.5 sq.mm for power sub-circuits. Determine final size by
voltage drop and actual rating of equipment and appliances selected.
SINGLE INSULATED CABLES
Use only where enclosed in PVC conduit.
CONDUITS
To AS/NZS 3000 Provide rigid metallic conduit, galvanised steel water pipe, rigid or flexible non-
AS/NZS 2053.1 metallic conduits:
- minimum size 20mm generally, 25mm in floor slabs
- conceal all conduits chased into masonry walls or cast in concrete slabs
- in concrete slabs locate entirely within the slab. Space 75mm apart. Do not run
conduits in concrete toppings.
To AS/NZS 2053.2 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
Heavy-duty type.
Flexible couplings: provide where crossing structural expansion or contraction
joints.

12.6 Electrical Distribution

GENERAL
Supply electricity underground to medium and high density unit developments.
Point of attachment: as required by the Supply Authority.
Service pole: heavy galvanised steel minimum 150mm diameter to Authorities’
requirements. Paint finish only where required by local council or supply authority.
Service fuses: Provide all service fuses and facilities for incoming supply as
required by the local electricity supply authority.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 132

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

To AS/NZS 3439.3 SWITCHBOARDS AND METERING

AS/NZS 3439.5, Switchboard enclosure: unless otherwise detailed provide a recessed,
AS/NZS 61439.3 weatherproof, galvanised painted steel meter cupboard enclosing all the
switchboard and metering equipment as required by the Supply Authority.
Enclosure locking: provide authority broached lock to meter cupboards/boxes.
Obtain locks from the appropriate Supply Authority and supply keys to Principal’s
Authorised Person.
Common area metering: provide separate metering for common area house
services, lighting and power.
CONSUMER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (CDBS)
Recessed moulded PVC-type enclosures with see-through hinged cover or door:
- to be flush wall mounted
- locate CDBs within their own discreet cupboards. If not possible, CDBs should
be fully recessed, located in a discreet position such as a corridor. Do not locate
CDB in lounge room.
To AS/NZS 3190 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (SAFETY SWITCHES)
AS/NZS 60898.1 - to be current operated earth leakage circuit breakers.
AS/NZS 60898.2 - rated Residual Current not to exceed 30mA.
- provide RCDs to each final sub-circuit containing socket outlets and/or lighting,
including refrigerator/freezer.
- optional: combination RCD/circuit breaker
- main switch current rating 50% greater than maximum demand of installation it
controls
- install switchboards, distribution boards or consumer distribution boards as
applicable.

12.7 Wiring Installation

To AS/NZS 3000 GENERAL
Conceal cables and conduits, including underground cable or conduit entering the
building, in a manner that will allow wiring replacement without removal of cladding
or lining:
- Install conduits and cables before the installation of wall and ceiling linings, and
before any external landscaping works.
- Arrange wiring such that it does not bridge the cavity in external masonry
- do not penetrate damp-proof courses
- install, terminate and join cables in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations
- do not join cables unless permitted by the Principal’s Authorised Person. Locate
all joints in accessible location, when unavoidable.
To AS/NZS 3000 Submains: size and type or as shown on the drawings. Enclose submains in
conduit.
CABLE ROUTES
Routes shown on drawings are diagrammatic only. Determine the final route of run
to the approval of the Supply Authority:
- do not run cables or conduit in cavities
- run circuits originating at different distribution boards in separate conduits
- run all circuit cabling in approved PVC conduit.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 133

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

PENETRATIONS
Approval Do not penetrate firewalls and structural members without approval.
Sealing: seal cable or conduit penetrations through external building members to
prevent the ingress of moisture.
POWER AND LIGHTING CIRCUITS
Socket outlets: arrange socket outlets within each dwelling unit over a maximum
of 2 circuits. Equally divide outlets to each circuit.
Hot water services: Provide separate circuit to off peak hot water unit, rating to
suit hot water unit’s electrical element. Provide all facilities for off-peak metering
and load controls as per supply authority’s rules and regulations.
Unit garages: Light and power to be connected to each garage and wired to
respective unit.
Common areas: Internal/external including communal basement garages – lighting
shall be wired on a separate circuit to socket outlets.
LABELLING
To AS 3439.1 Switchboard labelling: Labels for each switchboard control, circuit designation
AS/NZS 3000 and rating, warning notices for operational and maintenance personnel.
Schedule cards: provide for each switchboard and each distribution board
mounted in holder with hard plastic cover fixed inside the enclosure door with text
typewritten to show:
- sub-main designation and rating
- light and power circuit number, type and area supplied.

12.8 Accessories
GENERAL
Provide accessories necessary for a complete installation including but not limited
to switches, socket outlets, and telecommunications outlets.

Install flush-mounted accessories, in wall boxes in masonry and in mounting

brackets in stud walls, located as specified and/or shown on drawings.

Wet areas: Position accessories in locations containing baths showers or other

fixed water containers to comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 3000.

All accessories located in close proximity shall be of the same manufacture, size
and material.

To AS/NZS 3133 SWITCHES

Provide number and in location shown on drawings and/or as scheduled.
To AS/NZS 3112 SOCKET OUTLETS (POWER POINTS)
AS/NZS 3133 - Provide socket outlets. Refer to drawings and schedules for number, selection
and location of socket outlets.
- Where socket outlets are not shown on drawings provide socket outlets as per
the following schedule
- Items requiring power which do not require a socket outlet shall be hard wired
and made operational.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 134

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

SOCKET OUTLETS SCHEDULE

ITEM REQUIREMENT APPLICATION –

DWELLING/ROOM

Socket outlet plates Replaceable, with All dwellings

colour contrast to walls
Height of socket 450 to 600mm To living (including family, dining
outlets above the floor room) and bedroom areas for all
level – excluding dwellings including:
laundry, bathroom and  General housing
kitchen  Liveable, accessible dwellings
 SEPP HSPD
Height of socket 1000mm to 1500mm * To kitchen, bathroom, laundry areas
outlets above the floor * Refer to criteria for location for:
level – excluding living below All dwellings liveable, SEPP
and bedroom areas HSPD, accessible, general
housing)

Large rocker action To all rooms for:

switches  Liveable and accessible
dwellings
 SEPP HSPD

Enclosed hallway, Min 1 double per length of easily reached for vacuum
corridor hallway, corridor cleaning, centrally located.

ROOM/AREA NAME REQUIREMENT CRITERIA FOR LOCATION OF

SOCKET OUTLETS POWER POINTS (SOCKET
OUTLETS)

Living Min 3 x double  2 on the wall where the TV,

entertainment area is likely to
be;
 1 on the opposite wall (near
where reading lamp, etc is likely
to be).
1 x single  Add 1 x double extra to ensure
to ensure min 1 for each length of
wall.
Note for SEPP HSPD
dwellings alternatively in
the dining area  1 near a telephone outlet

Dining 2 x double  on a dining room wall, where it

can be easily reached.
and 1 x single  1 near a telephone outlet
for 3 to 6-bedroom
dwellings only
Note for SEPP HSPD
dwellings alternatively in
the living area

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 135

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

Kitchen 1 x single (refrigerator)  adjacent to refrigerator position –

 Locate 1500mm above floor
level
 (locate so easily reached when
the refrigerator is in place, if
possible).

2 x double (above bench)  above kitchen bench, but not

close to sink or stove.
 300mm above bench

1 x single for range hood  adjacent to rangehood (within

kitchen cupboard).

1 x single for microwave  adjacent to microwave oven

oven space (within wall cupboard
above)

1 x single for cooktop  position outlet as required

1 x single for oven  position outlet as required

Main bedroom or only 3 x double  1 on the wall where the TV is

bedroom Unit likely to be (opposite the bed
head);
 2 on the wall where the bedhead
is likely to be (ie on opposite
walls, not near each other).one
of which is near telephone outlet
next to the bed on the side
closest to the door

Each Other Bedroom 2 x double  1 on the wall where the bedhead

and telephone outlet is likely to
be;
 1 on opposite wall.

Bathroom 1 x double  adjacent to mirrored cabinet,

Wet areas power outlets suggested 1500mm above floor
to include in built RCD level, to comply with AS 3000
Protection and Re-set  waterproof or within mirrored
cabinet

Combined 1 x double  adjacent to mirrored cabinet,

Bathroom/Laundry suggested 1500mm above floor
level, to comply with AS 3000
 waterproof or within mirrored
cabinet

 above washing machine,

1 x double
1300mm above floor level (to
Wet areas power outlets allow for dryer above WM)
to include in built RCD
Protection and Re-set


Separate laundry 1 x double  above washing machine,

1300mm above floor level (to
allow for dryer above WM)

Common area 1 x double per floor,  centrally located, easily reached

corridors, lobbies and lockable type for vacuum cleaning,
stairs

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 136

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

Attached Carport/ 1 x double  within storage cupboard in a

carport
Garage
 on back or side wall of a garage

Common room Min 3 x double in general  located where it can be easily

space reached, on a common room wall
(for vacuum cleaning, TV, radio
etc.)

1 x double-kitchen area
 1 adjacent to refrigerator position
2 x double kitchen area
 1 above the kitchen bench

To AS/NZS 3000 Shower Rose with Flexible Hose

For bathrooms with showers that include flexible shower hose and no fixed shower
partition the socket outlet (GPO) shall be located minimum 1.2m radius from the
from the fixed plumbing connection from the end of extended shower hose outlet
and shall be protected by residual current device (RCD) of maximum rating of
30mA. (Within Zone 3 in accordance with AS/NZS 3000).
For socket outlets within 0.6 to 1.2m from the end of extended shower hose (Within
Zone 2 in accordance with AS/NZS 3000) in addition the outlet shall be within an
enclosed cupboard that needs to be maintained in an enclosed position during the
operation of the connected equipment. A flush mounted weatherproof enclosure
with a clear door equal to HPM Cat. WS44 may be used for this purpose.
PHOTO-ELECTRIC SWITCHES
- photo-electric type “daylight switches” relay-operated and capable of switching a
discharge lamp load of 700W at low power factor
- where inductive load exceeds the maker’s requirements provide 4kW AC3
contactors for the switching of the load.
Rating: Provide 20 Amp lighting contactors to control the load where the total load
exceeds the contact rating of the photo-electric switch.
ISOLATING SWITCHES
Provide wall-mounted isolating switches to fixed cooking appliances and other
equipment where required by the Supply Authority and/or shown on the drawings.
Switches to be mounted in an accessible position and within 2m of
appliance/equipment.
To AS/NZS 60598.1 12.9 Light Fittings
GENERAL
- Provide energy fluorescent lamps/ globes to all batten/ lamp holders in locations
shown on drawings. Comply with BCA Section J requirements.
- Supply complete with lamps, control gear and diffusers in bathrooms provide
water-resistant lights where flexible shower fittings are installed.
- Minimum energy performance standards to current Australian Standards.
To AS 4782.2 and
AS/NZS 4783.2 - Self-ballasted lamps to current Australian Standards.
To AS 4847.2 - Incandescent lamps to current Australian Standards.
To AS 4934.2

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 137

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

To AS/NZS 3000 Wet Areas Luminaires

Locate luminaries within wet areas generally outside of zone classifications 0, 1
and 2 as defined in AS/NZS 3000. However, if luminaries cannot be located
outside these zones, they shall meet the required degree of protection in
accordance with AS/NZS 3000.
LIGHT SWITCHES
Locate grouped dimmers and control devices for future access.
Provide ventilation and acoustic treatment to suit the device characteristics.

SWITCHES SCHEDULE
- Provide switches. Refer to drawings and schedules for number, selection and
location of switches.
- Where switches are not shown or specified on drawings provide switches for
each light fitting, exhaust fan, ceiling fan and other fittings as per the following
schedule.
ITEM REQUIREMENT APPLICATION –
DWELLING/ROOM
Light switches  Not architrave type  All dwellings
 Switch plates to be
replaceable with colour
contrast to walls

Height of light switches above 1000mm  All dwellings

the floor level

Wet areas light switches Switches to comply with  Bathrooms/Laundries of

requirements for installation dwellings
in Zone 1

Large rocker action switches Min dimension 30 x 30mm  SEPP HSPD Liveable
or pad switches min 25mm dwellings/ units
diameter

Lamps/globes Low energy consumption  Provide to all batten/ lamp

fitting holders

LIGHT FITTINGS SCHEDULE

- Provide light fittings. Refer to drawings and schedules for number, selection and
location of light fittings.
- Where light fittings, ceiling fans and other fittings are not shown on drawings
and/or where drawings are missing some information provide fittings as per the
following schedule.
- In the event that light fittings, ceiling fans and other fittings selection is not
included in the Contract select fitting to meet the specification and Land and
Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register.
- In the event that light fittings, ceiling fans and other fittings selection is not
included in the Contract and there is no specification for the fitting or the fitting is
not included in the Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product
Register recommend selection meeting relevant standards and obtain Principal’s
Authorised Person’s approval.
- Provide low energy fluorescent lamps/globes to all batten/lamp holders.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 138

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

ROOM/AREA NAME REQUIREMENT

Light outlets

INDIVIDUAL DWELLINGS – INTERNAL LIGHT FITINGS

Internal dwelling entry 1 per entry

Enclosed hallway, corridor Min 1 per length of hallway, corridor

Living Min 1 per room

For SEPP HSPD potential illumination level of 300 lux . This
may require more than 1 light outlet
Ceiling fan with integral light:
- LAHC will provide ceiling fans in all new social housing
properties. Please refer to LAHC Heating and Cooling Policy.
- min 2400mm clearance required to under side of fan

Kitchen/Dining Min 1 per kitchen

Min 1 per dining
For SEPP HSPD potential illumination level of 300 lux. This
may require more than 1 light outlet

Main bedroom or only Min 1 per room

bedroom Unit
For SEPP HSPD potential illumination level of 300 lux
This may require more than 1 light outlet

Each other bedroom Min 1 per room

SEPP HSPD potential illumination level of 300 lux
Bathroom 1 per room
Where possible, located within Zone 3 (AS/NZS 3000).
Combine switch with mechanical ventilation.

Bathroom/laundry 1 per room

Where possible, located within Zone 3 (AS/NZS 3000).
Combine switch with mechanical ventilation.

Separate laundry 1 per room. Combine switch with mechanical ventilation.

Separate toilet 1 per room. Combine switch with mechanical ventilation.

Garage 1 per single garage

2 per double garage

INDIVIDUAL DWELLINGS – EXTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS

Exterior Doorways 1 per doorway of each front dwelling entry, rear dwelling
entry, laundry, patio entry, balcony entry, etc.)

Attached carport 1 per carport

COMMON AREA – INTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS

Common room To achieve appropriate lighting levels for reading, dining,

consultations to meet Australian standards

Entry and stair lobby 1 on each floor

easily accessible for maintenance, locate on soffit above each
floor landing (including ground floor) or wall mount.

Emergency Lighting To BCA requirements

Cleaner’s toilet 1 per toilet

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 139

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

COMMON AREA – EXTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS

Exterior Doorways – front and 1 per doorway

rear lobby entries

Building wall mounted fittings Vandal proof

Garden/ carpark area Pole fittings that achieve the required external lighting
performance (light levels) without light spill for neighbours.

Entry gatehouse 1 per gatehouse

vandal proof

BATTEN HOLDERS/LAMP HOLDERS

- Bayonet “electric white” heat-resistant type with polycarbonate body which
cannot be extracted without first removing the base securing screws
- Able to accept bayonet fitting energy efficient globes
- adjustable type where fixed to sloping ceilings. White flexible pendant drop
where height exceeds 2400mm
- fix at not less than 4 points
- safety device to prevent power contact to surface until globe is inserted.
Fluorescent Tube Type
- Accepts energy efficient tubes
- One piece injection moulded white polycarbonate body and gear cover complete
with lamp holder and caps
- “Snap in” internally frosted polycarbonate diffuser
- Modular electronic gear tray assembly
- Takes 8 watt or 13 watt T5 tubes
INTERIOR COMMON AREA LIGHTS
- To provide Common Area lighting to all common areas egresses and access
ways within residential complexes (entranceways, stairways, corridors, common
rooms, plant rooms etc.)
- To current Australian Standards AS1680 and relevant access standards
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Luminaires must be U.V. stabilised and IP65 rated with die cast aluminium (min
20 to 25 micron powdercoated) or ≥3mm polycarbonate housing
- Product must have a recognised Australian Certificate of Approval under the
Electricity Consumer Safety Act 2004
- All fixtures and components to be vandal proof, weather, hose proof and impact
resistant
- Energy efficient lamps (globes/LEDs)
- Colour temperature: 4000-5000K
- Colour rendering index: 80+
- Power factor 90+

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 140

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

- Light sources/ lamp preference based on luminous efficacy i.e. highest lumens
per watt to be given preference. Luminous efficacy of light source/ lamp must be
greater than 60 Lumens/Watt
- Rated lamp average life ≥20,000 hours
- Lumen maintenance” Lumen output of light source/ lamps must be 70% or
greater of original output at the end of the rated lifetime
- Fitting light Output Ratio (LOR) greater than 0.7
- Luminaires must be securely fixed to the surface No hanging fittings
- Luminaires with no hanging points as directed by the Principal’s Authorised
Person to meet building criteria
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 years written warranty
LED LAMPS/ LUMINAIRES
- All luminaires must be vandal-resistant LED luminaires with occupancy sensors
that maintain a low level of lighting when areas are unoccupied.
- All luminaire models must have previously been used by an Accredited
Certificate Provider to successfully create Energy Savings Certificates under the
NSW Energy Savings Scheme
- All components of the light fitting including lamps, batteries, covers etc. must be
able to be purchased and replaced individually
- LED rated lamp life ≥50,000 hours
- LED luminous efficacy ≥70 Lumens/Watt at full light output
- LED colour temperature 4000-5000K
- LED colour rendering index ≥80+
- Luminaire power factor ≥0.9+
- Lumen output of LED lamps ≥70% of original output at end of the rated lamp life
- Luminaire Light Output Ratio (LOR) ≥0.7
- All exposed equipment (luminaires, motion sensors, photocells, diffusers etc.)
must be vandal resistant IP65 rated, with ≥3mm thick impact-resistant
polycarbonate covers or equivalent
- All motion sensors or other parts are to be securely contained within the
luminaire, or fixed to the ceiling or luminaire using vandal resistant
security/specialty screws and contained within IP65 rated ≥3mm thick impact-
resistant polycarbonate covers or equivalent
- No equipment is to have leverage or hanging points
- Security/specialty screws are required for all fixings
- Luminaires must be fixed to ceilings using a drilling method – no adhesive
methods will be accepted
- Emergency luminaires must be self-contained with a self-static inverter. System
including battery and battery charger to be non-corrosive.
- Emergency luminaire battery to be heavy duty long life type and duration of
emergency power ≥90 minutes
- Any battery compartments must be either inaccessible or accessible only via
vandal resistant security/specialty screws

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 141

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

EXTERNAL AND COMMON AREA (LANDLORD) LIGHTING

Provide in positions indicated on drawings.
AS/NZS 1158.3.1 External lighting to comply with the following requirements:
- Modular carriage tray with electronic starter
- Weatherproof
- Lights to reduce light spill and sited to illuminate pedestrian and mixed traffic
areas to improve safety and reduce shadow and potential hiding locations.
- Performance to type 3 or 4 Luminaire classification to AS 1158.3
- Lights mounted high on posts or buildings and sited not to spill into windows or
neighbouring buildings. Bollard lighting is not approved
- Meet current Australian Standard 1158 and achieve a ‘P1’ for High levels of
vandalism or ‘P2’ for Medium levels of vandalism in accordance with AS 1158.3
All External lighting
- Vandal proof moulded base
- Impact resistant moulded housing
- Vandal proof opalescent cover—U.V. stabilised diffuser
- Replaceable carriage tray with electronic starter
- No hanging point as directed by the Principal’s Authorised Person - light to be
securely fixed with all cables secure and vandal resistant to prevent access
- Energy efficient tri-phosphor globes and tubes
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Performance to Type 3 or 4 Luminaire classification in accordance with AS
1158.3

Building and Car-Park Lighting

- Housing casing glass reinforced polyester or nylon moulded plastic
- Vandal resistant moulded polycarbonate diffuser
- Vandal resistant stainless steel clips
- Where possible all lights are to be fixed to buildings or other structures at a
preferred height of 2m to 3.4m

Pole Top Lighting

- All pole top lighting to be 2m to 3.4m around pedestrian paths
- All pole top lighting to be 3.4 to 4.5m around roadways
- Poles to suite 76 dia or 100 dia spigots
- Poles min 3.6mm thick x 75mm dia. Min 60 micron hot dipped galvanised M.S.
post
- Light fittings to achieve the external lighting performance (light levels) without
light spill for neighbours.

Bollard and up-lighting

- Lighting type is not approved. If found refer back to Principal’s Authorised
Person for direction.

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 142

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

To AS/NZS 2293.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

To BCA requirements and as shown on the drawings.
EMERGENCY LIGHTS REQUIREMENT
- To provide Emergency Lights into required common area and egress path within
residential complexes
- To current relevant Australian Standards AS/NZS
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- Installed to manufacturers written specification manual.
- Vandal resistant material and fixings.
- Ceiling or wall mounted.
- Diffused or Wire Guard type powder-coat finish
- Non corrosive system including battery and battery charger
- Self-contained emergency luminaires
- Battery to be heavy duty long life type
- Emergency light should contain a self-static inverter
- Duration of emergency power shall not be less than 90minutes

WARRANTY Provide 2 year written warranty on all parts including battery

EXIT LIGHTS REQUIREMENT
- To provide Exit Lights to all common area egresses within residential complexes
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS2293.1.
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- Installed to manufacturers written specification.
- Vandal resistant material and fixings.
- Ceiling or wall mounted.
LED
- LED Lamp average lamp life 60,000hours
- LED globes equivalent to 2watts
- Acrylic diffuser with vinyl decals - U.V. stabilised diffuser
- Vandal resistant housing
- 3 pins flex and plug
- Long life battery.
4W to 8W
- Lamp average lamp life 15000 hours
- Energy efficient cold cathode fluorescent or T5 fluorescent lighting.
- Electronic ballast
- Acrylic diffuser with vinyl decals - U.V. stabilised diffuser.
- Vandal resistant housing
- Long life battery.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 143

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

10W to 12W
- Lamp average lamp life 5000 hours
- Energy efficient fluorescent lighting
- Electronic ballast
- Acrylic diffuser with vinyl decals - U.V. stabilised diffuser
- Vandal resistant housing
- Long life battery
12W to 18W
- External weatherproof exit lights
- Energy efficient fluorescent lighting
- Die cast aluminium/steel or injected moulded housing
- Electronic ballast
- U.V. stabilised diffuser
- Vandal resistant
- Long life battery

WARRANTY: Provide 2 year written warranty on all parts including battery

12.10 Master Antenna Television System, Data Cabling

and Telephony
To AS/NZS 1367 The completed work must achieve a performance-based outcome of ensuring that
each Building has a system capable of receiving and distributing:
 free to Air Television digital transmission for the Master Antenna TV system
(MATVS) to each installed wall plate in the building containing multiple units;
 telephone services; and
 high speed data to an installed wall plate in the building, up to 1000mb/s;
The work required is for the complete delivery of telephone services and data to the
main distribution frame / Premises Connection Device (PCD) to first telephone /
data socket, including pits, conduits and draw wires.
Any Broadband cabling installed must comply with NBN Co specifications. The
work is for data and broadband internet services to the Network Termination Unit
(NTU) including to first RJ45 wall plate including conduits and draw wires.
NBN-TE-CTO-194 Make provision for National Broadband Network Service:
NBN-TE-CTO-284 Installation shall meet NBN Co requirements and include the following:
NBN-NO-GDE-0011 - Installation of the Service Drop Conduit and draw string
- Installation of the NBN communication cabinet
- Installation of the earthing to the fibre communication cabinet
- Installation of the power to the Power Supply Unit (PSU) Location
- Installation of customer wiring conduits, min 25mm dia. with draw wire from the
location of the NTD to each telephone/data outlet within the dwelling.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 144

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

TELEPHONE SERVICE
To AS/CA S009. Contractor is to:
- apply to Telstra to attain phone services and provide all evidence of application.
- pay all application fees and charges.
- if no design exist, to design and pay all associated cost.
- provide all wiring works according to the approved design and connect all
phones, attain all numbers and disconnect prior to handover.
To AS/CA S009 and Small office/ home office installations: Category 6.
AS 11801.4
To AS/NZS 11801.1 Provide labelling to telecommunication cables, cross connects and outlets.
Certificate Required Certificate of Acceptance: provide the Principal’s Authorised Person with a
Telstra “Notification of Completion Certificate” for each telephone serviced dwelling
unit.
Test to TESTING
AS/NZS 3017 Test each pair in every cable for:
- continuity
- correct sequence
- reversed pairs
- transpositions and split pairs
- test the insulation resistance of each pair in the outer layer of every cable, and
of one pair to earth
- provide copies of the test results to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
TELEPHONE OUTLETS
The service shall not include the provision of a handset.

TELEPHONE OUTLETS SCHEDULE

- Provide telephone outlets. Refer to drawings and schedules for number and
location of telephone outlets.
- Where telephone outlets are not shown or specified on drawings provide
telephone outlets as per the following schedule. Confirm location with the
Principal’s Authorised Person.
- Where NBN is available in the area or is being actively rolled out in the area and
will be available by the time of schedule project completion only one NBN Ready
outlet shall be provided in locations as specified.
- Where NBN is not available and is not likely to be rolled out in the near future
two outlets shall be provided in locations as specified – one for data and one for
telephone (copper line).

ROOM LOCATION NUMBER OF OUTLETS REQUIRED CRITERIA FOR

LOCATING TELEPHONE
NBN NBN OUTLETS
AVAILABLE NOT AVAILABLE
Living Room away from likely T.V.
position, easily reached,
All dwellings
near a likely chair & table
OR position, next to a GPO.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 145

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

Dining away from likely T.V.

position, easily reached,
In 3 to 6 bedroom
near a likely chair & table
dwellings only
position, next to a GPO.
As an alternative to
1 2
locating in Living
Room (DATA) (TELEPHONE
AND DATA)

Main bedroom 1 1 near likely bedhead

position and away from
All dwellings (TELEPHONE) (TELEPHONE)
T.V. on the side close to
the door, next to a GPO.
Data Cabling: To be minimum Cat 6 (capable of supporting data speeds of up to 1,000
Mbps). Cat 6 cable lengths must be limited to a maximum run of 500m per cable run.
Cables are to be terminated at an RJ45 type wall plate.

12.11 Smoke Alarms

SMOKE ALARMS
General
To AS 3786 - Provide smoke detectors to the requirements of the BCA:
* Volume 1 Part E2 Smoke Hazard Management
* Volume 2 Part 3.7.2 Smoke Alarms
- provide a minimum of 1 smoke detector in each dwelling/unit with additional
detectors at each level of multi-level dwellings/units
- interconnect detectors within each multi-level dwelling/unit
- interconnect detectors in common areas and stairwells of multi-storey buildings.
- For accessible and seniors units, provide an isolated alarm silencing (automatic
reset) switch located at a lower level than the level of light switches.

Class 1b, class 3 and existing buildings:

To AS 1670.6, Installation:
AS/NZS 3000 - within each sole occupancy unit connect smoke detectors to lighting circuit
- install line filters to circuits containing fluorescent light fittings
- install to manufacturer’s instructions.

SMOKE ALARMS LOCATION SCHEDULE:

- Provide smoke alarms. Refer to drawings and schedules for number, selection
and location of smoke alarms.
- If selection of smoke alarm/s is included in the Contract but location is not shown
on drawings provide smoke alarm/s as per the following schedule. Confirm
location with the Principal’s Authorised Person.
- In the event that smoke alarm/s selection is not included in the Contract select
smoke alarms to meet the specification and Land and Housing Corporation
Deemed to Comply Product Register.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 146

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

BUILDING TYPE CEILING LOCATION TYPE/ COMMENTS

 single storey in each hallway serving the stand- alone ionisation type
detached bedrooms

cottages
if there is no hallway locate stand-alone photo-electric
 villas between the living area and type
 single storey attached bedrooms, away from
dual occupancy kitchen,

 townhouses if there are bedrooms stand- alone ionisation type

 two storey detached downstairs locate in a
cottages hallway between the living
area and the bedrooms
 two storey attached
dual occupancy if there are no bedrooms stand-alone photo-electric
downstairs locate in the type
living area away from
kitchen, close to the
stairwell

on first floor in a hallway stand-alone ionisation type

outside the bedrooms

 1 bedroom units in a hallway outside stand-alone photo-electric

bedroom type

stand-alone ionisation type

if the same hallway serves
a bedroom and a bathroom

stand-alone photo-electric
if there is no hallway locate type
in the living area

in each internal common interconnected ionisation type

area level on separate common area
circuit.
If the common area links to the
carpark the closest alarm to the
carpark shall be photo-electric
type (interconnected to
ionisation type on separate
common area circuit)

 walk-up apartment in each hallway outside ionisation type

units (other than 1 bedrooms

bedroom) in each internal common interconnected ionisation type

area level on separate common area
circuit.
If the common area links to the
carpark the closest alarm to the
carpark shall be photo-electric
type (interconnected to
ionisation type on separate
common area circuit)

 dwellings or units with as above for dwelling type photo-electric type for dwelling
gas space heaters or unit

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 147

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

 other (class 1(b) and To BCA requirements, Australian Standards and as specified
class 3 buildings e.g. for class 1(b) or class 3 buildings
group homes, boarding
houses, hostels)

SMOKE ALARMS REQUIREMENT

All dwellings
- Certificate of compliance by SSL (Scientific Services Laboratory) for testing to
current Australian Standards
- Ionisation or photoelectric model or Heat Technology
- Test button
- Alarm pause (‘hush’) button to silence alarm (ionisation model)
- Mains operated (hard-wired) 240 volt unit with fixed rechargeable (Lithium)
battery backup (10 years battery life expectancy) – with Min 2 months battery
standby
- Inter-linkable features
- Low power warning
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Branded with manufacturers trademark to AS 3786
- Energy Efficient smoke alarm
- Interlink with Isolators / hush button for accessible housing
- Interlink with Strobe lights for hearing impaired

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 year written warranty including rechargeable

battery

12.12 Appliances and Other Installations

- Provide appliances and other installations. Refer to drawings and schedules for
item, number, selection and location.
- In the event that appliances and other installations selection is not included in the
Contract select appliances and other installations to meet the specification and
Land and Housing Corporation Deemed to Comply Product Register.
- In the event that appliances and other installations selection is not included in the
Contract and there is no specification for appliances and other installations or the
appliance or other installation is not included in the Land and Housing Corporation
Deemed to Comply Product Register recommend selection meeting relevant
standards and obtain Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval.

ITEM REQUIREMENT
Cooktop (gas or electric)) 1 per dwelling

Oven (electric) 1 per dwelling

Rangehood 1 per kitchen

wall/roof ducted to outside

Energy efficient reverse 1 per dwelling to living room in NCC climate zones 7 (cool
cycle air conditioning units temperate) and 8 (alpine)
and solar photovoltaic
(PV)
PV systems must be 2kW for units and 3.3kW for cottages,
townhouse and villas.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 148

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

RANGEHOOD REQUIREMENT
- To current Australian Standards, Australian Gas Association/ Energy Australia
/Office of Energy.
- Min. air delivery rate 40L/s at max. sound power level 55dB(A) to current
Australian Standards
- Min. 2 speed convertible fan & automatic thermostat cut-off electricity or
impedance protected motor (withstand “locked rotor” conditions for 72 hours
without burning out)
- Min. 55 watt motor
- Min. 3 blade plastic/metal propeller
- Min. 10 layer aluminium mesh grease filters
- Wiring encased in plastic conduits, within unit
- Unit for wall/roof ducting to outside. (Ducting to be minimum of 0.5mm galvanised
steel ducting or ‘Flexi-duct’ similar fire or heat resistant material)
- Min. 50 micron powder coating to galvanised steel casing
- Width to match and align with cook top or stove
- AS marking, brand name, serial no. date code, rated air delivery, sound power
level in dB(A) at rated air delivery and wattage branded on unit
Ducting
- Exhaust to outside
- To be minimum of 0.5mm galvanised steel or “flexi-duct”
(Similar fire or heat resistant material)

WARRANTY:
Minimum 2 years written warranty – parts/labour
Minimum 2 years written warranty – filters

UPRIGHT STOVE REQUIREMENT

Note: In all new construction, separate oven and cooktop only.
Upright Electric (for maintenance work only)
- To current Australian Standards
- Oven capacity 75L min
- 60 minute timer (optional)
- Separate griller and oven compartments
- Fan Forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to touch
window
- 4 hot plate (solid elements for electric stove)
- Upright or elevated cooker
- Front control or side control buttons only
- Splashback to upright
- AGA approval where appropriate
- Splashback to upright

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 149

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

Wall Oven – Electric

- To current Australian Standards
- Capacity min 80 litre gross capacity
- Combined or separate griller and oven compartments
- Fan forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to touch
window
- 60 minutes timer
Wall Oven – Liveable Housing (General Housing)
- Bottom hinged, side hinged or slide under oven door
Wall Oven – Accessible Housing
- Side hinged or slide under oven door
- Splashback
Cook Top
- Square white enamel finish hob
- 4 burner hot plate (solid elements for electric cooktop)
- Gas – electric or battery ignition, push to turn safety control, enamelled trivets.
- Gas - flame failure cut off for emergency
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 years written warranty
DOOR CHIMES
Provide door chime to entry of each unit/dwelling
- chime must be “two-note” type
- connect to the living room 240 Volt power circuit complete with 240/8 Volt
transformer + batteries
- activate chime by a lighted push button
- install at 1200mm above finished floor
- mount chime and transformer above main entrance door on interior side
- all chimes and push buttons must be white.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 150

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

ELECTRIC SPACE / ELECTRIC PANEL HEATERS

Provide electric heaters where shown on drawings:
- To current Australian Standards
- Only space/panel heaters approved under the Certificate of Approval Scheme
administered by the Office of Fair Trading NSW.
- Installation in accordance to Australia/New Zealand Wiring Rules (AS/NZS 3000)
to current Australian Standards and to local supply authority regulations
To AS/NZS 3000 - Fixed (including wall mounted or recessed or floor mounted) panel or fan
assisted heaters
- Min. 2 heat settings, (LO/HI) Thermostat control on high setting
- Min. 2kW (heat up to 55 m³) to Max. 7kW (heat up to 160 m³) consumption
capacity
- Minimum efficiency of greater than 95%
- Automatic reset thermal cut-out safety feature and fusible link. Branded with
manufacturers name to AS 3103, supplier licensed under Standards Assoc.
Certification Trademark
- Child safe to touch cabinet
- Refer to CR Schedule & DCPR
- 1 electric heater socket outlet
- 1 heater per dwelling
- tiled hearth where carpet is provided for climatic zones 7 & and 8- for climatic
zones 7 and 8
- where gas is not available
- 1 per living room

WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 2 year written warranty.

LAHC will provide energy efficient reverse cycle air conditioning units and solar
photovoltaic (PV) systems to new and existing properties in NCC climate zones 7
(cool temperate) and 8 (alpine). Please refer to LAHC Heating and Cooling Policy.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 151

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

12.13 Television System

To AS/NZS 1367 GENERAL
AS 1417.1 System Type:
- Provide an analogue and digital television distribution system to AS/NZS 1367
and conforming to the recommendations of Digital Broadcasting Australia.
- Provide and locate antennas to receive all locally available free-to-air television
stations.
- Individual antenna, UHF and VHF, - installed outside roof of each dwelling.
Master Antenna Television System (MATV).
Provide and install an MATV antenna system that gives adequate gain, directional
characteristics and polarisation for the nominated services.
System performance: provide tuners to detect all local UHF and VHF and free to
air digital television channels, and to provide good reception throughout.
Picture quality: at each outlet, the picture received on a domestic TV receiver
must not be noticeably different from the picture received when the receiver is
connected directly to the antenna, and is to be free from discernible cross-
modulation, intermodulation, ringing, noise or other distortion.
Capable of receiving Digital TV.
ANTENNA REQUIREMENT
- To current Australian Standards
- Standards Mark / Certified Digital Ready
- Achieve the following minimum readings at the antenna when installed as part of
a MATV system of:
 Signal level of between 50db to 80db
 Modulated Error Ratio (MER) of 25db or higher
 Post Viterbi Bit Error Rate (post Viterbi BER) of less than of
equal to 2X10-4
 Noise Margin (NM) of greater than 0dB
- Galvanised steel boom construction
 2 kg loading on boom end (furthest from mount (tested over 100 cycles)
- Clam shell insulators and flat sided boom to provide element alignment
- 12mm extruded aluminium elements to withstand weather and wildlife
- Tested to wind speed of 100 km/hr
 1 kg loading at unsupported end of any element (tested over 100 cycles)
- UV and corrosion resistant tested in coastal area and western NSW
- ‘F’ Type connectors
- Able to easily connect quad shielded cable and/or mast head amplifier

WARRANTY: Provide 2 years warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 152

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

MASTS STAYS BOOMS REQUIREMENT
- To current Australian Standards
- Galvanised steel – galvanising Galvabond Z275 to at least 19 microns of
galvanising (zinc) on these items.
- Booms should be powder-coated with polyester through an automated
electrostatic multistage pre-treatment process.
- Samples tested and verified by an 800 hour neutral salt spray test
- Able to withstand wind of 100km/hr

WARRANTY: Provide 2 years warranty

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM – AMPLIFIER REQUIREMENT
Mast head Amplifiers, Channelised Amplifiers, Wide Band Amplifiers
- To current Australian Standards
- Standards Mark / Certified Digital Ready
- Achieve the following minimum readings after the amplifier when installed as part
of a digital ready MATV system of:
Signal level of between 50db to 80db
Modulated Error Ratio (MER) of 25db or higher
Post Viterbi Bit Error Rate (post Viterbi BER) of less than or equal to
2X10-4
Noise Margin (NM) of greater than 0dB
- UV stable, weatherproof housing capable of mast attachment or surface mount
- Adjustable gain for VHF and UHF bands
- Built in lightning / static protection

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 years written warranty

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM – CABLE REQUIREMENT
Flexible cables RG6 and RG11 shall have a continuous dielectric such that the
centre conductor is in full contact with the dielectric along the entire length of the
coaxial cable
RG 11 Low Loss Quad Shield Cable
- 1.63mm/14 AWG solid copper covered steel conductor
- Enclosed in polyethylene insulation
- 2 layers of Foil tape
- 60% Aluminium braid and 40% Aluminium braid
- Black PVC outer casing
- DC requirements – current carrying capacity 5A for RG11

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 153

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

RG 6 Quad Shield Cable

- 1.02mm/18 AWG solid copper covered steel conductor
- Enclosed in polyethylene insulation
- 2 layers of Foil tape
- 60% Aluminium braid
- Black PVC outer casing
- DC requirements – current carrying capacity 3A for RG6

All cable connections to be crimped or compression with appropriate F type

connectors
Use RG6 quad core for runs of less than 50m and RG11 quad core for runs more
than 50m and for backbone cabling.

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 2 years written warranty

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Carry out tests at each outlet to demonstrate compliance with the specification.
Certificate Required
Electrical installations: Test to AS/NZS 3017. Provide a certificate showing test
results and certifying compliance with AS/NZS 3000
Telecommunications cabling: To AS/NZS ISO/IEC 15018 and the
recommendations of SAA HB 29. Test the cable link performance in accordance
with the recommendations of SAA HB 29 at the maximum frequency and data rate
for the cable class, and the cable category. Provide a certificate showing test
results and certifying compliance with AS/NZS ISO/IEC 15018.
Television and audio systems: To AS/NZS 1367. Test the complete television
and audio system. Provide a certificate showing test results and certifying
compliance.
Certificate: provide a certificate of guarantee of signal strength for Newcastle,
Sydney, and Wollongong etc., as applicable. Issue to Principal’s Authorised
Person.
Rectification: correct the system, and replace components without extra cost, as
necessary to achieve compliance.
To AS 1367 CABLING
To AS 1417.1 Coaxial cable: single core with a nominal impedance of 75ohms.
Cabling between buildings: run underground in conduit with 600mm cover
Lightning protection: To AS.
To AS/NZS 1367 AMPLIFIERS –
Power supply: connect to landlord supply
OUTLETS
Coaxial cable sockets flush-mounted on high impact plastic plate

MATV /TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEM OUTLET LOCATIONS

- Provide MATV/ television antenna outlets. Refer to drawings and schedules for
number and location of outlets.
- Where TV outlets are not shown on drawings provide TV outlets as per the
following schedule. Confirm location with the Principal’s Authorised Person.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 154

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

ROOM LOCATION ANTENNA/ SYSTEM CRITERIA FOR LOCATING ANTENNA/

OUTLET REQUIRED SYSTEM OUTLET

Living room 1 adjacent to likely T.V. position and

All dwellings power point, not near a window, away
from the telephone outlet

Main bedroom 1 adjacent to likely T.V. position and power

point, away from likely bedhead position
and not near window, opposite wall to
telephone outlet.

Common room 1 adjacent to likely T.V. position and power

(SEPP HSPD only) point, not near window

Certificate Required 12.14 Mechanical Ventilation

To AS/NZS 1668.1 MECHANICAL VENTILATION
To AS 1668.2 Provide mechanical ventilation/exhaust fans to:
- Bathroom (exhaust fan to include humidity sensor trigger)
- Laundry
- Toilet/WC
- Plant room
- Other rooms/locations as shown on drawings
To AS 4254 Comply with To AS/NZS 1668.1 and AS 1668.2 and as required by the BCA
- Duct to outside
- Conceal ductwork in wall/ceiling/roof
EXHAUST FANS >1KW REQUIREMENT
ONLY installed to provide adequate ventilation and airflow to an enclosed plant
room or shafts and stair pressurisation etc.
- To current Australian Standards AS/NZS
- To current BCA including independent Certification of compliance to BCA
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Vandal resistant material and fixings
- Ceiling or wall mounted
- Noncorrosive system
- Heavy duty type product including long life bull bearing motor
- Airflow >500m³/hour
- Quiet operation
- Turbo fan
- Duct outlet shall be made of non-combustible materials
- Removable grill
- Installed with appropriate dampers
- Interconnectable to control mechanisms
WARRANTY: Provide 2 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 155

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

CEILING FANS
Please refer to LAHC Heating and Cooling Policy.
Provide ceiling fans/ fan units in living rooms and bedrooms, and integral light as
shown on the drawings:
- LAHC will provide ceiling fans in all new social housing properties.
- LAHC will retrofit ceiling fans into existing properties subject to suitable ceiling
height, and available funding
- Install to manufacturers specification and details
- Provide control switching integrated with light switches.
WARRANTY: Provide 2 year written warranty

12.15 Solar Photovoltaic Grid System

To AS 3000 Refer to project drawings
AS 3008 Design, supply, install and commission a complete solar electric photovoltaic system.
AS/NZS 5033 The system shall be from an approved Clean Energy Council accredited installers

AS 4777 The photovoltaic system shall consist of:

- Photovoltaic panels arrays
- Grid connected inverter/s to suit
- DC power cabling reticulation and safety devices from the photovoltaic module
array to inverter/s
- Control cabling as required
- Metering, cabling and hardware required for grid connection to a dual element
Supply Authority meter
Ensure that the DC and AC voltage drop does not exceed 1%
The Trade Contractor shall provide all necessary mounting and support on the roof
for the PV panels.
Refer to architectural roof layouts for photovoltaic panel position(s). Final numbers
and exact mounting method to be determined to suit site conditions and selected
manufacturer’s requirements.

The Contractor shall provide:

- Testing and commissioning
- As-built drawings and operational and maintenance manuals
- Warranty of the works
- Comprehensive maintenance for the duration of the defects and liability period
- 2 hrs training for persons nominated by Project Manager

12.16 Lift

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 156

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

ELECTRICAL WORKS

GENERAL
To AS 1735.1 Where shown on the drawings provide a Motor Room-Less (MRL) Electric traction
lift:

Up to 3 floors Standard Lift

- 13 persons 884 kg
- Door opening 900 x 2100
- Clear car size 1400 wide x 1600 deep
- Well size 2100mm wide x 2100mm deep
- Pit depth 1400mm
- Overhead 3800mm (measured top landing level to the top of the shaft)
Over 3 floors (more than 12m stretcher lift
- 14 persons 852 kg
- Door opening 900 x 2100mm
- Clear car size 1100mm wide x 2100mm deep
- Well size 2000mm wide x 2500mm deep
- Pit depth 1400mm
- Overhead 4000mm (measured top landing level to the top of the shaft)

General Fit out for all lifts

- Vandal resistant surfaces (paint and scratch resistive
- Lighting—vandal resistant, low energy consumption and long life LED lighting
- Lift buttons and controls to meet access requirements of AS1735.12
- Voice annunciation as a minimum of floor levels, door position and lift direction
- Provide for future CCTV installation with voice facilities to lift car. CCTV to be
activated when lift call is activated and turned off when lift goes into standby

- Lift phones with auto dial facilities

- Ventilation fans
- Lift shaft FRL of not less than 120/120/120
- Provide warning signs in accordance with BCA clause E3.3 warning against use
of lifts in case of fire
- Lift shaft FRL of not less than 120/120/120

On completion of lift installation, the lift needs to be registered with SafeWork NSW.

WARRANTY: Provide a 15 year warranty

MAINTENANCE: Provide initial 12 months maintenance and servicing period

FINISHES: Refer to drawings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 157

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GAS SERVICE

13: Gas Service

13.1 General
GAS SUPPLY
Provide and install individual metering to each unit.
Certificate Required CERTIFICATE
Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Materials and Workmanship.
On completion the Contractor is to certify that the materials and installation comply
with the code requirements.
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Provide at Completion/ Practical Completion drawings showing the locations of
pipes and fittings, depths of underground pipework, positions of control valves, and
the like.

13.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:
- trenches excavated and ready for pipe laying
- work ready for specified testing
- enclosed work ready to be covered up or concealed
- any other inspections required by the Supply Authority.

13.3 Quality and Work Practices

To AS/NZ 5601.1 GENERAL
TESTING
Test the installation as required by the Supply Authority.
GUARANTEES
Provide the Principal’s Authorised Person with manufacturer’s warranties and
guarantees of the appliances and accessories used in the works.
COMMISSIONING
On satisfactory completion and testing, turn on isolating and control valves, purge
and charge the installation, and hand over fully charged with gas.
ACCESSIBILITY
Install components of the installation, such as pipework fittings, so that they are
removable without damage either to themselves or to the building structure or
finishes:
- Do not run pipework in cavities.
Approval Enclosed pipework:
- obtain approval for the location of inaccessible pipe runs and pipe fittings, and
record on ‘work-as-executed’ drawings.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 158

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GAS SERVICE

To AS/NZS 5601.1, EMBEDDED PIPEWORK

Install in continuous lengths, without fittings, and not crossing any movement joint
or joint between two (2) adjoining sections of reinforced concrete through which
the reinforcement does not extend.
Sleeves: at building penetrations provide purpose made metal or plastic sleeves
(in fire-rated elements, metal only) formed from pipe sections:
- prime paint ferrous surfaces
- maintain fire and acoustic ratings.
To AS 1599 Sheathing: wrap the pipe in 250 micrometre polyethylene, high impact resistant,
secured by an approved 55mm wide pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene
tape at 1 metre intervals.
To AS/NZS 5601.1, UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS
Location marking: During backfilling lay warning tape 300 mm above, and for the
full length of, buried natural gas pipes.
To AS 1345 - minimum 100mm width of durable plastic material, coloured, with ‘GAS PIPE
UNDER’ marked continuously.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Protect underground ferrous pipe and other pipework liable to external corrosion
by either sheathing or sleeves.

13.4 Materials
To AS/NZS 5601.1, GENERAL
AS 4645 Marker plates: Provide at ground level at each change of direction engraved to
show the direction of the line and the name of the service. Inset the marker in a
150 x 150 x 150mm concrete block, with top set flush with the finished ground or
surface level.
Valves: Do not install valves below ground level unless they are in underground
control boxes.
REGULATORS
To AS/NZS 5601.1, Install regulators in gas lines to regulate pressure:
To AS/NZS 1596 Natural gas: To approval list 205 of AGA and ALGPA ‘Approved Appliances and
Components’.
LP gas: Install diaphragm.
Venting: LP gas.
VALVES
To AS4617 Natural gas: Install valves to control and cut off gas flow in gas lines, and to
approval list of AGA and ALPGA ‘Approved Appliances and Components’.
To AS/NZS 1596 LP gas: Install valves to control and cut off gas flow in gas line and to approved
list of AGA and ALPHA ‘Approved Appliances and Components’.

13.5 Gas Supply

CONNECTION TO MAIN SUPPLY
The Contractor is responsible for making arrangements and paying all fees for
connection to the main supply, including the provision of the main meter:
- provide gas meter assembly complete with meter, control valve, inlet and outlet
meter risers, service governor and all other necessary fittings
To AS/NZS 5601.1
- install meter.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 159

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GAS SERVICE

To AS/NZS 1596 LPG CYLINDER INSTALLATION

AS 2030.1 - provide gas regulators, change over valves and all necessary fittings to comply
with the Authority’s requirements.

13.6 Finishes
PIPE FINISHES
Finish exposed pipework, including fittings, supports and the like as follows:
Copper and copper alloys: internal locations – chrome plate. External locations
– natural finish.
Galvanised steel: full gloss solvent borne paint system as specified in PAINTING.
To AS/NZS 5601.1 pipework identification

13.7 Fixtures and Fittings

To AS/NZS 5601.1 GENERAL
- provide number and in locations as shown on drawings and/or as scheduled.
- install in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory Authorities.
- install brass control cocks and unions for gas ranges and water heaters.
GAS BAYONET
- Provide gas bayonet to dwelling/unit living areas and common rooms in SEPP
HSPD projects.
- Provide for climatic zones 4, 5 and 6 against external wall that is suitable for a
future gas appliance flue
GAS BAYONET AND GAS SPACE HEATER
Provide gas bayonet fitting and space heater for climatic zones 7 and 8 and Principal
identified cold towns
- where gas is available
- flued to the outside
- tiled hearth where carpet is provided
GAS HOT WATER HEATERS
- Refer to PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING,
- GAS WATER HEATERS REQUIREMENT
GAS SPACE HEATERS
Where shown on the drawings provide:
- Natural Gas/Town LPG/Bottled LPG/Town Propane
- Wall mounted convection heater, thermostat heat control automatic electronic
ignition, timer, regulated gas flow and flued combustion gases
- Child safe to touch cabinet
- Min. 4.3 efficiency stars and 6.0 emissions star rating
- Double lined flue within ceiling space
- Heaters with flues
- Gas input – Min. size: 5 MJ/hr
- Gas input – Max. size: 23 MJ/hr

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 160

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GAS SERVICE

- Labelling of appliances, specifying min. allowable room volume and capacity of

heater in MJ/hr
- Installation to AGA requirements
- AGA certificate of approval
- 1 heater per dwelling located in living room

WARRANTY
Provide a minimum 10 years written warranty for burner, 2 years for fan and min. 1
year for other parts.
GAS STOVE
Refer to ELECTRICAL Appliances and other installations: STOVE
APPLIANCES
Include warranties: Refer to PRELIMINARIES.
COLD WATER CONNECTIONS
Connect the cold water supply to storage and instantaneous water heaters as
specified in PLUMBING AND SANITARY PLUMBING: Water services.
To AS/NZS 5601.1 FLUES
Provide flued heating exhaust.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 161

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

14: Plastering
14.1 General
EXTENT
Prepare surfaces and finish as itemised in SCHEDULES: Schedule of
Plaster/Render Finishes.
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Section the terms “plaster”, “plastering”, and the like
includes the terms “render” and “rendering”, and the like except where the context
otherwise requires.

14.2 Quality and Work Practices

To AS CA 27 GENERAL
To HB 161 - clean, de-grease and make good any defects in the background which might
adversely affect the quality of plasterwork
- apply each coat to the whole of each undivided plane area in one continuous
operation.
- Thickness limits
* One coat work: 12 – 15 mm
* Multi-coat work:
 First coat: 9 – 15 mm
 Floating coat (if any): 6 – 9 mm
 Finishing coat (except setting coats): 6 – 9 mm
 Setting coat: 2 – 3 mm
Tolerances: finish plane surfaces within a tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres
anywhere in any direction. Make true corners, angles and edges, and curved or
radiused surfaces, within equivalent tolerances.
Waterproof render: Provide for all external renderings an approved
waterproofing compound to manufacturer’s recommendations:
- avoid puncturing or plugging waterproof render
- where it is necessary to drill through waterproof render restore the barrier by
sealing around the penetrations.
Waterproofing membrane for external above-ground use: Comply with AS
4654.1 and AS 4654.2 for areas such as balconies, membrane roofs, planter boxes
and terraces.
Finish:
- make finished surfaces even, free from defects, and true to the required surface
- make vertical surfaces plumb and horizontal surfaces level
- make re-entrant corners and salient angles straight and true.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 162

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

Finish:
- make finished surfaces even, free from defects, and true to the required surface
- make vertical surfaces plumb and horizontal surfaces level
- make re-entrant corners and salient angles straight and true.
Embedded items:
Sheath water pipes and other embedded items to permit thermal movements.
Weepholes:
Keep weephole openings free of plaster and maintain a consistent opening size.
Cornices:
Cut and mitre corners of cornices accurately. Match and align ornament. Do not
make butt joints in the length of a cornice unless required, or full lengths are not
available.
Fix cornice using adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Where the cornice projects across a ceiling for 400mm or more, reinforce with
additional mechanical fixings. Fix at ≤ 600mm centres.
PREPARATION
Provide substrates as follows:
- Clean and free from any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of plaster.
- If framed or discontinuous, support members in full lengths without splicing.
Approval - If solid or continuous, remove excessive projections and fill voids and hollows
with plaster stronger than the first coat and not weaker than the substrate.
- Ensure that items to be concealed behind plasterwork, such as pipes, conduits
and the like, are chased and fixed in position:
- cover chases over 50mm wide, with strips of expanded metal lath to 75mm
beyond each side of the recess
- all pipework is to be fully tested before plasterwork is commenced.
Bonding agents:
- coat concrete surfaces to be rendered with an approved PVA bonding agent
- do not use bonding agents on background surfaces other than concrete without
approval.
Dense concrete: where not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key,
roughen by hacking, bush hammering, or abrasive blasting to a depth of 3mm to
expose the aggregate and then apply a dash coat.
- coat with proprietary bonding agent.
Absorbent substrates:
- If suction is excessive, control it by dampening but avoid over-wetting and do
not plaster substrates showing surface moisture.
Painted surfaces:
- Remove paint and hack the surface at close intervals.
Untrue substrates:
If the substrate is not sufficiently true to ensure conformity with the thickness limits
for the plaster system, or has excessively uneven suction resulting from variations
in the composition of the substrate, apply additional coats without exceeding the
thickness limits for the substrate or system

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 163

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

Brickwork: where not rough-jointed, rake out joints 5mm deep.

Concrete blockwork: apply a dash coat.
Dash coat: mix 1 part cement and 2 parts coarse sand to the consistency of a
thick slurry and forcibly dash it on to the background to give a rough cast coating 3
– 5mm thick. Cure under damp conditions and allow to harden. Protect from drying
out before applying subsequent coats.
Wall plates: provide background support for render by fixing a 150mm wide
expanded metal lath to edge of wall plates and over face of brickwork below.
Arch bars: wrap exposed arch bars with galvanised wire mesh.

APPLICATION
Plaster Thickness Table

Substrate Cement render, total thickness of

single or multi-coat work

Brickwork and blockwork Minimum 12mm

Lightweight concrete and blocks Minimum 12mm

Metal lath measured from the face of Minimum 18mm

the lath

Temperature:
If the ambient temperature is ≤ 10°C or ≥ 30°C, ensure that the temperature of
mixes, substrates and reinforcement at the time of application are between 5°C and
35°C.
FINISHES
Finishing Treatments:
Bag: Rub the finish coat when set firm with a hessian pad or similar.
Carborundum stone: Rub the finish coat when set hard with a carborundum stone
to achieve a finish free from sand.
Foam float: Float finish coat on application with a wood or plastic float to an even
surface and finish with a foam float to achieve a fine sand textured finish.
Steel trowel: Steel trowel finish coat to a smooth dense surface which is not glass-
like and is free from shrinkage cracks and crazing.
Wood or plastic float: Float the finish coat on application with a wood or plastic
float to an even surface.
Specialist plaster finish (Polymer modified render): Coloured or textured polymer
modified render to be trowelled on or applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 164

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

PROTECTION AND CURING

- protect finished work from the elements of sun, wind and rain and from damage
by building operations and any other causes.
- provide temporary coverings as required and protect windows and doors
- remove mortar splashes as the work proceeds.
Keeping moist: If a proprietary curing agent is not used, keep the plaster moist as
follows:
- Base coats and single coat systems: Keep continuously moist for 2 days and
allow to dry for 5 days before applying further plaster coats.
- Finish coats: Keep continuously moist for 2 days.
Cement based work: Cure by preventing rapid or uneven drying out.
Gypsum based work: Do not subject gypsum-based work to persistent dampness
after it has set.

14.3 Materials
To AS CA27 GENERAL
To AS 3972 Sand: Fine, sharp, well graded sand with low clay content and free from
To AS 1672.1 efflorescing salts.
To AS/NZS 2589 Cement: General purpose cement type GP delivered to site in branded and sealed
bags.
Lime: Branded hydrated lime delivered to site in sealed bags.
To AS CA27
Gypsum plaster: Provide a proprietary product containing calcium sulfate
hemihydrate with additives to modify setting.
To AS 1397 Admixtures: Use admixtures of approved type in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
Lime putty: Prepare lime putty as follows: Stand dry hydrate of lime to
AS/NZS 1672.1 and water for 24 hours or more without drying out.
Colouring products: Provide proprietary products manufactured for colouring
cement plaster. Integral pigment proportion to be 5% maximum by weight of
cement.
Water: Clean fresh drinking water, free of impurities.
Metal lath: Sheet steel expanded mesh, galvanised, coating class Z200.
Beads:
Location: Fix beads as follows:
- Angle beads: At all external corners.
- Drip beads: At all lower terminations of external plaster.
- Movement control beads: At all movement control joints.
- Stop beads: At all terminations of plaster and junctions with other materials or
plaster systems.
- Joints in beads: Provide dowels to maintain alignment.
Mechanical fixing to substrate: ≤ 300 mm centres.
Material:
- Internal location: Metallic coated sheet AZ 150.
- External location: Stainless steel or PVC

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 165

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

MIXES
Select a mix proportion to suit the conditions of application.
Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand to
bulk by absorption of water.
Ensure that successive coats are no richer in binder than the coat to which they are
applied.
Mix Proportion Table - Cement Render/ Plastering, by Volume

Type Application Cement:Lime:Sand Mix

1 for clay brick and/or concrete 1:0:3, + waterproofing agent and

background (external work) mortar plasticiser

2 for clay brick and/or concrete 2:1:10

background (internal work and
wet areas)

3 for concrete brick or block 1:0:6

work (internal only)

4 for concrete ceiling skim coat gypsum plaster: washed sand mix
2:5

5 for concrete ceilings-setting hardwall/plaster: lime putty mix 3:1

coat over skim coat

Mixing: Machine-mix and maintain uniform proportion, colour and consistency

from batch to batch:
- do not re-temper mortar
- use mixes containing cement within 2 hours
- use mixes containing gypsum plaster within 30 minutes
- let lime putty stand for 24 hours before use.

14.4 Junctions and Trims

JOINTS
Flush joints: Provide recessed edge and setting compound and finish flush with
perforated reinforcing tape.
External corner joints: Make joints over zinc-coated steel corner beads.
Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.
Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper
tape in bedding compound.
Decorative joints: Apply decorative joints in the second coat of two coat work as
required.
CONTROL JOINTS
Provide joints in the finish to coincide with control joints in the substrate. Make
sure that the joint in the substrate is not bridged during plastering.
- Depth: Extend the joint right through the plaster and reinforcement to the
substrate.
- Width: 3mm, or the same width as the substrate joint, whichever is greater.
Damp-proof courses: Do not continue plaster across damp-proof courses

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 166

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PLASTERING

MOVEMENT JOINTS
Provide purpose-made zinc-coated control joint beads at not more than 12 m
centres and to coincide with movement joints in the background:
- ensure that the background joint is not bridged during plastering
- extend the joint right through the plaster to the background.
V JOINTS
Provide v joints, cut right through the plaster to the background, in the following
locations:
- at junctions between different background materials, except where metal lath is
specified
- at abutments with other finishes, e.g., set surfaces.
- at abutments with metal door frames.
TRIM
Finish plaster to a 5mm radius for salient angles.

14.5 Schedule of Plaster/Render Finishes

Element Finish Mortar type & coats
Concrete ceiling. Smooth trowel I - PVA bonding coat
finish. ii - Type 5, skim coat
iii - Type 6, setting coat
Internal clay brick walls Wood float and I - Type 2 one coat cement
(not walls in wet areas finish with a render
or background to plastic foam float
tiling). to a fine sand
texture finish.
Internal concrete walls. As for internal clay I - One dash coat
brick walls. ii - Type 3 one coat cement
render
Internal cement brick walls. As for internal clay I - Type 4, one coat cement
brick walls. render
Internal wet area walls As for internal clay brick I - Type 2, one coat cement
(shower, bathroom, WC, walls. When wall is set render
laundry ) incl. background rubdown area not to be tiled
to tiled walls. with a carborundum stone
to an approved smooth
finish.
External clay brick or As for internal clay brick I - Type 1, one coat
concrete background. walls. waterproof cement render
External WCs, meter, As for internal brick walls. I - Type 1, one coat
cupboards, storerooms. waterproof cement render
Concrete soffits of Wood float to a fine sand I - PVA bonding coat
verandahs, textured finish. ii - Type 1, one coat
external/internal stair flights waterproofed cement
and landings, etc. (not render to 10mm max.
where off-form concrete is thickness
specified).
Top of concrete elements Wood float to a fine sand I - Type 1, 20mm nominal
(i.e. Hoods, roofs etc. textured finish. thickness, one coat
waterproof cement render
Note: For mortar types see 14.3 – Materials

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 167

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

15: Tiling & Wet Area Waterproofing

15.1 General
15.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice to the Principal’s Authorised Person so that the following can
be inspected:
- flashing and waterproofing of wet area floors and walls before covering
- background immediately before starting tiling
- initial or trial set-out
- control joints before sealing and grouting
- completion of tiling.

15.3 Quality and Work Practices

SAMPLES
- Provide three tiles of each type.
- Grout sample.
- Minimum 300mm length sample of movement joint material/ cover.
PREPARATION
Substrates without wet area membranes:
- Clean off any deposits on the surface which may affect the adhesion of location
of tiles.
- Remove excessive projections.
- Fill any voids and hollows which are bigger than 10mm with a cement-sand mix
not stronger than the substrate or weaker than the bedding.
- Fill voids less than 10mm with a latex modified cementitious product and
eliminate feathering by scabbling the edges.
- For absorbent substrates, control excessive suction by dampening but avoid
over-wetting and do not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface
moisture.
- For dense concrete that are not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key,
roughen by scabbing or the like to remove nominal 3mm off the surface and
expose the aggregate. Apply a bonding treatment afterwards.
To AS 3958.1 GENERAL
To AS/NZS 4586 - Floor tiles to concrete floors to be laid on bedding mortar.
- Fix wall tiles generally before floor tiles.
- Set out tiles to give joints of uniform widths.
- Joint alignment: Set out tiling with joints accurately aligned in both directions
and wall tiling joints level and plumb.
- Joint position: Set out tiles from the centre of the floor or wall to be tiled and, if
possible, ensure cut tiles are a half tile or larger.
- Fixtures: If possible, position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other
penetrations occur at the intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or in the
centre of tiles.
- Grade floor to even and correct falls from all walls to floor wastes and elsewhere
as required.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 168

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

- Change of finish: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish
including carpet.
- Suitably prepare the substrates to receive the bedded finish.
Drying and shrinkage
Before tiling, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and
shrinkage) for these substrates:
- Concrete slabs: 42 days.
- Concrete blockwork: 28 days.
Toppings on slabs and rendering on brick or blockwork: A further 21 days.
- Check all cartons of tiles are from the same batch
- Monitor shade variation as tile are laid to minimise excessive contrasting and
maintain a balanced tone
- Installation only by a licensed tiler
TESTING
To AS 4459 Provide independently certified test data to demonstrate compliance with the
Specification.
To AS/NZS 4586 Slip resistance: Floor tiles must have a surface slip resistance classification in
accordance with the requirements of the NCC when tested to AS/NZS 4586.
Acoustic testing: Determine the weighted normalised impact sound pressure level
To AS ISO 717.2 as measured for the acoustic underlay as part of the entire tiling system.
CUTTING AND LAYING
Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings and at margins where necessary.
Drill holes without damaging tile faces. Rub edges smooth without chipping.
Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings and
other finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Cut recesses where
necessary for soap holders and the like.
Falls and levels
Lay floor tiling to even and correct falls generally and to floor wastes and
elsewhere as required. Make level junctions with walls. If falls are not required, lay
level.
Generally, falls to be minimum 1:100.
Falls in shower areas to be minimum 1:60.
Bath ventilation
Ventilate the space below fully enclosed baths with at least 2 vermin proofed
ventilating tiles.
Sealed joints
Fill joints with silicone sealant and finish flush with the tile surface where tiling joins
sanitary fixtures and at corners of walls in showers.
Material: Anti-fungal modified silicone.
TILING AROUND WINDOWS – BRICK CONSTRUCTION
Tile window reveals to the height of wall tiles. Provide tiled sill with 1:20 fall.
GROUTING
Fill the joints solid and tool flush. Clean off the surplus grout. Wash down when
grout has set. When grout is dry polish the tile surface with a clean cloth.
COMPLETION
Clean the tiles surface with the appropriate tile cleaning agent, and polish.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 169

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

15.4 Materials
GENERAL
To AS 2758.1 Sand: Washed sand.
To AS 3972 Cement: Type GP – general purpose Portland cement.
To AS 3972 White cement: Type GP, with iron salts content not exceeding 1%.
To AS 1672.1 Lime:
Water: clean and free from any deleterious materials.
To AS ISO 13006 Floor Tiles: Fully vitrified tiles or porcelain
Wall Tiles: Glazed ceramic tiles, vitrified tiles
To AS ISO 13007.1 ADHESIVES
In accordance with the adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for the
conditions of use
To AS 3958.1 BEDDING MORTAR
Mixing: from cement and sand with minimum water.
Proportioning: select proportions from the range 1:3 to 1:4 cement:sand to
obtain satisfactory adhesion
To AS 3958.1 GROUT
Use mould and bacteria resistant grout.
Pigments for coloured grout: Colourfast fillers compatible with the grout
material. For cement-based grouts, lime-proof natural or synthetic metallic oxides
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions compatible with cement.
For terracotta tiles, provide proprietary polymer modified grout
To AS 3958.1 SEALANTS

15.5 Waterproofing Wet Areas

To AS 3740, AS GENERAL
4858 Comply with requirements in BCA 3.8.1.2.
- water based (no solvent release)
- waterproof all wet area floors with membrane falls to floor waste outlets
- provide leak control flanges around floor wastes to all wet area floors.
Installation to manufacturer’s instructions
- provide screed, to all base materials with steel trowel finish to minimum 1:80
screed falls to leak control flange prior the installation of the membrane.
Minimum screed thickness 10mm. Allow minimum two (2) days curing
- provide membrane on screed including hobs and extend membrane minimum
300mm up wall at floor/wall and bath/wall junctions, and 1800mm high to walls
where showers are located
- provide to walls of splashbacks
- installation only by accredited applicators registered with the NSW
Waterproofing Industry Association
- undertake necessary testing to confirm watertightness and required
To AS 4858 performance of the installation

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 170

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

Substrate moisture content

To AS 1884 Verify that the moisture content of the substrate is compatible with the water vapour
Appendix A transmission rate of the membrane system by testing.
Bond breakers
To AS 3740 Provide bond breakers that are compatible with the extensibility class of the
membrane to be used.
Material to be purpose made bond breaker tapes and closed cell foam backing rods
or fillets of sealants.
Sealants
Waterproof, flexible and mould resistant sealant compatible with host material.
Membrane terminations
Edge protection: Provide > 150mm upturns.
Waterproofing membrane upturn in showers: Minimum 1800mm high.
Anchoring: Secure sheet membranes along the top edge.
Edge protection: Protect edges of the membrane.
Waterproofing above terminations: Waterproof the structure above the termination
to prevent moisture entry behind the membrane using tiler’s angle and finish
overlaps.
To AS 3740 Water stop angles
Provide water stop angles at door thresholds and shower enclosures to support
the waterproof membrane at junctions between waterproofed and non-
waterproofed areas.
Size the vertical leg of the water stop angle in accordance with current Australian
Standards.
At corners, cut the horizontal leg and bend the vertical leg instead of forming
vertical joints between separate lengths of angle.
Fix using compatible sealant or adhesive and corrosion resistant countersunk or
wafer head screws.
Certificate Required Showers Waterproofing Guarantee
Provide ten years guarantee for materials and quality of work undertaken for
shower waterproofing system. The guarantee shall cover removal of floor and wall
tiles, removal of shower screens and associated shower fittings, repairing and
replacing of waterproofing system, reinstallation of floor and wall tiles, shower
fittings and shower screens and any making good.
Leach mat: prior to laying the floor tiles place a lightweight net material over the
waterproofing membrane to provide an irrigation system. Turn down the net
material into the floor waste outlet to assist underfloor drainage.
Guarantee: Refer to PRELIMINARIES: Materials & Workmanship

15.6 Tiles
Approval SAMPLES
Submit samples of tiles intended to be used for approval

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 171

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

FLOOR TILES REQUIREMENT

Ceramic Floor Tiles
- First Quality to ISO 13006
- Products in compliance to AS/NZS 4586
- Vitrified or porcelain
- Colours as appropriate and directed
- Warpage not exceeding 0.5mm for any tile batch
- Surface Hardness to MOHS Min 6—Test Method EN101
- Water absorption to ISO10545-3/EN99
- Chemical resistance to ISO10545-13/EN16
- Slip resistance to current Australian Standards AS4586
- Slip rating of R10 or Pendulum test score of ‘X’ for Wet areas Common areas
and External areas,
- Slip rating of R9 or a Pendulum test score ‘Z’ for all other areas
- Minimum tile thickness 7.0 mm (+/-1.0mm)
- Tile trims on step and hob exposed edges
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty
WALL TILES REQUIREMENT
Ceramic Wall tiles
To ISO 13006 - First Quality to ISO 13006
To AS/NZS 4586 - Products in compliance to AS/NZS 4586
- Vitrified or Porcelain
- Tile thickness ≥ Min. 5.5mm (+/- 0.5mm)
- Full glaze over face ceramic tile
- Ceramic Biscuit (Bisque) must be engobed
- Surface Hardness min MOHS Min 3 – Test Method EN101
- Extruded PVC or Aluminium tile Trim on exposed edges
- Silicon seal to cupboard boundaries
- Wall tiles to extend to floor behind upright stoves
WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty.
SPARE TILES
Provide spare matching tiles of each type and store in works as directed.
ACCESSORIES
Provide round edge tiles at extremities – sills, bath vents and the like to match
surrounding tiles as to composition, colour and finish.
Provide step treads and nosings to stairs, landings, and thresholds, - contrasting
colour for SEPP HSPD.

15.7 Junctions
To AS 3958.1 MOVEMENT JOINTS
Provide, as follows:
- over structural movement joints

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 172

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

- at junctions between different background materials

- to divide large tiled areas into bays, maximum 5m wide
- extend joints through bed to the background.
CAULKED JOINTS
Provide caulked joints, as follows:
- where tiling is specified to be cut around sanitary fixtures
- around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts,
nibs, and the like
- at junctions with window and door frames, built-in cupboards, and the like
- caulking compound must be non-hardening, mould resistant.
FLOOR FINISH DIVIDERS
- finish junctions with differing floor finishes with a non-corrosive metal dividing
strip suitably fixed to the substrate, with top edge flush with the finished floor
- where changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below
the closed door
- threshold tiles to be maintained at same level as finish in the adjoining room
HOBS
- provide tiled hobs in locations and to dimensions indicated
- build up hobs with masonry units.
SHOWER NOSING TILE
- provide to perimeter of shower recess to allow for set down of shower area to
the thickness of the nosing tile
- nosing tile must have tread profile with radiused-free edge in colour to match
floor tiles
DOOR THRESHOLDS
- provide quarry/ceramic tiles to door thresholds to meet fire safety regulations,
sliding door step free access. Finish flush with adjacent finishes

15.8 Fixtures and Fittings

GENERAL
- Number and location as shown on drawings and/or scheduled
- install to manufacturer’s instructions
SHOWER BASE REQUIREMENT
Liveable Housing
- Hob less shower bases—with stainless steel shower grate and trough–
designed to ensure efficient draining
- Drainer Min 75mm wide
- Install with min 2 degree fall
- Slip rating of minimum R10 and pendulum test score of X.(moderate)
General Housing only
- To current Australian Standard, including installation
- Standard Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval and tested to current
Australian Standard
- 900mm x 900mm x 70mm high hob

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 173

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

- Pressed metal (vitreous Solvent-borne finish) OR moulded plastic (nonslip

finish)
- Installed to manufacturers written specification
- Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/trademark
WARRANTY
Provide minimum 10 year written warranty for Latex (Waterborne) & 30 years
written warranty for pressed metal.

15.9 Schedule of Internal Tiling Finishes

Provide tiling. Refer to drawings and schedules for tiles selection and location.
In the event that tiles selection is not included in the Contract refer to Principal’s
Authorised Person.

Element/Location Requirement
Ceramic tiles, fully vitrified, slip resistant
FLOOR 150mm high skirting to match floor tiles
Internal Dwelling Tiles with nosing on internal stairs
entries, corridors, For Climatic Zones 7 and 8 Carpet on underlay except
circulation spaces, stairs for dwelling entry areas and kitchens where provide
and storage , ceramic tiles, fully vitrified, R9 slip resistant.
Living Room Slip resistance rating: Minimum R10/ P3 (Dry) or R11/
Kitchen & Dining Room P4 (Wet)

FLOOR Ceramic tiles, fully vitrified unglazed, non-slip.

Bathroom Provide setdowns and falls to floor wastes and grated
Bathroom / Laundry drains
Separate Laundry Slip resistance rating: Minimum R10/ P3 (Dry) or R11/
P4 (Wet)
Separate WC

FLOOR Ceramic tiles, fully vitrified unglazed, non-slip,

COMMON ROOM 150mm high skirting to match floor tiles
Entry Slip resistance rating: Minimum R10/ P3 (Dry) or R11/
Main room P4 (Wet)
Kitchenette
Storage Cupboard
WC

FLOOR Ceramic/ quarry tiles (non-slip)

COMMON AREAS Including 100mm min. high skirting
Entry foyer Provide step tread edging profile tiles to stair treads
Common entry lobby Slip resistance rating: Minimum R10/ P3 (Dry) or R11/
Common stairs P4 (Wet)

FLOOR (External) Ceramic/ quarry tiles (non-slip)

Entry porches Provide falls to floor wastes
Balconies Slip resistance rating: Minimum R10/ P3 (Dry) or R11/
Verandas P4 (Wet)
Thresholds (if required)

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 174

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

TILING & WET AREA WATERPROOFING

WALLS Full height ceramic tiles to walls:

Bathroom
Bathroom / Laundry

WALLS 150mm min. single tile height skirting

Separate Laundry Ceramic tiles min 300mm above laundry tub including
Separate WC returns at corner locations

WALLS ceramic tile splashback from benchtop to underside of

Kitchen & Kitchenette overhead cupboards or shelves
Splashbacks Tile wall behind stove

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 175

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

16: Resilient Finishes and Carpets

16.1 General
All floor covering must be firm and even, and feature a level transition between
abutting surfaces (Maximum vertical tolerance of 3mm between abutting surfaces
is allowable provide the lip is rounded or bevelled).
EXTENT
Refer to drawings
Provide carpet to bedroom floors and other areas where shown on drawings.
Approval SAMPLES
Submit samples of the floor coverings for approval.

16.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice so that the following may be inspected:
- background immediately before fixing sheets or tiles and laying of carpets
- completion of laying of underlay if any
- completed installation.

16.3 Quality and Work Practices

TESTING
Provide independently certified test data to demonstrate compliance with the
Specification.
Slip resistance: To AS/NZS 4586.
Fire hazard properties:
Critical radiant flux: To AS ISO 9239.1
Smoke development rate: To AS ISO 9239.1.
Fire resistance: To BCA Spec C1.10 Clause 3 and AS ISO 9239.1.
VOC limits: < 0.5 mg/m2/h, when tested to ISO 10580.
Carpet:
Wear classification: To AS 2001.
Abrasion: To AS 2001.
Colourfastness: Minimum grade of 5 when tested to AS 2001.4.

To AS 1884 VINYL FLOOR COVERING

- Obtain approval of trial set-out before fixing
Approval - Sheet set-out: Set out sheets to give the minimum number of joints. Position
joints away from areas of high stress. Run sheet joints parallel with the long
sides of floor areas, vertically on non-horizontal surfaces.
- Tile set-out: Set out tiles from centre of room. If possible cut tiles at margins
only, to give a cut dimension of at least 100mm x full tile width. Match edges
and align patterns. Arrange the cut tiles so that any variation in appearance is
minimised.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 176

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

- Form tight neat joints showing no visual open seam

- Finish flush with adjoining surfaces
- Run sheet joints parallel with the long sides of floor areas
- Set out to give the minimum number of joints
- Roll in both directions with a 75kg roller, 30 minutes after tile laying.
Joints
Non-welded: Butt edges together to form tight neat joints showing no visible open
seam.
Cold welding: Apply seaming compound 100 mm wide to the substrate centrally
under the seam. Roll the seam until the compound is forced up into the joint. Clean
off flush using a damp cloth.
Epoxy jointing to slip resistant vinyl sheet: Join seams with epoxy adhesive.
Junctions
General: Scribe neatly up to returns, edges, fixtures and fittings. Finish flush with
adjoining surfaces.
Protection
General: Keep traffic off floors until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying,
whichever period is the longer. Do not allow water in contact with the finish for 7
days.
Reinstatement: repair or replace any faulty or damaged work. Where work
cannot be repaired satisfactorily, replace the whole area affected.
Cleaning and polishing: after curing period recommended by adhesive
manufacturer and not less than 48 hours after laying:
- thoroughly clean floors with tile cleaner and then
- apply one (1) coat of vinyl seal in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
- polish using two (2) coats of approved vinyl polish, machine finishing to an
approved dense polish
CARPET
To AS/NZS 2455.1 INSTALLATION
To AS 4288 Setting out:
General: Lay the carpet in continuous lengths without cross joins in the body of the
area. Where unavoidable cross joins at doorways, create the joins directly below
the closed doors
Joints in underlay: Make sure joints in underlay do not coincide with carpet joints.
Do not carry underlay over carpet grippers or edge strips.
Seaming methods:
Woven carpet: Machine or hand sew.
Tufted carpet: Seam with hot-melt adhesive tapes.
Fixing:
To AS/NZS 2455.1 Gripper strip: Provide preformed gripper strip and 177ackles edge strip. Space
fixings at 150 mm maximum centres.
Immediately after laying, and again one hour later, roll the carpet from the centre
diagonally towards each edge using a 65 kg multi-wheeled roller. Do not roll foam-
backed carpet.
Permanent stick method. As shown on the drawings. Use water based adhesive

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 177

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

To AS 4288 SOFT CARPET UNDERLAY

- Make sure joints in underlay do not coincide with carpet joints. Do not carry
underlay over carpet grippers or edge strips.
HARD CARPET UNDERLAY
To AS/NZS 1859.4 - Hard underlay to be general purpose medium board, wet process fibreboard
(hardboard) manufactured specifically for use as flooring underlay with nominal
thickness of 5.5mm.
Hot-melt adhesives tapes
Commercial grade glass fibre and cotton thermoplastic adhesive coated tape
60mm wide on a 90mm wide metal foil base and backed with silicon-coated
release paper.
Edge strips
Type: Heavy-duty edge strip appropriate to the floor covering type (178ackles or
adhesive fixed), capable where necessary of accommodating different levels of
adjacent floor finishes.
Form: Metal moulding or extrusion, with vinyl inserts.
Location: At exposed edges of the carpet, and at junctions with differing floor
finishes or finishes of a different thickness. Where edge strips occur at doorways,
locate the junctions directly below the closed door.
Cleaning and protection:
- Progressively clean the work and when the installation is complete, clean as
necessary to remove extraneous matter, marks, soiling and the like and to lift the
pile where appropriate
- Leave selected off cuts of carpet for each unit as directed by Principal’s
Authorised Person
SUBSTRATE
Remove loose materials and projections and fill any depressions so as not to
affect adhesion or produce undulations in the finished surface.
Prepare the substrate including the following:
- Stripping and cleaning: Remove deleterious and loose material from concrete
surfaces, including existing floor coverings and mechanically remove any surface
treatment which could adversely affect adhesion.
- Cleaning timber surfaces: Remove oil, grease and traces of applied finishes.
- Repairs: Make good to the concrete surface finish as necessary. Fill depressions
with a suitable filler, and remove high spots and projections. If necessary, lay a
steel-trowelled underlay to concrete substrate.
- Timber substrate repair/ rectification: Remove projections. If conformance to
a flatness tolerance of 6mm in 3000mm, determined using a 3000mm
straightedge placed anywhere in any direction cannot be achieved, fix a
hardboard underlay in brick pattern with joints avoiding substrate joints.
- Fixtures and fittings: Remove door stops and other fixtures, and refix in position
undamaged on completion of the installation.
- Basic sanding: Provide an even plane sanded surface on strip flooring to be
covered. Lightly sand the junctions of sheet flooring

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 178

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

Moisture content:
General: Do not commence installation of flooring unless:
- Concrete substrate: The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to
AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B and values in Appendix B have been obtained.
- Plywood and timber: The moisture content of the substrate has been tested to
AS/NZS 1080.1 for timber and particleboard or AS/NZS 2098.1 for plywood and
values obtained are as follows:
* Air-conditioned buildings: 8 to 10%.
* Intermittently heated buildings: 10 to 12.5%.
* Unheated buildings: 12 to 15%.

16.4 Materials
To AS/NZS 1859.4.
VINYL TILES AND SHEET
To AS 1884
Vinyl underlay (hardboard and fibre cement):
Wet processed fibreboard (hardboard) underlay
Classification: General purpose medium board, manufactured specifically as
flooring underlay
Thickness: 5.5 mm
ADHESIVES
Vinyl adhesives:
Carpet adhesives:
As recommended by the carpet and accessory manufacturers, compatible with the
floor covering material, and suitable for bonding it to the subfloor.
RESILIENT FINISHES AND TILES REQUIREMENT
Note: These provisions apply only to upgrading projects.
- Manufacture, Installation and Maintenance to current Australian Standards
- Use water based adhesives
- All sheet, flooring seams shall be welded (either chemical or thermal) to
manufacturers specification
- Initial care of all installed materials shall be carried out to manufacturers
specification
- Floor-coverings shall conform to the physical characteristics of approved
samples and shall be within the limits of any sample range or variation in colour
and pattern
- Products containing recycled materials are preferred

Class 1 dwellings – Vinyl Composition tiles (EN654) (Kitchens, Dining

Rooms and Hallways etc.)
- (Concrete floors laid on suitable levelling compound; Timber floors laid on
Hardboard, FC sheet underlay or other approved underlay)
- Thickness: 3mm (EN428)
- Wear Resistance: <10mm³ (EN660)
- Min. 3db sound reduction
- R9 slip resistance
- Fire rating ISO9239.1 >11kW/m²

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 179

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

Class 1 dwellings – Homogenous Sheet (EN649 Kitchens, Dining Areas and

Hallways etc.)
- Thickness: Min. 2mm – Max. 3mm sheet vinyl (concrete floors laid on suitable
levelling compound, timber floors laid on hardboard, FC sheet underlay or other
approved underlay)
- Polyurethane reinforced
- Wear Resistance: Group P (EN660-2)
- R9 Slip Resistance
- Min. 3db sound reduction
- Fire rating ISO9239.1 >9kW/ m²

Class 2 and 3 dwellings – Cushioned Backed Heterogenous sheet (EN651)

- Thickness: Min. 3mm sheet vinyl (concrete floors laid on suitable levelling
compound, timber floors laid on hardboard, MDF or FC sheet underlay)
- Polyurethane reinforced
- R10 slip resistance
- Wear Resistance: Group T (EN660-1)
- Min. 14db sound reduction
- Easy Clean top layer
- Fire rating ISO9239.1 >8kW/m²

Area (Floors) – use only if approved by the Principal

- Homogenous slip retardant vinyl sheet (EN649)
- Thickness: Min. 2mm sheet vinyl (EN428)
- Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
- Fire Rating: (ISO9239.1 > 9kW/m²)
- Slip resistance: AS4586 (B Wet/Barefoot and R10 Oil/wet ramp)
- Integral 150mm high coved skirting in all wet areas, Cove skirting to be installed
with capping strip to prevent water penetration
- 32mm ø cove fillet to be used where vinyl is coved
- Products containing abrasive material in order to comply will not be considered
- Gatic floor drain assembly to be used in all wet areas

Wet Area (Walls) – use only if approved by the Principal

- Homogenous Vinyl sheet (EN649)
- Thickness: Min. 1.25mm (EN428)
- Polyurethane reinforced
- Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
- Fire Rating (AS3837) Group 2

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 7 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 180

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

To AS/NZS 2455.1 CARPET REQUIREMENT

To AS 4288 Fire Rating to BCA (for all Building Class Types)

Treated with anti-bacterial and anti-microbial

For Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), SEPP HSPD Housing, Modified

Dwellings & class 3 dwellings:
- 100% wool carpet or wool blend (min 80% wool)
- Loop pile tufted carpet
- Level pile surface or with slight modulation
- 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
- 1356 g/m2 (40oz/yd2) total pile mass
- 6mm maximum pile height
- “Actionbac” or Jute backing
- ACCS (Australian Carpet Classification Scheme) rating for Residential Extra
Heavy Duty including stairs
- Colour as approved by the Principal
- Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal
- A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at regular intervals

For Class 1 and 2 Dwellings

- 100% bulked continuous filament (bcf), solution dyed nylon or nylon/wool blend
(min 50% nylon)
- Loop pile tufted carpet
- Level pile surface or with slight modulation
- 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
- Min 678 g/m2 (20oz/yd2) total pile mass
- 5mm maximum pile height
- “Actionbac” or Jute backing
- A.C.C.S. rating for Residential Extra Heavy Duty (Stairs)
- A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at regular intervals
- Colour as approved by Principal
- Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 181

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

RESILIENT FINISHES AND CARPETS

To AS 4288 UNDERLAY REQUIREMENT

To ISO 9239.1 Underlay

- Meets current BCA and ISO 9239.1
- Recyclable and or made from recycled material
- Min grading “Residential” as per AS 4288
- Underlays to be marked at regular intervals with manufacturer’s name/brand and
AS 4288 compliance

Class 1 and 2 dwellings – Synthetic foam

- Re-bonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top surface (or similar
product)
- 7 mm min thickness
- 120 kg/m3 minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam

Class 1 and 2 dwellings – Vulcanised rubber

- Fire rated to BCA (treated with anti-bacterial and flame retardant)
- Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern
- Reinforcing fabric: either hessian, spun nylon, or polyester
- Min sheet thickness: 7.5mm (+0.5)
- 2.1kg/m2 minimum product mass

Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), SEPP HSPD Housing, & class 3

dwellings - Synthetic foam
- Fire rated to BCA (treated with anti-bacterial and flame retardant)
- Re-bonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top surface (or similar
product)
- Recyclable and/or made from recycled materials
- 7 mm min thickness
- 120kg/m3 minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam

Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), SEPP HSPD Housing, & class 3

dwellings – Vulcanised rubber
- Fire rated to BCA (treated with anti-bacterial and flame retardant)
- Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern
- Reinforcing fabric: either hessian, spun nylon, or polyester
- Min sheet thickness: 8mm (+0.5)
- 3kg/m2 minimum product mass

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 182

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GLAZING

17: Glazing
17.1 General
To AS 4055 TERRAIN CATEGORY refer to preliminaries 5.12 Terrain Category

17.2 Quality and Work Practices

To AS 1288 GENERAL
- Perform the required cutting, obscuring, silvering, and the like processes on
glass.
- Form necessary holes for fixings, equipment, and the like.
- Grind and arris exposed glass edges
- Free from defects that detract from appearance or interfere with performance
under normal conditions of use
- Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667
Installation: Use methods such that:
- each piece of glass is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it
to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions applicable to its location
without damage to or failure of glass and glazing materials
- building movements are not transferred to the glass
- external glazing is watertight or prevents the entry of rainwater into building
- external glazing is airtight within specified limits
ALUMINIUM WORK
- shop glaze all aluminium frames
- set glazing in approved plastic glazing channel and secure with aluminium or
PVC beads
- support glass on approved neoprene setting blocks in frames and sashes

17.3 Materials
CLEAR GLASS
Clear float glass
OBSCURED GLASS
Either “Spotswood” or “Pinhead” or as shown on drawings. Use the one pattern
consistently throughout works
To AS/NZS 2208 SAFETY GLASS
Provide permanently branded, of the following grades:
- clear toughened safety glass grade ‘A’, or
- clear laminated safety glass grade ‘B’

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 183

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GLAZING

MIRRORS
Silvering quality clear float glass, silvered, and electrolytic copper-coated not less
than 5 micrometers thick, with back and edges sealed with two (2) coats of mirror-
backing paint with a total dry film thickness of not less than 50 micrometers.
Safety mirror
Type: Vinyl backed Grade A safety mirror.
Safety compliance: To AS/NZS 2208.
Solid backed annealed glass mirrors
Backing: Nominal 9mm waterproof plywood.
Adhesive fixing to backing: Non-acidic silicone adhesive at the rate recommended
by the manufacturer.
LOUVRE BLADES
6mm safety glass, having ground and arrised edges.
Glass to current Australian Standards except lower edge of all glass in windows
within 500mm from floor to be only ‘A’ safety grade laminated or toughened glass.
Certificate Required GLASS BALUSTRADES
Glass: Obscure (unless otherwise shown on the drawings) Grade A safety glass to
AS 1288 Section 7
Frame: Proprietary system to BCA 3.9.2.
Structural engineer designed or proprietary certified by a structural engineer
SHOWER SCREENS
Proprietary system comprising frames of extruded aluminium, stainless steel, or
PVC, assembled around safety glass to form fixed panels and sliding, hinged or
pivoted doors. Screen and swing doors to be removable without damaging tiles
and waterproofing
Water shedding
General: Provide an assembly which sheds water to the inside without retaining it
on the frame surfaces. Seal the edge of the frame to adjoining surfaces with a
resilient strip
Sliding assemblies
Hanging: Hang the sliding sash on stainless steel or nylon sheaves on overhead
channel track formed in the frame head, and fit nylon or equivalent bottom guides
Hardware
Handles: Pull handles on both sides of sash, or of leading sash in multiple sash
arrangements
GLASS BLOCKWORK
Provide glass blockwork where shown on the drawings
Fire Rated Glass Blockwork
To AS 1530.4 - Provide samples of blocks, frame, fasteners, reinforcing and sealants
- Blockwork and frame to be installed to manufacturers written instructions
- Submit type-test certificates to AS 1530.4
- Provide manufacturers’ written warranties

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 184

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

GLAZING

GLAZING ACCESSORIES
Provide glazing materials including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets,
glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks, compression
wedges, and the like
Materials to be appropriate for the conditions of application and the required
performance, and complying with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
glass or glazing system

17.4 Glass Types Location

Generally
Comply with BASIX or BCA Vol 1 Section J requirements
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, provide:
Clear Glass - to all windows and door assemblies
Obscured Glass - to bathroom and WC windows
Grade 'A' Safety Glass - all mirrors

17.5 Fixtures and Fittings

GENERAL
- Item, number and location as shown on drawings and/or scheduled
- Install to manufacturer’s instructions
MIRRORED CABINET
- 1 per bathroom above vanity
MIRROR OVER BASINS
- To separate toilets, provide mirror over basin
- Nom 450mm high x 300mm wide.
- White powdercoated aluminium frame

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 185

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

18: Painting
18.1 General
EXTENT
- colour schemes
- prepare surfaces and finish as specified in SCHEDULES: Schedule of Painting
Paint system: a paint or clear finish system referred to only by its final coat
comprises the appropriate stains, primers, sealers and undercoats recommended
by the manufacturer of the selected final coat as suitable for the substrate and the
final coat

18.2 Inspections
Inspection Required Give 48 hours’ notice at the following stages:
- when all surfaces have been cleaned and prepared for painting
- before proceeding with the application of any undercoat or subsequent coat
- before external primed work is undercoated

18.3 Quality and Work Practices

To AS/NZS 2311 GENERAL
Protection of Workmanship to current Australian Standards
steelwork: To Apply paint to manufacturer’s instructions
AS/NZS 2312
Sections 4. Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before
contamination of the substrate can occur. Apply subsequent coats after the
manufacturer’s recommended drying period has elapsed
Make sure each coat of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour, gloss, thickness
and texture, and free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities
DELIVERY AND HANDLING
Deliver to the site paints, primers, undercoats in sealed containers branded with the
manufacturer’s name, type of content and APAS approval number
Handle and store paint prior to application in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations
Handle paint carefully to avoid contamination
LEAD BASED PAINT MANAGEMENT
To AS 4361.2 Refer to PRELIMINARIES P6: Environmental Protection
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC) LIMITS
To ISO 11890-1 Use paints that have low VOC content. VOC limits for low odour/ low environmental
impact paint types must meet the following:
- Primers and undercoats: < 65 g/litre
- Low gloss white or light coloured latex paints for wall areas: < 16 g/litre
- Coloured low gloss latex paints: < 16 g/litre
- Gloss latex paints for timber doors and trims: < 75 g/litre

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 186

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

TESTING
The Principal’s Authorised Person may take samples for testing by a NATA
registered laboratory. Should samples fail to meet test requirements the
Contractor will reimburse the Principal for the testing fees, and completely strip
and re-paint, at no variation, all work considered to have been coated with
defective materials
APAS SPECIFICATION NUMBERS
Use paints conforming to the Australian Paint Approval Scheme (APAS)
specification 0215 for low VOC Interior paints. The APAS was formerly known as
the Government Paint Committee
Approval PAINT RECORD
Provide a paint record comprising the brand of paint to be used internally and
externally and the name and address of the painting Sub-Contractor, and return to
Principal’s Authorised Person for approval before starting to paint.
On completion provide a PDF file copy of paint systems, paint brands and colours
used on the project to the Principal’s Authorised Person
SEQUENCE OF WORK
Before commencing painting, complete the work of other trades to as much extent
as possible within the area to be painted, except for the installation of fixtures/
fittings, furniture, floor sanding and laying of final floor finish
Complete clear timber finishes prior to applying opaque paint finishes in the same
location
PROTECTION
- Use dust sheets and drop sheets and masking to protect finished work, surfaces
or fixtures. Remove over spray, paint spots and splashes immediately and
restore any surfaces damaged
- Mask adjacent surfaces
- Remove door furniture, switches, GPO plates, fittings, and the like, before
painting and replace on completion
To AS/NZS 2311 METHOD OF APPLICATION
- By licensed applicators only
- Do not use paint rollers for priming or finishing coats on steelwork, gutters or
timber mouldings
- Apply the first coat immediately after completion of the substrate preparation
before contamination can occur. Apply succeeding coats after previous coat/s
have fully dried in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
LIGHTING LEVEL
Apply paint at lighting levels of ≥ 400 lux.
COMBINATIONS
Use only materials compatible with the finishing coat specified, with each other,
and in any one system from the same manufacturer:
- each coating is to be a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat
Do not combine paint products from different manufacturers in a system
For clear timber finish systems, use only the combinations of putty, stain and
sealer recommended by the paint manufacturer of the top coats
SANDING
Where recommended by the manufacturer, sand between coats from top to bottom
and dust down before recoating

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 187

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

PRIMING BEFORE FIXING

General: Apply one coat of wood primer (2 coats to end grain) to the back of the
following before fixing in position:
- External fascia boards.
- Timber door and window frames.
- Bottoms of external doors.
- Associated trims and glazing beads.
- Timber board cladding.
REPAIR OF GALVANIZING
General: For galvanized surfaces which have been subsequently welded, or which
have been welded, prime the affected area.
Primer: Organic zinc rich coating for the protection of steel to AS/NZS 3750.9 Type
2
SERVICES
General: If not embedded, paint new services and equipment, except chromium,
anodised aluminium, GRP, UPVC, stainless steel, non-metallic flexible materials
and normally lubricated machined surfaces. Repaint proprietary items only if
damaged
WARNING SIGN
Place wet paint warning sign in a conspicuous location and keep in place at all times
until the paint has fully dried

18.4 Materials
PAINTS, UNDERCOATS, PRIMERS
- Generally, paint systems are identified by its final coat.
- If the product is offered in several levels of quality, provide premium quality
products
- Colours to approved samples to current Australian Standards
- Paints, primers, undercoats conforming to appropriate APAS (Australian Paint
Approval Scheme)
- Paint Specification number as per APAS Paint Specification
- Provide paint systems that comply with the following:
Interior
- Flat latex: AS 3730.1
- Floor varnish – moisture cured: AS 3730.27.
- Floor varnish – two pack isocyanate cured: AS 3730.27.
- Low gloss latex: AS 3730.3.
- Semi-gloss latex: AS 3730.2.
- Gloss latex: AS 3730.12.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 188

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

Exterior
- Full gloss solvent-borne: AS 3730.6.
- Flat latex: AS 3730.7.
- Low gloss latex: AS 3730.8.
- Gloss latex: AS 3730.10.
- Stain, lightly pigmented: AS 3730.28.
- Latex stain, opaque: AS 3730.16.
- Semi-gloss latex: AS 3730.9.
Paving
- Paving paint, semi-gloss: AS 3730.29.
- Paving paint, gloss: AS 3730.29.
Exterior paint
- 100% premium Acrylic (waterborne or Solvent borne) paint
- Low surface emitting product complying with APAS for low VOC
Anti-Graffiti Treatments
- Registered with APAS—cope with Xylene based and solvent based graffiti
- Fire rating to AS 1530.3
- Tests to ASTM D968-51
Interior paint
- 100% premium acrylic (waterborne) paint or alkyd base solvent borne or
polyurethane paint
- Comply to APAS specification 0215 for low VOC Interior paints
- Tinted and untinted undercoats, enamels and topcoats to achieve low surface
emitting product complying with APAS for VOC emissions
Tinting: pigments, tints and stains as recommended by the paint manufacturer.

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty

THINNERS
Type and quantity recommended by the paint manufacturer
PUTTY
Use a polymeric-based putty, stained to match the colour of the substrate for clear
finishes
To AS 1530.4 INTUMESCENT PAINT
- Fire rated to achieve a FRL of 60/60/60 when applied to plasterboards and/or
pressed metal ceilings in accordance with AS 1530.4
- Fire rated to achieve a FRL of 70/60/60 when applied to sheetrock and lath and
plaster in both wall and ceiling assemblies in accordance with AS 1530.4
- Fire rates to achieve a 1 hour fire endurance test in wall and or ceiling assemblies
constructed of gypsum, fibreglass, aluminium, particle board, fibrous cement,
pressed metal, plywood panels and timber in accordance with AS1530.4
- Intumescent paint to begin to expand at a temperature not exceeding 190ºC
- Independent test results to be provided that indicates drying time of a single coat
of intumescent paint not less than 450 microns (without mechanical aids) does
not exceed 4 hours in any season assuming weather conditions are appropriate
to apply to the product

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 189

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

- Independent test detailing shall be provided that the product is nontoxic

- Independent test shall be provided that the product can be applied over existing
non fire retardant paint
- The product shall not contain a flashpoint

WARRANTY: Provide minimum 10 years written warranty

To AS/NZS 2311 EQUIPMENT
TOXIC INGREDIENTS
Do not use Schedule 1 paint of the Uniform Paint Standard in specified human
contact areas, published by the National Health and Medical Research Council
(NHMRC)
To AS/NZS 2312 18.5 Surface Preparation Types
GENERAL
Read the following surface preparation types with SCHEDULES: ‘Schedule of
Painting’
To AS/NZS 2311 UNPAINTED SURFACES
Prepare unpainted surfaces in accordance with AS/NZS 2311
TIMBER (TYPE A)
- Scrape off any resin or gum exudations and treat these areas with mineral
turpentine or white spirit
- Remove all traces of dirt, grease, oil and grime with solvents and sandpaper
smooth. Remove all excessive roughness, loose edges splinters and slivers with
glass paper
- Seal off all resinous veins and knots as follows:
* Internal Acrylic Painted: use shellac
* External Painted: use a high grade alkyd based enamel
GALVANISED STEEL AND ZINCALUME SURFACES (TYPE C)
- Solvent wash surfaces with mineral turps or other approved solvent and dry with
a clean cloth to remove all traces of residual solvent
- Remove all loose oxide film by dry scuffing with fine abrasive paper
- Apply one coat of latex primer and finish as scheduled
FERROUS (BARE) METAL SURFACES (TYPE D)
- Water wash and then solvent wash surfaces as for galvanised steel. Remove all
loose rust, mill scale and the like by scraping or wire brushing. Dust off, and
supply immediately an approved rust inhibitor. Time lag between rust inhibitor
and primer must be as recommended by the rust inhibitor manufacturer
PREVIOUSLY PAINTED SURFACES
Substrate in good condition: Prepare in accordance with AS/NZS 2311
Substrate in poor condition: Prepare in accordance with AS/NZS 2311
Steel substrates with protective coatings: Prepare in accordance with AS/NZS
2312.1 and AS 1627.1

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 190

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

PAINTING

18.6 Schedule of Painting

Refer to drawings for finishes and colour schedules.
SURFACE OR SUBSTRATE SURF SYSTEM 1ST COAT 2ND COAT 3RD (and 4TH )
PREP. COAT
TYPE
1. TIMBER - PAINT
FINISH
INTERNAL A System 1 Undercoat – Solvent-borne: Solvent-borne: Full
solvent-borne Full Gloss Gloss
EXTERNAL A System 1 Wood primer – Solvent–borne: Solvent–borne:
solvent-borne Full Gloss Full Gloss
A System 2 Wood primer – Latex paint: Latex paint: Gloss
latex or solvent- Gloss
borne
2. TIMBER - STAIN FINISH A System 1 Semi-transparent Semi- Semi-transparent
or opaque transparent or or opaque stain –
stain – solvent- opaque stain – solvent-borne
borne solvent-borne
A System 2 Semi-transparent Semi-
exterior latex stain transparent
exterior latex
stain
3. EXTERNAL - FIBROUS B System 1 Latex sealer Latex paint: Latex paint: Semi -
CEMENT SHEETING, Semi -gloss gloss
CONCRETE MASONRY, OFF
FORM CONCRETE,
PLASTER, CEMMENT
RENDER, EXTERNAL
BRICKWORK (PAINTED)
4. EXTERNAL – HARDBOARD B System 1 Wood primer, latex Latex paint: Latex paint: Gloss
CLADDING or solvent-borne Gloss
B System 2 Wood primer – Solvent-borne Solvent-borne
solvent-borne paint: Full gloss paint: Full gloss
5. INTERNAL WALLS,
CORNICES, CEILING
PLASTERBOARD, CEMENT B System 1 Latex sealer Latex paint: Latex paint: Semi-
RENDERED WALLS, FIBROUS Semi-gloss gloss
CEMENT SHEETING
SET PLASTER CEILINGS B System 1 Solvent-borne Latex paint: Latex paint: Semi-
sealer Semi-gloss gloss
6. IRON AND STEEL
INTERNAL C System 1 Solvent-borne Solvent-borne Solvent-borne
metal primer paint: Full gloss paint: Full gloss
EXTERNAL (EXTENDED D System 1 Zinc-rich metal Zinc-rich metal 2 coats of solvent-
CORROSIVE RESISTANCE) primer primer borne paint: Full
gloss
EXTERNAL D System 1 Metal primer Metal primer 2 coats of latex
paint - gloss
7. GALVANISED IRON OR
ZINCALUME
INTERNAL C System 1 Galvanised iron Latex paint: Latex paint: Gloss
metal primer, Gloss
Latex
EXTERNAL C System 1 Galvanised iron Latex paint: Latex paint: Gloss
metal primer, Gloss
Latex
C System 2 Galvanised iron Solvent-borne Solvent-borne
metal primer, paint: Full gloss paint: Full gloss
Solvent-borne
NOTE: For detailed provisions refer to AS/NZS 2311: Guide to the painting of buildings

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 191

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

FENCING

19: Fencing
19.1 General
Approval APPROVALS
Do not erect boundary fencing without earlier written approval of the Principal’s
Authorised Person:
- If fencing is erected on adjoining owners’ boundaries without their approval the
Contractor may be liable for half the total cost of fencing erected, by way of
deduction from the contract sum
- Conform to levels as determined by the local Council and / or as indicated by the
Principal’s Authorised Person
EXTENT
- Refer to drawings
- To demarcate and secure the property boundaries enclose the rear and side
boundary of the property. Provide cut off fencing to enclose the side boundary from
the front. Fences and gates must be suitable to maintain privacy, be a safe area
for children, and confine domestic animals, and
- To act as a lockable, secure and functional ingress and egress between the front
and rear yard and to enclose front and rear private open areas
- Provide pedestrian and vehicular gates where shown and as detailed

19.2 Quality and Work Practices

GENERAL
Erect posts vertically to follow the contours of natural ground
SAMPLES
- Provide minimum 1000mm length x full height of each type of fencing in specified
material, finish and colour
- One sample of each type of visible fixing
PRESERVING
To AS 1604.1 Coat all timber fencing and gate posts with Type A creosote to 100mm above finished
ground level. Creosote is not required where timber has been preservative-
impregnated to Hazard 4 or 5

19.3 Materials (Timber Fencing)

TIMBER SPECIES AND DURABILITY RATINGS
Refer to SCHEDULES: Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings, for
species and grade of timber
Timber Posts and Rails
Hardwood: To comply with AS 2082
Softwood: To comply with AS 2858

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 192

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

FENCING

Timber Pickets and Palings

Hardwood: To comply with AS 2796.1
- Grade: Select, determined in accordance with AS 2796.2
Softwood: To comply with AS 4785.1
Seasoned cypress pine: To comply with AS 1810
STEEL POSTS
To AS/NZS 4680 Use galvanised steel RHS posts capped off with welded steel plate, for closed paling
and lapped timber fence set in 20MPa concrete footing 250mm diameter x 750mm
deep
Steel tube posts, rails, stays and pickets to comply with AS/NZS 1163
- Grade C350L0
Finish: Hot dip galvanised finish
CONCRETE
Concrete to be a proprietary packaged mix normal class concrete with strength grade
of 20 (N20) in accordance with AS 1379
Nails
Use flathead galvanised or electro-galvanised nails for all fencing work:
- nails to penetrate into post or rail at least 30mm
- to fix palings, use nails of 2.8mm diameter for nails up under 75mm long and 3.6mm
diameter for nails longer than 75mm
- fix palings using two nails per paling at each rail
ACCESSORIES
Hinges: hinges, brackets, etc. - to be galvanised
Latches: refer to DOOR/HARDWARE
PAINTING
Refer to PAINTING.
- Where palings are lapped, paint or stain full width of lapped face of palings before
fixing overlapping palings

19.4 Fence Types

HEIGHTS
Refer to heights shown on drawings. Generally, heights to be:
- Front fencing 900mm to 1200mm
- Cut off fencing 1200 to 1500mm
- Side and rear fencing 1800mm
- Gate to match fence cladding and height where specified

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 193

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

FENCING

DECORATIVE FENCES REQUIREMENT

- Steel or aluminium tubular non climbable panels - flat or looped top finish only. No
spears or protruding rods
- Min 16mm x0.9mm tubes - spacings approx 100mm centres
- Rails Min 39 x 25 x 1.2mm rectangular tubing or Min 25mm round
- Posts Min 50 x 50mm –450mm round Min 1.2mm thick
- Powdercoating to AS 4506
- Safety compliance to AS 1926.1 for gates, hinges and locks
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 3 year written warranty
METAL FENCES REQUIREMENT
- Steel pre-rolled sheet - Colorbond double sided steel
- Pre-painted steel complying with AS/NZS 2728: Type 3, testing compliance to meet
performance requirements within an exposed environment for humidity, scratch
resistance, impact, adhesion, cracking and corrosion. Made from zinc-aluminium
alloy coated steel complying with AS 1397-2011, G550 (550MPa minimum yield
stress), AZ150 (150g/m 2 minimum coating mass) (fence panels), or zinc alloy
coated steel complying with AS 1397-2011, G500 (500MPa minimum yield stress),
Z275 (275g/m2 minimum coating mass) (posts and rails)
- The fence panel base metal thickness is 0.35mm
- Posts - standard channel posts 84 x 43mm, square corner, junction and single gate
posts 60x60x1.6, double gate posts 65x65x2.5 installed with caps
- Rails 60x53 with base metal thickness of 0.8mm
- Installation to manufacturer’s specification
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 10 year written warranty
TIMBER FENCES REQUIREMENT
- End post/ gate post/ corner post either hardwood/ treated pine 125x125mm or
galvanised steel 75x75x2.5mm
- Intermediate posts either hardwood 125x50mm or treated pine 125x75mm
- Rails hardwood /treated pine 75x50mm
- Palings hardwood/ treated pine 100x15mm either lap palings by 15mm or close
butted
- All timber measurements ± 2mm
WARRANTY: Provide a minimum 1 year written warranty
PALING FENCES
Item Cypress pine & treated Hardwood Steel
radiata pine

corner posts 125 x 125 75 x 75 x 3.5mm

intermediate Post 125 x 50 50 x 50 x 3.5mm

rails to max. 2.4m 75 x 50mm 75 x 50mm N/A

use 3 rails for
1800mm high
treated pine fence.

palings 100 x 15mm thick 100 x 15mm thick N/A

walings 150 x 25 x 600mm long 150 x 25 x 600mm N/A

long

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 194

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

FENCING

Construction:
- Set posts into post holes minimum 300mm diameter x 600mm deep
- Surround corner, end and gate posts (except for bottom face) to ground level with
20mPa concrete and splay off at top around post
- Provide waling pieces to narrow face of intermediate posts and backfill with rammed
soil
- Taper splice rails together and nail in mortices, spaced 200mm from top and bottom
of palings
- For 1800mm high treated pine closed paling fence and for all timber fencing over
1800mm high provide 3 rails (including intermediate rail)
- Chamfer top corners of palings before fixing
- Fix palings closely butted.
Raking panel: Rake terminating panel of paling fences to a height of 1000mm
minimum
Lapped and/or lapped and capped fences: as specified for paling fences and:
- provide 3 rails with the top rail located to receive capping if required
- lap 20mm minimum cover of each side
- capping out of 125 x 38mm minimum
OTHER FENCES
Provide other as shown and detailed on drawings or as scheduled

19.5 Gates
Provide gates as shown on drawings or schedules
Timber Gates: shall be supported on a steel frame - hot dipped galvanised

19.6 Schedule of Timber Species & Durability Ratings

Application Timber species or Timber finish Aust Preservative
minimum Standard treatment rating
durability class (AS) for softwood
Paling fence posts Class 2 or better Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or 5 ) See
Other fence posts Class 1 Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or 5 ) Note
Fence rails and Eastern Australian Struct. Grade 3 2082
palings hardwoods
Radiata pine H3
(treated)
Cypress pine
NOTE: Where H4 or H5 is specified as an alternative, the required hazard rating will
depend on specific site conditions that exist.

19.7 Schedule of Fences

Provide fencing. Refer to drawings and schedules for fence/s selection and location.
Side and rear boundaries 1800mm high

Private rear yards Gate cladding to match fence

Gate on galvanised steel frame

Private front yards Gate cladding to match fence

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 195

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

FENCING

Front boundary and 900mm to 1000mm high

returns to building line No ‘spear points’
Gate cladding to match fence
Masonry piers and steel/timber infill

Drying Yards Gate cladding to match fence

Gate on galvanised steel frame

Cut off between buildings Gate cladding to match fence

Min 2700mm wide vehicular gate where required
Gate on galvanised steel frame

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 196

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

20: Landscape Works

20.1 General
NOTICE
Give seven (7) days’ notice before starting Landscape work
Approval APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTORS
Work is to be carried out by a qualified Horticulturalist/Landscaper and/or current
member of the Landscape Contractors Association of NSW
Approval APPROVED SUPPLIERS
Submit, before placing orders, the proposed list of suppliers for the following
materials:
- plant material
- imported soil mixes and conditioners - supplier details
Approval PLANTS
- Obtain plants from a nursery with Nursery Industry Accreditation Scheme
Australia (NIASA) accreditation
- Advise the Principal’s Authorised Person immediately if any supply difficulties are
encountered including specified container sizes
- Where specified plants or grasses are not available, submit details of alternatives
to the Principal’s Authorised Person for written approval
- Refer to SCHEDULES: Schedule of Australian Standards and Codes for
applicable guidelines
- Provide substitute plants with landscape design criteria qualities similar to the
specified plants
- Do not use variegated varieties (unless shown on the drawings)
- Deliver plants to site with a label indicating the plant’s botanical name
SAMPLES
Submit representative samples of each of the following for approval, pack to
prevent contamination and label to indicate source:
imported soil mixes: 10kg
mulch: 1 litre
compost: 1kg
ADVERSE CONDITIONS
Notify Principal’s Authorised Person and confirm instruction for planting operations
during drought, when sub-grade levels/soil is wet or waterlogged, and during frost
and snow
RETAINING WALLS
Where ground slopes 1:6 or more, provide retaining walls. Use masonry for all
external work. Refer to schedules. Refer to GROUNDWORKS: Retaining Walls

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 197

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

COMPLETION
Cleaning
Remove stakes and ties that are no longer required at the end of the planting
establishment period
Remove temporary protective fences and dispose of legally and safely at the end of
the planting establishment period
Remove all surplus materials off the site and clean areas that were affected by the
work
Inspection Required
20.2 Inspections
Landscape Architect: A competent person should be present that has the ability to
recognise plant species and make changes when unavailable.
Give 48 hours’ notice so that inspection can be made of the following:
- Prior to commencement of the landscape work, inspection involving landscape
subcontractor, contractor and Principal’s Authorised Person to review the extent
of work and any site issues.
- On completion of landscaping to identify defects and rectification work
Further inspections as required to approve rectification work

20.3 Materials
Approval SITE TOPSOIL
To be approved for re-use from soil excavated from the site containing organic
matter, supports plant life, and is free from unwanted matter such as:
- stones over 25mm diameter
- clay lumps
- building spoil/contaminants
- weeds and tree roots
- sticks and rubbish
- material toxic to plants.
Refer to GROUNDWORKS: Topsoil, storage and removal
To AS 4419 IMPORTED SOIL MIXES
Approval
From an approved off-site source
To AS 4419 TOPDRESSING SOIL
A sandy loam or coarser textured sand
POTTING MIXES
To comply with AS 3743
To AS 4454 MULCH
Shredded pine flake (25 x 4 x 2mm) free of soil, weed growth and other foreign
matter:
- spread evenly to a depth, after settlement, of 75mm
- finish flush with surrounding adjacent finished surfaces
COMPOST
Approval
- spent mushroom compost, free from grass or weed growth of any kind, uniform
To AS 4454 and evenly graded, inert, and with a pH in the range from 5 to 7.
- Where mushroom compost is unavailable, approved alternative composted
materials may be used

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 198

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

SITE TOP SOIL MIXTURE

Site topsoil to be thoroughly mixed with mushroom compost or approved
equivalent soil conditioner, in the ratio of:
- 3 (topsoil) :1 (compost) in planting areas
- 5 (topsoil) :1 (compost) in turfed
FERTILISER
Concentrated organic fertilisers delivered to site in sealed bags marked to show
type, NPK ratio, recommended uses and application rates:
- use in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
PLANT MATERIAL
- to be true form to species and proportional form and canopy size relevant
- in good condition for successful growth and with plants in appropriate for plant
size containers
- viro-cell/tube stock plants well developed and actively growing
- unsatisfactory material including that allowed to dry out or damaged is to be
replaced at no variation to the contract
TURF
- cultivated quality, freshly cut and moist, with vigorous well-matted root system,
healthy green-colour grass shoots of even thickness not less than 25mm, having
been regularly mown
- certified disease free and weed free
- shade and drought tolerant where required
- deliver to the site within 24 hours of cutting and lay within 36 hours of cutting
- prevent from drying out and/or becoming waterlogged between cutting and laying
STAKES AND TIES
Location Stake size
Viro-cell/tubestock marker stakes 25 x 25 x 600mm
150mm diam. to 5 litre pots in planting 25 x 25 x 1500mm
areas
150mm diam. to 5 litre pots in grass 38 x 38 x 1800mm
25-35 litre pot sizes 2 x 38 x 38 x 1800mm
45 Litre or greater 3 x 50 x 50 x 1800-2400mm
tie material 50mm wide jute webbing

- use sound, straight durable hardwood, pointed at one end

- position stakes outside the root ball and drive vertically into the ground, to
maintain plant stability
- tie each plant in figure-of-eight form at a height to give effective support to plant,
tied to the main leader on firm wood, and stapled to stake

20.4 Preparation
PLANTING AREAS
- eliminate weeds and grass at least 7 days prior to cultivation
- rip to 300mm depth where ground is compacted, or where necessary to achieve
a good tilth. Spread compost evenly at the rate of one (1) cubic metre per ten
(10) square metres (100mm depth) and general fertiliser at the rate of three (3)
kg per ten (10) square metres.
- eliminate weed using a non-residual glyphosate herbicide in any of its registered
formulae, at the recommended maximum application rate.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 199

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

Earth mounds
Place clean fill in layers nominally 150mm thick compacted to approximately 85%
of the dry density ratio of the surrounding soil when tested in accordance with AS
1289.5.4.1. Slumping and further compaction to be avoided.
Changes in grade to be constructed over a minimum width of 500mm to smooth,
gradual and rounded profiles with no distinct joint.
Maintain the natural ground level under the canopy of existing trees.
Earth mounds to be constructed to enable free drainage of surface water and
prevent ponding.
Cultivate: Rotary hoe or cultivate the compost and fertiliser evenly into the top
200mm depth of the planting area and rake to an even surface finish
Mulch: Supply and spread mulch over the surface to a depth of 75mm. Ensure
that mulch is tapered down to each plant collar to prevent collar rot
Stockpiled and/or imported topsoil/soil mixes: Where stockpiled or imported
topsoil is to be placed:
- excavate to 300mm below finished levels generally
- rip or cultivate subgrade to minimum depth of 100mm
- backfill with topsoil mixture, firm lightly and water thoroughly
Drainage: Where indicated on the drawings provide to contained planting areas:
- 100mm depth of 25mm gauge aggregate drainage layer with 65mm diameter
flexible polythene agricultural drainage laid through layer connected to
stormwater system
- Cover with filter fabric
Finished levels: Finish planting areas flush with adjoining finished surfaces after
application of mulch, taking into account settlement of soil and mulch
SUBSOIL DRAINS
- Provide where indicated on the drawings. Refer to DRAINAGE: Materials
- Extend 1:100 minimum fall and connect to stormwater system
TURFED AREAS
- Provide min. 50mm turf underlay beneath turf
- Extend beyond property boundary to the street kerb
- Finish grass surfaces flush with adjoining finished surfaces, or as detailed
- Ensure that turf rolls are tightly butted together and laid parallel along contours
to reduce erosion or storm damage
- Fall surfaces to drainage inlets
Existing topsoil:
- Remove perennial and annual weeds, stones over 50mm in diameter, building
rubble and other extraneous material
- Cultivate the area to a minimum depth of 250mm, incorporating compost at the
rate of one (1) cubic metre compost per 30 square metres

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 200

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

Imported and/or stockpiled topsoil:

- Grade areas, and cultivate the subgrade to a minimum depth of 150mm
- Remove perennial and annual weeds and rubbish
- Provide 100mm depth of topsoil mixture. Spread evenly over the prepared sub-
grade
Lawn fertiliser: Apply lawn fertiliser raked evenly into the topsoil not more than 48
hours before the turf is laid

20.5 Planting of Trees, Shrubs, Groundcovers & Turf

GENERAL
- provide trees, shrubs, groundcover and turf to the extent indicated on drawings
- soak the plant, remove from container and put it in centre of the planting hole
- backfill applying slow release plant fertiliser and firm about the root ball. Do not
disturb root ball
- immediately after planting apply the quantity of water indicated on the details for
the size of the plant, or as necessary to thoroughly soak each planting hole
- remove all spoil and containers from the site.
INDIVIDUAL TREES AND SHRUBS IN GRASS AREAS
- form holes with depth equal to container height plus 225mm, and width equal to
that of the container plus 600mm
- in clay soils increase the width to form a saucer-shaped hole
- break up the sub-base to a minimum depth of 100mm and remove rocks and
debris
- put fertiliser in base of hole
- backfill with topsoil mixture to 150mm depth. Place plant in position and backfill
with topsoil mixture
- dish the soil 75mm below adjoining surface lawn level around the plant stem to
facilitate watering
- stake and tie trees
TREES, SHRUBS, GROUNDCOVERS AND CLIMBERS IN PLANTING AREAS
- form holes with depth of hole equal to the container height plus 100mm and width
equal to twice the container width
- where compacted, break up the sub-base and sides as necessary
- backfill the planting hole with excavated material plus slow release plant fertiliser
to a depth of 100mm
- backfill with excavated material and firm about the root ball
- dish soil around the plant to facilitate watering
Approval LAYING TURF
- obtain Principal’s Authorised Person’s approval of grading before laying turf
- “dummy rake” to an even surface to required finished grades and levels
- Install 50mm of turf underlay soil beneath turf rolls
- Lay turf over 100mm loose, friable topsoil
- lay with well-bonded, broken joints, and tamp down to give a homogeneous
completed surface
- lay parallel with the contours

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 201

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

- finish grass surfaces flush with adjoining finished surfaces

- fall surface to drainage inlets. Allow for drainage
- thoroughly water the finished work immediately after laying
- roll lightly with a 135kg roller to ensure good contact with the topsoil
topdressing:
- top dress turfed areas with topsoil min 65% sand and max. 15% clay immediately
after laying
- spread evenly and rub in with a “dummy rake”, allowing the stems to project just
above the topdressing
- finish surface free from bumps and depressions, and shed surface water
protection:
- protect new turf from damage until well established with suitable barriers
- suitably identify the protective barrier, particularly along street frontages

20.6 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Provide routine maintenance of the standard specified for 52 weeks DLP from the
date of Completion/ Practical Completion:
Watering:
- adequately water all plants and lawn areas. The minimum acceptable watering
required is equal to 25mm of natural rainfall or its applied equivalent during each
period of one (1) week
- around individual plants, maintain a completely weed and grass free watering
saucer of a minimum diameter of one (1) metre
Disease and pest control: Control pathological diseases or insect pests by
physical removal. Where physical removal is not possible use registered non-toxic
sprays, applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
Pruning and tying plants:
- prune plants to repair mechanical damage, or to improve plant shape and form
or to clear footpaths and driveways
- adjust ties to give adequate support to the plants
- replace broken or damaged ties as necessary and remove when directed by the
Principal’s Authorised Person
- straighten stakes
Replacement: Replace without delay, damaged or stolen plants. Replace with
identical species of similar size and of original specified quality.
Fertilising: Apply follow up concentrated organic fertiliser to all turfed areas once
during the maintenance period 10 weeks after Completion/ Practical Completion
Lawns:
- mow at 10-day intervals, trimming all edges
- remove all weed growth or grass around base of all plants in turf or by hand in
grass areas within the isolated planting area edging and within one (1) metre
diameter area in grass
- do not use nylon line type edge trimmers around base of trees
- replace or repair failed turf and bare patches
Making good: make good soil erosion or subsidence with topsoil mix as before
specified

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 202

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

20.7 Edging and Walling

GENERAL
All turf and gardens are to have edging
Provide edging to the extent and type shown on the drawings and/or as scheduled
All edging to be masonry unless approved by Principal’s Authorised Person
CONCRETE EDGING
To AS 1379 - use normal class concrete with a 20 MPa strength grade (N20) in-situ concrete
- place in trench between timber formwork. Strip, protect and cure
- trowel finish exposed surfaces and edge tool all exposed corners
- provide 10mm thick, preformed, bituminous felt expansion joints spaced evenly
at maximum 4500mm centres and at junctions
BRICK EDGING
- form in-situ mortar haunch of 3 (sand) :1 (cement) and plasticiser to
manufacturer’s instructions
- finish joints flush struck on exposed surfaces
bricks:
- approved standard clay face bricks, hard and well burnt, and free from through
holes, chips and callows
- clean brick faces on completion
TIMBER SLEEPERS
To AS 3818.2 Hardwood: Preservative treated hardwood or sound durability class hardwood.
Softwood: Preservative treated sound durability class softwood
To AS 3704 GEOTEXTILE
Geotextile membrane to be UV resistant polymeric fabric manufactured from a
plastic yarn comprising of minimum 85% by weight of propylene, ethylene, amide or
vinyledenechloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors
Provide identification and marking in accordance with AS 3705
WALLING
Crib Walls
Crib walls to be a proprietary system comprising interlocking precast concrete or
preservative treated timber cribs with nominated backfill placed and compacted
progressively with the crib to form a retaining wall
Masonry Segmented Walls
To AS/NZS 4455.3
Masonry segmented walls to be a proprietary system comprising of interlocking
segmented masonry units with nominated backfill placed and compacted
progressively to form a retaining wall

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 203

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

20.8 Paving
GENERAL
Provide paving to the extent shown on drawings/schedules
BASE AND SUBBASE MATERIAL
Granular material
Unbound granular materials comprising two or more different materials which when
compacted produces a structurally stable with uniform grading and physical
characteristic base/ subbase
Crushed rock
Crushed rocks to have the following nominal sizes:
- For use as base material: 20mm
- For use as subbase material: 40mm
Natural gravel
Natural gravel material to have the following nominal sizes:
- For use as base material: 20mm.
- For use as subbase material: 40mm
Base and subbase material properties and test methods
Particle size distribution or grading: To comply with AS 1289.3.6.1
CBR (98% modified compaction): To comply with AS 1289.6.1.1
Unconfined compressive strength: Maximum 1.0MPa when tested in accordance
with AS 5101.4
Placing base and subbase
Do not place base/ subbase material on surfaces weakened by moisture and cannot
support the construction equipment required to perform the work
Spread the base/ subbase material in uniform layers and without segregation.
The required moisture content of wet mixed materials must be maintained before
and during spreading
The compacted layer thickness to suit local conditions but generally to be from a
minimum of 100mm to a maximum of 200mm. Layers must be of equal thickness
laid in multilayer courses
Tolerance
Provide a level finished surface which is free draining and evenly graded between
level points
Compaction
Compaction of the base and subbase must comply with the following:

To AS 1289.5.2.1 - Subbase: 95%, minimum dry density ratio (modified compaction)

- Base: 98%, minimum dry density ratio (modified compaction)
PAVER THICKNESS GENERALLY
Pavers to have the following minimum thickness:
- Pavers used for foot and bicycle traffic: 40mm
- Pavers used for light domestic traffic occasionally up to 3 tonne gross: 50mm
To AS/NZS 4455.1 BRICK PAVING
Dry press clay bricks, well burnt, of even dimensions, free of callows, flinting,
chipping, and other defects

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 204

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

Brick on sand bedding:

- base course, of 150mm thick compacted road base, with a 25mm layer of coarse
sand screeded over the base course. A stable bed for the paving, free of
depressions, and with an even fall to shed surface water
- lay bricks close-butted in the pattern detailed
- provide paving edge of concrete, or concealed concrete haunching to the
underside of the outside brick to a minimum 150 x 150mm trench
- finish haunching a minimum depth of 50mm below finished surfaces adjacent to
the edge brick
- sweep dry, washed river sand over the paved surface to fill all joints
Brick on concrete base:
- concrete base as detailed to standard specified in CONCRETE WORKS
- lay bricks close-butted to pattern detailed, over 12mm thick mortar bed of 1:3,
cement to sand
- finish areas free of depressions with even fall to shed surface water
- clean before drying upon completion
To AS/NZS 4455.2 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
- lay non-slip precast concrete pavers, minimum 25 Mpa strength, on a 50mm thick
compacted road-base and sand bed
- lay level and flush finish with adjacent finished surfaces
- space at maximum 150mm apart
Materials
Sand for bedding and joint filling to be well-graded sand free of deleterious materials
such as soluble salts which can cause efflorescence
Cement to be type GP in accordance with AS 3972
Mortar mix proportions (cement:sand) to be 1:3.

PERMEABLE PAVING
Provide where shown and specified on the drawings
To AS 1379, AS CONCRETE PAVEMENT
3600, AS 3727.1 Concrete paving to comply with the current relevant Australian Standards
Preparation
Blind subgrade with sand to create a smooth surface then wet the sand before laying
the underlay
Laying paving
Place and compact the concrete paving over a vapour barrier laid over the prepared
substrate. Vapour barrier to comply with the requirements of AS 2870
Grading
Lay concrete paving to even falls to drain away from buildings towards drainage
outlets
Minimum fall for drainage to be as follows:
- For pavements with vehicle traffic: 1:40
- For all other pavements: 1:100

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 205

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

Thickness
Minimum thickness of concrete paving to be as follows:
- For pavements with foot and bicycle traffic: 75mm
- For pavements with light vehicle traffic occasionally up to 3 tonne gross: 100mm.
Curing
Keep the concrete at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture
loss throughout the 7 days curing period. Provide suitable protection from extreme
hot or cold weather and to prevent premature drying
Joints
Contraction joints: Provide contraction joints by saw cutting, tooling or placing insert.
Spacing:
- For unreinforced pavement: Provide maximum 1500mm spacings
- For reinforced pavement: Provide maximum 2000mm spacings
Surface finishes
Unformed surfaces: Strike off, screed and level slab surfaces to required finished
levels as documented
Finished surfaces: Apply or commence work on the final surface finish as required
by the documentation immediately after placement and compaction of the concrete
Surface sealer: After the concrete paving has fully cured, apply the surface sealer
and allow the sealer to penetrate into the concrete surface

20.9 Equipment, Fixtures and Furniture

FIXTURES AND FURNITURE
Provide garden hose, garden seats, planter boxes, bollards, compost bins, and
other external area furniture items, of the types and finishes detailed and/or as
scheduled
GARDEN SHEDS
Where shown and detailed on drawings provide garden shed
Provide concrete base. Top of concrete floor shall be set minimum 50mm above
surrounding ground level.
STREET FURNITURE – TABLES & SEATS
Provide furniture shown on the drawings and comply with:
- Vandal proof and durable street furniture and tables for common areas
- 98% recycled wood/plastic composite
- Recycled co-mingled wood/plastic independently tested not to crack, splinter, rot,
rust or warp
- CCA and Toxin free
- UV stabilised and Non permeable
- Fixed with vandal proof galvanised or stainless steel fixings
- Frame galvanised steel or other vandal proof material

WARRANTY: Minimum 1 year written warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 206

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

LANDSCAPE WORKS

GARDEN HOSE
Provide for each dwelling and ground floor unit:
- 18 metres long 12mm diameter reinforced plastic hose
- 12 x 12mm brass tailpiece for connection to hose cock
- 12 x 12mm brass nut and tailpiece for nozzle connection
- brass adjustable hand spray nozzle and brass fixed sprinkler jet
- assembled for immediate use

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 207

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

21: Schedules
S1 Schedule of Principal’s Authorised Person Approvals &
Inspections

PRELIMINARIES

Shop Drawings  Examination and endorsement of shop drawings

Fire restrictions  Approval required for lighting of fires

Site office Principal’s  Approval for removal of site office

Authorised Person

Samples  Approve samples

Proprietary items  Adopt or reject alternative items

- Alternatives

Joining up  Approve manner

SECTION 01: Demolition

Inspections  Approval to commence demolition

Materials and Components  Notify of hazardous materials or wastes

SECTION 02: Groundworks

Inspections  Excavated material for use as site filling

 All finished excavations

Protection of existing trees

- Work under trees  Authorise cutting of roots.
- Lopping  Direct engagement of arborist. Furnish list of qualified arborists
- Damage  Approve removal of trees
- Harmful activities  Approval of Harmful activities near trees

Filling materials  Approve filling material

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 208

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

Restoration of road
openings
- Private roads  Approve opening of undedicated roads in writing.

SECTION 03: Concrete Works

Inspections  Footings

 Piling

 Piering

 Film underlay or membrane installed on base.

 Completed formwork.

 Reinforcement fixed in place.

 Placing of concrete.

 Stripping of formwork.
Formwork  Approve formwork prior to pour.
Concrete
- General  Approve ready-mixed concrete source.
- Pumping  Approve pumping of concrete.
- Curing  Approve curing compound.
Concrete paths, paving,  Approve grades.
steps, & misc. items
Waterproofing
- System  Approve waterproofing system.
- Application  Approve application

SECTION 04: Masonry

Inspections  Damp-proof courses

 Bottoms of cavities after cleaning out

 Bottoms of core holes before grouting

 Control joints ready for insertion of joint filler

Sample Panel  Approval of panel

Materials
* Exposure class bricks  Approve type of brick
* Additives  Approval
* Coloured mortar  Approve oxides
* Expansion joints  Approve compressible material

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 209

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

SECTION 05: Metalwork

General
* Metal Framing  Approve use of metal framing systems in writing

SECTION 06: Carpentry and Joinery

Inspections  Completion of Framing

 Before fixing internal linings

General  Approve framing

Materials
* Preservative Treatment  Approve timber treatment details

Structural Elements
* Roof Trusses  Written approval required before manufacture

SECTION 07: Doors, Windows and Hardware

Fixtures and fittings

* Keyed alike locks  Confirm requirements before placing orders

SECTION 08: Roofing and Roof Plumbing

Fixtures and fittings

* Safety anchors  Approve anchor brackets

SECTION 09: Internal Linings

Materials
* General  Approve manufacturer of plasterboard

 Approve manufacturer of fibre cement

SECTION 10: Plumbing & Sanitary Plumbing

Inspections  Service trenches

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 210

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

 Works ready for tapping and/or cutting into regulatory Authorities

water, sewer or drainage mains
 Works ready for testing

 Work prior to covering

 Completed work

 Any other inspections required by the regulatory authority

Quality and work practices

* Accessibility  Approve exposure and inaccessible pipework.
* Building penetrations  Approve chase in reinforced concrete.

SECTION 11: Drainage

Inspections  Trenches excavated and ready for pipe laying

 Works ready for tapping and/or cutting into regulatory Authorities

water, sewer or drainage mains
 Works ready for testing

 Enclosed work ready to be covered or concealed

 Completed work

 Any other inspections required by the regulatory authority

Sumps, Pits
* General  Approve installation of pits

 Approve proprietary precast concrete pits

SECTION 12: Electrical works

Inspections  Trench excavation before installing cables

 Underground and concealed conduits before concealment

 Testing of individual and/or Master Antenna Television System

Wiring installation
* Penetrations  Approve penetrations of firewalls and structural members

SECTION 13: Gas service

Inspections  Trenches excavated and ready for pipe laying

 Work ready for specified testing

 Enclosed work ready to be covered up or concealed

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 211

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

 Any other inspections required by the Supply Authority

Quality and work practices

*Accessibility  Approve location of inaccessible pipework

SECTION 14: Plastering

Quality and work practices

 Approval of waterproof render

 Approval of bonding agents

 Approval of admixtures

SECTION 15: Tiling & Wet Area Waterproofing

Inspections  Flashing and waterproofing of wet area floors and walls before
covering
 Flood testing before commencement of floor tiling. Contractor to
certify that floors have been flood tested
 Background immediately before starting tiling

 Initial or trial setout

 Control joints before sealing and grouting

 Completion of tiling

Quality and work practices

- Samples  Approve samples

SECTION 16: Resilient finishes and carpets

Inspections  Background immediately before fixing sheets or tiles and laying of

carpets
 Completion of laying of underlay if any

 Completed installation
General
- Samples  Approve samples
Quality and work practices
- Vinyl floor covering  Approve trial set out before fixing

SECTION 18: Painting

Inspections  When all surfaces have been cleaned and prepared for painting

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 212

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

 Samples of colours to be used.

 Before proceeding with the application of any undercoat or

subsequent coat.
 Before external primed work is undercoated.

Quality and work practices

- Paint record  Obtain paint record and approve Sub-Contractor.

SECTION 19: Fencing

Quality and work practices

- Approvals  Advise in writing that boundary fences may proceed

SECTION 20: Landscape Works

Inspections  Landscape Architect inspections from landscape installation to end

of maintenance period.
 Approve completed landscape works in accordance with contract
documents.

General
* Approved  Approve landscape subcontractor.
subcontractors
* Approved suppliers  Approve plant material before placing order.

 Approve imported topsoil before placing order.

* Plants  Approve alternative plants if required.
* Samples  Approve imported topsoil, mulch and compost.

Materials
- Site topsoil  Approve site-excavated topsoil.
* Imported topsoil  Approve off-site source.

Planting of trees, shrubs,

ground covers and turf
- Laying turf  Approve grading of surface.

Brick Edging  Approve brick.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 213

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

S2 Schedule of Certificates, Guarantees and Warranties

CERTIFICATES, GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

Generally: Unless otherwise specified or agreed, warranties or guarantees specified in
the contract must name the Principal as warrantee and are to be obtained by the
Contractor from the warrantor and submitted to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
By Completion/ Practical Completion, supply the following documentation to the
Principal’s Authorised Person:

Preliminaries

5.6 Council Property  Clearance Certificate from Council

5.13 Setting Out  Survey Identification Certificate
8.10 Timber Inspection  Quality Assurance Timber Certificate

SECTION 02: Groundworks

2.6 Site Excavations  Bearing pressure of foundation – Structural Engineers Certificate

2.8 Compaction  Compaction of fill – Structural Engineers Certificate
2.11 Retaining Walls  Retaining walls – Structural Engineers Certificate

SECTION 03: Concrete Works

3.3 Concrete Sampling  Sampling and testing results of concrete slump and strength testing
from NATA laboratory
3.3 Reinforcement of  All reinforced structural concrete structural elements including piers
structural elements (footings) – Structural Engineers Certificate
3.5 Reinforcement  Certificate from Australian Certification Authority for reinforcing steel
3.8 Termite Barriers  Termite Barrier System and product Warranty
3.16 Waterproofing System  Installation of waterproofing – 20 year Guarantee
3.17 Finishes – Concrete  Slip resistance – 5 year Warranty
Floor Treatment

SECTION 04: Masonry

4.5 Accessories - Steel  Steel lintels – Structural Engineers Certificate

Lintels
4.5 Accessories - Precast  Precast, Fire rated Lintels – Structural Engineers Certificate
Lintels
4.5 Accessories - Insulation  Insulation in cavity walls – manufacturers’ Warranty for materials
in cavity walls and installation

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 214

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

4.5 Accessories - common  Fire-rated common walls – Certificate of Compliance

walls
4.5 Accessories - common  Sound-rated common walls – Certificate of Compliance
walls
4.9 Flashings  Cavity drainage and flashing Certificate of Installation Complying with
BCA
4.9 Flashings  Sill and head flashing Certificate of Installation Complying with BCA
4.9 Flashings  Flashing at roof abutting a wall Certificate of Installation Complying
with BCA

SECTION 05: Metalwork

5.1 Metal Framing  Metal Frame – manufacturers’ warranty

5.7 Fixtures & Fittings  Bathroom Fittings – 1 year Warranty

 Grab Rails – 1 year Warranty

 Shower Seat – 5 year Warranty

 Clothes Line – 10 year Warranty for frame & 1 Year Warranty for
line & components
 Letterbox – 1 year Warranty
5.9 Signage  Street / Unit Numbering – 1 year Warranty

 Prohibition Signage or Advisory / Information – 1 year Warranty

 Non-Smoking Signs In Common Areas – 5 year Warranty

 Evacuation Signage – 1 year Warranty

SECTION 06: Carpentry and Joinery

6.3 Quality and Work  Timber suppliers - Certificate

Practices
6.5 Structural Elements  Roof Trusses design – Structural Engineers Certificate
6.8 Cupboards  Kitchen Units/Cupboards – 5 year Warranty

 Bathroom Cabinets – 5 year Warranty

 Built in Wardrobes – 5 year Warranty

SECTION 07: Doors, Windows and Hardware

7.1 Doors  Doors – Manufacturer’s Guarantees

7.2 Door Frames  Fire-rated Doorsets – Manufacturer’s Certification
7.5 Windows  Window Energy Rating – Manufacturer’s Certificate

 Windows- all materials & structural integrity & compliance with

standards – 7 year manufacturer’s Warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 215

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

7.6 Fixtures and Fittings  Door Locks & Latches - 5 year Warranty paint and tarnish, 10 year
Warranty mechanical
 Window Locks – 2 year Warranty

 Intercom and Access control – 1 year Warranty

 Heavy Duty Screen Doors – 10 year Warranty

 Stormproof Door Seal or Smoke Seal – 2 year Warranty

 Garage Doors – 7 year Warranty

 Window Awnings – 5 year Warranty

SECTION 08: Roofing and Roof Plumbing

8.3 Sarking Insulation and  Sarking – Manufacturer’s Lifetime Warranty

Vapour Barrier
8.4 Tile Roofing  Roof Tiles – Manufacturer’s 25 year (min) Warranty
8.5 Sheet Roofing  Metal Roofing – Manufacturer’s 15 year Warranty

 Glazed Roofing – Certificate of compliance with AS 1288

 Plastic Sheet Roofing – 5 year Warranty

8.6 Roof Lights / Skylights  Skytube – 5 year Warranty for weather breakage & 10 year
Warranty for discoloration
8.7 Roof Plumbing  Gutters Downpipes and Fascia – 20 year Warranty
8.8 Ventilation of Roof  Under Eave Vents – minimum 1 year Warranty
Space
 Roof Ventilators – minimum 15 year Warranty

SECTION 09: Internal Linings

9.5 Sound Rated  Sound rated walls/ceilings – Certificate of Compliance

Walls/Ceilings
9.6 Fire Rated  Fire-rated ceilings/walls – Certificate of Compliance
Ceilings/Walls
9.7 Insulation  Ceiling insulation – Lifetime of the dwelling Warranty

SECTION 10: Plumbing and Sanitary Plumbing

10.1 General  Materials and Workmanship – Certificate of Compliance with

Plumbing Code of Australia
10.5 Fixtures and Fittings:  Kitchen Sink – 25 year Warranty

 Basin – 2 year Warranty

 Toilet - 1 year Warranty

 Toilet Seat and Covers – 1 year Warranty

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 216

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

 Bath - 10 years warranty for Acrylic and 30 years Warranty for

pressed metal baths
 Laundry Tub - 25 years Warranty for stainless steel & 10 years
Warranty for the cabinet
10.6 Accessories  Water service, Potable water – 25 year Warranty

 Taps – 3 years Warranty

 Shower Roses – 5 years Warranty

 Tempering and Thermostatic Mixing Valve - 5 years Warranty

10.7 Heating Systems  Solar Water Heaters – 10 year Warranty

 Heat Pump Heaters – 10 Year Warranty on Cylinder

 Gas Water Heaters – Storage

1 year warranty (parts/labour) 10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous
3 years parts and labour warranty, 10 year warranty on heat
exchanger
 Electric Water Heaters – Storage
1 year warranty (parts/labour) 10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous
3 years parts and labour
10.10 Fire Prevention  Fire Prevention Services – Certificate of Compliance with Standards
and BCA requirements
 Fire Blanket – 5 year Warranty

 Fire Collar – 2 year Warranty

 Fire Dampers – 2 year Warranty

 Fire Extinguishers - 10 years written Warranty on the cylinder and 1

year written Warranty on the pressure holdings
 Fire Hose Reel - 5 year written warranty on all materials and 1 year
on all valves
 Fire Hydrant System - 5 year Warranty on hydrant and 1 year
Warranty on all valves and pumps
 Fire Panel - 5 year Warranty

 Fire Stopping Material – 2 year Warranty

 Fire Sprinkler System – 10 year Warranty

10.11 Rainwater Tank:  Rainwater Tank - 20 year Warranty Above Ground, 15 year
Warranty Below Ground
 Above Ground Tank Stand or Concrete Base – Structural
Engineer’s Certificate

SECTION 11: Drainage

Certification  Materials and Workmanship – Certificate of Compliance with

Plumbing Code of Australia

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 217

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

SECTION 12: Electrical Works

12.1 General  Electrical materials and installation – Certificate of Compliance with

Standards
12.9 Light Fittings  Interior Common Area Lights – 2 year Warranty

 External & Common Area Lights – 2 year Warranty

 Emergency Lights – 2 year Warranty

 Exit Lights – 2 year Warranty

12.10 Telephone and  Telephone Service – Notification of Completion Certificate from
Broadband Cabling Telstra
and Service
12.11 Smoke Alarms  Smoke Alarms - 10 year Warranty
12.12 Appliance and other  Rangehood – 2 year Warranty
installations
 Upright Stove – 2 year Warranty

 Clothes Dryer – 2 year Warranty

 Washing Machine – 2 year Warranty

 Electric Space / Electric Panel Heaters – 2 year Warranty

12.13 Television System  Antenna – 2 year Warranty

 Master Antenna Television System - Masts Stays Booms- 2 year

Warranty
 Master Antenna Television System – Amplifier - 2 year Warranty

 Master Antenna Television System - Cables- 2 year Warranty

 Testing and Commissioning – Certificate of Compliance

12.14 Mechanical Ventilation  Mechanical Ventilation – Certificate of Compliance with BCA
requirements and Australian Standards
 Exhaust Fans > 1KW – 2 year Warranty

 Ceiling Fans – 2 year Warranty

 Air Conditioning System – 5 year Warranty

12.16 Lift  Lift – 15 year Warranty

SECTION 13: Gas Service

13.1 General  Gas Service Materials and Installation - Certificate of Compliance

with BCA and Australian Standards
13.7 Fixtures and Appliances  Gas Space Heaters - 10 year Warranty for burner, 2 year for fan
and min. 1 year for other parts.

SECTION 14: Plastering N/A

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 218

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

SECTION 15: Tiling and Wet Area Waterproofing

15.5 Waterproofing Wet  Showers Waterproofing Guarantee – 10 year Guaranty for shower
Areas waterproofing system.
15.6 Tiles  Floor Tiles – 10 year Warranty

 Wall Tiles 10 year Warranty

15.8 Shower Base  Shower Base - 10 year Warranty for Latex (Waterborne) & 30 year
Warranty for pressed metal

SECTION 16: Resilient Finishes and Carpets

16.4 Materials  Resilient Finishes and Tiles – 7 year Warranty

 Carpet – 10 year Warranty

 Underlay – 10 year Warranty

SECTION 17: Glazing

17.3 Materials  Glass Balustrades – Structural Engineer’s Certificate of Compliance

with BCA & AS 1288.7
 Fire Rated Glass Blockwork – Certificate of Compliance with
drawings, BCA & AS 1530.4

SECTION 18: Painting

18.4 Materials  Paints – Certificate of Compliance with APAS paint approvals

scheme
 Intumescent Paint – 20 year Warranty

SECTION 19: Fencing

19.4 Fence Types  Decorative Fences – 3 year Warranty

 Metal Fences – 10 year Warranty

 Timber Fences - 1 year Warranty

SECTION 20: Landscape Works

20.9 Equipment, Fixtures  Street Furniture – 1 year Warranty

and Furniture

Refer to the trade sections of the specification for requirements.

Submit two (2) sets of the documentation (original and copy) in labelled A4
size binders suitable for filing.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 219

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SCHEDULE

BES items (Building Essential items): A schedule is to be requested from Contractors covering items such
as rainwater pumps, back up pumps, fire booster, smoke detectors, fire extinguishers, lifts, exhaust
extraction, basement garage door, FIP, main switch board, water meter anti syphoning devices, gas meters,
OSD confined space cleaning, common area light maintenance, signed off as commissioned at handover
and signed off as maintained at end of Maintenance Period.
The schedule is to be provided electronically to the Principal’s Authorised Person.
FIRE STATEMENT
Provide Annual Fire Statement at handover and at the end of Maintenance Period.

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 220

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

S3 Schedule of Australian Standards & Codes

1: Standards Required to be kept on Site (Access to printed copy on site)

2019 National Construction Code – Building Code of Australia
AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation
AS 1428.1 2009 Design for access and mobility - General requirements for access – New
building work
AS 1684.1 1999 Residential timber-framed construction – Design criteria
AS 1684.2 2010 Residential timber-framed construction – Non-cyclonic areas
AS 1684.3 2010 Residential timber-framed construction – Cyclonic areas
AS 2870 2011 Residential slabs and footings
AS/NZS3000 2007 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules)
AS 3500.1 2003 Plumbing and drainage – Water services
AS 3500.1.1 1998 National plumbing and drainage - Water supply – Performance requirements
AS 3500.2 2003 Plumbing and drainage – Sanitary plumbing and drainage
AS 3500.2.1 1996 National plumbing and drainage – Sanitary plumbing and drainage –
Performance requirements
AS 3500.3 2003 Plumbing and drainage – Stormwater drainage
AS 3500.3.1 1998 National plumbing and drainage - Stormwater drainage – Performance
requirements
AS 3500.4 2003 Plumbing and Drainage - Heated water services
AS 3500.4.1 1997 National Plumbing and Drainage – Hot water supply systems – Performance
requirements
AS/NZS 3500.5 2012 National Plumbing and Drainage – Housing installations
AS 3600 2009 Concrete structures
AS 3660.1 2014 Termite Management - New Building Work
AS 3700 2011 Masonry Structures
AS 4100 1998 Steel structures
AS 4654.2 2012 Waterproofing membrane systems for exterior use – Above ground level -
Design and installation
AS 4299 1995 Adaptable Housing

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 221

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

2: Standards Related to Workmanship/Quality Referred to in the Specification

AS/NZS 1158.3.1 2005 Lighting for roads and public spaces- Pedestrian area (Category P) lighting-
Performance and design requirements
AS/NZS 1170.1 2002 Structural design actions – Permanent, imposed and other actions
AS/NZS 1170.2 2011 Structural design actions – Wind actions
AS 1192 2004 Electroplated coatings – Nickel and chromium
AS 1214 1983 Hot-dip galvanised coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread
series)
AS 1289 2000 Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes
AS 1428.1 2009 Design for access and mobility - General requirements for access – New
building work
AS/NZS 1554.1 2014 Structural steel welding – Welding of steel structures
AS 1562.1 1992 Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding – Metal
AS 1562.3 2006 Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding – Plastic
AS 1627.1 2003 Metal finishing – Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces – Removal of oil,
grease and related contamination
AS 1627.4 2005 Metal finishing - Preparation & pre-treatment of surfaces - Abrasive blast
cleaning
AS 1665 2004 Welding of aluminium structures
AS 1720.1 2010 Timber structures - Design methods
AS 1735.1 2003 Lifts, escalators and moving walls – General requirements
AS/NZS 1748 2011 Timber - Solid - Stress-graded for structural purposes – General requirements
AS 1860.2 2006 Particleboard flooring Part 2: Installation
AS 1884 2012 Floor Coverings – Resilient sheet and tiles – installation practices
AS 2047 2014 Windows and external glazed doors
AS 2050 2002 Installation of roof tiles
AS 2082 2007 Timber–Hardwood–Visually stress-graded for structural purposes
AS/NZS 2311 2009 Guide to the painting of buildings
AS/NZS 2312.1 2014 Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by
the use of protective coatings. - Paint Coatings
AS/NZS 2312.2 2014 Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by
the use of protective coatings -Hot dip galvanizing
AS 2327.1 2003 Composite structures – Simply supported beams
AS 2423 2002 Coastal steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use
To AS/NZS 2492 2007 Crosslinked polyethylene (PE-X) pipes for pressure applications
AS 2436 2010 Guide to noise and vibration control on construction, demolition and
maintenance sites
AS/NZS 2455.1 2007 Textile floor coverings – installation practice – General
AS/NZS 2455.2 2007 Textile floor coverings – Installation practice – Carpet tiles

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 222

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings – Application and finishing

AS 2601 2001 The demolition of structures
AS 2858 2008 Timber – Softwood – Visually stress-graded for structural purposes
AS/NZS2904 1995 Damp-proof courses and flashings
AS/NZS 3000 2018 Electrical installations
AS 3553 1988 Adhesives for floor and wall applications – Resilient vinyl, linoleum and rubber
sheet and tiles – Interior and exterior use
(Withdrawn)
AS 3610 1995 Formwork for concrete
Supplement 2-1996 Formwork for concrete-Commentary
AS 3610.1 2010 Formwork for concrete - Documentation and surface finish
AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications of
aluminium and aluminium alloys
AS 3727 1993 Guide to residential pavements
AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas
AS 3798 2007 Guidelines on Earthworks for Commercial and Residential Developments
AS 3958.1 2007 Ceramic tiles: Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles
AS 3959 2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire-prone areas
AS 4253 1994 Mailboxes
AS 4285 2007 Skylights
AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles
AS 4773.1 2010 Masonry in small buildings - Design
AS 4773.2 2010 Masonry in small buildings - Construction
AS 4777.1 2005 Grid connection of energy systems via inverters
AS/NZS 4859.1 2002 Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings Part 1: General criteria and
technical provisions
AS 4970 2009 Protection of trees on development sites
AS/NZS 5033 2014 Installation and safety requirements for of photovoltaic (PV) arrays
AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles
AS 5040 2003 Installation of security screen doors and window grilles
AS 5601.1 2013 Gas installations General installations
AS CA27 1959 Code of recommended practice for internal plastering on solid backgrounds
(Withdrawn)
NASH 2005 NASH (National Association of Steel-Framed Housing)
Standard for Residential and Low-rise Steel Framing,
Part1: Design Criteria (Amendments A, B, C)
SA HB 301 2016 Electrical installations – Designing to Wiring rules

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 223

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

3: Other Standards Required by Services Contractors or Related to Manufactured

Elements
AS/NZS 1148 2001 Timber – Nomenclature – Aust/NZ & Imported Species
AS 1172.1 2014 Water closets (WCs) Pans
AS 1172.5 2019 Sanitary plumbing products Baths for ablutionary purposes
AS/NZS 11801.1 2019 Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises General
requirements
AS/NZS 11801.4 2019 Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises Single-tenant
homes
AS 1192 2004 Electroplated coatings – Nickel and chromium
AS/NZS 1221 1997 Fire hose reels
AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings
AS/NZS 1260 2009 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent application
AS 1345 1995 Identification of the contents of pipes conduit and ducts
AS 1357.1 2009 Water Supply – Valves primarily for use in heated water systems – Protection
valves
AS 1357.2 2005 Water Supply – Valves primarily for use in heated water systems—Control
valves
AS/NZS 1367 2007 Coaxial cable and optical fibre systems for the RF distribution of analog and
digital television and sound signals in single and multiple dwelling installations
AS 1379 2007 Specification and supply of concrete
AS 1397 2011 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and
zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium
AS 1417.1 1987 Receiving antennas for radio and television in the frequency range 30 MHz to 1
GHz - Construction and installation
AS 1417.2 1991 Receiving antennas for radio and television in the frequency range 30 MHz to 1
GHz
Part 2: Performance (Available Superseded)

AS 1432 2004 Copper tubes for plumbing, gasfitting & drainage applications

AS 1530.3 1999 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures
Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and
smoke release

AS 1530.4 2014 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures Part 4:
Fire-resistance tests of elements of building construction

AS 1530.7 2007 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures –
Smoke control door and shutter assemblies – Ambient and medium
temperature leakage test procedure

AS/NZS 1546.1 2008 On-site domestic wastewater treatment units Septic tanks
AS/NZS 1596 2014 The storage and handling of LP Gas

AS 1604.1 2012 Specification for preservative treatment – Sawn and round timber

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 224

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS 1668.2 2012 Mechanical ventilation in buildings

AS 1670.6 1997 Fire Detection, Warning Control System – Smoke Alarms

AS 1672.1 1997 Limes and limestones for building

AS/NZS 1730 1996 Washbasins

AS/NZS 1748.1 2011 Timber – Solid - Stress graded for structural purposes – General requirements

AS/NZS 1748.2 2011 Timber – Solid - Stress graded for structural purposes – Qualifications of
grading method

AS 1810 1995 Timber – Seasoned cypress pine – Milled products

AS/NZS 1859.1 2004 Reconstituted Wood-based Panels – Particleboard

AS/NZS 1859.2 2004 Reconstituted wood-based panels – Dry processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 1859.4 2004 Wet processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 1860.1 2002 Particleboard Flooring Specification

AS/NZS 1905.1 2005 Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls – Fire resistant
doorsets

AS 2030.1 2009 Gas cylinders - General requirements

AS/NZS 2032 2006 Installation of PVC pipe systems

AS 2049 2002 Roof Tiles

AS/NZS 2053.1 2001 Conduits and fittings for electrical installations – General requirements

AS/NZS 2053.2 2001 Conduits and fittings for electrical installations – Rigid plain conduits and fittings
of insulating material

AS 2118.1 2006 Automatic fire sprinkler systems – General systems

AS 2118.4 2012 Automatic fire sprinkler systems – Sprinkler protection for accommodation
buildings not exceeding four storeys in height

AS 2129 2000 Flanges for pipes, valves and fittings

AS 2150 2005 Hot mix asphalt – A guide to good practice

AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings

AS/NZS 2269.0 2012 Plywood Structural Specification

AS/NZS 2270 2006 Plywood and blockboard for interior use

AS/NZS 2271 2004 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use

ASNZS 2293.1 2005 Emergency evacuation lighting in buildings – System design, installation and
operation.

AS 2419.1 2005 Fire Hydrant Installations – System design, installation and commissioning

AS 2427 2004 Smoke/heat release vents

AS 2441 2005 Installation of fire hose reels

AS 2444 2001 Portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets – Selection and location

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 225

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS 2588 1998 Gypsum plasterboard

AS/NZS 2712 2007 Solar and heat pump water heaters – Design and construction
AS 2887 1993 Plastic waste fittings

AS/NZS 2908.2 2000 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheets

AS/NZS 2924.1 1998 High Pressure Decorative Laminates – Classification and specification

AS 3006 1982 Adequate electrical installations in domestic premises (Withdrawn)

AS/NZS 3008.1.1 2009 Electrical installations – Selection of cables – Cables for alternating voltages up
to and including 0.6/1 Kv - Typical Australian installation conditions

AS/NZS 3112 2011 Approval and test specification – Plugs and socket-outlets

AS/NZS 3133 2013 Approval and test specification – Air break switches

AS/NZS 3190 2011 Approval and test specification – Residual current devices (current operated
earth leakage devices)
AS 3439.1 2002 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies – Type-tested and partially
type-tested assemblies

AS/NZS 3500.3 2018 Plumbing and drainage Stormwater drainage

AS 3688 2005 Water supply - metallic fittings and end connectors

AS 3799 1998 Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete

AS/NZS 3879 2011 Solvent cements and priming fluids for PVC (PVC-U and PVC-M) and ABS
pipes and fittings

AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements

AS 4055 2012 Wind loads for housing

AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for doors
and windows in buildings

AS 4145.3 2001 Locksets – Mechanical locksets for windows in buildings

AS 4256.2 2006 Plastic roof and wall cladding materials – Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

AS 4256.3 2006 Plastic roof and wall cladding materials – Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP)

AS 4256.5 2006 Plastic roof and wall cladding materials – Polycarbonate

AS/NZS 4491 1997 Timber – Glossary of terms in timber related Standards

AS/NZS 4552.2 2010 Gas fired water heaters for hot water supply and/or central heating Minimum
energy performance standards for gas water heaters

AS 4617 2004 Manual shut off gas valves

AS 4621 2004 Regulators for use with liquefied petroleum - Vapour phase

AS4645.1 2008 Gas distribution networks - Network management

AS/NZS 4671 2001 Steel reinforcing materials

AS/NZS 4692.1 2016 Electric water heaters Energy consumption, performance and general
requirements

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 226

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS/NZS 4692.2 2016 Electric water heaters Minimum Energy Performance Standard (MEPS)
requirements and energy labelling

AS/NZS 4766 2006 Polyethylene storage tanks for water and chemicals

AS 4782.2 2019 Double-capped fluorescent lamps – Performance specifications Minimum

Energy Performance Standard (MEPS)

AS/NZS 4783.2 2013 Performance of electrical lighting equipment – Ballasts for fluorescent lamps
Energy labelling and minimum energy performance standards requirements

AS 4847.2 2019 Self-ballasted lamps for general lighting services Minimum Energy Performance
Standard (MEPS)

AS 4934.2 2011 Incandescent lamps for general lighting services – Minimum Energy
Performance Standards (MEPS) requirements

AS/NZS 5000.1 2005 Electric Cables – Polymeric Insulated – For working voltages of 0.6/1 (1.2) kV

AS/NZS 5263.1.2 2016 Gas appliances Gas fired water heaters for hot water supply and/or central
heating

AS/NZS 5601.1 2013 Gas installations –General installations

AS/NZS 60598.1 2017 Luminaires General requirements and tests

AS/NZS 60898.1 2004 Electrical accessories – Circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for
household and similar installations – Circuit-breakers for ac operation

AS/NZS 60898.2 2004 Circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similar
installations – Circuit-breakers for ac and dc operation

AS/NZS 61439.3 2016 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Distribution boards
intended to be operated by ordinary persons

HB 125 2007 The glass and glazing handbook

AS/CA S008 2010 Requirements for customer cabling products

AS/CA S009 2013 Installation requirements for customer cabling (Wiring Rules)
SA HB 230 2008 Rainwater Tank Design and Installation Handbook
SA/SNZ HB 252 2014 Communications cabling manual Module 3: Residential communications
cabling handbook

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 227

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

4: Additional Standards Referred to in Specifications

AS/NZS 1163 2009 Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections
AS 1289.3.6.1 2009 Methods of testing soil for engineering purposes Soil classification test –
Determination of the particle size distribution of a soil – Standard method of
analysis by sieving
AS 1289.5.4.1 2007 Methods of testing soil for engineering purposes – Soil compaction and density
test – Dry density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio

AS 1289.6.1.1 2014 Methods of testing soil for engineering purposes Soil strength and consolidation
tests – Determination of the California Bearing Ratio of a soil – Standard
laboratory method for a remoulded specimen
AS 1599 2006 Pressure-sensitive and water activated adhesive tape for packaging and office
applications
AS 1657 2013 Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders - Design, construction and
installation
AS 1926.1 2012 Swimming pool safety - Safety barriers for swimming pools
AS 1926.2 2016 Swimming pool safety Location of safety barriers for swimming pools
AS 2001.4 2016 Method of test for textiles Colourfastness tests – Colourfastness to artificial
light: Xenonarc fading lamp test

AS 2070 1999 Plastic materials for food contact use

AS/NZS 2097 2016 Methods for sampling veneer and plywood
AS/NZS 2098.1 2016 Methods of test for veneer and plywood Moisture content of veneer and
plywood

AS 2179.1 2014 Specifications for rainwater goods ….. Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods
and metal accessories and fasteners
AS 2159 2009 Piling – Design and installation
AS 2358 1990 Adhesives – for fixing ceramic tiles (Withdrawn)
AS /NZ 2588 1998 Gypsum plasterboard
AS 2663.1 1997 Textiles – Woven and Knitted Fabrics for Window Furnishings – Uncoated
Fabrics
AS 2663.2 1999 Textiles – Fabrics for Window Furnishings – Coated Curtain Fabrics
AS/NZS 2699.1 2000 Built-in components for masonry construction – wall ties
AS/NZS 2699.3 2002 Built-in components for masonry construction – lintels and shelf angles
(durability requirements)
AS/NZS 2728 2013 Prefinished/pre-painted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building
applications – Performance requirements
AS/NZS 2785 2000 Suspended ceilings – design and installation
AS 2758.1 2014 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes -Concrete aggregates
AS 2796.1 1999 Timber – Hardwood – Sawn and milled products - Product specification
AS 2796.2 2006 Timber – Hardwood – Sawn and milled products Grade description
AS/NZS 2908.2 2000 Cellulose cement products – flat sheets

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 228

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS 3018 2001 Electrical installations – domestic installations (Withdrawn)

AS/NZS 2904 1995 Damp proof courses and flashings
AS/NZS 3439.3 2002 Low voltage switch gear and controlgear assemblies – Part 3: Particular
requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended
to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use –
Distribution boards
AS/NZS 3439.5 2009 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 5: Particular
requirements for assemblies for power distribution in public networks
AS 3553 1988 Adhesives for floor and wall applications – Resilient vinyl, linoleum and rubber
sheet and tiles – interior and exterior use
(Withdrawn)
AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing
AS 3704 2018 Geosynthetics – Glossary of terms
AS/NZS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications of
aluminium and aluminium alloys
AS/NZS 3725 2007 Design for installation of buried concrete pipes
AS 3727.1 2016 Pavements Residential
AS 3730 Series Guide to the properties of paints for buildings
AS 3743 2003 Potting mixes
AS 3786 1993 Smoke Alarms (Amendments 1,2,3,4 -1995 -2004)
AS 3818.2 2010 Timber – Heavy structural products – Visually graded – Railway track timbers
AS 3996 2006 Access covers and grates
AS 3999 1992 Thermal insulation of dwellings - Bulk insulation – Installation requirements
AS 4032.1 2005 Water Supply - Valves for the control of heated water supply temperatures -
Thermostatic Mixing Valves- Material design and performance requirements
AS 4032.2 2005 Water Supply - Valves for control of hot water supply temperatures - Tempering
valves and end of line temperature actuated devices
AS 4046 2015 Methods of testing roof tiles
AS/NZS 4058 2007 Precast concrete pipes (pressure and non-pressure)
AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for doors
and windows in buildings
AS 4145.3 2001 Locksets - Mechanical locksets for windows in buildings
AS/NZS 4200.1 1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Materials
AS/NZS 4200.2 1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Installation requirements
AS 4288 2003 Soft underlays for textile floor coverings
AS/NZS 4347 1995 Damp-proof courses and flashings – Methods of tests
Series
AS 4361.2 1998 Guide to lead paint management - Residential and commercial buildings
AS/NZS 4386.1 1996 Domestic kitchen assemblies - Kitchen units
AS/NZS 4386.2 1996 Domestic kitchen assemblies - Installation
AS 4419 2003 Soils for landscaping and garden use

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 229

 Reference Specifications for Housing Construction v2.1

SCHEDULES

AS 4454 2012 Composts, soil conditioners and mulches

AS/NZS 4455.1 2008 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units Part 1: Masonry
units
AS/NZS 4455.2 2010 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units Part 2: Pavers
and flags
AS/NZS 4455.3 2008 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units Part 3:
Segmental retaining wall units
AS 4459 Series Methods of Sampling and Testing Ceramic Tiles
AS/NZS 4505 2012 Garage doors and other large access doors
AS/NZS 4506 2005 Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coatings
AS/NZS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials
AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold formed steel structures
AS 4654.1 2012 Waterproofing membranes for external above ground use - Materials
AS/NZS 4667 2000 Quality requirements for cut to size and processed glass
AS 4707 2014 Chain of Custody for Forest Products
AS 4708 2013 Sustainable Forest Management – Economic, Social, Environmental and
Cultural Criteria and Requirements
AS 4785.1 2002 Timber – Softwood – Sawn and milled products – Product specification
AS 4785.2 2002 Timber – Softwood – Sawn and milled products – Grade description
AS 4858 2004 Wet area membranes
AS ISO 13007.1 2013 Ceramic tiles – Grouts and adhesives – Terms, definitions and specifications for
adhesives
AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles
AS 5040 2003 Installation of security screen doors and window grilles
AS 5041 2003 Methods of test – Security screen doors and window grilles
AS 5101.4 2008 Methods for preparation and testing of stabilized materials Unconfined
compressive strength of compacted materials
AS 5637.1 2015 Determination of fire hazard properties Wall and ceiling linings
AS ISO 717.2 2004 Acoustics – Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements
impact sound insulation
AS ISO 9239.1 2016 Reaction to fire tests for floor coverings Determination of the burning behaviour
using a radiant heat source
ISO 10580 2010 Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings – Test method for volatile organic
compound (VOC) emissions
ISO 11890-1 2007 Paints and varnishes – Determination of volatile organic compound (VOC)
content – Part 1 Difference method
MP 52 2005 Manual of authorisation procedures for plumbing and drainage products
HB 63 1994 Home insulation in Australia – Recommended insulation levels for all States
as per Australian Standard 2627.1
MP 78 1999 Manual for the assessment of risks of plumbing products

NSW Department of Planning, Industry and Environment | 230

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 3
SECTION 2 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK 6
SECTION 2a FIRE SAFETY WORKS 20
SECTION 3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK: 24
3.1 Demolition 25
3.2 Reinstatement of fire damaged property 30
3.3 Cleaning vacant properties 33
3.4 Roofing 38
3.5 Concrete works 42
3.6 Metalworker 47
3.7 Timber & metal fencing 51
3.8 Tree pruning / removal 59
3.9 Wall & floor tiling 62
3.10 Pest control 68
3.11 Television antenna 74
SECTION 4 ELECTRICAL WORKS 77
SECTION 5 PLUMBING WORKS 91
SECTION 6 PAINTING WORKS: 103
6.1 Preparation for painting - exterior/interior 104
6.2 Painting - Interior 113
6.3 Painting - Exterior 119
SECTION 7 CARPET & VINYL TILES 126

SECTION 8 LAWNS, GROUNDS, GARDENS AND COMMON AREA 135

CLEANING WORKS AND MANAGEMENT
SECTION 9 TIMBER SCHEDULE & DRAWING DETAILS 137
SECTION 10 COMPONENT SCHEDULE 166

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 2 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 3 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
The Specifications deal with the technical requirements associated with the repair, maintenance and upgrading of
properties maintained by the Principal. The document is divided into the following Sections:
Section 2 - Carpentry and Joinery & Minor Repair Work
Section 2a - Fire Safety Works
Section 3 - General Maintenance Work
Section 4 - Electrical Works
Section 5 - Plumbing Works
Section 6 - Painting Works
Section 7 - Carpet and Vinyl Tiles
Section 8 - Lawns, Grounds, Gardens and Common Area Cleaning Works And Management
Section 9 - Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings and Drawings
Section 10 - Component Schedule
The Warranties to be provided by the Contractor are specified in Section 10.
The Specifications must be read in conjunction with all other relevant contract documents.

GENERAL
For the extents of works, contractors should refer to either the:
x Property Assessment Survey, and/or
x Asset Dwelling Service, and/or
x Schedule of Works, and/or
x Life Cycle Program, and/or
x Works Order, and/or
x Schedule of Rates
DRAWINGS
The Drawings in Section 9 are a guide only and must not be used for construction purposes. The Contractor must
complete the drawings required for construction and provide these and as built drawings to the Principal.
The Principal will provide a schedule of works to the contractor that will require ‘Work as Executed’ drawings to be
completed, detailed and submitted to the Principal.
All work must comply with all relevant codes and standards, and the contractor must provide all necessary material,
labour and plant required for the work. Current safe work practices must be used. Provide all items referred to in
the Contract, or contemplated therein, and otherwise necessary to complete the Works.
The Principal will provide a schedule of items to the contractor that will be required to be retained by the Contractor
after replacement, bagged and tagged and retained until the Principal gives approval to dispose of them, following
a Quality Audit. The Principal may amend the list of retained items to suit the audit requirements and results of the
Contract
The Contractor will provide a Schedule of Products which is equivalent to the Principal’s Component Schedule for
approval prior to the start of the contract.
The Contractor will provide external and Internal colour schemes, which is equivalent and consistent to the
Principal’s colour schemes, for approval prior to the start of the contract.
TERMINOLOGY – The Glossary of Building Terms (HB 50 – 2004) published by NCRB and Standards Australia is
used as a reference source for building terminology for this document.
Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 4 of 214
 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 5 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

Section 2

CARPENTRY & JOINERY

AND
MINOR REPAIR WORK

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 6 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with carpentry, joinery, reglazing of windows, internal glazing and mirrors, the provision
of all door and window hardware, the repair and/or supply and installation of timber and or aluminium windows and
doors, the repair/renewal of kitchen cupboards, timber joinery, wall and ceiling linings, clothes hoists, fly screens to
doors and windows, floors, porches, exterior wall cladding and minor brickwork.

For the extents of works, contractors should refer to either the:

x Property Assessment Survey, and/or
x Asset Dwelling Service, and/or
x Schedule of Works, and/or
x Life Cycle Program, and/or
x Works Order, and/or
x Schedule of Rates

STANDARDS: All work to be performed must be carried out to the current regulatory authorities requirements as
applicable to the type of work being performed whether specifically mentioned or not. Examples of Standards under
this minor repairs section are (but not limited to) the following:

AS 1231: Aluminium and Aluminium alloys

AS 1288: Glass in buildings - Selection and installation
AS 1684.1: Residential timber-framed construction
AS/NZS 1859.1: Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications – Particleboard
AS/NZS 1859.2: Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications - Dry-processed fibreboard
AS/NZS 1859.4: Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications - Wet-processed fibreboard
AS/NZS 1860.1: Particleboard flooring – Specifications
AS 1905.1: Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls - Fire-resistant door sets.
AS 2047: Windows in buildings - Selection and installation
AS/NZS 2269: Plywood - Structural
AS/NZS 2588: Gypsum plasterboard
AS/NZS 2699.2: Built-in components for masonry construction - Connectors and accessories
AS/NZS 2699.3: Built-in components for masonry construction - Lintels and shelf angles (durability requirements)
AS/NZS 2699.1: Built-in components for masonry construction - Wall ties
AS 2796.1: Timber - Hardwood - Sawn and milled products - Product specification
AS 2904: Damp Proof Courses and Flashings
AS/NZS 2908.1: Cellulose-cement products - Corrugated sheets
AS 3700: Masonry structures
AS 3715: Metal Finishing
AS 4055: Wind loads for housing
AS 4145.2: Locksets - Mechanical locksets for doors in buildings
AS 4200.1:
AS 4200.2:
AS 4456:
AS 4506: Metal Finishing – Thermoset Powder Coatings
AS 4785.1: Timber - Softwood - Sawn and milled products - Product specification
AS 5039: Security Screen Doors and Security Window Grilles and
AS 5040: Installation of security doors and window grills
AS 5041: Methods of Testing Security Screen Doors and Security Window Grilles

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 7 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

2. GLAZING

MATERIALS: To AS1288, where no glass type or thickness is given with particular consideration for human impact.

CLEAR GLASS: Provide clear float glass processed to give flat parallel surfaces.

WIRED POLISHED GLASS: Provide Georgian wired steel mesh clear glass.

LAMINATED GLASS: Provide standard clear with high adhesion interlayer.

GLASS MIRROR: Provide silvered float glass with back face plastic sprayed.

OBSCURE GLASS: Where located in a bathroom or WC, glaze with cast pattern on the inside face. Match pattern
to existing or similar.

SAFETY GLASS: Provide permanently branded safety glass of the following grades:
x clear toughened safety glass grade 'A', or
x clear laminated safety glass grade 'B'.

LOUVRE BLADES: Provide safety glass, having ground and arised edges.

GLAZING ACCESSORIES: Provide glazing materials including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets,
glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and the like appropriate for the application
conditions and the required performance to manufacturers written specification.

WORKMANSHIP:

INSTALLATION: Use methods that ensure each piece of glass is held firmly in place by permanent means
applicable to its location without damage to, or failure of, glass or glazing materials. Ensure external glazing is
watertight and prevents the entry of rainwater into the building.

BROKEN GLAZING: Demolish and remove from site all broken glazing, including mirrors and clean out rebates.
Repair glass to match existing.

GLASS REPLACEMENT IN HIGH VANDALISM AREAS: When replacing glass in high vandalism areas,
contractors can approach the Principal for approval to install Polycarbonate material.

3. ALUMINIUM / TIMBER WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS

GENERAL: Provide proprietary windows and sliding doors including all the necessary hardware and accessories.
Comply with the Section 10, Component Schedule, testing and performance requirements.

SAMPLES: Submit samples, on request, of full size sections with the selected finish and hardware for all profiles
offered.

MATERIALS - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS:

TIMBER REVEALS: Comply with the Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings in Section 9.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 8 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

WINDOW AND DOOR FINISH: Provide a minimum 20 micron anodic film thickness and powder coat paint a
minimum 50 micron thick. Ensure all finished surfaces show uniformity of gloss and colour (to match the approved
sample) and are free of all painting defects.

MATERIALS - TIMBER WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS:

EXTERIOR FRAMES: Provide heads, jambs, frames, mullions and transoms in accordance with the Schedule of
Timber Species and Durability Ratings in Section 9, manufactured to match the existing.

SASHES: Match the existing where available.

FLASHINGS: Provide 0.7mm thick bituminous coated Zinc or equivalent, in accordance with the frame
manufacturers written specification.

LOUVRES: Refer to Section 10 - Component Schedule for LOUVRE windows, or equal.

WORKMANSHIP:

HANDLING: Handle, unload and store components to suit manufacturers written specification and prevent
distortion, prefinished surfaces rubbing together, and contact with mud, moisture and other damaging materials.
Replace all damaged items at no cost to the Principal.

CORROSION PROTECTION: Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, slips or underlays
between dissimilar metals and between concrete or masonry and aluminium.

FIXING: Fit flashings to frames and framing as required. Fix frames in place to suit manufacturers written
specification, plumb, level and true to line and face without distortion and with all opening sashes operating easily.
Fit all architraves, mouldings and trims as required. Seal frames to adjoining structures as recommended by
manufacturers to make weather tight where necessary.

PROTECTIVE COVERINGS/COATINGS: Retain these in place during fixing wherever possible. Provide additional
protection as necessary to prevent the marking of surfaces in completed work.

REPAIRS - EXISTING ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS: Straighten or replace aluminium sections
and rescue all aluminium, and where matching beads are unobtainable provide a solid rectangular extrusion shall
be screw fixed and bedded with sealant or neoprene weather-strips. Match the existing with replacement weather-
strips. Supply and fit set of rollers to match existing sliding doors. Fix sealing strips as required with profile sizes to
suit.

REPAIRS - EXISTING TIMBER WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS: Repair by replacing timber sections with
similar profiles to those existing, e.g. head, jamb, sill, mullion, etc. Reinstate all weather grooves. Check for and
ensure full swing and ease of action. Supply and fit sets of rollers to match the existing sliding doors. Re-seat or
replace hinges where required and if needed plane sashes to provide an even gap all around that is sufficient to
allow finishing without binding. Where necessary replace rusting screws with non-ferrous type screws.

REPLACEMENT OF ALL WINDOWS IN A BUILDING: When replacing all windows in a building the contractor is to
report the aggregate solar heat gain calculation to the Principal for prior approval of the replacement windows are
given.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 9 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

4. TIMBER DOORS

TIMBER DOORS: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

TIMBER/STEEL DOOR FRAMES: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

FIRE RATED DOOR FRAMES: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule. Provide as part of an approved one
hour fire-rated door set assembly.

5. HARDWARE

MATERIALS: Provide hardware to windows and doors shall be provided by the Contractor to match existing. Refer
to Section 10 - Component Schedule.

WORKMANSHIP:

INSTALLATION: Fit hardware to doors, windows and joinery furniture in existing positions. Unless otherwise
described, match door, window and joinery furniture existing throughout. Provide all necessary fixings to suit the
conditions. Conceal fixings where possible. For exterior work, provide aluminium, stainless steel or brass screws
and fixings are to be used as appropriate. Avoid junctions of incompatible materials and replace where these occur.
Provide fixings of sufficient strength and dimensions to suit the items and materials concerned and to sustain the
loads and operation of the equipment as necessary. Remove any non-standard hooks, nails, screws and fittings
from windows and doors, and make good as required.

DOORS: Hang exterior doors on a minimum of 3 x 100mm fixed pin hinges, with electro galvanised finish or in
brass. Hang interior doors on 1 pair of 90mm loose pin hinges for standard doors and 3 x 90mm loose pin hinges
for full height doors. Re-hang existing doors and windows with existing hinges when the hinges are in good
condition.

DOOR CLOSERS: Provide door closers where indicated for fire egress purposes, such as with access to common
stairwells in multi-level, and multi-unit buildings. Provide types and sizes in accordance with relevant codes.
Provide certification of compliance with the relevant code where a door closer is fitted on a fire door.

CHANGE KEYING COMBINATIONS: Remove the cylinder to entry door deadlocks, screen door locks, garage door
locks and if applicable keyed window locks. All new/replacement lock cylinders are to be keyed alike to the existing
lock system, unless the property is Vacant and Principal’s Representative directs that all lock cylinders are to be
replaced, in this case all new lock cylinders are to be keyed alike to a new combination. Provide two new keys for
each new lock installed. If locks are master keyed all replacement locks and cylinders must be keyed alike to the
master key.

HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule with hardware for:-
x Front and rear entry doors
x Common area entrance doors
x Balcony/porch doors
x Internal doors
x Heavy duty screen doors
x Storeroom & toilet doors
x Electric meter cupboards
x Electric meter cabinets

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 10 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

WINDOWS - ALUMINIUM/TIMBER: Provide the following hardware:-

Double Hung:
- keyed window lock
- sash fastener
- sash balances
- sash lifts
Casement/Hopper:
- keyed window lock
- sash fastener
- window stays
Sliding:
- keyed window lock
- sash fastener
Awning:
- keyed window winder

MISCELLANEOUS: Provide the following hardware:-

Kitchen Cupboards (HMR/MDF):
- ‘D’ Handle
- concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 1700 swing
Kitchen Cupboards (Timber)
- cupboard vent
- ‘D’ Handle
- double nylon rollers or double brass ball catch.
- cupboard door hinges
Kitchen Drawer:
- ‘D’ Handle
- integrated drawer slide system
Kitchen:
- Tea towel bar
Bathroom:
- Toilet paper holder
- bath towel rail
- shower curtain rail
- stainless steel grab rails
- soap holder
- robe hooks
- shaving cabinet and/or mirror

6. JOINERY

GENERAL: Comply with the Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings in Section 9 for joinery materials.
Prevent or rectify any surface defects.

ARCHITRAVES / SKIRTINGS / MOULDINGS: Comply with the Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings
in Section 9. Match existing profiles as applicable.

TIMBER STAIRS: Provide closed type stairs unless otherwise directed by the Principal’s Representative.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 11 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

HANDRAILS: Provide and fix handrails to match the existing. Where new stair handrails are required, mount them
on offset brackets on every stud at a minimum height of 865mm above the pitch line of the stairs and 1m above the
landing.

LINEN CUPBOARD: Fit out cupboards with full depth 16mm high moisture resistant particleboard or high moisture
resistant medium density fibreboard. Screw-fix shelves to 25mm rails along the back and ends at max 360mm
centres vertically.

BUILT-IN WARDROBES: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedules unless replacing components ONLY,
then replace like with like.

TRIM: Where a whole section of trim is defective remove, scribe and fit architraves to interior joinery, skirting to all
walls, and timber bead to match the existing. Use single lengths. Piecing of short sections will not be accepted.

EASING OF DOORS: Check door closing and swing and ensuring ease of action. Re-seat or replace hinges where
required and, where needed, plane doors to provide an even gap all round, that is sufficient to allow finishing
without binding. Include to paint disturbed surfaces or raw edges following easing.

7. KITCHEN CUPBOARDS

GENERAL: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule and the standard details in Drawing Nos. KD1 to KD11
in Section 9.

Where kitchen cupboards are specified by the linear metre, construct the cupboards in modular fashion to facilitate
any subsequent replacement that may be required.

Seal bench tops to walls with a silicone sealant and provide a flexible waterproof sealant between tiles and bench
top. Ensure that all openings or spaces between or behind kitchen cupboards and walls are sealed and vermin
proof, including relocate or close and patch wall vents as required to suit installation of kitchen cupboards.

REPLACEMENT DOORS AND DRAWERS TO CABINETS: Match the existing fittings.

REPLACEMENT SHELVES: Provide either a Melamine or painted finish to match the existing.

8. BATHROOM

GENERAL: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule with bathroom accessories and fittings.

SHAVING CABINET: Surface mount or recess the cabinet.

VANITY UNIT: Construction and/or repairs and installation as for kitchen cupboards.

BATHROOM FITTINGS: Screw fit fittings (e.g. towel rails, toilet roll holder, grab rails etc.) using S.S. screws.

REFIXING FITTINGS: Where fittings (e.g. towel rails, toilet roll holder, grab rails etc.) are to be refixed, reinstall the
fittings in the existing locations. Where the existing location is no longer appropriate, either refix in a new location

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 12 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

as directed or provide 75mm x 25mm cleat screws fixed or remove wall sheet, install additional noggins to wall, re-
sheet and make good wall and refix fitting.

9. WALL AND CEILING LININGS

MATERIALS:

PLASTERBOARD SHEETING: Approved manufacture branded with recessed edges. For walls 10mm thick
minimum. For ceilings 10mm thick for ceiling joists at 450 c/s and 13mm for 600 c/s.

FIBRE CEMENT SHEETING: 6mm thick with recessed edges, Type B, Category 2.

CORNICE: Provide plasterboard 90mm thick Scotia type. Where walls are masonry, nail to ceiling framing. Do not
nail to wall plates.

ACCESSORIES: Supply and install to suit manufacturers written specification adhesives, nails and clouts,
perforated angles, jointing tape, jointing cement etc.

WALL LININGS - PLASTERBOARD: Fix horizontally and in single length for walls up to 4800mm, high and stagger
butt joints on both sides of internal walls, with no joints occurring in line with window or door studs.

Fix plasterboard wall lining by the adhesive-nail/screw on system in accordance with manufacturers written
specification.

WALL LININGS - FIBRE CEMENT SHEET: Fix horizontally using maximum length sheets for walls to minimise butt
joints.

WET AREAS: Provide the flashings, trims and sealant necessary to ensure that wet areas are waterproof.

TILED WALLS: Fix fibre cement wall lining sheets with nails or screws only. Use spacings in accordance with
manufacturers written specification. Take special care when fixing fibre cement sheets, where junctions between
walls and floors are flashed, that fasteners do not penetrate the flashings.

EXTERNAL ANGLES: Where no other corner finish is specified or detailed, finish with 25mm x 25mm x 0.5mm
gauge galvanised iron purpose made perforated angle. Fix metal angle to corners with galvanised nails spaced
max.150mm apart, with the arris edge plumb. Fill and set as specified for butt joints.

CEILING LININGS - GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD/FIBRE CEMENT SHEET: Fix all ceiling lining before wall
sheeting is applied.

Fix ceiling lining by the adhesive-nail/screw on system in accordance with manufacturers written specification.

Provide butt joints only in ceiling sheets where the length exceeds 4800mm.

10. EXTERNAL WALL CLADDING

MATERIALS:

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 13 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

FIBRE CEMENT: Type A, Category 2.

Proprietary system flat sheets, smooth or textured: Minimum 4.5mm thick with timber frames. Minimum 6.0mm thick
with metal frames.
Proprietary system planks, smooth or textured: Minimum 7.5mm thick.

HARDBOARD: Exterior grade. Provide proprietary system planks, smooth or textured, as directed, minimum
9.5mm thick.

SARKING: To AS4200.1 and installation to AS4200.2

WALL SARKING and INSULATION: Insulate walls to comply with BASIX optimum rating for the appropriate climate
zone when renewing either internal (for the entire room) or external wall sheeting (when renewing whole side of
house) only.

GENERAL: Provide vapour permeable sarking and insulation under cladding, which does not provide a permanent
waterproof seal, including
x Boards fixed vertically or diagonally
x Boards or planks fixed in exposed locations where driven rain can penetrate the joints, and
x Unpainted or unsealed cladding

INSTALLATION: Apply to the outer face of external stud walls from the top plate down over the bottom plate and
flashing. Run across the studs and lap at least 150mm at joints.

WALL CLADDING - COMPLETE: Cover framing with Reflective foil. Provide proprietary plank or sheet (as directed)
cladding systems to manufacturers written specification, including any necessary jointing and flashing.

WALL CLADDING – REPAIR: Cut damaged External wall cladding to a line of suitable fixings (studs etc) and
replace with necessary jointing and flashing.

EAVES, SOFFITS, BARGEBOARD – Repair: Cut damaged Eaves, Soffits, Bargeboards etc to a line of suitable
fixings (rafters, beams etc) and replace with necessary jointing and flashing.

FINISHING: Paint to match the existing. Comply with Section 6, Painting Works.

11. FRAMING

MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP: Provide additional timber members as required to support lining, cladding,

hardware, fixtures and fittings. Provide fastenings of types appropriate for their purposes, sufficient to transmit the
loads and stresses imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly, and install them without splitting or
otherwise damaging the timber.

12. FLOORING

MATERIALS:

TIMBER STRIP FLOORING: Provide grades equal to those required by the Schedule of Timber Species and
Durability Ratings in Section 9.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 14 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

STRUCTURAL PARTICLE BOARD: Bond Type A. Tongue and grooved sheets on the longitudinal edge. Provide
minimum 19mm thick for 450mm joist spacing, and minimum 22mm thick for 600mm joist spacing.

STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD: Bond Type A. Tongue and grooved sheets on the longitudinal edge.

Minimum Thickness for F8

x Joint spacing up to 450mm = 14mm
x Joint spacing 450mm up to 600mm = 19.5mm

Minimum Thickness for F11

x Joint spacing up to 450mm = 13mm
x Joint spacing 450mm up to 600mm = 18.5mm

COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT: Type A, Category 4. For wet area flooring, provide minimum 15mm thick for
450mm joist spacing, and minimum 18mm thick for 600mm joist spacing.

ADHESIVE: Provide adhesive as per manufacturers written specification.

SETTING OUT FOR SERVICES: At the earliest opportunity set-out the position and sizes of all holes, recesses
and chases for services, pipes, conduits, equipment and their trimming out.

Obtain approval from the Principal's Representative for any new locations of penetrations for fittings, pipes and
conduits before fixing flooring.

FIXING TIMBER STRIP FLOORING: Lay strip flooring across joists with staggered joints. Cramp and double nail
flooring at regular intervals to ensure there are no gaps between boards. Punch all nails.

FIXING PLYWOOD: Lay sheets across joists in a staggered pattern with all edges and joints fully supported.
Provide fixings in accordance with manufacturers written specification. Provide a 2-3mm gap at the perimeter of
floors for sheet expansion.

FIXING PARTICLEBOARD: Do not expose particleboard flooring to the weather. Lay sheets across the joists in a
staggered pattern from the centre of large areas with all edges and joints full supported. Do not allow water to pond
on the floor surface.

FIXING COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT: Lay sheets across joists in a staggered pattern with sheet ends fully
supported. Screw fix in accordance with manufacturers written specification.

PENETRATIONS: Site measure for all penetrations and cut to tight fit with a hole-saw or similar for pipe work and
the like where penetrations of flooring occur. Repair existing penetrations as required.

13. BRICKWORK

MATERIALS:

BRICKS: Provide metric standard bricks of even size and shape with true arrases.

CLAY BRICK DURABILITY: Below damp proof course use exposure category to AS4456.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 15 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

BLOCKS: Provide concrete masonry bricks in accordance with the appropriate Australian Standards.

LINTELS:

GENERAL: Proprietary cold-formed flat based type designed to AS4600.

MATERIAL: Mild steel galvanised to AS4680, minimum coating mass = 600g/m2. Do not cut after galvanising.
Sections to be mild steel hot dip galvanised after fabrication.

DAMP PROOF COURSE: To the appropriate Australian Standards.

WALL TIES: Provide pressed mild steel ties with spiked ends for fixing, galvanised after fabrication.

MORTAR: Mix 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts sand and water with 1/10th part hydrated lime or an appropriate
admixture. Use admixtures to suit manufacturers written specification.

VERMIN STOP: Provide galvanised steel wire "chicken mesh" netting strips with reinforced edges and galvanised
staples for fixing.

BRICK WORK: Lay bricks on a full bed of mortar and ensure the joints are completely full. Do not mix or change
the brick type laid from course to course. In face work, distribute the colour range of units to prevent colour
concentrations.

BOND: Lay using stretcher bond unless otherwise required to match existing.

WALL TIES: Fix ties to the face of studs without damaging the building paper, and place and space as appropriate.

MORTAR: Provide to the maximum practical density, fully laid, firmly placed, correctly cured and not re-tempered.
Ensure joints are 8mm min. to 10mm max. wide and uniform.

POINTING: Integrate pointing colouring with the mortar, and point as the laying work proceeds after an initial
stiffening period.

WEATHERING: Joint to a concave tooled form as the laying work proceeds and after an initial stiffening period.

WEEPHOLES: Rake out every third perpend where weep holes are required.

CO-ORDINATION: Co-ordinate the building-in of all exterior joinery and items required to be fitted as the work
proceeds. Rake out for or build-in flashings as required.

ALUMINIUM: Insure that all aluminium is cleaned immediately of any mortar droppings.

REPAIRS: Carry out repairs in accordance with materials and workmanship required.

EFFLORESCENCE: Remove this where it appears, with a stiff bristle broom, wiping with a damp sponge and
washing well with clean water.

CLEANING: Clean the face of brickwork with acid wash in accordance with the brick manufacturers written
specification to remove all stains and excess mortar.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 16 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

14. FLYSCREENS

SCREEN DOORS - HINGED AND SLIDING: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

FLYSCREENS TO WINDOWS: Use cold roll formed aluminium of ¾ hard 5005 alloy grade for all sections. Use
rectangular hollow sections cold roll formed from 0.6mm pre-painted aluminium, with the edges of frames
lockseamed and "continuously stitched" to ensure torsional rigidity, and external dimensions 25mm x 11 mm.
Suitable extruded sections may be used in lieu of roll formed members. Fix together with press formed 1.62mm
inserts "interference" fitted in the frame section. Provide hard grade anodised aluminium or fibreglass flyscreen
mesh fixed in position within the frame with tubular P.V.C. retaining strip for the full perimeter of frame, and provide
cross bracing when the height or width of screen exceeds 1200mm.

Use one of the following methods, to suit application, when installing window screens:-
x Face fix using stepped turn buttons, minimum 4 per screen.
x Fix externally on a 50mm x 25mm timber frame screw fixed (where structural integrity of the window is not
compromised.
x Provide double aluminium sliding track with horizontal sliding screens.
x Internally fit screen with “Magi Flap” type access to the window fastener.

15. EXTERIOR WORK

GENERAL: This clause deals with the repair or replacement and supply and installation of the following items,
including hardware:-
x Existing and new clotheslines (Refer to Section 10, Component Schedule for requirements)
x Existing and new letterboxes (Refer to Section 10, Components Schedule for requirements)
x Existing and new timber decking
x Existing and new verandah posts
x Existing handrails

MATERIALS:

SITE-MIX CONCRETE: Comply with Section 3.5, Concrete Works.

PIPE HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES: Comply with Section 3.6, Metal worker.

GALVANISING: After fabrication completely remove all surface contaminants and otherwise prepare surfaces in a
accordance with Section 6.1, and hot dip galvanised

TIMBER: Provide grades equal to those required by the Schedule of Timber Species and Durability Ratings in
Section 9 or another appropriate standard approved for the application.

UNSEASONED TIMBER: If unseasoned timber is provided or variations in moisture content are likely, make
allowance for shrinkage, swelling and differential movement.

DURABILITY:

GENERAL: Provide timbers with natural durability appropriate to the conditions of use, or preservative treated
timbers or equivalent durability.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 17 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

NATURAL DURABILITY CLASSIFICATION: To AS1604 (Timber – Preservative treated – Sawn or round) Table
F2.

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
x Class 1: Timbers in contact with the ground.
x Class 2: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected
from moisture but exposed to the weather.
x Class 3: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected
with a finish and well maintained.
x Class 4: Timbers fully protected from moisture, indoors, above ground and well ventilated.

PREVENTATIVE TREATMENT

STANDARD: To AS1604 (Timber – Preservative treated – Sawn or round) Table D1.

FIXINGS - BOLTS, SCREWS & NAILS: Provide galvanised steel, brass or stainless steel fixings to suit the location
and application.

STANDARD: To AS3566 (Screws – Self drilling – For the building and construction industries) corrosion resistance
class 2.

TIMBER FASTENERS

METAL WASHERS: Provide washers to the heads and nuts of all bolts and coach screws.
STEEL STRAPS: Zinc-coated steel to AS1397 (Steel sheet and strip – Hot dipped zinc coated or aluminium/zinc-
coated)/Z275, minimum size 25 x 1mm or 30 x 0.8mm.

GALVANISING: Galvanize mild steel components (including fasteners) to AS1214 (Hot-dip galvanised coatings on
threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread series)) or AS/NZS4680 (hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on
fabricated ferrous articles), as appropriate, if:-
x Exposed to weather,
x embedded in masonry, or
x in contact with chemically treated timber.

WORKMANSHIP: All work must be in accordance with the best trade practice, and include those methods,
practices and processes contained in all relevant manufacturers written specification.

CLOTHESLINE (EXTENDALINE): Install and repair to manufacturers written specification.

CLOTHESLINE (AWNING TYPE): Install and repair to manufacturers written specification.

CLOTHESLINE (ROTARY TYPE): Install and repair to manufacturers written specification. Ensure parts compatible
with the existing clotheslines. Where re-wiring is required, remove the existing wire and replace with new 6
stranded galvanised wire, and tension the wire as required. Plumb clotheslines and re-concrete as required.

FOOTINGS - CLOTHESLINE / LETTERBOX: Dig 200mm dia x 500mm deep footings for clotheslines and 250mm x
250mm x 350mm deep footings for letterboxes. Set clothesline and letterbox posts plumb in the excavated footings
and set in concrete.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 18 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – CARPENTRY & JOINERY AND MINOR REPAIR WORK

LETTERBOX REPAIRS: Complete the repairs with suitable new components, unless otherwise specified to return
the fixture to its original condition.

Where components require re-securing, use new non-corroding fasteners to effect permanent repairs. Prior to
completing work test for the soundness of fixings.

NEW LETTERBOX: Where required, replace existing letterboxes with new approved to Australia Post
requirements, a freestanding pre-finished letterboxes. Provide new pre-finished posts in 38mm square or 38mm
dia. round tubular steel fitted with a 75mm x 75mm attachment plate to match letter box. Site the letterbox to allow
good access. Provide new riveted street numbers as necessary.

LANDING FLOORING: Remove existing damaged flooring and supply and fit new strip flooring to match the
existing as directed. All joints must be staggered and nails HD galvanised and punched below surface. Provide new
material in accordance with clause, Flooring, in this section.

NEW VERANDAH POST: Where required, remove existing veranda posts and replace them with like sized H3
treated veranda posts full height, complete with galvanised stirrup bases. In all cases prime mortices, housings, cut
ends and all faces of D.A.R. timber with suitable timber primer and fix galvanised stools with M12 galvanised bolts.
Fix the stools to concrete using 12mm masonry anchors.

REPLACE EXISTING PORCH BLADE & SOLE PLATE: Where required, remove existing porch blades and sole
plates and replace them with H3 treated pine to match the existing. Chamfer edges and paint to match the existing.

REPLACE EXISTING HANDRAILS: Where directed to remove damaged/unsound existing timber handrails,
replace them with timber handrails to match the existing. In all cases prime mortices, housings, cut ends and all
faces of D.A.R. timber with suitable timber primer prior to fixing or assembly.

Comply with Section 3.6 Metal worker, with galvanised steel pipe handrails.

FENCING REPAIRS: Comply with Section 3.7 Timber and Metal Fencing.

16. COMPLETION

Clear away and dispose of all rubbish, and clean and make good any soiled or damaged surfaces arising out of the
work on completion.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 19 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2(a) – FIRE SAFETY WORKS

Section 2(a)

FIRE SAFETY WORKS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 20 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2(a) – FIRE SAFETY WORKS

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the Fire Safety Works as identified in the Fire Risk Management Plan
Implementation Manual.
Refer to the Fire Risk Management Implementation Manual, Work Orders and Fire Schedule of Rates for extent.

2. Fire Rated Plasterboard Ceiling Systems

x Fire rated plasterboard ceiling systems shall formulated so that when used in a ceiling system it enables
the ceiling to meet the requirements for an FRL of 60/60/60 or a Resistance to the Incipient Spread of Fire
for 60 minutes when tested in accordance with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of
Elements of Building Construction.
x Any hanger, its attachments to the supporting structure and grid system shall withstand without failure a
load of 1.4KN.
x Test report to be provided.

3. Fire Rated Plasterboard Shaft Systems

x Where required by the FRMPIM a fire rated plasterboard shaft shall be constructed to achieve an FRL of
60/60/60 when tested in accordance with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire resistance Tests of
Elements of Building Construction.
x Shaft systems must meet the structural requirements for light weight construction which requires tests to
the following standards:
¾ Resistance to Static Pressure – ASTM E72-80
¾ Resistance to Impact – ASTM E695-79
¾ Surface Indentation – AS2185 – Appendix A2
¾ BRANZ Test Report – STO349
x When tested in accordance with AS 1530.3 contain a Spread of Flame index of zero (0).
x Test report to be provided.

4. Fire Rated Plasterboard Bulkhead Systems

x Fire rated plasterboard bulkhead systems shall formulated so that when used in a bulkhead system it
enables the ceiling to meet the requirements for an FRL of 60/60/60 or 90/90/90 when tested in
accordance with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building
Construction.
x Any hanger, its attachments to the supporting structure and grid system shall withstand without failure a
load of 1.4KN.
x Test report to be provided.

5. Fire Dampers

x Fire dampers shall be formulated to meet the requirements for an FRL of 60/60/60 when tested in
accordance with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building
Construction.
x Fire dampers must pass the requirements for the air leakage test specified in Clause 5.3 of AS 1682.1.
x The mounting flange, casing, and blades of the fire damper shall be made from-
¾ Stainless steel complying with AS 1449;

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 21 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2(a) – FIRE SAFETY WORKS

¾ Zinc coated steel sheet complying with AS 1397 with a coating not less than Z275; or
¾ Castings of malleable ferrous materials or other alloys having a temperature fusion not less than
1000oC.
x Materials for moving parts (including blade and linkage shafts and linkage bearings) shall be stainless
steel complying with AS 1444, commercial brass or bronze complying with AS 1567 or a polyamide or
polyfluoride.
x Linkages, springs and other moving parts which form part of the closing mechanisms shall be made of
stainless steel grade 301, condition H of AS 1449 or equivalent or phosphor bronze, grade 518B, temper
H of AS 1566 or equivalent.
x Where intended to be used in a horizontal direction within a roof-ceiling system the prototype fire damper
shall have been tested for the purpose for which it is intended.
x If activated by a thermally released link, it shall be tested to comply with AS 1890. For horizontal mounted
fire dampers, the thermally released link shall be located within the casing, in the plane normal to air flow.
x Test report of any product to be provided.

6. Rockwool Insulation

x Rockwool or other mineral wool to be used in all applications must be fire resistant and achieve a FRL
when installed of a minimum of -/60/60.

7. Fire Stopping Materials

x Fire stopping material or materials must comply with the nominated properties or replicate a system tested
in accordance with AS 4072.1 and AS 1530.1
x The installed fire stopping materials must replicate the tested system and achieve an FRL of not less than
that specified in the FRMPIM of the penetrated floor/wall or ceiling assembly.
x Penetrations shall be protected by a system that has been tested in accordance with As 4072.1 and AS
1530.1.
x Test certificates to be provided.

8. Fire Rated Doorsets

x To comply with the requirements of AS 1905.1 Fire – Resistant Doorsets.

9. Fire & Smoke Seals

x The seals are to have undergone tests with proprietary fire doors and/or solid core doors.
x Seals are to have been tested in accordance with AS 1530.7 to be capable of limiting smoke at 200oC for
30 minutes.
x Independent tests are to be provided that demonstrate that the product does not suffer from any significant
wear and tear for up to and exceeding 95,000 open and close cycles.

10. Intumescent Paint

x Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a FRL of 60/60/60 when applied to plasterboard and/or
pressed metal ceilings in accordance with AS 1530.4

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 22 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2(a) – FIRE SAFETY WORKS

x Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a FRL of 60 minutes when applied to sheetrock and lath
& plaster in both wall and ceiling assemblies in accordance with AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of
Elements of Building Construction or the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) E 119 - Standard
Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .
x Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a 1 hour fire endurance test in wall and/or ceiling
assemblies constructed of gypsum, fibreglass, aluminium, asbestos products, particle board, fibrous
cement sheeting, pressed metal, plywood panels and timber in accordance with AS 1530.4 – Fire
Resistance Tests of Elements of Building Construction or the American Society for Testing Materials
(ASTM) E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .
x Intumescent paint to begin to expand at a temperature not exceeding 190oC.
x Independent tests are to be provided that indicates drying time of a single coat of intumescent paint not
less than 450 microns (without the need for mechanical aids), does not exceed 4 hours in any season
assuming weather conditions are appropriate to apply the product.
x Independent tests are to be provided that indicates the product is non-toxic.
x Independent tests shall be provided indicating that the product can be applied over existing non-fire
retardant paint.
x The product shall not contain a flashpoint.
x Product to have a minimum 20 year guarantee for internal applications.

11. Radiant heat Attenuating Screens

x The radiant heat attenuating screens are to have the following characteristics:
o Material to be stainless steel,
o Wire diameter of screen not less than 0.8mm,
o Weave characteristics not less than 394 strands per metre,
o Screens are to be of non-combustible construction and shall not contain any components that will
ignite when subjected to radiant heat, and
o Fixing of the gauze to the frame shall be by weld or clamping with a continuous metallic strip fixed
to the frame with metallic fasteners.

12. Fire Collars

x Tested and approved in accordance with AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building
Construction or British Standards BS 476: Part 20 to seal both PVC and PP pipes from 32mm up to
110mm in penetrations through fire rated floor and wall components for up to 90 minutes.
x Product to have been tested as a retrofit fire stop collar.
x Independent tests to be provided to indicate that the maximum temperature resistance (fire stop collar
shall begin to activate) shall not exceed 120oC.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 23 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK

Section 3

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
WORK

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 24 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.1 – DEMOLITION

Section 3.1

DEMOLITION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 25 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.1 – DEMOLITION

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the demolition of existing work as needed to carry out new work. It covers the
whole or part demolition of structures. The work is to be carried out in such a way as to minimise the risk to health
and safety and damage to the immediate environment.

OH&S AND SAFE WORKING PRACTICES: Refer Legislative and Policy Conditions.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEN\MENT: Refer Legislative and Policy Conditions.

WASTE MANAGEMENT – Refer Legislative and Policy Conditions.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS 2601: Demolition of structures,
x AS/NZS 4576 : Guidelines for scaffolding,
x NOHSC:2002 : Guide to the control of asbestos hazards in building and structures,
x Landcom - Managing Urban Storm water: Soils and Construction, (the Blue Book).

and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.

AUTHORITIES:: Obtain all relevant permits and consents prior to commencement of all work under the Contract.
The Contractor is to pay all fees and charges.

MAINS POWER SUPPLY: The disconnection and re-connection of mains power must only be undertaken by the
local energy authority or by a suitably licensed and qualified electrician. Prior to disconnection and re-connection of
the mains power approval by the local energy authority must be obtained.

FIXED APPLIANCES: The disconnection and re-connection of fixed appliances must be undertaken by a suitability
licensed and qualified tradesman, ie: electrician and plumber.

BURNING OFF: Burning of materials arising from the demolition is not permitted on Site.

DEMOLITION LICENSING: Contractors are required to be properly licensed to carry out demolition work in
accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety (Demolition Licensing) Regulation 1996. Generally the
Regulation applies to demolition work done to a building, structure or installation that is 4 metres or more in height,
being work involving mechanical felling.

DEMOLISHED MATERIALS: Become the property of the Contractor except where otherwise specified in the
Contract. Remove from Site as work proceeds to waste management depots relevant for the type of materials to be
disposed

SALVAGED ITEMS or HERITAGE ITEMS: Where identified, salvaged items or heritage items which are to remain
the property of the Principal must be carefully dismantled, stored safely and recorded on a salvaged/heritage
component register.

SOIL TESTS: Where hazardous materials or contamination is suspected, immediately notify the Principal’s
Representative for further instruction.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 26 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.1 – DEMOLITION

STOCKPILE TOPSOIL: Where required or directed by the Principal’s Representative, stockpile excavated topsoil
on Site. Keep separate from other excavated materials. Spread and level where directed before Completion of the
Works.

EXPLOSIVES
Do NOT use explosives in demolition

2. PREPARATORY WORK

DEMOLITION WORK PLAN: Refer to AS 2601, Appendix A - Demolition Checklist, utilising the information
obtained by the Contractor with the preliminary investigations, develop and prepare a Site-specific Safety
Management Plan (refer OH&S Management Systems Guidelines – Section 5) for the proposed demolition works.

SERVICES: Before starting demolition ensure all services have been disconnected or removed as required.

SOIL AND WATER MANAGEMENT: Refer Environmental Management Plan. Erosion and sediment control
measures are to be implemented on Site prior to the start of any demolition, clearing, scrub removal, bulk
earthworks and excavations. These controls are to be maintained and / or varied as specified during the works.
Refer to Landcom - Managing Urban Storm water: Soils and Construction, (the Blue Book).

3. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES

ADJOINING PROPERTY: Take all precautionary measure necessary to avoid damage or nuisance to adjoining
properties. Where it is considered necessary carry out a dilapidation report on neighbouring properties, particularly
where buildings abut adjoining boundaries. Provide a copy of this report to the Principal’s Representative prior to
commencing the Works.

PROTECTION: Protect parts of the Site and Site structures that are to be retained. Cut away and strip out with care
to reduce the amount of making good to a minimum. Damage resulting from failure to protect adequately is to be
made good at no cost to the Principal.

TEMPORARY SCREENS: Erect suitable screens wherever penetration of weather, dust and dirt is to be prevented
and adjust as necessary as work proceeds.

SUPPORTS: Provide supports and brace existing structure as necessary during cutting of new openings or
replacement of structural parts. Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structure. Do not remove supports
until new work is strong enough to support the existing structure so that all work is at all times structurally stable
and sound.

SECURITY: Prevent access by unauthorised persons. Leave property/work area safe at close of each day's work.

DANGEROUS HAZARDS: Illuminate and protect as necessary all holes, unsafe building and other hazards.

FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE CONDITIONS: Take precautions to prevent fire or explosion and take all necessary
actions to alert appropriate authority where a danger exists.

EXISTING TREES: Protect all trees and shrubs from damage, throughout the course of the work or unless
otherwise indicated in the Contract.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 27 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.1 – DEMOLITION

SEPARATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Where it is difficult to separate hazardous materials for disposal,
e.g. fire affected hazardous materials, all combined materials must be disposed of as if classified hazardous. Refer
to Department of Environment and Conservation (NSW) for further direction where uncertain.

ASBESTOS DECONTAMINATION: Refer to Legislative and Policy Conditions, Occupational Health and Safety
Management - Asbestos

Requirement
Where the Contractor is responsible for asbestos decontamination work, including stripping, encapsulation or
removal, comply with and carryout all work in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements, standards,
codes and guidelines, including but not limited to the requirements of the following, where applicable;
x Occupation Health & Safety Act 2000
x Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 2001
x Work Cover requirements
x Work Safe Australia – Asbestos: Code of Practice and Guideline Notes
x Environmentally Hazardous Chemical Act 1985
x Waste Avoidance & Resources Recovery Act 2001

Where registration or a licence for asbestos decontamination work are required, submit a copy of the current
licence or registration certificate.

Notification
Notify the local office of Work Cover and the Principal’s Representative of the intention to commence any asbestos
decontamination not less than seven (7) days prior to such work commencing.

Work Method
In addition to any other occupational health and safety management provision in the Contract, provide also the
following details of the proposed work:
x description of the work to be done, proposed methods and work area;
x description and location of the decontamination units and changing areas;
x location of drains to be used and type of liquid waste filters;
x type of respirators or air hoods;
x description of what will take place if an asbestos fibre leak occurs, and
x what emergency plans including communication will be in place.

Notwithstanding and other provisions in the Contract, submit a program and management plan (integrated with the
Environmental Management Plan, OH&S Management Plan(s) and Safe Work Method Statements), which outline
how the requirements of this Clause Asbestos Contamination will be met.

Monitoring:
The principal may engage an independent contractor to provide dust and other required monitoring by an
independent testing authority on each day during contamination and on completion of decontamination in each area
where decontamination occurred, provide a Clearance Certificate to the Principal’s Representative.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 28 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.1 – DEMOLITION

4. DEMOLITION WORK

STANDARD: To AS2601:
x Demolish buildings and structures, where ordered, down to existing finished ground level. Do not
remove support to adjacent property.
x Remove and dispose of old foundations, floor slabs and paths and remove.
x Remove and dispose of old drains, manholes, services and remove and cap all drains to local council
requirements.
x Remove and dispose of old tanks and underground structures and remove.
x On completion of removal and back filling of trenches etc, all backfilled material must be compacted.

TEMPORARY SUPPORT: Provide temporary supports for sections of existing buildings that are to be altered.

ADJACENT STRUCTURES: Provide supports to adjacent structures, where necessary, to prevent damage
resulting from the works.

REINSTATE AND MAKE GOOD any damage, resulting from the demolition, to property, existing work or services
and adjoining property or structures at no cost to the Principal.

5. COMPLETION

ON COMPLETION: Leave site clear of all rubble and materials resulting from demolition work.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 29 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.2 – REINSTATEMENT OF FIRE DAMAGED PROPERTY

Section 3.2

REINSTATEMENT OF FIRE
DAMAGED PROPERTY

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 30 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.2 – REINSTATEMENT OF FIRE DAMAGED PROPERTY

1. GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORKS: This section sets out specific requirements related to the reinstatement of fire damaged
property. Any additional work discovered in the course of demolition, reconstruction and cleaning as a result of fire,
heat, water, smoke or other by-product of the fire shall be notified to the Principal’s Representative. Failure to do so
may make a claim for variations invalid.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer to sections

x Section 3.1. - Demolition
x Section 3.4 – Roofing
x Section 4 – Electrical Works
x Sections 6 - Painting
x Section 9 - Timber Schedule and Drawing Details
x Section 10 - Component Schedule, and any other section where appropriate.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and in accordance with all
the relevant Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended and where appropriate in
accordance with the other Sections of this document.

MAINS POWER SUPPLY: The disconnection and re-connection of the mains power must be undertaken by the
local energy authority or suitable licensed and qualified electrician. Prior to disconnection and re-connection of the
mains power approval by the local energy authority must be obtained.

FIXED APLIANCES: The disconnection and re-connection of fixed appliances must be undertaken by a suitable
licensed and qualified tradesperson ie: electrician or plumber.

WEATHER PROTECTIONS AND SECURITY: The Contractor must take all necessary precautions to protect the
building from the effects of weather or lack of security through the damaged portions. Any further damage arising
from a lack of protection from weather or lack of security shall be made good at no cost to the Principal.

PROTECTION OF UNDAMAGED ITEMS: Protect and screen all areas and objects undamaged by the fire from
possible damage resulting from the reinstatement process.

2. MATERIALS AND DETAILS

REPLACEMENT OF MATERIAL: For general purposes new materials and details are to match existing except:
x Where asbestos or lead based paints are encountered, or
x Otherwise required to conform to the Building Code of Australia, any relevant Australian Standard or
Government Regulations

Where the material is no longer available recycled material is acceptable subject to inspection and approval by the
Principal’s Representative. Replacement material must, however, comply with the performance requirements of the
specified material.

MATERIAL/ROOFING CONTAINING ASBESTOS: Patching of existing asbestos cement sheets is not permitted.
Replace with alternative roofing material in whole sheets. The extent of roofing removal and replacement due to the

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 31 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.2 – REINSTATEMENT OF FIRE DAMAGED PROPERTY

effects of fire is to be agreed with the Principal’s Representative prior to commencement of work and all work
carried out in accordance Section 3.1.3 Asbestos Decontamination.

CHARRED TIMBER: All charred timber shall be removed and replaced with new timber. Where any timber is
smoke stained it may be retained, but it must be deodorised and later covered by either sheet materials or paint.

EXISTING DEFECTIVE MATERIALS: Where existing defective materials or fittings are encountered in the course
of reinstatement the Contractor shall notify the Principal’s Representative immediately in order that instructions can
be issued for repairs. No such repair work shall be undertaken without approval.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 32 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.3 – CLEANING

Section 3.3

CLEANING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 33 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.3 – CLEANING

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the cleaning of the interior and exterior of dwellings, and steam and/or dry cleaning
of carpets.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS/NZS 3733 Textile floor coverings – Cleaning maintenance of residential and commercial carpeting,
and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines..

2. MATERIALS

GENERAL: All material solutions and preparation shall be appropriate for their intended use. Where the
specification calls for a “suitable cleansing agent” the agent shall contain Sodium Hypochlorite. Dilution is to be as
per manufacturers instruction all cleaning materials shall be accepted industry standard products.

3. INTERNAL CLEANING

RUBBISH: All rubbish inside and/or under the dwelling, on all balconies, and in the roof area and/or on the roof of
the dwellings, and, where directed, blinds and curtains are to be removed from the Site.

WALLS, CEILINGS FITTINGS, FIXTURES AND WOODWORK: All to be thoroughly dusted and wiped clean. Wall
tiles to be thoroughly washed down with a suitable cleansing agent and left to dry. Wall and ceiling vents to be
thoroughly cleaned and dusted. Remove marks from walls, ceilings, fittings, fixtures and woodwork using a suitable
cleaning material for surface materials.

FLOORS: Including front and rear porches, to be thoroughly swept and washed clean and wiped dry. All
extraneous tacks, nails, staples, etc, are to be removed.

FLOORS: Thoroughly wash down floors using a suitable cleaning agent to provide grease, dust free surface.
Remove all stains.

FLOOR COVERINGS: Vinyl and/or linoleum are to be mopped over with a suitable cleansing agent and left to air-
dry.

CERAMIC FLOOR TILES: Ceramic floor tiles are to be thoroughly washed with a suitable cleansing agent and left
to air-dry.

CARPETS: Carpets are to be spot cleaned of minor stains and thoroughly vacuumed using commercial quality
plant.

WINDOWS and DOORS: Doors and Glass to be cleaned inside and outside, and internal woodwork including sills
to be washed and wiped dry. Window and door frames and/or surrounds to be washed clean with warm soapy
water and wiped dry. Spot clean with a non-abrasive liquid cleanser where necessary.

MOULD: All mould covered surfaces shall be cleaned using a solution of mould inhibiting product.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 34 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.3 – CLEANING

APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS:

x STOVE - To be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out, including removable parts - burners, frets,
hotplates, oven slides and other fittings that are to be removed, cleaned and replaced. Exterior
surfaces and removable parts to be cleaned with a suitable cleansing agent.
x BATH, BASIN, SINK, TUBS AND PEDESTAL PAN - To be thoroughly cleaned with a suitable
cleansing agent. Where sanitary or other fittings have seriously soiled surfaces, after cleaning,
disinfect and wash clean of all residues.
x CUPBOARDS AND CABINETS - To be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside, washed with a
suitable cleansing agent and left to dry. Inside of meter boxes to be cleared of rubbish and dirt.
x KITCHEN BENCH TOPS AND SPLASH TILES - To be washed with a suitable cleansing agent and
left to dry.
x FLYSCREENS - Where fitted, to be washed clean.
x BLINDS - Where fitted, to be thoroughly cleaned and dusted
x WARDROBES / CLOSETS etc - To be swept and washed out with disinfectant
x GREASE TRAP - To be emptied and scrubbed out.
x RANGEHOODS – Filters to be removed and cleaned and reinstalled. Unit to be thoroughly washed
and all grease removed.
x EXHAUST FAN – Grille to be removed and cleaned, blades to be cleaned and grille re-installed.
x LIGHT SWITCHES AND GPO’s - to be dusted and thoroughly cleaned.
NOTE: The need for cleaning of grease traps is confined to un-sewered areas.

LIFT AND REMOVE FLOOR COVERINGS: All floor coverings required to be replaced, underlays and fixings (such
as battens, tacks, nails, and staples) are to be lifted, as directed and removed from Site. Room to be swept on
completion.

CARPET CLEANING: When required, soiled carpets are to be cleaned using one of the following carpets cleaning
methods and in accordance with AS/NZS 3733

HOT WATER INJECTION AND EXTRACTION METHOD:

Before commencing any hot water injection and extraction cleaning, the carpet is to be made ready as follows:
x All litter and loose surface soils are to be removed by vacuuming.
x Where necessary pile lift the carpet thoroughly.
x Remove all marks by applying the appropriate spot or stain remover. Rinse and remove excess
chemicals.
x Apply a pre-spray to the whole of the area to be cleaned ensuring sufficient levels are applied to
heavily soiled traffic areas. To achieve the best results pre-spray should be brushed into the pile by
means of a stiff broom or carpet rake and left for the period of time recommended by the
manufacturer.
x The hot water injection and extraction unit is to be filled with water, heated (500C to 950C) and
depending on the type and degree of soiling add detergent, sanitising solution or deodorant as
required.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 35 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.3 – CLEANING

OR,
SURFACE (DRY) CLEANING METHOD:
Before commencing dry cleaning the carpet is to be made ready as follows:
x All litter and loose surface soils are to be removed by vacuuming.
x Remove all marks by applying the appropriate spot or stain remover. Rinse and remove excess
chemicals.
x Apply a pre-spray to small areas at a time, approximately 2m x 2m, clean the area and move to the
next area and repeat the process. To achieve the best results pre-spray should be applied in
accordance manufacturers written specification.
x Deodorise carpets once cleaned.

The contractor is to ensure any damage and/or markings caused during the cleaning process to walls or any other
surface is rectified.

4. EXTERNAL CLEANING - HOUSES, UNITS AND TOWN HOUSES:

All rubbish in the grounds of, under and on the dwelling (including tree and shrub loppings and garden refuse) and
in meter boxes is to be removed from the Site. Grease traps to houses to be cleaned.

Carports, garages, tool sheds and store sheds are to have rubbish removed, floors swept and thoroughly washed
with degreasing agent, internally and externally, as directed.

NOTE: The use of hoses for internal cleaning including washing down is NOT permitted.

EXTERNAL WASH DOWN: If required, washing is to be with detergent and water. Completely wash down with soft
brush entire exterior of walls and soffits including glazing. After washing, thoroughly rinse off with clean water and
allow to dry naturally.

5. ADDITIONAL INTERNAL CLEANING

SEALING AND POLISHING: Vinyl flooring is to be cleaned to manufacturers specified requirements.

6. ADDITIONAL EXTERNAL CLEANING

MOWING: Front and rear lawns, including nature strips, are to be mowed to a neat even finish - a maximum height
above ground level of 25mm. Lawn edges where abutting buildings, footpaths, drive tracks, meters, downpipes,
letterboxes, fences, slabs, street gutters, etc. are to be neatly trimmed. All grass clippings are to be removed from
the Site.

CUTTING LONG GRASS: To slash/cut grass to front and rear lawns, including nature strips that have reached a
height of 300mm or more

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 36 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.3 – CLEANING

7. COMPLETION

ON COMPLETION: Take away from Site all waste and unused materials. Leave all internal doors open while
Contractor is on Site, including cupboard doors to allow all surfaces to dry naturally.

ALL SURFACES: Shall be left thoroughly clean and free of stains and cleaning compound residues. All cleaning is
to be carried out with clean brooms, mops, cloths etc., and with a liberal use of a suitable cleansing agent (see
above), detergent, deodorant or domestic cleaner where appropriate or as directed.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 37 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.4 – ROOFING

Section 3.4

ROOFING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 38 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.4 – ROOFING

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the complete re-roofing and/or repair of existing sheet and tile roofing applied to
different types of existing roofs, along with all necessary accessories to make a watertight roof.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer to sections:

x Section 2: Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Work.
x Section 3.1: Demolition – Asbestos Decontamination.
x Section 4: Electrical Works
x Section 5: Plumbing Works
x Section 9: Timber Schedule and Drawing Detail
x Section 10: Component Schedule, and any other section where appropriate.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS 1684.1: Residential timber-frames construction.
x AS/NZS 1170.0: Structural design actions.
x AS 1720.1: Timber structures Part 1 Design methods.
x AS 1170. 0: Structural Design action – General Principals.
x AS 1562.1: Design & installation of sheet roof and wall cladding. AS 2049 : Roof tiles.
x AS 2050: Installation of roof tiles.
x AS/NZS 4200.1: Pliable building membranes and underlay (sarking).
and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines. as amended.

2. MATERIALS

GENERAL: The supply of roof tiles and roof sheeting and associated accessories in accordance with the required
standards and Section 10 - Component Schedule. Where no listing found notify the Principal's Representative with
report and recommendation and details of Manufacturers warranties.

REPAIRS TO CONCRETE OR TERRACOTTA TILE ROOF: By replacing with new tiles to match existing or if
necessary, where new components are unavailable, recycled tiles of matching pattern and colour are to be of a
minimum standard equal to the remainder of the roof.

3. WORKMANSHIP

INVESTIGATE ROOF LEAKS: Locate roof leak and repair. Where repairs would be extensive, precluding an
immediate repair, report back to the Principal’s Representative on condition and extent of repairs required. On
approval by the Principal’s Representative, provide temporary repair (fit tarpaulin). Provide a written report along.

REPLACE ROOFING SHEETS AND FIX NEW SHEETS: Use a fastening system recommended by the
manufacturer of the specified profiled metal roofing making due allowance for dynamic local wind pressures on the
building and thermal movement in the sheet.

SET OUT: Set out the planned layout before fixing commences to ensure true lines, correct relationship to module,
grid and roof features.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 39 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.4 – ROOFING

SEALANT: Use a neutral curing silicone or synthetic rubber based paintable sealant recommended by the roofing
manufacturer.

CLOSURE STRIPS: Provide Bituminous compressible foam strips to fit profiled sheets where required.

PROFILED METAL ROOFING: Fold ends and seal cut edges all to manufacturers written specification.

METAL SEPARATION: Prevent direct contact between incompatible roofing systems, fixings and other products.
Note, Zincalume sheets can be used as replacement sheets for damaged galvanised sheets as a galvanised steel
roof. Follow manufacturers written specification.

SHEET METAL ROOFING: Supply and fix complete with all matching accessories, flashed to all roof features and
penetrations and all to manufacturers written specification. Form stop-ends and downturns as necessary to aid in
flashing. Provide foil faced insulation blanket - 50mm thick.

BATTENS: Fix to roofing manufacturers written specification and with all joints fully supported and staggered.

INSULATION: Insulate Roof space with Sarking and Batts to comply with BASIX optimum rating for the appropriate
climate zone.

NEW SHEETS: Fix in place using the fastening system recommended by the manufacturer of the specified profiled
metal roofing making due allowance for dynamic local wind pressures or earthquake loadings on the building and
thermal movement in the sheet.

ROOF FLASHINGS: Fix to verges, ridges, hips, walls and penetrations where required to match manufacturers
written specification to make the building completely watertight. Co-operate with the plumber for flashing
penetrations related to plumbing work.

VERMIN PROOFING: The roof, wall, down pipes and vents shall be completely bird and vermin proof. Provide and
fix all materials required for this purpose.

VALLEY (PROFILED METAL ROOFING): Machine cut sheet to a neat clear line leaving a minimum gap of 100mm.
Form and fix bird proofing to valley battens. Fix all cut sheets.

WIND AND EARTHQUAKE LOADINGS: Use fixings and methods that will be capable of sustaining the loads
appropriate to the area.

CONCRETE / TERRACOTTA TILES: Fixed to manufacturers written specification, flashed to all roof features and
penetrations, fitted with anti-ponding boards all to manufacturers written specification.

FIXING CONCRETE TILES ~ RIDGE: Fix ridge tiles to manufacturers written specification.

CONCRETE TILES TO RIDGES AND HIPS: Support and bed edges and joints of ridge and hip tiles in mortar or
‘Flexi-point’ to manufacturers written specification.

VALLEY (CONCRETE TILES): Machine cut tiles to neat clean line leaving a minimum gap of 100mm. Form and fix
bird proofing to valley battens. Fix all cut tiles.

VERGE (CONCRETE TILES): Fix gable end barge tiles to manufacturers written specification.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 40 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.4 – ROOFING

GUTTER GUARD: Gutter Guards are to be zincalume, factory pre-painted Colorbond (colour to match guttering).
Gutter Guard is to be securely fixed underneath the roof and to the gutter.

4. COMPLETION

This work shall be completed with all necessary flashings, valleys, ridges and hips all properly installed as the work
proceeds so that the finished roof is completely weather-tight.

Remove all trade rubbish and unused materials from the roof and surrounds regularly during the work as well as at
completion. Sweep down the completed roof and clean out all guttering and rainwater pipes. Remove all trade
waste from Site.

Warranties
Submit details of all manufacturers warranties to the Principal’s Representative.

Maintenance Manual
On completion of a complete re-roofing submit a manual of recommendations from the roof manufacturer or
supplier for the maintenance of the roofing system including, frequency of inspection and recommended methods of
access, inspection. Cleaning, repair and replacement.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 41 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.5 – CONCRETE WORKS

Section 3.5

CONCRETE WORKS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 42 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.5 – CONCRETE WORKS

GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the demolition / removal of existing concrete, excavation, filling, base preparation,
reinforcement and for the supply and laying of concrete.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer to sections:

x Section 2: Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Work
x Section 3.1: Demolition
x Section 3.6: Metalworker

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS 2870: Residential Slabs And Footings - Construction
x AS 3727: Guide To Residential Pavements
x AS 3600: Concrete structures
x AS 3799: Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete
x The Building Code of Australia.
and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines..

WEAK SUB-GRADE: Where there is excessive settlement in the existing surface or there are soft ground
conditions the Contractor shall advise the Principal’s Representative, and continue only as directed.

SOIL AND WATER MANAGEMENT: Refer to the Legislative and Policy Conditions – Environmental Management
clause.

DRAINAGE: The Contractor shall ensure prior to commencing work that the proposed surface levels and grades
shall drain all surface water to a suitable storm water drainage system.

DEFINE BOUNDARIES: The Contractor is to ensure that the completed work lies within the defined boundaries of
the particular property.

INSPECTIONS: Do not place concrete until all excavations, boxing and reinforcing have been inspected and
passed by the Principal’s Representative.

2. MATERIALS

Concrete may be either ready mixed or mixed on Site, as specified hereunder and at no variation to the Contract for
either type chosen.

CONCRETE MIX:
Water: Clean, free from oil, salt, acid, alkali or other deleterious substances.
Sand: To be clean, sharp and free from salt or other impurities.
Cement: Cement must be fresh and taken from unopened bags. Cement stored on Site to be adequately protected
from moisture.
Coarse Aggregate:To be clean, hard tough and durable crushed stone and/or gravel, free from elongated pieces,
dust clay or other deleterious matter.

SITE MIXED CONCRETE: Accurately measure all materials forming concrete using suitable gauge boxes. Mix in a
suitable power mixer with the addition of sufficient water to ensure workability of concrete. Upon leaving mixer,

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 43 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.5 – CONCRETE WORKS

slump must be not less than 50mm or more than 100mm using a standard cone. Make slump tests when directed
by the Principal’s Representative. Add no water to concrete after leaving mixer. Mix concrete in the proportions of -
x 4 parts of 20mm gauge, coarse aggregate.
x 2 parts sand.
x 1 part cement.

READY MIXED CONCRETE: The Company supplying ready mixed concrete may be required to submit statistical
evidence of quality control measures adopted to ensure the supply of concrete conforming to specified
requirements.

STRENGTH: Order ready mixed concrete by stating following:-

(a) Average strength of concrete 20 MPa at 28 days.
(b) Slump 75mm (plus or minus 12mm).
(c) Maximum size of aggregate 20mm.

3. CLEARANCE / EXCAVATIONS / FILLING

PREPARATION: Site Preparation. Remove all turf, vegetation, trees, topsoil, stumps and rubbish from the area to
be built on.

4. EXCAVATION

GENERAL EXCAVATION: Trim ground to required profiles, batters, falls and levels. Remove all loose material.
Protect all cut faces from collapse. Keep all excavations free from water. General excavation is assumed to be in
material other than rock.

ROCK: If rock is encountered during excavations, contractor must advise the Principal’s Representative for
direction.

FILLING: Provide and thoroughly consolidate suitable filling (75mm thick road base where required under
reinforced concrete driveways) where directed within the area to be paved. Compact fill with mechanical plate
compactor to the satisfaction of the Principal’s Representative.

5. CONCRETE PAVEMENT

WORKMANSHIP: Lay and finish paving generally as specified in alternative bays not exceeding 20m² in area and
75 to 150mm thick as specified.

FORMWORK: To be securely fixed and braced, have sufficient strength to support all loads and with joints and
linings tight enough to prevent loss of water. Curves are to be smooth in appearance. Hose out to clean thoroughly
and keep wet before and after concrete is placed.

CONTROL JOINTS: Control joints to be provided as specified in AS3727, Table 2

REINFORCEMENT: Reinforce slabs with reinforcing mesh, free from rust or any coating. Place reinforcement
centrally in the slab and support on suitable saddles.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 44 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.5 – CONCRETE WORKS

FINISH TO CONCRETE: Generally provide a non-slip finish (broom or as directed) to surfaces with use of a
smooth edging tool to joints and edges as per standard practices.

6. CONCRETE PATHS AND DRIVEWAYS

Lay between properly supported forms, in bays, 75mm thick paths, 100mm thick wheel tracks, and 150mm thick
Driveways. Provide 10mm thick bituminous expansion strips between every third bay to full depth of concrete.

Finish concrete as laid with a mixture of 2:1 sand and cement, sifted on and trowelled or broomed to a non-slip
finish. Run clean tooled joint at all junctions of slabs. Round off all outer free edges with a suitable edging tool.

PATH / WHEEL TRACK / DRIVEWAY REPAIRS: Cut back broken paving to solid edge. Break up and remove
broken sections of concrete from Site. Supply and lay 75mm, 100mm, or 150mm thick concrete (broom finish).

7. CONCRETE RAMPS

MASS CONCRETE RAMPS: Form up and pour mass concrete ramp to a maximum rise of 450mm, gradient not to
exceed 1:20. Ramp to be 1200mm wide (min) and finished to a non-slip finish.

BRICK AND CONCRETE RAMPS: Where the rise of a ramp exceeds 450mm, ramps are to be formed up and
poured on 300 x 250mm (min) footing and 110mm brickwork and finished to non-slip finish. Ramp to be 1200mm
wide (min) with the gradient not exceeding 1:20. Refer to Minor Repair Work Section for laying of brickwork.

HANDRAILS TO RAMP: Refer to Section 3.6 Metalworker for provision of handrails.

8. CURING OF CONCRETE

Protect fresh concrete from premature drying and extremes of temperature. Use suitable methods to limit
evaporative drying and keep damp for not less than seven days. Ensure curing of slabs commences as soon as
possible after final finishing by immediately covering the concrete with an impervious membrane, or Hessian kept
wet, until curing begins or the application of a curing membrane. Make sure any membrane used will not affect
subsequent applied finishes.

9. CONCRETE LAY BACKS

Concrete laybacks shall be constructed to meet the requirements and approval of the Local Authority. Work
includes all Local Authority fees and charges including tipping fees as required.

10. VEHICLE CROSSOVERS

Vehicle crossings shall be constructed to meet the requirements and approval of the Local Authority. Work includes
tipping fees as required.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 45 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.5 – CONCRETE WORKS

11. TOP SOIL, GRASS SEEDS AND/OR TURF

Top dressing soil, grass seeds for sowing and/or turf are to be of similar type to surrounding grasses.

12. COMPLETION

REINSTATEMENT: The whole of the Site shall be reinstated to its original condition as existing prior to the Works.

All excavated surplus soil is to be removed from the Site, with clean topsoil to be supplied, rolled and sowed with
grass seeds or turf to finish level with top of concrete. All broken and surplus concrete is to be removed from the
Site. Clear away all trade rubbish and remove from Site. Work includes all tipping fees as required.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 46 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.6 – METALWORKER

Section 3.6

METALWORKER

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 47 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.6 – METALWORKER

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the supply / repair and installation of grab rails, handrails, steel support posts,
wrought iron railings, meter / foundation doors, garage doors, heavy duty grills, bollards, meter / downpipe
guards, mobile bins, steps and landings.

Handrails must comply with all relevant standards and codes. The Drawing Numbers MR1, MR2, MR3, MW1,
MW2, MW 3, MW4 and MW5 are a guide only and must not be used for construction purposes. Complete these
drawings for required construction and provide these as built drawings certified for structural adequacy to the
Principal.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to sections:-

x Section 2 – Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Work.
x Section 3.5 - Concrete Works.
x Section 9 - Timber Schedule and Drawing Details.
x Section 10 - Component Schedule.

Carried out the work in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and particularly the following:-
x AS 1074 Steel tubes and tubulars for ordinary service
x AS/NZS 1554 .1: Structural steel welding
x AS 1428.2: & AS 1428.1: Design for access and mobility
x AS/NZS 4586 - Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials
x CSIRO SR1.2002 – Surface
x The Building Code of Australia
x All other relevant Acts, codes of practice, standards and guidelines.

2. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

GENERAL: All materials used, unless otherwise specified, must be the best of their respective kinds. Carry out
all works specified and in accordance with best trade practice. Keep all members true, free from twist and
other distortion. Drill all holes. Form any bends in tubes without deforming the true cross-section.

GALVANISING: Applied galvanising by the hot dip process. Ensure minimal drilling, tapping, cutting or welding
is undertaken after galvanising.

Ensure each surface after galvanising carries an unbroken covering of zinc, uniform in thickness with a coating
weight of at least 500 g/m2 for steel over 5mm thick and at least 450 g/m2 for steel between 1mm and 5mm
thick.

GARAGE DOORS: Refer to Section 10, Component Schedule, for the requirements. Provide single panel lift
or rolling shutter types.

MOBILE BINS: Repair and replace mobile bins in accordance with the requirements of the local authority
relevant to location of dwelling.

HAND AND GRABRAILS: Refer Drawings for details.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 48 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.6 – METALWORKER

LANDINGS WITH STEPS AND HANDRAILS: Construct these of precast concrete and galvanised steel, all of
suitable manufacture. Where site welding is necessary, prime all welded joints with suitable rust inhibiting
paint, equal to "Zincillate" or "Galvafroid". Refer to BCA Table D2.13 Riser and Going Dimensions.

STAIR STRINGERS AND LANDING BEARERS: Provide 100mm deep x 50mm wide M.S. tube OR 71mm
deep x 51mm wide x 6.5mm M.S. angle.

STEP BRACKETS: Provide 51mm x 5mm M.S. flat bar OR 51mm x 51mm x 6.5mm M.S. angle welded to
51mm face of angle.

FIXING BRACKETS: Provide 63mm x 6.5mm bent down where practicable, drilled for fixing. Where down
fixing is not practicable, fixing brackets may be turned up.

RISE: Provide 170mm nominally rise from top of tread to top of tread equalised in each case with 180mm
maximum and 160mm minimum. Where not more than three steps are required, the minimum rise may be
reduced to 150mm.

STEP TREAD: Provide 900mm x 260mm x 50mm thick, non-slip surface, reinforce with F8TH trench mesh, fix
each end with one 63mm x 5mm cadmium plated cup head bolt, nut and washer.

LANDING TREADS: As for step treads, but 535mm wide fixed each end with two (2) bolts, OR full size of
landing, supported on inverted angles and unbolted.

TIE BARS TO LANDINGS: Provide two (2) 25mm x 5mm galvanised bolts to bearers.

BASE FOR STRINGER AND STANDARDS: Provide 300mm x 300mm x 150mm thick precast concrete
footings each having 25mm galvanised pipe dowel cast in to extend 75mm above the top of footing.

LANDING STANDARDS: Provide 50mm dia. galvanised pipe, bolted to bearers at top.

NEWEL AND HANDRAILS: Provide 35mm dia. galvanised pipe newels and 50mm handrail/top rail, and weld
all joints. Provide galvanised fixing lugs and angles - where fixing to timber walls provide fillet welded angle
frame between rails and coach screw fixing. Provide intermediate standards at less than 1200mm centres, and
top handrail 1000mm above the landing or step tread.

FIXING BOLTS: Provide cadmium plated, galvanised, brass and stainless steel bolts complete with nuts and
washers to suit location and application.

FREE STANDING STARTER POST: Provide formed by the bending of the top handrail in a continuous curve
until the post vertical position is at 90° to the tread surface.

GALVANISING: Hot dip galvanise all fabrications, except handrails, newels and standards.

ERECTION: Keep standards plumb and other sections level where applicable. Secure turned down landing fixing
brackets to brickwork; with two (2) 10mm diameter masonry bolts. Where fixing to brickwork is not practicable,
secure turned up landing fixing brackets to the edge of concrete slabs with bolts as above. Provide additional
centre standard to stringers when more than eight (8) treads are required.

Provide additional bracing where the landing height exceeds 1830mm.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 49 of 214
 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.6 – METALWORKER

WELDING: To AS/NZS 1554.1.

CONCRETING OF POSTS: Refer to Section 3.5, Concrete Works, for mixing on site concrete. Posts to be set in a
minimum 250mm dia x 600mm deep concrete footing.

FOUNDATION DOOR AND FRAME: The frame to be constructed 75mm x 50mm x 5mm hot dipped galvanised
and the steel door from 40mm x 40mm x 5mm hot dipped galvanised steel. The door mesh to be equal to Expamet
WK 25-17 Grade. Doors to be fitted with 2 x 15mm solid hinges, 100mm long door latch to be made from 40mm x
6mm flat bar, 100mm long with a slot 12mm wide x 60mm long to slip over lug on frame to allow locking of door
with padlock.

GAS METER DOOR AND FRAME: The door and frame to be constructed from 50mm x 50mm x 3mm angle iron,
door mesh to be equal to Expamet WK 25-17 Grade. Door to be fitted with 2 x 15mm solid hinges, 100mm long
door latch to be made from 40mm x 6mm flat bar, 100mm long with a slot 12mm wide x 60mm long to slip over lug
on frame to allow locking of door with padlock.

DOWN PIPE GUARD: Fabricate a galvanised metal guard to base of downpipe. Guards to be fabricated from 3mm
galvanised sheet and folded to wrap around existing downpipes with a min 20mm clearance. Fixed to brickwork -
minimum 6 fixings, to a minimum height of 1300mm from ground level.

STEEL TUBE BOLLARDS: Fabric from heavy steel tube, to a minimum nominal size DN100 to AS 1074. Seal both
ends with fabricated end caps, spot-welded and ground smooth.
Finish: Galvanise after fabrication.
Footings: Encase in a concrete footing at least 600mm deep x 250mm diameter.
On slabs: Weld on 10mm thick base plate drilled for 4 bolts, and bolt with masonry anchors.
Base plate to be minimum 50mm clear around the bollard, with fixings in corners.

RAMPS: All steel and metal accessories indicated on Drawings MR01 to MR03 are to be hot dipped galvanised as
specified.

RAMP PANELS: CFC panels as shown on Drawings MR01, MR02 and MR03. The surface to be thoroughly
cleaned and prepared for treatment as per manufacturer’s specification. Apply an anti-slip surface coating
compliant to AS/NZS 4586 - Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials and CSIRO
SR1.2002 – Surface

3. COMPLETION

Clear and remove from the site all rubble and surplus materials resulting from the work.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 50 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

Section 3.7

TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 51 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

1. GENERAL
SCOPE: This section deals with the supply and erection of new fences and gates including hardware. Refer to the
Work Order for the extent of the work to be carried out.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to sections: -

x Section 2 – Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Works
x Section 3.5 - Concrete Works
x Section 9 - Timber Schedule and Drawing Details
x Section 10 - Component Schedule

GENERALLY: New fencing on existing boundary lines, unless otherwise directed.

A variation will be directed where clearing of the fencing line requires the removal of building materials, rubbish,
garden refuse, sheds or other structures, or heavy growth of vines on that line. All fencing work includes the cost to
clear the fence line of other minor growth and to exercise all reasonable precautions to protect shrubbery, plants
and other property and prevent damage to property with fencing operations.

ADJOINING RAIL CORP or RTA PROPERTY: Where replacement of fencing is required for a property adjoining
land owned by RailCorp (rail infrastructure) or RTA (Arterial Roads) the following action is be required:

x Where directed and there is existing fence to be replaced between the Rail line / Arterial Road, the
contractor is to erect a temporary 2100mm chain wire security fence, Type 1-A Railess Security
Fence Plain Top with 2.5mm light duty mesh to prevent public or animal access to RailCorp/RTA
property during replacement works and the removal of the security fence at completion of the work.
x Where there is NO existing fencing the contractor is to advise the Principal’s Representative
immediately prior to any work commencing, as this work must be done under the Dividing Fences Act.

Fences and gates must comply with the requirements of Drawing Numbers MF1 to MF 6 inclusive.

POSITION OF 'CUT-OFF' FENCING: Unless otherwise directed, position gates and "cut-off" fencing from front of
cottage to the existing dividing fence on either side of a cottage. Locate of cut-off fences so that gas, electricity and
water meters are on the street side of the fences.

Where the existing meter board is positioned on the side of the cottage keep cut-off fence to the rear of the meter
board.

Where gas bottles are located on "off-drive" side of the cottage, provide a single gate for access to the gas bottles
and keep the fence forward of the gas bottles.

Position cut-off fencing and gates on full curtain walls, wherever possible and not on piers.

Generally take fencing square off the cottage to the boundary fence line, and where applicable return it along return
fence lines to paling or metal clad fence.

Keep fencing and gates (closed) in a straight line square off existing fences and the building when these are
parallel. Where they are not parallel, position gates at 90o to paving to give maximum effective width to the gate
opening and centrally positioned gates over drive tracks. Provide nominal width openings for gates of 900mm for
single gates and 2750mm to 3000mm for double gates. Construct double gates in two equal leaves. Set them into

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 52 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

the double gate opening, and concrete in position, using a 20mm diameter G.I. pipe 150mm long as a keeper for a
drop bolt in both closed and open positions. Should the bolts not reach the hold open in ground keepers provide
gal. parrot-beak type holding device fixed either to a wall or a new gal. posts.

Provide new posts at either end of the "cut-off" fencing. Fixing of panels to existing timber fences or brickwork will
not be accepted, it is necessary to use a small panel of 150mm width or less, to complete a section of fencing.

In such cases where a small panel of 150mm width or less is used, securely fix the panel with loxins or similar to
brickwork, or screw fixed the panel to timber fence posts. Otherwise terminate fences adjoining buildings 25mm
clear of wall cladding.

PRIVATE OWNER FENCING: NO EXTRA WORK may be done on fencing jointly owned by the Principal and a
Private Owner, without prior approval in writing.

2. TIMBER FENCES

GENERAL: All timber must comply with the Timber Marketing Act. Refer to Section 9, Drawing No. TS1, Schedule
of Timber Species and Durability Ratings, for timber species, grade of timber and standard details.

HARDWOOD: Provide Eastern Australian hardwood to AS 2082, with posts and walings being minimum durability
Class 1 or 2.

PINE: Provide first quality radiata pine, pressure preservative treated and/or cypress pine. Where softwoods meet
minimum durability Class 1 or 2, preservative treatment is not required.

Coat all timber fencing posts, waling pieces, and the like with Type A creosote to 100mm above the finished ground
level. Creosote is not required where timber has been preservative treated to Hazard 4 or 5.

Where rock is encountered, sink posts to a depth of 375mm and surround with at least 100mm 4:2:1 concrete mix.

PALING FENCES: Comply with the standard details in Drawing Nos. MF1 to MF4 in Section 9.

SAWN HARDWOOD POSTS AND HARDWOOD RAILS: Provide angle, junction, gate and terminating posts
against front, return and cut-off fencing, and the like in 125mm x 125mm H.W. with corners cut off. Sink posts in the
ground to a minimum depth of 600mm and surround with at least 100mm 4:2:1 concrete mix.

Intermediate posts to be 125 x 50mm end section with corners cut off, spaced at a maximum of 2400mm centres,
sunk 600mm into ground. 600 x 150 x 25mm waling pieces to be fitted closely and vertically to faces of posts and
nailed to post not less than 75mm from top of waling piece.

Provide 75mm x 50mm H.W. rails morticed through posts, splay cut to fit under and over, breaking the joint on
alternate posts and well nailed.

GALVANISED POSTS AND HARDWOOD OR PRESERVATIVE TREATED PINE RAILS: Provide angle, junction,
gate, terminating posts in 75mm x 75mm x 2.5mm galvanised square section and intermediate posts in 50mm x
50mm x 2.5mm galvanised square section (capped). Set posts in 4:2:1 concrete mix, 200mm x 200mm x depth as
set out on Drawing No. MF4.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 53 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

Provide 75mm x 50mm H.W. or pine rails. Neatly fix three rows of rails for lapped and/or lapped and capped
fences, and two rows of rails for closed paling fences, with breaking joints on alternate posts, well spiked and
secured to each post with 10mm diameter galvanised bolt through 50mm x 50mm x 3mm galvanised washer fitted
under the nut and against the rail. Fix top rails 225mm below the top line of the fence for lapped or closed paling
fences, and 25mm below the top line for lapped and capped fences. Fix bottom rails 225mm above ground level.
Where fitted, centre the middle rail between the top and bottom rails.

PALINGS: Cut-off the corners of the tops of all palings. Keep the tops of palings to an even plane and finish
bottoms at ground level. Maximum tolerance is 50mm above ground level over no more than 1 metre in any one
panel of fencing.

Where directed, rake the panel adjoining return, cut-off or front fencing.

CLOSE PALINGS (HARDWOOD OR PRESERVATIVE TREATED PINE): Cover the rails with 100mm wide by
15mm thick (plus or minus 2mm) hardwood or preservatised pine palings, square cut to a line at top with corners
cut off and double nailed with 50 x 2.8mm galvanised flat head nails, slightly skew driven into each rail. Palings to
be a minimum 100mm wide and not more than 125mm wide.

PRESERVATIVE TREATED PINE POSTS AND RAILS: Provide angle, junction, gate and terminating posts in
minimum 125mm x 125mm pine. Sink posts in the ground to the depth set out in Drawing No. MF4, and surround
with at least 100mm 4:2:1 concrete mix.

Provide intermediate posts in a minimum 125mm x 75mm pine, spaced at a maximum of 2400mm centres, sunk
600mm into the ground. Fix 600mm x 150mm x 25mm waling pieces closely and vertically to faces of posts and nail
them to post not less than 75mm from the top of waling pieces.

Fix three rows of rails for lapped and/or lapped and capped fences, and two rows of rails for lapped (closed) fences,
in 75mm x 50mm pine housed or morticed through posts. Join rails with scarf joints, breaking joint on alternate
posts, with rails well spiked and secured to each post with 10mm diameter galvanised bolt through 50mm x 50mm x
3mm galvanised washer fitted under the nut and against the rail. Fix top rails 225mm below the top line of the fence
for lapped fences, and 25mm below the top line for lapped and capped fences. Fit bottom rails 225mm above
ground level. Where fitted, centre the middle rail between the top and bottom rails.

LAPPED PALINGS (HARDWOOD OR PRESERVATIVE TREATED PINE): Cover the rails with minimum 100mm
wide (not more than 125mm wide) by 15mm thick (plus or minus 2mm) hardwood or preservatised pine palings.
Space the first layer of palings 70mm apart to allow for a minimum lap of 15mm on each side, and double nail then
with 50mm x 2.8mm galvanised flat head nails, slightly skew driven into each rail. Double nail lapped palings
(second layer) with 65mm x 2.8mm galvanised flathead nails, driven into each rail, lapping first layer palings by
15mm each side.

Square cut palings to a line at the top and cut-off the corners.

LAPPED AND CAPPED PALINGS (HARDWOOD OR PRESERVATIVE TREATED PINE): As for lapped palings,
except the tops of palings are to protrude a maximum of 12mm above the top rail. Palings are not to be less than
100mm wide and not more than 125mm wide.

Fix a preservatised pine (TP) angled top capping board, 112mm x 38mm with 51mm x 12mm bottom rebate, to the
top rail with 65mm x 2.8mm galvanised bullet head nails at 300mm spacings.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 54 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

GATES: Comply with standard details on Drawing Nos. MF 5 and MF 6 in Section 9, match the fencing, and
provide complete with hinges and latching devices and drop bolt with double gates.

Provide nominal width openings for gates of 900mm for single gate and 2750mm (2700mm minimum to 3000mm
maximum) for double gates. Construct double gates in two equal leaves.

Set into double gate openings a 20mm diameter galvanised pipe 150mm long as a keeper for a drop bolt, and
concrete the pipe in position.

FOOTINGS: refer to Section 3.5.8

3. METAL FENCES

ROLL TOP GALVANISED/POWDER COATED WELD MESH FENCING: Construct steel mesh panelled fencing in
the positions shown on layout plans and to the specified heights.

Apply hot dip galvanise after fabrication is complete, and ensure no drilling, tapping or welding is undertaken after
galvanising.

Powder coat all parts, panels, posts, caps, clips and bolts, gates, hinges and catches after hot dip galvanising and
fabrication is complete, and ensure no drilling, tapping, raking or welding is undertaken after powder coating.

Provide 50mm O.D. x 2.9mm wall thickness galvanised pipe or 50mm x 50mm x 2.5mm galvanised steel square
section for intermediate posts. Provide single gateposts in 50mm O.D. x 2.9mm wall thickness galvanised pipe.
Provide double gateposts in 60.3mm O.D. x 2.9mm wall thickness galvanised pipe. All posts must be in accordance
with AS1450. Crimp posts approximately 200mm from bottom of the post and provide 1350mm long posts for
750mm high fences, 1500mm long posts for 900mm high fences and 1800mm long posts for 1200mm high fences.

Space posts generally to suit 2400mm panels, but where necessary to avoid unsightly short panels, space posts to
provide even panel lengths.

Sink posts into the ground and consolidate with minimum 230mm diameter x 500mm deep 4:2:1 mix concrete.
Where rock is encountered, sink posts into the ground 375mm and surround with 4:2:1 concrete mix.

Cap the top of each post with a "Knock on" type galvanised friction cap. Extend posts above the infill by the height
of the "Knock on" cap.

Infill between posts with roll top galvanised fencing panel 2.4m long x the specified heights with ground clearance
of approximately 80mm, with mesh panels made from 5mm diameter bright wire in accordance with AS1303, and
wires electrically welded to form 50mm x 150mm mesh, with vertical wires at 50mm centres and horizontal wires at
150mm centres.

Form wire mesh into a panel having a shape top and bottom with a bend at 90q to face for 50mm and then at
approximately 65q for either 75mm or 150mm to form an open triangle.

Fix panels to posts with 25mm x 25mm x 1.6mm galvanised "U" type clips, either drilled to receive and fixed with
8mm diameter hex head galvanised bolts passing through clip, post and clip of adjoining panels, or affixed with a
12 G self drilling screw. Provide 750mm and 900mm high panels with three fixing points at each end, and 1200mm
high panels with four fixing points at each end.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 55 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

Where mesh infill panels are specified in under floor areas, provide 100mm mesh overlap to face of brick piers and
curtain walls, and fix with 25mm x 25mm x 1.6mm galvanised "H" clips drilled to receive and with 8mm "Loxin" type
fixing.

At the junction with park rail fencing provide suitable "V Shaped Galvanised" brackets fixed to the pipe post and rail.

Generally, ensure fence panels and gates have a ground clearance of approximately 80mm. Where site levels
create unacceptable clearance under panels, use stepped or raked panels subject to the prior approval of the
Principal’s Representative.

Provide gate frames in 26.9mm O.D. pipe bent to provide suitable radius at corners. Clean off and match welds to
150mm x 50mm mesh properly welded to the frame.

Provide double gates with two equal leaves or one 1800mm and one 900mm leaf as directed, nominal opening size
of 2750mm (2700mm minimum to 3000mm maximum), with a bow type and drop bolt catch fitted on the side of
each gate, and provide 2 x 20mm diameter G.I. pipe keepers 150mm long for drop bolts, projecting as required and
concreted in position to secure the gates closed, and also provide 2 x 20mm diameter G.I. pipe keepers 150mm
long for drop bolts, projecting as required and concreted in position to secure the gates in the open position, as the
Site demands or as directed. If due to sloping ground level, hold open keeps are not appropriate, allow to install a
gal cabin hook or parrot beak type hold open device, attached to a new gal post in position as required.

Provide single gates to fit a nominal 900mm opening, with a "D" latch and striker catch.

SCREEN STEEL PANEL FENCING: Assemble and erect all fencing in accordance with the manufacturers written
specification.

SCREEN DETAILS: Provide:-

Sheeting: Double sided colour bond, thickness 0.40mm, width 760mm, with length 890 for 900mm high fence,
1490mm for 1500mm high fence and 1790mm for 1800mm high fence, and max. panel length
2360mm.

Post: Post length 1500mm for 900mm high fence, 2100mm for 1500mm high fence and 2400mm for
1800mm high fence, with zincalume or colour bond finish to match the sheeting and powder coating
where required.

Rails: Identical length and dimensions of top and bottom rails but the bottom rail is slotted to allow for the
drainage of water.

Fixing: All fixing or equivalent.

Colour: Colour as directed.

Provide all gates of a suitable manufacture that match existing fencing, with suitable hinge and latching devices,
and drop bolts for double gates. Ensure the minimum distance between closing stiles of double gates is 25mm.

Provide gateposts in 65mm x 65mm x 2.5mm galvabond steel rectangular hollow section, fitted with suitable
galvanised hinge plates and latching devices. Sink posts into the ground to a depth of 600mm and surround with

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 56 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

250mm diameter of 4:2:1 concrete. Where coloured posts are required, use powder coated finish to posts and
fittings.

Erect fence panels plumb and level and in straight lines from the starting point to the end of each run. On sloping
sites provide stepped panels where possible with a maximum ground clearance to bottom rail not exceeding 50mm,
and the bottom rail not in contact with the ground surface. Where the fall on the ground exceeds 150mm per
section install raked panels.

Provide tapered panels with tops raking from 1500mm high to 900mm where directed by the Principal’s
Representative, with rails and sheeting to suit the length of panel required.

Where a fence changes direction provide a matching metal fence post 65mm x 65mm x 2.5mm.

4. LOOPED POOL TYPE FENCING

PROFILE: Provide tubular looped top fencing.

DIMENSIONS: Panel height/width-

a) 900mm/ 2400m maximum
b) 1200mm/ 2400m maximum
SPACINGS: Distance between rails
a) 735mm
b) 1035mm
TUBE SPACINGS: For both a) & b) 100mm centres (approximately)
GATE WIDTH: Single 980mm, double 2750mm and 3000mm

MATERIALS:
INTERMEDIATE
POSTS: 50mm x 50mm x 1.6mm hollow section (galvanised)
GATEPOSTS: 65mm x 65mm x 2.5mm square hollow section (galvanised)
RAILS: 33mm x 33mm x 1.6mm Architectural Profile with domed top (galvanised)
OR
36mm x 25mm x 1.6mm rectangular section.(galvanised)
VERTICAL TUBES: 16mm DIA x 1.2mm (galvanised) looped to height of 115mm above top rail
WELDING: Silicone bronze
POWDER COATING: Use Four stage pre-treatment as per Taubmans/Ansol/Dulux data:-
a) Alkaline degreasing
b) Rinse
c) Zinc Phosphate
d) Rinse

Application thickness 70 - 110 microns, curing temp base material is to be heated to 200qc for 10 minutes.

CATCHES: "D" Latch and Striker

HINGES: Butt hinges caps: Black plastic (knock on type)
FIXING BRACKETS: "L" brackets
SCREWS: 12 x 20 Tek Screws or equivalent

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 57 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.7 – TIMBER AND METAL FENCING

Ensure all panels are a maximum of 100mm above ground level.

Concrete all posts into the ground to a depth of 500mm in holes 250mm x 250mm x 600mm deep.

Paint/coat all fixings the same colour as the fence.

5. COMPLETION:

On completion, remove all surplus materials and debris from the site and leave work areas and sites in a clean and
tidy condition.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 58 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.8 – TREE PRUNING / REMOVAL

Section 3.8

TREE PRUNING / REMOVAL

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 59 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.8 – TREE PRUNING / REMOVAL

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with pruning, removal and stump grinding of trees. Refer to Work Order for extent of
work to be carried out.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS 4373 : Pruning of amenity trees
x AS 4419 : Soils for landscaping and garden use
x Code Of Practice: Amenity Tree Industry
and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines..

LOCAL AUTHORITY TREE PRESERVATION ORDERS: Where required, the Principal’s Representative will
arrange for and provide a copy to the Contractor prior to commencement of the Works. The Contractor is to make
sure that liaison is maintained with the Principal’s Representative and that the conditions of the approvals are met.

Where no preservation order is provided to the Contractor, and on visiting the Site, the contractor believes the work
as ordered requires an approval from the local Authority, the Contractor is NOT to undertake any work, and to
contact the Principal's Representative.

QUALIFICATIONS: Tree Pruning and Removal work is to be carried out by a qualified Arborist, and/or member of
the National Arborists Association of Australia or equivalent. A suitably qualified Arborist must be on Site at all
times whilst the work is being carried out.

ACCESS AND SAFETY: Safe pedestrian and vehicular access is to be maintained for residents, particularly
children, and visitors at all times. Provision is to be made for continuous use of the works Site, parking areas and
driveways. The Contractor is to organise and conduct the works to minimise inconvenience and nuisance to
residents near the Site of the works by the control of noise, vibration, dust, mud, sawdust and any other nuisance.
Precautions are to be taken to protect the health and safety of persons on or within the vicinity of the Site from
conditions that are or may be dangerous to their health. Erect safety barriers as necessary and provide warning to
residents and visitors of hazards such as overhead work and machinery such as mulchers.

The Contractor shall comply with all Work Cover safety requirements and shall supply to workers all necessary
safety equipment such as safety harnesses, helmets, etc. The Contractor shall ensure that such safety equipment
is properly maintained and used during the course of the work.

2. WORKMANSHIP

TREE PRUNING: All tree pruning must be carried out in strict accordance with the Tree Preservation order and in
accordance with AS4373 - 1996 Pruning of amenity trees.

STUMP GRINDING: All stumps are to be ground to a level of 600mm below ground level. Remove from Site all
debris from grinding and backfill with soil equal to top dressing grade as per AS4419 : Soils for landscaping and
garden use.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 60 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.8 – TREE PRUNING / REMOVAL

3. COMPLETION

REMOVE DEBRIS: The Contractor shall remove all pruned matter, wood, branches, leaves and twigs, grindings
resulting directly from the work, from all footpaths, road surfaces, lawn areas, rooftops and private yards as work
progresses across the Site and on completion.

WOOD CHIPS / GRINDINGS: As an alternative to disposal, where suitable wood chip / grindings (where free from
noxious weeds) that are resulting from works, and with prior approval of the Principal’s Representative, may be
spread on garden beds in a layer of maximum of 100mm thickness. Generally this will be in common areas of
larger projects. Otherwise remove all from Site.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 61 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

Section 3.9

WALL AND FLOOR TILING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 62 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the supply and installation of ceramic tiles to flooring, walls, bench tops, for both
new work and repairs. The supply and installation of Waterproofing to wet areas.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer to sections:

x Section 5 - Plumbing Works,
x Section 9 - Timber Schedule and Drawing Details,
x Section 10 – Component Schedule,
and any other Section where appropriate.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x ISO 10545: Ceramic Tiles
x AS 3958.1: Guide to installation of ceramic tiles
x AS 3958.2: Guide to the selection of a ceramic tiling system
x AS 2358: Adhesives – For fixing ceramic tiles
x AS 3972: Portland and blended cements
x AS 1672.1: Limes and limestones
and all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines..

TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES: The Contractor is to provide where no alternate facility exists an adequate
temporary toilet facility for the occupants.

WATERPROOFING WARRANTIES: Provide a warranty for materials and quality of work undertaken for
waterproofing system as required by Section 10, Component Schedule. The warranty shall cover removal of floor
and wall tiles, removal of shower screens and associated shower fittings, repairing and replacing of waterproofing
system, reinstallation of floor and wall tiles, shower fittings and shower screens, and any making good.

2. MATERIALS

GENERAL: Refer to Section 10 - Component Schedule for requirements.

WALL AND SKIRTING TILES: Use Australian manufactured first quality tiles, of white or approved colour, and fully
glazed over the face of the tile but with glazed edges to border tiles as a minimum.

Tiles for repair are to match existing installations. Projects requiring complete retiling of either wall or floor
elements, or both, are to be tiled with colours as directed. Tile sizing can be in the range of 100x100 to 250x250
mm. Tiles are to be laid in patterns or styles, and colours to approximate current trends.

Tiles shall have lugs not exceeding 0.5mm high. Tiles must be capable of satisfying the following requirements
when tested in accordance with ISO 10545

Warpage - Not exceeding 0.5mm for any tile in the batch.– Crazing resistance - No sign of crazing when steam
pressured at 350 kPa at 10 hourly cycles.

Water absorption - Weight of tiles must not increase by more than 18% of dry weight following immersion in water
for 24 hours.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 63 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

Chemical resistance of glazed surface - Resistance to dilute acids and alkalis.

FLOOR TILES: Ceramic tiles to be first quality within the range of 50 x 50mm (made up to modular sizes of
approximately 300 x 300mm) up to 300 x 300mm (Generally 100 x 100 or 200 x 200) of approved pattern and non-
slip surface glaze.

QUARRY TILES: Quarry tiles and quarry nosing tiles shall be first quality of approved manufacture, complying with
the requirements of ISO 10545.

GROUTING: To AS3958.

THIN BED TILE ADHESIVE: Flexible rubber based Type 1 to AS2358

LEAK CONTROL FLANGE: Provide leak control flanges around floor wastes to all wet area floors. Installation to
manufacturers written specification.

MOVEMENT JOINT FILLING SEALER: Silicone sealant or equal with mould inhibitor.

3. EXTENT

Unless otherwise indicated, provide tiling in the following locations:

KITCHEN: Provide three (3) courses of tiles (150mm x 150mm minimum), to walls over sink, stove and for full
length of all fixed floor cupboards, including returns as applicable, extending behind stove for full width of stove.
Extend wall tiles to rear of stove down to floor, remove skirting boards, supply and fix mould or quad to close off
any gaps between face of tiles and floor. In addition to the above provide border, frieze or feature tiles to the tiled
area in kitchen as per the approved colour scheme.

Where stove abuts a return wall, return tiles on that wall for a distance of 600mm.

Where space does not permit provision of three courses under window, tile to sill nosing (or to sill-returning tiles in
reveals) extending to three (3) courses beyond window.

BATHROOM: Tile walls immediately over junctions with side, end/s and/or hobs (excluding bath riser) to a height of
9 courses over bath (Minimum height of 1800mm from floor level and 1350mm from top of the bath). Provide
border, frieze or feature tiles to tiled area in bathroom as per the approved colour scheme. A capping strip to prevent
water penetration is to be adhered to the wall above the border tile.
Tile riser and hobs to bath, finishing tiles flush with external lip of bath, neatly cut and fitted to bath. Provide two (2)
150 x 75mm matching glazed tile vents to bath riser if the bathtub is renewed.

Where hobs remain, fully tile all exposed surfaces.

Provide skirting tiles to walls to a minimum height of 150mm (or 2 x 100mm tiles) at junction with floor and bath
riser if existing bathtub is not renewed.

Provide matching "shell" or "half-shell" soap-holder centrally placed in second or third row of tiles over bath, as
directed.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 64 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

Existing towel rails, shower curtain rails, toilet roll holder or grab rails in the field area of tiling are to be removed
and refixed after tiling.

Where edge of bath and bathroom door architrave is less than 300mm, tile to back of architrave.

Where hob at opposite end exceeds 450mm, brick-in end of bath, remove bath plinth concrete where necessary
and tile floor. Extend wall tiles in bond from over bath to corner and return wall up to door architrave or as indicated
above.

LAUNDRY: Provide two courses of tiles over laundry tub. Where tub is located in corner lay two courses return
tiling to full depth of tub to work full tiles.

SEPARATE W.C.: Provide skirting tiles to walls at junction with floor as indicated above.

INDEPENDENT HANDBASIN: Supply and fix wall tiles to full width of hand basin and full width of the tiles.

Area of tiling to independent hand basin is to extend from floor bonding with skirting tiles to a height of 830mm
above floor tiles.

Where basin is on wall adjacent to bath, tile that wall complete to height of windowsill.

4. WORKMANSHIP

GENERAL: Set out tiles to give joints of uniform widths. Grade floor from all walls to floor wastes. Suitably prepare
the substrates to receive the bedded finish.

PREPARATION:

Prepare area for tiling to tile and adhesive manufacturer requirements.

Provide Waterproofing system to masonry walls where directed, connect waterproofing to floor waterproofing
system when required.

FLOOR TILING: to tile and adhesive manufacturers specified requirements.

SHOWER HOBS: Where directed, form new brick / concrete hob one course high to suit tiling.

WATERPROOF SHOWER RECESS: Where a shower recess is found to be leaking, remove floor tiles and wall
tiles up to 2 courses high from floor and one tile each side of corners between walls. Waterproof floor and corners
between floor and wall using one of the waterproofing systems listed in the Section 10 - Component Schedule.
Install a vertical waterproof angle to corners of walls weathered over floor/wall junction flashing. Supply and fix a
suitable floor waste to replace existing and provide leak control flange around floor waste. Retile the treated areas
to match existing.

WATERPROOF BATHROOM FLOOR: Where a bathroom floor is found to be leaking, remove the floor tiles and
skirting or wall tiles up to 2 courses high off floor level. Waterproof the whole of the floor and corners between floor
and wall using one of the waterproofing systems listed in Section 10 - Component Schedule. Care is to be taken to
ensure that all penetrations are sealed in with the general floor surface; particularly ensuring that water is not

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 65 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

contained by the penetration. Renew floor wastes and provide leak control flange around floor waste. Retile the
treated areas to match existing tiling.

WATERPROOFING WALLS: Prior to tiling walls, where directed, provide a waterproofing system to connect with
waterproofing floor system when required.

Waterproofing must be carried out by suitably qualified tradespersons.

FIXING OF WALL TILES:

WALL: in accordance with tile and adhesive manufacturers written specification.

FLOOR: Prime, seal or otherwise treat floors as recommended by manufacturer of tile adhesive.

Set floor tiles with a suitable waterproof floor tile adhesive, applied strictly in accordance with manufacturers written
specification. Finish tiles flush with top of floor waste and brass angle.

Where new pedestal pan is to be installed, continuously tile under pan position leaving 50 x 50mm key recess in
centre.

Clean off after pointing up, leaving joints full and smooth.

Core holes in floor under bath to be sealed to prevent entry of vermin.

Neatly fix tiles to bath flange, basin, or sink as applicable.

All internal wet area floor tiling shall fall directly to floor wastes. Ponding in wet areas will not be accepted.

5. JOINTING AND FINISHING

JOINTS: To be even and not more than 3mm wide to standard wall and floor tiles. Set quarry tiles with 10mm joints.

GROUTING: As specified within Standards

WALL TILES: Grout wall tiles with “white” coloured cement based sanitised grout, leaving joints full and smooth.

FLOOR TILES: Grout up with a suitable grout mix worked well into joints when bed is sufficiently firm to prevent
disturbance of the tiles. Clean off surplus grout from face of tiles.

On completion of all work, clean down with 20:1 solution of water: muriatic acid then wash down with copious
quantities of clean water to remove all traces of mortar and acid stains.

MOVEMENT JOINTS: Provide movement joints not less than 6mm or more than 10mm wide through the tile and
bed to the floor being tiled. Locate joints over structural movement joints, at junctions between different background
materials and/or to divide large tiled areas into bays, preferably rectangular, at 3m to 5m joint spacings in both
directions, in accordance with AS 3958.1.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 66 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.9 – WALL AND FLOOR TILING

FLOOR WASTE: Adjust height of floor waste as necessary to suit new tiling levels. Where necessary provide new
suitable floor waste, equal to the diameter of the existing waste (and sealed to the existing drainage with suitable
sealant).

DOOR ANGLE: Provide 3mm thick brass or bronze angle or 5mm thick aluminium angle across the bathroom,
laundry and/or toilet entry door. Securely fix to concrete floor with suitable 25mm stainless steel screws and
suitable plastic plugs.

Angle is to extend a minimum of 25mm under tiles and is to finish flush with the finished surface of tiles.

Where tiles are to be glued, channel floor to ensure internal face of angle finishes flush with existing cement floor.

REMOVE AND REFITTING OF TAPS: Refer to Plumbing, Draining and Gas Fitting Section.

REMOVE AND REFITTING OF FITTINGS: (eg towel rails, toilet roll holder, grab rails etc.) Work to be completed in
accordance with General Repairs and Replacement Section.

TRAFFIC: The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the works and must make or arrange for adequate
protection of the works during the initial curing of floors.

FINISH: After washing down with acid solution, allow to dry and then polish with a soft dry cloth to a clean finish.
Protect all floor wastes, waste pipes and sumps from excess cement deposits when washing and sponging tiles
during grouting, jointing, finishing and cleaning after completion.

6. COMPLETION

Remove all debris and leave the whole area in a clean condition.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 67 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

Section 3.10

PEST CONTROL

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 68 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the control and/or extermination of any or all of the pests described in the
Schedule of Pests, in and around the dwelling/s specified in the Work Order.

WORKING PRACTICES: Refer to Legislative and Policy Conditions and the Code of Practice for the safe use of
pesticides including herbicides in non-agricultural workplaces.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended:
x AS 3660.2: Termite management
x AS 4349.1: Inspection of buildings,
x AS 4349.3 Timber pest inspections
x Occupational Health & Safety Regulations,
x Pesticides Act
x Code of Practice for the safe use of pesticides including herbicides in non-agricultural workplaces.
And, all other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.

LICENSING OF OPERATORS: All persons, Contractors and/or employees using pesticides for the destruction or
control of pests are required to hold a NSW Urban Pest Control (Licensing) Statement of Attainment and a Work
Cover Pest Control License. All work must be carried out in accordance with the Occupational Health & Safety
Regulations.

COMPLIANCE WITH LEGISLATION: The Contractor and his/her employees or agents shall at all times comply
with the requirements of any relevant legislation administered the Department of Environment and Climate Change,
and the provisions of the Pesticides Act and the Codes of Practice and/or Guidelines.

PROFESSIONAL INDEMNITY INSURANCE: Contractor’s undertaking Pest Control or Property Pest Inspections
must provide details of current Professional Indemnity Insurance to the Principal’s Representative prior to
undertaking any work.

CONTRACTOR: The Contractor MUST give appropriate notice in writing in accordance with Department of
Environment and Climate Change (DECC) requirements.

2. MATERIALS

Chemical pesticides shall be industry standards appropriate for the control of rodents and/or insects in domestic
environments– and must be registered with the Australian Pesticides & Veterinary Medicine Authority (APVM).

BAIT STATIONS: Tamper resistant type, polypropylene with key. Bait stations should not be placed where they are
accessible to children, pets or wildlife.

BIRD PROOFING: Use continuous 12mm mesh bird wire with appropriate fixing. Lap and lace together min.
150mm where required.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 69 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

3. SCHEDULE OF PESTS

Category Type
General Pests: Cockroaches
Ants
Spiders
Wasps (including European Wasps)
Silverfish
Carpet beetles
Stored product insects
Fleas Fleas
Rodents: Mice
Rats
Birds: All
Subterranean termites and/or Borers: All

4. TREATMENT

GENERAL PESTS: The Contractor is to eliminate all general pests from the following areas of the dwelling: the
complete interior, including linen cupboards, built in wardrobes, bath tub recess voids, kitchen cupboards including
the void to the rear of kickboards; all cracks and crevices which may harbour insect pests or through which access
is gained to the interior of the dwelling; carpets and the edge of the carpets specifically for fleas or carpet beetles;
roof voids, wall cavities, accessible sub floors, out buildings and the exterior surrounds of the building where
appropriate.

The Contractor shall at all times use techniques for the control of the nominated pests, consistent with good pest
control practice.

FLEAS: The Contractor will eliminate all fleas and their eggs from the dwelling and the immediate surrounds, using
appropriate techniques, including blanket spraying of all grassed areas around the dwelling and the carpet inside
the dwelling for fleas and eggs. All appropriate safety procedures (in accordance with manufacturers written
specification) should be implemented when undertaking blanket spraying.

RODENTS: The Contractor will eliminate all rats and mice from the dwelling and the immediate surrounds using
appropriate baiting techniques. Rodent baits should only be used in suitably identified containers marked
"POISON" and should be placed so as not to allow access to them by children, pets and wildlife.

BIRDS: The Contractor will remove all species of bird nesting in the roof void and/or wall voids of the dwelling and
seal all points of entry. All nesting material should be removed and all areas treated to eliminate bird mites in the
roof area and interior of dwelling(s).

The Contractor must not use any bird distress poisons (eg. 4-aminopyridine) without the prior approval of the
Principal’s Representative.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 70 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

5. INSPECTIONS AND TREATMENT

SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES AND BORERS: All inspections and works in relation to subterranean termites will be
carried out according to AS 3660.2: Termite Management Part 2 in and around building and structures – Guidelines
and AS 4349.3: Inspection of buildings Part 3: Timber pest inspections. "
The Contractor will be required to carry out inspections for the presence of subterranean termites and woodborers
as directed in the Work Order. The inspection should include the sub-structure and sub-floor space, flooring,
skirting boards and architraves at all levels. All accessible roofing timbers should also be inspected, as well as the
boundary fence lines and any out buildings.

On completion of the inspection, a written report shall be submitted to the Principal's Representative pursuant to AS
3660.2.

The Certificate MUST be in the format of Section 3.1 and address items (a) to (q) and;
x whether chemical barrier, the areas treated, name of the chemical and active constituent used, the
concentration applied, and total volume used,
x whether physical barriers have been installed at all appropriate locations in accordance with
AS3600.2.
and, Durable Notice fixed to the premises as detailed in AS3660.2 Appendix D.2

In determining the treatment method to be used the Contractor should be aware of the Principal's preferred options,
which are described as follows:

(1) Subterranean Termites:

x Wherever possible initial treatments should be directed towards eradication of the termite colony from
which the infestation is originating. This can be achieved by either direct treatment of the workings
with any approved chemical application system approved by APVM (Also refer page * of Australian
Government, Department of Health & Aging – Office of Chemical Safety – Termite Protection:
Available Treatments & Hazard Information – http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/pdf/termite.pdf) or where
the location is known, direct treatment of the nest either by dusting or emulsions, all in accordance
with AS3660-1993, Section 5 and Appendix F.
x Buildings and their contents should be protected by establishing a chemical barrier, in accordance
with AS 3660, Section 3 and Appendix F, around all substructure walls, and all piers, stumps, waste
pipes and conduits connecting the superstructure with the soil. Horizontal and Vertical barriers are to
be at least 300mm and 150mm wide respectively.
x Buildings with concrete slab foundation may require the formation of chemical barriers through sub-
slab injection.
x Following each application and on completion of a treatment, a Certificate pursuant to clause 3.7 of
AS3660.
(2) Borers:
x Architraves, skirting boards and other moulded timbers should be removed and destroyed.
Replacement timber should be painted with a primer or varnish on all surfaces after cutting to fit.
(Only a licensed tradesperson may undertake this type of work.)
x Other timber (eg. studs, bearers) should be injected with an approved non staining chemical
application system.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 71 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

Should the Principal’s Representative consider that the proposed remedial treatment quoted above is such that it
warrants seeking advice from other Contractors for that specific work, the Principal’s Representative shall be free to
seek such alternative advice for that work, and may enter into a contract with another Contractor for the purpose of
executing that specific remedial work.

6. GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

STAINING: The Contractor must accept full responsibility to protect ceilings and walls from permanent stains
arising out of liquids or powders used during the progress of the Works, and must at all times protect the property of
both the Principal and the tenant. The Principal reserves the right to reject the use of any liquid or powder that it
considers may damage its property or that of its tenant.

TENANT'S PROPERTY: The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the care of the tenant's personal effects
against damage of any kind during the execution of the work.

RE-INFESTATION: If re-infestation occurs during the warranty period, the property shall be re-treated at the
Contractor's own expense. If in such circumstances, the Contractor fails to fulfil the terms of the warranty, the
Principal may have the work carried out by other means and meet the cost out of monies due to the Contractor by
the Principal under this or any other contract.

PESTICIDES: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any pesticide which has been used or
proposed for use is registered for the purpose under the Pesticides Act.

7. PRE-PURCHASE PROPERTY INSPECTION

The Contractor may be required to undertake Pre-Purchase Property Inspections and report on the presence of
timber pests and damage, and the presence of rodents and general pests.

All tools and equipment necessary for an inspection must be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's
expense.

INSPECTION REPORT: Must contain all items list in Section 5 above, as well as;
x a list of locations infested by rodents and general pests (refer Schedule of Pests, Section 3 above)
and identification of causes for their presence. A site plan and/or building sketch plan to be provided
and marked accordingly.
x any eradication, remedial or preventative measures considered necessary.

CONTRACTORS ASSESSMENT: The Report shall detail the Contractor's assessment and any reasons upon
which such an assessment is made of:

(i) the risk of termites gaining access through areas inaccessible to inspection (possible undetected
entry),

(ii) the risk of destructive timber pest activity affecting the property considering location, environment and
other factors that may support such activity, and

(iii) whether access holes should be made to ensure full and thorough inspection of any important areas
otherwise inaccessible to inspection.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 72 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.10 – PEST CONTROL

8. COMPLETION

Remove all unused baits, containers, signs etc from Site at the completion of the treatment. If required, wash down
surfaces to remove any residual chemicals.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 73 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.11 – TELEVISION ANTENNA

Section 3.11

TELEVISION ANTENNA

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 74 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.11 – TELEVISION ANTENNA

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the installation, service, testing and reporting on antenna systems. It applies to
multi unit dwellings. It does not cover high rise buildings (high rise are buildings with lifts).

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer to sections:

x Section 4 - Electrical Works,
and any other Section where appropriate.

x Code of Practice 2001- Low voltage electrical work

x Code of Practice 2004 - Safe work on roofs.

The work is to be carried out in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions in particular the following
Acts, Codes of Practice, Standards and/or Guidelines as amended and All other relevant standards, Acts, codes of
practice and guidelines.

SERVICE: The Contractor shall be fully conversant with present day repair techniques, have a service organisation
capable of first class work standard, and be able to provide all necessary testing equipment to ensure adequate
signal strength for good reception.

CARE OF TENANT'S PROPERTY: The Contractor will be held fully responsible for the care of the tenant's
personal effects against damage of any kind during the execution of the contract. The cost of handling and removal
of the tenant's effects necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works are included in the relevant Schedule
Rate.

2. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

The Contractor shall be fully conversant with the latest Australian Standards at all times, as these standards will
apply to all work carried out.

MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS: All materials utilised for the Works are to be the best of their respective kinds
and are to comply with the relevant Standard and are to be of equal dimensions, sizes, weights and quality as the
materials used in the original assembly or recommended by the manufacturer of the antenna/amplifier unless
otherwise directed.

The material/spare parts used in the performance of the Works are to be purchased direct from the manufacturer of
the equipment or the official distributor or from a supplier of replacement parts.

MINIMUM PROCEDURES REQUIRED: The Contractor shall provide, with the Claim for Payment, a
drawing/schematic (either by hand or CAD) of the system being serviced/modified both before and after. The
drawing is to be of:
x The section of the TV system being serviced in a Multi Dwelling unit of more than four (4) outlets, or
x The whole TV System if four (4) outlets or less.

THE DRAWING/SCHEMATIC SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING DETAIL:

x The address, if the total number of outlets is four (4) or less;

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 75 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3.11 – TELEVISION ANTENNA

x The address and portion of the premises being serviced if the total number of outlets is more than four
(4) eg: 240 Job Street Suburb, Block C, Lower 4 Floors, East side of building and /or, Unit Numbers 8
to 24.
x Description of all components to be replaced, including brand name /model name/number.
x Nature of the fault for each component to be replaced and signal levels/ quality at component Input
and Output
x Brand and model name/number of new replacement components, plus new component signal
readings (as above).
x Show units of measurement used on all signal readings, ie dBuV / dBmV

THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING DETAIL:

x Address/Portion of premises to be serviced
x Name of contact on Site
x Signature of Contact person on Site to indicate their satisfaction with the service

The Principal’s Representative may, audit the Work for compliance with the requirements of the Contract. All
relevant documentation and parts will be inspected at the Contractors office.

The Contractor is required to have a technically qualified person available to answer questions on the contractor's
behalf relating to the Work being audited at no additional expense to the Principal.

The Contractor is required to clearly label and store for a period of up to one year, all removed
materials/components These materials/components to be handed to Principal’s Representative on request (NOT
INCLUDING CABLES).

3. COMPLETION:

All debris and surplus material associated with the work is to be removed from the property. The Contractor is to
wait on all trades and make good thereafter. Where the work is arranged as a separate job, ie not on a Work Order,
the Contractor shall notify the Principal’s Representative, in writing, when the job is completed and ready for final
inspection. Report any roof damage to the Principal’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 76 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Section 4

ELECTRICAL WORKS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 77 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the all electrical work including electrical cabling, fittings and equipment to
buildings and common areas.

Carry out all electrical work in accordance with the requirements of AS 3000, Electrical installations: Buildings,
structures and premises (SAA Wiring Rules), and meet the local supply authority requirements.

If the requirements in this Section 4, Electrical Works, are incompatible with the relevant electricity distributor’s
distribution system design standards, the electricity distributor’s standards and requirements will apply.

During the course of work, notify the Principal's Representative if any defective items are found which are outside
the scope of works, and where any part of the installation does not comply with the SAA Wiring Rules or the local
supply authority requirements.

STANDARDS: Carry out all work in accordance with the relevant regulatory authorities’ requirements applicable to
the type of work involved, and particularly with the following: -
x AS 3000 and AS/NZS 3018 (Electrical Installations).
x AS 3786, AS 1670.6 (Smoke Alarms).
x AS 2053.1-8, AS/NZS 3008.1, AS 3013, AS 4296, AS 5000.1 (Electrical cabling).
x AS 3439, AS 3947.3 (Switchboard).
x AS 2293.1, AS 293.3, AS 60598.1 (Luminaries).
x AS 14443.1-4 (Proximity Cards).
x AS 60335.2 (various sub sections) (Domestic Electrical Appliance Safety).
x AS1158 Lighting for Roads and Public Spaces
x All other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.

REGULATORY AUTHORITIES: Applicable regulatory authorities include (but are not limited to) the following: -
x Energy Australia
x Integral Energy
x Australian Gas Light Co.
x Local Government authorities
x Local electricity providers.

All electrical work involving power supply and electrical fittings must be carried out by suitably qualified
tradespeople or competent person under the direct supervision of an appropriately qualified and licensed person.

WORK STANDARDS AND MATERIALS: All materials used must be of first quality, free from defects or blemishes.
Carry out the whole of the work in accordance with good general trade practice and to match the existing in all
details, where applicable. Make all materials to be used available for inspection by the Principal’s Representative.
Provide all necessary materials, finishes, equipment etc., even where not specially mentioned, but necessary for
the satisfactory completion of the work.

COMPLETION OF WORK: Remove all debris and surplus materials associated with the work from the site and
disposed of appropriately. Make good any damage caused while undertaking the work.
The Principal will provide a schedule of items (sub-components) to the Contractor that will be required to be bagged
and tagged by the Contractor after replacement, and retained until the Principal gives approval to dispose of them
following a Quality Audit.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 78 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

2. MATERIALS

MATERIALS: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule. Where there is no listing notify the Principal’s
Representative.

Colour / Finish of all internal power outlets, light fittings and switches. Provide polycarbonate, in white or a colour to
match the existing fittings.

SOCKET OUTLETS: A reference to "socket outlets" is a reference to general purpose outlets (GPO's).

WIRING: Ensure replacement wiring is PVC/TPS insulated.

3. EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING AND EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS

Prior to carrying out any other work ensure that all "sink benches, metal water pipes, metal shower trays etc.” are
properly secured and bonded.

4. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

TESTING: Test all systems and equipment after installation for correct and reliable operation. Where requested by
the Principal's Representative, demonstrate the operation of the system or equipment repaired.

COMMISSIONING: Clear away rubbish, clean and make good any soiled or damaged surfaces , replace faulty
lamps and other components, and hand over the completed installation in good working order.

5. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

GENERAL
ELECTRICAL WORK: On completion, self test all work and complete a Certificate of Electrical Work as
appropriate.

ELECTRICAL REWIRING: refer to Electrical Re-wire sub-section .

EARTHING: Prior to carrying out any work, test the circuits on which work is to be undertaken in accordance with
the latest edition of the SAA Wiring Rules to ensure that the earth system is satisfactory.

EARTHING ELECTRODE: Earthing electrode and lead shall comply fully with the requirements of the SAA Wiring
Rules.

REPLACEMENTS: Install all electrical appliances in accordance with manufactures’ specifications and the supply
authority’s requirements. Test all systems and appliances after installation for correct and reliable operation.

Unless otherwise noted, install the following minimum number of outlets in each dwelling:

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 79 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Lighting Power Points

Living area/room 1 2 x double
Dining area/room 1 1 x double
Kitchen/cook area 1 1 x single (refrigerator)
1 x single (range hood, if installed)
1 x single (microwave shelf, if installed)
2 x double (above bench)
Stairway 1
Each bedroom 1 1 x double
Bathroom 1 1 x single
Enclosed hallway 1
Laundry 1 1 x double
Attached carport 1
Exterior doorway 1 each
Separate toilet 1
Garage (attached or under) 2 1 x double

REPAIRS: Carry out all repair work in accordance with manufactures’ recommendations.

TENANTS LIGHT FITTINGS: Re-install any tenants’ light fittings removed to allow rewiring or other work.

LIGHTING
LAMPS: Lamp replacements generally are not required, but replace any existing lamps broken or damaged whilst
work is being carried out.

LIGHT OUTLETS: Provide new light outlets to all entries as required, separately switched internally.

LIGHT SWITCHES: Control lighting outlets by 10 amp flush switches mounted under moulded flush plates cut flush
into architraves or walls in existing positions. Mount new switches, 1000mm above floors or where directed by the
Principal’s Representative.

When replacing switches check and make good wiring to the switch. Provide single, double triple or 4 gang light
switches (architrave or wall mounted), ceiling switches, combination light/fan dimmer switches, weatherproof light
switches and cover plate to light switches as required.

ROCKER SWITCHES: Check and make good wiring to the switch, supply and install a new large rocker switch,
including earth, and sleeve where required. Provide these in disabled person and pensioner modified dwellings
ONLY or as directed by the Principal.

BATTEN HOLDERS: Unless otherwise specified provide "Electric white", heat resistant type batten holders with
polyester skirts, with which the body cannot be extracted without first removing the base securing screws. Where
mounted under junction boxes, provide an enlarged base but firmly secure all others on wooden battens fixed to
ceiling joists or roof trusses or a similar frame component.

SLOPING CEILINGS AND SOFFITS: Provide adjustable type white heat resistant batten holders where the height
is 2400mm or less. Where the height exceeds 2400mm a flexible drop in lieu of batten holders.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 80 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

LIGHT FITTINGS: Check and make good wiring to the fitting, supply and install light fitting and accessories,
including Ceiling Rose, Mounting Base, Flex Pendant & Lamp Holder (heat resistant), Batten Holder (white heat
resistant or colour to match), Mounting Flange and Adjustable Batten Holder as required.

SKIRTING SHIELD: Supply and fix a new shield to the batten holder (skirt), which is heat resistant and matches the
existing.

NEW LIGHT AND DIFFUSERS: Supply and install new internal or external lights complete, to suit location and
environment. Provide heat resistant batten holders fixed to eaves or walls, with concealed wiring to the existing
circuit, and separately switched.

NEW LIGHT CIRCUIT: Supply and install additional light circuits, including circuit breakers (up to 20amp) and
wiring from meter board to fitting.

LIGHT FITTING COMPONENT: Supply and fix a new component to the light fitting. A component may be:-
100W Incandescent globe; energy saving long life globe; fluorescent tube and starter (18W for length up to 600mm;
36W for length up to 1200mm) with diffuser where specified (all above excluding lights mounted on posts);
Sodium vapour lamp; and 50W or 80W mercury vapour globe (all types).

Install new fluorescent fitting including diffuser, tube(s) and starter (generally in bathroom), and remove the existing
fitting and make good. Use masonry anchors or screws to materials. Use a 18W or 36W tube, in a single or twin
fitting as specified. Supply and install earthing to the fluorescent fitting where no earth wire exists.

BALLAST FITTING: Supply and fix a new ballast [all sizes] up to 40W to suit the fluorescent fitting, or 80W to suit a
mercury vapour fitting.

MAKE GOOD: Check and make good wiring to existing light switches, light fittings, GPO’s (both elements) and
smoke alarms.

SENSOR SWITCH: Day/night sensor switch complete to suit the incandescent and fluorescent load, including
brackets, masonry fixing to wall as required and testing.

TIME DELAY SWITCH: Check and make good wiring to the switch, and supply and fix a new time delay switch,
including mounting block as necessary (Button type), equal to “Clipsal 319”.

COMMON AREA TIME CLOCK: Check and make good wiring to the fitting, and supply and fix a new approved
type of common area time clock to the meter board.

OVERRIDE SWITCH: Supply and install an override switch to the meter board for common area lighting, as
required.

COMMON AREA LIGHTING

COMMON AREA LIGHT SHADE FITTING (Wall Mounted/Post Top/Bollard): to comply with Category ‘P’ AS1158, ,
including checking and making good the wiring at the fitting. To match the existing or otherwise as directed (Note to
suit different levels of potential vandalism).

POST TOP: Galvanised steel posts to suit the new common area light shade fitting, from 2m, up to 4.5m mounting
height, and minimum 3.6mm thick x 75mm diameter, minimum 60 micron hot dipped galvanised M.S. post.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 81 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

VANDALITE: Wall or eaves mounted, including checking and making good wiring to the fitting.

ELECTRICAL CABLING: Supply and install heavy-duty underground conduit complete with electrical cabling
connected to supply, including all excavation and backfilling.

Supply and install electrical cabling within wall and roof spaces, were possible, connected to common area supply.

Supply and install heavy duty ducting with cabling securely fixed to walls, eaves etc.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING – Install energy efficient exit signs.

INTERCOM SYSTEMS

QUICK MODULE READER: Remove and dispose of existing and supply and install a new entry quick module
weatherproof reader (all approved types) installed to manufacturers written specification.

PROXIMITY CARD: Supply one only proximity card programmed (all approved types) to suit the building and unit
dwelling.

DOOR STATION: Supply and install a 4, 6, or 8 button door station (as directed), all mounted or recessed type,
weather proof, and installed to manufacturers written specification.

BUZZER BUTTON: Supply and install a new buzzer button (all approved types) for the intercom system, in
accordance with the manufacturers written specification.

POWER SUPPLY: Supply and install a new 12 volt D.C. power supply (all approved types) for intercom system, in
accordance with the manufacturers written specification. All types.

REED SWITCH: Supply and install a new reed switch (all approved types) for the intercom system, in accordance
with the manufacturers written specification.

ELECTRIC DOOR STRIKER: Supply and install a new electric door striker/lock (all approved types), including
checking and making good wiring to the fitting, in accordance with the manufacturers written specification.

Wiring from the door striker to the entry quick module, including all weatherproof components to secure entry to the
dwelling, all in accordance with the manufacturers written specification.

HAND SET: Supply and install wall or desk mounted handset and base (all approved types) for the intercom
system, including checking and making good wiring to the unit, all in accordance with the manufacturers written
specification.

ENTRY LOCK CYLINDER: Supply and install a new tradesman entry lock cylinder, HCE entry type.

DOOR ALARM: Supply and install a new door alarm light and fitting for the intercom system, and check and make
good wiring to the alarm light unit, all in accordance with the manufacturers written specification.

POWER OUTLETS

POWER OUTLETS: Where power outlets are being replaced or altered, sleeve any bare earth wires with green
PVC sleeving.
Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 82 of 214
 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

POWER OUTLETS: Install power outlets comprising of combination flush switch socket outlets of the rating
specified with red dot to indicate "ON" position and with moulded flush plates, mounted flush in wall linings of timber
framed walls or in metal wall boxes chased flush into brickwork 1000mm above the floor, except in kitchens,
bathrooms, and laundries where all outlets and switches shall be positioned in accordance with SAA Wiring Rules.

On completion all moulded flush plates on switches and power outlets must be electric white when on painted
surfaces and walnut when on stained woodwork.

LOCATION: Where existing power outlets are renewed, re-install in the existing position.

REPLACE OUTLET AND SWITCH: Check and make good wiring to the GPO, supply and fix a new switch,
including an earth wire sleeve where required. Provide s suitable GPO outlet combination switch, one way key
operated switch, double GPO outlet combination switch or combination light switch and power outlet single or
double.

WET AREAS: Supply and install a new double waterproof power outlet, including an earth wire, sleeve where
directed, in disabled person and pensioner modified dwellings .

COMMON AREAS: Supply and fix a complete surface mounted protected switch plug combination [Lockable],
equal to "Wilco" W.I.C.M. 415 H.C.

WIRING

INSPECTION: When requested Inspect and supply a written report on the condition of the existing wiring at a
dwelling. Check the earthing and repair the earthing system to suit supply authority requirements.

MAINS CONNECTION BOX: Remove and dispose of existing and supply and fix a mains connection box, including
repairing the circuit as necessary. Pay any fee to disconnect/reconnect supply, and liaise with supply authority as
needed for the work.

MAINS: Remove and dispose of existing and supply and fix either: single phase consumer mains T.P.S. or multi
phase consumer mains, installed in the roof space with no mains connection box. Provide not less than 16 mm2
wiring, maximum length 18m. Pay any fee to disconnect / reconnect and liaise with the supply authority as needed
for the work.

Fix a main earth in conjunction with the mains, and liaise with the supply authority as needed.

Supply and install consumers neutral link to the switchboard, to suit supply authority requirements.

FUSE UNITS: Replace switch fuse units that are beyond repair with circuit breakers. Where fuses cannot be
replaced with Circuit Breakers see direction from the Principal..

CIRCUIT BREAKER: Supply and install/fix a circuit breaker, single phase or multi phase miniature De-ion 8-55 amp
– 3KA, equal to Email Scanlec, with a Traffolyte type label. Where the circuit breaker replaces a fuse wedge,
remove and dispose of the existing unit.

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE: Supply and install either a combined residual current device circuit breaker or a
residual current device to protect lighting/power circuit – 20amp-3kA. Label circuits “Protected” with a Traffolyte
type label – Remove and dispose of existing.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 83 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

LOCAL ISOLATION SWITCH: Supply and install an isolation switch for cooking appliances and hot water heaters,
complying with supply authority requirements and SAA Wiring Rules. For Class 9 Properties (Group Homes)
Isolation Switch are to be key locked to prevent unsupervised operation of cooking appliances.

DEDICATED POWER CIRCUIT: Provide a permanently connected, dedicated power circuits for cooking
appliances and hot water heaters, to suit the specification and rating of the proposed appliance and complying with
supply authority requirements and SAA Wiring Rules. If a new appliance is specified, allow to relocate the power
connection to suit the new position.

Supply and install wiring to range with circuit breaker, – with a maximum run of 18m, including circuit breaker and
flexible connection.

Supply and install wiring to hot water unit with circuit breaker, with a maximum run of 18m, including circuit breaker
and isolating switch.

OTHER ITEMS:
Replace a meter box in the existing position, including reconnection of the existing wiring and supply and install a
new meter board, circuit breakers & earth leakage device, in accordance with the supply authority requirements.

Remove and dispose of existing and supply and fix/install a galvanised metal raiser bracket to the point of
attachment.

ELECTRIC FAN/PANEL HEATERS

REPLACE HEATER COMPONENTS: Remove existing and supply and fit the new component, in accordance with
the manufacturers written specification.

WALL MOUNTED/RECESSED FAN/PANEL HEATER: Provide as specified wall mounted/recessed fan/Panel

heater to suit the room size and average minimum winter temperature, complying with Section 10, Component
Schedule.

Remove existing heatbank, re-use wiring, fittings, etc where possible and use new wiring, fittings, etc where
necessary.

COMBINATION LIGHT/FAN HEATER: Supply and install a combination light fan and heater only as directed by the
Principal.

EXHAUST FANS/RANGE HOODS

ELECTRIC EXHAUST (VENTILATOR, RANGE HOODS) FANS: Fit fans in accordance with the manufacture’s
recommendations, with ducting where appropriate, of fire and heat resistant material.

WIRING TO FAN: Supply and fix wiring to a fan installed by others, and make ready for operation. Connect into a
light circuit and terminate in a 3 pin plug base adjacent to the fan. Supply and install a switch marked “FAN” in the
position directed.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 84 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

EXHAUST FAN INSTALLATION: Supply and fix 250mm exhaust fan to double brick or brick veneer wall/timber
wall/ceiling with no ducting/window as specified, equal to Mistral or Airflow wired into a convenient circuit with a
switch marked “FAN” in the position directed. Provide all wiring, parts and materials, with wiring concealed in a
cavity. Remove and dispose of the existing.

Where required install ONLY a new 250mm exhaust fans as above.

EXHAUST FAN/RANGE HOOD WITH DUCTING: Supply and install a new fully ducted exhaust fan/range hood as
directed. Ducting to be enclosed behind bulkhead matching to kitchen laminates and to match exhaust fan/range
hood. Thickness of the ducting to be minimum of 0.5mm (galvanised steel ducting). Penetrate the roof covering,
flash with material compatible with the existing roof cladding, and supply and fix a cowl. Make good, waterproof and
bird proof ducting. Provide all new wiring and switches. Remove and dispose of the existing exhaust fan/range
hood, and reuse existing wiring where possible.

ROOM VENTILATOR EXHAUST FAN: Supply and install and fix a new room (wall mount) ventilator exhaust fan
(continuous flow), (see Section 10 – Component Schedule) in the position directed. Fit in accordance with the
manufacturers written specification. Remove and dispose of existing. Reuse existing switches and wiring. Fit to
masonry / timber walls, and provide an external cover plate, ducting, all wiring and switches as required.

CEILING FAN: Check and make good wiring to fitting, and supply and install a 3 blade ceiling fan in accordance
with the manufacturers written specification.

WASHING MACHINE/DRYER
WASHING MACHINE REPAIR
COMPONENT REPAIR: Remove and retain when directed sub-components that are beyond economic repair and
supply and fix the sub-component of the washing machine, with the parts and installation in accordance with the
manufactures’ specifications.

CLOTHES DRYER REPAIR

COMPONENT REPAIR: Remove and retain when directed sub-components that are beyond economic repair, and
supply and fix sub-component to the clothes dryer, with the parts and installation in accordance with the
manufacturers written specification. Remove and refit to the wall where required.

REPLACEMENT OF WASHING MACHINE/CLOTHES DRYER

WASHING MACHINE: To be installed where directed a new front loading washing machine for pensioner housing;
for common areas, general housing and Group Homes), including fitting hoses and waste, and disposal of the
replaced item, in accordance with the Component Schedule.

CLOTHES DRYER: To be installed where directed (3.5 kg or 5kg capacity) and dispose of the replaced item,
Section 10, Component Schedule.

ELECTRIC RANGE

STOVES: Prior to carrying out any work on a stove, i.e. replacement of elements or controls, test the insulation
resistance with a 500v megger. If an unacceptable test is observed, contact the Principal’s Representative for
direction.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 85 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

FIXED COOKING APPLIANCES FUNCTIONAL (ISOLATING) SWITCHES: Install functional switches (emergency
cut-off) to fixed and stationary electric cooking appliances, including stoves, ovens, hot plates etc. Mount switches
in an accessible position, within 2 metres of the appliance. Switches to have neon indicator and engraved. Isolation
switches in BCA Class 9 dwellings (Group Homes) should be able of emergency cut off and be able to be key
locked to prevent cooking appliances from being turned on without supervision

ELEMENT: Remove and retain the replaced element and supply and fix a new element, as specified, in accordance
with the manufacturers written specification.

Remove and retain replaced parts, as specified, and supply and fix the component, in accordance with the
manufacture’s specification.

NEW EQUIPMENT: Disconnect and remove existing, and supply and install either a new range, electric cook top or
electrical wall oven, as specified, including fixing down with approved clip, and disposal of the replaced item.
Provide the type of range directed and comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

Where directed for properties scoped by Occupational Therapist supply and install either a new range or elevated
oven and cook top with side hinged door, as specified, fix down with an approved clip. Provide the type of range
directed and comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

HOT PLATE COOKING TOP: Supply and install a hot plate cooking top including all wiring, circuit breakers and
cutting of a hole in the bench top to accommodate the hot plate cooking top. New stovetops are not to be radiant
type elements.

WALL OVEN: Supply and install a wall oven, including all wiring and circuit breakers. – Supply and install 240V
single phase electric supply to wall cupboard where new wall oven to be housed. Refer to Drawing KD11 for
cupboard layout.

SMOKE ALARMS

GENERAL: This clause deals with the installation, replacement and servicing of smoke alarms. Comply with
Section 10, Component Schedule and AS 3786, and for installation with AS 1670.6 and AS 3000.

Remove and dispose of existing smoke alarms as directed. If hard wired, terminate the ends safely and out of sight
in accordance with the SAA Wiring Rules.

Remove and replace faulty alarms still under warranty and return the faulty alarm to the manufacturer for disposal
at no expense to the Principal.

Where smoke alarms are owned by the tenant, return them to the tenant after removal.

Make good any areas damaged by the installation and removal work and holes resulting from the work. Paint areas
that have been made good or marked during the work to match the existing.

Run all surface wiring in white low profile conduit installed in accordance with the manufacturers written
specification. Do not install wiring in eaves or the cavity of full brick or brick-veneer walls.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND TESTING: For each individual smoke alarm and associated piece of equipment:-
x Check and ensure that the 240 Volt mains power indicator is ON.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 86 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

x Switch off the 240 Volt mains circuit to the smoke alarm(s).
x Where possible, remove the smoke alarm from its mounting base. For those models with fixed wire
connections that cannot be unplugged, carry out the remainder of this procedure with the smoke
alarm in-situ.
x Where possible, inspect the smoke alarm mounting hardware inspect attached strobe lights/isolation
switch, and ensure it is secure and it will reliably mount the smoke alarm. If the mounting or ceiling is
damaged to the point where the smoke alarm cannot be securely and reliably fixed, reinstall the
mounting hardware.
x Visually inspect the smoke alarm for any obvious damage, signs of wear or reason to indicate
potential failure, if any are present replace the smoke alarm.
x Clean the external surfaces of the smoke alarm with a damp soapy cloth, then wipe dry. Do not open
the smoke alarm, as to expose its components, in attempting to clean in this area may result in
damage to the smoke alarm.
x With a soft brush attachment, vacuum the smoke alarm to remove dust and other contaminants. Take
particular care to remove such things as spiders' webs and lint.
x Where the smoke alarm is removed, and where in-situ and with the 240 Volt circuit OFF, press the
test button to ensure the back-up battery is capable of operating the smoke alarm.
x With the smoke alarm removed, and where in-situ, with the smoke alarm temporarily covered, spray
the surface surrounding the smoke alarm with a (6) six months surface insect spray. Prevent surface
spray from entering the sensing chamber.
x Re-install the smoke alarm and restore the 240 Volt circuit.
x Check and ensure the mains supply indicator is ON.
x Press the test button to ensure the smoke alarm operates correctly.
x Record all details of work performed and forward a report to the Principal’s Representative in the
format directed or prescribed. Note where a new unit has been installed it is included as a “new
installation” for future maintenance and testing.

Affix the appropriate label inside the 240 Volt mains distribution switchboard detailing the “Last Date Tested” along
with the company logo, name and signature of the person who carried out the procedure.

Return defective alarms, with location and reason for testing, to the manufacturer for retesting (all cost borne by the
Contractor including retesting). Provide a monthly spread sheet to Housing NSW verifying smoke alarms retested
and the reasons why.

NEW SMOKE ALARM: Replace ionisation/photoelectric/ Visalert strobe light smoke alarms where found to be
vandalised/unserviceable, including disposal of the replaced item.
Supply and install either a new ionisation smoke alarm, photoelectric smoke alarm or strobe light smoke alarm, as
specified, including all wiring ducting etc.

HUSH BUTTON: Supply and install a hush button (fixed to wall) for smoke alarms as directed, including all wiring,
ducting, etc.

ELECTRICAL RE-WIRE

COMPLETE REWIRE: Supply and install all necessary materials and labour for the renewal of all electrical wiring
to completely rewire a dwelling including all electric and gas/electric services as specified. Generally all work must
be in accordance with the current SAA Wiring Rules, AS 3000. Supply and install all necessary equipment
materials. Remove and dispose of existing, and supply and fix all new electrical wiring from the point of attachment
(including consumer/service mains, meter-box, switchboard and metering equipment). Remove and dispose of

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 87 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

existing, and supply and fix all new sub-circuits, residual current protection devices to both light circuits and power
circuits (including fridges), toggle type circuit breakers, isolation switches to cooking appliances, all existing light
fittings (excluding tenant's fittings), switches and power outlets, the provision of additional power circuits and outlets
and associated work for buildings. Pay all fees, charges, levies and deposits to allow to disconnect/reconnect
supply, and liaison with supply authority. Renewal of meter box is required as part of these works unless the box is
metal and good condition and contains no Asbestos cement.

METER BOX: Remove existing and relocate and fix a new meter box to the position directed (in conjunction with
re-wire above if required).

Supply and install energy authority padlock for meter boxes and switch room door, as directed.

TELEPHONE CABLING
Contractors are to arrange or provide wiring, repairs and cabling as required for telephone services to the main
distribution frame or first telephone socket including pit conduits and draw wires as required.

6. MATERIALS

MATERIALS AND SAMPLES:

Unless otherwise specified, all cables must be copper conductors insulated with V. 75 Grade PVC to suit AS 3147
and AS 3008.1.

Cables must be of Australian manufacture, approved for use by the relevant supply authority.

Where directed submit for approval, prior to commencing installation, samples of electrical accessories, fittings and
equipment proposed for use in the Works. The Contractor may only install items that have been approved. Failure
to comply with this provision may result in the rejection of such items.

Remove any rejected materials, accessories and equipment from the site within 24 hours of such a rejection.

CONDUITS: Use rigid PVC conduits Cat. A U/G to AS 2053 (set) where plastic conduits are required, except where
flexible types are specified.

CONSUMER MAINS: Except where otherwise directed by the relevant supply authority use the existing points of
attachment. Install consumer mains to local supply authority requirements from the point of attachment to the main
switchboard using tough plastic insulated and sheathed conductors installed in the roof spaces in the manner
specified in the clause, Wiring.
Provide a minimum number of phases and increase the size of conductors where required by the relevant supply
authority.

Mains connection boxes are not required. Where installed in other than roof spaces protect mains by means of
plastic conduits.

CONSUMER METER AND SWITCHBOARD: Where metal meter boxes do not exist or insufficient space is
available at existing positions, supply and install in the position approved by the supply authority an approved meter
box, capable of housing a combined meter and switchboard, complying with supply authority's requirements.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 88 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

METERBOX: Provide a recess type meter box, of galvanised steel construction, with a top hinged cover complete
with stay and catch, and a weather-strip (25 x 25 x 1.2mm galvanised iron) rivet fixed and welded to the sides and
top, and rivet fixed to the bottom. Keep the weather-strip 70mm from the back of the meter box in timber framed
walls, and 115mm in full brick or brick-veneer walls. Over flash at the top.

Where meter boxes are renewed, ensure all affected surfaces are made good to match the existing on completion.

SWITCHBOARD: Supply and install in the meter box an approved type self-contained switchboard with switches
and circuit breakers for the circuit controls.

MAIN SWITCH: Provide an approved type switch to local Supply Authority Requirements with a current rating 50%
greater than the maximum demand of the whole installation connected.

LABELLING: Label each item of equipment on switchboards using of engraved laminated plastic labels with three
layers, white/black/white, equal to Traffolyte, with lettering not less than 4mm high and fixed by self tapped
stainless steel screws.

Local metering situation the circuit breakers specified are to be used as main switches but separate from the other
circuit breakers and labelled accordingly.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Protect sub-circuits by thermal/magnetic type circuit breakers to current Wiring Rules and to
capacity requirements of property with fault current capacity not less than 3kA. Label all SP-CB/RCD Power circuits
"Protected". Provide current ratings as follows:-

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (RCD) (SAFETY SWITCHES): Provide RCD protection to all final sub-circuits
containing socket outlets and lighting, including refrigerators/freezers. Provide a combination of RCD/circuit breaker
where individual RCD for all Lighting Circuits and RCD for all power circuits are not possible. Install RCD’s in the
meter box for detached dwellings, and in a sub-board within the unit whenever possible, for multi unit dwellings.

Fix directions on how to use and test RCDs in a visible location within the meter box or sub-board explained to the
tenants where possible.

Where there are 2 or 3 phases provide appropriate switches and circuit breakers, and where required by the supply
authority increase the rating of switches, and wiring on the above to comply with requirements.

Confirm with the supply authority before finalising details of the requirements for consumer mains and
switchboards.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION: Where site inspection reveals that power points and light outlets have been either
renewed or installed in recent times, using wiring as specified in this specification, and the installation complies
strictly with this specification, do not replace such wiring.

Re-install lighting outlets, power outlets and appliances in the existing positions, new and position outlets as
directed. Provide additional light and power outlets and power circuits to meet the requirements of this specification.

Re-install tenant's light fittings in existing positions.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 89 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

7. WIRING

Install single insulated cables where sub-circuit or sub-main wiring is enclosed in conduit. Elsewhere install
concealed thermoplastic sheathed (TPS) cables.

Run all cabling in roof spaces where possible with loose drops to outlets and switches.

Do not install cabling below the ground floor unless written consent is first obtained. Where wiring is permitted
below the ground floor level protect the conductors in Cat. 'A'. PVC conduit.

Do not install cabling in eaves or the cavity of full brick or brick-veneer walls.

Except where otherwise specified, hereinafter, carry out all wiring using TPS conductors. Neatly clip wiring to the
sides of ceiling members at maximum 600mm spacings or to the side of 38mm x 23mm battens provided across
the top of ceiling joists.

Carry out wiring using the "loop-in" system. Do not join conductors between terminal connections.

Do not fix conductors to the side of wall plates or other ceiling members where they are vulnerable to damage by
the fixing of cornices, wall boards, etc. Use loose drops to power outlets and light switches, and loose conductors
capable of easy replacement without removal of wall linings or any structural work.

Conceal conduits throughout and, where run on brickwork, chase in to permit a minimum 10mm covering of
rendering. Where a conduit is embedded in concrete, use C.A.T. "B" U/G 20mm minimum conduit.

Carry out final connections of permanently connected equipment by installing a standard wall box where a rigid
conduit terminates, or a wall bracket in timber-framed structures, with terminators and a blank plate. Enclose cable
in a flexible PVC conduit. Take care when locating wall boxes to avoid excessive lengths of flexible conduit.

Ensure conduit enters and is securely attached to all wall boxes and the terminal enclosures of all appliances.
Terminate PVC conduit to ranges and water heaters in flush mounted boxes complete with take off angle adaptors
and approximately 900mm of flexible plastic conduit.

Ensure earthing complies with the system of the local supply authority, and earthing in roof spaces and wall framing
so it emerges adjacent to the connection to water pipes or copper clad electrodes securely fixed to building
structures.

In areas where earthing to copper water pipe is required, make the connection with suitable copper or brass clips in
the position required by the supply authority.

SPECIAL NOTE

(1) Give tenants at least forty eight (48) hours notice of any proposed interruption to the electricity supply, which is
not to be interrupted during non-daylight hours or for a period of more than six (6) hours during any one day.
(2) Install all wiring in such a manner as to give the rating of circuits specified and increase the size of wiring where
necessary for long runs to comply with SAA Wiring Rules, Clause 2.2.3 'Voltage Drop'.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 90 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

Section 5

PLUMBING WORKS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 91 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with roof plumbing, storm water, general plumbing, sanitary fixtures, plumbing fixtures,
sewer, hot water (electric), hot water (gas), gas and gas appliances.

STANDARDS: Carry out all work in accordance with the relevant regulatory authorities requirements applicable to
the type of work involved, and particularly with (but not limited to) the following: -

x AS 3500 (all parts as nominated by the regulatory authority)

x NSW Code of Practice for Plumbing and Drainage (current edition)
x AS 1056, AS 1361, AS 3142 & AS 3498 (hot water)
x AS 1639, AS 2180, AS 1562, AS 2179 AS 2180 & AS 2424 (roofing, gutters and down pipes)
x AG501 and AG 601 (Gas Codes)
x Regulatory Impact Statement, Protection of the Environment Operations (Waste) Regulation 2005
x All other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.

REGULATORY AUTHORITIES: Applicable regulatory authorities include (but are not limited to) the following: -

x Sydney Water Corporation

x Australian Gas Light Co.
x Local Government authorities
x Local electricity providers
x Local water supply authority
x Local gas supply authority

All work involving waste disposal, water supply and plumbing fittings must be carried out by suitably qualified trades
people or competent persons, under the direct supervision of an appropriately qualified and licensed person.

WORK STANDARDS AND MATERIALS: All materials used must be of first quality, free from defects or blemishes.
Carry out the whole of the work in accordance with good general trade practice and to match the existing in all
details, where applicable. Make all materials to be used available for inspection by the Principal’s Representative.
Provide all necessary materials, finishes, equipment etc., even where not specifically mentioned, but necessary for
the satisfactory completion of the work, are to be included into the Works and form part of the Contract.

COMPLETION OF WORK: Remove all debris and surplus materials associated with the work from the Site and
dispose of it appropriately progressively and on completion. Make good any damage caused while undertaking the
work.

PIPE WORK: The Principal requires all Pipe Work in all dwellings to be metal. Contractors must seek approval
from the Principal to use alternative Piping material in Class 1 dwellings, subject to theft etc. Pipe work in Class 2,
3 & 9 Dwellings should be metal in accordance with the Principal’s Fire Safety Program. Note: Do not replace
metal pipe with UPVC/poly butylenes or other material in any dwelling unless approval is sought prior.

LEAD: Where lead waste pipes are found, remove and replace with an approved piping material suitable for the
purpose/building.

EARTHING AND BONDING: Comply with Section 4 Electrical Works.

CERTIFICATES AND TEST REPORTS: Where a license is required to carry out any work under the Contract
(water, sewerage, gas, LPG etc) or accreditation (thermostatic mixing valves, backflow prevention device etc),
Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 92 of 214
 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

provide evidence of compliance before the work commences where relevant and a Certificate of Compliance,
Inspection and Maintenance Report, Commissioning and Test Report and the like, within 7 days of completion of
the work.

PENETRATIONS: All penetrations are to comply with relevant Standards and are to comply with the Principal’s Fire
Safety Program.

2. ROOF PLUMBING

NEW GUTTERING:

Removal of Existing Guttering: Strip the whole of the existing eave gutters on all elevations of the specified
dwellings. Take care during the removal of guttering to ensure that a minimum of disturbance is caused to existing
fascias and roof coverings. Dispose of waste materials off the Site.

Generally: Provide factory pre-painted type guttering materials

Components:
Size and Profile Generally 115mm Quadrant type
Thickness 0.6mm gauge
Brackets Concealed type at 900mm maximum spacings fixed using galvanised helical nails or
proprietary clips
Joins No joins are permitted in guttering under 10.0 metres in a single straight line. Silicone seal
and pop-rivet fitted joints
Angles Factory pressed sheet metal or die-cast
Expansion Joints Provide in single straight lines of guttering over 30.0 metres long
Nozzles Factory pressed sheet metal, die-cast or PVC
Colour To match the existing or, if no match exists, a near match as accepted or directed by the
Principal’s Representative

Installation: Grade guttering to outlets so that all roof water will completely drain off to each discharge point and
keep it high enough to hide the ends of roof tiles. Water flood test all gutters at the completion of installation and
provide written certification to the Principal’s Representative that no ponding occurred during the gutter test.

Relay roof tiles (or metal sheeting) removed for the renewing of gutters neatly and truly when gutter work is
completed. Replace any missing or broken tiles to match the existing and re-bed capping, including over-flashing of
fascias under hip starter tiles using 0.7 mm thick zinc, and point up where disturbed.

Take care to ensure that gutter beads on all elevations are straight and true when completed.

VALLEYS:

Material 0.6 mm thick zincalume steel

Profile 450 mm wide with edges turned over
Joins Lapped 150 mm at joints close riveted and set in sealant
Fixing At top, galvanised nail or screw to prevent valley gutter creeping downwards; At sides,
galvanised nails bent over edges

REPAIRS TO EXISTING GUTTERING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 93 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

Note: Do not use lead flashing in conjunction with pre-painted guttering. Use minimum 0.7mm thick zinc or another
material by the Principal in lieu of lead.

Generally: Provide the same profile and finish as the existing guttering for repairs. For replacement guttering use
Zincalume material painted externally the same colour as the existing. Use silicone sealed pop-riveted joins.

CLEAN OUT EXISTING GUTTERING:

When cleaning downpipes, the downpipe must be removed from the shoe to prevent the obstruction being flushed
down into the stormwater. After removal of the obstruction re-attach the downpipe to the stormwater.

GUTTER GUARD:
Refer to other Section 3.4

NEW DOWNPIPES:
Removal of Existing Downpipes: Strip the existing downpipes on all elevations of the specified dwellings. Take care
during the removal of downpipes to ensure that a minimum of disturbance is caused to existing guttering and
stormwater connections. Dispose of removed materials off the Site.

Generally: Provide factory pre-painted type downpipe materials, except for downpipe bases where required.

Components:
Size and Profile: Generally 100mm x 50mm or alternatively other profiles to suit the same as the existing.
Thickness: 0.6mm gauge
Brackets: Purpose made factory pressed astragals spaced at maximum 1800mm intervals
Joins: Where joins are fitted, lap them in the direction of flow and pop-riveted them.
Angles: Rectangular, with offsets formed with lip outside the joint, double pop riveted into position and sealed with
silicone. Round downpipes factory pressed sheet metal or die-cast
Connections: Into gutter nozzle at top, into earthenware or PVC stormwater at the base
Colour: To match the existing or, if no match exists, a near match as accepted or directed by the Principal’s
Representative

Downpipe Bases (where required): Provide cast iron 1800mm high (with ears), 100mm x 75mm or 100mm round
bases, fixed to the wall at the top with suitable fixings and secured at the base into the stormwater drainage
pipework or, if no pipework exists, securely fixed to adjoining structure.

Installation: Supply and install new downpipes where they were originally fitted or are directed. Connect them at the
heads with eave gutters and terminate the base into the stormwater drainage system. Seal downpipe bases into
stormwater with either cement mortar (earthenware S/W) or PVC adaptors to suit (PVC S/W). Secure them to wall
or other vertical surfaces with astragals fixing using galvanised screws and washers. Pack out 25 mm from the
surface to clear stringer courses and plinth moulds (where necessary).

REPAIRS TO EXISTING DOWNPIPES

Generally: Provide the same profile and finish as the existing downpipes for repairs. For replacement downpipe use
Zincalume material painted the same colour as the existing. Where joins are fitted, they are to be lapped in
direction of the flow and pop-riveted.

COLOURS: Generally to match the existing or the approved colour scheme by the Principal’s Representative.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 94 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

3. SEWERAGE AND STORMWATER DRAINS

GENERAL:

Unless otherwise directed or specified, fill all trenches in immediately pipe laying is completed.

EXCAVATION IN ROCK: Rates for excavation in rock must be as agreed or determined by the Principal’s
Representative prior to any excavation. The measurement of excavated rock will be limited to the amount of rock
determined by the Principal’s Representative as necessary to adequately perform the required works.

REACTIVE SOIL: All sewer, stormwater and subsoil piping is to be PVC. The Contractor may use alternative
materials only with the prior approval of the Principal’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Principal.

Make appropriate provision for reactive soils and subsidence in mining areas where they occur on the Site.

MATERIALS:

(A) Sewerage drains: Use 100/150mm UPVC to AS 1260 (DWV) and solvent cement fittings to AS 1260,
all stamped and branded as conforming to Australian Standards.

(B) Sullage/Stormwater drains: Generally UPVC to AS 1260 (DWV sewer grade) and solvent cement fittings
to AS 1254. For sullage drains between gullies and waste connections UPVC sewer grade pipes and
fittings as for sewerage drains.

(C) Stormwater drains (across driveways and footpaths): Use either cast iron, ductile iron or galvanised
steel in accordance with AS 3500.3.

(D) Sullage pits: Use 1500mm x 1500mm x 450mm deep pits with two absorption trenches 2400mm x
450mm x 450 deep with the trench drain manufactured from recycled plastic in U shaped sections
1500mm long x 350mm high.

ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS:

Use the following alternatives only where permitted by the relevant authorities and only with the approval of the
Principal’s Representative.

Use approved UPVC pipes and fittings, Type SWV for sanitary plumbing, Class "SH" to AS 1260 for sewerage and
sullage drainage lines other than across footpath and in driveways, subject to the following additional requirements:

(A) Indelibly marked approved UPVC. pipes every 450mm with the name of the material and with the
manufacturers Trade Name.

(B) Suitably marked approved UPVC fittings with the name of the material and with the manufacturers
Trade Name.

WORKMANSHIP:
Sewer drains: To AS 3500.2
Stormwater drains: To AS 3500.3
Sullage pits/drains: Use construction methods adopted from and in compliance with AS 1547, Appendices 4.5A.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 95 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

Metal for filter trenches must be clean 20mm blue metal (or a suitable approved equivalent in areas where blue
metal is not available).

Where so directed, notify the Principal’s Representative prior to the commencement of work on pipelines and
trenches, and leave excavations open for inspection. Backfill all excavations immediately after inspection unless
otherwise directed. Compact backfill to allow for settlement to ensure that filled excavations remain level with level
with the adjacent ground level.

PIPELINES: Excavate for, provide and construct, pipelines as specified in the Extent of Works and any sketch or
drawing.

LINES – Vitrified Clay:

a) Install Vitrified Clay generally in accordance with the requirements of the relevant authority.

b) Lay all pipelines in straight runs from each change of direction with uniform falls, solidly bedded on
barrels in accordance with lines and levels, as specified on the Work Order or otherwise specified,
with joints closely butted with inverts flush and each length swabbed where necessary. Provide
cleaning eyes at each change of direction and at not more than 9 metre intervals in straight runs.

c) Make joints with rubber compression rings or cement mortar composed of two (2) parts clean sharp
sand and one (1) part of cement, with each joint neatly splayed off.

d) Take care to observe all given and required dimensions, grades, and the like, and fill any excess
excavations in trenches with suitable material at no additional expense to the Principal.

e) Ensure the minimum grades of such lines , and for agricultural pipes are laid in accordance with the
Plumbing Codes and local Supply Authority requirements.

LINES UPVC:

a) Install UPVC generally in accordance with AS 2032, with joints solvent welded to suit manufacturers
written specification.

b) Provide for the whole length of the drain line, suitable compressive supports at 1500mm maximum
centres. Where the excavation is in sand or loam free of hard objects, lay the pipes directly onto the
suitably graded trench base.

c) Locate pipe at the centre of trench, to correct grade and alignment with true invert, with spigot ends
pointing in the direction of flow. Provide suitable access or inspection openings at maximum centres
and positions required by the relevant authority.

d) Provide minimum regulation cover as required and where such cover cannot be obtained refer to the
Principal’s Representative for direction.

e) Fill in over the full width of trench and to a depth of 300mm over the pipes with selected soil, sand,
loam or fine aggregate free of rock or other hard particle over 10mm. Excavated material complying
with above may be used as fill material. Use the excavated material otherwise for the final backfill.

f) UPVC Connection To Vitrified Clay:

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 96 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

(i) UPVC to Vitrified Clay Socket: Use suitable adaptor to suit the compression required of a
Vitrified Clay rubber ring. Do not use mortar joints.

(ii) Vitrified Clay Spigot to UPVC: Use suitable adaptor as above and connect to vitrified clay
spigot through a Vitrified Clay double socket and rubber rings.

4. FITTINGS

TAPS: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

Where directed to replace existing tap ware, fit new chrome plated, satin chrome or powder coated brass Bib taps,
Pillar taps, Washing Machine taps, Stop taps, Cistern taps, Shower Sets, Basin Sets, Bath Sets, Kitchen Hob and
Wall Sets as required. Fit matching tap handles complete with "H" and "C" or colour coded (red-hot, green or blue-
cold) buttons as applicable.

5. MAINTENANCE OF GAS

MATERALS AND SPARE PARTS: Comply with Section 10 Component Schedule.

Ensure all materials for the Works are the best of their respective kinds and comply with the relevant standard and
are of equal dimensions, sizes, weights and quality to the materials used in the original construction, or are as
recommended by the relevant manufacturers unless otherwise directed.

6. SERVICE

Ensure relevant personnel are fully conversant with all relevant present day repair techniques, provide a service
organisation capable of a first class work standard and are able to provide all necessary testing equipment. The
repairs required are not limited to equipment only, repairs may be required to services associated with
equipment/appliances (water pipes, gas pipes, taps, valves, fittings, flues and flashings etc).

Carry out equipment/appliance services in accordance with the manufacturers written specification and the relevant
regulations.

Provide a written report detailing why any equipment/appliance is condemned for replacement.

7. INSTALLATION OF GAS & ELECTRICAL HOT WATER HEATER, GAS STOVES AND ROOM HEATERS

GENERAL: Comply with Section 10, Component with hot water heaters, gas stoves and room heaters.

HOT WATER SERVICE: Install water heaters and hot water services in accordance with manufacturers written
specification and as specified hereunder. The use of flexible connectors to connect Hot Water Services is NOT
permitted either internally or externally.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 97 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

NOTE: Instantaneous gas HWS cannot be installed in bathrooms, toilets, bedrooms, combined living sleeping
rooms or any other unventilated room. Internal gas instantaneous HWS should be replaced with electric
Instantaneous or with external gas HWS.

Make minor adjustments to factory set appliances such as gas stoves and room heaters to ensure their suitable
operation.

TEMPERATURE LIMITING VALVES: Tempering Valves (temperature limiting valves) are to used in all BCA Class
1, 2 and 3 buildings. Thermostatic Mixing Valves (TMV’s) are to be used in BCA Class 9 Dwellings ONLY or as
directed by the Principal’s Representative..

GAS STOVES AND ROOM HEATERS: Install gas stoves and room heaters in accordance with manufacturers
written specification and the gas supply requirements.

WATER HEATER (GENERALLY): Use new copper pipe and suitable fittings for the various outlets.

Thoroughly remove all internal rough edges from pipes after cutting, ensuring the bore is left not less than the
nominal size of pipe. Keep all exposed pipework level and plumb, fitted tight to walls and set neatly around
obstructions where applicable. Neatly secure pipes to walling at not more than 1350mm centres with suitable type
brass or copper saddles (with brass screws) and with suitable plugs. Lay pipe runs outside buildings in the ground
to a depth of at least 230mm cover and under buildings secure pipes to floor timbers and concrete floors in a
suitable manner using brass or copper clips or brass straps (with brass screws) at 900mm centres. . Ensure that
runs of exposed Hot Water Piping is minimised. Insulate (appropriate lagging) and secure pipes to prevent heat
loss and water hammer.

Neatly finish off all solder/welds etc, free from lumps and with all surplus flux and cleansing agents thoroughly
washed off and exposed pipes left free from marks, stains and lumps. Thoroughly flush out the whole of the new
service and leave the pipes, fittings and taps in good working order, free from leaks.

Check all electrical earth clips are connected in accordance with power supply authority requirements.

Ensure that the electricity is turned off at the meter and test that circuits are de-energised before temporarily
disconnecting the electrical earth clips.

Advise the tenants prior to the power being turned off and reconnect power without delay in accordance with
Section 4, Electrical Works.

Neatly fit tubing where passing through timber, concrete or brickwork, secure and insulate to prevent water
hammer, heat loss and damage to pipes.

Entry through ventilators will NOT be permitted.

Neatly reset bricks removed for the installation of pipes in cement mortar and neatly point up holes cut through
walls to match existing work and clean down walls on completion.

Remove all disused pipe, fittings, hooks, plugs and the like, (except pipe fittings laid in ground) and cap off all
exposed pipe. All disused pipe to be removed from the Site and disposed of in accordance with the Contractors
WRAP plan. Make good damaged walls, etc. to suit the existing.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 98 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

Restore roof coverings, wall surfaces, roof timbers, mouldings, framings and the like, damaged, disturbed and
removed to enable service to be installed, to the original condition, and rectify any material damaged during the
progress of the work at the Contractor's expense.

EXTERNAL GROUND MODELS: Install weatherproof heaters externally where directed by the Principal’s
Representative on concrete bases to meet requirements of AS3500.4.

Connect 13mm OD copper drainpipes to combined temperature/pressure relief valves, to discharge externally clear
of wall faces in directed position. Preferable to discharge over yard gully

INTERNAL MODELS: Fit internal models with a safe tray and safe waste drained in accordance with the relevant
regulations.

PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE (Mains Pressure Only): Provide and fit to cold water inlet lines, in accessible
positions, between heaters and non-return valve/stop tap, a suitable pressure limiting valve set to suit the
manufacturers written specification, lower than the setting of the top relief valve.

Extend the 19mm OD main run from the heater with a 19mm OD branch to showers, a 16mm OD branches to other
single outlets and a 13mm OD branch to basins.

FITTINGS: Carry out joining of copper tube to required current Australian Standards.

Carry out pipe work in straight runs and minimise the use of elbow fittings. Ensure tees formed in runs do not have
any tube protruding into the water flow.

Only bending CP or unplated tube where a suitable mechanical pipe bender is used. Provide all bends by a suitable
method of pipe softening and do not provide cold, sharp flattened or crimped bends, or the like, in lieu of gradual
sweeps.

COLD WATER CONNECTIONS: No additional payment will be made for the freezing of pipes to make repairs,
adjustments or additions to water services.

Connect heaters to the main cold water supply using 19mm OD Type B copper tubing to a wall surface termination,
and 13mm OD Type B Chrome Plate tubing (up to 2 metres length) for connection of the heater.

Install a 13mm stop tap for the heater water supply. Provide a suitable non-return valve where required by the
relevant supply authority.

Use approved combined stop tap/non-return valve in lieu of separate items where required.

CONCEALING OF PIPES: Unless otherwise specified, conceal all pipe work in walls, cupboards, ceiling areas or
under floors, except short sections exposed to view within the dwelling to heaters and hand-wash basins. Provide
close fitting CP domed wall flanges where new tubing enters/emerges from wall face.

Chrome plate all new exposed hot and cold water piping and fittings in the dwelling, unless specified otherwise.

Terminate hot and cold connections to heaters at the wall face with a male thread protruding for the separate
connection of heaters with CP tubing.

Securely fix all pipe work to prevent movement when taps are used.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 99 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

Replace materials damaged during removal with matching new materials including any existing wall tiling.

Carefully remove and restore wall sheeting as necessary to conceal pipe work.

Bore neatly through top and bottom plates, noggings and timber and concrete flooring and neatly cut away small
section of noggings, etc., as necessary to conceal pipe work.

SOLAR HOT WATER SYSTEMS: Install only min 300L Solar Hot Water Systems. Install all Solar Hot Water Systems
as required by the manufacturer. Solar Hot Water systems must be installed with appropriate Solar panels (collectors)
correctly located, solar pump and electric hot water boost.

Solar Hot Water Systems to be installed with Tempering Valve (equal to RMC Orange Cap) and Solar Transfer Valve
(equal to RMC) where connected with booster heater.

8. TESTS

Ensure that completed hot water services are capable of withstanding hydrostatic pressure equal to that required
by the supply authority for cold water services. Test the pressure where required by the Principal’s Representative.

9. ELECTRICAL WORK

NOTICE AND FEES: Make all arrangements with the supply authority for the connection of supply, including the
service of all notices and paying all fees and charges required by the authority. Supply all necessary electrical
fittings, materials and accessories to complete the work in accordance with this specification.

10. GAS SERVICE

Test the gas service in accordance with the relevant authority requirements.

Extend existing services with pipes and fittings made and assembled in accordance with gas supply authority and
manufacturers written specification.

Install all component parts of the extension, such as pipework and fittings, so that they are removable without
damage to either piping or the building.

In dwellings with timber ground floors, secure pipe work under floor framing at 1800mm max. centres with screw
fixed clips of similar material to the pipe work.

For underground installations, during backfilling of service trenches, lay a warning tape above and for the full length
of buried pipes of durable plastic material, minimum 100mm wide, marked continuously with "GAS PIPE UNDER"
and colour to AS 1345.

Install brass gas control taps for water heaters.

REPLACEMENT GAS APPLIANCES: Instruct tenants in the use of appliances and ensure manufacturers operating
instructions are left with the tenants.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 100 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

11. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

Provide a Certificate of Compliance to the Principal’s Representative along with the Work Order.

12. INSPECTION

Inspect and report to the Principal’s Representative on the condition of appliances and flues where any such work
is required under the Work Order.

13. REPAIR/REPLACE

Install and repair all gas appliances in accordance with manufacturers written specification and relevant authority
requirements. Test all systems and appliances after installation for correct and reliable operation.

Leave all appliances in first class condition and full working order.

Clean all appliances. Remove all rubbish and trade waste from the Site progressively and on completion.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: Provide 'PLUMQUIK' or equal.

BLOCKED DRAINS: Drains must be cleared to the full diameter of the pipe and for the entire length of the sewer.
Clear blocked gully traps for the full diameter of the trap. Ensure that all drains operate properly after unblocking.
Provide a detailed report of the cause and location of blockage to the Principal’s Representative using the
Principal’s approved report.

14. MATERIALS

WASTE PIPES: Use PVC pipe, copper, or cast iron.

WATER SERVICE, SINGLE DWELLING: Use 20mm copper pipe.

GAS / WATER PIPE, COPPER: Copper tube.

HOT WATER HEATERS: Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule.

COOKING APPLIANCES AND HEATERS (GAS): Comply with section 10, Component Schedule

ALL VALVES: Provide as recommended by the hot water cylinder manufacturer.

SEALANTS: Provide mould inhibiting silicone sealants.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 101 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – PLUMBING WORKS

15. COMPLETION

Remove all debris and surplus material associated with the work from the dwelling/property. Make good on
completion. Where the work is arranged as a separate job, i.e. not on a Work Order, notify the Principal’s
Representative, in writing, when the job is completed and ready for final inspection.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 102 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6 – PAINTING WORKS

Section 6

PAINTING WORKS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 103 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

Section 6.1

PREPARATION FOR PAINTING -

EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 104 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the preparation of unpainted surfaces and the surface preparation of previously
painted surfaces ready for the application of coating systems specified in Section 6, Painting Works.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to sections:

x Section 2 – Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Work.
x Section 3.2 – Reinstatement of Fire Damaged Property.
x Section 6.2 – Painting – Interior.
x Section 6.3 – Painting – Exterior.

SPECIAL NOTE: The use of mobile scaffolding and or scissor lifts or similar equipment to perform the work must
comply with all standards, codes and manufacturers written specifications and recommendations.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT: Refer to Section 1

Carry out the work in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and particularly the following:-
x AS/NZS 2311: Guide to painting of buildings
x AS 4361.2: Guide to lead paint management Part 2: Residential and commercial buildings.
x all other relevant Acts, codes of practice, standards and guidelines.

2. MANAGEMENT OF LEAD CONTAMINATED PAINTED SURFACES

GENERAL: The Principal has a lead paint management policy that is aimed at minimising health risks to users of
heritage and pre-1970 constructed buildings. The policy requires the condition of painted surfaces of such buildings
to be assessed for the presence of lead paint before any surface preparation or re-painting commences.

Pursuant to this policy, the Principal may either:

x Conduct its own assessment of the extent of any lead contamination; or
x Direct the Contractor to carry out testing for the presence of lead paint before any surface preparation
or re-painting commences.

“LEAD-SAFE” PRACTICE: Where assessment by the Principal or testing by the Contractor has established
that the presence of lead exceeds the permissible level, all surface preparation and painting must be carried out in
accordance with this clause 2 and the requirements of AS 4361.2, Guide to lead paint management.

TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR: Testing is to be only carried out where the Principal’s Representative, directs
the Contractor to carry out testing for the presence of lead paint before any surface preparation or re-painting
commences, carry out testing in accordance with AS 4361.2.

Testing may be carried out by the chemical colorimetric test reagent method, portable X-ray fluorescence method
or by the collection of samples for laboratory analysis.

Laboratory testing must be carried out by a NATA accredited laboratory.

The minimum number of tests to be carried out on the interior painted surfaces of a room is:
x 1 per wall;
x 1 per ceiling;
x 1 per door;
Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 105 of 214
 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

x 1 per door frame;

x 2 per window assembly;
x 1 per skirting board; and
x 1 each on other items such as built-in furniture, picture rail and the like.

The minimum number of tests to be carried out on the external painted surfaces of a building is:
x 1 per wall;
x 1 per fascia;
x 1 per door;
x 1 per door frame;
x 1 per window assembly; and
x 1 each per auxiliary structure such as sheds, garages, pergolas and carports.

On completion of testing prepare a written report, setting out the results of all testing, and submit it to the Principal’s
Representative. The report must be in format approved by the Principal’s Representative. The test report must also
include details of the condition of the painted surfaces in terms of the criteria descriptions set out in the table below.

The Principal will examine the report and determine if “lead-safe” practices should be followed during re-painting.
The Principal will then issue a Work Order for the painting and the Order will cover “lead-safe” practices where
necessary.

Condition of Painted Surfaces

Type of Building Component Total Area of Deteriorated Paint on Each Component

Exterior components with large surface areas. More than 1m2 of the surface of the component is
blistered, flaked or peeling.
Interior components with large surface areas (walls, More than 0.2m2 is blistered, flaked or peeling.
ceilings, floors and doors).
Interior and exterior components with small surface More than 10% of the total surface area of the
areas (window sills, baseboards, soffits and trim). component is blistered, flaked or peeling.
Note: ‘Building component’ in this table refers to each individual component or side of a building, not the
combined surface area of all similar components in a room (e.g. a wall with more than 0.2m2 of
deteriorated paint is a “lead paint risk”, even if the other three walls in a room are not a “lead paint risk”).

TRAINING: Ensure all personnel working on “lead paint risk” surfaces have satisfactorily completed a lead paint
management training course held by the Master Painters Australia NSW Association or a course of equivalent
standard.

PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL: Where working on “lead paint risk” surfaces, ensure that all personnel, the
Principal’s tenants and the public are protected from exposure to lead hazards in accordance with the requirements
of Section 6 of AS 4361.2.

PAINTED SURFACES (INTERNAL or EXTERNAL): Where working on “lead paint risk” surfaces, take all necessary
precautions to ensure the containment of all debris, dust and contaminants in accordance with the requirements of
AS 4361.2, Section 5. Only remove all blistered, flaked and peeling paint by wet scraping and wet sanding as
described in AS 4361.2, Section 3.4.4(a). Allow surfaces to dry. Then fill, sand smooth, dusted\\ off and spot seal
voids and imperfections.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 106 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

Apply new paint in accordance with AS 2311:2000 and all other relevant requirements of the contract.

Collect up all paint scrapings and residue into sealed bags and properly dispose of it as required by the
Environment Protection Authority.

Carry out the above procedures for both internal and external surfaces requiring repainting. Address the main aim
in the above process and minimise the dust, fumes and lead contaminated spores entering the surrounding
atmosphere, soil and waterways and causing health problems for people or animals.

CLEARANCE TEST: On completion of painting of “lead paint risk” surfaces the Contractor must carry out clearance
testing in accordance with AS 4361.2. Prepare a written report, setting out the results of the clearance testing, and
submit it to the Principal’s Representative. The report must be in format approved by the Principal’s Representative.

3. MATERIALS

FILLING, STOPPING AND CLEANING MATERIALS: Ensure all paint strippers, abrasive papers and blocks,
cleaning agents, etching solution, mould inhibitors, rust inhibitors, size, stopping, knotting, fillers and other
commodities are the types recommended by the coating manufacturer for the surfaces being prepared.

4. WORKMANSHIP

SURFACE PREPARATION: Prepare all surfaces to coating manufacturers written specification.

PROTECTION: Protect all building and tenants' property from damage, including furniture, floor coverings, curtains,
gardens, plants, and the like and make good any damage. When working on or about any open windows and doors
ensure that any necessary temporary barriers are in position to stop dust and/or debris from entering the premises.
Attach dust bags to all tools, in particular electric sanders and planes and ensure the encapsulation of all disturbed
debris and dust.

CLEAN INTERIOR / EXTERIOR: Prior to painting, clean interior/exterior surfaces using sugar soap or a similar
product to suit the manufacturers written specification to remove all accumulated dirt, chalk and grime.

After washing, rinse the area thoroughly with water and allow to completely dry before painting with undercoat or
finish coat.

Dull all glossy paint areas with sandpaper or a fine steel wool before painting over.

DEFECTS: Ensure that all holes, cracks, defective joints and other defects in surfaces to be prepared and coated
are made good. Patch with matching lining material, to suit the nearest complete surround of framing, any defect
greater than 75mrn diameter.

SURFACE TO BE COATED: Do not proceed with preparation if any substrate material or surface is of such a
standard that, even with the preparation work called for in this section, it cannot be brought up to a standard that
will allow first class painting/clear finishing.

Prior to carrying out any remedial works to the defective area inform the Principal’s Representative of the defective
area so that any remedial works can be approved by the Principal’s Representative before being carried out. Post
work approval for remedial works will not be granted by the Principal’s Representative.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 107 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

DOORS AND WINDOWS: Check all doors and windows to ensure ease of movement and good working order with
correct tolerances to allow for painting and reinstate weather grooves when required. Ensure any remedial work
required is carried out in accordance with Section 2, Minor Repair Work.

PRE-PRIMED SURFACES: Sand down any breakdown or damage to the primer to a sound surface. Proceed with
re-priming immediately.

DRYING OUT: Before paint/coating application allow surfaces to dry thoroughly.

BRUSH DOWN: Brush down all surfaces immediately before application, to remove dust, dirt and loose material.

HARDWARE: Remove all hardware on surfaces prior to commencing surface preparation.

5. UNPAINTED SURFACES - TIMBER PRODUCTS

DRESSED TIMBER: Ensure timber is smooth, free from raised or woolly grain, planning burrs or other machining
defects. Slightly round or ease all sharp edges to ensure they can be properly coated. Sand to bring up to a smooth
finish along the direction of the grain.

ROUGH SAWN TIMBER: Thoroughly brush along the direction of the grain to remove dust and dirt.

DAMAGE/DEFECTS: Scrape off any loose or soft material, including in all holes, depressions, resin/gum pockets,
knotholes, surface splits, checks and any localised decay. After application of a primer/sealer, fill these areas with
linseed oil putty or other appropriate external filler.

FIXINGS: Take all timber fixings below the surface to be paint/clear finished, but leave corrosion resistant timber
fixings flush with the surface to be paint finished.

CLEANING: Remove all resin, grease and oil by wiping down with mineral turpentine or scraping. Allow to dry and
remove all dust.

6. UNPAINTED SURFACES - METAL

STEEL: Remove loose rust and scale by hand-tool or power-tool cleaning. Use chemical pre- treatment to remove
the last traces of rust and to inhibit rust formation to suit the manufacturers written specification.

ZINC/ZINC ALLOY COATED STEEL: Remove all grease, oil and other solvent soluble contaminants by
wiping/brushing with mineral turpentine or white spirit. Finally wipe clean with clean rags/brushing and clean
solvent. Allow to dry and proceed with the next operation immediately.

ALUMINIUM: Remove all grease, oil and dust by wiping/brushing with mineral turpentine or white spirit. Wash
thoroughly with clean water. Allow to dry and proceed with the next operation immediately.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 108 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

7. UNPAINTED SURFACES - MASONRY

BRICKS: Remove loose dirt, sand, aggregate and mortar by brushing down or blocking-off the surface with a flat
stone/hardwood block.

Fill holes with a mortar/Latex (Waterborne) based filler.

Remove efflorescence by dry brushing or by wetting the surface and treating it with 10% commercial hydrochloric
acid solution. Allow the surface to react for 5 minutes, scour the surface with a stiff bristle brush, wash off with clean
water and allow to dry.

Dust down and wash cleaned surfaces with clean water and allow to dry.

CONCRETE: Remove grease/formwork oil with solvent or water and household detergent. Wash with clean water
and allow to dry.

Fill unwanted holes with cement grouting and allow to cure. Remove loose surface material/surface projections with
a flat stone.

Roughen slightly dense/glazed surfaces with coarse abrasive stones or by wetting the surface and treating it with
10% commercial hydrochloric acid solution. Allow the surface to react for 5 minutes, scour the surface with a stiff
bristle brush, wash off with clean water and allow to dry.

Remove efflorescence by dry brushing or by wetting the surface and treating with 10% commercial hydrochloric
solution as above.

Remove all dust and dirt by brushing, air blast, hosing, or scrubbing as may be necessary and allow to dry.

CEMENT PLASTER: Adequately cure and dry surfaces. If mould is evident, treat surfaces with one part sodium
hypo-chlorite household bleach/three parts clean water solution or an approved proprietary anti-mould solution and
allow to dry. Remove efflorescence by brushing only.

CONCRETE MASONRY: Remove loose dirt, sand aggregate and mortar by brushing down or blocking-off surface
with a flat stone/hardwood block.

Fill holes with mortar/Latex (Waterborne) based filler.

If mould is evident, treat surfaces with one part sodium hypo-chlorite household bleach three parts clean water
solution or a proprietary anti-mould solution and allow to dry.

Remove efflorescence by dry brushing or by wetting the surface and treating with 10% commercial hydrochloric
solution. Allow the surface to react for 5 minutes, scour the surface with stiff bristle brush, wash off with clean water
and allow to dry.

Remove all dust and dirt by brushing, air blast, hosing or scrubbing as may be necessary and allow to dry.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 109 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

8. UNPAINTED SURFACES - CLADDINGS

FIBROUS PLASTER/PLASTER BOARD: Check for and remove release agents and other contaminants by
washing with clean water and solvent as necessary, and allow to dry.

Where jointing compound and cast sheet surface finishes vary in porosity treat to ensure a first class finish.

Fill cracks and surface imperfections with patching plaster and lightly sand smooth. Remove all dust.

Where sheets do not contain asbestos remove completely all mould or growth to give a clean, smooth, sound base
ready for recoating.

9. UNPAINTED SURFACES - PLASTICS

POLYESTERS (GRP) /PHENOL FORMALDEHYDES: Wipe all surfaces with methyl ethylketone or other suitable
solvent. Lightly abrade with sandpaper, and dust off. Proceed with priming immediately.

UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (UPVC): Wipe all surfaces with mineral turpentine, methylated spirits or
white spirit. Lightly abrade with sandpaper and dust off. Proceed with topcoats applicable for walls/timber
immediately.

10. PAINTED SURFACES - GENERAL

MOULD: Sterilise surface mould by washing/sponging the whole surface with a one part sodium hypo-chlorite
household bleach to three parts clean water solution and then: -
x Allow the bleach to act for 30 minutes and wash off with clean water.
x Wash cloths/sponges regularly in clean water.
x Treat with anti-mould solution to suit the manufacturers written specification.

GAP FILLING: Make good, as far as practicable, all cracks, holes, indentation and damaged surfaces with putty,
wood filler or plastic wood as appropriate in accordance with manufacturers written specification and also: -
x Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface.
x Prime coat/seal timber before using putty.
x Wet cement base plasters before applying filler.
x For exterior wet areas, use only Portland cement base type or water-insoluble organic-base gap
fillers.
x Cellulose based fillers (e.g. Polyfilla) are prohibited for exterior filling.

11. PAINTED SURFACES - GOOD CONDITION

ALL SURFACES EXCEPT ROOFS: Wash down surfaces with a solution of 5/10mL ordinary household detergent
to 1 litre of warm water or a solution of 3Ogms trisodium phosphate to 1 litre of water.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 110 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

Wash down with clean water to clean off and allow to dry. Alternatively, use a proprietary pre-paint cleaner in strict
accordance with manufacturers written specification.

For heavy smoke and grease deposits on surfaces wash down with mineral turpentine, a 5% solution of ammonia
or a 1:40 solution of sugar soap and water as necessary to remove the deposits.

Finally wipe over with clean absorbent cloths.

Prepare coatings which have chalked by sanding, brushing, water blasting (pressure must not exceed 1500psi
except for fences) or other methods as appropriate.

Sand glossy surfaces to ensure good adhesion of the coatings to be applied.

12. PAINTED SURFACES - POOR CONDITION

TIMBER: Completely remove all blistered, flaked, excessively chalked and cracked paint to give a sound base for
re-painting.

Scrape out all damaged or decayed timber and where the area is extensive, cut out and replace with treated timber
primed (including end grain) before fixing.

Scrape off any loose or soft material, including in all holes and depressions in timber due to damage or defects
such as resin/gum pockets, knotholes and surface splits.

Remove and replace sprung or loose corroded nails and screws. Punch corroded nails that cannot be replaced 1
mm below the face and provide additional nailing.

Ensure that nail and screw heads are countersunk sufficiently to hold stopping. Prime prior to stopping.

Where necessary strip paint back to the original timber using the most appropriate of the following methods:
x With all UV damaged timber, i.e. sun bleached grey areas, remove the damaged timber exposing the
original coloured timber prior to new paintwork application.
x Use an electrically heated hot air stream to soften paint before scraping off with a broad knife.
x Sand using belt sanders.
x Use paint removers to in accordance with manufacturers written specification.
x Hand scrape.

VARNISHED SURFACES: Wash down with sugar soap or similar product to suit the manufacture's
recommendations to remove grease and dirt prior to sanding. Strip all perished, disfigured and marked varnish
work with the necessary strippers, neutralisers and sealers to bring the surface to a uniform blemish-free surface.
Sand and prepare as specified under Painted Surfaces - Good Condition in this section.

FIBRE CEMENT SHEET: Where sheeting does not contain asbestos remove completely all mould, growth, and
flaking or loose paint to give a clean, sound, smooth base ready for re-coating. Feather the edges of remaining
paintwork so as not to show through finished work. Fill small cracks shall be filled with an elastomeric sealant.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 111 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.1 – PREPARATION FOR PAINTING – EXTERIOR / INTERIOR

CEMENT PLASTER/CONCRETE/MASONRY: Remove the fine white powder of efflorescence by brushing and
then wiping with a clean damp cloth. Remove faulty mortar by wire-brushing and make good with fresh mortar to
match and also: -
x Treat crumbling lime mortar with a solution of 150ml of concentrated phosphoric acid and clean water
to make 1 litre.
x Apply the solution, allow to stand for 10 minutes and wash down with clean water.
x Ensure that the cause of any dampness has been removed and that the substrate is dry before
applying any coating.
x Wire brush all moss and lichen affected areas to remove all loose powdery growth and treat affected
areas using the solution and method recommended in clause 7.5.4, A.S 2311.
x Remove grease by washing with a 1:40 solution of sugar soap and water until completely removed,
then wash with clean water and allow to dry.
x Where necessary strip paint back to the original surface.
x Remove all chalk dust and dirt when dry using a stiff bristle brush.

METALWORK: Remove all corrosion, in whatever form, where it occurs. Sand edges to form a smooth surface
unaffected by corrosion. Use chemical pre-treatment to remove any last traces of, and to inhibit future, corrosion.
Clean down completely before spot priming to suit the coating system specified.

GALVANISED STEEL (ROOFS): Ensure that the roof and all barges, ridges, valleys and flashings are sound.
Replace any sections containing rust, in accordance with Section 3.4, Roofing. Clean gutters inside and out and
clean to remove all loose and peeling paint.

Allow to dry thoroughly before painting. Feather back remaining paint with a wire brush. Spot prime exposed areas.

13. COMPLETION

On completion fully prepare all surfaces so they are ready for the application of paint coatings without further work.
Immediately after, and as necessary during preparation work, clean up and remove all debris from the Site.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 112 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

Section 6.2

PAINTING - INTERIOR

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 113 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with normal thin film coating and sealing work on prepared surfaces as specified in
Section 6.1, Preparation for Painting – Exterior/Interior, with the painting of the interiors only of each building.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to sections:-

x Section 2: Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Works
x Section 3.2: Reinstatement of Fire Damaged Property
x Section 6.1: Preparation for Painting – Exterior/Interior
x Section 6.3: Painting – Exterior

SPECIAL NOTE: The use of mobile scaffolding and or scissor lifts or similar equipment to perform the work must
comply with all standards, codes and manufacturers written specifications and recommendations.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT: Refer to Section 1

Carry out the work in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and particularly the following:-
x AS/NZS 2311: Guide to painting of buildings
x All other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.,

In some circumstances, the specified paint system may be unsuitable for a particular portion of the work. In these
situations, an alternative system may be proposed by the Contractor to the Principal's Representative complete
with supporting data, technical details and a full quality plan. The Principal’s Representative will then review the
alternative system and, where appropriate, may accept the Contractor's proposal.

2. MATERIALS

COATING MATERIALS: Comply with Section 10, Components Schedule.

The whole of the paint materials to be used must be Premium Quality, brought on to the Site in the original sealed
containers with the manufacturers label, seal intact, applied in accordance with the manufacturers written
specification and conforming with the appropriate Australian Paint Approval Scheme (APAS) specification. Where
required, make samples available for testing purposes.

PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATS: These must be of the same brand as the finishing coat for all surfaces.

MOULD RESISTANT PAINTS: Use those in all areas prone to mould such as laundries, bathrooms and kitchens.

DELIVERY: All thin film coatings must be delivered in sealed containers, clearly labelled with the following
information:
x Type of material
x Brand name
x APAS approval number.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 114 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

3. WORKMANSHIP

SURFACE PREPARATION: comply with Section 6.1, Preparation for Painting Exterior/Interior. Report to the
Principal’s Representative any surfaces which may not provide the required finish or contain defects that may
adversely affect the painting work. Commencement of painting means that the substrate is warranted by the
Contractor as satisfactory for first quality work.

COLOUR RANGE: Carry out painting in the selected colours. For touch-up work use a paint colour to match the
existing. Generally, paint ceilings and windows white. A colour scheme may be supplied by the Principal’s
Representative before the commencement of painting.

CLEANLINESS: Keep all brushes, tools and equipment in a clean condition. Keep all surfaces clean and free from
dust during coating and drying. Provide a suitable receptacle for liquids, slop washings and the like. Do not use any
sanitary fitting of the building for the disposal of waste or for cleaning equipment. Store materials in a dry area
protected from extreme temperatures and clear of the floor.

DRY FILM THICKNESS TESTING: The Principal’s Representative may direct that a dry film thickness test in
accordance with AS/1580 be carried out to establish film thickness. Any damage as a consequence must be made
good at the expense of the Contractor.

PAINT DEMARCATION: Paint windows and doors as follows:-

x Butt windows and doors interior paintwork to exterior paintwork.
x Extend windows and doors interior paintwork to the outside corner of the head / stile of doorjambs
and paint the outside corner of heads / sills / stiles / reveals / sashes and the like (including areas
hidden by sash in closed position).

4. PREPARATION OF MATERIALS

GENERAL: Prepare coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Strain through fine gauze any coating
material showing small particles in application. Do not intermix different coating materials. Stir coating materials to
obtain an even consistency before use, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Only add thinners, driers
and extenders in accordance with manufacturers written specification.

5. PROTECTION

DAMAGE: Protect freshly applied coating surfaces from damage.

SIGNS: Where necessary, exhibit 'Wet Paint” signs and provide protective barriers.

ADJACENT SURFACES: Protect surfaces adjacent to those being coated.

GLAZING: Protect etched, sand blasted and ground glass glazing from attack by oily constituents of coating
materials by treating and protecting edges before coating and cleaning surfaces immediately after coating.

FITTINGS, FIXTURES & HARDWARE: Remove these from surfaces to be coated and cleaned and replace them
square, plumb and true on completion. Do not paint hinges unless previously painted.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 115 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

6. APPLICATION

GENERAL: Apply coatings as specified and in accordance with the manufacturers written specification and after
any previous coats have achieved the necessary drying before re-coating.

UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS: Do not apply coatings:

x To surfaces affected by damp of frost.
x When the surface or ambient temperature inhibits the proper application of the paint, where possible
taking all necessary action to minimise delays.
x When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.

PRIMING (GENERALLY): Apply priming coats by brush unless other methods are specifically permitted. Work
primer into surfaces, joints, angles and end grain. Ensure that priming coats are of adequate thickness and suit
surface porosity.

Ensure that any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on site or in transit are touched-up or re-primed.
Re-prime if more than one month has elapsed since priming before top coating.

PRIMING JOINERY: Where timber has been treated with preservative, check and ensure that coating materials are
compatible with the preservative.

PRIMING METAL: Prime metal surfaces on same day as they have been prepared and cleaned.

UNDERCOATS: Apply an even film over all surfaces, to a continuous wet edge, avoiding uneven thickness at
edges and angles. Tint undercoats differently relative to the surface colour scheme.

FINISHING COATS: Apply an even film over all surfaces, to a continuous wet edge, avoiding brush marks, sags,
runs and other defects. Where two gloss finishing coats are specified, apply the second coat within 48 hours of the
first coat.

TIMBER FITTINGS: Apply the finish required to top, bottom, edges and all internal surfaces, including shelves.

TIMBER DOORS: Prime and paint top and bottom edges of new doors before hanging doors with the same number
of coats as specified for the exposed surfaces. Paint the inside and outside of doors and frames. Existing internal
insitu doors to be prepared and painted front, back and stile sides only.

RUB DOWN: Rub down all priming and undercoats to a smooth surface with fine glass paper and remove all dust
before applying the next coat.

GLAZING REBATES AND BEADS: Apply coatings to rebates and beads before glazing.

GLAZING PUTTY: Remove all loose putty, prime rebates, sprig and reputty as required and prime and paint
glazing putty and compounds, as recommended by their manufacturer. Clean glass before priming putty faces.
Extend paint adjacent to glazing across putty and 2mm on to glass, but not beyond sight lines. Wipe off any over-
painting beyond sight line while wet and do not allow it to dry and later cut back.

BRUSH PAINTING: Apply all paints by brush unless otherwise recommended by AS 2311:2000 or as approved by
the Principal’s Representative. Lay off all areas evenly and ensure that finished surfaces are free from brush marks.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 116 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

SPRAY PAINTING: Unless specifically requested in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the
Principal’s Representative, no spray painting shall be permitted inside or outside a building. Where approval is
given then only use airless spray painting. Mask all adjoining surfaces.

7. SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR PAINT FINISHES

KITCHENS / BATHROOMS /LAUNDRIES: Finish the walls of all kitchens, cooking recesses, bathrooms, combined
laundry/bathrooms, laundries and W.C. recesses with 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) gloss; and finish woodwork and
painted cupboards in alkyd full gloss enamel.

Where the dining room and kitchen or living room and kitchen have common wall surfaces, all such wall surfaces
are to be painted as for the kitchen with 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) gloss.

OTHER ROOMS: Finish friezes and walls of other rooms in 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) semi gloss and finish
woodwork with varnished\ or paint as specified.

CEILINGS: Finish all ceilings and cornices to all rooms with an appropriate ceiling paint (100% Acrylic Waterborne)
matt finish to suit the purpose of the room.

Cover interior sash channels (runners) and parting beads, where stained and varnished, with two (2) coats of
Shellac or equal and where painted, with one (1) coat of a suitable undercoating and one coat of full gloss enamel.
Allow to dry and harden overnight, then move sashes so that they run freely in the channels (runners).

INTERNAL OF KITCHEN AND LINEN PRESS CUPBOARDS: Apply two (2) coats of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne)
full gloss to cupboards. Where previously painted, after preparation, apply one (1) coat of 100% Acrylic
(Waterborne) full gloss.

BATHROOM, KITCHEN, DINING ROOM, COMBINED LAUNDRY/BATHROOM, TOILET AND LAUNDRY (WHERE
PREVIOUSLY PAINTED): Prepare ceilings, walls and woodwork as specified then, as directed apply EITHER one
(1) coat of a suitable oil based undercoating and one (1) coat of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) full gloss, OR two (2)
coats of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) full gloss. If kalsomined, prepare as specified and then apply one (1) coat of a
sealer, prior to painting as above.

PAINTING OF NEW AND OLD CONCRETE FLOORS: Previously Painted: Prepare as specified, spot prime bare
prepared areas with paving paint. Allow eight (8) hours to dry and then apply two (2) coats of paving paint, allowing
eight (8) hours drying between coats.

ALL NEW SURFACES (NOT PREVIOUSLY PAINTED): Prepare as specified, then apply one (1) coat of sealer
prior to being painting.

IN ALL OTHER ROOMS: Prepare ceiling, friezes and walls as specified, then, as directed apply EITHER one (1)
coat of oil based undercoating and finish with one (1) coat of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) semi-gloss, OR apply two
(2) coats of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) semi-gloss, OR ceilings apply two (2) coats of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne)
ceiling paint to suit the purpose of the room.

ALL WOODWORK OR HARDBOARD WHERE PREVIOUSLY VARNISHED: Where specified to be varnished,

prepare as specified and touch up with stain where necessary to match existing, then apply one (1) or two (2) coats
of Satin type polyurethane as directed.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 117 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.2 – PAINTING – INTERIOR

ALL (CRAZED) WOODWORK OR HARDBOARD WHERE PREVIOUSLY VARNISHED: Where specified to be

varnished but crazed and perished removed all varnish with paint and varnish remover, then thoroughly neutralise
as specified. Then stain to the approved colour, putty, colour where necessary, fill with suitable wood filler and
apply one (1) coat of Shellac and finish with two (2) coats of Polyurethane Satin clear.

WOODWORK OR HARDBOARD WHERE PREVIOUSLY VARNISHED AND SPECIFIED TO BE PAINTED:

remove all varnish with varnish and paint remover, then thoroughly neutralise as specified and apply one (1) coat of
primer, stop up and apply one (1) coat of a suitable undercoating and one (1) finishing coat of suitable alkyd full
gloss Solvent-bourne paint.

WOODWORK WHERE PREVIOUSLY PAINTED: Prepare as specified then apply one (1) coat of a suitable alkyd
full gloss Solvent-bourne paint.

WOODWORK WHERE PREVIOUSLY KALSOMINED OR WATER COLOURED OR UNPAINTED: Clean down to

the original surface and apply one (1) coat of primer, stop up and then apply one (1) coat of a suitable undercoating
and one (1) coat of a suitable alkyd full gloss Solvent-bourne paint. Include the internal faces of all cupboard doors.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 118 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

Section 6.3

PAINTING - EXTERIOR

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 119 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with normal thin film coating and sealing work on external prepared surfaces as
specified in Section 6.1, Preparation for Painting – Exterior/Interior, with including the painting of the exteriors only
of each building. Paint all previously painted surfaces, including eave soffits, feature panels, mail boxes, railings,
valley iron, vent pipes, all surfaces of carports / garages etc. and yard storage lockers as standard items. .

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to sections:

x Section 2: Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Work.
x Section 3.2: Reinstatement of Fire Damaged Property
x Section 6.1: Preparation of Painting – Interior/Exterior
x Section 6.2 – Painting - Interior

SPECIAL NOTE: The use of mobile scaffolding and or scissor lifts or similar equipment to perform the work must
comply with all standards, codes and manufacturers written specification and recommendations.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT: Refer to Section 1.

Carry out the work in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and particularly the following:-
x AS/NZS 2311: Guide to painting of buildings
x All other relevant standards, Acts, codes of practice and guidelines.

In some circumstances, the specified paint system may be unsuitable for a particular portion of the works. In these
situations an alternative system may be proposed by the Contractor to the Principal’s Representative, complete
with supporting data, technical details and a full quality plan. The Principal’s Representative will then review the
alternative system and, where appropriate, may accept the Contractor's proposal.

PROPERTY IDENTIFICATION, DATE OF COMPLETION OF PAINTING AND BRAND OF PAINT USED:

When the external painting of a building is completed, record the date of completion and types/brands of paint used
thereon. Stencil this information and the Lot/Unit number in black, in a space not greater than 375mm x 300mm,
onto the painted inside of the electric meter box door, or alternatively in a position directed by the Principal’s
Representative. Stencil letters must be legible at 10m, in Black on a White background. Supply all stencils.

2. MATERIALS

COATING MATERIALS: Comply with Section 10, components Schedule.

The whole of the paint materials to be used must be premium quality, brought on to the Site in the original sealed
containers with the manufacturers label, seal intact, and applied in accordance with the manufacturers written
specification and conforming with the appropriate Australian Paint Approval Scheme (APAS) specification. Where
required, make samples available for testing purposes.

PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATS: These must be of the same brand as the finishing coat for all surfaces.

DELIVERY: All thin film coatings must be delivered in sealed containers, clearly labelled with the following
information:-
x Type of material

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 120 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

x Brand name
x APAS approval number.

3. WORKMANSHIP

SURFACE PREPARATION: comply with Section 6.1, Preparation for Painting – Exterior/Interior. Report to the
Principal’s Representative any surfaces which may not provide the required finish or contain defects that may
adversely affect the painting work. Commencement of painting means that the substrate is warranted by the
Contractor as satisfactory for first quality work.

COLOUR RANGE: Carry out painting in the selected colours. A colour scheme may be supplied by the Principal’s
Representative before the commencement of painting.

CLEANLINESS: Keep all brushes, tools and equipment in a clean condition. Keep all surfaces clean and free from
dust during coating and drying. Provide a suitable receptacle for liquids, slop washings and the like. Do not use any
sanitary fitting of the building for the disposal of waste or for cleaning equipment. Store materials in a dry area
protected from extreme temperatures and clear of the floor.

DRY FILM THICKNESS TESTING: The Principal’s Representative may direct that a dry film thickness test in
accordance with AS1580 be carried out to establish film thickness. Any damage as a consequence must be made
good at the expense of the Contractor.

PAINT DEMARCATION: Paint windows and doors so exterior paintwork butts to interior paintwork, extending to the
inside edge of all accessible edges of sashes and doors.

INTERIOR OF GUTTER: Thoroughly clean guttering of leaves and other debris prior to painting the exterior of the
gutter.

4. PREPARATION OF MATERIALS

Prepare coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Strain through fine gauze any coating material
showing small particles in application. Do not intermix different coating materials. Stir coating materials to obtain an
even consistency before use, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Only add thinners, dryers and
extenders in accordance with manufacturers written specification.

5. PROTECTION

DAMAGE: Protect freshly applied coatings surfaces from damage.

SIGNS: Where necessary, exhibit “Wet Paint” signs and provide protective barriers.

ADJACENT SURFACES: Protect surfaces adjacent to those being coated.

GLAZING: Protect etched, sand blasted and ground glass glazing from attack by oily constituents of coating
materials by treating and protecting edges before coating and cleaning surfaces immediately after coating.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 121 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

FITTINGS, FIXTURES & HARDWARE: Remove these from surfaces to be coated and cleaned, and replace them
square, plumb and true on completion. Do not paint hinges unless previously painted.

6. APPLICATION

GENERAL: Apply coatings as specified in accordance with the manufacturers written specification and after any
previous coats have achieved the necessary drying before re-coating.

UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS: Do not apply coatings:-

x To surfaces affected by damp of frost.
x When the surface or ambient temperature is below 10 degrees C.
x When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.

PRIMING (GENERALLY): Apply priming coats by brush unless other methods are specifically permitted. Work
primer into surfaces, joints, angles and end grain. Ensure that priming coats are of adequate thickness and suit
surface porosity.

Ensure that any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on site or in transit are touched-up or re-primed.
Re-prime if more than one month has elapsed since priming before top coating.

PRIMING JOINERY: Where timber has been treated with preservative, check and ensure that coating materials are
compatible with the preservative.

PRIMING METAL: Prime metal surfaces on same day as they have been prepared and cleaned.

UNDERCOATS: Apply an even film over all surfaces, to a continuous wet edge, avoiding uneven thickness at
edges and angles. Tint undercoats differently relative to the surface colour scheme.

FINISHING COATS: Apply an even film over all surfaces, to a continuous wet edge, avoiding brush marks, sags,
runs and other defects. Where two gloss finishing coats are specified, apply the second coat within 48 hours of the
first coat.

TIMBER FITTINGS: Apply the finish required to top, bottom, edges and all internal surfaces including shelves.

EXTERIOR TIMBER DOORS: Prime and paint top and bottom edges before hanging doors with the same number
of coats as specified for the exposed surfaces. Paint the inside and outside of doors and frames.

RUB DOWN: Rub down all priming and undercoats to a smooth surface with fine glass paper and remove all dust
before applying the next coat.

GLAZING REBATES AND BEADS: Apply coatings to rebates and beads before glazing.

GLAZING PUTTY: Remove all loose putty, prime rebates, sprig and re-putty as required and prime and paint
glazing putty and compounds, as recommended by their manufacturer. Clean glass before priming putty faces.
Extend paint adjacent to glazing across putty and 2mm on to glass, but not beyond sight lines. Wipe off any
over-paint beyond sight lines while wet and do not allow it to dry and later cut back.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 122 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

BRUSH PAINTING: Apply all paints by brush unless otherwise recommended by AS 2311:2000 or approved by the
Principal’s Representative. Lay off all areas evenly and ensure that finished surfaces are free from brush marks.

SPRAY PAINTING: Unless specifically requested in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the
Principal’s Representative, no spray painting shall be permitted inside or outside a building. Where approval is
given then only use airless spray painting. Mask all adjoining surfaces.

7. CLADDING TYPE DESCRIPTIONS

FLAT FIBRE/CEMENT SHEETING: This includes all buildings where majority of external surfaces are clad by Flat
Fibre/Asbestos Cement Sheeting.

MOULDED FIBRE/CEMENT WEATHERBOARD, HARDBOARD AND HARDIPLANK: This includes all buildings
where the majority of external surfaces are clad with Fibre/Asbestos Cement Weatherboard, Hardboard or
Hardiplank Cladding.

CEMENT RENDERED, PAINTED BRICK WALLS OR MONOCRETE: This includes all buildings where the majority
of external surfaces are Cement Render and/or Painted Brick Walls.

TIMBER WEATHERBOARDS: This includes all buildings where the majority of external surfaces are clad with
Timber Weatherboards.

BRICK AND BRICK VENEER: This includes all buildings where the majority of external surfaces are clad with
Brick.

NOTE: In some cases there may be some buildings that will have other cladding features that are to be painted.

8. SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR PAINT FINISHES

EXTERNAL PAINTED SURFACES/WALLS: Apply to these surfaces, after preparation, two (2) coats of Latex
(Waterborne or Solvent borne) Gloss paint. Where existing paintwork is perished OR a change in paint system is
approved, seal the areas with one (1) coat of pigmented sealer prior to one (1) coat application of a suitable compatible
undercoat then two (2) coats of Latex (Waterborne or Solvent borne) Gloss Paint.

Treat and prime wooden cover moulds as specified below, prior to the application of the finishing coat/s.

UNDERCOATING OF EXTERNAL SURFACES Where existing paintwork is perished OR a change in paint system is
approved, seal all worn or perished areas with one (1) coat of pigmented sealer prior to the one coat (1) application of a
suitable compatible undercoat.

PAINTING EXTERNAL WOODWORK, PREVIOUSLY PAINTED: Paint all woodwork, which has previously been
painted, with one (1) coat of suitable compatible undercoat and EITHER one (1) coat of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne)
Gloss or one (1) coat of Solvent-borne Full Gloss paint as directed.

WOODWORK WHERE PREVIOUSLY PAINTED WITH PLASTIC OR NOT APPROVED MATERIALS (ALL PAINTS
OTHER THAN 100% ACRYLIC (WATERBORNE) OR ENAMEL): Thoroughly strip the surface, then treat and prim with
a suitable primer which must have the relevant APAS approval number, then treat as for woodwork which has
previously been painted.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 123 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

WOODWORK NOT PREVIOUSLY PAINTED OR WHERE PAINT IS PERISHED: Remedy woodwork (other than
fences) where paint has completely perished and the original surface is exposed, or which was omitted in the original
painting and would normally be painted, by first removing all perished paint by a suitable method. Refer to Section 6.1,
Preparation for Painting – Exterior/Interior.

Then apply to all bare surfaces one (1) coat primer (of a suitable pink primer which must conform to the Australian
Standard) stop up, fill cracks etc., sand back and then apply one (1) coat of a suitable undercoat and either one (1)
coat of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) Gloss or one (1) coat of Solvent-borne Full Gloss finish as directed. Lightly sand
between coats.

TREATED PINE DECKING (NOT PAINTED): Apply to all Treated Pine decking two (2) coats of treated pine
finishing Oil.

FENCES (eg PARK RAIL) PREVIOUSLY PAINTED: Apply to all bare surfaces after preparation one (1) coat of a
suitable wood primer, stop and putty up and then apply one (1) coat of a suitable undercoating, allowing at least
twenty-four (24) hours for coats to dry and harden, and apply one (1) coat of a suitable finishing coat of paint.

WOODWORK (eg. PALING) PREVIOUSLY STAINED OR UNPAINTED: Where directed, apply two (2) coats of
100% Acrylic (Waterborne) wood stain.

STREET NUMBERS: Where previously painted or directed to paint, paint all street numbers wherever located black
or the colour directed by the Principal's Representative.

PORCHES, VERANDAHS AND THE LIKE: Paint the interior and exterior of front and rear porches and verandah's
painted with the other exterior in accordance with the specification for the appropriate external surface.

Where fully enclosed and permanently locked up for use as a front or back entrance, paint only the external surface
areas. Paint concrete porch floors, where directed, with a suitable non-slip finish.

FLYSCREEN DOORS AND WINDOWS - (EXCEPT ALUMINIUM): Paint both sides, including W.I. in-fills as
specified according to the condition / material. If removed for painting, allow flyscreens twenty-four (24) hours to dry
and harden after the application of each coat, and then re-fix them after the final coat in accordance with general
practice.

NOTE: Paint the interior of all porches, verandah’s and sleep-outs, where screened originally with wire gauze or
blinds etc., with the exterior of each building as specified for such surfaces.

EXTERNAL BALCONY VERANDAH OR TOILET DOORS: Where doors open out paint BOTH SIDES.

LATTICE SCREENS, OR UNPAINTED BATTEN INFILLS: Paint all lattice work which has been previously painted
or oil stained as specified. Where the lattice work and batten infills were unpainted, two (2) coats of 100% of Latex
(Waterborne) Wood stain or paint as directed.

METAL GUTTER, DOWNPIPES, FLASHINGS, VENT PIPES, ETC: Apply to guttering, downpipes, vent pipes, all
service pipes and chain wire on fencing, all flashing and valleys, after preparation, one (1) coat of a suitable
undercoating, and either two (2) coats of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) Gloss or two (2) coats of Solvent-bourne Full
Gloss paint as directed and ensure adequate coverage.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 124 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6.3 – PAINTING – EXTERIOR

Seek direction from the Principal (providing details of the painting and preparation to be undertaken) before painting
oxidised or damaged powder coated or colorbond painted surfaces.

Thoroughly clean down and completely de-grease by washing with mineral turps, thinner or other suitable solvents
all new or unpainted G.I. gutter, downpipes and combined gutter/fascia. Dried to a clean surface and then paint with
one coat of suitable galvanised iron primer (water based type is acceptable) and then painted as specified above.

WROUGHT IRON: Spot prime with one (1) coat of a suitable rust inhibiting metal primer (water based is
acceptable), then apply one (1) coat of a suitable metal primer undercoating coloured to match the finishing coat,
followed by either one (1) coat of 100% Acrylic (Waterborne) Gloss or Solvent-borne Full Gloss paint as directed.

CORRUGATED IRON ROOF: Spot prime with one (1) coat of a suitable rust inhibiting metal primer, (water based
is acceptable) then apply one (1) coat of a suitable metal primer undercoating coloured to match the finishing coat,
followed by two (2) coats of approved roof paint.

WALLS - EXTERNAL MARKS OR BLEEDING COLOUR, ETC: Effectively seal all bituminous marks, indelible
pencil marks or bleeding colours, which become apparent after the application of paint, before proceeding further.

TREATMENT OF BLISTERS OR CRACKED PAINT: Surface to receive one (1) coat of an approved wood primer,
stopped and puttied up and then to receive one (1) coat of an approved undercoating, allowing at least twenty-four
(24) hours to dry and harden, and finish with two (2) coats of an approved finishing coat of paint.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 125 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 7

CARPET AND RESILIENT

FLOORING

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 126 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

1. GENERAL

SCOPE: This section deals with the supply of all necessary materials, associated work and labour for the
installation of Carpet and Resilient Flooring, and the repair of existing carpets as specified.

CROSS REFERENCES: Refer particularly to Sections;

x Section 2: Carpentry & Joinery and Minor Repair Work
x Section 3.2: Re-instatement of Fire Damaged Property

Carry out the work in accordance with the Legislative and Policy Conditions and particularly the following:-
x AS 1884 Floor Coverings – Resilient Sheet And Tiles – Laying And Maintenance Practices
x AS/NZS 2455/1: Textile floor coverings – Installation practice
x AS/NZS 3733: Textile floor coverings – Cleaning maintenance of residential and commercial
carpeting,
x The National Standard for Manual Handling (NOHSC:1001 (1990)
x all other relevant Acts, codes of practice, standards and guidelines.

CONTRACTORS: Contractors are required to hold a NSW Department of TAFE Certificate 111 – floor coverings &
finishing or craft certificate – floor coverings & finishing (or equivalent).

The contractor is to ensure that the moisture content of the floor surface is satisfactory for the product being to
applied or installed prior to installation.

Any unsatisfactory surface is to be notified to the Principal’s Representative prior to work commencing or
installation being undertaken.

2. MATERIALS

Comply with Section 10, Component Schedule. Contractors are to submit products to the Principal's
Representative for approval.
Samples of all Deliverables for Carpet and Resilient Flooring must be submitted for prior approval before starting
any work. All samples are to be submitted separately within seven (10) working days of the date of awarding the
contract.

The sample requirements are:

™ One small swatch/sample card of each product and a full colour range (sample boards are
acceptable).
™ A sample of Carpet back-printing in accordance with the Components and Products.
™ Samples must be clearly marked with:
o Contract Number
o Product and Manufacturers Name
o Name of Contractor
All costs incurred in relation to the preparation, delivery and subsequent collection of samples shall be borne by the
Contractor.

The Principal is committed to Ecological Sustainable Development and products which contain recycled products or
which can be recycled (to minimise waste management) will be supported

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 127 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

3. QUALITY AND WORK PRACTICES

INSPECTION: Before starting work inspect the base surface of the floor to ensure that it will allow first class
workmanship and that all fittings and fixtures, around which the carpet and Resilient Flooring is to be scribed, are in
place. Do not start work until these requirements are met.

COMMENCEMENT: Do not begin work before the building is enclosed, all wet work is complete, doors are hung
and lockable, finishes and trim complete, all outlets, duct covers and fixtures round which the carpet and Resilient
Flooring need to be cut have been fitted and good lighting is available.

Commencement of this work means that the base floor is warranted by the Contractor as satisfactory for first quality
work.

PROTECTION: Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during installation and make good any damage to
them at no expense to the Principal.

TESTING
All carpet, and resilient flooring products submitted for approval must have a current copy of the following tests in
accordance with AS2111.
™ Flammability Test
o AS 1530 Part 3 Early Fire Hazard Properties, and
o AS ISO 9239.1 – 2003(Critical Radiant Flux)
Determination Of Total Pile Mass in accordance with AS 2111

4. PREPARATION

TIMBER FLOOR - EXISTING: Strip off all existing floor coverings where required together with all adhesives and
surface contaminants. Sand all floors to a flat finish. Vacuum to remove all dust. Overlay all tongue & groove floors
to receive Resilient Flooring or direct stick on carpet \ with 5.5mm hardboard underlay or equivalent with staggered
joints. Allow 1mm expansion gaps between sheets and 3mm gaps at the perimeter. Fix with 25 x 2mm flooring
staples at 150mm centres throughout sheets and 75mm centres to perimeter of sheets, and a maximum 12mm
from sheet edges in accordance with the manufacturers written specification.

CONCRETE FLOOR - EXISTING: Remove all existing coverings completely including adhesives. Where required,
patch cracks and depressions with a suitable levelling compound to the manufacturers written specification. Leave
the surface level, smooth and clean with all loose material and dust removed. Seal powdery surfaces where
required.

HANDLING: Avoid distortion, stretching, marking and damage to edges while shifting, unrolling and handling carpet
and Resilient Flooring and accessories. Do not use damaged material.

With handling and working temperatures and conditions for vinyl, follow the manufacturers written specification.

BCA Class 1 and Class 2 Dwellings – Domestic Range Carpet

Level Loop Carpet: Either 100% nylon products with a total pile mass not less than 678 g/m² (20oz) ± 5% to AS
2111, or Nylon Wool blend products (min 50% Nylon) with a total pile mass not less than 1085 g/m² (32oz) ± 5% to
AS 2111.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 128 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

Nylon Fibre Quality: Not less than 15 Denier per filament

Tuft Withdrawal Force: Loop pile: 30 Newtons minimum to AS 2111.

Backing:
PRIMARY: The carpet manufacturer must ensure that the Primary backing is suitable for intended use.
SECONDARY: 203 g/m² Woven Jute (minimum). 90 g/m² (minimum) Woven Synthetic Backing (for dual bonding or
direct stick applications)
SECONDARY BACK ADHESION: 30 Newtons (minimum) to AS 2111.16 (conventionally laid, Dual bond or direct
stick application)
EXTRACTABLE MATTER: Wool blend: 1.5% (maximum) to AS 2001. and Synthetic: 1.0% (maximum) to AS
2001.3.4
COLOUR FASTNESS TO:
™ LIGHT: 5-6 (minimum) to ISO105.B02
™ SHAMPOO: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.2
™ RUBBING: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.1
™ DRY CLEANING SOLVENTS: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2001.4.16
STAIN RESISTANCE (NYLON PRODUCTS ONLY)
4 (minimum) to FD + C Food Red 40 – IWS 282 (AWTA T86C)
TWIST SET RETENSION
60% (minimum) to IWS TIL 46
PROOFING TREATMENT
The Wool Pile Fibres shall be treated against moth and beetle attack by applying an approved insecticide to meet
the requirements of The Woolmark Company and Fernmark (Wools of NZ).
Pensioner Housing, Modified Housing for the disabled and BCA Class 3 and Common Areas (BCA Class 2
properties), -Commercial Ranges Are Defined As:
Tufted & Carpet Tiles
x Wool or wool blend (minimum 80% wool) products with a total pile mass greater than 1355 g/m²
(40oz) ± 5% to AS 2111.11
Wool Fibre Quality
Specialty carpet wools chosen for their Crimp and/or Medullation, averaging not less than 33 microns when
measured according to AS 2001.2.1
Tuft Withdrawal Force
Tufted Products
x Loop pile: 30 Newtons minimum to AS 2111.15
Backing
Tufted Products
PRIMARY
x The carpet manufacturer must ensure that the Primary backing is suitable for intended use.
SECONDARY
x 203 g/m² Woven Jute (minimum)

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 129 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

x 90 g/m² (minimum) Woven Synthetic Backing (for dual bonding or direct stick applications)
Secondary Back Adhesion
40 Newtons (minimum) to AS 2111.16 (Jute – conventionally laid)
30 Newtons (minimum) to AS2111.16 (Dual bond or direct stick application)
Extractable Matter
Wool or wool blend: 1.5% (maximum) to AS 2001.3.4
Colour Fastness To
LIGHT: 5-6 (minimum) to ISO105.B02
SHAMPOO: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.2
RUBBING: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.1
DRY CLEANING SOLVENTS: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2001.4.16
Twist Set Retention
60% (minimum) to IWS TIL 46
Proofing Treatment
The Wool Pile Fibres shall be treated against moth and beetle attack by applying an approved insecticide to meet
the requirements of The Woolmark Company and Fernmark (Wools of NZ).

BCA Class 9 dwellings:

Loop pile Solution dyed nylon products greater than 810 g/m² (24oz) ± 5% to AS 2111.11
Solution Dyed Nylon Fibre Quality
Not less than 15 Denier per filament and containing Anti static filaments to reduce electrostatic generation to not
more than 3 kilovolts when tested to AATCC 134
Tuft Withdrawal Force
Loop pile: 30 Newtons minimum to AS 2111.15
Backing
PRIMARY:
x The carpet manufacturer must ensure that the Primary backing is suitable for intended use.
SECONDARY:
x 90 g/m² (minimum) Woven Synthetic Backing (for dual bonding or direct stick applications)
or
x The carpet manufacturer must ensure that the Secondary backing (impervious or otherwise) is
suitable for intended use.
SECONDARY BACK ADHESION
x 30 Newtons (minimum) to AS2111.16 (Dual bond or direct stick application)
Extractable Matter
Synthetic: 1.0% (maximum) to AS 2001.3.4
Testing
Test certificates will be required for the following nominated tests. Test results submitted must be from a NATA or
IANZ approved testing authority.
Colour Fastness to
LIGHT: 5-6 (minimum) to ISO105.B02
SHAMPOO: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.2
RUBBING: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2111.19.1
DRY CLEANING SOLVENTS: 3-4 (minimum) to AS 2001.4.16
Anti Microbial Treatment

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 130 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

All products must be tested to assess the survival of organisms to AWTA test procedure HHC – 5 or equivalent.
Products that do not attain a pass will not be considered.
Resistance to Water Penetration
Products offered with an Impervious backing system must be tested to AS2001.2.17. Only products with a
resistance that exceed 100kPa will be considered.
Drag Resistance
Products will be required to have test results for AWTA HHC-3 test procedure. The results of the test will be used to
determine the drag resistance between the carpet offered and an “EVAC-SLIDE SHEET” (420 denier nylon).
Dimensional Stability
All broadloom products must have dimensional stability of 1% or better, when tested according to AWTA test
method HHC-7 (or equivalent).
Stain Resistance
4 (minimum) to FD + C Food Red 40 – IWS 282 (AWTA T86C)
4 (minimum) to Bleach – IWS 282 (AWTA T86C)
3 (minimum) to Iodine – IWS 282 (AWTA T86C)
Twist Set Retention
60% (minimum) to IWS TIL 46

5. CARPET LAYING

PLANNING AND GENERAL LAYOUT: Provide the general layout of carpet so that: -
(a) Seams run in as longer lengths as possible, straight and parallel with the main access of the room.
(b) Traffic runs along the seams.
(c) Light from windows is not across the seam.
(d) Pile faces away from the light source.
(e) Pile faces towards the main entry to the area of installation.
(f) On stairs, pile lay runs towards leading stair edge.
(g) Selvage seams are accurately aligned throughout the entire installation.
(h) Textile floor coverings start with a full width on the door side.
(i) Part width fill-outs are placed on the opposite side of the room from the door.
(j) Floor coverings are accurately and closely fitted to skirting, architraves and other perimeters.
(k) Where different floor coverings abut at doorways where there is a fitted door, the junctions of the floor
coverings are within the thickness of the closed door.
(l) Fill-outs are not used in doorways where the same textile floor covering is on both sides.
(m) In circumstances where two fill-outs are used in one room, they do not abut.
(n) Fill-outs are not positioned between full widths.

SEAMING AND JOINING: For all seams and cross-joins the following applies:
(a) Seams and joins must not break down when under traffic use or being stretched.
(b) The pile lay must be in the same direction on either side of a seam or cross-join.
(c) Pile lay must not be caught down into a seam or cross-join and there must be bi gaps in the pile.
(d) The seams and cross-joins must be straight and aligned and as flat as possible.
(e) Ensure straight seams with diagonals and designs correctly aligned.
(f) Backing edges must butt and not overlap or gap.
(g) Minimise cross-joins in an installations.
(h) Ensure cross-joins are unobtrusive.
(i) Ensure cross-joins are not placed in main traffic ways.
(j) Ensure cross-joins in a filler are not less than 100cm apart.
(k) The number of cross-joins in a filler is not greater than:

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 131 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

(i) in a half-width, one cross-join;

(ii) in a third width, two cross-joins; and
(iii) in a quarter width, three cross-joins.
(l) Where the pattern of a textile floor covering requires cross-joins less than 100cm apart, ensure they
are the closest multiple of the pattern to 100cm.

DYE LOT: Contractors must ensure that carpet laid in a single area must be of a single specified type, quality,
colour and design comes from one manufacturing batch and dye lot.

CROSS JOINS: Carpet in high traffic areas is to be free of cross joins. The work is to planned with a minimum of
cross joins, without resulting in excess wastage. In the event of cross joins being unavoidable a seaming adhesive
must be applied prior to seaming.

HEAT BONDING TAPES: Binding and seaming use the tape type and width recommended by the tape and carpet
manufacturers to suit the specified carpet and the standard of performance required. The seams and cross joins of
all conventionally laid carpets must have an appropriate seam adhesive applied to both edges prior to heat tape
joining.
Conventionally laid carpets are to be joined using low odour and low smoke foil backed heat-bonding tape similar or
equal to Roberts Super Tape (50-331) & Polymer 125 Commercial Foil Tape. Tapes of inferior quality to the above
are not to be used under any circumstances.

INSTALLATION - CARPET DIRECT-STICK SYSTEM: The installation of carpet using the direct-stick system shall
be limited to installing carpet to Pensioner Housing, dwellings modified for disabled, and Class 3 and Class 9
Dwellings.

UNDERLAY SEAMS: Seams of underlay shall not coincide with those of the carpet when laid in the same direction.
Seams of underlay shall not shadow through the carpet. Join seams of underlay with tapes at least 50mm wide,
with non-staining adhesive.

SMOOTHEDGE (CARPET GRIPPER) All conventionally laid carpet is to be installed on commercial grade
architectural type carpet gripper (smooth edge) to the specifications below.
™ Length: >1200 mm
™ Thickness: Minimum - 6.8 mm, Maximum 8.00 mm
™ Width: Minimum - 33 mm
™ Pins: Minimum - 3 rows in width, 98 per unit
™ Plywood: Minimum - 3 ply (must be evenly sized veneers)
Domestic carpet gripper will not be acceptable on any commercial carpet installations under any circumstances.
Domestic Carpet Gripper (smooth edge) may only be used on the installation of domestic products in domestic
applications.
The gripper is to be fixed as necessary by a combination of: -
™ Nailing with suitable nails
™ Sticking with anchor weld or equivalent adhesive.
™ Drill, plug and screw.

STAIRS: Provide and fit suitable aluminium stair nosing to Common Area stairs fixed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations. Heavy duty (commercial quality) extruded aluminium stair nosings, naplocs and
brass naploc only to all common Areas and Class 3 and Class 9 BCA properties. Domestic naploc or stair nosings
will not be accepted in Common Area or in Class 3 and Class 9 installations under any circumstances.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 132 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

TRIMS: Fix binder bars, carpet to carpet bars, and trims to manufacturers' recommendations and to best trade
practice.

DOUBLE BONDING: All double bonding must be carried out using a solvent free, low odour adhesive similar or
equal to Anchor Weld C A3, Roberts 80 or Polymer 228 the trowel size and coverage rate shall be as listed below.
Flooring primer similar or equal to Anchor-Weld PR1. All seams on dual bond carpets must be sealed using a
carpet seaming adhesive similar or equal to Anchor-Weld C A6 or Roberts 52– Water based Seam Sealer.

PATTERN OR TEXTURE: To match over whole surface of continuous spaces.

STRETCHING: Install carpet flat and taut so that people/furniture movement over it does not cause rucking. Use a
power stretcher to ensure maximum tension between walls with knee kickers only used to assist. Apply force by
correct pin adjustment to carpet base only to avoid damage to pile and underlay.

All work is to be carried in accordance with AS 2455, or as directed within this specification. Where there is any
conflict between conditions contained in this specification and AS 2455, the conditions in the specification shall take
precedence.

The Contractor shall be responsible in ensure that all products and services supplied comply with the
specifications. In the event of a dispute arising between the Principal, the Customer and the Contractor regarding
the quality of the products or installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all products and
services comply with specification.

CUT AWAY: All loose nap ends, remove scrap and vacuum clean.

ADHESIVES:

All adhesives used (for both carpet and resilient flooring) should be non solvent and low odour. In the instance
when a solvent based contact adhesive is the only option; no more than 1 x 4 litre container is permitted to be taken
onto site (additional contact adhesive must be secured in installer’s vehicle until required).

6. RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

RESILIENT FLOORING – installation in dwellings should be used in kitchens, dining areas, hallways and other high
traffic areas of a dwelling. Principal’s approval should be sought to lay resilient flooring or wall sheeting in wet areas
or in Common Areas instead of Ceramic tiles.

PLANNING AND GENERAL LAYOUT: Determine the proposed layout of material, direction of pattern, and set out
of Resilient Flooring to provide a uniform appearance.

All adhesives used are to be low or nil solvent and low odour. The only exception is when a contact adhesive must
be used (the use of contact adhesives is to be avoided where ever possible). When contact adhesive must be used
no more than 1 x 4 litre container is permitted to be taken onto site (additional contact adhesive must be secured in
the installers vehicle until required). Material Safety Data Sheets must be supplied for all adhesives the
manufacturer has recommended for use with their products.

PRIMER: Prime porous plaster, concrete and timber subs–rate -with primer recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 133 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – CARPET AND RESILIENT FLOORING

INSTALLATION: Installation of resilient flooring to be in accordance with the resilient flooring manufacturers'
recommendations. Resilient flooring to be accurately cut, scribe and fitted against all walls, pipes and other
permanent projections and fixtures.
All installation must be carried out in compliance with AS1884

Hardboard Underlay
Thickness 5.5mm + 0.15mm
Sheet Size 1200mm x 900mm + 1.0mm

Fibre Cement Underlay

Thickness 5.5mm + 0.15mm
Sheet Size 1200mm x 900mm + 1.0mm

Fixing Of Hardboard & Fibre Cement Underlay

Hardboard & fibre cement underlay is to be laid ashlar or brick pattern fixed using 25 mm ring grooved nails or 22
mm staples, spaced at 75 mm intervals at perimeters and 150 mm throughout the body of the sheet.

Finishing Strips (TRIMS) and Stair Nosings

Heavy duty (Commercial quality) extruded aluminium stair nosings, naploks and brass naploks only to be fitted to
exposed edges and doorways or stairs. Domestic naplok or stair nosings will not be accepted under any
circumstances.

Dye Batch:
Contractors must ensure that the Resilient Flooring laid in a single area is of a single specified type, quality, colour
and design comes from one manufacturing batch and dye lot.

LAYING RESILIENT FLOORING IN WET AREAS, AND COMMON AREAS

When laying in wet areas or common areas a minimum of an R10 (slip rated) homogeneous sheet resilient flooring
product must be used. Products containing abrasive material in order to comply will not be considered

Wherever possible replace existing waste outlets with a three part vinyl clamping outlet or similar.

Against all walls a minimum of 100mm cove edging is required. Use an appropriate adhesive for fixing cove formers
to both walls and floors. A capping strip to prevent water penetration is to be adhered to the wall above the cove
edging.

Hot weld all forming joints when laying sheet resilient flooring.

7. COMPLETION

ON COMPLETION: Leave all surfaces free of adhesive, dirt and debris. Clean the finished carpet in accordance
with the manufacturers specification. Clean Resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturers specification.
Remove from the Site all plant, and all rubbish and materials not used, leaving the finished floor clean and without
blemish.

SUBSEQUENT DAMAGE: Make good any subsequent damage to the flooring or any disturbance by later work
under the Contract at no cost to the Principal.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 134 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 8 – LAWNS, GROUNDS, GARDENS AND COMMON AREA CLEANING WORKS

AND MANAGEMENT

Section 8

LAWNS, GROUNDS, GARDENS

AND COMMON AREA CLEANING
WORKS AND MANAGEMENT

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 135 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 8 – LAWNS, GROUNDS, GARDENS AND COMMON AREA CLEANING WORKS

AND MANAGEMENT

GENERAL

Introduction
The Contractor shall refer to the Lawns, Grounds, Gardens and Common Area Cleaning Services specification, Exhibit 8
to the Contract Conditions.

END OF SECTION

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 136 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

SECTION 9

TIMBER SCHEDULE AND

DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 137 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

DRAWING SCHEDULE
Drawing No. Title
1 TS01 Schedule of Timber Species, Durability Ratings
2 KD01 Kitchen Units Specification Notes
3 KD02 Kitchen Fitments, Floor Units ‘E’, ‘F’, ‘O’
4 KD03 Kitchen Fitments, Corner Unit ‘T’
5 KD04 Kitchen Fitments, Servery Unit
6 KD05 Kitchen Fitments, Wall Unit ‘C’, ‘D’, ‘S’
7 KD06 Kitchen Fitments, Pantry & Broom Cupboards ‘G’ & ‘H’
8 KD07 Kitchen Fitments, Breakfast Bar Unit ‘N’
9 KD08 Kitchen Fitments, Medicine Cabinet Wall Unit Type ‘C’
10 KD09 Kitchen Fitments, Microwave Cupboard
11 KD10 Kitchen Fitments, Cupboard over Refrigerator
12 KD11 Kitchen Fitments, Floor Unit including Wall Oven Shelf
13 MF01 Lapped Paling Fence
14 MF02 Closed Paling Fence
15 MF03 Frame Types
16 MF04 Footings
17 MF05 Steel Gate Frames
18 MF06 Vehicular Gate Frames (Back Fences)
19 MR01 Ramp Details – Plans
20 MR02 Ramp Details – Plan, Typical Section
21 MR03 Ramp Details – Typical Sections – Installation to Existing Reinforced Concrete Patio
22 MW01 Bathroom Handrail Details
23 MW02 Handrail Details
24 MW03 Handrail Details
25 MW04 Handrail Details
26 MW05 Bollard Details
27 SHR 01 Accessible Shower Unit

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 138 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

TS01 - SCHEDULE OF TIMBER SPECIES, DURABILITY RATINGS

Application Timber species or minimum Timber Finish Relevant Australian Preservative

Durability class (AS5604.2005) Standards Treatment rating
For softwood where Specified
Structural timbers Class 1 or 2 (Where softwoods meet Sawn H3
Exposed to weather durability class 1 or 2 preservative
treatment is not required)
Sub-floor framing Class 3 or better Sawn H3
exposed
To ground
Structural timbers not Class 4 or better Sawn N/A
exposed to weather
Fascias, barges Oregon Select dressing 2858 N/A
Ash type eucalypts Select 2796
(Immunised and reconditioned)
Weatherboards Radiata Pine Select 1495 (1973) H3
Cypress “ O93
Western Red Cedar “ -
Hardwood “ 2796
Brush Box “ “
Mouldings Sitka Spruce Select dressing 2796
(Reveals) Oregon “ 2858
Western Red Cedar Select -
1498 (1973) H1 (int) H3 (ext)
Radiata Pine “
Hoop Pine
Slash Pine
MDF
Sills Tallowwood Select 2796 N/A
Blackbutt “ “
Red Mahogany “ “
Crow’s Ash “ “
Western Red Cedar “ “
Window and door Western Red Cedar Select - N/A
Frames Oregon Select dressing 2858
Ash type eucalypts Select 2796
(Immunised and reconditioned)
Strip flooring Radiata Pine Standard 1492 (1973) H3
Mixed Hardwood “ 2796
Cypress Pine “ 1810
Murray Red Gum “ 2796
Internal joinery, Oregon Select dressing 2858 N/A
Cupboard framing Ash type eucalypts Select 2796
(Immunised and reconditioned)
Sitka Spruce
Radiata Pine Select dressing 2796
MR Particleboard Select 1497 (1973), 1498 (1973)
MR Medium Density Fibreboard

Paling fence posts Class 2 or better Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or H5 ) See

Other fence posts Class 1 Struct. Grade 1 2082 H4 or H5 ) Note
Fence rails and palings Eastern Australian hardwoods Struct. Grade 3 2082
Radiata Pine (treated) H3
Cypress Pine
NOTE: Where H4 or H5 is specified as an alternative, the required hazard rating will depend on the specific existing site conditions.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 139 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 140 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 141 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 142 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 143 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 144 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 145 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 146 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 147 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 148 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 149 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 150 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 151 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 152 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 153 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 154 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 155 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 156 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 157 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 158 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 159 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 160 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 161 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 162 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 163 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 164 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 9 – TIMBER SCHEDULE AND DRAWING DETAILS

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 165 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Section 10

COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 166 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

PUBLISHING DETAILS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Edition 3: Published December 2001 Ivan Valenta
Edition 4: Published March 2004 Jim Hristovski
Edition 5: Published January 2006 Gorana Popovic
Phil Bell
Published by Business Management Div John Gregory
HOUSING NEW SOUTH WALES Mark Singer
Upali Mallawaaratchy
Nicholas Loder
Robert Willacy
NSW Department of Commerce

DISCLAIMER
While every effort has been made and all reasonable care taken to ensure the accuracy of the material
contained herein, the authors and editors of this publication shall not be held to be liable or responsible in
any way whatsoever, and expressly disclaim any liability or responsibility for any loss or damage costs or
expenses incurred as a result or in connection with the reliance whether whole or partial by any person
upon any part of the contents of this publication. The Department reserves the right to amend the whole
or any part of this document, without notice.

COPYRIGHT
This document is issued on the understanding that:
1. It is an internal document of Housing NSW
2. The copyright in the work described above remains vested in the Crown in the right of the State of
New South Wales.

This publication is copyright. All rights are reserved.

Other than for purposes of and subject to the conditions prescribed under the Copyright Act, no part of it may
in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise) be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system or transmitted without prior written permission. Inquiries should be addressed to
Housing NSW.

© The Crown in right of New South Wales (Housing NSW) 2001.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 167 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Contents
Location Component Sub-component Manufacturer’s Page
Warranty
Introduction 140
Definitions 140
External 140
Clothes Lines 1 year frame, 176
30 days line
Finishes Paint 10 years 177
Garage Garage Doors 7 years 177
Garage Panel Doors 7 years
Letter box 1 year 178
Numbering (Street/Units) 1 year 179
Roof Coverings Tiles 25 years 179
Metal 15 years
Screen Doors 10 years 180
Windows 7 years 181
Windows Window Locks Min. 1 year 182

Location Component Sub-component Manufacturer’s Page

Warranty
Normal room 140
Built-in wardrobes 5 years 184
Doorways 5 years 184
Doorways Entry Door 5 years, 185
door seal 2 years
Doorways Door Locks & Min. 1 year 186
Latches
Finishes Paint 10 years 187
Floor Finishes Carpet 10 years 188
Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles 5 years 190
Floor Finishes Resilient Finishes 5 years 191
& Tiles
Space Heating Electric Space 2 years 193
Heaters
Space heating Gas Space 10 years for burner, 194
Heaters 2 years fan, 1 year
other parts

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 168 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Space heating Wood Space 5 years 194

Heaters
Switches 1 year 195

Location Component Sub-component Manufacturer’s Page

Warranty
Kitchen 196
Cupboards 5 years 197
Cupboards Kitchen Sink 25 years 198
Rangehood 2 years parts and 198
labour including
filter (external
ducting)
Stove 1 year 199
Taps 2 years 200
Walls Tiles 5 years 200

Location Component Sub-component Manufacturer’s Page

Warranty
Bathroom and/or Laundry 140
Basin 1 year 202
Bath 10 year acrilic and 202
30 year pressed
metal
Bathroom Bathroom 5 years 203
accessories cabinets
Bathroom Bathroom Fittings 1 year 204
accessories
Bathroom Grab Rails 1 year 204
accessories
Dryer 2 years 205
Floors Waterproofing 10 years 205
Floor finishes Concrete floor 5 years 205
treatment
Shower Shower Bases 10 years Latex 206
(Waterborne)
30 years pressed
metal
Shower Shower Roses 5 years 206
Shower Shower Seat 1 year 206
Taps 2 years 207

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 169 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Taps Thermostatic 5 years 207

Mixing Valve
Toilet 1 year 208
Toilet Toilet Seats and 1 year 208
Covers
Tub 25 years sink, 10 209
years cabinet
Washing machine 1 year 209

Location Component Sub-component Manufacturer’s Page

Warranty
Services 210
Smoke alarms 5 years (including 211
battery)
Water heaters Electric Water Storage: 1 year 212
Heaters parts/labour and 10
years cylinder
Instantanuous: 3
years parts/labour
Water heaters Solar Water 10 years 212
Heaters
Water heaters Gas Water Storage: 1 year 213
Heaters parts/labour and 10
years cylinder
Instantanuous: 3
years parts/labour

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 170 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

INTRODUCTION

Overview
The Principal is seeking greater value for money from the thousands of components in its 130,000 dwellings across
the state. Many of these components are replaced or repaired regularly providing the Principal with an excellent
basis for determining the appropriateness of particular components for rental properties.

In this document there is a greater emphasis on warranties as part of the value for money objective. There is also an
attempt to keep the number of components listed to those specifically of interest to a social housing provider or owner.

This document is formatted according to the location of component. There is also an alphabetical index at the back to
assist in finding a component. The listing of components aligns with that in the Department’s Property Condition
Survey.

As part of the review of Component Schedule the Principal has made, and will continue to make, decisions on
particular product requirements that best suit the business needs. This does not mean that the listing of any brand
name item is an endorsement for that particular product when used in other contexts.

The Principal has commenced third party testing of products and will expand this activity as part of a greater
engagement of industry in assisting the Principal to meet the needs.

Components not Commitment

The components listed in this document are those that may comprise part of some required assets in the portfolio.
They are not scheduled here as a provision standard that commits the Principal to providing any of the components in
all dwellings.

Basic Provision Standards that do form part of the commitment by the Department to its customers can be found
elsewhere in the Asset Standards reference document.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 171 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Format
The components are arranged on the following pages in a table using the following format:

Component The category as used in the Asset Condition Survey, e.g.

roof

If required, the component can be broken down into smaller

Sub-component
parts e.g. roof covering

Need Describes the business interest the item needs to fulfil

Requirement Sets out the specific criteria for judging acceptability of any
particular product – will usually require compliance with
current Australian/NZ Standards

Warranty Any specific warranty requirement

Some of the component descriptions include detailed requirements, but even then, the business need should be
understood first as it represents the Principal’s primary interest.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 172 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Elaboration
1. This document is a schedule of requirements for selected components that are important to Housing NSW and
the Principal.

2. This document outlines the performance requirements of selected components. For workmanship and
installation requirements refer to the appropriate contract documents.

3. This edition identifies only components that the Principal, as an owner, has a direct interest in, either because
the Principal’s maintenance experience with that item suggests so, or because it is a significant item that is
regularly replaced.

4. Not all materials used in buildings are identified in this document. It is expected that all materials used in work
undertaken on behalf of the Principal will be fully compliant with current Australian Standards and service
authority requirements as well as any legislation and regulatory requirements.

5. Where a particular item is listed in this document as meeting requirements and is changed in some way by the
manufacturer, then it may continue to be acceptable provided the changes do not reduce warranties or fail to
meet the requirements.

6. Components identified by performance criteria only, may require written certification from the manufacturer or
supplier, for each project, that the criteria have been met. Certification must be provided to the Principal’s
Representative, for each installation by the Contractor.

7. Where compliance with relevant standards, codes (including the Building Code of Australia and NSW
variations), and Australian Standards are listed as performance criteria, use the current editions, including
amendments.

8. Criteria for product selection for use in the Principal’s properties include, but are not limited to, the following:-
x proven performance
x proven quality and/or endorsement from reputable organisation(s) in the industry
x “Standards Mark” accreditation (where possible)
x best value for money
x low maintenance
x assurance of supply
x warranty
x origin of product

9. The Principal will exercises its right to select particular products that best meet the business needs. This may
be a judgement based on independent third party assessment or on experience with the performance of
products. In all cases the Principal is seeking best value for money and to encourage products that provide
better performance at affordable prices.

10. The Principal also reserves the right to seek supply agreements for the bulk supply of particular products.

11. The Principal has the right to amend/add performance criteria and brands to this document at its sole
discretion.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 173 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

DEFINITIONS
“Certification” in this Schedule means one or more of the following:

x a copy of a certificate of approval by a government authority e.g. Sydney Water, Office of Energy, RTA,
Austel or Telstra, Australia Post, Dept. of Planning, Department of Environment and Conservation
(NSW), Fire Brigade, NSW Department of Health, Energy Australia, The (Natural) Gas Co., Australian
Gas Association, etc; and/or

x a letter certifying compliance to requirements and testing procedures outlined in specified Australian
Standards, and/or

x a letter with certification by a practising qualified Engineer, and/or

x test reports/opinions prepared by ABSAC/CSIRO/NATA/AWTA/NBTC, etc; based on Australian

Standard Testing Procedures, and/or

x a print of a drawing with the testing authority’s endorsement mark.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 174 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

EXTERNAL

Clothes Lines
Finishes
Garage doors
Letter boxes
Numbering
Roofs
Screen doors
Windows

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 175 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component CLOTHES LINES

Sub-component
Need
To provide the Department’s customers with an easy way of drying
clothes and bedding in the sunlight
Requirement
Test report certifying hoist can withstand a load of 150 kg (min. 2kg point
loads evenly distributed per all lines/ at max. 300mm centre spacings)
without deformation or damage, issued by a registered Testing Laboratory
based on current Australian Standards

x Anodised aluminium or min. 1.2mm thick. galvanised steel framing to

current Australian Standards
y Min. 20 micron anodised or 50 micron polyester powder coat finish to
current Australian Standards
y Min. 4 mm dia. galvanised wire or UV stabilised plastic sheathed cord
or wire lines
y All bolts & fittings zinc plated
y Locking mechanism on frame
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
Retractable
y Min. 7.5 m length & 5 lines / 37m line
Awning
y Min. 20 m line (for 2/3 BR dwellings)
y Min. 40m line or multiples of 20m line awning (for 4/5 BR dwellings)
y Ground or wall mounted
y With tensioning mechanism
Fixed Rotary Type Adjustable (wind-up)
y Min. 28 m line/3m dia. (for 1BR dwelling)
y Min. 39m line/4m dia. (for 2/3 BR dwelling)
y Min. 48m line /5m dia. (for 4/5 BR dwelling)

1 year frame warranty & 30 day line warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 176 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component FINISHES
Sub-component Exterior Paint

Need To protect the underlying cladding and structure from weather and
abrasion
Requirement y 100% premium Acrylic (Waterborne or Solvent borne) paint
y Workmanship to current Australian Standards
y Colours to approved samples to current Australian Standards
y Paints conforming to appropriate APAS (Australian Paint Approval
Scheme) paint specification number as per APAS Paint Specification
y Paint in sealed containers branded with the manufacturers name, type
of content and APAS approval number
TINTING
y Pigments, tints and stainers as recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
10 YEARS WRITTEN WARRANTY

Component GARAGE
Sub-component Garage Doors

Need To provide a reliable and easily operated means of securing a garage

Requirement
Roller Doors (Domestic) Single and double doors
y Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading
y Tested to qualify to min. 1500 cycles of operation per year (where one
cycle = closed to open to closed position)
y Withstand min. dynamic pressure of 550N/m2 applied
externally/internally normal to door
y Rolled-T / box section / single or double angled bottom rail, steel or
aluminium channel guides, interlocking slatted curtain
y Counterbalance roller deflection not to exceed 0.3% of span
y Galvanised/prime painted/polyurethane/colourbond finish to all metal
components
y Branded with manufacturers name.

Warranty Min. 7 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 177 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component GARAGE
Sub-component Panel Lift Garage Doors

Need To provide a reliable and easily operated means of securing a garage

Requirement
Panel Lift Door (Domestic) Single doors only up to 2400mm wide
y Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading
y Tested to qualify to min. 1500 cycles of operation per year (where one
cycle = closed to open to closed position)
y Withstand min. dynamic pressure of 550N/m2 applied
externally/internally normal to door
y Galvanised/prime painted/polyurethane/colourbond finish to all metal
components
y Branded with manufacturers name.
Warranty Min. 7 year written warranty

Component LETTER BOX

Sub-component

Need To provide customers with an Australia Post compliant receptacle for

mail
Requirement
General (all models)
y Painted zinc/aluminium alloy coated steel OR
y G2 zinc coated steel (Z450) with min. 50 micron polyester powder
coat finish
y Aluminium (min. 20 micron anodised or 50 micron powder coat)
y Weatherhood (for weather exposed areas)
Freestanding
y Min. 150mm wide x min. 160mm high x min. 230mm deep
y Min. 25mm high letterbox slot
y Padlock or key operated camlock
Built-in (brickwork)
y Materials as per “General “ for front & back only
y Aluminium/G2 zinc coated steel/zinc-aluminium coated steel sleeve.
y Min. 250mm wide x 160mm high x 230 deep
y Min. 30mm high letterbox slot
y Rear access door pivot hinged on min. 5mm dia. galvanised steel/SS
rod
y Key operated camlock/padlock style lock
y Max. letterbox bank of 75 boxes (15 wide x 5 high)
Warranty 1 year warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 178 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component NUMBERING (STREET/UNIT)

Sub-component
Need
To provide legible identification of address
Requirement y External street numerals and building block numerals to be 150mm
minimum high 1.6mm thick plain brass (secured with brass screws) or
polished cast aluminium (secured with stainless steel screws) or self-
reflective numerals on colourbond steel base
y Unit numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick plain brass or
polished cast aluminium or moulded plastic
y Letterbox numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick
brass/aluminium/plastic
y Community room WC doors as for unit numerals
y Project name and numerals (if required) as for external street
numerals

Warranty 1 year warranty

Component ROOF
Sub-component Covering

Need
To effectively weatherproof the dwelling, shed water, be durable and
robust
Requirement
ROOFING TILES
y Concrete & Terracotta to current Australian Standards
y Installation to current Australian Standard and manufacturers written
specification
METAL ROOFING
y Design and installation to current Australian Standards and to
manufacturers written specification
y Zincalume - min. AZ150 coating or COLORBOND coated steel - min.
base thickness 0.48mm (for standard conditions and straight roof
lines)
INSULATION
x Fibreglass Insulation Batts to BASIX requirements
GUTTERS, DOWNPIPES, FASCIA
x 115mm Zincalume Quad gutter 0.6mm gauge factory pre-painted in
Colorbond colours
x 100mm x 50mm Downpipes 0.6mm gauge factory pre-painted in
Colorbond colours
x Refer to Technical Specification for details

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 179 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Warranty Roofing tiles: Min. 25 years written warranty

Metal roofing: Min. 15 year written warranty
Gutters, Downpipes and Fascia: Min 20 year written warranty

Component SCREEN DOORS

Sub-component
Need To provide a physical barrier that allows air and vision through

Requirement
Aluminium Door Framing
y Installation to current Australian Standards
y Min 69mm x 20.0mm x 1.2mm extruded aluminium frame with 10mm
wide x 14mm deep insert frame for grille
y Extruded PVC insert to bed heavy duty grille
y Joints to be mitred, staked and riveted
y Reinforcing corner stakes fixed to frames with SS 4mm diameter x
9.5mm rivets
y Door to be permanently branded on top rail with name of
manufacturer
Aluminium Heavy duty Grille
y To current Australian Standards for Type 1 doors
y Min 7.0mm sectional thickness
y Branded with manufacturers name
Aluminium Door Framing & Heavy duty Grille Finish
y Clear bronze anodised to current Australian Standards (10 microns
thick for standard conditions/ 20 microns thick for severe coastal or
industrial regions)
OR
y Thermoset powder coatings to current Australian Standards (50
microns thick for standard conditions/ 80 microns thick for severe
coastal or industrial regions)
Screen Mesh
y Anodised expanded aluminium two-way mesh
y Nominal size 5.8mm x 3.3mm, strand size 1.7mm x 0.5mm thick
(weight 1kg/m²)
y Secured to door by 12mm x 20mm aluminium angle by pop rivets or
“J” plastic strip
Hardware
y Three 75 x 30 mm hinges to current Australian Standards
y Locks, refer DOORWAYS “locks & latches” (Non fire-rated heavy duty
screen door)
y Piston operated adjustable dampened type door closer

Warranty 10 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 180 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component WINDOWS
Sub-component
Need
To provide customers with natural light and controllable ventilation and
to protect against the elements
Requirement y Window & door assemblies manufactured to comply with current
Australian Standards and to carry testing authorities endorsement
mark and -
- Horizontal sliding / double hung windows & sliding doors tested to
AS 2047 for deflection (positive/negative), air infiltration, water
penetration, operating force and proof tests by NBTC/NATA
approved laboratory
- Window tests to qualify min. 700 Pa
- Each window/door branded in an upper channel/stile with a
permanent label indicating NATA Testing Certification, structural
and water performance, and manufacturers name eg. AWA labelling
scheme
y Windows/doors installed to current Australian Standards and to
manufacturers written specification
y Doors toughened/laminated glass to current Australian Standards
y Glass type and thickness to current Australian Standards except lower
edge of all glass in windows within 500mm from floor to be only ‘A’
safety grade laminated or toughened glass in accordance with current
Australian Standards
y Issue window/door shop drawings with NATA testing authorities
endorsement mark to the Principal’s Representative if manufacturers
do not qualify for AWA labelling scheme

Warranty Min. 7 year written warranty to cover all materials, structural

integrity and defects (TPA) subject to installation to manufacturers
written specification and regular maintenance program to relevant
current Australian Standards

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 181 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component WINDOWS
Sub-component Window Locks

Need To provide a means of securing the dwelling from unauthorised entry

through a window
Requirement
KEYED WINDOW LOCKS
General
y Fit keyed window locks to all openable windows:
- With sills less than 3 metres off the ground; or
- Accessible from balconies/roofs; or
- Accessible from a ledge that leads to stairwell window, or
- Where two unit balconies adjoin, or
- Where access can be gained from drainage pipes to windows and
balconies
y Do NOT install window locks to be installed on a consecutive code
number basis but for security purposes are to be installed on a
random basis, with minimum allowance for repetition of codings 1 per
100 dwellings
y Locks to be minimum 5 disc cylinder type unless noted otherwise.
y Provide to sliding and double hung aluminium windows provide an
additional safe ventilating locking point 50mm and 100mm from
closed position
Warranty 1 Year Written Warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 182 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

ROOM

Built-in wardrobes
Doorways
Finishes
Floor finishes
Space heating
Switches

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 183 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component BUILT IN WARDROBES

Sub-component

Need To provide adequate storage for customers’ clothes

Requirement
y To current Australian Standards for HMR, MDF, Laminate and
Melamine finishes
y Doors - min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard
or moisture resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF), laminated
(both sides) with high pressure decorative laminate having medium
resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching or painted 35mm
flush, hollow or cell cored door
y 2 mm PVC plastic edge strip to doors
y Carcass – min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
particleboard with white melamine finish to all internal surfaces,
including edge of frame, carcass and shelves
y Concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170o swing or sliding doors
y Install to manufacturers written specification
y All assemblies to carry a compliance label to current Australian
Standards

Warranty 5 year written warranty

Component DOORWAYS
Sub-component

Need To provide a reliable mechanism for closing off rooms

Requirement General
y To current Australian Standards
y Use no imported rainforest timber veneers to be used
y A non standard door size is a door size over 2400mm x 900mm
Internal doors
y 35mm thick flush hollow or cell cored door to current Australian
Standards (Type B bonded plywood/hardboard face)
Timber door frame and jamb lining
y To current Australian Standards
Steel door frames
y Min. 18 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel doorframe with internal
architrave
Warranty 5 Years Written Warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 184 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component DOORWAYS - ENTRY

Sub-component

Need To provide a secure mechanism for controlling access through a

doorway that separates the private dwelling from public and common
area
Requirement General
y To current Australian Standards & BCA
y Use no imported rainforest timber veneers
y A non standard door size is a door size over 2400mm x 900mm
Fire Resistant door sets and door frames
y To current Australian Standards
y 45mm thick, -/60/30 FRL rated flush type door (Type D bonded
plywood/ hardwood face)
y Closer with appropriate FRL
Entry doors
y 40mm thick flush type solid core particleboard or blockboard cored
door (type B bonded plywood/hardboard face)
y Door closer where nominated
Timber door frame and jamb lining
y To current Australian Standards
Steel door frames
y Min. 18 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel doorframe with internal
architrave
SECURITY VIEWER
y Fire rated security viewer
STORMPROOF DOOR SEAL or SMOKE SEAL
y Fixed to external hinged doors only

Warranty Doors
5 years written warranty
Stormproof Door Seal
Minimum 2 year warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 185 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component DOORWAYS
Sub-component Door Locks & Latches

Need
To provide a reliable, useable & secure device for locking doors
Requirement Note: These provisions apply for new doors, when existing doors
retained, use locks the same as or equal to existing locks.
General
y To current Australian Standards
y Quality management to current Australian Standards
y For fire resistant door sets doors, lock sets must form part of an
approved tested doorset assembly
y Door locks to be a minimum 5 pin cylinder
y Door lock finish: satin chrome / chrome plated/stainless steel
y Keyed alike
y To all aluminium sliding doors supply and insert aluminium blocks into
the upper track of door in closed position leaving clearance for door to
slide
Front and rear entry doors
y cottages, villas & townhouses:
- double cylinder automatic dead-latch, and
- lever latch set
y apartments up to 2 storeys:
- As above plus, door closer
y apartments 3 storeys & over:
- must form part of an approved -/60/30 fire resistant doorset
assembly
- double cylinder automatic lever handle dead-latch
- lever latch set
- door closer
y pensioner and disabled housing:
- Double cylinder automatic lever handle dead latch and lever latch
set with quick release; plus;\
- door closer (min. moment type) (Specific closer requirements to be
confirmed prior to ordering)
Common area entrance doors
y general & pensioner housing & community rooms:
- exterior escape dead latch (keyed lever latch from outside with
quick release from the inside)
- door closer
Balcony/porch doors
y aluminium sliding – general and pensioner housing:
- keyed double deadlocks
Internal doors
y Lever passage latchset. Privacy latchset to bathroom/WC
Heavy duty screen doors
- short backset mortice deadlock and lever

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 186 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Storeroom & toilets

y nightlatch and ‘D’ handle
Electric meter cupboard
y nightlatch (fire rated) and ‘D’ handle
Electric meter cabinet
y padlock

Warranty 5 year warranty paint & tarnish, 10 year mechanical

Component FINISHES
Sub-component Internal Paint

Need
To provide a cleanable surface finish that is durable and
attractive
Requirement y 100% premium Acrylic (Waterborne) paint or Alkyd base
Solvent-bourne or Polyurethane paint
y Workmanship to current Australian Standards
y Colours to approved samples to current Australian
Standards
y Paints conforming to appropriate APAS (Australian Paint
Approval Scheme) paint specification number as per
APAS Paint Specification
y Paint in sealed containers branded with the
manufacturers name, type of content and APAS approval
number
TINTING
y Pigments, tints and stainers as recommended by the
paint manufacturer

Warranty 10 years written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 187 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
FLOOR FINISHES
Sub-component Carpet

Need To provide a safe, healthy and comfortable surface for

habitable areas of a dwelling or common area.
Requirement y Installation to current Australian Standards
For Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), Pensioner
Housing, Modified Dwellings for the Disabled &
class 3 dwellings
x 100% wool carpet or wool blend (min 80% wool)
x Loop pile tufted carpet
x Level pile surface or with slight modulation
x 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
x 1356 g/m2 (40oz/yd2) total pile mass
x 6mm maximum pile height
x “Actionbac” or Jute backing
x ACCS (Australian Carpet Classification Scheme)
rating for Residential Extra Heavy Duty including
stairs
x Fire rating to BCA:
- Spread of Flame of 0
- Smoke developed index not more than 5.
x Colour as approved by Housing NSW
x Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal
x A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at
regular intervals
For Class 1 and 2 Dwellings
x 100% bulked continuous filament (bcf), solution
dyed Nylon or Nylon/Wool blend (min 50% nylon)
x Loop pile tufted carpet
x Level pile surface or with slight modulation
x 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
x Min 678 g/m2 (20oz/yd2) total pile mass
x 5mm maximum pile height
x “Actionbac” or Jute backing
x Fire Rating to BCA
x A.C.C.S. rating for Residential Extra Heavy Duty
(Stairs)
x A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at
regular intervals
x Colour as approved by Principal
x Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal
Warranty Min. 10 years written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 188 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component FLOOR FINISHES

Sub-component Underlay
Need To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, underlay to maximize economic life
from carpet

Requirement Underlay
x Fire rating to BCA
x Min grading “Residential” as per AS 4288
Class 1 and 2 dwellings – Synthetic foam
x Rebonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top
surface (or similar product)
x Recyclable and/or made from recycled materials
x 8mm min thickness
x 69kg/m3 minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam
Class 1 and 2 dwellings – Vulcanised rubber
x Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern
x Reinforcing fabric: either Hessian, spun Nylon, or Polyester
x Min sheet thickness: 7.5mm (+0.5)
x 1750g/m2 minimum product mass
Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), Pensioner Housing, & class 3
dwellings - Synthetic foam
x Rebonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top
surface (or similar product)
x Recyclable and/or made from recycled materials
x 7mm min thickness
x 120kg/m minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam
Common Areas (class 2 dwellings), Pensioner Housing, & class 3
dwellings – Vulcanised rubber
x Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern
x Reinforcing fabric: either Hessian, spun Nylon, or Polyester
x Min sheet thickness: 8mm (+0.5)
x 2050g/m2 minimum product mass
Warranty 10 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 189 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component FLOOR FINISHES

Sub-component Ceramic Tiles

Need
To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, waterproof and cleanable
surface
Requirement Ceramic floor tiles
General
y To current Australian Standards
y Fully vitrified body
y Colours as appropriate and directed
y Slip resistance to current Australian Standards AS4586
y Slip rating of R10 for Wet areas and Pendulum test score of X
y Slip rating of R9 for all other areas
y Slip resistant (wet and dry) semi glaze finish
y Warpage not exceeding 0.5mm for any tile batch
y Water absorption not increase by more then 18% of dry tile weight
y Chemical and Crazing resistance
y Generally 200mm x 200mm tile Min. 7mm thick

Warranty 10 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 190 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component FLOOR FINISHES

Sub-component Resilient Finishes & Tiles

Need
To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, waterproof and cleanable
surface
Requirement Note: These provisions apply to complete new installations, with
existing spot replacement or repair use Resilient Flooring to match
the existing installed product
y Manufacture, Installation and Maintenance to current Australian
Standards
y Use water based adhesives
y All sheet, flooring seams shall be welded (either chemical or
thermal) to manufacturers specification
y Initial care of all installed materials shall be carried out to
manufacturers specification
y Floor-coverings shall conform to the physical characteristics of
approved samples and shall be within the limits of any sample range
or variation in colour and pattern
y Products containing recycled materials are preferred
Class 1 dwellings – Vinyl Composition tiles (EN654) (Kitchens,
Dining Rooms and Hallways etc)
y (Concrete floors laid on suitable levelling compound; Timber floors
laid on Hardboard, MDF or FC sheet underlay)
y Thickness: 3mm (EN428)
y Wear Resistance: <10mm³ (EN660)
y Min. 3db sound reduction
y R9 slip resistance
y Fire rating ISO9239.1 >11kW/m²
Class 1 dwellings – Homogenous Sheet (EN649 Kitchens, Dining
Areas and Hallways etc)
y Thickness: Min. 2mm – Max. 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete floors laid on
suitable levelling compound, Timber floors laid on Hardboard, MDF or
FC sheet underlay)
y Polyurethane Reinforced
y Wear Resistance: Group P (EN660-2)
y R9 Slip Resistance
y Min. 3db sound reduction
y Fire rating ISO9239.1 >9kW/ m²
Class 1 dwellings – Heterogenous Sheet (EN649 Kitchens, Dining
Areas and Hallways etc)
y Thickness: Min. 2mm – Max. 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete floors laid on
suitable levelling compound, Timber floors laid on Hardboard, MDF or
FC sheet underlay)
y Polyurethane Reinforced
y Wear Resistance: Group T (EN660-2)

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 191 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

y R9 Slip Resistance
y Min. 3db sound reduction
y Fire rating ISO9239.1 >9kW/m²
Class 2 and 3 dwellings – Cushioned Backed Heterogenous sheet
(EN651)
y Thickness: Min. 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete floors laid on suitable
levelling compound, Timber floors laid on Hardboard, MDF or FC
sheet underlay)
y Polyurethane Reinforced
y R10 slip resistance
y Wear Resistance: Group T (EN660-1)
y Min. 14db sound reduction
y Easy Clean top layer
y Fire rating ISO9239.1 >8kW/m²
Wet Area (Floors) – use only if approved by the Principal
y Homogenous Slip Retardant Vinyl sheet (EN649)
y Thickness: Min. 2mm sheet vinyl (EN428)
y Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
y Fire Rating: (ISO9239.1 > 9kW/m²)
y Slip resistance: AS4586 (B Wet/Barefoot and R10 Oil/wet ramp)
y Integral 150mm high coved skirting in all wet areas, Cove skirting to
be installed with capping strip to prevent water penetration
y 32mm ø cove fillet to be used where vinyl is coved
y Products containing abrasive material in order to comply will not be
considered
y Gatic Floor drain assembly to be used in all wet areas
Wet Area (Walls) – use only if approved by the Principal
y Homogenous Vinyl sheet (EN649)
y Thickness: Min. 1.25mm (EN428)
y Polyurethane Reinforced
y Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
y Fire Rating (AS3837) Group 2
Warranty 7 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 192 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
SPACE HEATING
Sub-component Electric Space / Electric Panel Heaters

Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room

Requirement y To current Australian Standards

y Only space/panel heaters approved under the Certificate of Approval
Scheme authorised by the Department of Energy (NSW) and other
state equivalents
y Installation in accordance to SAA Wiring Rules to current Australian
Standards and to local supply authority regulations
y Fixed (including wall mounted or recessed or floor mounted) fan
assisted heaters
y Min. 2 heat settings, (LO/HI) Thermostat control on high setting
y Min. 2kW (heat up to 55 m³) to Max. 7kW (heat up to 160 m³)
consumption capacity
y Minimum 5 ‘star rating’ with an efficiency of at least 90%
y Automatic reset thermal cut-out safety feature and fusible link.
Branded with manufacturers name to AS 3103, supplier licensed
under Standards Assoc. Certification Trademark

Warranty 2 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 193 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
SPACE HEATING
Sub-component Gas Space Heaters

Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room

Requirement y Natural Gas/Town LPG/Bottled LPG/Town Propane

y Wall mounted convection heater, Thermostat heat control automatic
electronic ignition, timer, regulated gas flow and flued combustion
gases
y Child safe to touch cabinet
y Min. 4 star energy rating
y Double lined flue within ceiling space
y Heaters with flues
- Min. size : 11MJ/hr
- Max. size : 26.4MJ/hr
y Labelling of appliances, specifying min. allowable room volume and
capacity of heater in MJ/hr
y Installation to AGA requirements
y AGA certificate of approval
Warranty 10 years written warranty for burner, 2 years for fan and min. 1
year for other parts.

Component
SPACE HEATING
Sub-component Wood Space Heaters
Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room

Requirement
General
y To current Australian Standards
y Test report prepared by registered NATA registered laboratory in
compliance to AS 4013. “Domestic Solid Fuel Burning appliances -
Method for Determination of Flue gas emission”
y Max. allowable appliance particulate emission factor to AS 4013 (i.e.
max. 5.5g/kg for appliances without catalytic combustors)
y Double skin firebox convection heater
y Double lined flue within ceiling space
y Min. appliance efficiency rating of 60%
y Min. size: 10kW (30MJ), Max. size: 22kW (65MJ)
y Installed by licensed installer to manufacturers written specification
y Branded with manufacturers trademark, type, model and serial
number, and emission report number of appliance and Standards
Mark
Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty.

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 194 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
SWITCHES
Sub-component

Need
To provide an easily used means of switching power on
Requirement y To current Australian Standards
Housing for aged and people with disabilities
y Large rocker type light switches

Warranty Min. 1 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 195 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

KITCHEN

Cupboards
Floor finishes
Rangehoods
Stoves
Taps
Walls

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 196 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
CUPBOARDS
Sub-component
Need To provide durable, waterproof, hygienic and cleanable storage and
food preparation areas
Requirement y To current Australian Standards for kitchen assemblies, HMR, MDF,
Laminate and Melamine finishes
y For benchtops - min. 32 mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
particleboard, laminated with high pressure decorative laminate
having characteristics of high resistance to surface wear, high
resistance to impact and high resistance to scratching
y Doors and drawer fronts - min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant
(HMR) particleboard or high moisture resistant medium density
fibreboard (MDF), laminated with high pressure decorative laminate
having medium resistance to surface wear, medium resistance to
impact and medium resistance to scratching. 2 mm PVC plastic edge
strip to all doors and drawers
y Drawers - 13mm thick (bottom 16mm), of either High moisture
resistant (HMR) particleboard or High moisture resistant medium
density fibreboard (MDF), finished with white melamine
y Completely integrated drawer slide system comprising a high quality
epoxy coated white steel self closing feature runner, 30kg load
capacity.
y Carcass – min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
particleboard with white melamine finish to all internal surfaces,
including edge of frame, carcass and shelves
y Kickboard - min. 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
particleboard, with 2 mm black vinyl or high pressure high resistance
laminate finish, including any edges
y Use concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170o swing
y Use piano hinges for split of bi-fold door on corner units
y Install to manufacturers written specification
y Kitchen assemblies to carry a compliance label to current Australian
Standards
Warranty 5 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 197 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
CUPBOARDS
Sub-component Kitchen Sink
Need To provide for washing and draining of food, utensils and hot water
waste
Requirement y To current Australian Standards
y Standards Mark/Water Mark/Waterboard certificate of approval
y One and a half bowl sink
y sink & drainer to be min. 1370mm long x 450mm wide for 3/4
bedroom dwellings
y min. 1200mm long x 450mm wide for single/pensioner & 2 bedroom
dwellings
y Min. 302 polish finished stainless steel only
y Indelibly marked with manufacturers trademark
Warranty 25 year written warranty

Component
RANGEHOOD
Sub-component

Need To remove grease from stove gases

Requirement y Provide certificate of compliance to current Australian Standards,

Australian Gas Association/ Energy Australia /Office of Energy.
y Min. air delivery rate 40L/s at max. sound power level 55dB(A) to
current Australian Standards
y Min. 2 speed convertible fan & automatic thermostat cut-off electricity
or impedance protected motor (withstand “locked rotor” conditions for
72 hours without burning out)
y Min. 55 watt motor
y Min. 3 blade plastic/metal propeller
y Min. 10 layer aluminium mesh grease filters
y Wiring encased in plastic conduits, within unit
y Unit for wall/roof ducting to outside. (Ducting to be minimum of
0.5mm galvanised steel ducting or ‘Flexi-duct’ similar fire or heat
resistant material)
y Min. 50 micron powder coating to galvanised steel casing
y Width to match and align with cook top or stove
y AS marking, brand name, serial no. date code, rated air delivery,
sound power level in dB(A) at rated air delivery and wattage branded
on unit
Warranty 2 year warranty for parts/labour & 2 year warranty for filters

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 198 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
STOVE
Sub-component
Need To cook food safely and effectively, allowing frying, grilling and baking
Requirement Upright
y To current Australian Standards
y Separate griller and oven compartments – Oven capacity 75L min
y Fan Forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to
touch window
y 4 burner hot plate (solid elements for electric stove)
y Upright or elevated cooker
y Front control or side control buttons only
y 60 minute timer (optional)
y Side hinged or slide under oven door (disabled person housing)
y AGA approval where appropriate
Wall Oven
y To current Australian Standards
y Capacity Min 80 litre gross capacity
y Combined or separate griller and oven compartments
y Fan Forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to
touch window
y 60 minuter timer
Cook Top
y Square white enamel finish hob
y 4 burner hot plate (solid elements for electric cooktop)
y Gas – battery ignition, push to turn safety control, enamelled trivets.
Warranty 1 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 199 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component TAPS
Sub-component
Need To easily control water flow reliably – all taps to be 3 star WELS Rated
Requirement Bib tap/Pillar tap/ Hob mounted sink set/Wall sink set
y Materials, dimensions, finishes and performance tests to current
Australian Standards
y Water supply metal bodied taps to current Australian Standards
y Standard Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
y Hot and cold water taps to be installed with 3 Star WELS rated in tap
flow regulator valve, equivalent to “Aqualoc”.
y Set includes spout or arm, roses and handles
y All components made of brass base material, chrome plated or satin
chrome or powder coated finishes, vandal resistant
y Dezincification resistant
General Housing
y Lever/Capstan/knob handles for multi-unit or detached housing.
Pensioner Housing
y Lever handles lever length 65mm to 80mm or Capstan tap handles
y Quarter turn taps with ceramic seals fitted to kitchen sinks
Disabled Housing
y Long Lever tap handles lever length 90mm to 150 mm (surgeon type)
as scoped by O.T.
y Quarter turn taps with ceramic seals fitted to kitchen sinks

Warranty Min. 2 year written warranty

Component WALLS
Sub-component Tiles

Need To provide a hard wearing, cleanable hygienic surface impervious to

water/condensation
Requirement
General
y To current Australian Standards
y Min. 5.5mm thick
y 1st Quality to ISO 13006:2003
y White porcelain biscuit and full glaze over face (unglazed edges to
body tiles and glazed edges for edge tiles)
Warranty 5 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 200 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

BATHROOM & LAUNDRY

Basins
Baths
Bath accessories
Dryers
Floor finishes
Showers
Taps
Toilets
Tubs
Washing machines

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 201 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component BASIN
Sub-component
Need To provide hygienic receptacle for washing hands and face
Requirement y To current Australian Standards
y Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
y White (min. bowl size 500x400mm) vitreous china 2/3 hole version
y Wall mounted on manufacturers metal brackets with ring connector to
waste outlet
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
Warranty 1 year written warranty

Component BATH
Sub-component
Need To provide a hygienic tub for washing a person

Requirement General
y To current Australian Standards
y Standard Mark (optional) /WaterMark/ Water Authority certificate of
approval.
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
y Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/trademark(visible in the
installed position)
Retrofit Existing General Housing - Acrylic (Waterborne) bath
linings
y Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from min. 3.5mm thick
sheet reinforced with a fibreglass backing
y Dimensions to fit over existing bath size
y Grate and adaptor to suit existing waste drain
New General Housing
y Rectangular - Min. 1500x750mm wide x 380mm deep
y Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from min. 3.5mm thick
sheet, glass reinforced with 10mm dia. steel rod rim reinforcement
y Pressed metal manufactured from min. 1.6mm thick steel drawn
seamless from one sheet of metal, grip coated all over and finished
internally with white vitreous Solvent-bourne (non skid base)
y Min. 10mm high tiling bead to all baths built into adjacent walls
y Fitted with 40/50mm plug & waste

Warranty 10 years written warranty for Acrylic (Waterborne) baths and 30

years written warranty for pressed metal baths

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 202 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Sub-component Bathroom Cabinets

Need
For storage of personal items used only in the bathroom and to allow
personal grooming
Requirement General
y To current Australian Standards for kitchen assemblies, HMR, MDF,
Laminate and Melamine finishes
y Surface mounted or recessed
y Cabinet fabricated in 1 mm zinc coated steel (white Acrylic baked
Solvent-bourne finish) OR 16 mm HMR laminated board
y Adjustable shelving
y Silver float mirror glass to current Australian Standards
y Inside of cabinet (or door) to be branded with manufacturers name
Single Door Cabinet
y Min. 440mm high x 395mm wide x 120mm deep
y 3 mm mirror fixed to self closing hinged door
y Min. 1 shelf
Double Door Cabinet
y Min. 440mm high x 700mm wide x 120mm deep
y 2 x 4 mm sliding mirror doors with finger slots set in recessed safety
tracks (extruded PVC or aluminium tracks fitted to HMR laminated
board) OR 2 x 3 mm mirrors fixed to self closing hinged doors
y Min. 2 shelves
For people with disabilities
Single door cabinet and mirror (fixed to wall)
y Cabinet 975mm high x 300 mm wide x 200 mm deep, with min. 3
shelves (beside mirror)
y Mirror 975 mm high x 500 mm wide (above basin)

Warranty 5 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 203 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

Sub-component Bathroom Fittings

Need For easy access and manipulation of towels, toilet paper, soap and the
like
Requirement Toilet Paper Holder
y Ceramic
y Chrome plated brass/polished stainless steel frame, min. 150mm x
150mm with aluminium roller
Bath Towel Rail
y 760mm overall length x 16mm-diameter chrome plated brass or
stainless steel tube with stainless steel end brackets, for wall screw
fixing
Robe Hooks
y 52mm x 53mm chrome plated brass

Warranty 1 year written warranty

Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

Sub-component Grab Rails

Need
Reduce risk of falls for our customers
Requirement
Pensioner Housing only
y To current Australian Standard
y 32mm diameter x 1.2mm thick 304 Stainless Steel or powder coated
aluminium x 450mm min. overall length, secured to wall with round
head C.P. brass or stainless steel screws, minimum 50mm long

y Hygienic seal Flange Covers

Warranty 1 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 204 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
DRYERS
Sub-component

Need Dry washing efficiently and effectively

Requirement
Pensioner Housing only
y To current Australian Standards
y Min 3.5kg or 5kg capacity
y Auto cool down
y 2.5 hour timer – 3 heat settings
y Easy clean filter
y Safety door switch, Safety thermostat reset switch
y 2 directional air outlet and optional venting kit
y wall mountable
y Min 2 star Energy Rating

Warranty Min. 2 year warranty

Component FLOORS (& WALLS)

Sub-component Waterproofing

Item

Need Prevent water penetration into walls and through floors

Requirement
TILE JUNCTIONS
y To current Australian Standards for caulked joint sealants.

Warranty 10 year written warranty

Component FLOOR FINISHES

Sub-component Concrete Floor Treatment

Need
A cleanable waterproof and non-slip floor finish on concrete
Requirement y Slip resistance to current Australian Standards
y Slip rating of R10 for Wet areas
y Slip rating of R9 for all other areas
Warranty 5 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 205 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Bases

Need To provide a sound, waterproof base for the shower that integrates
seamlessly with other shower elements
Requirement
General Housing only
y To current Australian Standard, including installation
y Standard Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval
and tested to current Australian Standard
y 900mm x 900mm x 70mm high hob
y Pressed metal (vitreous Solvent-bourne finish) OR moulded plastic
(non slip finish)
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
y Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/trademark

Warranty 10 year written warranty for Latex (Waterborne) & 30 years written
warranty for pressed metal

Component SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Roses

Need To provide a spray of water sufficient for washing comfortably

Requirement
Water saving ‘3 STAR WELS’ rated not more than 9L/min.

5 years written warranty

Component SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Seat

Need To provide support for less mobile customers whilst using the shower

Requirement y To current Australian Standards

Warranty 1 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 206 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component TAPS
Sub-component

Need See Kitchen

Requirement
Bib tap/Pillar tap/Shower set/Bath set/Basin set/Hob mounted sink
set/Wall sink set
y General requirements as per kitchen taps requirements
General Housing
y Lever/Capstan/knob handles for multi-unit or detached housing
Pensioner Housing
y Lever handles lever length 65mm to 80mm or Capstan tap handles
y Quarter turn taps with ceramic seals fitted to baths, basins, laundry
tubs
Disabled Housing
y Long Lever tap handles lever length 90mm to 150 mm (surgeon type)
as scoped by O.T.
y Quarter turn taps with ceramic seals fitted to baths, basins, laundry
tubs

Warranty Min. 2 year written warranty

Component
TAPS
Sub-component Tempering Valves / Thermostatic Mixing
Valve
Need
To ensure hot water does not scald customers
Requirement y Tempering Valves set to Plumbing Code standards
y Thermostatic Mixing Valve only in Class 9 BCA dwellings
y To current Australian Standard
y Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
Warranty 5 years written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 207 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component TOILET
Sub-component

Need To provide hygienic, comfortable toiletry facility

Requirement
New General Housing/ Pensioner Housing
y To current Australian Standards
y Standard Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval
y Pedestal pan to be white vitreous china
y Cisterns to be vitreous china or heavy duty grade PVC with internal
overflow
y 4.5/3L dual flush toilet suites (min 4 Star WELS rating)
y Toilet and Cisterns to be vandal resistant or fitted with a ‘Vandal
Resistant Conversion kit’
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
Existing General/ Pensioner Housing
y Retrofit 6/3 L dual flush cisterns if retaining existing pans (Min 3 Star
WELS rating)
y Retrofit 4.5/3 L dual flush toilet suites where replacing pans (Min 4
Star WELS rating)
Warranty 1 year written warranty

Component TOILET
Sub-component Toilet Seats and Covers

Need
To supplement the toilet so a reasonable level of comfort is provided
Requirement y To current Australian Standards.
y Constructed of solid plastic – “Vandal Resistant”
y Installed to manufacturers written specification

Warranty 1 year written warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 208 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component TUB
Sub-component

Need
To wash and soak clothes/bedding
Requirement y To current Australian Standards.
y Standards Mark/Water Mark/Waterboard certificate of approval
y Detachable PVC or polyolefin bypass connected at top to current
Australian Standard
Tub
y Min. 45 litre capacity (pensioner housing)
y Min. 68 litre capacity (general housing)
y Min. 302 stainless steel
y Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/trademark
Cabinet
y White enamel/colourbond finish to steel

Warranty 25 years warranty for stainless steel & 10 years warranty for the
cabinet

Component WASHING MACHINE

Sub-component

Need
A means of automatically washing a variety of clothes/bedding types.
Requirement
General
y To current Australian Standards
y Standards Mark/Type Test Mark to NPADPS/Water Authority
certificate of approval
Disabled Housing, BCA Class 3 and Class 9 (Min 7 kg Load
Capacity)
y Front loading
y 4 Star WELS rating
y 4 Star Energy rating
Common Area Laundries (Min.5.5 kg load capacity)
y Top loading
y 3 Star WELS rating
y 2 Star Energy rating
Warranty Min. 1 year warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 209 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

SERVICES

Smoke alarms
Water heaters

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 210 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
SMOKE ALARMS
Sub-component

Need To provide early warning of fire to occupants

Requirement
New and Existing Dwellings
y Certificate of compliance by SSL (Scientific Services Laboratory) for
testing to current Australian Standards
y Ionisation or photoelectric model or Heat Technology
y Test button
y Alarm pause (‘hush’) button to silence alarm (ionisation model)
y Mains operated (hard-wired) 240 volt unit with fixed rechargeable
(Lithium) battery backup (10 years battery life expectancy) – with Min
2 months battery standby
y Inter-linkable features
y Low power warning
y Installed to manufacturers written specification
y Branded with manufacturers trademark to AS 3786
y Energy Efficient smoke alarm
y Interlink with Isolators / hush button for disabled housing
y Interlink with Strobe lights for hearing impaired

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty including rechargeable battery

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 211 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Electric Water Heaters
Need
To reliably provide hot water
Requirement y To current Australian Standards
y Standards Mark/WaterMark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
Off-peak mains pressure storage:
Storage
Mains Pressure: Floor Model(indoor/outdoor)
(1 bedroom/ pensioner - 125L)
(2 bedrooms - 250L)
(3 bedrooms and over - 315L
Roof Model
(2 bedrooms - 250L)
(3 bedrooms and over - 315L)
Instantaneous
Min. 13 L/min
NB: Only to replace Internal Instantaneous Gas models
Storage
Warranty
1 year warranty (parts/labour) &10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous
3 years warranty (parts/labour)

Component
WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Solar Water Heaters

Need
To reliably provide hot water
Requirement
General Housing Only
y To current Australian Standards
y Standards Mark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
y Installation to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers
written specification
y Natural gas or electricity boosted
y Solar Panels (hail resistant) appropriate to zone area and size of tank
y Capacity:
-Min. 170L with 5 star Gas Boost
-Min. 300L with Electric Boost

Warranty 10 years written warranty on Cylinder, Panels and Heat Exchanger

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 212 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

Component
WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Gas Water Heaters

Need
To reliably provide hot water
Requirement
General Housing only
y To current Australian Standards
y Standards Mark/WaterMark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
y AGA approval
y minimum 5 star energy rating
Storage
Mains pressure: Floor Model (outdoor only)
(1 bedroom min 90L)
(2 bedroom min 110L)
(3 bedroom 135L/145L and over)
Instantaneous (External Gas Instantaneous only)
NB: Only to replace bath heater models
(1 bathroom – Cold zone 16L to 26L or temperate zone 16L to 20L)
(2 bathroom – Cold zone 26L to 32L or temperate zone 20L to 26L)

Warranty Storage
1 year warranty (parts/labour) 10 year warranty (cylinder)
Instantaneous
3 years parts and labour warranty

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 213 of 214

 MRP08 MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 10 – COMPONENT SCHEDULE

[Page left blank intentionally.]

Exhibit 03 Technical Specifications MRP08 as amended.doc Page 214 of 214

FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Fire Safety Works

VERSION: 1.3

ISSUE DATE: December 2020

Page 1 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SCOPE

This specification deals with the Fire Safety Works identified in the Fire Safety Manual (FSM)
Refer to the Fire Safety Manual, Scoping Reports and Schedule of Rates for extent.

Where not specified reference to an Australian Standard shall mean the version required to achieve
compliance with the FSM.

DEFINITIONS

Approved: The words "approved", "directed", "rejected", "endorsed" and similar expressions mean,
"approved (directed, rejected, endorsed, etc.) in writing by the Principal’s Representative.

BCA: The current version of the Building Code of Australia, including all amendments, as referenced
within the audit criteria of the FSM.

FSM: Shall mean the Fire Safety Manual developed for Housing NSW.

FRL: Shall mean Fire Resistance Level as determined by testing in accordance with AS 1530.4.

INSTALL: and similar expressions mean to install only.

SUPPLY: and similar expressions mean to supply only.

Page 2 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – PASSIVE PROTECTION

1.1 Fire Rated Plasterboard Ceiling Systems

• Fire rated plasterboard ceiling systems shall be formulated so that when used in a ceiling
system immediately below a roof it enables the ceiling to meet the requirements for an
FRL of -/60/60 and a Resistance to the Incipient Spread of Fire for 60 minutes when
tested in accordance with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of
Elements of Building Construction.
• Fire rated plasterboard ceiling system installed below intermediate floors to protect
services penetrations shall have an FRL of -/60/60 or -/90/90 as specified by the FSM.
• Any hanger, its attachments to the supporting structure and grid system shall withstand
without failure a load of 1.4KN.
• Suitable test evidence to be provided demonstrating fitness for the intended purpose.

1.2 Fire Rated Plasterboard Shaft Systems

• Where required by the FSM a fire rated plasterboard shaft shall be constructed to
achieve an FRL of -/60/60, -/90/90 or -/120/120 when tested in accordance with
Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire resistance Tests of Elements of Building
Construction.
• Shaft systems must meet the structural requirements for light weight construction which
requires tests to the following standards:
 Resistance to Static Pressure – ASTM E72-80
 Resistance to Impact – ASTM E695-79
 Surface Indentation – AS2185 – Appendix A2
 BRANZ Test Report – STO349
• When tested in accordance with AS 1530.3 contain a Spread of Flame index of zero (0).
• Suitable test evidence to be provided demonstrating fitness for the intended purpose.

1.3 Fire Rated Plasterboard Bulkhead Systems

• Fire rated plasterboard bulkhead systems shall formulated so that when used in a
bulkhead system it enables the ceiling to meet the requirements for an FRL of -/60/60,
-/90/90 or -/120/120 as required when tested in accordance with Australian Standard AS
1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building Construction.
• Any hanger, its attachments to the supporting structure and grid system shall withstand
without failure a load of 1.4KN.
• Suitable test evidence to be provided demonstrating fitness for the intended purpose.

1.4 Fire Dampers

• Fire dampers shall be formulated to provide the required FRL when tested in accordance
with Australian Standard AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building
Construction.
• Fire dampers must pass the requirements for the air leakage test specified in Clause 5.3
of AS 1682.1.
• The mounting flange, casing, and blades of the fire damper shall be made from-
 Stainless steel complying with AS 1449;

Page 3 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – PASSIVE PROTECTION

 Zinc coated steel sheet complying with AS 1397 with a coating not less than Z275;
or
 Castings of malleable ferrous materials or other alloys having a temperature fusion
not less than 1000oC.
• Materials for moving parts (including blade and linkage shafts and linkage bearings) shall
be stainless steel complying with AS 1444, commercial brass or bronze complying with
AS 1567 or a polyamide or polyfluoride.
• Linkages, springs and other moving parts which form part of the closing mechanisms
shall be made of stainless steel grade 301, condition H of AS 1449 or equivalent or
phosphor bronze, grade 518B, temper H of AS 1566 or equivalent.
• If activated by a thermally released link, it shall be tested to comply with AS 1890. For
horizontal mounted fire dampers, the thermally released link shall be located within the
casing, in the plane normal to air flow.
• Suitable test evidence of any product to be provided demonstrating fitness for intended
purpose.

1.5 Fire Rated Fabric Barriers, High density mineral Batts and Rockwool Insulation

• Fire Rated Fabric Barriers, High density mineral fibre rigid batts, Rockwool or equivalent
product shall be fire resistant and have been demonstrated to achieve the FRL required
of the building element where it is installed as specified within the FSM.
• Rockwool (75 mm) or equivalent shall have a density not less than 120 kg/m3.

1.6 Fire Stopping Materials

• Fire stopping materials must comply with the nominated properties or replicate a system
tested in accordance with AS 4072.1 and AS 1530.4
• The installed fire stopping materials must replicate the tested system and achieve an FRL
of not less than that specified in the FSM of the penetrated floor/wall or ceiling assembly.
• Penetrations shall be protected by a system that has been tested in accordance with AS
4072.1 and AS 1530.4.
• Suitable test evidence of any product to be provided demonstrating fitness for intended
purpose.

1.7 Doors and Signs

• Solid core door shall be minimum 35mm thick solid core doors and are required to be
installed such that they maintain a tight fitting clearance.
• Fire rated door set is to comply with the requirements of AS 1905.1 Fire – Resistant Door
Sets.
• Fire rated door sets are required to be installed such that the standard clearance
requirements of AS 1905.1 are met without the need for the installation of additional
hardware or seals unless otherwise approved.
• Doors shall be fitted with lever handles in accordance with clause D2.21 of the BCA.
• The required exit doors from a building shall be installed as necessary so that they are
operable from the inside without the use of the key.

Page 4 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – PASSIVE PROTECTION

• Where screen doors are fitted to the required exit doors, they shall also operable from the
inside without the use of the key and be fitted with lever handles in accordance with clause
D2.21 of the BCA.
• Where required by these clauses door sets are to be provided with signage in accordance
with clause D2.23 of the BCA and 183 of the Environmental Planning and Assessment Act
Regulation 2000.

1.9 Electric Door Strikes

• Electric strikes shall automatically unlock all exit doors upon operation of any installed
smoke alarm system or fire sprinkler system.
• Upon power failure, all existing security systems shall automatically disengage to
automatically unlock all doors.
• Equal to Lockwood ES2000 Series Monitored Electric Strike.

1.10 Fire & Smoke Seals

• The seals are to have undergone tests with proprietary fire doors and/or solid core doors.
• Intumescent fire and/or medium temperature smoke seals shall be installed at doors as
per FSM requirements.
• Medium temperature smoke seals are to have been tested in accordance with AS 1530.7
and shall achieve 25 m3/h at 25 Pa when exposed to 200oC for at least 30 minutes.
• Intumescent fire seals are to have been tested in accordance with AS 1905.
• Combined intumescent fire and medium temperature smoke seals are to have been
tested in accordance with AS 1905 and AS 1530.7.
• Independent tests are to be provided that demonstrate that the product does not suffer
from any significant wear and tear for up to and exceeding 95,000 open and close cycles.
• Suitable test evidence of any product to be provided demonstrating fitness for intended
purpose.

1.11 Intumescent Paint

• Intumescent Paint shall have been approved for use.

• Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a FRL of -/60/60 or -/90/90 as per FSM
requirements
• Minimum required dry film thickness shall be 1000 microns to achieve a FRL of -/60/60
(Internal Application) or 1500 microns to achieve a FRL of -/90/90 (External Application)
• Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a FRL of 60 minutes when applied to
sheetrock and lath & plaster in both wall and ceiling assemblies in accordance with AS
1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building Construction or the American
Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials. .
• Fire rated paint shall have been tested to achieve a FRL of -/60/60 in wall and/or ceiling
assemblies constructed of gypsum, fibreglass, aluminium, asbestos products, particle
board, fibrous cement sheeting, pressed metal, plywood panels and timber in accordance
with AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements of Building Construction or the

Page 5 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – PASSIVE PROTECTION

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .
• Intumescent paint to begin to expand at a temperature not exceeding 190oC.
• Independent tests are to be provided that indicates drying time of a single coat of
intumescent paint not less than 450 microns (without the need for mechanical aids), does
not exceed 4 hours in any season assuming weather conditions are appropriate to apply
the product.
• Independent tests are to be provided that indicates the product is non-toxic.
• Independent tests shall be provided indicating that the product can be applied over
existing non-fire retardant paint.
• The product shall not contain a flashpoint.
• Product to have a minimum 20 year guarantee for internal applications.

1.12 Radiant heat Attenuating Screens

• The radiant heat attenuating screens are to have the following characteristics:

o Material to be 304 stainless steel,

o Wire diameter of screen not less than 0.9mm,
o Weave characteristics not less than 394 strands per metre, 10 x 10 weave and 10
strands per inch.
o Screens are to be of non-combustible construction and shall not contain any
components that will ignite when subjected to radiant heat or elevated
temperature,
o Frames shall be Aluminium or Steel on all sides joined at the corners by welding or
metallic gussets and fasteners. The minimum thickness of the frame shall be 10
mm,
o Fixing of the gauze to the frame shall be by weld or clamping with a continuous
metallic strip fixed to the frame with metallic fasteners, and
o Metallic label with a statement in bold letters minimum 3 mm high saying: “FIRE
ATTENUATION SCREEN – DO NOT REMOVE’ shall be fitted at the screens

1.13 Fire Collars

• Tested and approved in accordance with AS 1530.4 – Fire Resistance Tests of Elements
of Building Construction or British Standards BS 476: Part 20 to seal both PVC and PP
pipes from 32mm up to 110mm in penetrations through fire rated floor and wall
components for up to 90 minutes.
• Product to have been tested as a retrofit fire stop collar.
• Independent tests to be provided to indicate that the maximum temperature resistance
(fire stop collar shall begin to activate) shall not exceed 120oC.
• Suitable test evidence required any product to be provided demonstrating fitness for
intended purpose.

1.14 Fire Rated Ceiling Access Panels

• Fire rated manholes that provide full access to a space (eg, a roof space) shall be not less
than 600mm x 400mm in size and hinged on one side.

Page 6 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 – PASSIVE PROTECTION

• When located in a common area they shall also be provided with a lock, keyed to the
requirements of the Principal.
• Fire rated access panels to false ceilings provided for the purpose of maintenance access
(eg, plumbing) where full body entry is not necessary, shall be not less than 300mm x
300mm in size.
• Fire rated manholes and access panels shall provide a fire rating equivalent to the fire
rating of the section in which they are installed. They shall be tested in accordance with
AS 1530.4 and installed in accordance with the listed tested prototype.
• They are to be supported independently of the ceiling lining.

END OF SECTION 1

Page 7 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All works associated with the provision of emergency lighting and exit signs throughout each building is
to be undertaken in accordance with this Performance Specification, the Building Code of Australia, and
all the relevant provisions of AS 2293.1 (Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for Buildings Part 1:
System design, installation and operation).

2.1.1 Standards

AS 2293 Emergency evacuation lighting in buildings:

• Part 1 - Design and installation

• Part 2 - Inspection and maintenance

NOTE: All exit and directional signs are to consist of Pictorial Diagrams and indicators in accordance
with AS 2293.1-2005.

2.1.2 Testing

Classification Testing: To AS 2293.1.

Type Testing: To AS 2293.1.

Certification: For each size and type of self-contained emergency lighting luminaire and exit sign supply
copies of a certificate of tests stating the testing authority, manufacturer and details of parameters and
results for each test.

Commissioning Test: To AS 2293.1.

Each luminaire shall be provided with a test switch.

2.1.3 Inspection and Maintenance

Standard: To AS 2293.2.

Maintenance Period: Co-extensive with the Defects Liability Period.

Requirement: During the maintenance period:

• Carry out periodic inspections and maintain the emergency lighting installation in a condition to
meet the specified performance;
• Promptly rectify faults. Replace faulty materials and equipment without charge;
• Provide maintenance records.
• Provide an automatic timer arranged to discharge the battery for the purpose of carrying out
the maintenance procedures specified in AS 2293.2.

Certification: At the end of the maintenance period make a final inspection of the installation and upon
satisfactory completion certify in writing that the installation is operating correctly.

Page 8 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS

2.1.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual

Standard: To AS 2293.1.

2.1.5 Maintenance Records

Requirement: To AS 2293.1.

Log Book: A4 size, printed or typed on durable printing paper and neatly bound in durable vinyl or
similar covers, coloured distinctly different from the colour of the operating and maintenance manual
covers. The logbook records should be kept in a readily accessible location.

2.1.6 Wiring and Cabling Location

Wiring and cabling is not to be left exposed, where ever possible it is to be concealed within the existing
construction. Do not install wiring in eaves or the cavity of full brick or brick-veneer walls.

If surface ducting is required then it is to be of a white low profile type square in shape and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification. Attention is required to ensure that the location of the
ducting is as unobtrusive as possible, is straight and true with the appropriate number of fixings.

2.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

2.2.1 Recessed Halogen Emergency Light

• White powder coated lamp heads with protective lamp covers.

• 10W Halogen lamps with lamp fail LED indication.
• Recessed control pack with long life NiCad or Lithium battery pack.
• Equal to Spitfire.

2.2.2 LED Emergency Light

• LED lamp life greater than 60,000 hrs.

• Vandal resistant with polycarbonate housing, white powder coated metal or injected moulded
mounting bracket.
• Equal to Pierlite.

2.2.3 Emergency light – Circular florescent batten

• Surface mounted with energy efficient fluorescent lamp. Including long life battery and lamp.
• Powder coated steel or die cast aluminum housing and frame. Vandal resistant with
polycarbonate diffuser.
• Equal to Pierlite.

2.2.4 Single fluorescent diffused batten emergency light.

• Surface mounted with energy efficient fluorescent lamp. Including long life battery and lamp.
• Powder coated steel or die cast aluminium housing and frame. Vandal resistant, with
polycarbonate diffuser.
• Equal to Pierlite
Page 9 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS

2.2.5 Double fluorescent diffused batten emergency light.

• Surface mounted with energy efficient fluorescent lamp. Including long life battery and lamp.
• Powder coated steel or die cast aluminum housing and frame. Vandal resistant with
polycarbonate diffuser.
• Equal to Pierlite

2.2.6 Vandal proof and weatherproof emergency single batten

• Surface or pole mounted with energy efficient fluorescent lamp. Impact resistant molded
plastic or Powder coated steel or die cast aluminum housing and frame.
• Vandal proof and weatherproof. Including long life battery and lamp and achieve required IP
rating under Australian Standards.
• Equal to Pierlite.

2.2.7 Vandal proof and weatherproof emergency double batten light

• Surface or pole mounted with energy efficient fluorescent lamp. Impact resistant molded
plastic or Powder coated steel or die cast aluminum housing and frame.
• Vandal proof and weatherproof. Including long life battery and lamp and achieve required IP
rating under Australian Standards.
• Equal to Pierlite.

2.2.8 Vandal proof and weatherproof LED external emergency light.

• Surface or pole mounted with long life LED globe lamp. Impact resistant molded plastic or
Powder coated steel or die cast aluminum housing and frame.
• Vandal proof and weatherproof. Including long life battery and lamp and achieve required IP
rating under Australian Standards.
• Equal to Sylvania or Zumtobel

2.2.9 LED Illuminated exit light.

• LED lamp life greater than 60,000 hrs including long life NiCad or Lithium Battery and lamp.
• Vandal resistant polycarbonate housing with white powder coated metal or injected molded
mounting bracket.
• Equal to Pierlite or Thomas & Betts

2.2.10 4W to 8W Illuminated exit light,

• Energy efficient fluorescent, removable electronic gear tray including long life NiCad or Lithium
Battery and lamp.
• Vandal resistant injected molded housing and a polycarbonate diffuser.
• Equal to Pierlite or Thomas & Betts.

2.2.11 10W to 12W Illuminated exit light

• Energy efficient fluorescent, removable electronic gear tray including long life NiCad or Lithium
Battery and lamp.
• Vandal resistant, injected molded housing and a polycarbonate diffuser.
• Equal to Pierlite or Thomas & Betts

Page 10 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 2 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS

2.2.12 10W to 18W External Illuminated exit light,

• Energy efficient fluorescent, removable electronic gear tray including long life NiCad or Lithium
Battery and lamp.
• Vandal resistant, steel or injected molded housing, polycarbonate diffuser and weatherproof.
• Equal to Pierlite or Thomas & Betts

2.2.13 Wall Mounted Emergency Light

• Die cast aluminum adjustable lamp mounts with vandal resistant housing comprising of a poly
carbonate or steel housing.
• Non maintained operation with a low profile body assembly.
• Compliant to AS 2293 and equal to Pierlite Guardian

2.3 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING SYSTEMS

The emergency/evacuation lighting, within a building , is to be activated upon actuation of the smoke
alarm system.

This may be made up of the normal domestic lighting system or emergency lighting system or a
combination of the two.

Relay switches shall be compatible to the smoke alarm installed and shall be tested and approved to
the relevant Australian Standard.

Where emergency luminaires are to be installed then they are to comply with AS 2293.1 and Section 2
of this specification as relevant to the requirements of the FSM.

END OF SECTION 2

Page 11 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All works associated with the provision of a fire hydrant and hose reel system throughout each building
is to be undertaken in accordance with this Performance Specification, the Building Code of Australia,
and all the relevant provisions of AS 2419.1 (Fire hydrant installations Part 1: System design,
installation and commissioning) and AS 2441 (Installation of fire hose reels).

3.1.1 WATER SUPPLY

3.1.2 Standards

To AS 2419.1, AS 3500, AS 3000 and Fire and Rescue NSW requirements.

3.2 DIESEL PUMP-SET

3.2.1 General

Where required provide and install a diesel pump-set to ensure that the water supplies have adequate
pressure/flow characteristics to satisfy the required system requirements for the fire hydrants as
nominated above.

3.2.2 Standards

The pump-set and installation shall comply with the requirements of AS 2419 Installation of Fire
Hydrants, AS 2941 Fixed Fire Protection Installation - Pump-set Systems, and Sydney Water.

3.2.3 Pumps

The pump-set shall be of an approved single stage centrifugal type with a cast iron casing, bronze
impeller(s) and stainless steel shaft. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced after
assembly on to the shaft.

Pump seals shall be of the stuffing box and gland type with bronze glands and stainless steel and/or
metal studs and nuts. Packing shall be coated in graphite grease before insertion to enable easy
removal when it requires renewal. Alternatively, mechanical seals may be used.

Bearings shall be of the deep groove ball or roller type with an adequate safety margin to ensure long
life. Adequate provision will be made in the bearings to take any axial thrust that may be imposed by the
impeller.

Provide grease nipples on the pump casing adjacent to each bearing to enable manual lubrication of the
bearings.

3.2.4 Mounting

Pumps and drivers shall be direct - coupled and mounted on common, rigid, fabricated steel or concrete
plinths to form the complete pump-set. Pump controllers may be wall mounted or unit mounted (factory
pre-wired) on the common steel bases if desired.

Page 12 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.2.5 Couplings

Provide non-lubricated flexible couplings using prestressed rubber brushes pressed into the housing
and using high tensile steel bolts. The coupling guard shall be galvanised.

3.2.6 Installation

When installing pump-sets ensure that there is no strain on the casing due to pipe misalignment.
Adjacent piping shall be flanged, to allow ease of servicing of pumps, pump impellers and associated
valving.
Pipe pump glands to the nearest drain.

3.2.7 Vibration

Provide vibration isolation as necessary to ensure that pump-sets will run without causing undue
vibration in the building structure.

3.2.8 Engine Alarm

Provide an engine overheating alarm in the form of a bell to signal either water temperature rise or oil
pressure failure.

NOTE: Audible alarm only is required, automatic shut down of engine will not be provided.
The alarm bell shall be incorporated in the Pump Control Panel and shall be powered by the diesel
engine starting batteries.

The bell shall be activated by a relay in the diesel starter motor control circuit through time delay relays
which will be adjusted to allow for the normal delays in reaching normal operating conditions after
starting of the diesel. Provide a push-to-test button. No muting device is required.

3.2.9 Operation Light

A strobe light, red in colour, shall be installed outside the pump room in a readily visible location. The
light is to actuate when the pump is in operation.

An engraved water, fade and weather resistant sign is to be affixed beneath the light and include block
lettering with the words ‘HYDRANT PUMP IN OPERATION’.

3.2.10 Spare Fuel

Provide a spare fuel tank, of not less than 6 hour running capacity, wall mounted in a readily accessible
position in the pump room.

Provide facilities for the transference of fuel both into the spare fuel tank and thence into the main
engine fuel tank. This facility may be in the form of a hand operated semi-rotary pump with flexible
hoses suitable rated for the purpose.

Page 13 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.2.11 Engine Spares

Provide and install a heavy duty steel tool cabinet with lock and provide the complete set of spare parts
and tools for diesel motors as required by AS 2941. Secure the tool box to the wall in an approved
position with bolt heads accessible only from the inside of the tool box.

3.2.12 Pump Controllers

Function and operation to AS 1941 with protection to IP54 standard in accordance with AS 1939.

3.2.13 Exhaust

The silencer and catalytic converter will be located as close as possible to the engine. The exhaust
gases will be carried to the outside air in medium gauge stainless steel tubing of a diameter
recommended by the motor manufacturer. Lag the exhaust system and silencer and neatly sheath with
zinc anneal sheeting where run exposed. The exhaust system shall terminate in a location approved by
the Principal.
Set the exhaust pipe so that moisture and condensate cannot accumulate in it or run back into the
engine. Fit a pet-cock at the engine manifold to facilitate manual release of trapped liquids.

3.3 ELECTRICAL JACKING PUMP

3.3.1 General

Where required provide and install an electrical jacking pump for the new fire hydrant system, which is
to also serve to satisfy the system requirements for the fire hose reels as nominated above.

3.3.2 Standards

The electrical jacking pump and installation shall comply with the requirements of AS 2941 Fixed Fire
Protection Installation - Pump-set Systems, and Sydney Water.

3.3.3 Pumps

The electric jacking pump shall be of an approved single stage centrifugal type with a cast iron casing,
bronze impeller(s) and stainless steel shaft. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced
after assembly on to the shaft.

Pump seals shall be of the stuffing box and gland type with bronze glands and stainless steel and/or
metal studs and nuts. Packing shall be coated in graphite grease before insertion to enable easy
removal when it requires renewal. Alternatively, mechanical seals may be used.

Bearings shall be of the deep groove ball or roller type with an adequate safety margin to ensure long
life. Adequate provision shall be made in the bearings to take any axial thrust that may be imposed by
the impeller.

Provide grease nipples on the pump casing adjacent to each bearing to enable manual lubrication of
the bearings.

Page 14 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.4 PUMP ROOM

3.4.1 General

Where required construct a new weatherproof pump room for the new diesel pump-set and associated
equipment, in a location approved by the Principal. The pump room shall be:

• Secured to prevent the entry of unauthorized persons. That is, lockable with a ‘003’ lock and
key.
• Adequately ventilated for the aspiration, cooling of pump drivers and the maintenance of
acceptable indoor air quality for room occupants.
• Identified by appropriate signs and other visual and audible aids, so that the room and its
entrance can be readily located by the attending fire brigades.
• Constructed with a minimum 2.1 m high internal clearance with adequate space for pump
maintenance and replacement (at least 1m around pumps).

The Contractor is to determine exact dimensions, locations and layouts to enable the installation of the
pump-sets, all required valves, fittings and pipe work, and all associated equipment.

The design of the pump room is to allow for all site features and Council requirements, and is to fully
comply with all relevant building regulations and Australian Standards.

3.4.2 Acoustic Treatment

An appropriately qualified practising acoustic consultant is to prepare a report which outlines suitable
construction details and noise attenuation measures which will achieve appropriate external noise levels
whilst the pump is in operation.

The pump room is to incorporate the recommended acoustic treatments so that outside noise levels do
not adversely affect residential amenity.

3.4.3 Workmanship

All work must be carried out by a licensed builder.

All materials must be fixed in a manner that meets or exceeds applicable and current Australian
Standards and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4.4 Floor

The floor of the pump room is to comprise of a concrete slab suitable to support the load of the new
diesel pump-set and all associated equipment, and constructed fit for purpose for its intended use.

The floor slab is to be designed and its construction certified by a suitably qualified practising structural
engineer in accordance with AS 1170 and AS 3600.

Measures must be provided to prevent the ingress of surface or sub surface water into the room.

Page 15 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.4.5 Perimeter Walls

The perimeter walls of the pump room are to comprise of masonry construction. Where located within a
building or within 6m of a building the enclosing walls are to achieve an FRL of 120/120/120.

3.4.6 Access

Pump rooms located within a building shall have a door opening to a road or open space, or a door
opening to fire-isolated passageway or stair which leads to a road or open space.

3.4.6 Roof Construction

3.4.7 General
Use only materials that meet or exceed the applicable Australian Standard for quality, and be suitable to
provide a stable and durable structure.

3.4.8 Corrugated Steel Roofing

The roof for the pump room is to be timber or steel framed, sheeted with corrugated steel, including
insulation and a vapour barrier. The timber or steel framing is to be adequately tied-down to the external
walls.

Use base thickness of 0.42mm where hard rolled or 0.50mm where annealed, either galvanised or
aluminium/zinc alloy coated steel, branded in accordance with AS 1445. Hard rolled material must be
marked ‘not for curving’.
Fix sheets with 45mm coated hex head self tapping screws and neoprene washers to every alternate
corrugation at ends and every fourth corrugation between. All hips and ridges are to be covered with
450mm wide stock capping of similar gauge and material to roof, lapped and secured with matching
screws and washers.

3.4.9 Roof Plumbing and Roof Flashings

3.4.10 Roof Plumbing

Materials for use in gutters, valleys, capping and downpipes together with associated accessories and
fasteners must conform to the specifications in AS 2179 and AS 2180 and be marked accordingly.
Selection and installation of metal rainwater goods must meet the requirements of AS 2180. Take
particular care to allow for thermal expansion movements and compatibility of adjacent metals.
Install a gutter complying with the provision of AS 2180, on a minimum grade of 1:200 and supported by
gutter brackets at a maximum spacing of 1200mm. Design for minimum 1 in 20 year rainfall intensity.
Install a downpipe that is a minimum of 100x50mm, or 75mm diameter, secured by straps at a
maximum spacing of 2000mm with a minimum of two to each stack.

3.4.11 Roof Flashings

To avoid galvanic corrosion, metal flashings must be compatible with other metals they are in contact
with, or spill water from or onto.
Take into account thermal expansion when using long lengths of flashing, which must be lapped a
minimum of 150mm, pop riveted and silicone sealed.
Provide flashing of 1.3mm lead or soft zinc in all required locations such as at roof edges.

Page 16 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.4.12 Concrete
Slabs are to achieve the minimum required strength of concrete at 28 days. The slab must be designed
and its construction certified by a suitably qualified practising structural engineer in accordance with AS
1170 and AS 3600.

3.4.13 Concrete Reinforcement

All reinforcement must conform to the following standards:
AS 3600
AS 1302
AS 1303
AS 1304

3.4.14 Masonry
Select and construct all masonry and its component materials and accessories so that the finished work
has sufficient strength and durability, and appropriate to the exposure conditions.
Ensure that all newly constructed masonry is adequately supported and braced until its design strength
has been reached, particularly in exposed sites.
Bricks are to be stacked in a well-ventilated manner and protected from the weather. When each laying
period is finished, protect the top course to prevent moisture entering the masonry.

3.4.15 Mortar
The durability and strength of the masonry unit, and its exposure conditions, will determine the
appropriate mortar mix for each situation.
Use Portland cement and clean sharp sand, proportioned by volume, adding sufficient clean water and
approved admixtures (such as lime) to provide a mortar mix with the desired workability, durability,
colour and strength.

3.5 BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE

Provide and install a back flow prevention device in accordance with the relevant provisions of the water
authority and AS 3500. The back flow prevention device shall be located within the property near the
boundary, upstream of the booster assembly, in a location approved by the Principal. The device shall
comply with the requirements of AS 2845.1.

3.6 FIRE BRIGADE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY

Provide a mains type double-inlet fire brigade booster assembly, complete with a swing-gate check
valve and a gate valve immediately upstream of the inlets, as per the relevant requirements of AS
2419.1, in a location approved by the Principal.

The fire brigade booster shall be suitably sign posted, provided with a concrete plinth at the base,
painted red in colour, provided with an engraved water and fade resistant notice indicating test/working
pressures and housed within an enclosure specified within AS 2419.1.

3.7 PIPE AND FITTINGS

3.7.1 Standards

Steel Pipe:

Page 17 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

• AS 1074, medium wall thickness - galvanised.

• ASTM A53, grade A or B, - galvanised.
• API 5L, grade B, standard weight - galvanised

Malleable Fittings:
• AS 3673 - galvanised.
• Screwed flanges to AS 2129 bolting to AS 2529.
• Rolled Groove Fittings:
• FM, UL, or SSL listed.

3.7.2 Rolled Groove Fittings

Use only in accessible locations.

3.7.3 Thread Sealing

Seal the threads of screwed connections with degreased PTFE tape or, hemp with a thread sealing
compound.

3.7.4 Flange Bolting

Use cadmium plated in non-corrosive environments, otherwise a protective finish with equivalent
corrosive resistance to, and compatible with, the flange.

3.7.5 Installation

Before installation clean pipes by a suitable method. Remove loose scale, burrs, and fins. Install pipe
work in straight lines and uniform grades without sag. On completing remove loose scale, dirt, and the
like from the pipe work and leave the system free from foreign matter.

3.7.6 Joints

Keep the number of joints to a minimum.

Permanent joints: Provide mechanical roll-grooved, flanged, or screwed joints.

Demountable joints: Provide demountable joints only as follows:
Where permanent joints are impracticable;
Where required for maintenance, or testing of piping or fittings;
To attach valves to pipe work;
Where shown on the drawings or specified
At point of connection of each floor reticulation to rising main.
Demountable joint types: Provide flanged joints where possible for pipe sizes 65 and over, otherwise
mechanical roll-grooved or union type.

3.7.7 Supports

Provide support including hangers, saddle clips, anchor blocks to buried pipe, and the like, sufficient to
secure the pipe work to adjacent surfaces, to restrain the internal forces of pressure piping and to

Page 18 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

support it at joints, at changes of direction, and at intervals suitable to the size and type of pipe as
necessary to prevent sagging.

Pipework support in buildings not protected with a sprinkler system is required to be fire rated as per
the requirements of AS2419.

3.7.8 Painting and Labelling

All Fire hydrant pipe work is to be painted in selected colours to match surrounds and contain labelling
in accordance with AS 1345 which identifies the pipe work as a fire service. Hydrants remote from the
building are to be painted red.

3.8 VALVES AND ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT

3.8.1 Standards

To AS 2419.1, AS 4118.1 and generally of types approved and listed by Water Board or SSL.

3.8.2 Valve Assemblies

Requirement: Provide hydrant valve assemblies, where shown on the contract drawings.

3.8.3 Pressure Gauges

Minimum dial dimension 100 mm, manufactured to AS 1349.

3.8.4 Pressure Switches

Totally enclosed, waterproof type, rated not less than 1 amp.

Installation: Provide a pressure switch to the hydrant system to start the pump on a fall in pressure to
below the minimum requirement.

3.9 SPECIAL FIRE BRIGADE REQUIREMENTS

All hydrants are to be fitted with Stortz hose couplings which comply with Clause 7.1 of AS 2419.1. This
Clause states in part: "hose couplings shall be compatible with those used by the fire brigade
serving the area".

The fire hydrant booster assembly connections and all fire hydrant valves shall be fitted with Storz
aluminium alloy delivery couplings manufactured and installed in accordance with Clauses 7.1 and
8.5.11.1 of AS 2419.1-2005. All hydrant valves shall possess a forging symbol and manufacturers mark
and shall comply with Fire & Rescue NSW Fire Safety Guideline Technical Information (D15/45534).

Storz hermaphrodite fire hose couplings must be fitted to all fire hydrants and fire hydrant booster
assembly connections, as required by Appendix E of AS 2419.1.

Page 19 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

The Storz fittings must be manufactured to DIN 14303, aluminium alloy delivery couplings, in
accordance with Appendix A of AS 2419.2. Blank caps must be provided in accordance with Clause 2.8
of AS 2419.2.

The fire brigades booster assembly shall be orientated parallel to the road.

3.10 FIRE HYDRANT BLOCK PLAN

Provide an engraved Block Plan for the new fire hydrant system serving each building, in accordance
with AS 2419.1.

The Block Plan is to be not less than A3 in size and not more than A1 in size, have a maximum scale of
1 to 250 and shall be fixed within the fire brigade booster enclosure where it can be readily seen.

The Block Plan shall be a water, fade and weatherresistant,, material shall be Aluminium or Stainless
steel for outdoor or Traffolyte for indoor and shall display the following as a minimum:

A diagrammatic layout of the protected building(s) and adjacent streets. A diagram showing:

• size and location of water supply agency’s mains and street fire hydrants (dimensioned);
• any valves and connections with the water supply serving the building or site ;
• location and size of on-site fire mains;
• location and capacities of water storage tanks;
• location of pumps;
• location and number of each fire hydrant;
• location of all fire brigade booster assemblies;
• location of any isolating and non-return valves;
• any connections to other installed fire protection systems;
• pressure and flow duties of pumps (kPa and L/s);
• location of main electrical switch room and substation;
• length and size used for any polyethylene (PE) underground pipeworks,
• location of LPG tanks and gas supply shutdown valve;
• location of all flammable storage areas;
• location of any fire indicator panel or fire control centre;
• location of any sprinkler alarm valve set(s); and
• a north point symbol

The year of installation of the system, any major extensions thereto, any unusual features of the
installation, and:

• the name of the contractor who installed or modified the system;

• the name of the designer of the system;
• the water agency flow and pressure details under 95th percentile demand conditions
• the system design and commissioning pressure and flow rate; and
• the height of the highest fire hydrant outlet above the lowest booster inlet connection.

An example of a typical Block Plan for a fire hydrant system serving a low rise building, as presented in
AS 2419.1-, is given below.

Page 20 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

3.11 MOUNTING OF FIRE HOSE REELS

3.11.1 General

Additional to the requirements of AS2441, the location of fire hose reels is to comply with the
requirements of Clause E1.4 of the BCA.

All fire hose reels are to be securely fixed to the wall in accordance with AS 2441. The mounting of the
fire hose reels shall comply with the following requirements:

• Surface-mounted fire hose reel assemblies shall be mounted so that the full diameter of the
drum, bearing the operating instructions, is facing the access point.
• The fire hose reel assembly shall be suitably mounted at a spindle height of between 1400 mm
and 2400 mm above floor level. The stop valve shall be mounted at 1000±100 mm above floor
level. The recommended mounting height of the centre of the fire hose reel is 1500 mm above
floor level.
• The stop valve assembly and instructions shall be visible and readily accessible when the fire
hose reel is ready for operation, and shall be not more than 2000mm from the spindle of the
hose reel assembly. A clearance of not less than 100mm shall be provided around the stop
valve hand wheel or handle at any point where an operator needs to place their hand.
• When the fire hose reel is surface-mounted or in a recess, cabinet or cavity, there shall be a
minimum radial clearance of 100mm between the reel rim and any obstruction to the sides,
above and below that does not form part of the fire hose reel assembly.

Page 21 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

• Where a fire hose reel is fixed in a cabinet or recess, the hose guide shall protrude beyond the
recess when the hose is run out.
• Fire hose reels are to be mounted within a cabinet; the cabinet door(s) shall be openable by
single-handed operation of the latching mechanism housed within a break glass enclosure.
• The fire hose reel and its mounting shall be firmly secured to the mounting surface in
accordance with the installation instructions provided with the fire hose reel in accordance with
AS/NZS 1221.

3.11.2 Cabinet

All fire hose reels are to be securely fixed to the wall, and housed within a proprietary metal cabinet.
The fire hose reel cabinets are to be manufactured from 1.2mm zinc seal and finished in red baked
enamel paint, complete with appropriate signage, with flush handles/latches.

The cabinet shall be marked with the words

Page 22 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

FIRE HOSE REEL

in letters at least 50mm high in a colour providing a high contrast with that of the background.

3.12 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING & RESTORATION

3.12.1 General

The installation of underground pipe work shall be in accordance with AS 3500, associated relevant
Australian Standards and all authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

Investigate location of existing underground services before commencing the design or installation of
underground pipe work, conduits and cabling etc. No works shall commence until information
nominating locations of other services have been obtained. Obtain details of all underground services
from relevant authorities (e.g. in Sydney contact Dial Before You Dig).

Proposed locations of trench routes shall, where possible, maintain straight routes.
Provide all necessary concrete saw cutting, replacement of excavated concrete sections with concrete
with tie rods, excavations, trenching, bedding, thrust blocks, testing, backfilling and restoration to
original surfaces required for the works.

Trenching shall be of the required depth from final ground level to suit maximum possible traffic load
conditions. Where it is not possible provide the required depth over an underground pipe an alternative
acceptable method of protection shall be provided.

Pipe work shall be bedded on a minimum 150 mm layer of sand.

Each successive 300 mm of backfill shall be consolidated as the adjacent ground area.
Coordinate trenching locations with existing services and the building structure.

Provide and install all necessary shoring of sufficient strength to enable safe completion of the works.
Shoring shall be removed during compaction of the backfilling.

Where required, de-watering equipment shall be provided to keep excavated trenching free from water.

3.12.2 Thrust Blocks

Thrust blocks provided for underground pipe work shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of AS 3500.

Pipe work shall be securely fixed to thrust blocks with mild steel galvanised rods and/or straps.

Concrete shall be poured around the fitting and pipe in a manner to securely anchor the fitting and pipe.
All thrust blocks shall be able to withstand forces imposed on the fitting/pipe work being of the required
size and shape to prevent movement of the pipe and fitting.

Pay all charges, fees and include for all costs to carry out all works required to restore all areas
inclusive of roadway, curb, gutter, footpath, etc on site areas to existing surfaces condition as existed
before excavation commenced and in accordance with the Local Council and authorities having
jurisdiction requirements.

Page 23 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

Saw cutting shall be utilised for cutting of concrete and bitumen.

Areas affected adjacent to the area of works shall also be restored.

Materials used to fix areas affected shall be restored with materials of the same nature and of equal
quality as those contained in the area.

The finished surfaces shall be at least the equal in all respects to that existing before the
commencement of the excavation works.

Any additional Local Authorities requirements shall be complied with.

The contractor shall visit the site eight weeks after completion of works to ensure trenches are flush with
surrounding ground surfaces. Where trench ground services have dropped fill trench as required and
rectify as required to make level with surrounding ground surface. Ground surfaces shall be as existed
before trenching was dug.

3.12.3 Protection of Underground Pipe Work

Where it is not possible to provide the minimum required cover above an underground pipe work
additional protection shall be provided to protect the pipe work.

The method of protection shall be in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction requirements and
the maximum possible traffic load.

Provide and install plastic marker tape directly above all underground pipe work.

3.12.4 Pipe Markers for Below Ground Pipe Work

Provide and install pipe/cable marking plates for all below ground pipe work/cables. The engraved
plates securely installed in concrete pads set in the ground, shall be of brass and indicate the service,
its depth below ground and the direction of flow (for water systems). Pipe marking plates shall indicate
the start, each change in direction, and the finish of all underground piping/cabling.

Marking plates may also be securely fitted to a wall with the additional indication of distance of pipe from
wall.

3.12.5 Safety

Trenching shall be left open for the least amount of time possible and shall be covered with steel plates,
and provided with warning signs, barriers and safety lights erected around and adjacent to all excavated
works or equipment and plant left in the vicinity of the works.

Carry all works out in a secure safe manner and take all precautions to prevent possible accidents or
damage.

Obey all directions given by Authorities concerned with regard to the provisions of clearances from their
equipment, lights and barriers etc. The above shall not relieve the sub-contractor of any responsibility
for any accident or damage.

Work Cover directions and guidelines shall be adhered

3.13 EXTERNAL HYDRANTS

Page 24 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 3 – FIRE HYDRANTS AND HOSE REELS

External hydrants shall be provided with a vandal cap or similar device to prevent unauthorised use,
locked with a 003 keyed brass padlock.

All metal construction, painted enamel red.

Firequip HLVCSEC or approved equal

3.14 WATER STORAGE TANKS

Where required the contractor shall provide the appropriate and approved number reinforced concrete
or steel water storage tanks including high and low level float switches, mains tank filling valves, stop
valves, sludge drains, non return valves, outlet pipe with anti-vortex plate, ‘over-the-top filling’ facility
and internal and externally positioned hot dipped galvanised access ladders. Level indication for each
tank shall comprise a visual PVC tube stand pipe system along with an electronic level indicator
positioned within the pump house.

The contractor shall provide a fire brigade suction fitting of approved size and typed connected of each
tank. Suction points are required to be located not more than 7.2m of a hardstand (Refer to FRNSW
Access for fire brigade vehicles and firefighters Fire Safety Guideline). The tanks shall have weather
resistant steel conical silo-style roofs and lockable access manholes comprising heavy duty hasp and
staple and heavy duty brass padlock. Two sets of key need to be provided.

The tank shall be constructed in accordance with the relevant Australian Standards.

The contractor shall stockpile all excess spoil from excavations in an approved location or allow the
importation of all required clean filling to establish the tanks foundation.

Note: The majority of externally positioned water storage tank ‘platforms’ will require to be levelled and
checked for structural capacity to carry the weight of the proposed tank(s). This may require input from
both geotechnical and structural engineers.

END OF SECTION 3

Page 25 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

4.1 GENERAL

All works associated with the provision of fire sprinklers is to be undertaken in accordance with this
Performance Specification, the Building Code of Australia, the FSM and all the relevant provisions of
AS 2118.1 (Automatic fire sprinkler systems Part 1: General requirements) and AS 2118.5 Automatic
Home Fire Sprinkler Systems.

4.2 DESIGN

The fire sprinkler system shall be provided throughout the subject residential building including the roof
space.

The fire sprinkler system shall be designed and installed strictly in accordance with AS2118.1 (General
Systems), or AS2118.4 (Sprinkler protection for accommodation buildings not exceeding four storeys in
height), or AS 2118.5 Automatic Home Fire Sprinkler Systems (Home Type), or AS2118.6 (Combined
sprinkler and hydrant systems in multistorey buildings) as applicable, and all components shall comply
with AS/NZS 4118.

All ceiling and wall penetrations shall be provided by the Contractor and made good to match existing.

4.3 WATER SUPPLY

The water supply for the new fire sprinkler system shall comprise of a new 50mm fire water service
supply (including 50mm dual check valve), comprising of 2 x 25mm drillings into the existing water main
serving the property.

The contractor shall investigate and verify that available pressure from the water corporation main
service will meet the minimum requirements for two sprinklers to be running simultaneously as per AS
2118.5 requirements.

The contractor shall check all dimensions and verify the location of all other building services prior to
commencing any work. The route of all underground piping shall be verified prior to commencing any
work on the site.

The contractor shall coordinate all work to be undertaken in the installation of the fire sprinkler system.

Note: Allowance is to be made for all concrete and footpath excavation and making good to match
existing as necessary.

The above only applies to home type systems (AS2118.5). As a general comment, this whole Section 4
and where applicable the Sections below should be updated to include the additional types of sprinkler
systems as shown in red above.

Page 26 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

4.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS

Installation of the pipe and fittings shall be to the requirements of AS 3500, AS 2118.5 and AS 4118.2.1.

The pipe shall be Polubutylene (PB) pipe manufactured to AS 2642.2 located within the roof space.

The fittings shall be mechanical joint fittings for Polybutylene (PB) pope manufactured to AS 2642.3.

All bends incorporated in the pipe system shall be long radius swept bends.

All exposed piping and the riser assembly is to be provided in copper piping as per AS 1432 and AS
3500 requirements.

A lockable test line shall be provided for the system.

Equal to CPVC Blazemaster.

4.3.1 Painting and Labelling

All exposed pipe work is to be painted in selected colours to match surrounds and contain labelling
where required which identifies the pipe work as a fire service.

4.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING

All pipe work located underground shall be located and buried in accordance with AS 3500.

4.5 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

All pipe work above ground shall be installed in accordance with AS 3500 and retained in the design
position by purpose made clips or channels and with spacing not exceeding:

• For horizontal or graded pipes: 750mm

• For vertical pipes: 1500mm

4.6 POSITIONING OF SPRINKLERS

Sprinklers shall be installed and located on the ceiling and roof space in accordance with AS 2118.5.

The position of the sprinklers within each room, as shown on the schematic design drawing, is
approximate only and the exact location is to be verified on site and coordinated by the Contractor to
suit other ceiling mounted fitting and fixtures, and the building structure.

Where the values differ with the sprinkler approval listing criteria as specified in the manufacturer’s data
sheets, the more stringent criteria shall apply. All sprinkler heads shall be located on the ceiling such
that they are a minimum of 300mm away from any projection, light fitting, smoke and/or heat alarm, air-
conditioning ceiling register in accordance with AS 2118.2.

Page 27 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

4.7 SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIXING AND CONNECTION

Sprinklers shall be retained in position in the ceiling space and connected directly to the piping loop by
way of a galvanised channel bracketing system (where appropriate) which incorporates the pipe clips
and a dedicated sprinkler tee and connection assembly as per the manufacturers’ recommendations.

The galvanised channel bracketing system shall be secured to the ceiling joists/rafters as required, by
suitable fasteners.

The sprinkler tee assembly shall be locked in position inside the galvanised channel with a back nut(s)
and the pipe secured by clips inside the galvanised channel.

Appropriately sized holes shall be cut in the ceiling using a hole-saw.

4.8 SPRINKLER HEADS

The sprinkler heads shall be Viking quick response type as follow:

• Roof space – extended coverage upright sprinkler.

• Occupied space – flat plate concealed residential, pendent residential (exposed), and residential
side wall.

Sprinkler heads shall be located as per manufacturers’ recommendations and be a minimum of 300mm
away from light fittings, smoke alarms, smoke detectors, audible alarms and all other ceiling fittings and
fixtures.

Two spare sprinkler heads of each type used shall be provided as per AS 2118.5 , including a sprinkler
wrench.

4.9 SPRINKLER CONTROL VALVE AND TEST POINT

The sprinkler system shall include a sprinkler control valve and a test point in a dedicated key-locked
identifiable box, located in a visible and easily accessible position.

The sprinkler control valve shall include but is not limited to:

• Water shut off valve

• A suitably calibrated pressure gauge

• Flow censor

The test point assembly shall be provided with a lockable shut off valve, taken from the most
hydraulically disadvantaged point of the loop.

4.10 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND RESTORATION

4.10.1 General

The installation of underground pipe work shall be in accordance with the AS 3500, associated relevant
Australian Standards, and all authorities having jurisdiction requirements.

Page 28 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

Allow for all costs to complete works inclusive but not restricted to the following, carry out a site survey;
investigate to locate town water mains, other underground services/footings, preparation of drawings,
design, supply of all materials, fabrication, cartage, unloading, move materials to where they are to be
installed, pressure tests, excavation/trenching, thrust blocks, pipe, fittings, provision of pipe/fitting
corrosion protection, boring under path/roads, cutting and making good of concrete/bitumen, de-
watering of trenches, installation of pipe work, restoration of excavated ground, surfaces to previous
condition, underground pipe/cable marking plates, traffic control, barricades, trench cover plates, lights,
signs and provision of all safety measures required to complete the works, pay all charges and fees to
authorities having jurisdiction for road opening and restoration costs, pay all charges and fees to the
Local Water Authority for connection to towns mains, liaise with authorities to complete works,
preparation of any documents, works required to be provided, supervision, inspections and approvals
by the Local Water Authority, warranty and maintenance.

Investigate location of existing underground services before commencing the design or installation of
underground pipe work, conduits and cabling etc. No works shall commence until information
nominating locations of other services have been obtained.

Proposed locations of trench routes shall where possible maintain straight routes. Obtain details of all
underground services from relevant authorities.

Provide all necessary concrete saw cutting, replacement of excavated concrete sections with concrete
tie rods, excavations, trenching, bedding, thrust blocks, testing, backfilling and restoration to original
surfaces required for the works.

Trenching shall be of the required depth from final ground level to suit maximum possible traffic load
conditions. Where it is not possible provide the required depth over an underground pipe an alternative
acceptable method of protection shall be provided.

Pipe work shall be bedded on a minimum 150mm layer of sand.

Each successive 300mm of backfill shall be consolidated as the adjacent ground area.

Coordinate trenching locations with existing services and the building structure.

Provide and install all necessary shoring of sufficient strength to enable safe completion of the works.
Shoring shall be removed during compaction of the backfilling. Provide dewatering equipment where
required to keep excavated trenching water free.

4.10.2 Thrust Blocks

Thrust blocks provided for underground pipe work shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of AS 3500.

Page 29 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

Pipe work shall be securely fixed to thrust blocks with mild steel galvanised rods and/or straps.

Concrete shall be poured around the fitting and pipe in a manner to securely anchor the fitting and pipe.

All thrust blocks shall be able to withstand forces imposed on the fitting/pipe work being of the required
size and shape to prevent movement of the pipe and fitting.

Pay all charges, fees and include fro all costs to carry out all works required to restore all areas
inclusive of roadway, curb, gutter, footpath, etc on site areas to existing surfaces condition as existed
before excavation commenced and in accordance with the Local Council and authorities having
jurisdiction requirements.

Saw cutting shall be utilised for cutting of concrete and bitumen.

Areas affected adjacent to the area of works shall also be restored.

Materials used to fix areas affected shall be restored with materials of the same nature and of equal
quality as those contained in the area.

The finished surfaces shall be at least the equal in all respects to that existing before the
commencement of the excavation works.

Any additional Local Authorities requirements shall be complied with.

The contractor shall visit the site eight weeks after completion of works to ensure trenches are flush
with surrounding ground surfaces. Where trench ground services have dropped fill trench as required
and rectify as required to make level with the surrounding ground surface. Ground surfaces shall be as
existed before trenching was dug.

4.10.3 Protection of Underground Pipe Work

Where it is not possible to provide the minimum required cover above an underground pipe work
additional protection shall be provided to protect the pipe work.

The method of protection shall be in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction requirements and
the maximum possible traffic load. Provide and install plastic marker tape directly above all
underground pipe work.

4.10.4 Pipe Markers for Below Ground Pipe Work/Cables

Page 30 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

Provide and install pipe/cable marking plates for all below ground pipe work/cables. The engraved
plates securely installed in concrete pads set in the ground, shall be of brass and indicate the service,
its depth below ground and the direction of flow (for water systems). Pipe marking plates shall indicate
the start, each change in direction and the finish of all underground piping/cabling.

Making plates may also be securely fitted to a wall with the additional indication of distance of pipe from
wall.

4.10.5 Safety

Trenching shall be left open for the least amount time possible and shall be covered with steel plates,
and provided with warning signs, barriers and safety lights erected around and adjacent to all
excavated works or equipment and plant left in the vicinity of the works. Carry all works out in a secure
safe manner and take all precautions to prevent possible accidents or damage.

Obey all directions given by Authorities concerned with regard to the provisions of clearances from their
equipment, lights and barriers etc. The above shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for
any accident or damage.

Work Cover directions and guidelines shall be adhered to.

4.11 INTERFACE WITH FIRE INDICATOR PANEL

The fire sprinkler system shall incorporate a water flow sensor Tee (equal to VSF), and a monitored
shut off valve.

The fire sprinkler system shall be interfaced with a new Fire Indicator Panel (residential type smoke
alarm panel). Refer also Section 5 of this Specification.

Provide suitable control cables from both the flow sensor and the monitored shit off valve, and connect
to and interface with the new Fire Indicator Panel.

Upon operation of the fire sprinkler system, the installed smoke alarms throughout the common areas of
the building shall automatically operate via the new Fire Indicator Panel.

If the monitored shut off valve is tampered with by either building occupants or an intruder, an alarm
shall initiate at the new Fire Indicator Panel. That is, the installed smoke alarms within the common
areas of the building shall automatically operate.

Page 31 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

4.12 BLOCK PLAN AND EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS

4.12.1 Block Plan

Block Plan shall comply with AS 2118.1

An engraved block plan shall be, in the form of a permanent diagram that is water, fade and weather
resistant, shall be provided at the sprinkler control valve and shall include the following:
• The layout of the protected building or areas and adjacent streets;
• A diagram of the water supplies including:
i) sizes, dimensioned locations and unique identification of water supply isolation and
subsidiary stop valves;
ii) supply authority mains;
iii) connections for non-industrial purposes and capacity and locations of storage tanks;
iv) the water agency flow and pressure details under 95th percentile demand conditions upon
which thedesign is based; and
v) maximum draw permitted by the water supply authority at the time of design (L/min or L/s).;
• the location of control assemblies, subsidiary stop valves, remote test valves, tail-end air
valves, anti-freeze, drains, air-release valves, orifice plates, external sprinklers and any
unusual features of the installation;
• the name of the installer;
• the location of all pumps and the pump duties;
• The location of the stock of replacement sprinklers;
• the year of installationof the system and of any major extension thereto;
• identification of the area(s) related hazard classification(s), design performance
characteristic(s), sprinkler K factor(s), and all required flow(s) and pressure(s) for the various
hazard occupancies;
• identification of the floor area protected by each sprinkler installation control assembly; and
• the location of the main switchboard, distribution boards and starters, and ratings of electrical
services associated with all pumps, and details of auxiliary power supply.

4.12.2 Emergency Instructions

The following instructions, together with a diagram of the valve arrangement, shall be permanently
displayed at the control valves assembly:

EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS
1 CALL FIRE BRIGADE (000)
2 MAKE SURE THAT FIRE IS OUT.
3 CLOSE MAIN STOP VALVE (SHUTTING OFF WATER SUPPLY).
4

OPEN MAIN DRAIN VALVE (DRAINING INSTALLATION).

5

CALL MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR

6 REMAIN AT VALVES. IF FIRE RE-OCCURS:
(A) CLOSE WASTE VALVE; AND
(B) RE-OPEN MAIN STOP VALVE

Page 32 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 4 – FIRE SPRINKLERS

END OF SECTION 4

Page 33 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – SMOKE AND HEAT ALARMS

5.1 GENERAL

All works associated with the provision of smoke alarms throughout the building is to be undertaken in
accordance with this Performance Specification, the audit criteria of the FSM or the BCA as applicable
to the building type or classification.

Remove and dispose of existing smoke alarms as directed. If hard wired, terminate the ends safely and
out of sight in accordance with the SAA Wiring Rules.

Note: existing smoke alarms can be retained, provided they are inspected, cleaned, tested and certified
to AS 3786 and this Performance Specification.

Make good any areas damaged by the installation and removal work and holes resulting from the work.
Paint areas that have been made good or marked during the works.

Wiring and cabling is not to be left exposed, where ever possible it is to be concealed within the existing
construction. Do not install wiring in eaves or the cavity of full brick or brick-veneer walls.

If surface ducting is required then it is to be of a white low profile type square in shape and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification. Attention is required to ensure that the location of the
ducting is as unobtrusive as possible, is straight and true with the appropriate number of fixings.

5.2 Smoke Alarms

5.2.1 Standard

BCA Specification E2.2a, and AS 3786.

5.2.2 Location and Spacing

BCA specification E2.2a, AS 1670.1, and AS 3786.

Smoke alarms shall not be installed directly above ceiling fans (refer to requirements of AS 3786).

5.2.3 Type

All new smoke alarms shall be mains powered photoelectric smoke alarms with built in 10 year +
rechargeable lithium cells.

Brooks EIPFSPTLH or approved equal.

5.3 Alarm silencer switches

Where required a silencer or locator switch is to be installed in a conspicuous location. The silencer or
locator switch is to be compatible with the smoke alarms being provided or installed within the building.
When activated, the Alarm Isolator removes, for a period of approximately 5 minutes, both primary and
secondary supplies to the smoke / heat alarms.

The unit is to be a Brooks BAAISO or Brooks BAALOC or approved equal.

Page 34 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – SMOKE AND HEAT ALARMS

5.3.1 Alarm strobe devices

Where strobe devices are required they are to be connected to compatible smoke/heat alarms and
comply with the following;

• Intense 4.2 Joule white strobe light

• Mains “Power On” and “Battery Low” indicators
• Anti-tamper mounting base
• Interconnectable to 240 volt smoke/heat alarms
• Battery backed with built – in rechargeable battery
• Easy installation
• Test switch
• Low/faulty battery indication

The unit is to be Brooks BAVISA 240 or approval equal

5.3.2 Alarm vibrating devices

Where vibrating devices are required they are to be connected to compatible smoke/heat alarms and
comply with the following;

• Mains powered control panel with rechargeable battery back-up

• Auxiliary output from control panel for other safety accessories
• Super bright neon strobe flashes with alarm sounds to alert the residents
• Vibration pad, placed under the pillow, vibrates vigorously to alert resident of the
dangers
• Manual integral test/hush button to test circuitry, strobe and vibration pad
• 5 Year Guarantee (limited)

The unit is to be Brooks EIPFS173P or approved equal

5.3.3 Security Monitoring

Where required, activation of the smoke alarm system is to signal an externally monitored security
service. The security service is to have the ability of providing 24 hour 7 days a week monitoring of the
smoke alarm signal.

The service provider must have the ability to immediately respond to the smoke alarm signal and
provide assistance on site to assist with the evacuation of the building.

The monitoring is to be provided through a dedicated General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) wireless
outstation, such as or equivalent to Permaconn PM2020. The security monitoring is not to be provided
through the fixed telephone line services.

Prior to the service connection the contractor is to provide details of the service for approval.

The contractor is required to maintain this service for the extent of the defects liability period.

Page 35 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – SMOKE AND HEAT ALARMS

5.4 Wiring

The installation of new alarms shall be carried out by a licensed electrician, and in accordance with
AS/NZS 3000 and AS 3786.

5.5 Interface with Home Fire Sprinkler System

The new fire sprinkler system shall be interfaced to the new residential smoke alarm panel. Provide
suitable control cables from both the flow sensor and monitored shut off valve of the fire sprinkler
system, and connect to the new residential smoke alarm panel.

Upon operation of the fire sprinkler system, the common area smoke alarms shall automatically operate
via the residential smoke alarm panel.

The provision of a smoke alarm panel shall be of Brooks BARFS-1 or approved equal.

If the monitored shut off valve of the fire sprinkler system is tampered with by either building occupants
or and intruder, an alarm shall initiate at the residential smoke alarm panel. That is, the common area
smoke alarms shall automatically operate.

5.6 Smoke/Heat Detection, Sound and Intercom System

- Smoke/heat detection system shall comply with AS 1670.1 and shall be installed as per the
FSM requirements
- Sound and intercom system for emergency purposes shall be in accordance with AS 1670.4

5.7 Zone Block Plan

Provide an engraved zone block plan in according with AS 1670.1

The zone block plan shall be a water, fade and weather resistant, material shall be Aluminimum or
Stainless steel for outdoor or Traffolyte for indoor. The plan of the installation shall be securely mounted
and easily accessible at Fire Brigade Panel (FBP). The lettering shall be a minimum of 3 mm and shall
include the following information as minimum:

• The layout of the building in which the Fire Detection and Alarm System (FDAS) is installed.
• The area covered by each zone.
• The location of all:
- Fire Detection Control and Indicating Equipment (FDCIE),
- Special Hazards Control and Indicating Equipment (SHCIE),
- Fire Fan Control Panel (FFCP); and
- Emergency Warning Control and Indicating Equipment (EWCIE),
• The location of the FBP and marked “YOU ARE HERE”
• The location of any fire suppression system controls,
• The location of the building’s main electrical switchboard,
• The year of original installation and the date of the latest revision to the block plan,

Page 36 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 – SMOKE AND HEAT ALARMS

• A notice stating, “In the event of a fire ring 000 to ensure fire service response” except the lettering
height shall be not less than 5 mm,
• Location where baseline data are stored. A label on the FDCIE meets this requirement,
• Statement identifying the design criteria used including NCC references, NCC referenced Standard(s)
and performance solution as applicable.

END OF SECTION 5

Page 37 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 6 – EVACUATION SIGNAGE AND PORTABLE FIRE

EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE BLANKETS AND EMERGENCY KEY
6.1 EVACUATION SIGNAGE

Evacuation signage is to be provided on the back of each SOU entry door or adjacent the main
entrance as required. The signage must be in the approved format.

The signage is to be mounted at height where the bottom edge of the signage is 1500mm above floor
level or as otherwise directed.

6.1.1 Materials of construction

The signage is to be made from 1.4 mm thick polypropylene sheet in the format provided. Unique
information can be added via contrasting vinyl stickers.

The sign is to be mounted behind a clear sheet of Perspex that is 2mm thick for the purposes of
protecting the sign.

6.1.2 Installation requirements

The signage is to be mounted with stainless steel anti tamper screws at all four corners.

6.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

The portable fire extinguisher is to be ABE portable type with a minimum capacity of 2kg. It is to be
securely fixed to the wall using an appropriate mounting bracket and include relevant signage.

The extinguisher is not to be installed within the kitchen.

6.3 FIRE BLANKETS

Fire blankets are to be securely mounted to the kitchen wall and have a minimum size of 0.9m x 0.9m.

6.4 EMERGENCY KEY

Emergency keys are required to be securely mounted to the wall and contained within a red coloured
break glass cabinet.

END OF SECTION 6

Page 38 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – TESTING AND COMMISIONING

7.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

7.1.1 Scope

Test all systems and equipment as required by this Specification.

Formal testing shall not commence until the Contractor has carried out all preliminary tests, checks and
control settings, etc; and all test results and operations are in compliance with the intent of this
Specification.

Supply free of charge all skilled operators required to operate each respective system, and all
instruments and equipment for testing.

Give forty-eight (48) hours notice in writing prior to any sectional or complete tests on any tests called
for by this Specification being executed. Provide all necessary testing apparatus and be responsible for
all costs associated with the testing.

Each system shall be tested as specified in the respective section for the system herein and the
associated Standards. The fire installation testing shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
Australian Standards.

7.1.2 Electrical Systems

Test the electrical fire safety systems in accordance with AS 1670, AS 2293.1, AS/NZS 3000, and AS
3786. All circuits and equipment shall be thoroughly tested after installation.

Place circuits on test as they are completed at least one week before practical completion.

Rectify all faults and replace all faulty components discovered from this test.

Transmission of the flow switch, monitored valve etc to the Fire Indicator Panel shall be tested. All
transmission signals from the Fire Indicator Panel to other services relays and panels shall be tested to
confirm correct functionality.

The entire testing procedure shall comply with the relevant Australian Standards.

7.2 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

At least three (3) weeks prior to the proposed testing date submit the proposed testing schedule. The
schedule shall contain all tests described in this specification and as required by AS 2118.

7.2.1 Pipe Testing

On completion of the installation of the pipe system, but before pipes are painted or covered over, the
system shall be air and then water pressure-tested.

The method of hydraulic test shall be to pump the system full of water to a pressure which shall be 1400
kPa or 400 kPa above the maximum static working pressure whichever is greater and shall be
maintained for a period of two hours, or for sufficient length of time for all joints to be inspected
whichever is the longer. Any leaks or other faults disclosed by the test shall be made good.

Page 39 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 7 – TESTING AND COMMISIONING

7.2 FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM

7.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

On completion of the installation, put the systems into service and carry out the following tests (other
tests as may be required to verify acceptance):

7.3.1 Sprinkler System

• The automatic operation of the smoke alarm system shall be tested and shall operate
satisfactorily;
• All valves shall be operated and correct function verified;
• Proving of water supply;
• Running pressure test.

7.3.2 Fire Alarm System

• Random tests shall be carried out on detectors, monitored valves, flow switches, electric door
strikes etc;
• Interface with the sprinkler system shall be demonstrated.
• Co-ordinate with other trades as required.

7.3.3 Fire Hydrant System

7.4 TESTS AND SERVICE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

If, during the maintenance period, a fault develops in any system, carry out further tests and make any
necessary adjustments and alterations to make the system comply with this Specification, at no
additional cost.

All fire safety systems shall be tested and maintained during the Defects Liability Period in accordance
with relevant Australian Standards.

7.4.1 Tests at End of Defects Liability Period

Immediately prior to the expiration of the Defects Liability Period, carry out a 100% test of all fire safety
systems installed, and provide a written certification that the systems are in a fully functional state.

Page 40 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 8 – MAINTENANCE

8.1 GENERAL

This Specification Section outlines the minimum requirements for the Maintenance of all fire safety
systems that have been installed in the subject building under this Contract.

8.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

8.2.1 General

All fire safety systems that have been installed as part of the fire safety upgrade works under this
Contract shall be adequately maintained during the entire 12 Months Defects Liability Period in
accordance with the relevant provisions of AS 1851.

8.2.2 Standards

The maintenance of all fire safety systems should be carried out by experienced personnel, and in
accordance with recognised safety procedures.

Persons with the necessary training and experience, with access to the requisite tools, equipment and
information, and capable of carrying out the inspection and maintenance procedures as required by AS
1851, are considered to be experienced personnel.

The standard of service during this period shall include comprehensive maintenance and regular
servicing of the fire safety systems in accordance of the fire safety systems in accordance with the
following requirements:

• Regular monthly servicing of the fire safety systems during normal working hours, in
accordance with the relevant parts of AS 1851;

• All defects and outstanding work noted at date of practical completion shall be completed
within one (1) month of date of practical completion;

• Keeping a log record to AS 1851 for service visits, call outs, faults rectified and repairs carried
out;

• Updating of wiring diagrams, drawings, software listings, etc. where changes occurred. All
copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manual provided shall be updated;

• Re-demonstrate any changes in the operational or maintenance requirements of the

equipment, plant or systems;

• Equipment which fails as a result of incorrect servicing, faulty workmanship, materials or

design shall be immediately replaced, at no additional cost.

8.2.3 Maintenance Documentation

The information required to implement a maintenance program should comply with AS 1851, and
should include a maintenance schedule, a log, and plant registers.

Page 41 of 42
 FIRE SAFETY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 8 – MAINTENANCE

The maintenance schedule should include a list of all items of equipment and operational features to be
subjected to the maintenance routines described in AS 1851. The log should contain records of
operational and maintenance test procedure results, and should be dated and include a verifier’s
identification.

END OF SECTION 8

Page 42 of 42
INDEX

1. Practice note 1 – Door hardware

2. Practice note 2 – Exhaust Fans
3. Practice note 3 – Exposure to openings – open balcony
4. Practice note 4 – Intumescent Paint
5. Practice note 5 –Lorient HP 4002 Intumescent Door Seal
6. Practice note 6 – General Issues
7. Clarification Issue 1 – Various
8. Clarification Issue 2 – Various
9. Clarification Issue 3 – Various
10. Clarification Issue 4 – Various
11. Clarification Issue 5 – Various
12. Clarification Issue 6 - Guidelines for the Upgrade of Bedsits
13. Fire Safety Program - Notice No. 1
 PRACTICE NOTE No. 1
Door Hardware
OBJECTIVE:

All non-compliant door hardware to SOU doorways providing egress directly to a non-fire isolated corridor,
passageway, stairway or the like, shall be replaced with compliant door hardware.

BACKGROUND:

The explanatory notes of the ‘Bounding Walls’ section of the FRMPIM states as follows:
“The fitting of deadlocks or similar locking devices to doorways providing egress from SOU’s… is not prohibited under
the FRMPIM, provided that the locking device has been installed in such a manner that would not significantly reduce
the ability of the door to resist the spread of fire”

COMMENTS:

This hardware is non-compliant due to the barrel which restricts the

self closure of the SOU door.

Double cylinder deadlatches are to be of self-latching type as

required by fire safety program specifications.

¾ The following SOU door hardware is considered to be compliant:

(i) Double cylinder automatic deadlatch (Lane 007, Lockwood 001, or equivalent), and
(ii) Keyless lever latchset (Lane ‘Domain’ Leverset or Kwikset Delta Series, or equivalent)
¾ This requirement applies to all building types,
¾ A chain lock security device in addition to the above listed hardware is considered satisfactory subject to it not
affecting the self-closure of the door,
¾ Requirements apply to both ‘fire doors’ and ‘solid-core doors’
¾ The integrity of the solid-core door / fire door is required to be maintained at all times,

OUTCOME:

¾ Door hardware which impedes the self-closure of the SOU door or significantly reduces the ability of the door to
resist the spread of fire is considered to be non-compliant door hardware.
¾ Scopers and contractors are jointly responsible for the identification and rectification of non-compliant door
hardware to SOU doorsets.
¾ Upon completion of any building under the fire safety program, all SOU doorsets are required to have door
hardware complying with the FRMPIM. No non-compliant door hardware shall remain in place upon completion
of fire safety program works and subsequent issue of a Statement of Adequacy.

Practice Note No.1 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue - 23 November 2006 Page 1 of 1
 PRACTICE NOTE No. 2
Exhaust Fans
OBJECTIVE:

¾ Provide clarification on the required treatment of existing exhaust fans located in the ceiling to an SOU where the
ceiling is required to provide a resistance to the incipient spread of fire under the FRMPIM,
¾ Confirm Resitech’s desired approach for dealing with existing ceiling exhaust fans where they affect the integrity
of a fire rated element, including options for protection, relocation and removal.

BACKGROUND:

The FRMPIM contains requirements for certain ceilings to achieve fire resistance levels. Penetrations through these
ceilings are required to be treated so that the fire resistant performance of the ceiling is maintained.

For example the ‘ceiling’ section of the FRMPIM states as follows:

“……… All holes or unapproved penetrations will need to be repaired in order to maintain the integrity of the
ceiling……”

This includes penetrations by exhaust fans.

“Where unprotected exhaust fans have been installed through a ceiling containing a resistance to the incipient spread
of fire to the roof space of not less than 60 minutes, install an intumescent damper”

COMMENTS:

¾ The existing level of performance of an exhaust system from an SOU shall not be reduced as a result of the fire
safety program,
¾ The DoH fire safety program and the FRMPIM do not require the enhancement of, or provision for (when not
existing) mechanical exhaust systems to an SOU,
¾ Relocation of existing exhaust fans as required to avoid affecting the integrity of fire rated elements may be carried
out where appropriate,

OUTCOME:

The following resolutions may be applied to achieve compliance with the FRMPIM where an existing exhaust fan is
located in a ceiling required to have a resistance to the Incipient Spread of fire of 60 minutes or is required to have a fire
resistant level or has been treated with intumescent paint to achieve those requirements:

Option 1 – Install an approved plenum box system, incorporating an intumescent fire damper as recommended in
FRMPIM. The plenum box must be a tested system that has been demonstrated to maintain a resistance to the incipient
spread of fire of not less than 60 minutes and/or an FRL of -/60/60 and/or treated with intumescent paint to achieve a
fire resistance of 60 minutes.

Option 2 – If site conditions are not suitable for the plenum box as listed in option 1, then appropriately seal the existing
ceiling fan opening and relocate fan as follows:
¾ If external wall space is available relocate exhaust fan on external wall close to ceiling,
¾ If there is no space to install an exhaust fan on the external wall, install window mounted exhaust fan. Ensure
window remains operable. In sliding windows, provide devices to prevent damaging the fan when opening the
window. Window mounted fans will require Project Manager and DoH approval.

Practice Note No.2 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – May 2007 Page 1 of 2
Option 3 – Only be adopted if site conditions justify such a measure. Consideration will need to be given to cost and
disturbance to the tenants.
(i) Removal of the existing ceiling, suitably protect the upper floor penetrations and reinstate the ceiling (including
unprotected exhaust fan), or
(ii) Removal and reinstatement of the ceiling at a lower level to provide more free space within the ceiling void to
enable the fitting of an approved plenum box system incorporating an intumescent damper to the exhaust fan. The
ceiling shall only be lowered enough to enable completion of the required works. In any case, the ceiling height of
a bathroom shall not be less than 2100mm upon completion of the works.

Currently the Lorient LVH-R10 or LVH-RC system has been approved as meeting the required DoH level of
performance as specified within the FRMPIM. These plenum boxes are to be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s directions.

Where an alternative system is proposed it must first be determined by Resitech and DoH as achieving the required level
of performance.

Endorsed
DoH: 22 May 2007
SGA: 22 May 2007

Practice Note No.2 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – May 2007 Page 2 of 2
 PRACTICE NOTE No 3
Exposure to openings while travelling along
an open access balcony
OBJECTIVE:

¾ To provide guidance on determining what openings in external walls are required to be protected when
travelling along open access balconies.

BACKGROUND:

Building Types 5 and 9b require occupants to evacuate via open access balconies and stairs. When the
building design has only one direction of travel it can result in the occupants having to egress past the sole
occupancy unit that is supporting fire.

The FRMPIM requires that where an external access balcony exists, that does not provide a person seeking
egress with a choice of travel in different directions to alternative exits; the wall adjoining is required to
maintain a minimum fire resistance level. Consequently openings within the wall require treatment so as to
not prejudice occupants moving past these openings. Acceptable treatment includes solid core doors and
windows located at least 1500mm above floor level.

COMMENTS:

The FRMPIM does not nominate a distance that openings should be away from a path of travel before
protection isn’t required. There have been instances where occupant would be in close proximity to
openings but may not necessarily have to travel past the opening.

The distance between an exiting occupant and an unprotected opening needs to be sufficient enough so
that the effects of a fire do not prevent the occupants from safely evacuating the building.

Generally the design of these buildings results in the path of travel being in close proximity to the wall openings. The
introduction of a set distance would more than likely result in most of the wall openings requiring protection. To avoid
confusion and for the sake of consistency all openings should be protected.

OUTCOME:

When the person seeking egress does not have a choice of travel in different directions to alternative exits then;

1. All access balcony openings, within the external walls at first floor level, are to be protected.
2. Openings at ground floor level are to be protected where they are adjacent the path of travel and
physical barriers, such as walls and railings, prevent the occupants from travelling in an alternative
direction.

Photographs of the issue have been included on a following sheet.

Please do not hesitate to contact the Technical Assistance Line by email [email protected]
(providing photos and description) or Ph 02 8753 8145 or Fax 02 8753 8966 if in doubt.

Practice Note No.3 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 23rd July 2007 Page 1 of 2
 Example of where openings at ground
floor require protection. An alternative
direction is not available and physical
obstructions cause the occupants to
egress past the openings.

All openings at first floor would now

be protected. Ground floor openings
would also require protection.
Enclosing walls and pathway dictate
path of travel after discharging from
stair.

Endorsed
DoH 17th July 2007
SGA 3rd July 2007

Practice Note No.3 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 23rd July 2007 Page 2 of 2
 PRACTICE NOTE No 4
Intumescent Paint
OBJECTIVE:

¾ To advise which approved Intumescent Paints are acceptable for use within the Housing NSW Fire
Safety Program.

BACKGROUND:

The FRMPIM recommends the use of intumescent paint as a means of upgrading key building elements that do
not achieve the specified level of fire resistance. It is commonly applied to ceilings, riser shafts, internal and
external walls. To date only Fire Free 88 has been available for use within the Fire Safety Program.

COMMENTS:

Only approved intumescent paints can be used within the program. Recently CAP Coatings Australia provided
details of its CAP 508 intumescent paint. The submission provided has been assessed against the criteria for use
within the Fire Safety Program.

OUTCOME:

As a result of our assessment it was established that CAP 508 Intumescent Paint satisfies the performance
requirements the Housing NSW Fire Safety Program. Therefore CAP 508 is included as an approved product,
along with FireFree88.

The minimum required dry film thicknesses remain unchanged and are applicable to both products on the
Housing NSW Fire Safety Program.

Internal Application: 1000 microns

External Application: 1500 microns

The following table indicates the acceptable substrate material and their minimum thicknesses

Minimum Internal Substrate Material

Product Plasterboard Fibrous Plaster FC Sheet AC Sheet Lath and Plaster Metal Sheeting
FireFree 88 10mm 10mm 6mm 6mm 10mm 0.559mm/24 gauge
CAP 508 10mm 8mm 6mm 6mm 12mm 0.559mm/24 gauge

¾ For external applications the paints can be applied to all substrates provided it is in reasonable and
sound condition. All gaps must be sealed with approved fire sealants prior to application of paint.
¾ Products must be applied in accordance with manufacturer specifications.
¾ A mix of the products must not be used on the same surface.
¾ A tag supplied by the manufacturer, which identifies the particular product used, is to be placed above
the unit entrance doorway where the paint has been used on a ceiling or wall. Where it has been applied
to a single riser shaft or bulkhead the tag is to be applied directly to these elements at the top corner.
¾ Reporting requirements remain unchanged and log sheets must continue to be provided, including
required quality assurance processes.

Practice Note No. 4 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 30th September 2009 Page 1of 2
 Contact details for the approved paints are;

FireFree 88 CAP Coatings Australia

Contact Ron Seldon Cameron Watkin
Phone Number 0417 442 546 1800 508 800
02 6255 2437
Email [email protected] [email protected]

Please do not hesitate to contact the Technical Assistance Line by email FSU-
[email protected] (providing photographs and a description) or Ph 02 8753 8186 if in doubt.

Practice Note No. 4 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 30th September 2009 Page 2of 2
 PRACTICE NOTE No 5
Lorient HP 4002 Intumescent Door Seal
OBJECTIVE:

To provide advice for the appropriate usage of the Lorient HP 4002 intumescent seal, within the Housing NSW
Fire Safety Program.

BACKGROUND:

Presently the FRMPIM recommends the use of an intumescent door seal to upgrade the gap between the edges
of an existing fire door and frame where the gap exceeds maximum requirements. Currently the Lorient HP
4002 Intumescent Door Seal is approved for such use. The FRMPIM also requires that a frame rebate extension
be provided where the door seat rebate width is less than 25mm.

COMMENTS:

Recently Lorient Australia provided information outlining the additional benefits provided by this seal. The
information provided specified that the HP 4002 door seal could be used to upgrade a door set where only a
standard metal builder’s frame had been provided. The door seal would allow the upgrade of door frames so that
they provide suitable fire resistance without having to remove the frame or providing a rebate extension.

OUTCOME:

As a result of our assessment it was established that the Lorient HP 4002 maintained the fire resistance of a fire
door set where the door seat rebate has a width less than 25mm. The seal retains the benefits of rectifying gaps
between the edge of a door leaf and frame up to a maximum of 6mm.

The seal has the benefit of readily rectifying an existing metal frame without the need to install a frame rebate
extension. This provides for a more cost effective solution and maintains the existing clear doorway width.

The Lorient HP 4002 Intumescent Seal can be used when the following criteria are fully met;

1. The seal is only suitable for use with fire resistant doors; it is NOT suitable for use with solid core doors.

2. The seal can be used to rectify gaps between the edge of an existing fire door leaf and the head and stiles
of a door frame where they exceed 3mm but not more than 6mm. The seal need only be applied to the non
compliant sides. The seal cannot be used as a means of rectifying incorrect or non compliant installation
of NEW Fire Resistant Door sets.

The seal can be used to rectify this

gap where it exceeds 3mm but no
greater than 6mm.

Practice Note No. 5 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 19th October 2009 Page 1 of 2
 3. The seal can be used to upgrade a standard metal door frame that contains a door seat rebate of at least
12.5mm in lieu of providing a 25mm rebate extension.

The seal can be used to provide the

12.5m necessary fire resistance to the frame
without having to replace the frame or
add a rebate extension.

It must be noted that prior to any installation of the seal the existing paintwork is to be stripped back to metal.
The entire door frame and seal is to be painted over.

Please do not hesitate to contact the Technical Assistance Line by email FSU-
[email protected] (providing photographs and a description) or Ph 02 8753 8186 if in doubt.

Practice Note No. 5 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 19th October 2009 Page 2 of 2
 PRACTICE NOTE No 6
General Issues
OBJECTIVE:

To provide advice relating to the works within the Housing NSW Fire Safety Program.

TOPICS:

Issue 1 Bounding Walls within the Roof Space

The Fire Risk Management Plan Implementation Manual (FRMPIM) recommends the extension of bounding walls
within the roof space where the ceilings cannot achieve the required fire rating. The FRMPIM specifies additional
measures to maintain the effectives of the bounding/separating wall for building types 8 & 9 but does not specify
them for other building types. These measures include sarking cutback, wrapping of timbers with fire resistant rock
wool, eaves separation and skylight treatment.

There are a number of circumstances where existing ceilings cannot be effectively fire rated; as a result the option of
extending bounding walls within the roof space must be pursued. To maintain the effectiveness of these walls it is
important that relevant construction details are adequately treated. The objective of a bounding wall/separating wall
is the same across all building types and it is therefore logical that those requirements applying to types 8 & 9 should
apply to all building types.

Issue 2 Bounding/Separating Walls within the Sub floor of Building Types 8 & 9

Bounding/Separating walls are required to commence at footing level and extend to the underside of a fire rated
ceiling or underside of roof tiles. Upgrade works are required to be carried out in the sub floor where the required
fire separation is not provided. Items that compromise the separation include penetrating timber floor framing and/or
the wall either missing or not complete. Quite often access to this area is limited and work cannot be carried out.

The sub floor area is not an active area of a building and is limited in terms of available combustible materials. Fire
Safety Engineering assessment demonstrated that a fire is not likely to occur in this area and the conditions are not
likely to readily support a fire. In addition the chances of ignition are considered low.

Issue 3 Step in Roof Profile

For building types 8 and 9 where a separating wall extends above the level of a lower roof of an adjoining unit then
the external face of the wall is required to achieve a level of fire resistance specified by the FRMPIM. Similar roof
profiles exist for other building types however no requirements are in place to treat the section of wall for other
building types.

Bounding walls are regularly used as a protective measure against fire spread within the roof space. There are many
building designs that utilise bounding walls as the separating measure that also have a stepped roof profile. The
FRMPIM does not require treatment to the section of wall overlooking the lower roof in building types 5, 6, 7 & 11
therefore an opportunity exists for fire to spread from the lower unit into the higher unit roof space.

It is a requirement to treat these wall sections for building types 8 & 9, as a similar risk for fire spread can occur in
the other building types it is therefore logical that the requirements apply to all.

Issue 4 Rock Wool Application

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC
Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 1 of 6
Fire resistant rock wool is specified in the FRMPIM in a variety of locations, predominantly flexible rock wool is
used to carry out treatment. There are instances where the amount of rock wool needs to be restricted and/or a rigid
type of batt needs to be used as the flexible type will not provide an appropriate long term solution.

Fire resistant rock wool is specified in locations where it relies on friction fitting for support and at times additional
support needs to be placed so that it will remain in place. Commonly flexible rock wools have been used however it
has been noticed that these are prone to dislodgement or simply compress and fall out over time if no additional
support is added.

High density fire resistant rock wool batts are available that are more suited to some of the applications specified in
the FRMPIM.

OUTCOME:

Bounding/Separating Walls

In general the preferred option for upgrade in building types 5, 6, 7, 9b & 11 is a compliant fire rated
ceiling as this allows unimpeded access to the roof space for maintenance. Where a compliant fire ceiling
upgrade cannot be achieved then bounding/separating walls are to be pursued.

1. Where bounding walls are provided as the means of protection within a roof space then the
following protective measures are to be provided for all building types. These are already
recommended and adopted for building types 8 & 9 and the specification of works is to follow what
is already practised;

a. Sarking Cutback.
b. Wrapping of timber penetrations with fire resistant rock wool (and associated heat
alarm installation).
c. The protection of skylights within 900mm of the bounding/separating wall.
d. Fire resistant rock wool placement at the top of the walls.
e. Eave Separation (Figure 1).

2. When eave separation is required to be installed then plasterboard should not be used acceptable
materials include fibre cement sheet and high density mineral fibre board.

In relation to type 5 and 9b buildings the eave separation is to be extended across the ambulatory
access balcony to the fascia board (Figure 1). Where this is not practical the eave separation may
extend upwards from the external wall of the unit to the underside of roof sheeting across the face
of the unit.

Eave separation is to be constructed so that it is tight fitting around any timber penetrations that
may cross through the area. All gaps and joints are to be sealed with appropriate intumescent
mastic.

3. All continuous eave spaces need to be considered for treatment; this includes roof details such as
Dutch Gables where they straddle a separating/bounding wall. It is recognised that these are
sometimes small or problematic to access; therefore where fibre cement sheeting cannot be
compliantly installed then no treatment of the area will be necessary. (Figure 2)

4. When bounding/separating walls are built up to the underside of roof sheeting no more than a single
layer of fire resistant rock wool is to be placed on top of the wall. Prior to rock wool placement the
wall is to be sufficiently built up so that only a single layer of fire resistant rock wool is necessary
(Figure 3).

5. In building types 8 & 9a where bounding/separating walls do not provide compliant fire separation
within the sub floor space then the following treatment is to be carried out;

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 2 of 6
 a. The entire sub floor area is to be secured from public entry with suitable key lockable
doors. Keying requirements are to be as specified by the relevant local Housing
NSW Division.

The provision of access doors is to prevent the sub-floor spaces being used for the storage of
material, especially combustible materials.

Step in Roof Profile

The following applies where bounding/separating walls within the roof space have been used as
protection;

6. Where the bounding wall of one unit extends above the lower roof of an adjoining unit or an
enclosed common area then this wall (considered as an ‘external wall’) is required to achieve a fire
resistance level (FRL) of -/60/60. Acceptable means of treatment, where the FRL is not achieved,
include those measures as specified for type 8 & 9. (Figure 4)

7. In the circumstances where a timber barge board exists overlooking the lower roof; this barge board
will not require protection where brickwork or other appropriate fire rated material extends up
behind to underside of roof sheeting. The top of the wall will require rock wool installation
equivalent to a separating/bounding wall and be tightly packed around any timbers penetrating or
crossing over the top of wall. Wrapping of penetrating timbers 200mm either side of the wall is not
required.

8. Attention is required at the point where the separating wall finishes and the external cladding
commences. The treatment specified commences at the point of the lower roof sheeting. Therefore
attention to areas behind flashings etc will be needed to ensure no gap in the fire resistance occurs
above the lower roof prior to the external cladding commencing. In addition the separating wall
below needs to ensure its fire resistance continues up to the underside of the lower roof. (Figure 5)

Rock Wool Application

9. In general flexible rock wool is to be limited to the application of placement at the top of
bounding/separating wall and the wrapping of timbers penetrating these walls. Where specified for
areas relating to fire stopping such as sealing shafts, infilling of wall and floor openings then a high
density mineral fibre batt is to be used. Flexible rock wool should only be used in these areas where
use of the rigid batt is inappropriate. (Figure 6)

Should you require further information please do not hesitate to contact the Technical Assistance Line by email FSU-
[email protected] (providing photographs and a description) or via the contact details below.

Endorsed Housing NSW: 1st April 2010

Contact: Anna Fraser
Technical Advisor – Fire Safety Program
Ph 02 8753 8186

Eave Separation
Figure 1

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 3 of 6
 Alternative location, particularly
SOU SOU for type 5 & 9b where ambulatory
access balcony involved.

General eave separation

location

Eave or
verandah area

Figure 2

Consider eave separation to these types of areas.

If compliant separation can’t be achieved then it

should be installed.

Figure 3

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 4 of 6
 Separating wall firstly built up so that only
single layer of rock wool required.

Single layer of rock wool used. Not prone to

dislodgement or slippage like multiple layers.

Step in Roof Profile

Figure 4

Treatment required including barge

board in this case. IP only required to
area above cladding but entire length
of board to be over coated.
SOU 2 When protecting these walls and
SOU 1 barges ensure that gaps are suitably
sealed prior to application of paint.

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 5 of 6
 No treatment required as SOU
overlooks an open area.

Figure 5

Fire resistance needs to be continuous, ensure that

external treatment continues down to top of
separating wall. Note timber on,top of separating
wall.

It may be that treatment needs to include such

things as removal of flashing, installation of
additional boards to receive IP or other treatments.

Rock Wool Application

Figure 6

Example of where high density rigid batt to be

used. Flexible rock wool is easily dislodged and
likely to fall down shaft if not properly
supported.

There will be some circumstances where

flexible rock wool is more suitable however
rigid batt should be first option.

Practice Note No. 6 Prepared by FACS - LAHC

Date of issue – 1st April 2010 Page 6 of 6
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 1

Please find information in response to some recent commonly asked questions;

Openings in external walls

Recently questions have been raised relating to the need to protect different types of construction openings within
external walls that require a fire resistance level. The types of openings under question include weepholes, wall
ventilators, sub floor ventilators, control joints etc. Please find the following guidance, it is important to note that
these requirements only apply to openings that are exposed to a fire source feature (less than 3m to a boundary or
6m to another building on the same allotment);

Building Type 8 & 9a

EXTERNAL WALLS
Finding Direction/Recommended Upgrade
Sub-floor vent, weephole No action required
Pipe Penetration, conduit and the like No action required
Control and Construction joints No action required
Cavity and Wall Ventilators No action required.

Other types of openings will need to be actioned via the audit table;

Other openings For minor openings seal with fire rated sealant providing an FRL of not less than 60 minutes.
For larger openings such as AC units, remove penetration and make good wall as indicated to provide the required
FRL of 60 minutes. Appliances such as AC units to be relocated so as not to compromise the integrity of an external
wall requiring an FRL.

The explanatory notes also reference this issue. It notes that sub-floor vents, weepholes and penetrations for pipes,
conduits and the like need not be protected. While not referenced within the explanatory notes construction and
control joints and wall/cavity ventilators need not be protected either.

Building Type 5, 6, 9b & 11

EXTERNAL WALLS
Finding Direction/Recommended Upgrade
Weephole No action required.
Control and Construction joints No action required.
Sub floor or Cavity Ventilators No action required provided;
x They are non combustible ventilators
for sub-floor or cavity ventilation; and
x
2
each does not exceed 45000 mm in
face area; and
x is spaced not less than 2 m from any
other ventilator in the same wall.

Otherwise ventilators will need to be sealed

with construction having relevant FRL and
sub floor ventilators provided to achieve the
above requirements. (see note regarding
minimum ventilation)

Other openings should be treated as required by current Audit Table.

Page 1 of 2
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 1

Should sub floor ventilation be altered then extent of ventilation is to be maintained in accordance with following
table. Vents will need to be positioned so that they function effectively and provide the necessary cross flow.

Minimum sub-floor ventilation (mm2/m of wall)

No Ground sealed with impervious

membrane membrane

2 (West of Great Dividing 4000 2000

Range)

3 (East Coast) 6000 3000

Note: On sloping sites, 400 mm clearance may be reduced to 150 mm within 2 m of external walls.

Clarification Building Type 9

Building types 9a & 9b are Bed-sitter and Pensioner Units. When determining these building types please note that
the term Bed-sitter and Pensioner Unit relates to a studio type apartment where the sleeping area is open and in
conjunction with the living area. Where the units have enclosed bedrooms and/or the unit is not of a studio
arrangement then the building would need to be classified as either class 5 or 6 or 8.

Where these buildings are classified as Type 5 or 6 and are two storeys in height then spandrel separation would not
be applicable.

Treatment of Eave Linings – Exposure to Fire Source Feature and Separating Walls

Recently it has become apparent that some buildings are being scoped for the application of intumescent paint to
fibro eaves linings.

It is not required, by the FRMPIM, that fibre cement eaves linings be treated with intumescent paint. Eave lining
need only achieve a non combustibility rating. Fibre cement lining to eaves is deemed to have achieved this type of
rating and it is not necessary to treat further.

Where it is determined that eaves are not lined or a combustible type of material has been utilised, as the eave
lining, then this matter should be referred through by the scoper to the FSU-TECHNICAL email box for consideration.

In addition, slotted/vented eaves are sometimes installed and the FRMPIM (type 8 & 9a) requires that these be
covered to form a continuous non combustible barrier. The manual does not clarify the extent to which these eaves
need to be covered.

It has been determined that the covering need only be provided 900mm either side of a separating wall. Where the
eave is located within 900mm of an allotment boundary or 1800mm of another building it would be necessary to do
the entire eave length running parallel to the boundary or building. It is only necessary to treat those areas exposed
and not the entire perimeter of the building.

regards

Matthew Kemp
Technical Advisor
Fire Safety Team - Resitech
Ph 02 8753 8145
Fax 02 8753 8966
Note; Issued to Scopers and Contractors 25 June 2007

Page 2 of 2
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 2

Please find information in response to some recent commonly asked questions and issues;

Minimum required clear doorway widths

Please ensure that the minimum required clear door widths for sole occupancy unit entry doors and other common
user doors are not less than 760mm. This is a requirement of DoH and it must be adhered to. This dimension will
need to be considered when scoping a building and when installing doors.

It is expected that the width will require particular consideration when scoping and providing rebate extensions to an
existing metal door frame. Door rebate widths cannot be varied, unless it is a fire door set that is supported by
manufacturer’s testing.

Openings may be required to be widened and new frames installed to ensure that both the DoH minimum clear
doorway width and required door rebate width is achieved.

Thickness of Solid Core Doors

Questions have recently been raised relating to the thickness of solid core doors and manufacturing tolerances. The
purpose of specifying a minimum thickness is to ensure that a minimum level of fire performance is achieved. It is
considered that this performance requirement sits over and above manufacturing tolerances.

Please be advised that 35mm is considered as a minimum and when ordering doors this should be stipulated to
ensure that doors supplied achieve this requirement. Scopes should be prepared to replace any required door that is
less than 35mm thick.

Application of Intumescent Paint

When applying intumescent paint it is important to consider the air temperature as the paint may only be applied
0 0
within certain temperature ranges. FireFree 88 can only be applied within a temperature range of 12 C – 30 C or
0 0
15 C – 30 C for a metal surface.

The paint will not perform if applied outside these temperature ranges.

Treatment of Valley Boards

It is common to come across timber valley boards that cross over a separating wall. These timbers need to be
considered as a penetration as they exceed the maximum allowable dimensions of 75 x 50mm. Protection of these
members is therefore required.

These timbers are to be wrapped and or covered with rock wool for a distance of 200mm from the wall to the extent
that is physically possible. Where application of the wool is obstructed by guttering etc then this area is to be sealed
off with a suitable fire rated mastic. Where this treatment can be carried out it is not necessary to refer these
penetrations to the Specialist Panel.

Treatment of Eave Linings – Incipient Spread and Fire Rated Ceilings

Further to my previous advice questions have been raised as to what extent openings in eaves require protection
where Type 8 and 9a’s are provided with a fire protected ceiling (eg fire rated plaster board, intumescent paint) in lieu
of separating walls.

Where Type 8 and 9a’s are provided with ceiling protection in lieu of separating walls then all openings within the
eaves linings are to be protected with weather resistant non combustible material.

Matthew Kemp Ph 02 8753 8145

Technical Advisor Fax 02 8753 8966
Fire Safety Team – Resitech Issued to Scopers and Contractors 7 August 2007

Page 1 of 1
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 3

Please find information in response to some recent commonly asked questions and issues;

Position of Electrical penetrations within separating walls

It has been noted that the audit tables for separating walls within Type 8 and 9a buildings do not specifically
provide reference for electrical switches and power points that are located back to back. It should be noted
that the compliance requirement within the tables outlines that service penetrations must not reduce the fire
performance of the wall. An explanatory note states that all penetrations through an existing separating wall
are to be protected to maintain the fire resistance integrity of the wall.

While not specifically within the audit tables these types of penetrations need to be considered. Where
electrical switches/power points are located back to back within a separating wall then they are to be treated
by the following means;

Where an electrical switch, outlet, socket or the like is accommodated in a separating wall—
(i) the service and building element at the penetration must be identical with a prototype
assembly which has been tested in accordance with AS 4072.1 and AS 1530.4 and achieved
an FRL of not less than -/60/60; or
(ii) the service must be installed so that the opening or recess must not be located opposite any point
within 300 mm horizontally or 600 mm vertically of any opening or recess on the opposite side of the
wall. Any created voids within the wall are to be filled with appropriate material achieving an FRL of -
/60/60.

Prefabricated Access Panels and Ceiling Hatches (Man Holes)

Issues have arisen relating to the installation of access panels and man holes within the DoH Fire Safety Program.
There appear to be differing views as to how the panels should be constructed and finished. In addition future
maintenance issues are occurring and the panel’s installation and operation is being compromised.

An access panel can be provided in either a vertical element such as a wall or shaft or within a horizontal
element such as a ceiling. To recognise this two terms are used to differentiate their respective applications;

Access Panel: An access panel is typically a removable or hinged panel that enables access into a
construction void such as a riser shaft or wall or bulkhead for the purposes of maintenance or
inspection.

Ceiling Hatch: A ceiling hatch is a lockable hinged panel that enables access to a ceiling space. It may be of
a sufficient size to allow the entire body of a person to access the space. In common areas
these were previously known as Man Holes.

Page 1 of 3
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 3

This is an example
of a prefabricated
ceiling hatch.

The explanatory notes, within the FRMPIM, discuss the construction of access panels utilising layers of fire
rated plasterboard to achieve a fire resistance. As there are no specific details as to how these should be
constructed and installed it can result in varying degrees of finish and operation.

From a maintenance perspective, concerns have been raised that relate to future integrity and performance of the
access panels. There have been instances where plasterboard panels have been removed for maintenance
purposes, not reinstalled correctly and the plasterboard damaged.

The advantages of prefabricated panels are that they are more robust, identifiable and will better withstand
prolonged and unsympathetic use.

OUTCOME

1. That ceiling hatches be limited to the following;

a. A prefabricated product having a fire resistance level not less than -/60/60 and have been tested in
accordance with AS 1530.4.
b. They are to be hinged and locked.
c. Have markings that identify its fire resistance level and manufacturer.
d. Bathrooms are to contain two ceiling hatches. One hatch under the main junction (or in the most
appropriate location so as to make the installation of a plenum box easier) and one hatch under the
shower waste.
e. In addition install a ceiling hatch in the laundry ceiling where the laundry is located separately from
the bathroom.
f. Ceiling hatches are to finish flush with the surface around.

Typically they will not be provided within the ceilings of top floor units unless required for access to exhaust fan
plenum boxes.

Treatment of Door Frames – Solid Core Doors

Please note that a previous decision has been made by DoH that where softwood timber door frames are
identified and the FRMPIM requires treatment these frames are to be removed and replaced with metal ones.

Identified hardwood door frames can remain, however where it is not certain that the frame is hardwood then
the frame is to be replaced with a suitable metal one.

Correct Manual Revision

It is important that users of the FRMPIM are using the correct revision. The correct manual for 5, 6, 11, 8 and
9a/b should contain Revision 2 (Amendment 1) dated 29/03/2006. Manuals were issued with this amendment
located at the end of the document. It is suggested that these pages be inserted into the main body of the
document to replace the previous version pages.

Page 2 of 3
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions
Issue No 3

Application of intumescent paint to external situations

There are circumstances where the FRMPIM specifies the use of FireFree 88 intumescent paint to external
situations within type 8 and 9a buildings. When this is required a thickness of 1500 microns is to be utilised.
The additional thickness is to compensate for the varying substrate thicknesses likely to be encountered. You
will note that the requirement of 1000 microns and greater than 10mm substrate thickness applies to internal
situations. Where you have concerns regarding an external substrate please refer to FSU-TECHNICAL
mailbox for review.

Sarking within Building Types 8, 9a & 9B

All sarking within these buildings is required to be cutback from the separating wall.

Matthew Kemp Ph 02 8753 8145

Technical Advisor Fax 02 8753 8966
th
Fire Safety Team – Resitech Issued to Scopers and Contractors 8 Oct 2007
[email protected]

Page 3 of 3
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 4

Please find information in response to some recent commonly asked questions and issues;

Intumescent Paint

Timber cornices/trims
Where ceilings are to be coated with intumescent paint then wood cornices/trims that exist at the wall and
ceiling junction may remain in place and be coated with a minimum 1000 micron dry coating thickness. Prior
to painting, all joints that occur between the wall, ceiling and the cornice/trim are to be treated with a suitable
fire resistant joint filler or sealant.

Application
The supplier of FireFee88 (FF88) has provided a reminder of the importance of applying the paint correctly
and to avoid overspreading. This can be a problem with latex and acrylic based paint due to ease of
application. When using a roller it is recommended to use a roller sleeve of 20mm however up to 30 could be
used. To help prevent FF88 grinning through darker colour top coats, some tint could be added to the FF88 to
darken its colour.

Fire Doors & Hardware

Please be advised that new fire door sets are required to be installed to the current Australian Standard which
is AS 1905.1 – 2005. The specification for the fire safety upgrade contract (RES 331) requires that new fire
doors be installed to the current Australian Standard.

Upon completion of any building under the fire safety program, all SOU door sets are required to have
door hardware complying with the FRMPIM. No non-compliant door hardware shall remain in place
upon completion of fire safety program works and subsequent issue of a Statement of Adequacy.

This formed part of a Practice Note previously issued a copy is attached for your reference. Please also refer to the
DoH Specifications for Fire Safety Upgrading Contract RES 331 for further details on appropriate hardware.

Non DoH Adjoining Properties

Where adjoining properties are privately owned please do not attempt to access them to carry out FSU work.
This issue should first be discussed with the relevant Resitech Project Manager as to what work if any should
be carried out.

Ceiling Access Hatches

Further to my clarification of issues note No 3. Ceiling hatches within common areas or where they provide
access to common roof spaces are required to be locked in accordance with divisional requirements. Lock
hardware is to be incorporated into the panel construction without impairing its required level of fire
resistance.

The purpose of this is to replace hasp and staples, pad bolts etc that are currently being installed on common
area ceiling hatches.

At present Trafalgar Building Products and Fire Stop Supplies can supply a fire rated ceiling hatch that will
accommodate the fitting of an integrated lock. The locks are to be keyed to the particular divisional
requirements.

The hardware installed is to have a non keyed back set so that persons working within the roof can exit
through the hatch without the use of a key. The hardware installed is to accommodate manufacturer fire
resistance requirements and divisional keying requirements.
Page 1 of 4
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 4
Access panels provided in areas where access it not being provided to common space are not subject to this
requirement.

Fire Collars
When installing fire collars it is important to ensure that the product used is suitable for the particular
application. It may be that you will be required to carry a range of collars as one collar is unlikely to cover all
the scenarios encountered. Information is readily available from suppliers which outline where and when
particular collars can be used.

Promat has recently provided advice that their Unicollar can be fixed directly into plasterboard without the
need to contact the framing. This method of fixing can take place provided there are a minimum of two layers
of plasterboard to screw fix into. When installed to the underside of a ceiling or bulkhead it achieves an FRL
of -/90/60 (therefore on the underside of car park bulkheads it will need framework fixing). When installed to a
plasterboard wall it achieves -/120/120.

Low Level PVC Connections to Metal Risers

The criteria for the acceptance of low level PVC trap connections to metal riser pipes have been further
clarified. This issue is found within action 4 of the audit table for intermediate floors, PVC connections to
copper or cast iron risers must satisfy the following criteria to be considered low level;

1. The connections are composed of a PVC branch connected to a cast iron or copper riser. The riser
has a diameter of no more than 200mm. A PVC branch pipe of maximum 100mm nominal diameter
connects to the cast iron or copper riser.
2. The top of the PVC branch to metal riser connection occurs at a height no higher than 800mm above
the floor level.

Page 2 of 4
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 4
3. The PVC pipes have a water trap between the connection to the cast iron riser and the PVC outlet.
4. The metal riser is vented at the top of the riser.

Where the above criterion is met no further treatment of these connections is necessary.

Type 5/9b Buildings – External Walls and Bounding Walls

The issue of walls between an SOU and an open access balcony in building types 5 and 9b frequently arises.

The difference between an external and bounding wall needs to be further clarified.

It is intended that an external wall is the outer wall of the building while a bounding wall is an internal wall.

Bounding Walls are where the;

1. The wall adjoins a fully enclosed public corridor, public hallway, public lobby, public stairway or the
like and separates it from an SOU or room not within an SOU;
2. The wall separates SOUs; or
3. The wall separates an SOU from a room that is not an SOU.

In most instances the wall around the access balcony area does not provide separation from a fully enclosed
corridor, lobby, hallway, internal stairway. Where the access/corridor area is open to the elements in part or in
full then the area is not to be considered as a public corridor, public lobby, public stairway or the like (for the
purpose of bounding wall definition). Therefore these walls are considered to be considered an external wall.

Some examples are provided below;

A type 5 building
with an open access
balcony connecting
to a fully enclosed
stair area.

External Wall Bounding Wall

Page 3 of 4
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 4

External walls

External walls

External walls

th
Matthew Kemp SGA & DoH Endorsed 7 April 2008
th
Technical Advisor Issued to Scopers and Contractors 11 April 2008
Fire Safety Team – Resitech
Ph 02 8753 8145
Fax 02 8753 8966
[email protected]

Page 4 of 4
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 5

Please find information in response to some previous issues. These issues have previously been sent in
earlier emails;

Rockwool

It was noted that some contractors are using a Roxul Fire Resistant rock wool within the DoH Fire Safety
program. The appropriate Roxul product to use is known as “Party Wall Fire Stop 1100” not Roxul MPS 300.
th
Where Roxul MPS 300 has been used prior to 30 August 2007 it may remain in place provided it has been
installed in accordance with Roxul guidelines. Purchases of the Roxul product must only be “Party Wall Fire
Stop 1100”.

Approval of the ‘Flameseal 60/30’ Fabric Barrier

Please be advised that I have now approved the FLAMESEAL 60/30 Lightweight Fire Barrier for use within a
roof space in building types 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 & 11. The barrier can be used to extend bounding and separating
walls from ceiling level to the underside of the non combustible roof cladding.

The barrier achieves an FRL of -/60/30 (the FRMPIM requires -/60/60) and has been shown via an alternative
solution that this is suitable within the roof space subject to certain recommendations (which are attached). In
lieu of recommendation 13, combustible insulation can be simply moved away from the separating wall for a
distance of 150mm and a barrier installed as necessary. Scopers you will note that an SP referral is still
required as one of the recommendations is the installation of heat alarms.

The FLAMESEAL barrier is available through a supplier known as Fire Containment (ph 1300 792 832). Fire
Containment will provide installers with the necessary training and assistance so that the on site application is
understood.

Consultation with the relevant Resitech Project Manager is required where you identify buildings that may be
suitable for its use.

Approval of the TBA Textiles ‘Titan’ Fabric Barrier

Please be advised that the TBA Textiles “FIREFLY TITAN” Lightweight Fire Barrier has been approved,
within the Housing NSW Fire Upgrade Program, for use within a roof space in building types 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 &
11. The barrier can be used to extend bounding and separating walls from ceiling level to the underside of the
non combustible roof cladding. It is an alternative choice of material as opposed to fire rated plasterboard,
hebel, masonry etc. The TITAN barrier achieves an FRL of -/120/60, when determined against AS 1530.4 -
2005 as specified by the Fire Risk Management Plan Implementation Manual.

The FIREFLY TITAN barrier is available through TBA Textiles, contact Trevor Kempster ph 03 9005 3927 or
0400 966 899. TBA Textiles will provide installers with the necessary training and assistance so that the on
site application is understood and correctly carried out.

Consultation with the relevant Resitech Project Manager is required where you identify buildings that may be
suitable for its use.

Matthew Kemp
May 2009
Technical Advisor Issued for inclusion into Maintenance Contract Amndt
Fire Safety Team – Resitech
Ph 02 8753 8145
Fax 02 8753 8966
[email protected]

Page 1 of 1
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 6

Please find information in response to some recent commonly asked questions and issues;

Guidelines for the Upgrade of Bedsits

It has been noted that some layouts of building type 9a have resulted in a number of properties being referred to the
Specialist Panel due to difficulties in complying with the FRMPIM and the disturbance level to tenants being high as
a result of achieving compliance.

The FRMPIM applicable compliance requirements that have been noted as having difficulties are for external and
separating walls and are as noted in the tables below with the recommended upgrade/direction:

EXTERNAL WALLS
Finding Direction/Recommended Upgrade

Vents in external walls venting into the No action required if there is no requirement for the external wall to
roof/eaves space achieve a required FRL or if ceiling is not required to have a
resistance to the incipient spread of fire for 60 minutes.

SEPARATING WALLS
Finding Direction/Recommended Upgrade

Fixtures and fittings such as cisterns, tiles, Removal of all fixtures and fittings prior to application of
towel rails, cupboard, kitchen benches etc intumescent paint including wall tiles. Both sides of the separating
attached to separating wall wall including all connected cornices shall be coated with
intumescent paint in accordance with the manufacturer's
specification and shall achieve 1000 microns (dry film thickness).
Scoper is to take into consideration the following and include on
scope:
x any waterproofing requirements
x removal and re-instatement of any fixtures and fittings
x Over coating of IP in wet areas and living areas to colour
match existing

Intumescent Paint shall only be applied to minimum 10mm

plasterboard or 6mm asbestos sheet. (Removal of 4.5mm
asbestos sheeting is required, refer Practice Note 4).

Walls constructed of material other than those specified above or

where it will be impractical to remove and refit wall fittings, tiles etc
for complete application of intumescent paint due to asbestos wall
sheeting, shall be removed and replaced with fire rated
plasterboard containing an FRL not less than -/60/60.

Lightweight walls and door frames Removal of timber frames (where possible) that intersect
intersecting separating wall separating wall and treat appropriately behind the frame (either IP
or FR board, as per the nominated upgrade method)

Page 1 of 2
 Clarification of some recently commonly asked questions and
Issues
Issue No 6

Gaps where separating walls and lightweight Where it has been identified that there is a gap at the intersection
and/or masonry external walls meet/intersect of the separating wall and the external wall efforts should be made
to ensure that any new FR wall sheeting that is being installed is
extended right through this junction.

If the nominated upgrade method is via intumescent paint, this is

to be returned a minimum of 200mm to the external wall and over
coated to match existing paint.

In general the following should also be noted:

The use of FR fabric is the preferred method of upgrade for separating walls in the roof space.

As per Practice Note 6, if compliant bounding walls in the sub floor space cannot be achieved due to limited access,
sub floor area is to be secured from public entry with suitable key lockable doors.

Typical Bedsit layout as per below:

Regards

Anna Fraser
Technical Advisor
Asset Compliance Team
Ph 02 8753 8186
Note: Issued to Scopers December 2011

Page 2 of 2
Studio Apartments (bedsit) Fire
Safety Upgrade Method
Brief Overview

• A number of bedsits have been referred to the Specialist panel due

to the extend of work required to upgrade the separating walls with
non compliant linings.
• This is mainly due to bathrooms/kitchens backing onto each other.
• Generally this involves such work as removal of asbestos or non
complying wall lining and general work involved in wet areas such
as removal of tiles and waterproofing.
• This work requires the relocation of tenants for an extended period
of time as the basic facilities of the bathroom and kitchen become
unusable during the upgrade period.
Directions for upgrade

• Remove existing non compliant wall linings (asbestos etc) of the separating wall on
one side with less impact.
• If a nib wall or wardrobe is against separating wall remove to relocate studs to allow
fabric to be installed behind.
• Remove non complying wall linings (asbestos etc) to the veranda that is backing on
to the adjoining unit.
• Install Firefly to separating wall as per attached drawings covering each of the
existing exposed studs, top and bottom plates and install metal angles to support the
fabric.
• Install new top and bottom plates between the existing studs.
• Install new studs and noggings between the top and bottom plates creating a
structural support if the opposing wall had a fire.
• Install 16mm Fire rated plasterboard covering the fabric using the new stud wall
installed.
• Apply fire rated mastic to seal all gaps between ceiling and new wall lining.
In General

• There will be no breach in the methodology behind the skirting and the
cornice to the opposing unit’s bathroom/kitchen due to the newly installed
top and bottom plates and newly constructed wall after firefly has wrapped
the existing studs and plate.
• This upgrade method is to be used when wet area requiring waterproofing is
to be removed for upgrade. In the situation when no wet area is to be
removed and an existing compliant wall lining exists, Intumescent Paint will
be scoped.
• If skirting tiles, toilet and basin is on the separating wall the IP method for
upgrade will be scoped.
• The used of fire rated fabric is the preferred method of upgrade for the roof
space.
• As per practice note 6, if compliant bounding walls in subfloor area are not
achievable, sub floor area is to be secured from public area with suitable
key lockable doors.
Remove wall lining on side with less impact
If a nib wall or wardrobe is against wall remove to allow
fabric to be installed behind, studs may need to be
relocated to allow for re-sheeting.
Install Fabric to separating wall covering existing studs, top
and bottom plate. Install metal angles to support the
existing studs fabric.
Install new studs and noggings between top and bottom
plate creating a structural support if the opposing wall is
exposed to a fire.
Remove non complying wall lining to veranda that
is backing onto adjoining unit. (if required)
If fabric doesn’t run through to external veranda angle
fabric off to external wall creating barrier between wall and
cavity. Remove end stud to fabric behind and reinstate.
Sketch of fabric attached to external wall and
around end stud.
If there was existing Insulation reinstall
Install junction box behind GPO. To be installed
either side of wall.
Install fire rated plasterboard covering the fabric
using the new stud wall installed
Apply fire rated mastic to seal all gaps between
ceiling and new wall lining
Wall upgraded ready for paint
Sketch 1. Lounge/Bed wall to be upgraded
Removal walls from lounge/bed side and install
new fabric method and new studs.
External veranda on one side kitchen/bathroom
adjoining. Lounge wall to be upgraded.
New method to be used to lounge wall as less
impact. Avoids removing wet area.
Kitchen/Lounge wall to be upgraded.
 1 February 2007

FIRE SAFETY PROGRAM

Notice No. 1

Recently, there was a fire at a Department of Housing building. The subject building is a type 6 building and had been
upgraded under the Fire Safety Program.

Preliminary investigations into the fire revealed that the fire originated in an SOU on the top floor of the building and
was able to spread through the ceiling lining.

The majority of the ceiling lining to the top floor of the building consisted of 2x layers of 16mm fire rated plasterboard
which would achieve compliance with the FRMPIM as an Incipient Spread Ceiling. However, a small section of the
ceiling was lined with a single layer of untreated fibre cement sheeting.

As can be seen from the photographs below, it appears that the fire spread from within the SOU and into the roof
space through the section of ceiling where the fibre cement lining was in place. Subsequently, the fire spread through
the roof space and into another SOU and the common area of the building.

It appears that the area where the ceiling lining was fibre cement sheeting was previously the ceiling lining to an open
balcony. The balcony appears to have been enclosed at a later date by glazing and timber framing as depicted in the
photograph above. The enclosed balcony was in place at the time of the fire safety upgrade.

NOTES FOR CONSIDERATION:

¾ The FRMPIM requires an Incipient Spread Ceiling to extend across the entire ceiling of an SOU. Therefore in this
instance, the ceiling above the enclosed balcony which forms part of the SOU should have been provided with a
level of protection equal to the ceiling throughout the remainder of the SOU,

¾ Enclosure of balconies is known to be a common practice in Department of Housing buildings and is required to
be assessed by relevant persons during the Fire Safety Program,

¾ The FRMPIM does adequately address this problem. Simply, if an open balcony is enclosed at the time of the
Fire Safety program, then the enclosed area is considered to form part of the SOU and shall be treated as per the
remainder of the SOU,

¾ Scopers and contractors are considered jointly responsible for ensuring that compliance with the FRMPIM
is achieved in instances such as this.

RECOMMENDATION:

Scopers and contractors who are aware of buildings which have been upgraded under the Fire Safety Program
and which may have similar non compliances with the FRMPIM as outlined within this document, are required to
contact the relevant Project Manager and provide relevant details.

Page 1 of 1
 Fire Safety Program Contractor Handbook Version 2.0
WALKUP MULTI-UNIT BUILDINGS (BUILDING TYPES 5, 6, 9, & 11 – up to 3 residential levels)

The following document is a guide for works covered under the Fire Risk Management Plan Implementation Manual (‘The Manual’) and
associated Schedule of Rates (‘SOR’). The Fire Safety Program works are not limited to the examples contained in this document. For further
details reference must be made to the contract documents.

Manufacturer’s specifications must be adhered to and complied with when installing components and products unless otherwise specified by
Housing NSW. The information herein do as not necessarily cover all products available or applications, please refer to the approved product
listing for a list of products available.

Works undertaken shall include all incidental work such as making penetrations as required, minor items and accessories that may not be
specifically mentioned but are required for the proper completion of the work. Work is deemed to include making good all of the affected
surfaces and finishes associated with the works.

Every effort is to be made to ensure that the works are carried out in a professional, workman like manner and Housing NSW Code of Conduct.

This handbook will not cover every scenario encountered on site; it is intended to provide general guidance only. If in
doubt ask!
CONTENTS

FIRE RATED CEILINGS .........................................................................................................................................................................................................4

CEILING CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4

CEILING PENETRATIONS ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5

CEILING ACCESS HATCHES/MAN HOLES .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7

EXHAUST FAN PLENUM BOXES ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9

DOORS AND DOOR HARWARE .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11

SOLID CORE DOORS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11

FIRE DOORS AND FIRE DOOR SETS.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12

DOOR HARDWARE AND CLOSERS ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15

FIRE AND SMOKE SEALS............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................17

DOOR FRAMES AND SCREEN DOORS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19

RISER SHAFTS AND BULKHEADS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20

SHAFT & BULKHEAD CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................20

ACCESS PANELS..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................21

FIRE STOPPING SHAFTS.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................23

GENERAL FIRE STOPPING................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25

INTUMESCENT DAMPERS...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................25

FIRE COLLARS..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................26

FIRE RATED MORTARS ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................28

FIRE RATED SEALANTS & INTUMESCENT MASTICS.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................29

2
 FIRE PILLOWS...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................31

INTUMESCENT PAINT ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32

FABRIC BARRIER SEPARATING WALL ............................................................................................................................................................................. 34

SEPARATING/BOUNDING WALLS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 36

SEPARATING/BOUNDING WALLS WITHIN ROOF SPACE ................................................................................................................................................ 36

HEBEL.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................36

FIRE RATED PLASTERBOARD ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................38

ROCK WOOL..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................39

TIMBER PENETRATIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................41

SKYLIGHT SHAFTS (Less than 900mm from Separating Wall) ....................................................................................................................................... 43

EAVES SEPARATION .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45

SARKING CUTBACK ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 46

SUB FLOOR SPACE ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 48

ENCLOSURES UNDER STAIRS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 48

SWITCHBOARD ENCLOSURES .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 49

ATTACHMENTS

Access Panel Detail

Schedule of approved components and products

3
 FIRE RATED CEILINGS
CEILING CONSTRUCTION
DO DON’T

• Ensure framing support is adequate to support the required number of • Install electrical fittings directly under framing.
plasterboard layers. This includes ensuring frame work properly fixed to slab
above and surrounding walls. • Install a fire rated ceiling that abuts or is bounded by non fire rated
construction.
• Ensure that plasterboard joints are staggered between layers.
• Use non fire rated material to seal the junction between the wall and
• Bring sheets closer enough to wall to ensure junction with wall can be sealed in ceiling lining.
accordance with the manufacturer specifications. This includes all layers.
• Apply intumescent paint to cornices where fire rated sealing at edge
• Ensure fixings are spaced as per manufacturer guidelines as the adhesive does of sheets is provided.
not provide strength during fire.

• Ensure that the junction at the edge of ceiling and wall is free from material before
applying sealant.

• Take photographs upon sealing PRIOR to cornice reinstatement for proof of works.

 Plaster board sheet not extended close enough to wall.

New framing system may be required to support required number of plasterboard layers. The
framing system must be completed to manufacturer specification to support ceiling load.
Example of a correct method of treatment, using fire rated sealant, where ceiling
sheets meet wall. Typically 10mm gap

4
 .

 Fire rated ceiling not bounded at edges by fire rated walls. A section of this
Attention required to spacing of fixings and staggering of joints. Manufacturer’s details must
wall is bounded by a timber framed section (above windows). This section of wall
would need to be fire rated also for the ceiling to be effective. No further
be consulted. treatment is required to brick work as it achieves fire resistance.

CEILING PENETRATIONS
DO DON’T

• Brick in wall vents that open into fire rated false ceilings from hallway or the like. • Leave any ceiling penetration unprotected, all penetrations need to
be protected so that fire resistance is maintained.
• Apply intumescent mastic to seal the cable penetrations, the mastic must be applied
liberally and where possible from the roof space side. • Allow mastic to ooze into batten holder or light fitting.

• Use a standard mastic sealant ensure proper INTUMESCENT

material is used

• Apply overly excessive amounts and leave in an untidy manner

5
Ceiling penetrations properly treated using down light cover for recessed fittings and  Mastic not applied liberally in termite mound shape
intumescent mastic liberally applied to cable penetrations. Mastic should be applied to cable
penetrations from the roof space side. Ensure entire opening covered by down light cover.

 Fabric canopies also available to treat recessed fittings. Ensure entire opening covered.
 Collar is fitted to a non-continuous (damaged) FR ceiling – FR cornice that will
surround shaft will be attached to combustible material

6
 CEILING ACCESS HATCHES/MAN HOLES
DO DON’T
• Install hinged prefabricated ceiling hatches that achieve a fire resistance level of
-/60/60 and a RSIF of 60 minutes. • Install man holes and access panels in positions where service
points can’t be reached.
• Install two ceiling hatches in a bathroom - One hatch under the main junction (or in the
most appropriate location so as to make the installation of a plenum box easier where • Paint edges of the drop down panel, ensure that panel is open while
applicable) and one hatch under the shower waste. painting frame

• In addition install a ceiling hatch in the laundry ceiling where the laundry is located • Install non compliant locks, hasp and staples or barrel bolts
separately from the bathroom. If laundry and bathroom are combined up to three
hatches may be required. • Don’t leave excessive gaps around panel edge, hatch should be
installed square and gaps should be consistent all the way around.
• ALL ceiling hatches/manholes are to be fixed back to main framing on all FOUR Where necessary hatch panel would need to be adjusted after
sides. This applies even where the manufacturer may only require two sides. installation to ensure facing does not get impacted upon full opening.

• Where metal support framing is used ensure that a layer of 16mm plasterboard
lining is provided around the framing prior to fixing, similar to the diagram represented
below. This applies even where the manufacturer may not require plasterboard
packing.

• Ensure size of access panel is suitable for maintenance purposes and not less
than 350 X 350mm

• Ensure minimum size of manhole, to access a common area, is not less than 600
X 400mm. Ensure lock is keyed to local area/CHD housing provider requirements

 Excessive gaps to prefabricated panel. Inconsistent and or excessive gaps

are not acceptable.

 Hinged prefabricated ceiling hatches with FRL of -/60/60 and RSIF 60 minutes. Integrated
keyed lock is provided where providing access to common roof space.

7
  Example of 16mm fire rated plasterboard lining to ceiling hatch/manhole metal support
framing.

 Panel poorly painted over to frame when closed, paint has peeled off when
panel opened

 Manhole properly supported on all four sides, trimmed back to main ceiling support
 Don’t modify or construct your own fire rated ceiling access panels or ceiling
hatches

8
 EXHAUST FAN PLENUM BOXES
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure manufacturers tags/details are visible from inspection point • Install where manufacturers clearances cannot be maintained

• Apply intumescent mastic to entire perimeter of box including notch out for power • Construct your own or alter a damper box
cord
• Cut down height of plenum box, use alternative system
• Ensure entire opening in ceiling is enclosed by the perimeter of the box

• Ensure that damper box is supported fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specification.

• Ensure that right system is used depending on location of exhaust, see examples
below;

Lorient R10

Lorient R03

 Plenum box not independently supported, ceiling is taking full weight of box

9
Lorient R04

 Manufacturers clearances not met

Plenum box properly supported back to ceiling joists so that ceiling does not take
weight of the box.

 Mastic not applied to perimeter of damper unit; otherwise the installation would be
compliant. No evidence oozing from the edges.

10
  Mastic applied to the perimeter of the box to seal against ceiling lining in  Mastic should have been provided to the base of the box before application.
accordance with manufacturer specification. Support is to be provided on two opposite sides

DOORS AND DOOR HARWARE

SOLID CORE DOORS
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure tight fitting clearances are provided around the perimeter of the door edge • Install hardware that prevents the door from fully closing
– 3mm max for the top and sides and between 3mm to 10mm for bottom.
• Install door in an existing frame where an average of 5mm cannot be
• Where fire and smoke seals are being installed please check seal section of the met between the face of door leaf and frame (Contact FSU technical
handout. for further advice)

• All surface edges of doors are painted including top and bottom of doors and • Install door leaves that are less than 35mm thick.
before hardware is installed

• Install door hardware that meets the requirements of the Housing NSW
Maintenance Contract and an FRL of -/30/30.

11
  Top and sides of door not painted, all sides must be painted

 Hardware that could prevent the door from fully closing is to be removed and not
installed. Door hardware must be self latching
FIRE DOORS AND FIRE DOOR SETS
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure tight fitting clearances are met around the perimeter of the door edge – • Install hardware that prevents the door from fully closing
3mm max for the top and sides and between 3mm to 10mm for bottom. Where an
intumescent fire seal (Lorient HP 4002) is installed to the frame the clearance • Install door in an existing frame where an average of 5mm cannot be
between the frame and the edge of the door leaf can be increased to 4mm. met between the face of door leaf and frame

12
 • Paint over door tags
• All the surface edges of doors are to be painted including top and bottom of doors
and before hardware is installed • Cut fire doors down on any side, including bottom

• Install door hardware that meets the requirements of the Housing NSW • Use intumescent seals as a means of rectifying excessive
Maintenance Contract. Door hardware must be fire tested to be compatible with clearances on newly installed door sets. Seals cannot be used as a
the particular door core. means of rectifying poor workmanship.

• Both door leaf and frame are to be tagged (where a fire door set is installed)

 Don’t cut doors down to suit opening, correct size needs to be ordered

Correct hardware installed – door clearances met

 Gap between frame and wall to be sealed with fire rated sealant
13
 Both door and frame are tagged  Gap exceeds 3 mm

 Gap between face of door leaf and frame exceeds 5 mm

Excessive gap at the base of fire doors rectified using fire tested threshold plates.

14
 DOOR HARDWARE AND CLOSERS
DO; DON’T;

• Patch and paint surface where the old door hardware is removed. It is permissible • Attach the closer arm to wall next to door
to use quality builder’s bog to fill holes left by the removal of non compliant
hardware. • Install the door closer on an angle

• Install lever latch set and double cylinder dead latch • Reinstall tenant hardware that prevents the door from fully closing

• Ensure that lock tongue inserts fully into striker box and is properly aligned.

• Patch and paint surface where old closer is removed

• Attach the closer arm to door frame

• Spend time to properly adjust the closer to ensure ease of opening and full closure

 Closer should be attached to top of frame

Compliant door set – automatic double cylinder dead latch, lever latch set and door closer. All items are
fire resistant and approved for the particular door core, including the peep hole  Door not patched and painted where old closer was removed
15
 .

Double door set installed correctly with self closers on each leaf, fire rated meeting stile and sequence  Not acceptable, tongue and striker box need to be in proper contact and aligned
selector (not shown). correctly

Sequence selector installed into new double door set.

16
 FIRE AND SMOKE SEALS
INTUMESCENT FIRE SEALS (eg. Lorient HP 4002)

DO DON’T

• Ensure they are properly installed to manufacturer specifications. • Use as a means to fix a new poorly installed new fire door leaf or set

• Ensure surface is cleaned and removed of all dirt and loose material before • Use with solid core doors
installation

• Strip frame back to metal prior to installation of seal

• Paint the entire door frame with the seal in place

• Use to rectify existing fire door sets where gap between edge of door leaf and
frame is between 3mm – 6mm

• Use to rectify existing metal frames where the door seat rebate is less than 25mm.
In this case the acceptable maximum gap between the frame and the edge of the
door leaf can be increased to 4mm.

Gap between edge of

new door leaf and frame
can be 4mm. Helps stop
door edge catching on
seal.

 Door leaf scraping on seal, when using these seals the gap between the
edge of the door leaf and frame can be increased to a maximum of 4mm

17
COMBINED INTUMESCENT FIRE & SMOKE SEAL (eg. Lorient Batwing)

DO DON’T

• Ensure 3mm clearance is provided between the edge of door leaf and frame but • Paint over door seals, paint entire frame first then install seal
no more
• Install on a fire door set or in conjunction with a fire door leaf
• Pre-drill the seal to allow the rivet head to pass right through when installing onto a
rebate extension • Directly rivet or mechanically fix the seal

• Ensure surface is cleaned and removed of all dirt and loose material before • Install on a door seat rebate less than 25mm
installation

Example of how Batwing Fire and Smoke Seal is installed

 Install Batwing seals after painting of the frame

18
 DOOR FRAMES AND SCREEN DOORS
DO; DON’T;

• Paint the entire frame once rebate extension is installed • Reduce clear doorway width below 760mm (seek Project Manager
advice where this will occur)
• Use a steel rivet and ensure heads of rivets get nail punched to flatten them. This
is to avoid the rivets marking the door leaf. • Reinstall existing screen door or hardware

• Mastic where the new frame extension and the existing frame intersect, all around • Install one way mesh
and on both sides

• Allow for wider door frame rebate, where installed, to ensure lock can be operated
correctly

• Install a self closer

• Use steel profiles that have a thickness of at least 1mm.

 Door frame rebate extension prevents operation of lock and turning of key on screen
door. Screen door hardware needs to be suitably positioned.

Installation of rebate extension OK however rivet heads need to be flattened and painting of
entire frame required.

19
 RISER SHAFTS AND BULKHEADS
SHAFT & BULKHEAD CONSTRUCTION
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure bulkhead or riser framing is structurally adequate and spaced to support • Restrict existing overhead clearance any lower than 2700mm or
required layers of fire rated plasterboard where existing construction/ services dictate. Where clearance is an
issue advice from Housing NSW project manager should be sought.
• Ensure all joins and edges are staggered and protected in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications • Install collars to the inside of a bulkhead

• Seal bulkhead or riser to underside of slab and or wall with fire rated sealant • Rely on adhesives for fixings, ensure the correct mechanical fixings
are used and spaced in accordance with manufacturer’s details.
• Ensure metal pipes entering bulkhead or riser are sealed with fire rated sealant

• Ensure bulkhead or risers are painted, sealed and appropriately colour matched

• Position framing so that any fire collars are fixed through to the bulkhead framing,
unless otherwise allowed by the manufacturer

 Bottom panel no longer to be constructed as a removable panel, access panel/s

should be provided

Shaft continuous to the fire rated ceiling behind cornice, sealing is still required to wall and ceiling
junctions

20
Sheets are correctly overlapped and taken to the edge of the walls and ceiling

 Make sure bulkheads are painted and sealed back to slab

Sheets overlapped at corner and joints appropriately staggered as per manufacturer’s detail (number of
layers indicative only, two layers usually required however three layers are required in car parks)

ACCESS PANELS
DO; DON’T;

• Install at least one per riser shaft or bulkhead where pipe work contains service or • Fit a non fire rated access panel into fire rated riser (install access
inspection points. Where more than one is required the position of the access panel as per FSU02310 or FSU02312)
panels should be limited to main junctions and/or service points.
• Provide sealant to access panels the panel needs to be easily
• Install prefabricated hinged panels where the size of the riser shaft and bulkhead is removed and refitted
adequate. Prefabricated screw fixed panels can be used where hinged panels are
not available to achieve the required FRL (this would normally only apply to car • Install panel with uneven gaps around the frame
parks).
21
• Construct handmade access panels to the detail provided in the Component and
Product Schedule (a copy is provided at the back of this document) and ensure the
number of plasterboard layers is consistent with bulkhead

• Paint access panel and surrounding trim to match existing

• Maintain tight fitting access panel installation with consistent clearances, maximum
3mm between panel edge and frame

• Ensure fixings to access panels are of a type that allows the panel to be readily
removed and easily refixed

• Paint the access panel, colour matched to the surrounds

 Access panel does not meet specified detail (does not sit flush with riser shaft)

Access panel correctly located at service inspection point; however prefabricated panel should have
been used as bulkhead big enough to accommodate. N.B metal stop for access panel needs only be as wide
as the intumescent strip, handles not normally necessary

 Access panel gap was not consistent as gaps around rest of frame varied

22
  Access panel gap is not consistent and exceeds 3mm
Prefabricated screw fixed version OK in this instance as the ceiling was required to achieve an
FRL of -/90/90. Screw fixed prefabricated are OK for car park bulkheads

FIRE STOPPING SHAFTS

DO; DON’T;

• Apply specified adhesive to all edges of HD mineral fibre batt where necessary • Cut HD mineral fibre batt too small as it needs to tightly fit into the
(inside and out) opening

• Use intumescent mastic to neatly fill and seal all gaps around service penetrations • Install HD mineral fibre batt where material cannot be bound by fire
at low level rated material when installing as a recess or compression fit

• Install snap vents where fire collars and HD mineral fibre batts have been fitted to • Reduce thickness of HD mineral fibre batt
risers
• Install snap vents in fire rated risers, bulkheads and ceilings
• Install snap vent just below fire collar/batt for access and inspection
• Cut opening too large, snap vents must be tight fitting and not screw
fixed in place

23
  Wrong type of vent installed, should be able to be installed or removed without use of
H/D mineral fibre rigid batts to be cut to shape and installed to top of riser shafts using manufacturers tool
approved adhesive and mastic sealant

 Riser shaft capped with plasterboard however collar not clipped together and
Correct type of snap vent to use
mastic not provided at wall junction. Ensure that plasterboard is fixed into
framing, fire collars to be fixed as per manufacturers specification

24
 GENERAL FIRE STOPPING
INTUMESCENT DAMPERS
DO; DON’T;

• Recess fit where in a visible location. • Surface mount in visible locations.

• Ensure that the intumescent fire damper (IFD) is within the width of the wall when • Use plastic anchors to fix off to wall, pay attention to manufacturer’s
recess mounting details for correct fixing

• Ensure perimeter of the damper is sealed with mastic • Use un-approved products

• Ensure that metal fixings are used and correct number of fixings as per
manufacturers specifications

• Make sure that manufacturers specifications are adhered to when mounting into
FR plasterboard or substrates upgraded with intumescent Paint

• Ensure that any ducting connected to an IFD can fall away in a fire via low melting
materials

Damper systems are available to fix a range of ventilation penetrations  Damper should be flush with bulkhead. Proud fit not acceptable in visible locations
25
 FIRE COLLARS
DO; DON’T;

• Provide correct amount of fixings as per manufacturers requirements • Infill collars with mastic or sealant

• Infill any gaps in slab around pipe prior to fixing of collar • Bury or cover the collar with mortar or other material

• Ensure collar is fixed hard and flat against wall or slab • Use collars that aren’t approved for use on the program

• Use the correct size collar for pipe as per manufacturers specifications • Use fixings that are not recommended by the manufacturer

• Install collar to a surface that is not flat as entire collar needs to be

hard against wall, floor or ceiling

Gap around pipe in-filled prior to installation of collar correct size and fixings used (additional fixing  No need to in-fill collar with mastic
behind pipe)

26
  Collar buried in concrete grout, gap around pipe should be treated first then collar fixed
Range of collars are available to treat varying circumstances, note that gap around pipes had been
treated prior to collar installation. This is evident by concrete grouting.

Some buildings may contain cast in fire collars which were provided at time of construction. It is at the
discretion of the Fire Safety Scoper whether or not these can be relied upon.

27
 FIRE RATED MORTARS
DO; DON’T;

• Provide a flush neat finish to match the surrounding surface • Place excessive grout or mortar around pipe

• Follow manufacturer’s mix ratio, grout should be a stiff consistency • Leave mortar droppings or waste on site

• Clean and pre moisten surfaces around opening before application • Add to much mortar to mix it should be stiff enough to fill smaller
openings without the need for formwork.
• Use forms for larger openings
• Use additional binders, additives or aggregates unless specifically
allowed for by manufacturer

Fire rated mortar used and neatly finished to soffit of slab. Penetrations need to be protected  Sand and cement mortar cannot be used as it does not achieve a fire rating
when used as an in fill material. Excessive build up is not acceptable
in accordance with manufacturer requirements

28
Fire rated mortar used and neatly finished to soffit of slab. Note UPVC inspection plug would
need to be changed to metal

FIRE RATED SEALANTS & INTUMESCENT MASTICS

DO; DON’T;

• Clean surface and make sure it is free from dust, oil and grease prior to • Apply in wet or damp conditions
application
• Paint over, sealant colour should be most suited to surroundings
• Smooth out to even and neat finish in visible areas

• Insert backing material, as necessary, prior to application

• Follow manufacturers guidelines in terms of PPE

• Bunch and tie cables together prior to application

• Ensure required volume of mastic is provided

• Ensure manufacturer’s documentation is read and understood prior to use to

ensure maximum performance of product

29
Metal pipe penetrating bounding wall properly and neatly sealed with approved fire rated Mastic applied to non fire side of application, unworkmanlike manner (also incorrect
application of fire collar as it should have been installed to underside of ceiling). Gaps
sealant. Attention needs to be paid to depth and thickness of sealant around pipes should be sealed first then collar applied.

Majority of void in filled first with fire resistant material (eg hebel,intubatt), cables bunched
together and intumescent mastic liberally applied

30
 FIRE PILLOWS
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure pillows are packed tightly and sealed with intumescent mastic • Use to fire stop the top of a riser shaft or other horizontal
arrangements
• Use a variety of pillow sizes to achieve a neat fit
• Use to protect UPVC pipe penetrations

pillows are overlapped and packed tightly, intumescent mastic is used to seal edges (picture of Fire Pillows cannot be used to fire stop around plastic pipe work and not to be used to
commercial application however method of installation still applies) seal the tops of shafts

31
 INTUMESCENT PAINT
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure all sub contractors are trained in application by approved suppliers • Apply to wet surfaces, ensure the previous coat and original surface
is fully dried before applying next coat
• Clean all surfaces so that they are free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease, mildew, loose
flaking paint or other foreign matter that could impair bonding of intumescent paint. • Store intumescent paint in a dry cool place out of direct sunlight

• Use a nap roller recommended by the manufacturer • Overspread or apply too much intumescent paint to roller or apply
too much paint in one coat as it will run
• Apply paint within manufacturers guidelines for temperature and humidity
• Leave gaps when applying intumescent paint ensure that there is a
• Record all wet film thicknesses for each coat, and provide on an approved log continuous fire rating between fire rated elements (eg continuous
sheet across entire ceiling to wall)

• Drop all light and other fittings so that paint is applied continuously, ensure that • Leave intumescent paint without over coating in wet areas and
they are properly refixed on completion of painting external situations, ensure weather resistant paint is used externally

• When painting ceiling cornice apply a bead of intumescent mastic to the top and • Apply paint outside manufacturer temperature guidelines
bottom of the cornice where it meets the walls
• Paint rotten or decayed timber when applying externally
• Provide semi gloss over coating in wet areas
• Paint over existing flaking or peeling paintwork
• Apply to the following approved substrates for internal applications;

The substrate restrictions do not apply to external applications, the paint can be
applied externally provided the surface is in reasonable condition.

• Apply paint at a minimum Dry Film Thickness of 1000 microns for internal
applications and 1500 microns for external applications.

• Paint entire length including underneath capping tiles, metal flashings and gutters.

• Provide tint to intumescent paint where dark overcoat is being applied

All ceiling fittings must be dropped prior to application of paint. Paint must be continuous
across entire ceiling and penetrations suitably fire stopped (see fire rated ceiling section)
• Provide an IP log for each wet coat applied
32
• Clean and prepare surface prior to painting

• Overcoat with weatherproof paint

• Ensure that each coat is completely dry before applying the next

• Ensure that 1500 microns Dry Film Thickness is applied externally

• Check the wet film thickness after each coat is applied

Bleed through of paint to be avoided, refer to manufacturer for types of tinting that can
be carried out including where bleed seal is necessary.

When painting fascia boards ensure entire board is painted including behind gutters and tile capping

Ensure each coat of paint is completely dry before the next coat is applied.

Textured off white finish, cornice painted with bottom edge neatly sealed off
33
 FABRIC BARRIER SEPARATING WALL
DO; DON’T;

• Provide two layers of curtain so as to sandwich the timber members supporting the • Use in areas other than the roof space
barrier between the layers of fabric.
• Leave ceiling insulation in contact with the barrier, maintain a
• Treat all penetrations through the barrier in accordance with the manufacturer’s minimum clearance of 100mm
details.
• Leave supporting members unprotected
• Ensure installers are trained by supplier

• Ensure that rock wool is placed on top of wall at underside of roof tiles. The rock
wool is to be installed to pack gaps between the top of the barrier and underside of
tiles. Where roof sheeting is metal sheet pieces of fabric barrier may be used to
seal gaps. The thickness and width of the batt can be cut down to suit application.

• Cut back sarking 50mm from fabric barrier where sarking is present

• Follow manufacturer’s specification for fixing and installation

• Consult with Fire Safety Scoper and Housing NSW Project Manager where being
installed to large common area roof spaces. Provision may need to be made for
access through barriers.

 Truss forming frame to support fabric barrier, webs of truss not protected. Additional
layer of fabric should have been provided to completely sandwich the truss. In addition poor
detailing at apex

34
 Ensure all joints treated to manufacturer’s details, barrier must be continuously sealed
Barrier properly installed with penetrations detailed in accordance with manufacturer’s details.

 The fabric barrier does not connect with the top of the separating wall (brick work), the
fabric barrier must form a continuous fire rated barrier from the top of separating wall to the
underside of the roof sheeting

Barrier being installed to manufacturer detail, including penetrations. Fire resistant rock wool will need to
be provided on top to fill space between barrier and underside of tiles.

35
 SEPARATING/BOUNDING WALLS
DO DON’T

• Match brick infill in terms of size, coursing, colour, texture and pattern when infilling • Allow edge of brick to overhang opening
bread box
• Remove breadbox if it only penetrates the single skin of a cavity wall
• Colour match paint to surrounding walls

Non Fire Rated transom above SOU entry door correctly rectified using two layers 16mm fire rated Inappropriate matching of mortar and brick work
plasterboard. Head rail of door to be installed joints to be sealed with fire rated sealant then appropriately
painted

SEPARATING/BOUNDING WALLS WITHIN ROOF SPACE

HEBEL
DO; DON’T;

• Use only hebel approved mortars and adhesives • Leave gaps in any of the joints, ensure adequate adhesive is used
so that joints are filled solid
• Extend hebel close to underside of the roof sheeting so that no more than one rock
wool batt is provided on top of the wall • Use hebel less than 100mm in thickness

• Ensure that the gap between the top of the build up is flat and not more than 85mm • Build up Hebel block work on top of timber framed wall
for an optimal rock wool seal

36
 Separating correctly built up to underside of roof sheeting

Top of stepped separating wall correctly built up to allow single layer of fire resistant rock wool to the top
of wall
37
 FIRE RATED PLASTERBOARD
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure that adequate framework is provided to support the FR plasterboard/FR • Use plasterboard with a thickness less than 16mm where single
boarding. Pay attention to number and spacing of fixings required by manufacturer, layer systems are being used
stud adhesive does work in a fire situation.
• Leave any gap or join untreated.
• Ensure that the top of the wall has a capping at the top so that the rock wool is
adequately supported. Ideally this would be a timber plate lined with fire rated
plasterboard or the edges of the timber top plate fully protected by the plasterboard
sheets.

Properly completed fire rated plasterboard wall, support as been provided to properly support fire
resistant rock wool

Care needs to be taken with jointing and the detailing around penetrations and framing

38
 ROCK WOOL
ON TOP OF SEPARATING/BOUNDING WALL

DO; DON’T;

• Use only fire resistant rock wool • Stack batts on top of each other, the gap to be sealed should not
exceed the height of one batt compressed to 85%
• Check that rock wool is in place from within the roof space once tiles are reinstated
as it may fall off when roofing is reinstalled • Allow batt to push up roof tiles, where necessary cut down height of
batt and nail tile in place
• Ensure that the rock wool is packed and compressed to 85% of original thickness

• Ensure full width of batt installed

• Remove and re-point ridge tiles to match existing if required to be moved to

upgrade bounding wall

 Rock wool needs to be provided in a continuous manner across the top of the
separating wall. There must be no gaps and it should not easily slide out.(note; ensure
Fire resistant rock wool correctly applied to top of wall in single layer. Timber roofing battens are sarking is cut back 50mm from separating wall)
permitted to cross the top of the wall provided they are no bigger than 75 x 50mm

39
 Attention needs to be paid to ridge repairs and pointing. Pointing needs to be coloured matched and
finished off in a professional and work man like manner Poor ridge repair, no attempt at colour match, uneven finish, pointing not completed to
all reinstalled caps and loose material not removed
GAP BETWEEN SEPARATING WALL & EXTERNAL WALL

DO;
DON’T;
• Pack rock wool tightly into cavity so that it does not move
• Leave gaps, the rock wool needs to be continuous and firmly packed
• Ensure that the rock wool is at least one full batt in width
• Allow rock wool to slump in cavity, it needs to be applied so that it
• Place a moisture barrier between the rock wool and the external wall does not fall or dislodge

• Use high density mineral fibre batt where possible. Flexible rock wool should only
be used where the fibre batt cannot be installed.

40
 Fire resistant rock wool packed into gap between end of separating wall and external wall. Moisture
barrier between rock wool and external wall required

TIMBER PENETRATIONS
DO; DON’T;

• Push rock wool hard against wall • Use wire strand to fix into place

• Fix rock wool into place using wire mesh over its whole length and ensure wool is • Use rock wool that isn’t fire resistant
compressed
• Leave gaps between the pieces of rock wool used to wrap the
• Provide rock wool a minimum of 200mm either side of the separating wall penetration

• Where party wall batts are used they can be thinned down to a pre wrapping height
of at least 50mm.

41
 Gaps around timber penetrations need to be appropriately sealed first prior to rock wool wrapping Rockwool needs to be wrapped around the timber and in continuous contact. Mesh used
for fixing does not completely cover rock wool

Timber wrapped and properly fixed using wire mesh across full width. Timber should be wrapped right Rockwool needs to contact separating wall, where necessary the rock wool should over
around if not possible exposed timber to covered as far as practicable lap intersecting members and contact with separating wall

42
 Subject to limitations of manufacturer timber penetrations through separating wall can be treated using
fire rated fabric systems

SKYLIGHT SHAFTS (Less than 900mm from Separating Wall)

DO; DON’T;

• Use 6mm Georgian wired or Laminated glass when replacing top (thickness in • Use fire rated sealant or intumescent mastic to seal down glazing.
accordance with AS 1288) Appropriate glazing silicone is to be used.

• Use wire mesh or vermin wire to compact rock wool along entire length of shaft • Wrap flexible type ducting or other types that can’t support the
when wrapping rigid tubes wrapping of the rock wool

• Pack gap between roof sheeting and top of shaft with rock wool • Remove existing construction, clad around existing frame and
ensure no screws penetrate the existing construction.
• Use a single layer of 16mm fire rated plasterboard when lining skylight shafts

• Seal around any timbers penetrating the shaft with mastic

• Skylight shafts can be protected with TBA Textiles Fire Fly plus 60 – prior to
installation details are to be sought from [email protected]

43
  Timber framed skylight shaft correctly lined on the outside with one layer of 16mm fire rated
plasterboard. Note that all joints are sealed around penetrating timbers, connection at roof sheet (or rock
wool can be used) and ceiling

When ridged shaft wrapped with rock wool ensure wire mesh is used so all rock wool
around the shaft is compressed

Combustible skylight dome correctly replaced with wired glazing, appropriately sealed (proper glazing
silicone) and framed in place

44
 EAVES SEPARATION
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure eave separation is in line with separating wall and extends to fascia board • Leave gap between eave separation and separating wall

• Use only fibre cement sheet or high density mineral fibre board. (Other materials • Let material used to fix fibre cement ooze or drip through eave vents
may be approved where eave separation is being provided to ambulatory access
balconies). • Seal vents in eaves where a nib wall prevents the eave separation
from being continuous
• Ensure board is cut around tile battens and extends to underside of roof sheeting,
alternatively rock wool can be placed on top of the eave separation

• Ensure separation is constructed tightly around penetrating timbers

• Ensure separation is supported and mechanically fixed to supporting framework.

• Ensure all joins and gaps are sealed with appropriate intumescent mastic

• Ensure surface of eaves space is cleaned and removed of all dirt and loose
material before installation of eaves separation

• Ensure that vents are sealed a minimum of 900mm either side of separating wall

• Use fire cement sheet to seal eaves vents

Eave Separation not in line with end of separating wall, an additional piece is to be
provided across the end of the wall spanning between the two FC sheets

Eave separation correctly provided, supporting member between layers in this case
45
 Eave separation may not always be in a straight line particularly at valley intersections Plasterboard no longer an acceptable material
SARKING CUTBACK
DO; DON’T;

• Cut back a minimum of 50mm each side of the separating wall • Rip sarking by hand or use inappropriate tools such as chisel or
screwdriver
• Cut sarking with sharp knife or tool
• Leave cut edge of sarking hanging loose and not fixed
• Fix all cut edges of sarking to a rafter or tile batten
• Leave excess or waste material within the roof space

46
 Work carried out in unprofessional manner and was not done along the entire length of
Sarking neatly and professionally cut back at least 50mm from edge of separating wall and refixed separating wall

Sarking was ripped back by hand and not refixed to rafter or tile batten

47
 SUB FLOOR SPACE
DO; DON’T;

• Ensure that bricks are installed within the line of the existing wall • Seal up a sub floor space without ensuring that an alternative access
point (a new sub floor door or similar) is provided. Consult with
• Ensure that approved mortars are used with lightweight blocks Project Manager where necessary.

• Use high density rigid mineral fibre batt or other proprietary lineal gap seal product • Use rock wool or other product that doesn’t achieve the right level of
where sealing gaps between top of wall and underside of floor. fire resistance

• Push rock wool hard against wall when wrapping timber members that pass • Stack batts on top of each other
through bounding wall
• Use wire strand to fix timber penetration wraps into place
• Fix rock wool into place using wire mesh over its whole length
• Use rock wool that isn’t fire resistant
• Wrap timber 200mm either side of separating wall
• Leave fire rated access hatch unprotected from weather, external
• Ensure brickwork is adequately supported above with lintel doors are to be painted on all faces and edges including the frames

• Ensure opening is large enough for access • Provide sub floor separation to building types 8/9a, the sub floor area
should be cleared of combustibles and the area secured with
• Ensure lock is supplied and keyed as per local area requirements approved lockable man holes

ENCLOSURES UNDER STAIRS

DO; DON’T;

• Paint and repair to match surrounds, including installation of flooring to match • Block or seal area up without consultation with Housing NSW
surrounds (where necessary) Project Manager

• Ensure that manufacturer’s specification is followed in terms of framing support

and layers of FR plasterboard to achieve required FRL of -/60/60

48
 Putting door closer on an angle will not work, closer arm will break when opening

Where horizontal frame not provided across the top of door a transom panel or additional rail to be
provided to support door closer correctly

SWITCHBOARD ENCLOSURES
DO; DON’T;
• Provide smoke seals to entire perimeter of door frame rebate • Staple fix seal around enclosure

• Fix as per manufacturers requirements • Leave any unsealed penetrations

• Ensure internal construction of switchboard enclosure is non combustible

49
50
 FIRE SAFETY PROGRAM

COMPONENT AND PRODUCT SCHEDULE

Note: The list is subject to change as new products are assessed and considered suitable for use on the Fire Safety Program.
Note: To achieve the requirements of Housing NSW Fire Risk Management Plan Implementation Manual all products must be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the limitations of the fire resistance testing.

51
Component FIRE RATED PLASTERBOARD
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. BGC FR Plasterboard Ph 02 9632 2100
requirements 2. Boral Firestop Ph 1800 811 222
3. CSR Fyrchek Ph 1300 306 556
4. LaFarge Fireshield Ph 1800 810 018

Component FIRE RATED BOARDS

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Orbit FR Board Trafalgar Fire Containment Ph 1800 888 714
requirements 2. Promat range Promat Australia Ph 1800 77 66 28
3. Trafalgar range Trafalgar Fire Containment Ph 1800 888 714

Component LIGHTWEIGHT BLOCKS

Sub-component
Assessed as 1. Hebel blocks and panels CSR Hebel Ph 1300 369 448
meeting
requirements

Component FIRE DAMPERS

Sub-component
Assessed as 1. Lorient Range of intumescent Lorient Australia
meeting dampers Ph 02 9907 3844
requirements 2. Wombat Range of intumescent Trafalgar Fire Containment
dampers Ph 1800 888 714

52
Component SEALANTS AND MASTICS
Sub-component
Assessed as 1. Hilti CP601S Hilti Ph 131 292
meeting 2. Hilti CP611A Hilti Ph 131 292
requirements 3. Trafalgar Building Products FyreFlex Trafalgar Fire Containment
Sealant Ph 1800 888 714
4. Trafalgar Building Products Fyremex Trafalgar Fire Containment
One Sealant Ph 1800 888 714
5. Promat AN Acrylic Sealant Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
6. Pyropanel Multiflex Firerated Acrylic Ausco Firestop
Sealant Ph 4648 3336
7. Bostik Fireban One & Bostik Firecaulk Trafalgar Fire Containment
Ph 1800 888 714
Bostik Findley
Ph 1800 621 221

8. HB Fuller Fire Sound (limited to certain HB Fuller

construction joints only) Ph 1800 423 855
9. FireTherm Intumastic TBA Textiles
Ph 02 8004 3333

Component EXPANDING FOAM SEALANT

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Hilti CP620 Hilti Ph 131 292
requirements

53
Component FIRE COLLARS
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Abesco Z120 Trafalgar Fire Containment
requirements Ph 1800 888 714
2. Hilti CP 643-N Hilti Ph 131 292
3. Promat Promastop UC Unicollar Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
4. Promat Promaseal CFC Conduit Collar Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
5. Promat Promaseal Retrofit and Wall
Collar Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
6. Pyropanel Retrofit Fire Collar (Multifit & Ausco Firestop
Singlefit) Ph 02 4648 3336
7. Pyropanel Pyrowrap Fire Collar Ausco Firestop
Ph 02 4648 3336
8. Firepro FirePro Centabuild
Ph 02 9858 5597

Component FIRE RESISTANT ROCK WOOL

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Insulco Party Wall Batts Insulco Ph 1300 65 44 44
requirements 2. Insulco Fire Damper Strips Insulco Ph 1300 65 44 44
3. CSR Bradford Fire Seal Damper Strip CSR Bradford
Ph 1300 850 305

4. CSR Bradford Fibertex 820 CSR Bradford

Ph 1300 850 305
5. CSR Bradford Fireseal Party Wall CSR Bradford
Batts Ph 1300 850 305
6. Roxul Party Wall Fire Stop 1100 AIS Insulation
Ph 08 9417 9494

54
Component FIRE AND SMOKE SEALS
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Lorient LP 3504TF Lorient Australia
requirements Ph 02 9907 3844
2. Lorient LP 4204TF
3. Lorient HP 2512BW
4. Lorient HP 4002
5. Lorient FDBU20, FDBU60
6. Lorient IS8090si
7. Raven RP 38si, RP 35si, RP 114 Trafalgar Fire Containment
Ph 1800 888 714

Component DOWNLIGHT/ RECESSED FITTING PROTECTION

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Tenmat FF109
requirements 2. Youngen Downlight Cover Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28

Component RADIANT HEAT ATTENUATION SCREEN

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Capral Aluminium Capral Aluminium
requirements (Building Systems Group)
Ph 1300 366 517
2. Centra Security Systems (FireTuff) Centra Security Systems
Ph 1300 559 888

55
Component FIRE PILLOWS
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Hilti CP651 Hilti Ph 131 292
requirements 2. Trafalgar Building Products Fyreplug Trafalgar Fire Containment
Pillows Ph 1800 888 714

3. Promat Promaseal Pillows Promat Australia

Ph 1800 77 66 28
4. Pyropanel P4 & PS Fire Pillows Ausco Firestop
Ph 02 4648 3336

Component EXHAUST FAN PROTECTION

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Lorient R03 Lorient Australia Ph 02 9907 3844
requirements 2. Lorient R04 "
3. Lorient R10
4. Wombat CM and CP systems Trafalgar Fire Containment
Ph 1800 888 714

Component CEILING ACCESS HATCHES

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Fire Stop Supplies FSS AP006 Fire Stop Supplies
requirements Ph 0428 994 139
2. Firepro B359 FirePro Centabuild
Ph 02 9858 5597
3. Pyropanel CPS.03 Ausco Firestop
Ph 4648 3336
4. Fyreguard hinged Fyrehatch Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
5. Trafalgar Building Products fully Trafalgar Fire Containment
insulated ceiling access panel Ph 1800 888 714

56
Component FIRE RATED MORTARS
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Hilti CP636 Hilti Ph 131 292
requirements 2. Trafalgar Building Products Fyreset Trafalgar Fire Containment
Mortar Ph 1800 888 714
3. Promat Promaseal Mortar Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28
4. Pyropanel M4 Fire Rated Mortar Ausco Firestop
Ph 02 4648 3336
5. Intutherm Fire Mortar TBA Textiles
Ph 02 8004 3333

Component INTUMESCENT PAINT

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. FireFree88 Firefree Systems Australasia
requirements Ph 02 6255 3034
2. CAP 508 CAP Coatings Australia
Ph 1800 508 800

Component LOW MOMENT DOOR CLOSER

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Dorma TS93 Dorma Ph 02 9645 6455
requirements

57
 Component FIRE RATED SWITCH BOXES
Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Clipsal Fire Rated Switch Box Clipsal Ph 1300 20 25 25
requirements 2. HPM Fire Rated Switch Box HPM Ph 1300 369 777
3. Pyropanel Fire Rated Switch Box Ausco Firestop Ph 4648 3336
4. Promat Switchbox Intumescent Promat Australia
Ph 1800 77 66 28

Component FIRE RATED FABRIC BARRIER

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Flameseal 60/30 Trafalgar Fire Containment
requirements Ph 1800 888 714
2. TBA Textiles FireFly Plus 60 TBA Textiles – Fire Fly
3. TBA Textiles FireFly Titan Ph 02 8004 3333

Component GENERAL FIRE STOPPING

Sub-component
Assessed as meeting 1. Promat Promaseal IBS Promat Australia Ph 1800 77 66 28
requirements 2. Pyropanel Fire Snake Ausco Firestop Ph 4648 3336
3. FireTherm Intubatt 1 TBA Textiles – Fire Fly
(HD mineral fibre batt) Ph 02 8004 3333

Rev 2 8th June 2010

58
 NSW Land and Housing Corporation

COMPONENT
REQUIREMENTS

March 2018

Component Requirements March 2018 1

NSW DEPARTMENT OF FAMILY AND COMMUNITY SERVICES

NSW LAND AND HOUSING CORPORATION

Locked Bag 4001 ASHFIELD BC 1800

DISCLAIMER

While every effort has been made and all reasonable care taken to ensure the accuracy of the material contained herein, the authors and
editors of this publication shall not be held to be liable or responsible in any way whatsoever, and expressly disclaim any liability or
responsibility for any loss or damage costs or expenses incurred as a result or in connection with the reliance whether whole or partial by any
person upon any part of the contents of this publication. NSW Land and Housing Corporation reserves the right to amend the whole or any part
of this document, without notice.

PUBLISHING DETAILS

Version

December 2001 3 Revised to align with Edition 3 of Asset Standards

March 2004 4 Updated with new product information

January 2006 5 “Products” part of document removed

June 2009 6 Initial draft prepared for NBESP
June 2009 6.5 Revised draft for NBESP, not published.

July 2009 6.5i Minor formatting amendments for printing

July 2009 6.5ip Minor editorial amendments

May 2012 v1 New format
Updated to align with Maintenance Specifications and
Reference Specifications
March 2016 v2 Updated to supplement the Asset Maintenance Services
Contract Specifications - Plus – Requirements to
supplement the Reference Specification and
documentation for special projects.
March 2018 V3 Clarified reference to brand names.
Updated components

COPYRIGHT

Other than for purposes of and subject to the conditions prescribed under the Copyright Act, no part of it may in any form or by
any means (electronic, mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise) be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted without prior written permission. Inquiries should be addressed to NSW Land and Housing Corporation.

Component Requirements March 2018 2

Component Requirements

Table of Contents
PREAMBLE
Component Requirements...................................................................................................................... 3
PART 1 – ASSET MAINTENANCE AND NEW CONSTRUCTION.......................................................... 9
1.1 Grounds ................................................................................................................................. 9
1.1.1 Letter Box ......................................................................................................... 9
1.1.2 Clothes Lines .................................................................................................. 10
1.2 Carpentry ............................................................................................................................. 11
1.2.1 Built in Wardrobes .......................................................................................... 11
1.2.2 Cupboards Kitchen ......................................................................................... 12
1.2.3 Bathroom Cabinet........................................................................................... 13
1.2.4 Bathroom Vanity ............................................................................................. 14
1.3 Doors and Windows ........................................................................................................... 15
1.3.1 Screen Doors .................................................................................................. 15
1.3.2 Doorways External ......................................................................................... 16
1.3.3 Doorways Internal........................................................................................... 17
1.3.4 Door Locks and Latches ................................................................................. 18
1.3.5 Windows and Sliding Doors ........................................................................... 19
1.3.6 Window Locks ................................................................................................ 20
1.3.7 Window Awnings ............................................................................................ 21
1.3.8 Garage Doors ................................................................................................. 22
1.3.9 Master Key System ....................................................................................... 23
1.4 Roofing ................................................................................................................................ 24
1.4.1 Roof and Eave Ventilation .............................................................................. 24
1.4.2 Gutters, Downpipes and Fascias ................................................................... 24
1.4.3 Roof Lights and Skylights ............................................................................... 25
1.4.4 Ceiling Insulation ............................................................................................ 25
1.5 Plumbing ............................................................................................................................. 27
1.5.1 Hand Basin ..................................................................................................... 27
1.5.2 Bath………………………………………………………………………………….27
1.5.3 Shower Base .................................................................................................. 28
1.5.4 Shower Roses ............................................................................................... 28
1.5.5 Shower Seats ................................................................................................. 29
1.5.6 Bathroom Fittings ........................................................................................... 29
1.5.7 Grab Rails ....................................................................................................... 30
1.5.8 Toilet Pan and Cistern .................................................................................... 30
1.5.9 Toilet Seat ...................................................................................................... 31
1.5.10 Tap Ware ...................................................................................................... 31
1.5.11 Kitchen Sink Unit .......................................................................................... 33
1.5.12 Laundry Tub ................................................................................................. 34
1.5.13 Tap/Valve Tempering and Thermostatic Mixing ........................................... 34

Component Requirements March 2018 3

 1.5.14 Plumbing System – Potable Water............................................................... 35
1.5.15 Rainwater Tank ............................................................................................ 36
1.5.16 Water Heater ................................................................................................ 37
1.6 Electrical and Gas .............................................................................................................. 40
1.6.1 Intercom and Access Control ......................................................................... 40
1.6.2 Light Points ..................................................................................................... 41
1.6.3 Smoke Alarms ................................................................................................ 44
1.6.4 Stove .............................................................................................................. 44
1.6.5 Rangehood ..................................................................................................... 46
1.6.6 Heating ........................................................................................................... 47
1.6.7 Dryer ............................................................................................................... 48
1.6.8 Washing Machine ........................................................................................... 48
1.6.9 Reverse Cycle Air Conditioning………………………………………………… . 49
1.6.10 Solar Photo-Voltaic Panels ........................................................................... 50
1.6.11 Ceiling Fans……………………………………………………………………….51
1.7 Wood Space Heater ............................................................................................................ 52
1.8 Flooring ............................................................................................................................... 53
1.8.1 Underlay ......................................................................................................... 53
1.8.2 Carpet ............................................................................................................. 54
1.8.3 Resilient Sheet and Tiles ................................................................................ 55
1.9 Signage ................................................................................................................................ 57
1.9.1 House and Unit Numbering ............................................................................ 57
1.9.2 Information, Direction & Prohibition Signage ................................................. 57
PART 2 – ITEMS FOR REFERENCE SPECIFICATION, FIRE SAFETY WORKS AND SPECIAL
PROJECTS ............................................................................................................................................. 59
2.1 External................................................................................................................................ 59
2.1.1 Fencing and Gates ......................................................................................... 59
2.1.2 Street Furniture ............................................................................................... 61
2.2 Roofing ................................................................................................................................ 61
2.2.1 Roof Covering ................................................................................................. 61
2.2.2 Sarking Vapour Barriers ................................................................................. 62
2.3 Internal Linings ................................................................................................................... 63
2.3.1 Plasterboard ................................................................................................... 63
2.4 Fire Safety Maintenance and Upgrade ............................................................................. 64
2.4.1 Fire Stopping Material - Dampers .................................................................. 64
2.4.2 Fire Stopping Material - Sealants ................................................................... 64
2.4.3 Fire Stopping Material – Fire Pillows .............................................................. 64
2.4.4 Fire Collar ....................................................................................................... 65
2.4.5 Fire Hydrant .................................................................................................... 65
2.4.6 Fire Blanket .................................................................................................... 65
2.4.7 Fire Extinguisher ............................................................................................. 66
2.4.8 Fire Panel ....................................................................................................... 66
2.4.9 Fire Hose Reel ................................................................................................ 67
2.4.10 Fire Sprinkler System ................................................................................... 67

Component Requirements March 2018 4

 2.4.11 Plant Room and Shaft Ventilation Exhaust Fan ........................................... 68
2.5 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION (MATV)........................................................................ 69
2.5.1 Master Antenna Television System ................................................................ 69
2.6 Tiling and Waterproofing ................................................................................................... 72
2.6.1 Wall Tiles ........................................................................................................ 72
2.6.2 Floor Tiles ....................................................................................................... 72
2.6.3 Waterproofing ................................................................................................. 73
2.7 Paint ..................................................................................................................................... 74
2.7.1 Exterior Paint .................................................................................................. 74
2.7.2 Interior Paint ................................................................................................... 75
2.7.3 Intumescent Paint ........................................................................................... 75
2.8 Services ............................................................................................................................... 77
2.8.1 Commercial Water Heaters ............................................................................ 77

Component Requirements March 2018 5

Preamble

There are over 10 million components in the 130,000 dwellings and buildings owned by NSW Land and Housing Corporation.
They include doors, basins, taps, windows, etc. as well as floors, walls and roofs. Components are the discreet items that
together comprise a building, and which can normally be replaced as a unit.

A sub-component is a further breakdown of the component into its discreet parts, a handle is part of a door, a window sash is
part of a window, a bench top is part of a kitchen cabinet, etc.

The ordering of components and their sub-components in this reference document mirrors the arrangement in the LAHC
Maintenance Specifications and the Reference Specifications.

A Different Emphasis
NSW Land and Housing Corporation is not just a purchaser of new dwellings, it is a long term manager of residential property.
Life cycle costs are as important as the purchase price and this places a different emphasis when judging the suitability of
products to that of the general residential market.

From NSW Land and Housing Corporation long term ownership and management of over 130,000 state wide properties a surfeit
of information on the performance and suitability of various materials, construction systems and fixtures for rental property has
been compiled.

Deemed to Comply
Particular products that are deemed to comply with these requirements are listed in a schedule available from the Asset Division,
NSW Land and Housing Corporation. Because products are varied or withdrawn, and new products become available, the
schedule is only relevant at the time of issue. Confirmation should be sought at the time of ordering materials and products to
ensure they still meet NSW Land and Housing Corporation Component Requirements. A product not in the schedule can be
used in a project but it will have to be certified as complying with the “Components Requirements” and/or the relevant
specifications.

Warranties
NSW Land and Housing Corporation is seeking greater value for money for dwelling components. Many are replaced or repaired
regularly and this provides an excellent basis for determining the appropriateness of particular components for rental properties.

This document places greater emphasis on warranties as part of the value for money objective. There is also an attempt to limit
the number of components listed to those specifically of interest to a social housing provider or owner.

Components
The components listed are those pertinent to NSW Land and Housing Corporation and not scheduled as a provision standard.
The schedule is not a comprehensive list of components needed to construct a dwelling.

Components not listed in this document should comply with the relevant specifications (Maintenance and Reference
Specifications).

The Basic Provision Standards that form part of the commitment by NSW Land and Housing Corporation to tenants for provision
levels in existing dwellings can be found in the Asset Performance Standards reference document. Provision levels for new
housing can be found in the Design Standards document.

Component Requirements March 2018 6

Elaboration
This document outlines the performance requirements of selected components with which NSW Land and Housing Corporation
has both a direct interest in and experience with. For workmanship and installation requirements, refer to the appropriate contract
documents.

Not all materials used in buildings are identified in this document. It is expected that all materials used in work undertaken on
behalf of NSW Land and Housing Corporation will be fully compliant with current Australian Standards and service authority
requirements as well as any legislation and regulatory requirements.

Components identified by performance criteria only, may require written certification from the manufacturer or supplier.
Certification must be provided to NSW Land and Housing Corporation for each project before installation by the Contractor.

Where compliance with relevant standards, codes (including the National Construction Code of Australia and NSW variations),
and Australian Standards are listed as performance criteria, use the current editions, including amendments. Applicable
Australian Standards and other international and nationally recognised standards are accepted provided the
manufacturer/supplier produce proof of equivalence assessed/certified by an accredited independent third party.

Criteria for product selection for use in NSW Land and Housing Corporation’s properties include, but are not limited to, the
following:-
• proven performance
• proven quality and/or endorsement from reputable organisation(s) in the industry
• “Standards Mark” accreditation (where possible)
• “Code Mark” certification (where possible)
• best value for money
• low maintenance
• assurance of supply
• warranty
• origin of product

NSW Land and Housing Corporation will exercise its right to select particular products that best meet the business needs. This
judgment may be based on independent third party assessment or on experience with the products’ performance. In all cases
NSW Land and Housing Corporation is seeking both value for money and the promotion of better performing products at
affordable prices. NSW Land and Housing Corporation also reserves the right to seek supply agreements for the bulk supply of
particular products.

NSW Land and Housing Corporation has the right to amend/add performance criteria to this document at its sole discretion.

Component Requirements March 2018 7

Document Format

The Component Requirements (2018) consists of two parts:

• Part 1 includes the Component Requirements to supplement the Asset Maintenance Services Contract (AMS) –
Section 2 – Part G2 Technical Specification for Maintenance – G2.1 Maintenance Specification clause 22; and to
contribute to the preparation of Reference Specification.
• Part 2 includes the additional items used in the Reference Specification, Fire Safety upgrade works and special
projects.
o These items in the Component Requirements are intended to assist Project Managers and Contractual
drafters of new construction works, Fire Safety Upgrade works and other special projects to prepare
technical reference specification.
o These items will also assist AMS Contractors to understand the performance requirements of specialist
equipment often found and installed in new construction.

The components are arranged on the following pages in a table using the following format:

Component The category of building component, e.g. roof

If required, the component can be broken down into

Sub-component
smaller parts e.g. roof covering

Functional Statement Describes the business interest the item needs to fulfil

Sets out the specific criteria for judging acceptability of any

Performance Requirement particular product – will usually include compliance with
current Australian/NZ Standards

Warranty Any specific warranty requirement

Some of the component descriptions include detailed requirements, but even then, the business need should be understood first
as it represents the Principal’s primary interest.

Definitions
“Certification” in this Schedule means one or more of the following:

A copy of a certificate of approval by a government authority e.g. Sydney Water, NSW Department of Industry (Office
of Resources and Energy), Transport for NSW, Australian Communications and Media Authority, Australia Post,
Planning & Environment, Office of Environment and Heritage NSW, Fire & Rescue NSW, NSW Rural Fire Service,
NSW Health, Ausgrid, Jemena, etc., and/or

A letter certifying compliance to requirements and testing procedures outlined in specified Australian Standards, and/or

A letter with certification by a practising qualified Engineer, and/or

Test reports/opinions prepared by Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO), National
Association of Testing Authorities (NATA), Australian Wool Testing Authority (AWTA), Building Research Association
New Zealand (BRANZ), etc; based on Australian Standard Testing Procedures, and/or a print of a drawing with the
testing authority’s endorsement mark.

Component Requirements March 2018 8

PART 1 – ASSET MAINTENANCE AND NEW CONSTRUCTION
1.1 Grounds

1.1.1 Letter Box

Component LETTER BOX
Sub-component
Need To provide tenants with an Australia Post compliant receptacle for mail
Requirement General (all types)
• Painted zinc/aluminium alloy coated steel or
• G2 zinc coated steel (Z450) with minimum 50 micron polyester powder
coat finish
• Aluminium (minimum 20 micron anodised or 50 micron powder coat)
• Weather hood (for weather exposed areas)

Freestanding

• A4 envelope size minimum 230mm x 330mm and minimum160mm

high
• Minimum 25mm high letterbox slot
• Elevated between 900mm to 1200mm above ground on a coated steel
post
• Padlock or key operated camlock

Built-in (brickwork or Aluminium Letter box Banks)

• Materials as per Section 4 (Carpentry, Joinery and Minor repairs)

• Aluminium/G2 zinc coated steel/zinc-aluminium coated steel sleeve
• Minimum A4 envelope size, minimum 230mm x 330mm and
minimum160mm high
• Minimum 25mm high letterbox slot
• Elevated between 500mm to 1500mm above ground
• Access door pivot hinged on minimum 5mm diameter galvanised
steel/SS rod
• Key operated camlock/padlock style lock
• Maximum letterbox bank of 75 boxes (15 wide x 5 high)

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 9

1.1.2 Clothes Lines
Component CLOTHES LINES
Sub-component
Need To provide tenants with an easy way of drying clothes and bedding in the
sunlight
Requirement General (all types)

Test report certifying hoist can withstand a load of 150 kg (minimum 2kg
point loads evenly distributed per all lines/ at maximum 300mm centre
spacing) without deformation or damage, issued by a registered Testing
Laboratory based on current Australian Standards

• Anodised aluminium or minimum 1.0mm thick galvanised steel

framing to current Australian Standards
• Minimum 20 micron anodised or 50 micron polyester powder coat
finish to current Australian Standards
• Minimum 4 mm diameter galvanised wire or UV stabilised plastic
sheathed cord or wire lines
• All bolts & fittings zinc plated
• Locking mechanism on frame
• Installed to manufacturers written specification

Retractable

• Minimum 4 line (2 BR or less) Maximum line extension 6.5 m

• Minimum 5 line Maximum extension 6.5 m

Awning

• Minimum 14 m line (for 1 BR or less)

• Minimum 20 m line (for 2/3 BR Properties)
• Minimum 35 m line (for 4/5 BR Properties)
• Ground or wall mounted
• With tensioning mechanism

Fixed Rotary Type Adjustable (wind-up fixed head hoists)

• Minimum 39m line/4m diameter (for 2/3 BR Property with ground level
Private open space
• Minimum 48m line /5m diameter(for 4/5 BR Property with ground level
Private open space

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty - frame

Minimum 1 year written warranty - line and components

Component Requirements March 2018 10

1.2 Carpentry

1.2.1 Built in Wardrobes

Component BUILT IN WARDROBES
Sub-component
Need To provide adequate storage for tenants’ clothes
Requirement General

To current Australian Standards for HMR, MDF, Laminate, Melamine and

Painted finishes

Doors

• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard or

moisture resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF); laminated (both
sides) with high pressure decorative laminate having medium
resistance to surface wear, impact and scratching or vinyl film applied
OR
• Painted 35mm flush, hollow or cell cored door
• 2 mm PVC plastic edge strip to HMR and MDF laminated doors
• Aluminium stiles acting as pull grips for sliding doors

Carcass

• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard with

white melamine finish to all internal surfaces, including edge of frame,
carcass and shelves
• Concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170° swing or sliding doors
• Hanging/shelf unit to be removable/lowerable
• Install to manufacturers written specification
• All assemblies to carry a compliance label to current Australian
Standards

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 11

1.2.2 Cupboards Kitchen
Component CUPBOARDS
Sub-component Kitchen
Need To provide durable, waterproof, hygienic and cleanable storage
and food preparation areas
Requirement General

To current Australian Standards for kitchen assemblies, HMR, MDF,

Laminate and Melamine finishes

Benchtops

• Minimum 32 mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard,

laminated with high pressure decorative laminate having
characteristics of high resistance to surface wear
• High resistance to impact and high resistance to scratching

Doors and drawer fronts

• Minimum 6mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard or

high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF), laminated
with high pressure decorative laminate having medium resistance to
surface wear, medium resistance to impact and medium resistance to
scratching
• 2 mm PVC plastic edge strip to all doors and drawers
• Use concealed side wall-mounted hinges with 170° swing on all doors

Drawers

• 13mm thick (bottom 16mm) of either high moisture resistant (HMR)

particleboard or high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard
(MDF), finished with white melamine
• Completely integrated drawer slide system comprising a high quality
epoxy coated white steel self closing feature runner, 30kg load
capacity

Carcass

• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard with

white melamine finish to all internal surfaces, including edge of frame,
carcass and shelves

Kickboard

• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard,

with 2 mm black vinyl or high pressure high resistance laminate finish,
including any edges
• Install to manufacturers written specification
• Kitchen assemblies to carry a compliance label to current Australian
Standards

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 12

1.2.3 Bathroom Cabinet
Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Sub-component Bathroom Cabinets
Need For storage of personal items used only in the bathroom and to
allow personal grooming
Requirement General (All types)
• To current Australian Standards
• Surface mounted or recessed
• Cabinet fabricated in 1 mm zinc coated steel (white Acrylic baked
Solvent-borne finish) or 16 mm HMR high pressure decorative
laminated board or heavy duty plastic (Plastic cabinet body minimal
thickness of 5mm)
• Adjustable shelving
• Silver float mirror glass to current Australian Standards

Single Door Cabinet

• Minimum 375 mm high x 405 mm wide x 115 mm deep

• 3 mm mirror fixed to self closing hinged door or sliding door
• Minimum 1 shelf

Double Door Cabinet

• Minimum 415 mm high x 700 mm wide x 130 mm deep

• 2 x 4 mm sliding mirror doors with finger slots set in recessed safety
tracks (extruded PVC or aluminium tracks fitted to HMR laminated
board) or 2 x 3 mm mirrors fixed to self closing hinged doors
• Minimum 2 shelves

Disability Modification - Single door cabinet and mirror (fixed to wall)

• Cabinet 975mm high x 300 mm wide x 200 mm deep, with minimum 3

shelves (beside mirror)
• Mirror 975 mm high x 500 mm wide (above basin)

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 13

1.2.4 Bathroom Vanity
Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Sub-component Bathroom Vanity
Need For storage of personal items used only in the bathroom
Requirement To current Australian Standards
Vanity tops
• Minimum 32 mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
MDF/particleboard, laminated with high pressure decorative laminate
having characteristics of high resistance to surface wear, impact and
scratching with Vitreous China Bowl (refer Basin)
OR
• Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded

Doors front

• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR) particleboard or

high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard (MDF), laminated
with high pressure decorative laminate having medium resistance to
surface wear, medium resistance to impact and medium resistance to
scratching
• 2mm PVC plastic edge strip to laminated doors
OR
• Polyurethane finish

Carcass

• Minimum 750w x 450d with drawers, floor mounted on 150h tubular

legs or with kickboard if floor not tiled underneath vanity
• Minimum 16mm thick high moisture resistant (HMR)
MDF/particleboard with white melamine finish to all internal surfaces,
including edge of frame, carcass and shelves

Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 14

1.3 Doors and Windows

1.3.1 Screen Doors

Component SCREEN DOORS
Sub-component Heavy Duty Front and Rear
Need To provide a physical barrier that allows air and vision through the screen
Requirement Aluminium Door Framing
• Installation to current Australian Standards
• Minimum 69mm x 18mm x 1.2mm wall thickness extruded aluminium
frame with 10mm wide x 13.5mm deep insert frame for grille
• Extruded PVC insert to bed heavy duty grille
• Joints to be mitred, staked and riveted
• Reinforcing corner stakes fixed to frames with SS 4mm diameter x
9.5mm rivets (minimum 4 per corner)
• Door to be permanently branded on top rail with name of manufacturer
• Tested to AS5039 for Dynamic Impact, Jemmy, Pull, Probe and Shear

Aluminium Heavy Duty Grille

• To current Australian Standards for Type 1 doors

• Minimum 7.0mm sectional thickness
• Grille secured to door by pop rivets (Adequate Pop Rivets to satisfy
AS5039 tests)

Aluminium Door Framing & Heavy Duty Grille Finish

• Clear anodised to current Australian Standards (20 microns thick for

all regions)
OR
• Thermoset powder coatings to current Australian Standards (50
microns thick for standard conditions/ 80 microns thick for severe
coastal or industrial regions)

Screen Mesh

• Powder coated Aluminium woven mesh (standard conditions)

• Powder coated Stainless Steel (316 marine grade) woven mesh for
coastal and bushfire areas
• Mosquito proof mesh - with average aperture 1.5mm x 1.5mm
• Wire diameter - minimum 0.23 woven Aluminium and minimum
0.18mm woven stainless steel
• Secured to door to prevent easy removal

Hardware

• Three 75 x 30 mm hinges to current Australian Standards fixed with

pop rivets
• Locks, refer DOORWAYS “locks & latches” (Non fire-rated heavy duty
screen door)
• Fully adjustable dampened type door closer

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 15

1.3.2 Doorways External
Component DOORWAYS
Sub-component External
Need To provide a secure mechanism for controlling access through a doorway
that separates the private Property from public and common area
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards & NCC
• Do not use imported rainforest timber veneers
• A non standard door size is a door size over 2400mm x 900mm

Fire Resistant door sets and door frames

• To current Australian Standards – AS 1905.1

• -/60/30 FRL rated flush type door (Type D bonded plywood/ hardwood
face)
• Closer with appropriate FRL

Entry doors

• 40mm thick flush type solid core particleboard or blockboard cored

door (type B bonded ply-wood/-hardboard face)
• Door closer where nominated

Timber door frame and jamb lining (for Maintenance only)

• To current Australian Standards

Steel door frames

• Minimum 18 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel doorframe with

internal architrave

Security Viewer

• Fire rated security viewer

• Viewing greater than 160º

Stormproof Door Seal or Smoke Seal

• Storm seal screw fixed to base of door leaf

• Smoke seals fixed to door frame or base of door leaf as appropriate
• Seals to be independently tested with proprietary fire doors and solid
core doors
• Tested in accordance with AS1530.7 and capable of limiting smoke to
200º Celsius for 30 minutes
• Independently tested to demonstrate that the product does not suffer
from significant wear and tear for up to and exceeding 10,000 open
and close cycles

Minimum 5 year written warranty - door

Warranty
Minimum 2 year written warranty - stormproof door seal

Component Requirements March 2018 16

1.3.3 Doorways Internal
Component DOORWAYS
Sub-component Internal
Need To provide a reliable mechanism for closing off rooms
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Do not use imported rainforest timber veneers
• A non standard door size is a door size over 2400mm x 900mm

Internal doors

• 35mm thick flush lightweight Solid block-board pine core door, solid
particle-board, MDF core to current Australian Standards
• Type B bonded plywood/hardboard face

Timber door frame and jamb lining

• To current Australian Standards

Steel door frames

• Minimum 18 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel doorframe with

internal architrave

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 17

1.3.4 Door Locks and Latches
Component DOORWAYS
Sub-component Door Locks and Latches
Need To provide a reliable, useable and secure device for locking doors
Requirement General

• To current Australian Standards

• Quality management to current Australian Standards
• For fire resistant door sets doors, lock sets must form part of an
approved tested door set assembly
• Door locks to be a minimum 5 pin cylinder
• Door lock finish: satin chrome/chrome plated/stainless steel
• Keyed alike
• Locks and Latches to suit semi-commercial applications (Residential
care facilities etc)
• To all aluminium sliding doors supply and insert aluminium blocks into
the upper track of door in closed position leaving clearance for door to
slide

Front and rear entry doors Cottages, villas & townhouses, units:

• Double cylinder automatic dead-latch, and a lever Latch set, plus with
colour coded lock alert
• Keyless opening from inside unless intentionally dead locked
• Automatic release of dead latch when opened with a key from outside

Units/apartments (additional)

• Door closer (rack and pinion type)

• Door closer achieve a -/60/30 FRL when installed on a door set

Liveable Housing feature (additional)

• Door closer (minimum moment type) (cam operated)

• Door closer achieve a -/60/30 FRL when installed on a door set

Heavy duty screen doors

• Short backset mortice deadlock and lever

Common area entrance doors & community rooms

• Exterior escape dead latch (keyed lever latch from outside with quick
release from the inside)
• Door closer (cam operated)
• Panic release fitted to all external exit fire doors only

Balcony/porch doors swing and sliding

• Keyed double deadlocks

Internal doors
• Lever passage latch set
• Privacy latch set to bathroom/WC Lever set

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 18

Component DOORWAYS

Continues

Common Storeroom & toilets

• Nightlatch and ‘D’ handle (Key to master key system)

Electric meter cupboard

• Nightlatch (fire rated) and ‘D’ handle (Key to master key system)

Electric meter cabinet

• Padlock (Key to master key system)

Minimum 5 year written warranty - paint & tarnish

Warranty
Minimum 10 year written warranty - mechanical parts

1.3.5 Windows and Sliding Doors

Component WINDOWS
Sub-component Windows and Sliding Doors
Need To provide natural light and controllable ventilation and to protect
against the elements
Requirement • Window and Door Locks refer to Locks and Latches
• Window & Door assemblies manufactured to comply with current
Australian Standards and to carry testing authorities endorsement
mark
• All window types & sliding doors tested to AS 2047 for deflection
(positive/negative), air infiltration, water penetration, operating force
and proof tests by NATA approved laboratory
• Window tests to qualify minimum 700 Pa
• Achieve required WERS star rating for aggregate solar heat gain for
building type and climate
• Each window/door branded in an upper channel/stile with a
permanent label indicating NATA Testing Certification, structural and
water performance and manufacturers name eg. AWA labelling
scheme
• Installed to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers written
specification
• Doors toughened/laminated glass to current Australian Standards
• Glass type and thickness to current Australian Standards except
lower edge of all glass in windows within 500mm from floor to be only
‘A’ safety grade laminated or toughened glass in accordance with
current Australian Standards
• Issue window shop drawings with NATA testing authorities
endorsement mark to the Principal if manufacturers do not qualify for
AWA labelling scheme

Acid etch anodising

• Minimum 20 micron anodised film, 25 micron for coastal areas

• Semi-commercial frame minimum overall frame width of 70mm

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 19

Component WINDOWS

Continues

Flyscreen Mesh

• All Flyscreen Mesh to include safety warning message stating that the
“Screen will not stop children falling out window”
• Powder Coated Stainless Steel (316 marine Grade woven mesh for
coastal and bushfire areas minimum wire diameter 0.18 woven
stainless steel)
• Powder coated Aluminium woven mesh for all other areas (minimum
wire diameter - minimum 0.23mm woven Aluminium )
• Mosquito proof with average aperture of 1.5mm x 1.5mm Flyscreens
with Aluminium Grille (only when Directed)

Heavy Duty Grilles (only when directed)

• Ground Floor and all accessible windows to include Aluminium Heavy

Duty grille (minimum 7.0mm sectional thickness) pop riveted into
screen frame with quick release (install to AS5039)
• Complies AS5039 for Type 1 Class B Screens

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

1.3.6 Window Locks

Component WINDOWS
Sub-component Window Locks
Need To provide a means of securing the Property from unauthorised
entry through a window
Requirement Note - All openable windows must be capable of being locked in a
partial open (safe ventilation) and closed position

General

• To current Australian Standards

• Fit keyed window locks to all openable windows
• All windows must be capable of being locked in a closed position, and
provide safe ventilating locking points 50mm and100mm from closed
position
• Do NOT install window locks on a consecutive code number basis but
for security purposes are to be installed on a random basis, with
minimum allowance for repetition of coding 1 per 100 Properties
• Locks to be minimum 4 disc cylinder type - all window locks keyed
alike for new construction
• Fixings appropriate to window and door frame
• Comply with AS5203 Fall Prevention Test

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 20

Component WINDOWS

Continues

Window Restrictors (Only where specified)

• Window opening restrictor (capable of connection to all opening

types) opening at 100mm and also completely opened when restrictor
is released
• Fixings appropriate to window and door frame
• If restrictor involves steel rope or steel chain must have a minimum
breaking strength of 3 KN
• Approved Child proof locking device or 4 disc cylinder key lockable
restrictor - all window locks keyed alike for new construction
• Comply with AS5203 Fall Prevention Test

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

1.3.7 Window Awnings

Component WINDOWS
Sub-component Awnings
Need To protect windows and door openings from sun and rain
Requirement General
• Able to be fixed securely to wall
• Provides effective shading
• Sheds water away from window/door
• Made of non combustible material
• Achieve required window star rating for aggregate solar heat gain

Radiant Heat Attenuating Screens

• Manufactured from stainless steel mesh

• Wire diameter for screen not less than 0.8mm
• Weave characteristic
• Achieves and certified to AS1530.4 Fire Attenuation Test

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 21

1.3.8 Garage Doors
Component GARAGE
Sub-component Garage Doors
Need To provide a reliable and easily operated means of securing a
garage
Requirement Roller Doors (Domestic) Single and Double Doors
• Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading
• Tested to qualify to minimum 1500 cycles of operation per year (where
one cycle = closed to open to closed position)
• Withstand minimum dynamic pressure of 550N/m2 applied externally/
internally normal to door
• Rolled-T/box section/single or double angled bottom rail, steel or
aluminium channel guides, interlocking slatted curtain
• Counterbalance roller deflection not to exceed 0.3% of span
• Galvanised prime painted/polyurethane/Colorbond finish to all metal
components
• Branded with manufacturers name
• Key lockable central door handle

Panel Lift Door (Domestic) Single Doors only up to 2400mm

Wide

• Design to current Australian Standards for wind loading

• Tested to qualify to minimum 1500 cycles of operation per year (where
one cycle = closed to open to closed position)
• Withstand minimum dynamic pressure of 550N/m2 applied externally/
internally normal to door
• Galvanised/prime painted/polyurethane/Colorbond finish to all metal
components
• Branded with manufacturers name and Installation to manufacturers
specification
• Key lockable central door handle

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 22

1.3.9 Master Lock and Key Schedule
Component MASTER KEY SYSTEM
Sub-component Specialist key systems to secure areas
Need Secure access to parts of selected buildings to authorised personnel only
Requirement • Contractors keying system operates mostly in Newcastle, Greater
Sydney and Wollongong Metropolitan areas
• Properties within Buildings are not to be master keyed
• The system is to simplify the number of keys a Contractor has to carry
to access buildings and restricted areas within buildings
• Master Lock and Key Schedule to be designed and installed to meet
high level of security to protect assets, work-sites, and restrict access
only to authorised personnel
• Key system to cover the following areas (Front/Rear and garage
access (override), Building service riser access, Laundry and garbage
room access (plus Tenant access key for these areas), Under stair
access, Manhole, Roof access, Plant room access, Lift maintenance
room access, Electrical – meter boards and service risers, Service
risers general, Access control, CCTV rooms, Void areas, MATV
panels. Garage door controls, Intercom panels, Security Guard log
boxes, Trade toilet – cleaners store and any other areas requiring
security
• Capacity to expand system into electronic keying
• Copy protection – Anti-duplication restricted keying
• Integrated minimum 6 pin cylinder
• Modular or universal steel cylinder cores
• Bump, Pick penetration and Drill protected cores (where required)
• Cylinders and Housings – Satin Chrome plate
• To current Australian and International Standards

Warranty Minimum 2 years manufacturers written warranty

Keying system protected for life of system

Component Requirements March 2018 23

1.4 Roofing

1.4.1 Roof and Eave Ventilation

Component ROOF
Sub-component Roof and Eave Ventilation
Need To prevent the build up of condensation and moisture within the
roof space and to promote air circulation within the roof space
Requirement Note – Installation of roof and eave vents must not compromise the
fire safety of the building

Under Eave Vents

• Curved air inlet holes to restrict insect entry
• White Polypropylene or equivalent durable plastic
• Minimum size 400 x 200 mm

Roof Ventilators
• Made from Steel, Aluminium or heavy duty high strength Polymer
• Lubricated steel bearings
• Reinforced hail resistant dome
• Withstand wind velocities in excess of 200 km/hr
• Withstand rain penetration
• Pre-Painted to match roof colour or clear plastic dome
• Fixed using corrosion resistant self drilling screws or fasteners
(appropriate to environment) and finished to match roofing materials
• Flashed and fitted correctly above and through the roof with two part
flashings compatible with roof material

Minimum 1 year written warranty - Under Eave Vents

Warranty
Minimum 15 year written warranty - Roof ventilators including bearings

1.4.2 Gutters, Downpipes and Fascias

Component ROOF
Sub-component Gutters, Downpipes and Fascias
Need To effectively shed water from the Property
Requirement • Designed and installed to meet plumbing code
• Gutters are required to comply with requirement relating to overflow
• Gutter – 115mm quad or 135mm half round
• Fascia system – 185mm compatible with gutter
• Downpipes minimum 100mm x 50mm or 75mm round
• Gutter / Fascia / Downpipe material – Zincalume or equivalent 0.5mm
BMT (G300) or 0.42mm BMT (G550) gauge factory pre painted.
• Brackets – concealed type at 900mm maximum spacing fixed using
galvanised helical nails or proprietary clips and fixings
• Installation to current Australian Standard and manufacturers
specification
Warranty Minimum 20 year written warranty - Gutters, Downpipes and Fascias

Component Requirements March 2018 24

1.4.3 Roof Lights and Skylights
Component ROOF
Sub-component Tubular Roof Lights/Skylights
Need To provide natural light to internal areas without windows
Requirement Skylights Tubular
• To current Australian Standards
• Achieve a test report certifying assembly can withstand wind forces to
AS4055 and resist impact to AS4256
• Roof Flashings an integral part of skylight to AS2904
• Certification of greater than 95% specular reflectance from shaft
• Minimum 250mm internal diameter
• Achieve a WERS rating better than 5 star for heat and cooling transfer
• Diffuser to reduce glare and to throw light over a broad area
• Internal Fire Damper with FRL60/60/60 when directed for buildings in
Bushfire areas or where required to achieve a 60 minimum fire rating

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

1.4.4 Ceiling Insulation

Component ROOF
Sub-component Ceiling Insulation
Need To effectively insulate the Property
Requirement Glass Fibre (batts)
• Made of melted glass spun onto a mat of fine fibres
• Pre-cut to width of ceiling rafters
• Thermal insulation to a Property shall meet BASIX requirements
• To current Australian Standards
• Sound absorption properties - achieve Noise reduction co- efficient of
0.8 or better
• Product to contain at least 70% recycled glass content
• To achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of:
o Ignitability Index 0
o Spread of Flame 0
o Heat Evolved 0
o Smoke Developed 0 – 1
• Rated Non Combustible on AS1530.1
• Indoor Air Quality - formaldehyde release less than 0.01 mg/ m²/24
hours
• Fibreglass batts thermal insulation shall comply with the Building
Regulations and relevant Australian Standards, and shall consist of
not less than 95% the weight glass wool (inorganic oxides or minerals
rock slag or glass) and binders

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 25

Component ROOF

Continues
Glass Fibre (blankets)

• Properties same as for Glass fibre batts above

• Blanket insulation with Sarking only to be installed with metal roofing
and installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specification
(installed between top of the trusses and metal roofing or between
raked cathedral ceiling and roofing
• Glass fibre blankets shall not be installed on top of the flat ceiling to
cover rafters, joists or services

Rockwool (batts)

• Made from melted volcanic rock and recycled mineral slag spun into a
mat of fine fibres
• Pre-cut to width of ceiling rafters
• To current Australian Standards
• Sound absorption properties achieve a Noise reduction co- efficient of
0.8 or better
• Product to contain at least 20% recycled content (mineral slag)
• To achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of:
o Ignitability Index 0
o Spread of Flame 0
o Heat Evolved 0
o Smoke Developed 0–1
• Rated Non Combustible on AS1530.1
• Low VOC emissions less than 0.01mg/m²/24 hours
• Rockwool batts thermal insulation shall comply with the Building
Regulations and relevant Australian Standards and shall consist of
not less than 95% the weight mineral wool (inorganic oxides or
minerals, rock slag or glass) and binders

Rockwool (blankets)

• Properties same as for Rockwool Batts above

• Rockwool blankets cannot be installed on top of the flat ceiling to
cover rafters, joists or services

Notes

• Insulation shall be installed appropriately to avoid interference with

electrical and other services and appliance and do not compromise
safety
• Install Fire rated covers inside ceiling as required or ensure
appropriate separation
• Bulk insulation that does not achieve a Non Combustible rating as per
AS1530.1 is not approved
• Insulation cannot be installed to cover rafters or other structural
beams in the ceiling

Warranty For the life of the Property

Component Requirements March 2018 26

1.5 Plumbing

1.5.1 Hand Basin

Component BASIN
Sub-component
Need To provide hygienic receptacle for washing hands and face
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
• White (minimum bowl capacity 4 litres) Vitreous China 2/3 hole
version
• Wall mounted on manufacturers metal brackets with ring connector to
waste outlet
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• All basins to be supplied with plug and waste

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

1.5.2 Bath
Component BATH
Sub-component
Need To provide a hygienic tub for washing a person
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Standard Mark (optional) /Watermark/ Water Authority certificate of
approval
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/Trademark (visible in the
installed position)
• Rectangular - minimum 1500x 715mm wide x 380mm deep
• Minimum 10mm high tiling bead to all baths built into adjacent walls
• Fitted with plug & waste
• Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from minimum 3.5mm
thick sheet, glass reinforced with 10mm diameter steel rod rim
reinforcement
OR
• Pressed metal manufactured from minimum 1.6mm thick steel drawn
seamless from one sheet of metal, grip coated all over and finished
internally with white vitreous Solvent-borne (non skid base)

Retrofit Existing - Acrylic (Waterborne) bath linings

• Sanitary grade Acrylic (Waterborne) moulded from minimum 3.5mm

thick sheet reinforced with a fibreglass backing
• Dimensions to fit over existing bath size
• Grate and adaptor to suit existing waste drain
• Fitted with plug and waste

Warranty Minimum 10 years written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 27

1.5.3 Shower Base
Component SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Bases
Need To provide a sound, waterproof base for the shower that integrates
seamlessly with other shower elements
Requirement General

• To current Australian Standards, including installation

• Standard Mark/Water Authority certificate of approval and tested to
current Australian Standard
• 900mm x 900mm x 70mm high hob
• Pressed metal (vitreous Solvent-borne finish) or moulded plastic (non
slip finish)
• Installed to manufacturers specification
• Indelibly marked with manufacturers name/-trademark

Liveable Housing Feature

• Hobless shower with stainless steel shower grate and trough

designed to ensure efficient draining
• Drainer minimum 75mm wide
• Install with minimum 2 degree fall
• Slip rating of minimum R10 and pendulum test score of ‘X’ or ‘P3’

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

1.5.4 Shower Roses

Component SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Roses
Need To provide a spray of water sufficient for washing comfortably
Requirement General
• Water saving ‘3 STAR WELS’ rated not more than 9L/minimum
• Chrome plated satin chrome or powder coated brass arm and shower
rose, with brass ball joint
• Tamper proof shower head

Disability Modification
• Handheld Shower Rose mounted on vertical grab rail
• Minimum 600 mm - 32mm stainless steel grade 304 grab rail
• Adjustable handheld shower rose cradle
• Hygienic seal Flange Covers
• Fixings of Grab rail to support appropriate static load
• Brass wall flange with dual check non return valve
• Shower hose smooth PVC hose with elastic inner strengthened by
woven polyester cords
• Water saving ‘3 STAR WELS rating
Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 28

1.5.5 Shower Seats
Component SHOWER
Sub-component Shower Seat
Need To provide support for less mobile tenants whilst using the shower
Requirement Disability Modification
• To current Australian Standards
• Rounded edged foldable seats (with anti drop tension hinges)
• Self draining and non slip
• Frame grade 304 stainless steel
• Seat high density HDPE (high density polyethylene)
• Ensuring stability up to 160 kg
• Installer to ensure wall construction and fixings support Shower Seat

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

1.5.6 Bathroom
Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Sub-component Bathroom Fittings
Need For easy access and manipulation of towels, toilet paper, soap etc
Requirement Toilet Paper Holder
• Chrome plated brass/polished stainless steel frame, minimum 150mm
x 150mm with aluminium roller

Bath Towel Rail

• 760mm overall length x 16mm-diameter chrome plated brass or

stainless steel tube with stainless steel end brackets, for wall screw
fixing
•
Robe Hooks

• 52mm x 53mm chrome plated brass

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 29

1.5.7 Grab Rails
Component BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Sub-component Grab Rails
Need Reduce risk of falls for our tenants
Requirement Disability Modification
• Only where directed
• To current Australian Standards
• 32mm diameter (or as directed) x 1.2mm thick 304 Stainless Steel or
powder coated aluminium x 450mm minimum overall length, secured
to wall with round head C.P. brass or stainless steel screws, minimum
50mm long
• Hygienic seal Flange Covers
• Fixings of Grab rail to support appropriate static load

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

1.5.8 Toilet
Component TOILET
Sub-component Pan and Cistern
Need To provide hygienic, comfortable toiletry facility
Requirement General

• To current Australian Standards

• Standard Mark/Watermark/Water Authority certificate of approval
• Pedestal pan to be white vitreous china
• Cisterns to be vitreous china or heavy duty grade PVC with internal
overflow
• 4.5/3L dual flush toilet suites (minimum 4 Star WELS rating)
• Toilet and Cisterns to be vandal resistant or fitted with a ‘Vandal
Resistant Conversion kit’
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Existing Housing (Maintenance only)

• Retrofit 6/3 L dual flush cisterns if retaining existing pans (minimum 3

Star WELS rating)
• Retrofit 4.5/3 L dual flush toilet suites where replacing pans (minimum
4 Star WELS rating)

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 30

1.5.9 Toilet Seat
Component TOILET
Sub-component Toilet Seat and Cover
Need Toilet Seat and Covers to supplement the toilet so a reasonable
level of comfort is provided
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Constructed of solid plastic – Vandal Resistant with vandal resistant
fittings
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

1.5.10 Tap Ware

Component TAPS
Sub-component Bathroom and Laundry
Need To easily control water flow reliably for efficient water usage
Requirement Bib tap/Pillar tap/ Hob mounted set
General
• Materials, dimensions, finishes and performance tests to current
Australian Standards
• Water supply metal bodied taps to current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark/ Water Mark/ Certificate of Approval
• Hot and cold water taps to be vandal resistant
• Basin taps 4 Star WELS rating, all other taps 3 star WELS rating
incorporating an in tap flow regulator valve, equivalent to “Aqualoc” or
pressure compensating flow control
• Vandal proof aerator
• Set complete with outlet, shower rose, spout or arm, and handles.
Handles to be easily changed from minimum 65mm lever for separate
hot and cold taps to longer levers
• Capstan or Lever handles length 65mm to 80mm handles
• All components made of brass base material, chrome plated or satin
chrome finishes
• Dezincification resistant

Disability Modification

• Long Lever tap handles lever length 90mm to 150 mm (surgeon type)
as directed
• Quarter turn taps with ceramic discs fitted to baths, shower taps,
basins and laundry tubs

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 31

Component TAPS
Sub-component Kitchen
Need To easily control water flow reliably for efficient water usage
Requirement Bib tap/Pillar tap/ Hob mounted sink set/Wall sink set
General
• Materials, dimensions, finishes and performance tests to current
Australian Standards
• Water supply metal bodied taps to current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark/ Water Mark/ Certificate of Approval
• Hot and cold quarter turn taps to be vandal resistant
• 4 Star WELS rating incorporating an in tap flow regulator valve
equivalent to “Aqualoc” or pressure compensating flow control
• Vandal proof aerator
• Set complete with outlet, spout or arm, and handles. Handles to be
easily changed from minimum 65mm lever for separate hot and cold
taps to longer levers
• Capstan or Lever handles lever length 65mm to 80mm handles
• All components made of brass base material, chrome plated or satin
chrome finishes
• Dezincification resistant

Disability Modification

• Long Lever tap handles lever length 90mm to 150 mm (surgeon type)
as directed
• Quarter turn taps with ceramic disc fitted to kitchen sinks

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 32

1.5.11 Sink Unit
Component SINK UNIT
Sub-component Kitchen Sink
Need To provide for washing rinsing and draining of food, and utensils
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark/Water Mark/certificate of approval
• All kitchen sinks to be supplied with plug and waste
• Minimum 302 polish finished stainless steel only
• Indelibly marked with manufacturers trade-mark
• Sinks to suit 3 tap set configurations (hot tap, cold tap and spout)

Disability Modification

Bowl depth and dimensions as directed

Studio
• Single Bowl sink with single drainer. Minimum 880mm length and
minimum 13.5L bowl
• Sink to suit bench top width – minimum of 450mm

1 to 2 Bedroom Properties

• One and a half bowl sink with single drainer, minimum length
1050mm, width to suit bench top width - minimum of 450mm
• Main bowl to be minimum 20L

3 or more bedroom

• One and a half bowl sink with double drainers. Minimum 1400mm
long x 450mm wide
• Main bowl to be minimum 20L

Warranty Minimum 25 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 33

1.5.12 Laundry Tub
Component LAUNDRY TUB
Sub-component
Need To wash and soak clothes and bedding
Requirement General

• To current Australian Standards

• Standards Mark/Watermark/Water Authority certificate of approval
• Detachable PVC or polyolefin bypass connected at top to current
Australian Standard

Tub
• Minimum 30 litre capacity (Studio)
• Minimum 45 litre capacity (1 to 2 bedroom)
• Minimum 68 litre capacity (3 to 6 bedroom – (for maintenance only)
• Minimum 302 stainless steel
• Indelibly marked with manufacturers name - trademark
Cabinet
• White enamel/ pre-painted finish to steel cabinet

Minimum 25 year written warranty - stainless steel

Warranty
Minimum 10 year written warranty - the cabinet

1.5.13 Tap/Valve Tempering and Thermostatic Mixing

Component TAP/VALVE
Sub-component Tempering Valves/Thermostatic Mixing Valve
Need To ensure hot water does not scald tenants
Requirement • Tempering Valves set to Plumbing Code standards to all NCC Class
1, 2 and 3 properties
• Thermostatic Mixing Valve only in NCC Class 9 Properties
• To current Australian Standards
• Standard Mark/Water Mark/Sydney Water certificate of approval
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 34

1.5.14 Plumbing System – Potable Water
Component PLUMBING SYSTEM
Sub-component Potable Water
Need To provide safe, clean and healthy drinking water to homes
Requirement Prior written approval of the Principal is required to use alternate
piping material in new construction and in maintenance work unless
replacing like with like

Alternate piping shall meet the following requirements

• To current Australian Standards
• Water Mark certificate of approval
• Recyclable at end of life
• Satisfies tests for contaminants to comply with AS4020 including:
• VOC’s (Volatile Organic Compounds)
• Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds
• Regulated heavy metals (Cadmium, lead, arsenic, barium, beryllium,
chromium, mercury, selenium, thallium etc
• Any other contaminant lifecycle tests
• Able to be joined using standard (non-exclusive) connectors which
can withstand required pressure levels
• Heat Resistance able to withstand temperatures up to 85 degree
Celsius without failure
• Potable water delivered through the system contains no tainting
affecting taste or odour after accelerated tests representing 20 years
use – AS/NZS 4020:2005 and AS 2492

Warranty Minimum 25 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 35

1.5.15 Rainwater Tank
Component WATER SUPPLY
Sub-component Rainwater Tank
Need
Requirement All Rainwater Tanks above and below Ground
• To current Australian Standards
• All downpipes connected to the rainwater tank must have a screened
downpipe rain head
• First Flush devices installed to suit system (above or below ground)
• Vermin and insect screens provided on all inlets and outlets
Aluminium mesh mosquito screen
• All rainwater and stormwater pipes installed to eliminate ponding and
stagnation of water
• In accordance with the Rainwater Tank Design and Installation
Handbook HB 230-2008 published by Standards Australia
• All pumps, electrical, and plumbing must be located either adjacent to
a building or positioned as not to cause trip hazards. Located in a
vandal resistant enclosure
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Above Ground Rainwater tanks

• Slimline rain water tanks

• Walls minimum G300S, Z450 0.6mm BMT steel
• Interior surface factory pre-painted with a food grade approved
polymer (200 um thick) to AS2070
• External walls galvanised or factory pre painted
• Steel base minimum G300S, Z450 0.6mm BMT, with a food grade
approved polymer 200um thick film to inner and outer surfaces
• Installed with first flush device, strainer, overflow and hose tap
• Tank stands certified by structural engineer

Below Ground Rainwater tanks

• All below ground tanks installation must have engineering certification

for design loadings and hydro-static lift
• Below ground tanks cannot be installed underneath or as part of a
Properties foundation. Preferred location underneath driveway or lawn
• Manufactured using concrete or food grade polymers, and
independently certified not to leach chemicals into the water
• Monolithically poured or single seam free tanks with no joins of
leakage points, reinforced, self supporting and engineered
• Inlet covers/lids to eliminate sunlight/algae/mosquitos and marked
Rainwater

Minimum 20 year written warranty Above Ground

Warranty
Minimum 15 year written warranty Below Ground

Component Requirements March 2018 36

1.5.16 Water Heater
Component WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Solar Water Heaters
Need To reliably provide hot water
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Water Mark/Authority Certificate of Approval including all valves
• Installation to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers
written specification
• High energy efficiency – Eligible for Small Scale Technology
Certificates
• Suitable for all NSW climate zones, except Alpine Region
• All Units, Valves and Piping to be frost protected to climate zone
• Hard water or mineralised water areas to be glycol based using a heat
exchanger (primarily NCC Climate zone 4)
• Natural gas or electricity boosted
• Solar Panels (hail resistant) appropriate to zone area and size of tank
• Solar Panels to be aligned between north east to north west
• Tank on ground preferred, unless ground space is limited then close
coupled thermo siphon systems are allowed

Gas Boost

• Minimum 170L with 5 star Gas Boost (all bedroom categories)

Electric Boost

• Minimum 160L for (1 Bed) – close coupled for new construction

• Minimum 250L for (2 Bed)
• Minimum 300L for (3 to 4 Bed)
• Minimum 400L with 3 panels for households with 5 or more residents
• Electric Boost solar capable of off peak electricity supply operation
• Capable of recovery of more than 50% of the tank capacity through
boost

Minimum 10 year written warranty - cylinder panels and heat

Warranty
exchanger

Component Requirements March 2018 37

Component WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Gas Water Heaters
Need To reliably provide hot water
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark/Water Mark/Water Authority Certificate of Approval
• AGA approval
• Minimum 5 star energy rating
• All Units, Valves and Piping to be frost protected

Storage

• Mains pressure: Floor Model (outdoor only)

• 1 bedroom minimum 90L
• 2 bedroom minimum 110L
• 3 bedroom and over, minimum 135L

Instantaneous (External installation only)

• Factory Pre-Set not to exceed 50ºC in accordance with AS3498. No

further mechanical tempering device required
• Electronic ignition
• Frost protected
• Single or dual heat exchanger

1 bathroom Properties

• NCC Climate zone 6 to 8 – 16L to 26L

• NCC Climate zone 2 to 5 – 16L to 20L

2 bathroom Properties

• NCC Climate zone 6 to 8 – 26L to 32L

• NCC Climate zone 2 to 5 – 20L to 26L

Storage
Minimum 1 year written warranty - parts/labour
Minimum 10 year written warranty – cylinder
Warranty
Instantaneous
Minimum 3 year written warranty - parts and labour
Minimum 10 year written warranty - heat exchanger

Component Requirements March 2018 38

Component WATER HEATERS
Sub-component Electric Water Heaters
Need To reliably provide hot water
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark/Water Mark/ Water Authority Certificate of Approval
• Off-peak mains pressure storage
• All Units, Valves and piping must be frost protected

Storage

• 50 and 80 ltr capacity (for maintenance only)

• Mains pressure Floor Model (indoor/outdoor
• (1 bedroom - pensioner - 125L)
• (2 bedrooms - 250L)
• (3 bedrooms and over - 315L )

Instantaneous

• Electrical cut-off Manufactured with inbuilt Pressure/Temperature

relief valve
• Minimum. 4.5 L/ minute

Storage
Minimum 1 year written warranty - parts/labour
Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty – cylinder

Instantaneous
Minimum 3 year written warranty - parts/labour

Component Requirements March 2018 39

1.6 Electrical and Gas

1.6.1 Intercom and Access Control

Component ACCESS CONTROL
Sub-component Intercom and Door Control
Need To provide a reliable, useable and secure device for controlling
access to buildings
Requirement • Vandal Resistant Intercoms
• Displays self explanatory user information
• Minimum 2mm Stainless Steel front with toughened minimum 4mm
Polycarbonate Surround
• Impact resistant and fixed with anti-vandal fixings
• Front plate to allow a minimum of six buttons with audio, expandable
modular units for additional features
• Optional space for shatterproof camera shielded by minimum 4mm
clear polycarbonate
• Stainless steel buttons, tamperproof and shaped to prevent foreign
bodies being inserted underneath
• Linked to door release switch in units and internal intercom Door
Release System
• Steel reinforced recessed entry panel with buttons flush to outer
surface and anti-removal device. Must operate independently and not
be reliant on other communication services
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 40

1.6.2 Light Points
Component LIGHT POINTS
Sub-component Interior Common Area Lights
Need To illuminate common areas adequately for undertaking normal
domestic activities and security, including internal fire stairs,
stairwells, lift lobbies, corridors, car parks etc.
Includes external areas with roofs/ceilings <3m, such as
undercover walkways, car parks, stair wells etc
Requirement • To provide Common Area lighting to all common areas egresses and
access ways within residential complexes (entranceways, stairways,
corridors, common rooms, plant rooms etc)
• To current Australian Standards and relevant access standards
• To current NCC including independent Certification of compliance to
NCC
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Luminaires must be U.V. stabilised and IP65 rated with die cast
Aluminium (minimum 20 to 25 Micron Powder coating) or ≥ 3mm
polycarbonate housing
• Product must have a recognised Australian Certificate of Approval
under the Electricity Consumer Safety Act 2004
• All fixtures and components to be vandal proof, hose proof and impact
resistant. Security/specialty screws required for all fixings
• Energy efficient lamps to be used
• Colour temperature: 4000 - 5000K
• Colour rendering index: 80+
• Power Factor ≥0.9+
• Light sources / lamp preference based on luminous efficacy i.e.
highest lumens per watt to be given preference. Luminous efficiency
of light source / lamp must be ≥ 70 Lumens / Watt
• Rated lamp life ≥ 20,000 hours
• Luminaire light Output Ratio (LOR) ≥ 0.7, evidenced by NATA
accredited lab reports
• Lumen output of light source / lamps ≥ 70% of original output at end
of the rated lifetime, evidenced by NATA accredited lab reports
• Luminaires with no hanging points as directed by the Principal to meet
building criteria
• Luminaires must be securely fixed to the surface - no hanging fittings

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 41

 Continues

LED Lamps/Luminaires

• All luminaires must be vandal-resistant LED luminaires with

occupancy sensors that maintain a low level of lighting when areas
are unoccupied
• All luminaire models must have previously been used by an
Accredited Certificate Provider to successfully create Energy Savings
Certificates under the NSW Energy Savings Scheme
• All components of the light fitting including lamps, batteries, covers
etc. must be able to be purchased and replaced individually
• LED rated lamp life ≥50,000 hours
• LED luminous efficacy ≥70 Lumens/Watt at full light output
• LED colour temperature 4000-5000K
• LED colour rendering index ≥80+
• Luminaire power factor ≥0.9+
• Lumen output of LED lamps ≥70% of original output at end of the
rated lamp life
• Luminaire Light Output Ratio (LOR) ≥0.7
• All exposed equipment (luminaires, motion sensors, photocells,
diffusers etc.) must be vandal resistant, IP65 rated, with ≥3mm thick
impact-resistant polycarbonate covers or equivalent
• All motion sensors or other parts are to be securely contained within
the luminaire, or fixed to the ceiling or luminaire using vandal resistant
security/specialty screws and contained within IP65 rated ≥3mm thick
impact-resistant polycarbonate covers or equivalent
• No equipment is to have leverage or hanging points
• Security/specialty screws are required for all fixings
• Luminaires must be fixed to ceilings using a drilling method – no
adhesive methods will be accepted
• Emergency luminaires must be self-contained with a self static
inverter. System including battery and battery charger to be non-
corrosive
• Emergency luminaire battery to be heavy duty long life type and
duration of emergency power ≥90 minutes
• Any battery compartments must be either inaccessible or accessible
only via vandal resistant security/specialty screws

Minimum 2 year written warranty

Warranty
Minimum 3 year written warranty - all LED components

Component Requirements March 2018 42

Component LIGHT POINTS
Sub-component Exterior Light Fittings
Need To illuminate an area for safe pedestrian movement.
For external areas with roofs/ceilings <3.5m, such as undercover
walkways, car parks, stair wells etc, component requirements for Interior
Common Area Lights apply for LED lamps/luminaires
Requirement • Modular carriage tray with electronic starter
• Weather proof IP65 rated
• Lights to reduce light spill and sited to illuminate pedestrian and mixed
traffic areas in common areas, forecourts of cluster housing to
improve safety and reduce shadow and potential hiding locations
• Meet current Australian Standard 1158 Table 2.1 with selection
criteria critically evaluating ‘risk of crime’
• Performance to type 3 or 4 Luminaire classification to AS1158.3
• Lights mounted high on posts or buildings and sited not to spill into
windows or neighbouring buildings. Bollard lighting is not approved
• Meet current Australian Standard 1158 and achieve a ‘P1’ for High
levels of vandalism or ‘P2’ for Medium levels of vandalism in
accordance with AS1158.3

All External lighting

• Vandal proof moulded base

• Impact resistant moulded housing
• Vandal proof opalescent cover - U.V. stabilised diffuser
• Replaceable carriage tray with electronic starter
• No hanging point as directed by the Principal Light to be securely
fixed with all cables secure and vandal resistant to prevent access
• Energy efficient Tri-phosphor globes and tubes
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Performance to Type 3 or 4 Luminaire classification in accordance
with AS1158.3

Building and Car-Park Lighting

• Housing casing glass reinforced polyester or Nylon moulded plastic

• Vandal resistant moulded Polycarbonate diffuser
• Vandal resistant stainless steel clips
• Where possible all lights are to be fixed to buildings or other
structures at a preferred height of 2m to 3.4m Pole Top Lighting
• All Pole top lighting to be 2m to 3.4m around pedestrian paths
• All Pole top lighting to be 3.4 to 4.5m around roadways
• Poles to suite 76 diameter or 100 diameter spigots
• Poles minimum 3.6mm thick x 75mm diameter minimum. 60 micron
hot dipped galvanised M.S. post

Notes

• Bollard and up-lighting types are NOT approved for new installations
• Design of lighting to comply with AS 4282 Control of the Obtrusive
Effects of Outdoor Lighting
Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 43

1.6.3 Smoke Alarms
Component SMOKE ALARMS
Sub-component
Need To provide early warning of fire to occupants
Requirement All Properties
• To current Australian Standards
• Product listed in CSIRO’s Activfire Register of Fire Protection
Equipment
• Ionisation or photo-electric model or Heat Technology
• Test button
• Alarm pause (‘hush’) button to silence alarm (ionisation model)
• Mains operated (hard-wired) 240 volt unit with fixed rechargeable
(Lithium) battery backup (10 years battery life expectancy) – with
minimum 2 months battery standby
• Inter-linkable features
• Low power warning
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Branded with manufacturers trademark to AS 3786
• Energy Efficient smoke alarm
• Interlink with Isolators / hush button
• Interlink with Strobe lights for hearing impaired

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty including rechargeable battery

1.6.4 Stove
Component STOVE
Sub-component
Need To cook food safely and effectively, allowing frying, grilling and
baking
Requirement Note: In all new construction, separate wall or under bench oven
and cooktop only.

Upright - (for maintenance only)

• To current Australian Standards
• Oven gross capacity minimum 75 litre
• Combined or separate griller and oven compartments
• Fan Forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to
touch window
• 4 hot plates or 4 burners :
For Electric solid elements or ceramic glass cooktop tested to
IEC60335
For Gas - Electric or battery ignition, push to turn safety control, flame
failure cut off for emergency
• Front control or side control buttons only
• Splashback to upright
• AGA approval where appropriate

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 44

Component STOVE

Continues

Cook Top - Electric or Gas

• To current Australian Standards
• Square white enamel painted finish or stainless steel or ceramic
glass hob with front or side controls
• 4 hot plates or 4 burners;
For Electric solid elements or ceramic glass cooktop tested to
IEC60335
For Gas - Electric or battery ignition, push to turn safety control,
Flame failure cut off for emergency
• AGA approval where appropriate

Wall Oven - Electric Only

• To current Australian Standards
• Oven gross capacity minimum 80 litre
• Combined or separate griller and oven compartments
• Fan Forced or conventional oven – Removable oven door with cool to
touch window

Liveable Housing feature

• Separate Cooktop and wall oven
• Oven to have Side hinged or Bottom hinged door

Disability Modification
• Cooktop and oven as directed

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 45

1.6.5 Rangehood
Component RANGEHOOD
Sub-component
Need To remove grease from stove gases
Requirement General

• To current Australian Standards/Australian Gas Association/NSW

Office of Energy
• Minimum 50 micron powder coating to galvanised steel casing
• AS marking, brand name, serial no. date code, rated air delivery,
sound power level in dB(A) at rated air delivery and wattage branded
on unit
• Minimum air flow rate 40L/s at maximum sound power level 55dB(A)
to current Australian Standards
• Minimum 2 speed convertible fan & automatic thermostat cut-off
electricity or impedance protected motor (withstand “locked rotor”
conditions for 72 hours without burning out)
• Minimum 55 watt motor
• Minimum 3 blade plastic/metal propeller
• Minimum 10 layer aluminium mesh grease filters
• Wiring encased in plastic conduits, within unit
• Width to match and align with cooktop or stove
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Ducting

• Exhaust to outside
• To be minimum of 0.5mm galvanised steel ducting or ‘Flexi-duct’
similar fire or heat resistant material)

Minimum 2 year written warranty - parts/labour

Warranty
Minimum 2 year written warranty - filters

Component Requirements March 2018 46

1.6.6 Heating
Component HEATING
Sub-component Electric Space/Electric Panel Heaters
Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Only space/panel heaters approved under the Certificate of Approval
Scheme authorised by the appropriate government agency with
authority to test and certify
• Installation in accordance with Australia/New Zealand Wiring Rules
(Australian Standards AS/NZS 3000) and to local supply authority
regulations
• Fixed (including wall mounted or recessed or floor mounted) panel or
fan assisted heaters
• Minimum 2 heat settings, (LO/HI) Thermostat control on high setting
• Minimum 2kW (heat up to 55 m³) to Maximum 7kW (heat up to 160
m³) consumption capacity
• Minimum efficiency of greater than 95%
• Automatic reset thermal cut-out safety feature and fusible link.
Branded with manufacturers name to AS60355, supplier licensed
under Standards Assoc. Certification Trademark
• Child safe to touch cabinet

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component HEATING
Sub-component Gas Space Heaters
Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Natural Gas/Town only
• Wall mounted convection heater, Thermostat heat control automatic
electronic ignition, timer, regulated gas flow and flued combustion
gases
• Child safe to touch cabinet
• Minimum 4.3 efficiency stars and 6.0 emissions star rating
• Double lined flue within ceiling space
• Heaters with flues
• Gas input - minimum size : 5 MJ/hr
• Gas input - maximum size : 23 MJ/hr
• Labelling of appliances, specifying minimum allowable room volume
and capacity of heater in MJ/hr
• Installation to AGA requirements
• AGA certificate of approval

Minimum 10 years written warranty - burner

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty - fan
Minimum 1 year written warranty - other parts

Component Requirements March 2018 47

1.6.7 Dryer
Component DRYERS
Sub-component
Need Dry washing efficiently and effectively
Requirement Common Area Laundries and NCC Class 3 and 9 Properties
• To current Australian Standards
• Minimum 3.5kg or 5kg capacity
• Auto cool down
• 2.5 hour timer – 3 heat settings
• Easy clean filter
• Safety door switch, Safety thermostat reset switch
• 2 directional air outlet and optional venting kit
• Wall mountable
• Minimum 2 star Energy Rating

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

1.6.8 Washing Machine

Component WASHING MACHINE
Sub-component
Need A means of automatically washing a variety of clothes and bedding types
Requirement Common Area Laundries and NCC Class 3 and 9 Properties

• To current Australian Standards

• Standards Mark/ Type Test Mark to NPADPS/ Water Authority
certificate of approval
• Automatic washing machine, with rotary or push button control
• Stainless steel drum

NCC Class 3 and Class 9 (minimum 7 kg load capacity)

• Front loading
• 4 Star WELS rating
• 4 Star Energy rating

Common Area Laundries (minimum 5.5 kg or 6 kg load capacity)

• Top loading
• 4 Star WELS rating
• 3 Star Energy rating

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 48

1.6.9 Reverse Cycle Air Conditioning
Component AIR CONDITIONER
Sub-component Reverse Cycle Split System
Need To provide efficient and effective heating and cooling of a room
Requirement NOTE: Installed only in Western areas of NSW where the average
summer temperature exceeds 33 degrees, or as directed

General
• To current Australian Standards
• Wall or Floor mounted
• Cooling capacity minimum 2.5 kw to maximum ≤ 6 kw
• Energy star rating
o 2.5 kw cooling model- minimum 4 star cooling, minimum 4.5 star
heating
o 3.5 kw cooling model - minimum 2.5 star cooling, minimum 3.5
star heating
o 5.0 kw cooling model - minimum 2 star cooling, minimum 3.5
star heating
o 6.0 kw cooling model - minimum 2 star cooling, minimum 3.0
star heating
• Minimum number of fan speeds 4
• Indoor noise ≤ 50 dBs
• Outdoor noise ≤ 60 dBs
• Single Phase 240 V
• Controller to be hard wired. Remote controls only supplied where
directed

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 49

1.6.10 Solar Photo-Voltaic Panels
Component SOLAR PHOTO -VOLTAIC -
Sub-component Panels and Inverter
Need To provide produce electricity
Requirement Photo Voltaic Panels (all models)
• Listed on Clean Energy Council (CEC) Approved Modules Database –
and to current Australian and International Standards
• Efficiency > 15%
• Mean measured power per panel > 250w, with Performance Ratio of ≥
90% and/or Temperature Coefficient of ≤ 0.5% (Life cycle testing to
show that performance in not significantly diminished over the power
generation life of the panel
• Generate Small Scale Technology Certificates (STC's) and be listed
on the Clean Energy Council list of approved components
• Compliant with IEC 61215, IEC 61730 and UL 70
• Anti-reflective coating
• Frame post cut anodized Aluminium screw or weld fixed (tested to
withstand cyclonic wind)
• Operating temperature from minimum – 25°C to maximum 85°C
• IP67 rated junction box on each panel
• Roof mounted isolators to be side mounted

Solar Inverter (Fixed Voltage Inverter models)

• Listed on Clean Energy Council (CEC) Approved Modules Database –
and to current Australian and International Standards
• Optimal Efficiency > 95% DC/AC Conversion
• Suit outdoor or indoor installation
• Ambient operating temperature range from minimum – 25°C to > 50°C
• Minimum IP65 rating

Minimum 25 year written warranty – power generation

Warranty
Minimum 10 year written warranty - materials

Component Requirements March 2018 50

1.6.11 Ceiling Fan
Component Ceiling Fan -
Sub-component
Need To effectively circulate the air in a room
Requirement Ceiling Fans (all models)
• To current Australian Standards
• Fan with integral light
• Minimum 1200mm diameter
• Minimum 3 speed fan
• Controller to be hard wired. Remote controls only supplied where
directed
• Provide control switching integrated with light switches
• Fan to have reverse function
• Unit suitable to fit LED globes
• Installed to manufacturers specification and details

Warranty Minimum 2 year warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 51

1.7 Wood Space Heater
Component WOOD SPACE HEATER
Sub-component Wood Space Heaters
Need To provide efficient and effective heating of a room
Requirement Note
Not installed in new construction (for maintenance only)
General
• To current Australian Standards
• Test report prepared by registered NATA registered laboratory in
compliance to AS 4013. “Domestic Solid Fuel Burning appliances -
Method for Determination of Flue gas emission”
• Maximum allowable appliance particulate emission factor to AS 4013
(i.e. maximum 5.5g/kg for appliances without catalytic combustors)
• Double skin firebox convection heater
• Double lined flue within ceiling space
• Minimum appliance efficiency rating of 60%
• Minimum size: 10kW (30MJ), Maximum size: 22kW (65MJ)
• Installed by licensed installer to manufacturers written specification
• Branded with manufacturers trademark, type, model and serial
number, and emission report number of appliance and Standards
Mark

Warranty Minimum 5 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 52

1.8 Flooring

1.8.1 Underlay
Component FLOORING
Sub-component Underlay
Need To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, underlay to maximize
economic life from carpet
Requirement General
• To current Australian Standards
• Meets current NCC and AS ISO9239-1
• Recyclable and or made from recycled materials
• Minimum grading “Residential” as per AS 4288

Class 2 Properties

Synthetic foam
• Rebonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top
surface
• 7 mm minimum thickness
• 120 kg/m³ minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam

Vulcanised rubber

• Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern

• Reinforcing fabric: either Hessian, spun Nylon, or Polyester
• Minimum sheet thickness: 7.5mm (+0.5)
• 210kg/m² minimum product mass

Common Areas (class 2 Properties), class 3 Properties

Synthetic foam
• Rebonded polyurethane foam with stabilising laminate on top
surface
• 7 mm minimum thickness
• 120kg/m³ minimum foam density or rebounded polyurethane foam

Vulcanised rubber

• Heavy duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern

• Reinforcing fabric: either Hessian, spun Nylon, or Polyester
• Minimum sheet thickness: 8mm (+0.5)
• 300kg/m² minimum product mass

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 53

1.8.2 Carpet
Component FLOORING
Sub-component Carpet
Need To provide a safe, healthy and comfortable surface for habitable
areas of a Property or common area
Requirement General

• Installation to current Australian Standards

• Fire rating to NCC (for all Building Class Types)
• Treated with Anti-Bacterial and Anti-Microbial

Nylon/Wool Blend

• 100% bulked continuous filament (bcf), solution dyed Nylon or

Nylon/Wool blend (minimum 50% nylon)
• Loop pile tufted carpet
• Level pile surface or with slight modulation
• 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
• Minimum 678 g/m2 (20oz/yd2) total pile mass
• 5mm maximum pile height
• “Actionbac” or Jute backing or minimum 80% recycled stitch bond
non woven polyester
• A.C.C.S. rating for Residential Extra Heavy Duty (Stairs)
• A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at regular intervals
• Colour as approved by Principal
• Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal

Wool Types

• 100% wool carpet or wool blend (minimum 80% wool)

• Loop pile tufted carpet
• Level pile surface or with slight modulation
• 31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8) gauge
• 1356 g/m2 (40oz/yd2) total pile mass
• 6mm maximum pile height
• “Actionbac” or Jute backing or minimum 80% recycled stitch bond
non woven polyester
• ACCS (Australian Carpet Classification Scheme) rating for
Residential Extra Heavy Duty including stairs
• Colour as approved by NSW Land and Housing Corporation
• Carpet range and quality as approved by Principal
• A.C.C.S. Registration number to appear on back at regular intervals

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 54

1.8.3 Resilient Sheet and Tiles
Component FLOORING
Sub-component Resilient Sheet and Tiles
Need To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, waterproof and cleanable
surface
Requirement Note: These provisions apply to complete new installations
Existing spot replacement or repair use Resilient Flooring to match
the existing installed product

• Manufacture, Installation and Maintenance to current Australian

Standards
• Use water based adhesives
• All sheet, flooring seams shall be welded (either chemical or
thermal) to manufacturers specification
• Initial care of all installed materials shall be carried out to
manufacturers specification
• Floor-coverings shall conform to the physical characteristics of
approved samples and shall be within the limits of any sample range
or variation in colour and pattern
• Products containing recycled materials are preferred

Class 1 Properties – Vinyl Composition tiles (ISO10595 Kitchens,

Dining Rooms and Hallways etc)

• (Concrete floors laid on suitable levelling compound; Timber floors

laid on Hardboard, FC sheet underlay or other approved underlay)
• Thickness: 3mm (EN428)
• Wear Resistance: <10mm³ (EN660)
• Minimum 3db sound reduction
• R9 slip resistance
• Fire rating ISO9239.1 >11kW/m²

Class 1 Properties – Homogenous Sheet (ISO10581 Kitchens,

Dining Areas and Hallways etc)

• Thickness: Minimum 2mm – Maximum 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete

floors laid on suitable levelling compound, Timber floors laid on
Hardboard, FC sheet underlay or other approved underlay)
• Polyurethane Reinforced
• Wear Resistance: Group P (EN660-2)
• R9 Slip Resistance
• Minimum 3db sound reduction
• Fire rating ISO9239.1 >9kW/ m²

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 55

Component FLOORING

Continues

Class 1 Properties – Heterogeneous Sheet (ISO10582 Kitchens,

Dining Areas and Hallways etc)

• Thickness: Minimum 2mm – Maximum 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete

floors laid on suitable levelling compound, Timber floors laid on
Hardboard, FC sheet underlay or other approved underlay)
• Polyurethane Reinforced
• Wear Resistance: Group T (EN660-2)
• R9 Slip Resistance
• Minimum 3db sound reduction
• Fire rating ISO9239.1 >9kW/m²

Class 2 and 3 Properties – Cushioned Backed Heterogeneous

sheet (EN651)

• Thickness: Minimum 3mm sheet vinyl (Concrete floors laid on

suitable levelling compound, Timber floors laid on Hardboard, FC
sheet underlay or other approved underlay)
• Polyurethane Reinforced
• R10 slip resistance
• Wear Resistance: Group T (EN660-1)
• Minimum 14db sound reduction
• Easy Clean top layer
• Fire rating ISO9239.1 >8kW/m²

Wet Area (Floors) – Written approval of Principal is required prior

to use

• Homogenous Slip Retardant Vinyl sheet (ISO10581)

• Thickness: Minimum 2mm sheet vinyl (EN428)
• Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
• Fire Rating: (ISO9239.1 > 9kW/m²)
• Slip resistance: AS4586 (B Wet/Barefoot and R10 Oil/wet ramp)
• Integral 150mm high coved skirting in all wet areas, Cove skirting to
be installed with capping strip to prevent water penetration
• 32mm diameter cove fillet to be used where vinyl is coved
• Products containing abrasive material in order to comply will not be
considered
• Gatic Floor drain assembly to be used in all wet areas

Wet Area (Walls) – Written approval of Principle is required prior to

use

• Homogenous Vinyl sheet (ISO10581)

• Thickness: Minimum 1.25mm (EN428)
• Polyurethane Reinforced
• Wear Resistance: Group M (EN660-2)
• Fire Rating (AS3837) Group 2

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 56

1.9 Signage

1.9.1 House and Unit Numbering

Component SIGNAGE
Sub-component Numbering (Street/Unit)
Need To provide legible identification of address
Requirement • External street numerals and building block numerals to be 150mm
minimum high 1.6mm thick plain brass (secured with brass screws)
or polished cast aluminium or self-reflective numerals on pre-
painted steel base (secured with stainless steel screws) fixed to
building/structure
• Unit numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick plain brass
or polished cast aluminium or moulded plastic screw fixed to door
• Letterbox numerals to be 50mm minimum high x 1.6mm thick brass/
aluminium/plastic screw fixed to front of letterbox
• Community room WC doors as for unit numerals
• Project name and numerals (if required) as for external street
numerals

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

1.9.2 Information, Direction & Prohibition Signage

Component SIGNAGE
Sub-component Advisory / Information or Prohibition Signage
Need To provide legible information and advice for people in or around the
area
Requirement • Prohibition signs (No Smoking, Electrical hazard etc) to comply with
current Australian Standards
• Either 225x300 mm (approx A4) or 300x450 mm (approx A3) –
where viewing is required at a distance of greater than 10m away
• Signs and numbers to be non reflective

Low Density Polyethylene and/or Polypropylene and/or co- mingled

plastic/wood (Recycled product)

• UV stabilised – to reduce surface whitening

• Fading and crack resistant for indoor and outdoor use
• Minimum 90% recycled product
• Non-toxic hazard
• Minimum thickness 1.5 mm
• Rounded corners with four corner mounting holes (screw fixed)

Pre Painted Sheet Steel (metal)

• Suitable for outdoor use

• Minimum BMT 0.5 mm thick;
• Rounded corners with four corner mounting holes (screw fixed with
vandal resistant screws)

Warranty Life expectancy 5-8 years

Component Requirements March 2018 57

 END OF COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS - PART 1
ASSET MAINTENANCE AND NEW CONSTRUCTION

Component Requirements March 2018 58

PART 2 – ITEMS FOR REFERENCE SPECIFICATION, FIRE SAFETY WORKS AND
SPECIAL PROJECTS

2.1 External

2.1.1 Fencing and Gates

Component FENCING AND GATES

Sub-component Fences and Gates

Need To demarcate and secure the properties boundaries. Fences and gate
must be suitable to maintain privacy, be a safe area for children, and
confine domestic animals
Requirement • To current Australian Standards

Fence heights to meet local Government regulations

• Front fencing 900mm to 1200mm

• Cut off fencing 1200 to 1800mm
• Side and Rear fencing 1800mm
• Gates to match fence cladding and height where specified

Decorative fencing

• Steel or Aluminium Tubular non climbable panels - flat or looped top

finish only, NO Spears or protruding rods
• Minimum 16mm x 0.9mm tubes - spacings approx 100mm centres
• Rails minimum 39 x 25 x 1.2mm rectangular tubing or minimum
25mm round
• Posts minimum 50 x 50mm - 450mm round minimum 1.2mm thick
• Powder Coating to AS4506
• Safety compliance to AS1926.1 for gates, hinges and locks

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 59

 Continues

Metal fencing

• Steel pre-rolled sheet - Colorbond or equivalent double sided steel

pre-painted steel complying with AS/NZS 2728: Type 3, testing
compliance to meet performance requirements within an exposed
environment for humidity, scratch resistance, impact, adhesion,
cracking and corrosion
• Fence panel made from zinc aluminium alloy coated steel complying
with AS1397-2011, G550 (550MPa minimum yield stress), AZ150
(150g/m2 minimum coating mass)
• The fence panel base material thickness is 0.35mm
• Posts and rails made from zinc alloy coated steel complying with
AS1397-2011, G500 (500MPa minimum yield stress), Z275 (275g/m2
minimum coating mass)
• Posts - Standard Channel posts 84 x 43mm, Square Corner, junction
and single gate posts 60 x 60 x 1.6, Double gate posts 65 x 65 x 2.5
installed with caps
• Rails 60 x 53 with base metal thickness of 0.8mm
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Timber Fencing

• End Post/ Gate Post/ Corner Post either Hardwood/ Treated Pine
125x125mm or Galvanised steel 75 x 75 x 2.5mm
• Intermediate posts either Hardwood 125 x 50 mm or Treated Pine
125 x 75mm
• Rails Hardwood/ Treated Pine 75 x 50 mm
• Palings Hardwood/ Treated Pine 100 x 15 either lap palings by 15
mm or close butted.
• All timber measurements ± 2mm

Warranty Minimum 3 years written warranty - decorative fencing

Minimum 10 years written warranty - metal fencing

Component Requirements March 2018 60

2.1.2 Street Furniture

Component STREET FURNITURE

Sub-component Tables and Seats

Need Present an aesthetic image whilst meeting the needs of the tenants
Requirement • Vandal proof and durable street furniture and tables for common
areas
• 98% recycled wood/plastic composite
• Recycled co-mingled wood/plastic independently tested not to crack,
splinter, rot, rust or warp
• CCA and Toxin free
• UV stabilised and Non permeable
• Fixed with vandal proof galvanised or stainless steel fixings
• Frame galvanised steel or other vandal proof material

Warranty Minimum 1 year written warranty

2.2 Roofing

2.2.1 Roof Covering

Component ROOF
Sub-component Roof Covering

Need To effectively weatherproof the dwelling, shed water, be durable and

robust
Requirement Roofing Tiles

• Concrete & Terracotta to current Australian Standards

• Installation to current Australian Standard and manufacturers written
specification

Metal Roofing

• Manufacture designed and installed to current Australian Standards

and to manufacturers written specification
• Zincalume or equivalent - minimum AZ150 coating or Colorbond
steel or equivalent
• Minimum base metal thickness 0.48mm (for standard conditions and
straight roof lines)
• Product is to be legibly and durably marked on reverse surface with
the manufacturer name and/or trademark, unique traceable identifier
and date of manufacture
• Product to meet tolerance specification of AS/NZS 1365

Warranty Minimum 25 year written warranty - Roofing tiles

Minimum 15 year written warranty - Metal roofing

Component Requirements March 2018 61

2.2.2 Sarking Vapour Barriers

Component ROOF
Sub-component Sarking/Vapour Barrier

Need To provide vapour barrier to roofs and external walls, to assist in thermal
insulation and to eliminate moisture and condensation in buildings
Requirement General

• Manufactured in accordance with AS 4200.1 and installed to

AS4200.2
• Provides required Thermal Performance in accordance with AS4859
and ICANZ
• Vapour Barrier - rated Medium to High (<2 ng/Ns)
• Water Barrier - rated high AS4200 or better than 0.5 MNs/g
• Fall arrest to meet AS4040.4

Tiled Roofs

• Low flammability and Heat Factor of 5 or less AS 1530.2

• High Tensile Strength greater than 18 kN/M in both directions
• UL2218-1998 (impact resistance) pass

Metal Decked Roofs

• When bulk insulation is laminated directly to sarking membrane the

composite product must achieve a fire hazard rating (AS 1530.3) of
o Ignitability Index 0
o Spread of Flame 0
o Heat Evolved 0
o Smoke Developed 0-1
o Tensile strength > 12kN/M in both directions

Notes

• Foil Laminates and Bubble Foil cannot be laid on top of the ceiling to
cover joists, rafters and any services. Can only be installed as
sarking on top of the roof trusses underneath the roofing
• Sarking is installed in the roof with roofing wire underneath to ensure
that sarking remains in place
• Check appropriate separation is maintained between electrical
services and installed Foil Laminates and Bubble Foil Sarking in roofs
and external walls

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 62

2.3 Internal Linings

2.3.1 Plasterboard

Component INTERNAL LININGS

Sub-component Plasterboard

Need Internal wall and ceiling lining board that is resistant to impact and
moisture and where required achieve a fire rating
Requirement Internal Lining

• To Australian Standards and installed to manufacturers specification

• Minimum13mm thick sheeting for walls
• Paper weight ≥ 220 gsm
• Density ≥ 1000kg/m³
• Tested to NCC requirements ‘Specification C1.8 Structural Tests for
Lightweight Construction’ and to achieve the following results:
• Resistance to impact NCC test method 5(c) of ≤150mm
• Resistance to indentation NCC test method 5(d) of ≤ 4.8mm
• Achieve 2 hour fire rating where required
• 100% recyclable

Internal Lining (Insulated Dry Lining Plasterboard)

• Internal Lining to AS 2588 and specification above

• Minimum 10mm Plaster board
• Insulation backing – rigid thermoset insulation – minimum product
thickness 35mm (R1.3 Insulation) to 90mm (R4.1 Insulation)
• Fibre free insulation core
• Group 1 AS3837 Fire Classification – AS1530 FRL 0/0/0
• Resistant to water vapour IS EN 12086
• Zero Ozone Depletion – CFC/HCFC free

Fire rated plasterboard – Ceilings

• To current Australian Standards

• Resistance to incipient spread of fire for a minimum FRL of 60
minutes and enables the ceiling to achieve an FRL of 60/60/60

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 63

2.4 Fire Safety Maintenance and Upgrade

2.4.1 Fire Stopping Material - Dampers

Component FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL

Sub-component Fire Dampers

Need To prevent transmission of smoke and fire across fire compartments

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Incorporate materials including, flanges, casing, blades, springs and
linkages of stainless steel or equivalent materials that comply with
relevant standards
• Achieve an FRL of -/60/60 to comply with relevant standards
• Fit required sizes and shapes
• Tested and certified by a NATA registered laboratory (specialising in
fire testing) to AS1668.1, AS1682.1, AS1682.2, AS1530.4

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

2.4.2 Fire Stopping Material - Sealants

Component FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL

Sub-component Sealants, foam and mastics

Need To prevent transmission of smoke and fire across fire compartments

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• All material must comply with the nominated properties or replicate a
system tested in accordance with AS4072.1 and AS1530.1
• Achieve an FRL of not less than that specified in the FRMPIM for the
penetrated floor/wall or ceiling assembly
• Penetrations protected by a system tested in accordance with
AS4072.1 and AS1530.1
• Installation as per manufacturers instructions
Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

2.4.3 Fire Stopping Material – Fire Pillows

Component FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL

Sub-component Fire Pillows

Need To prevent transmission of smoke and fire across fire compartments

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Suitable for sealing larger penetrations and expansion joints
• Achieve a FRL up to -/180/180 through concrete and brick walls and
floor penetrations
• Installation as per manufacturers instructions

Warranty Minimum 7 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 64

2.4.4 Fire Collar

Component FIRE SAFETY MEASURES

Sub-component Fire Collar

Need To prevent transmission of smoke and fire across fire compartments

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• To seal all pipe penetrations up to 200mm in diameter through fire
rated floor and wall components
• Maximum temperature resistance (triggers the fire collar) shall not
exceed 120° Celsius
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

2.4.5 Fire Hydrant

Component FIRE SAFETY MEASURES

Sub-component Fire Hydrant

Need To provide Fire Hydrant System into required common areas

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Installation to manufacturers specification

Warranty 5 years written warranty on all materials

1 year written warranty on all valves and pumps

2.4.6 Fire Blanket

Component FIRE SAFETY MEASURES

Sub-component Fire Blanket

Need To provide Fire Blanket into common area rooms to contain the fire into a
vessel
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Fit only where directed by the Principle
• Size to be 1.2m x 1.2m for class F fires
• Fixed permanently into the common area room kitchen wall only

Warranty 5 years written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 65

2.4.7 Fire Extinguisher

Component FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Sub-component Portable fire extinguisher with rechargeable
cylinder all types
Need To provide portable fire extinguisher for type A fires to control small fires
within residential complexes
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Fit only where directed by the Principal
• The actual cylinder to be made of a corrosion resistant metal type
component, quick pin release, pressure gauge and heavy duty metal
brackets
• The portable fire extinguishers shall be fitted with anti-discharge
device

Capacity:

• Water Type – 9 litres

• Wet Chemical – 2 to 3.5 Litres
• Carbon Dioxide – 2 to 3.5 Litres

Warranty 10 years written warranty on the cylinder

1 year written warranty on the pressure holdings

2.4.8 Fire Panel

Component FIRE PANEL

Sub-component Fire Control and Indicating Equipment

Need Early warning control system to common area residential units

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• All installation to comply with the manufacturer’s installation manual
and specification details
• To control minimum limit of 18 alarms and heat detectors per zone
• PC Software to create, edit, download, upload and back up. Uses
advanced algorithms to reduce nuisance alarms and detect
smouldering fires
• Capable of connecting to addressable smoke and heat detectors, call
points, short circuit isolators, sirens, sounders, I/O units with
monitored voltage outputs, power supplies and conventional
detectors
• Capable of linking with fire door closing system
• Lockable door to fire panel
• Vandal resistant
• Independent zone operation system

Warranty 5 years written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 66

2.4.9 Fire Hose Reel

Component FIRE HOSE REEL

Sub-component Fire Hose and Reel

Need To provide Fire Hose Reel and Fire Hose to common areas to control any
fire within residential complexes
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Fire Hose Reel (FHR) type should be fixed permanently to a structure
(with or without cabinet)
• FHR made of corrosion resistant material and vandal resistant fixings
• Centre drum spindle shall not exceed 360mm from the mounting
surface

Fire Hose

• Hose material should be non percolating hose class H (high)

• Hose to be minimum 19mm in diameter and maximum 36m length
• All fittings to be brass and to comply with the standards and water
marked

Warranty 5 years written warranty on all materials

1 year warranty on all valves

2.4.10 Fire Sprinkler System

Component FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Sub-component Fire Sprinkler System

Need To provide an important level of fire protection to the residential unit

occupants and to the building structure
Requirement • To current Australian Standards and all other associated standards
• All installations to comply with the manufacturer’s installation manual
and specification details
• Fire Sprinkler System material and equipment to meet appropriate
performance standards for operation and vandal resistance
• Pipe sizes shall be determined by full hydraulic calculation methods
• Hydraulic / wet system
• Fast and quick response system
• High velocity sprayers
• Fault monitoring system
• Corrosion resistant system

Warranty 10 years written warranty on all materials

Component Requirements March 2018 67

2.4.11 Exhaust Fans

Component PLANT ROOM OR SHAFT VENTILATION

Sub-component Exhaust Fans > 1Kw

Need To be able to provide adequate ventilation and airflow to an enclosed

plant room or shaft
Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Installed to manufacturers written specification
• Vandal resistant materials and fixings
• Ceiling or wall mounted
• Non corrosive system
• Heavy duty type product including long life ball bearing motor
• Airflow > 500m³/hour
• Quiet operation
• Turbo fans
• Duct outlet shall be made of non combustible materials
• Removable grill (Vandal Resistant)
• Installed with appropriate Dampers

Warranty 2 years written warranty on all materials

Component Requirements March 2018 68

2.5 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION (MATV)

2.5.1 Master Antenna Television System

Component MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION

SYSTEM
Sub-component Antenna

Need To provide good quality reception of digital signals

Requirement • To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark / Certified Digital Ready
• Achieve the following minimum readings at the antenna when
installed as part of a MATV system of:
• Signal level of between 50db to 80db
• Modulated Error Ratio (MER) of 25db or higher
• Post Viterbi Bit Error Rate (post Viterbi BER) of less than of equal to
2X10-4
• Noise Margin (NM) of greater than 0dB
• 2 kg loading on boom end (furthest from mount (tested over 100
cycles)
• Clam shell insulators and flat sided boom to provide element
alignment
• 12mm extruded aluminium elements to withstand weather and wildlife
• Tested to wind speed of 100 km/hr
• 1 kg loading at unsupported end of any element (tested over 100
cycles)
• UV and corrosion resistant tested in coastal area and western NSW
• ‘F’ Type connectors
• Able to easily connect Quad Shielded cable and/or Mast head
amplifier

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION

SYSTEM
Sub-component Masts, Stays, Booms

Need To secure the antenna safely and securely to the Building

Requirement Masts Stays and Booms

• To current Australian Standards

• All fixings for galvanised steel must be of a similar material or
separated to prevent galvanic reaction or corrosion
• Galvanised steel - galvanising Galvabond Z275 to at least 19 microns
of galvanising (zinc) on these items
• Booms should be powder-coated with polyester through an
automated electrostatic multistage pre-treatment process
• Samples tested and verified by an 800 hour neutral salt spray test
• Able to withstand wind of 100km/hr
Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 69

Component MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION
SYSTEM
Sub-component Amplifier

Need To enable tenants to receive television signals of adequate quality and

strength inside their homes
Requirement Mast head Amplifiers, Channelised
Amplifiers, Wide Band Amplifiers

• To current Australian Standards

• Standards Mark / Certified Digital Ready
• Achieve the following minimum readings after the amplifier when
installed as part of a digital ready MATV system of:
• Signal level of between 50db to 80db
• Modulated Error Ratio (MER) of 25db or higher
• Post Viterbi Bit Error Rate (post Viterbi BER) of less than of equal to
2X10-4
• Noise Margin (NM) of greater than 0dB
• UV stable, weatherproof housing capable of mast attachment or
surface mount
• Adjustable gain for VHF and UHF bands
• Built in lightning / static protection

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 70

Component MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
Sub-component Cable

Need To enable tenants to receive television signals of adequate quality and

strength inside their homes
Requirement Flexible cables RG6 and RG11 shall have a continuous dielectric such that the
centre conductor is in full contact with the dielectric along the entire length of
the coaxial cable

RG 11 Low Loss Quad Shield Cable

• 1.63mm/14 AWG solid copper covered steel conductor

• Enclosed in polyethylene insulation
• 2 layers of Foil tape
• 60% Aluminium braid and 40% Aluminium braid
• Black PVC outer casing
• DC requirements – current carrying capacity 5A for RG11

RG 6 Quad Shield Cable

• 1.02mm/18 AWG solid copper covered steel conductor

• Enclosed in polyethylene insulation
• 2 layers of Foil tape
• 60% Aluminium braid
• Black PVC outer casing
• DC requirements – current carrying capacity 3A for RG6
• All cable connections to be crimped or compression with appropriate F
type connectors
• Use RG6 quad core for runs of less than 50m and RG11 quad core for
runs more than 50m and for backbone cabling

Warranty Minimum 2 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 71

2.6 Tiling and Waterproofing

2.6.1 Wall Tiles

Component WALLS
Sub-component Wall Tiles

Need To provide a hard wearing, cleanable hygienic surface impervious to

water/condensation
Requirement Ceramic Wall Tiles

• First Quality to ISO 13006

• Products in compliance to AS 4586
• Vitrified or Porcelain
• Tile Thickness ≥ minimum 5.5mm
• Full glaze over face ceramic tile
• Ceramic biscuit (Bisque) must be engobed
• Surface Hardness min MOHS minimum 3 - Test Method EN101
• Extruded PVC or Aluminium tile trims on exposed edges
• Silicon seal to cupboard boundaries
• Wall tiles to extend to floor behind upright stoves
Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

2.6.2 Floor Tiles

Component FLOOR FINISHES

Sub-component Floor Tiles

Need To provide safe, healthy, hard wearing, waterproof and cleanable surface
Requirement Ceramic Floor Tiles

• First Quality to ISO 13006

• Products in compliance to AS 4586
• Vitrified or Porcelain
• Colours as appropriate and directed
• Warpage not exceeding 0.5mm for any tile batch
• Surface Hardness to MOHS minimum 6 - Test Method EN15771
• Water absorption to ISO10545-3
• Chemical resistance to ISO10545-13
• Slip resistance to current Australian Standards AS4586
• Slip rating of R11 and Pendulum test score of ‘W’ or ‘P4’ for external areas
• Slip rating of R10 and Pendulum test score of ‘X’ or ‘P3’ for internal wet
areas and internal common areas
• Slip rating of R9 and Pendulum test score of ‘Z’ or ‘P2’ for all other areas
• Tile thickness ≥ 7.0mm
• Extruded PVC or Aluminium tile trims on exposed edges

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 72

 Continues

Entrance / Exits outdoor terraces and verandas

• Unglazed quarry tiles and quarry nosing tiles to be first quality

• Comply with the requirements of ISO10545
• Used only at external locations and external doorways above the damp
proof course
• Installed with an appropriate waterproof membrane

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

2.6.3 Waterproofing

Component WATERPROOFING
Sub-component Internal Floors and Walls

Need Prevent water penetration into walls and through floors

Requirement All Housing

• Complies with AS3740 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas

Tile Junctions

• To current Australian Standards for caulked joint sealants

Wet Area Floors and Walls

• Comply to AS4858 Wet Area membrane Class III for high extensibility
• Water based (no solvent release)
• Leak Control Flanges to wastes

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component WATERPROOFING
Sub-component External Floors and Planter Boxes

Need To make external dwelling wet areas (balconies, terraces, decking, and
planter boxes) impervious to water
Requirement Waterproofing membrane must be applied in accordance with current
Australian Standards

• Satisfies tests to class III High Extensibility AS4858:2004.

• Installed to manufactures specification
• Provide certificate of installation

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 73

2.7 Paint

2.7.1 Exterior Paint

Component FINISHES
Sub-component Exterior Paint

Need To protect the underlying cladding and structure from weather and
abrasion
Requirement Paints and Primers

• 100% premium Acrylic (Waterborne or Solvent borne) paint

• Workmanship to current Australian Standards
• Colours to approved samples to current Australian Standards
• Paints and Primers conforming to appropriate APAS (Australian Paint
Approval Scheme)
• Paint specification number as per APAS Paint Specification
• Paint and Primers in sealed containers branded with the
manufacturers name, type of content and APAS approval number
• Low surface emitting product complying with APAS for low VOC

Tinting

• Pigments, tints and stains as recommended by the paint

manufacturer

Anti-Graffiti Treatments

• Registered with APAS – Able to cope with Xylene based and solvent
based graffiti
• Fire rating to AS1530.3
• Tests to ASTM D968-51

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 74

2.7.2 Interior Paint

Component FINISHES
Sub-component Internal Paint

Need To provide a cleanable surface finish that is durable and attractive

Requirement • 100% premium Acrylic (Waterborne) paint or Alkyd base Solvent-

borne or Polyurethane paint
• Workmanship to current Australian Standards
• Colours to approved samples to current Australian Standards
• Paints conforming to appropriate APAS (Australian Paint Approval
Scheme) paint specification number as per APAS Paint Specification
• Paint in sealed containers branded with the manufacturers name,
type of content and APAS approval number
• Comply to APAS specification 0215 for low VOC Interior paints
• Tinted and untinted undercoats, enamels and topcoats to achieve low
surface emitting product complying with APAS for VOC emissions

Tinting Pigments, tints and stains as recommended by the paint

manufacturer

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

2.7.3 Intumescent Paint

Component FINISHES
Sub-component Intumescent Paint

Need To increase the Fire Resistance of building components

Requirement • Fire rated to achieve a FRL of --/60/60 when applied to surfaces in

accordance with AS1530.4
• Apply paint in accordance with manufacturers specification and
guidelines for temperature and humidity
• Intumescent paint to begin to expand at a temperature not exceeding
190º Celsius
• Independent test results to be provided that indicates drying time of a
single coat of intumescent paint not less than 450 microns (without
mechanical aids) does not exceed 4 hours in any season assuming
weather conditions are appropriate to apply to the product
• Independent test detailing that the product is non toxic
• Independent test shall be provided that the product can be applied
over existing non fire retardant paint
• The product shall not contain a flashpoint

Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 75

 Continues

Internal Intumescent Paint

• Use only applicators approved and trained by the manufacturer

• Drop all light fittings so that paint is applied continuously, ensure that
they are properly refixed
• When painting ceiling cornice apply a bead of intumescent mastic to
the top and bottom of the cornice where it meets the walls
• Provide a semi-gloss over coating in wet areas
• Ensure that each coat is completely dry before applying the next
• Apply paint at a minimum dry film thickness of 1000 microns for
internal applications

External Intumescent Paint

• Use only applicators approved and trained by the manufacturer

• Clean all surfaces so that they are free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease,
mildew, mould, loose flaking paint or other foreign matter that could
impair bonding
• Record all wet film thicknesses for each coat, and record on a log
sheet
• Ensure that each coat is completely dry before applying the next
• Apply paint at a minimum dry film thickness of 1500 microns for
external applications
• Overcoat with weatherproof paint

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty

Component Requirements March 2018 76

2.8 Services

2.8.1 Commercial Water Heaters

Component WATER HEATERS COMMERCIAL

Sub-component Commercial Electric Water Heaters

Need To reliably provide hot water

Requirement • Installed to match performance of existing
• To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark / Water Mark / Water Authority Certificate of
Approval
• Extra Long Life tank (tank life more than 10 years – High grade
Stainless Steel or similar durable material
• Pressurised tank
• Dual handed connections
• Adjustable thermostat
• Automatic Over Temperature Safety Cut off
• Provide rust free water
• Durable pre-painted steel casing
• Commercial mains pressure storage

Storage

• Mains Pressure, Floor Model (Indoor / Outdoor) (250L to 600L)

Warranty Minimum 10 year written warranty (Cylinder)

Component WATER HEATERS COMMERCIAL

Sub-component Commercial Solar Water Heaters

Need To reliably provide hot water

Requirement • Installed to match performance of existing
• To current Australian Standards
• Standards Mark / Water Mark / Water Authority Certificate of
Approval
• Installation to current Australian Standards and to manufacturers
written specification. Including manufacturers recommended valves,
solar control units, sensors and circulating pump
• Natural gas or electricity boosted
• Frost protected appropriate to climate zone
• Solar Panels (hail resistant) appropriate to zone area and size of tank
• Extra Long life tank (Tank life more than 10 years – High grade
Stainless steel or similar durable material)
• Pressurized tank (either On Ground or Close Coupled)
• Dual handed connections
• Adjustable Thermostat
• Automatic Over Temperature Safety Cut Off
• Provide rust free water
• Durable pre-painted steel casing
• Commercial mains pressure storage
Continues

Component Requirements March 2018 77